This is a reproduction of a library book that was digitized

by Google as part of an ongoing effort to preserve the

information in books and make it universally accessible.

https://books.google.com
COLUMBIA LIBRARIES OFFSITE
RESTRICTED

CR00258261
 VDU

PLACxd

UNION THEOLOGI
CAL SEMINASILLE
 "I

ci !!

0101

A GRAMMAR

OF THE

ARABIC LANGUAGE .
 London : C. J. CLAY AN ) SONY
CAMBRIDGE UNIVERSITY PRESS WAITT :
AVE MARIA LANE
Glasgow : 263, ARGYLE STJ L !.T

Leipzig :: F. A. BROCKHAS
New York : THE MACMILLAN ( 4 ,";;** )
Bombay : E. SEYMOUR HA ! "
 A GRAMMAR
OF THE

ARABIC LANGUAGE ,
TRANSLATED

FROM THE GERMAN OF CASPARI ,

AND EDITED

WITH NUMEROUS ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS

BY

W. WRIGHT, LL.D.,
LATE PROFESSOR OF ARABIC IN THE UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE .

THIRD EDITION
REVISED BY

W. ROBERTSON SMITH,
LATE PROFESSOR OF ARABIC IN THE UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE

AND

M. J. DE GOEJE ,
PROFESSOR OF ARABIC IN THE UNIVERSITY OF LEYDEN .

VOLUME II .

CAMBRIDGE :
AT THE UNIVERSITY PRESS.
1898

(All Rights reserved .)

TARY OF
UNION
IL SELT
 Cambridge :
PRINTED BY J. AND C. F. CLAY
AT THE UNIVERSITY PRESS .
 E2569
BK55
C3 4 e
1896
) ‫ز‬

ADDENDA ET CORRIGENDA .

VOL. I.
PAGE

6cafter ‫ الظاء المقالة‬add : The ‫ ض‬is then called ‫الضاد المبطوح‬.

11 , 1. 1 , read : haufun.
14 D read : In combination with
‫روک‬

15n add : ‫ مدیث‬from ‫مد‬, ‫شويبة‬

19, last line, read UI
20, Rem . c, read : as ( perhaps] in the article ; comp. § 345. See
my reply to Dr Howell, in the Asiat. Quart. Rev. 1897, Vol. iii .
n . 5, p . 126 seq.
21 , l . 3 from below , read ihśăi.

30c add : Hence the use of you, excellent is he in his shooting,

giai excellent, or how excellent is he in his judging,gjé, ‫ع‬
gás ‫ط‬,
eos,
you. Comp. $ 183, rem . c.
‫ وصوب‬sugi so vé's he went up and down the valley.
32 B add : wgos :

33 after (c) add : The third form construed with the preposition
no has not unfrequently the signification of a causative of
thesixth form , as ‫ آخى بين‬heunited by brotherhood, ‫قارب بين‬
he made to be near together, etc. ( Nöldeke, Zur Grammatik,
p. 26).
34, Rem. a . Comp. man
jus and his
‫اخب‬.
Rem. 6. Comp. Ogulizi.
36 A. Giai is properly to listen, to give attention to a complaint,
ceni ili, etc. ( Nöldeke, 2. Gr. p. 28).
W. II . 6
vi ADDENDA ET CORRIGEN ...

PAGE

37c add : ‫تقدر‬.

41 c after narrow ; add :

47b add: ‫غطه ) تغطط‬.

48 , 7$ 0 , add : ‫(عفريت ) تعفرت‬.
59, Rem . 0. Fleischer, Kl. Schr. i. 368 considers ije 16 . a con
crete noun .

67, § 117*. Vollers, Zeitschr. f. Assyriologie, : ii. 1.34 futnote ultiotque

.Kor 12 ‫ معقباث‬for ‫ ) معتقباث‬: . .i4,117 ،
ch. xiiian
a proof that this form is not restricted to these verbs fucker
have a dental as second radical.

87 , Rem .a, read : ‫استطاع‬

‫نیت‬:‫ب‬,The tribe of Taiyi said ‫ با‬for ‫ رضا بقى‬1 ‫اره به روندی‬
91A add
so Hamāsa yy and comp. De Sacy , ( Hervé ii . 415
96 , Rem . a . Gahiz , Bayan i. 15, 6 and 3 fro1 } (۱۶۶ h6 ‫ ) الايهمية‬4 (.
‫الليسية‬.
98, Rem. c. On such forms as ‫ رمو‬, ‫ زو‬, ‫قو‬ sei alatt , 10 to 15
p. 30 .
98, Rem. a, delete the remark in square brackets

108 A read : ‫) بنت طبق‬Seybold(.

10, $ .195 They are called also ‫ اسماء الحدث‬، .F1 } ‫أسماء العين‬
( Hamasa 10 ).
181 A add : ‫ وفد‬.Tabari
) i 3158, 1.5(.
182 read :‫ماوكنب‬.
183 add : s's a ship (Seybold).
‫د‬
often shorten t ‫ ون‬, ‫ا؟‬s t -tially
195 )d ). The ending ‫ون‬..is
‫=ي‬
in ‫ الأشرون‬for ‫ الأشعريون‬Other ist ‫ با‬، ‫ بوده‬۲۰۰ ‫الشتممرو‬
‫الخزرجون‬.
 ADDENDA ET CORRIGENDA. vii

PAGE
‫ه رو‬

210,footnote. The plur. pauc. of fem . words is ordinarily jesí, of

masc . words die
230 c read : kóuns (Seybold ).
233 : ‫ جنید‬belongs to ‫انث‬, comp. Aram . NHN (Seybold (.
252, Reni. a, read : The suffix of the 1st p. sing. S- , when attached
etc.

253, Rem. b, read : [ Comp. Vol. ii. $ 38, , rem . b.]

271 , Rem . a. Likewise ‫ الذين‬instead of ‫للذين‬.kor'an
‫ا‬ xli, v .29
296 , Ren , C. A post allowshimself to say ‫!! ) لأمر الأرض ويل‬anasa
۰۷ ).

VOL. II.

19, Rem. 6. Hence it may be followed by a jussive in the apodosis,

‫متان‬instance
.for ‫ على نع‬Gabiz
‫ن تك‬,Malusia
‫ تكتبها ت‬,p‫لذي‬18‫ا‬,‫ت‬1.14
‫أومصيرل املنمىؤمنرقيعنة تإلكىون أن‬
bring thou a letter from me to the Prince of Believers, written
by thyself, so I will be thy debtor for two benefits.
21 , $ 9. An example of the use of the simple imperfect instead of
9

‫ن‬.with
‫گا‬ imperf.is Tabarii 2225, 1.14 ‫لا يستعين أو بغر‬
‫' في الردة ولا على الأعاجم بمرتد‬Aba Bakr did not employ
an apostate either in the war against the apostates, or in that
against the barbarians.

.D
30 . Thejussivein the verse (Sibaweih ii 402, .1 8( ‫فقلت ته صوب‬
‫و‬

‫ ولا تجهده فيدنك من أخرى القطاة فتزئق‬is explained by the

‫ا‬elision
‫تقتله‬ of ‫لا‬, for ‫ولا يدنيكولا تزنئ‬, as in ‫لا تمددها‬
footnote . Another example is Tabari i 1713, 1.6 ‫فهن‬
.second
38,
‫قانا في ذاك يغرقنا‬.
b2
viii ADDENDA ET CORRIGENDA,

PAGE

44D. The imperative is also often used by post in the philosis of

a conditional clause,as ‫ لن نلهو والهوى فتن‬: ‫ذا نته ره‬
‫ حجرا من يابس الصخر جلدا‬iif thon ۲ innlitternet
/ ۲۰۱۷ / 10pit's
/
and love, then thou art a hard stone of it in viji and T ,
ii. 1574 , last .1 ‫ ودووا كالبغايا إن خدعته‬، ‫ د‬، / : . . . .
‫سور‬

whores if ye suffer yourselves to be begri 1

121 A. We sometimes find a nominative wher've ruld expect
.accusative
, as Tab .i 2009, .1 15 ‫ جعل ودهش‬، ‫ ونسی نفس‬،،،،
he forgot to put down his own name be " -ý hurrier Genel letto ?
less, where we must supply gog.
219, .1 7, for ‫ أكثر‬read: ‫أكثر‬
237, $99.Also
. the ordinal numbers,e.g ‫ی مادی تر رجلا‬
the eleventh man ( Tab. i. 3307, 1. 1 ).
272c read : ‫هب‬
298c add : ‫ فما كانت إلا عبرا‬they were onl 100( ‫ دوم‬/ ۲۰۱۰
ii . 1197, l.1 3) .
350 seq. footnote. Prof. Hartmann has just puklon } ( 54:‫ا‬
، ‫دی‬
Strophengedicht, 1. Das Muwāśśah.”
 CONTENTS.

PART THIRD.

SYNTAX .

I. THE SEVERAL COMPONENT PARTS OF A

SENTENCE.

A. THE VERB.
PAGE

1. The States or Tenses 1

The Perfect 1

as an Optative 2

9 preceded by is 3
as the pluperf. Indic. . 4
as the pluperf. Subjunct., in two correlative
hypothetical clauses, after y, etc. 6

after 15 9

after ‫إن‬ 14
in two correlative conditional clauses, after
, etc. 15

after ‫ما الديمومة‬. 17

The Imperfect Indicative 18

The Latin and Greek Imperfect, ‫كان يفعل‬ 21

The Future -Perfect,, ‫يكون (قد() فعل‬. 22

X CONTENTS .
PAGE

The Imperfect Subjunctive 22

The Jussive, after and is 22

in two correlative conditional clauses, after
s!, etc. 23
The Energetic 24

2. The Moods 24

The Subjunctive 24

The subjunctive after ‫ أن‬, ‫ أن لا‬or ‫أ‬, and ‫ تن‬. 25

after , ‫ کی‬, .etc 28

after ‫حلى‬ 29

after ‫في‬ 30
after s 32

after 33

after i
‫او‬ 33

after ‫ إذا‬or ‫إذن‬ 33

The Jussive 35

after j 35

after ný 36

in two correlative conditional clauses, after

36
‫ܪ‬% !, etc..
> after and is 41

The Energetic of the Imperfect 41

after j . 41

in prohibitions ( with Ý), wishes, and

questions 42
in the apodosis of two correlative con
ditional clauses . 42

in the protasis of a sentence, after 6 43

20
after etc. 43

as a negative imperative, with ý . 43

The Energetic of the Imperative . . 44

 CONTENTS . xi
PAGE

3. · The Government of the Verb . 44

(a) The Accusative 45

(a) The Objective Complement in the Accusative 45

Two Objective Complements in the Accusative . 47

The Accusative of the jacs,

‫ مصدر‬etc.,as the absolute
object, ‫ المفعول المطل‬. 53

Construction of the Objective Complement and of

the Subject with the Nomen Actionis 57

Use of J with the Genitive to express the Objec

tive Complement of the Nomen Actionis 61
Government of the Nomina Agentis or Participles . 63

Use of u with the Genitive to express the Objec

tive Complement of the Participles 68
Construction of Verbal Adjectives 70

Construction of Comparatives and Superlatives of

the form ‫أفعل‬ 71
The Accusative after a Verb which is understood . 72

‫التحذير والإغراء‬ . 74

‫الاختصاص‬ 76

The Accusative after ‫ تبين أن إإثن‬,

‫ إن كان‬. 78

after ‫ ليت‬, ‫ تعل‬. 82

83
after ‫واو المعنية) و‬
The Vocative 85

after ‫أ‬, ‫يا‬, etc., expressed by the

Nominative . 85

after ‫أ‬, ‫يا‬, etc., expressed by the

Accusative 85
‫لے‬
> after ‫ أيها‬or ‫ يا أيها‬. 92

after ‫ وا‬. 93
94
The Accusative after ,used ‫في الجنس‬
xii CONTENTS .

PAGE

(B) The Adverbial Complement 98

The Predicate of ‫كان‬ 99

of the ‫أخوات كان‬ 101

The Predicate of lo and Ý, when = ‫لیس‬ 104

of ‫ إن النافية‬and of ‫لات‬ 105

The Construction of the ‫أفعال المقاربة‬ . 106

The Adverbial Accusative of Time . 109

of Place 111
of State or Condition,
‫الحال‬ . 112
of Cause or Reason 121
‫ور‬ of Limitation or De
termination 122

Construction of ºs ,
‫أي‬, and lis
‫دا‬ 125

۱‫و‬ of Comparison . 128

(b) The Prepositions 129

The Simple Prepositions 129

‫من‬ 129

‫من = متى‬ 131

‫ من‬after Comparative Adjectives 132

139

144
‫?ة‬3.

. 146

147

‫الاشتغاثة‬ 152
153
156
‫ رد‬:(

164
"0
 CONTENTS . xiii
PAGE

‫لدى تدن‬ 165

39
1233:
166

‫ مذ منذ‬. 173

175

175
176

178

178

180

180

182

182

182

186

186

187

187

187

187

188

‫وسط‬ 188

The Compound Prepositions 188

‫من بين‬, .etc . 188

‫من عن‬, .etc 190

Prepositions in connection with a following Clause . 192

193
‫ ما‬redundant after ,
‫عن من‬, and
Omission of the Preposition before gi and ‫ن‬i‫ا‬ 193
xiy CONTENTS .

B. THE NOUN.
PAGE

1. The Nomina Verbi or Actionis, Agentis, and Patientis 193

2. The Government of the Noun.

The Status Constructus and the Genitive 198

‫صاحب رو‬, .etc 203

::

. 204
::2:

206

‫عامة‬ 206

‫ سائر‬. 206

207

208

209

210

211

‫مدار قدر‬. 211

211

212

212
‫كلان‬, ‫كلاين‬
‫بز‬

214
‫س‬

)‫(واو رب‬, ‫في‬, ‫بل‬ 216

‫أفعل‬.superlative 218
‫هو‬
‫ ای‬, ‫اية‬ 220

A Clause,introduced by ofit or lá,

Ló as a Genitive 220

The Genitive of Restriction or Limitation , after Par

ticiples and Adjectives : 221
Interposition of a Word between the Status Constructus
and the Genitive 222

1
 CONTENTS . XV

PAGE

A Genitive in Apposition to a Relative Adjective

in ‫می‬ 225

Definite and Indefinite Annexation 225

Construction of ‫ أفعل‬as a Superlative . 226

The Genitive of the Material 229

Apposition of the Material. 229
The Genitive Construction in place of Apposition 231

3. The Numerals.
The Cardinal Numbers from 3 to 10 . 234

‫أحاثدنتان‬.
‫ اوثنااحند‬and 236

236
,
from 11 to 99 237
237

‫) مائة‬100 ( and ‫ ) ألف‬1000 ( 238

Compound Numbers 239

Agreement of the Cardinal Numbers in Gender with the
Nouns denoting the objects numbered 240
When the Cardinal Numbers are determined or definite . 243

Construction of the Ordinal Numbers with the Genitive . 245

Dates 248
The Days of the Month 248

II. THE SENTENCE AND ITS PARTS.

A. THE SENTENCE IN GENERAL,

1. The Parts of a Sentence . 250

The Subject and Predicate 250

256
‫ رابط‬or Connecting Pronominal Suffix
The buiſ
The ‫ضمير الفصل‬ or Pronoun of Separation 259

When the Inchoative or Subject of a Nominal Sen

tence may be an Indefinite Noun . 260
xvi CONTENTS.
PAGE

The ‫ ضمير التأكيد‬or Emphatic Pronoun 265

1

Use of ‫ كان‬, ‫يون‬, in a Nominal Sentence 266

The Subject not specified . . 266

Personal form . 267

Impersonal form 268
The Complements of the Subject and Predicate 271
Reflexive pronominal Suffixes 271

‫نفس‬, ‫عين‬, etc., as reflexive objects 272

Appositives , ‫التوابغ‬ 272

The Adjective . 273

Substantives 274

276
‫ما الإبهامية‬
276
) ‫ ما هو (هي) هو (هي ) ما هو (هي‬.
Demonstrative Pronouns . 277

,
‫عامة جميع كل‬ . 278

‫اجم‬, ‫جمعاء‬ 278

279
‫أتع‬, ‫أبيع‬, ‫ أبتع‬.
‫ كلاين‬, ‫نصف كلاين‬ 280

‫نفس‬, ‫عين‬ 280

‫الأكيد‬, the Corroboration 282

‫ العت‬or ‫الصف‬, the Qualificative or Adjective 283

‫البدل‬, the Permutative 284

286
‫عطف البيان‬, the Explicative Apposition
Apposition of Verbs 287

2. Concord in Gender and Number between the Parts of a

Sentence 288
In Verbal Sentences 288
In Nominal Sentences 296
 CONTENTS. xvii

B. THE DIFFERENT KINDS OF SENTENCES.

PAGE

1. Negative and Prohibitive Sentences . 299

‫لا‬ 299

‫ تن‬. 300

‫تم‬, ‫ها‬ 300

‫ ما‬. 300

‫إن النافية‬ 300

‫تیس‬ 302

‫ و‬after ‫ا‬,‫ لهم م‬, ‫ا‬,‫تن ته‬, or ‫لتییسش‬ 303

ý with the Perfect, as a Future . 304

>> as an Optative 304

vý redundant after verbs meaning to forbid, fear, etc.,

followed by ‫ أن‬with the Subjunctive ) ‫أو أن‬ 304

Omission of ý in Denial by oath, and its Insertion in

Asseveration 305

V in Prohibitions, with the Jussive and Energetic 306

2. Interrogative Sentences 306

. 306

‫او رام‬ 306

‫مل‬. 308

‫أما ألا‬ 309

‫ا‬, ‫د‬,‫توما تود م‬ 310

‫ ما من‬. 311

‫أي‬, ‫أية‬ 315

3. Relative Sentences 317

Definite and Indefinite . 317

The Connecting Pronoun, ‫ العائد‬or ‫الراجع‬ 319

‫الذي‬ 320
xviii CONTENTS .
PAGE

4. Copulative Sentences 325

‫في و‬ 325

vý; after a preceding negative 327

The Conflict in Government, ‫النازع في العمل‬ 327

‫واو الحالي‬, the Waw of the state or Circumstance 330

5. Adversative, Restrictive, and Exceptive Sentences 333

‫ لا‬. 333

‫نين‬, ‫تين‬ 333

‫بل‬ 334

335

335

‫غير‬. 340

341
‫سوی‬
‫لا‬ ‫ما عدا ما‬ 341
.‫و‬

‫حاشی‬ 342

‫لا يكون ليس‬. 343

‫ لا سيما‬. 344

Conditional and Hypothetical Sentences . 345

introducing the Apodosis of a Conditional Sentence 345

347
‫ إن‬, ‫ تو‬.
348
‫ إن تو‬.
j introducing the Apodosis of a Hypothetical Sentence . 348
 CONTENTS xix

PART FOURTH.

PROSODY .

I. THE FORM OF ARABIC POETRY .

PAGE

A. The Rhyme 350

B. The Metres 358
Ragèz 362
Sarī: 362
Kāmil 362
Wāfir . 363
Hazeg . 363
Mutèkārib 363
Tawil . 364
Mudāri : 364
Mutèdārik 365
Bèsīt 365
Munsariḥ 366
Muktadab 366
Ramèl . 366
Mèdid . 367
Hafif . 367
Mugtétt . 368

II. THE FORMS OF WORDS IN PAUSE AND

RHYME . 368

III. POETIC LICENSES 373

Affections of the letter i 374

Irregularities in the use of the Tèśdid 377
Uncontracted Forms for Contracted ones 378
Suppression of final j in some Nominal and Verbal forms 379
Other Letters, and even Syllables, dropped 380
Lengthening of a Short Vowel in the middle of a word 382
Shortening of a Long Vowel . 383
XX CONTENTS .
PAGE

Suppression of a Short Vowel 384

Addition of a Final Short Vowel to some Verbal Forms and 1
Particles 385
Irregular Use of the Tènwin and other Case-endings 387

Suppression of the Tènwin . 388

‫ين‬- for ‫ دين‬in the Genitivo Plural of Nouns 388

Irregularities in Verbs and Nouns derived from Radicals

tertie ‫ و‬vel ‫ی‬. 389
Pausal Forms out of Pause 390

1
1

1
 PART THIRD .
SYNTAX

I. THE SEVERAL COMPONENT PARTS OF A SENTENCE.

A. THE VERB.

uu 1. The States or Tenses.

1. The Perfect, smörbai (Vol. i., S 77, 79), indicates :

> A

(a) An act completed at some past time ( the historic tense, the
Greek aorist, German imperfect, and English past); as j sto
then came Zeid; vw atá ligadas they sat down at the door.
(6) An act which, at the moment of speaking, has been already
completed and remains in a state of completion (the Greek, German
and English perfect); as ‫ أذكروا نعمتي التي أنعمت عليم‬bemindful
of my favour, which I have bestowed upon you.
(c) A past act, of which it can be said that it often took place B
or still takes place -- a use of the perfect which is common in proverbial
expressions, and which the Greek aorist also has ; as ‫روت الرواة‬
relaters say (hace handed it down by oral tradition from one to
another ); úgjede a commentators are agreed ( have agreed and
still agree ).
( d) An act which is just completed at the moment, and by the
very act, of speaking ; as ‫ الشديد شيلة‬I conjure thee by God ; ‫بث‬
via I sell thee this.
W. II . 1
 2 PART THIRD . — Syntax. [S 1

A (e) An act, the occurrence of which is so certain , that it may

be described as having already taken place. This use prevails in
promises, treaties, bargains, &c. , and after the particle ý not, especially
‫حتى تخرج‬s;‫ا‬a8‫مفاأعأطنتاينالاأكمابنه عولمىا ت تريتن إومأامأنثكت قعبلنت أذان‬
‫من بل‬or asseveration
in‫ادك‬oaths
give us, therefore, an assurance of safety on one of two conditions,
either that thou wilt accept (lit. hast accepted) what we propose to thee
(lit. that wherewith we are come to thee ), or that thou wilt keep (it)
B secret and refrain (lit. hast kept it secret and refrained ) from doing us
any harm ,tillwegetout of the country ; ‫ والله لا أقمت بمكة‬by God,
‫ پ‬certainly not remain in Makka ; ‫البيت لا امرتني الخمر ما‬
I‫ی‬shall
Gamisegj Bitó I swear (that) wine shall not make me
intoxicated, as long as my soul remains in my body.
REM. &. When a clause commencing with yÝ is connected with
C a previous clause beginning with to followed by the perfect, or
followed by the jussive, in that case v does not give to the fol
lowing verb in the perfect the sense of the future, because it merely
supplies the place of these particles ; as ‫نی ما قتلت ابنك هوا ولا‬
‫ عمدا و جعلت هامته بسیفی غمدا‬Ihavenot killed thy son either
inadvertently or designedly, nor have I made his skull a sheath for
my sooord ; ‫تلوث من العجائب ما لم يره الراؤون ولا رواه الررااوون‬
I have experienced such wonderful things as neither seers have seen ,
D nor narrators have narrated .

[REM. 6. Instances of the perfect retaining its original nieaning

after a single ý are extremely rare . In later prose, however, we
often find jij ný he did not cease, he continued ( to do) employed
just as ‫ ما زال‬or ‫یزل‬.Fleischer
‫) تم‬ , K. Sehr. i. 446 seg ([
(f) Something which we hope may be done or may happen.
Hence the perfect is constantly used in wishes, prayers, and curses ;
as
‫ رحمه الله تعالی‬may God (who is exalted above all)havemercy on
§ 2] The Verb . - 1. The States or Tenses. 3

him ! ació óls may his reign be long! blus les may I be made A
thy ransom ! beti ere mayest thou avoid execration (a formula used
in addressing the ancient Arab kings) ! ati slió God curse thee !
The proper signification of the perfect in this case is, “ if it be as I
wish, God has already had mercy on him ; ” & c. The perfect has this
sense also after 5);
ý as lead
ljós to onemo ý may you never meet with
harm , as long as you live ! íg á ý may thy teeth (lit.mouth) not
be broken ! (neg. of the phrase ju ali vás).When a conditional
clause precedes the optative, the particle ; must be prefixed to the B
latter, in order that the influence of the conditional particle in the
former may not extend to it ; as ‫إن كنت أبن همام بيت بإكرام‬
if thou art ' Ibn Hammām (lit. the son of Hammām ), mayest thou be
saluted with honour !

REM. After the name of God, such perfects as ‫تبارك وتعالی‬

‫ جل وعلا عز وجل وتعالی‬, and the like, are not optative but
declarative or assertory ; as ( is Cc
‫ قال الله تبارك وتعالی‬God (toho
blessed and exalted above all) hath said — [Comp. Vol. i. $ 50,
a.]
rem . a.

2. The perfect is often preceded by the particle is (Vol. i. ,

$ 362, z ). When this is the case, if the perfect has either of the meanings
mentioned in § 1, b and d, it now implies that the act is really finished
and completed just at the moment of speaking. Its completeness may
consist either (a) in the removal of all doubt regarding it, in its perfect
certainty as opposed to uncertainty ; or (b) in its having taken place D
in agreement or disagreement with what preceded it, in accordance
or non -accordance with what was, or might be, expected, or just a
‫لباقين‬beforethetime
little ‫در هاهنا وزارة ا‬of‫ن‬speaking
‫منصور و‬.‫ال‬For
‫أيام‬example
‫قد ذكرنا خوازالردة بجنوهبمومة في‬
w we have
already spoken of the vizirate of their grandfather Hālid’ibn Barmèk
in the reign of el-Manşūr, and we will here speak of the vizirates of
the rest in this example the just completed act is contrasted with the
 4 PART THIRD . – Syntax. [$ 3

A future one(;; ‫ قد قامت الصلوة‬the (timeof) prayer is come; ‫إن ابنتك‬

bló is thy daughter is, as was expected , dead, or thy daughter is
WE

just dead ; ‫ أما الولاية فقد وليت ابنك مصر‬as regards the post of
governor, I appoint thy son governor of Egypt (S 1, d) ; Cic; as jlá
> >

Syedyour is já sjó he said to him, Thou didst promise this, and

he replied, I now really fulfil what I promised.

Rem. a. i immediately precedes the verb, as in the above

B examples, and can be separated from it only by an oath or assever
as ‫ قد والله أحسنت‬by God,thou hast done acell ; ‫قد تمري‬
ation ; a8
bivalne by my life, I have passed the whole night awake.
. b ‫ قد‬is called by the grammarians ‫ حرف التوقع‬the
.REM
particle of expectation, and is said to be used in sy to indicate
perfect certainty, or year is now you at to approximate the
past to the present.

C 3. The Pluperfect is expressed :

(a) By the simple perfect, in relative and conjunctive clauses* ,
that depend upon clauses in which the verbs are in the perfect; as
‫ عرضحيعثليهجملسما أأمبروهبه المأمون‬he kid beforethem sohat Al-Ma'man had
ordered ; but into someone into he sat where his father had sat ;
‫ فلما وصل الور إلى الموضع فوتی هایما‬and after the bullhad cometo
the place,he turned his back in flight ; ac inLoi ja se nii he fled
D after his kinsmen had been killed .
(Rem. Whether the perfect in these clauses has the meaning of
• the pluperfect, must in every single case be decided by the context,
or by the nature of things. It may indicate a time identical with,
and even posterior to, that indicated by the perfect in the clause

* By a relative or conjunctive clause we mean a clause that is

joined to a preceding one by means of a relative pronoun or a con
nective particle.
 The Verb . - 1. The States or Tenses. 5
$ 3]

which it depends. E ‫ تنها از موسی من مضر بني إسرائيل‬A

..upon
‫ إلى اليه بش يوسف وحمله معه في ايه‬tohen Moses tent forth
from Egypt with the Bènū ' Isrā'īl to the desert, he disinterred Joseph
and carried his remains with him through the desert ; jsi
‫ره‬

‫ ومعناه حضرته الوفاة سألوه أن يجعل تتم ئيشا‬when he became

unbound , i.e. was dying, they asked him to give them a chief.]
)b) By the perfect with the particle ‫قد‬, preceded by ‫ و‬or without
it, provided the preceding clause is one which has its verb in the B
perfect ; as ‫ أخرجه وقد می‬he led him out blinded (lit. and he had
been blinded (; ‫ بكر إلى الفضل فوجده قد بكر إلى دار الرشيد‬he went
early in the morning to el- Fadl, and found that he had gone still
earlier to the palace of 'ar -Raśīd (lit. and found him, he had already
) The clauses with it
gone early). ‫ وق‬are clauses expressing a
‫ قد‬and ‫د‬its
state or condition ) ‫( حال‬.
)c) By the verb ‫ ځان‬to be, prefixed to the perfect ; as ‫و مات‬
‫الرشید بطوس وكان خرج إلى خراسان محاربة رافع بن الليث‬
'ar - Rasid died at Țūs, after he had set out (lit. and he had set out)
for Horāsān to combat Rāfi' 'ibn el-Lèit. These clauses also express
the state ) ‫(الحال‬.
)d ) By ‫ ځان‬and the perfect , with the particle ‫ قد‬interposed ;
as
‫ كنت قد ربيت جارية وعلمتها ثم أهديتها إلى الفضلي‬I had brought
up and educated a female slave ; I then presented her to el- Fadl. D
Sometimes the particle is placed before both verbs, instead of
between them ; as ‫يروى أن رسول الله صلعم قال لعائشة رحها وقد‬
‫ كقائنثت ندرت أن تعتق قوما من وتير إشعيل الخ‬there is a tradition
that the Apostle of God (God bless him and grant him peace !) said to
‘A’isa (God have mercy on her !), after she had rowed (lit. and she
already had vowed) to set free some persons of the children of Ishmael,
&c.
 6 PART THIRD.Syntada. ] S ‫به‬
A REM . a . When one of two or more pluperfects is anterior to
the rest in point of time, it is indicated by means of the particle
‫ قد‬, the others having merely ‫ ; گان‬as ‫مات الرشید بطوس وكان‬
‫خرج إلى خراسان يحاربة رافع بين الليث وكان رافع هذا قد خرج‬
‫ وخلع الطاعة وتغلب على سمرقند‬ar-Rasad died at Tas, after he
had set out for Horāsān to combat Rāfi' 'ibn el- Lèit, who had rebelled
(lit. and this Rafi' had already rebelled ), and cast off his allegiance,
and taken forcible possession of Samarkand.
B [REM. 6. Between us and the perfect a conjunctive clause
may be interposed,as ‫كان لها بلغ صلاح الدین خبر العدو جمع‬
‫مهر‬
Elgo y when the information about the enemy had reached Şalāh
ed -din, he had assembled the êmīrs.]
4. (a) If two correlative clauses follow the hypothetical particles
‫ من تو أن من تو‬that, ‫ توما تود‬and ‫ توئه‬: not (Vol. i., $367, 0)*, the
verbs in both clauses have usually the signification of our pluperfect
subjunctive or potential, though occasionally too of our imperfect
C subjunctive or potential. For instance : ‫تو ان فيهما اله إلا الله‬
tímás if there had been in them (heaven and earth) gods besides God,
theywould surely have gone to ruin ; ‫تو شاء ربة تجعل الناس أمة واحدة‬
if thy Lord had chosen , He would surely have made (all) mankind one
‫ر يدلع‬
people ; ‫ليش الذين تو تركوا من خلفهم ذرية ضعافا خافوا عليهم‬
and let those fear (God), who, if they should leave ( or were to leave)
behind them weak offspring, would hace fears for them (or would be
D afraid on their account(: ‫ولو أن أهل القرى آمنوا واتقوا فتحنا عليهم‬
‫ بركات من الماء والأرض‬and if thepeople of those touns had
believed and feared ( Us), We would have surely bestowed upon them
blessings from heaten and earth ; ) ‫لو كنت من مازين تم تستبيح إبلي‬
* The protasis of a sentence, when introduced by yogj, although
it may not have a verb actually expressed, yet includes a verbal idea,
viz , that of the verb ‫كان‬
$ 4] The Verb. - 1. The States or Tenses. 7

if I had been one of ( the tribe of ) Māzin , they (the enemies) would not A
have carried ofmycamels ; ‫وقال غد أما والله تو أن ہبیي قوة ما أقوى‬
‫مر‬

‫على النهوض تشبعت مني في أقطارها وسکها زئيرا يجرك وأصحابك‬

‫ أما والله إذا لألحق بقوم كنت فيهم تابعا غير مثبوع‬and Said said :
verily, by God, if I had some strength left that I were able to rise, thou
wouldst hear from me a roaring in its (*El-Medina's) quarters and
streets, that would drive thee and thy comrades into your holes, and by
God, I would remove thee to a tribe where thou wouldst be a follower,
not followed ; ‫ تو قوم حديثو عهد بكفر ست البيت على قواعد‬B
‫ إبراهيم‬had not thy people ceased recentlytobe in a state of infidelity,
I‫ما‬could
‫تهم م‬surelyraise
‫لرحمن بيو‬the
‫ر با‬house
‫ن يق‬on ‫م‬thefoundationsof
‫ة واحدة تجعلنا‬Ibrahim
‫وليولوانأنأ;لا أم‬
asi Lo and were it not that all mankind would have become a single
people ( of unbelievers), We would certainly have given to those who
‫ فضل‬ving
believe not in the Merciful roofs ofsilver to their houses;) ati ját ‫تولا‬
‫ر‬
‫ عليكم ورحمه لاتبعتم الشيطان إلا قلیڈ‬had itnot been forthe goodness C
of God towards you and His mercy, ye would surely have followed
Satan ,( all) save a few ; jak sú isto joj
‫رع‬
had it not been for ‘Alī,
‫ره‬

Omar acould surely have perished ; ‫ تولا أنتم تا مؤمنين‬had it not

been for you ,wewould surely have been believers ; ‫تورك هذا العام تم‬
I
‫ أخجج‬had itnot been for thee,Iwould nothave goneon pilgrimage
this year
)‫ أخجج‬in rhyme for ‫[] (أحجج‬With ‫ قد‬inserted in both
clauses ‫ توقد مات أمير المؤمنين لقد باعث فلائا‬ifthe Prince of the D
faithful were dead, I would swear allegiance to So -and -so ; or only
intheprotasis ‫وقد را كل من مع مونس انصرفوا عنه وتوه وحده‬
if all that are with Mūnis had seen thee, they would surely turn away
from him and leave him alone. ] — (6 ) Occasionally us is placed
between and the perfect in the protasis of the sentence, and
 8 PART THIRD - Syntax. [S 4

A sometimes úls is repeated before the perfect in the apodosis. If

this be the case, the signification of the verbs in both clauses is always
and necessarily that ofthe pluperfect ; as ‫تونت علمت ذلك لضربتك‬
if I had known this, I would have beaten thee ; ‫لو كانوا عرفوها لها‬
‫ ممن كانوا صلبوا رب المجد‬they had know it, they trould not have
crucified the Lord of glory.- (c) If the verb of the protasis be an
imperfect, and that of the apodosis a perfect, both must be translated
B by theimperfect subjunctive or potential ; as ‫تو نشاء أصبناهم بذنوبهم‬
if we pleased ,wecould smite them for their sins ; ‫تو نشاء جعلناه أجاجا‬
if we pleased , we could make it salt water. [If the verb of the protasis
be an imperfect preceded by us and that of the apodosis a perfect,
both may be rendered by the pluperfect subjunctive or by the
imperfect subjunctive,as ‫تو كانوا يؤمنون بالله والنبي وما أنزل إليه ما‬
‫ من اخذوهم أولياء‬they had believed in God and His prophet and in
what has been revealed to him, they would not have taken them for
C friends; ‫در تجاك ما أصابك الحذر‬ ‫تو ان ينجي من الردی‬
if caution could save from death, surely the caution (of thy friends)
would have saved thee from what has befallen thee (ké in rhyme
for ‫( حذر‬.[
REM . a. The apodosis of ‫ جواب تو ) تو‬the anster , complement,
or correlative of lau) is frequently omitted , when the context
readily suggests it; as ‫ولو أن قرائا يرث به الجبال أو قطعت به‬
‫ الأرض أو ځلم به الموتی‬and in themountains could be made to
move by a Kor'ān, or the earth be cleft in pieces by it, or the dead be
addressed by it, .... (scil,. it could be by this For'an(;; ‫تو أن‬
‫ پی به قوة أو آوي إلى څڼ شدید‬Iwere amatch foryou in
strength, or could have recourse to a powerful clan or party, or to a
mighty chieftain, scil. Itold resistyou (; ‫ما توقفت حتی‬
‫ تری مقدار ربنا وصبرا ولو ځا ببواطنا معه‬I have delayed only
until thou couldst see the extent of our forces and of our endurance ;
$ 5] The Verb . - 1. The States or Tenses. 9

A
and if we had been with him with our hearts (heart and soul),
‫ن‬scil
‫يتو‬,‫لز‬we
‫ر با‬should
‫المشهو‬have
‫عليها‬defeated
‫ المطل‬gone
‫ل لها‬long
‫لمقاب‬ago
‫والوشرلفم إيلاكنم لوهاضعمنالش;ر(ف ا‬

‫ الكثير الممتد فراسخ في فراسخ‬and if it (Seville)possessednoother

glory but the place, called Axarafe, opposite to and overhanging it,
famous for its numerous olive-trees, (and ) stretching leagues by
leagues, .... ).
scil this toould be enough for it, ‫تتكقفيی‬or ‫(تكفاها‬.
[Rem. 6. The verb expressed or understood in a clause pre
ceded by yg even if, though, has the same signification as that of B
the clause to which it is annexed,as ‫أعطوا السائل ولو جاء على فرس‬
give to thebeggar,thoughheshould comeon horseback ; ‫لا أرجع عن‬
‫ار رأی دامی‬-I ‫ مامی وتو ط‬willnot retractmy ‫ظلف‬promise
‫ا وتو ب‬ofpro
‫تصدقو‬
tection , even if my head should fly before me ;
‫ محرق‬give alms,though it be only a burnt hoof : ‫ایتنی بدابة ولو‬
bloo bring me a beast to ride upon, even if it should be) an ass
)$ 41, .rem6(; ‫و رفع إليه شتوى المظلومين فينصفهم وتو من وتيره‬
the complaints of the wronged were brought before him, and he
obtained justice for them , even from his own son ; ‫إن آلمت حيوانا‬
‫ ولو أدنى أتي فأنت ملعون‬ir thout causest an animalpain ,houseper
little, thou art cursed.]

5. After 15! when, as often as (Vol. i., $ 367, b), the perfect is
usually said to take the meaning of the imperfect, the future act
being represented as having already taken place ; as ‫ أجيد إذا أحمر‬D
‫ البشر‬Iaik cometo thee when the unripe datesbecomered ; ‫استجيبوا‬
‫ بله والرسول إذا دعاكم لما يحييكم‬espond to God and to the Apostle,
when he calls you to that which can give you life. - Consequently, if
the particle 15 or ló lá be followed by two correlative clauses, the first
of which extends its conversive influence to the verb of the second,
the verbs have in both clauses either a present or a future significa
W. II , 2
 10 PART THIRD. - Syntax. [S 5

A tion. For example : ‫ فإذا جاء وعد الآخرة جئنا بكم لفيفا‬and nohen
the promised term of the future life comes (or is come, or shall have
come),wewill bring you all together (to judgment(; ‫أثم إذا ما وقع‬
‫ آمنتم به‬authen it (the punishment ) falls (upon you ), atill ye believe it
then ? ‫ إذا رأض يحيى الأمر ذلت صعابه‬when Yahya takes the matter
in hand, its difficulties are easily overcome. In such cases the Latin
requires the future - perfect in the first clause, and the future in the
second. The imperfect is sometimes used instead of the perfect in the
B protasis or apodosis ; as ‫ وإذا تثتنلىى عليهم آياتنا قالوا قد شبعنا‬and
achen our
‫در‬
terses areread to them ,they say,Wehave heard; ‫أنا إذا‬
‫ دعی نزال إلى الوغى رأيتهم رجلی كأنه ركب‬men whom , when the
shout of ' Alight for the fray' is raised, you see on foot ( ‫ہ‬looking
‫ر‬
as
tall) as if (they were) riding ) ‫ ركب‬in rhyme for ‫وإذا رأيتهم ; (رب‬
‫ تعجبك أجسامهم‬and cohen thou seest them , their bodiesmake thee
marvel. Occasionally too the imperfect occurs in both clauses ; as
) ‫وإذا تتلى عليهم آياتنا بينات تغير في وجوه الذين كفروا المنكر‬
and when our verses are read to them as clear proofs, thou discernest
displeasure in the faces of those noho disbelieve; ‫فاذا ترول ترول عن‬
‫مميط تخشى بوادره على الأقران‬and then it (ill fortune) departs,
it departs from a proud hero, whose sudden fits of passion are dreaded
‫و د‬ ‫ر‬ ‫م‬

bykia rioals; ‫ والنفس راغبة إذا رغبتها وإذا رڈ إلى قليلي تفتع‬thesoul is
‫ترد‬
desiring much, ifyou give her what she wishes,] and when she is reduced,
D or restricted,to a little, she is content.—If a clause dependent on 15 is
introduced by such a perfect as ús or jló,
, the verb governed in the
perfect by
.is‫ إذا‬likewise a historical perfect ; e.g ‫كان إذا تعلم أبلغ‬
aohen he spoke,he spoke eloquently ; ] ‫وذكر بعض أهل العلم أن رسول‬
‫ الله ك‬somelearnedmenu say
‫رت الصلاة خرج إلى شعاب مكة‬the‫حض‬time‫ إذا‬of‫ان‬prayer
that the Apostle of God, when had come, went to the
mountain-roads of Mekka. Here also the imperfect is sometimes
$ 5] The Verb . - 1. The States or Tenses. 11

used in the protasis or apodosis, as ‫ فن إذا سلمت عليه لا يصل‬A

‫ رأسي إلى قوه‬andwhen I saluted him ,myhead did not reach to his
aaist ; ‫ وكان إذايوأجاد وأرما‬and then hebestowed raiment,he ‫ش‬

did it in a liberal and generousmanner ; ‫وكان الملاح إذا عبر أحدا‬

‫ في شفيته من جانب الى جانب يأخد أجرته سوارا من ذهب‬and the
skipper, when he had conveyed a person in his vessel from the one to the
other side, got for pay a bracelet of gold .] If the clause introduced by
is stands in the middle of a narrative of past events, the perfect has B
also the sense of the historical perfect, as, ‫فجعل صاحب الخيل‬
‫در‬

‫ »يشد منهم الزمرة بواح أصحابه فإذا جمعوهم قتلوهم‬dthecaptain

of the cavalry began to drive together parties of them by the spears of
his men ; and when they had collected them , they killed them ;
‫ المعتصم طبيب الأخلاق له إذا غضب لا يبایی من قتل وما فعل‬-El
Mu'taşim was good -tempered, but when he was angry, he cared not
achon ‫لى وجه‬,nor
‫الأرض‬hekiled ‫ولا تت‬he‫نا‬did‫و أمنكنراوجنمحينع فميا لنقازوفيين سإذراادجيابء النلاليلفي;تور‬
‫رك ع‬what
I remember whilst we were in ķazwin, when night came, we
brought all our things in the cellars of our houses and did not leave
anything on the floor.]
.REM ‫ه‬.
The use of ‫ إذا‬as a conjunction arises in reality out of
its original meaning as a temporal demonstrative ( see Vol. ii. ,
$ 367,b). Like ‫وقت جین‬, ‫يوم‬, etc. (see $ 78(, ‫ إذا‬is an accusative D
in the construct state, and governs a following verbal clause vir
tually in the genitive *. Under these circumstances, the actions
both of the defining clause, introduced by 11, and of the clause
defined by it, are such as would be appropriately expressed by the
imperfect indicative. These two clauses being in correlation, and
that which is logically primary ( the defined clause) becoming
syntactically secondary (the apodosis ), either action may - without
*
[Comp. however Fleischer, Kl. Schr. i. 113, note 1. ]
 12 PART THIRD . - Syntax. [$ 5
А reference to their temporal relation to one another or to other
actions - be regarded either (a) as beginning or in progress, or
(B) as completed and done. In the one case the imperfect will be
used, in the other the perfect. As a rule, however, the language
has preferred either to represent the action of the defining clause
(or protasis) alone by the perfect ; or else, which is more common,
the actions of both the correlative clauses by the perfect, that of
the apodosis being, as it were, conditioned and postulated by that
of the protasis. But to what period of time these correlated actions
belong,—whether the perfects are to be translated by our past,
B present or future, -depends entirely upon the considerations stated
-

in Vol. i., $ 77 , rem . a.

Rem. b. The temporal clause introduced by láj is often almost

identical in meaning with a conditional clause introduced by !
*
(see $ 6)* ; but it is very rare [in prose) to find is construed with
thejussive like ‫) إن‬$ 13 and 17,c), as ‫وإذاتبك خضاضة فتجير‬
and when poverty befalls thee, bear it patiently (unt in rhyme for
‫ ) ;( جمل‬and ‫منی‬ ‫ إذا ترزنی‬cohenegonevisitme, got soill honour
Cme ].
REM . C.
It has been said that when !15 or ló is? is immediately
preceded by cris until, and followed by two correlative clauses,
the verbs of which are in the perfect, these perfects take the sense
of historical past tenses, expressing a state which closes the action
of a previous perfect. This exception to the so-called conversive
lý does not, however, hold good. Lai is
influence of is or Ló is
construed with the perfect to indicate a simple temporal limit, or
the effect or result of an act or series of acts ; with the imperfect
indicative, when this effect or result is regarded not as something
D actually past, but as yet in progress, as a historical present (see
$ 15, c, B). This view it is which the Arabic language has chosen
to adopt in the case of two correlative clauses, introduced by 151,
*
[ The difference is that I denotes what is possible, is‫ فير‬what is
ascertained, so that one says wij ste f if Zeid come, but wity star is
hiviwhen the beginning of the month shall come.]
$ 5] The Verb . - 1. The States or Tenses. 13

‫ها آثیا ريح‬For

after ‫روا ب‬example
‫يبة وقي‬:‫ إهذاو الكذثير يفستيمرالفلكفيوجالربيرنوابلبيحهربرحيتىح ط‬A
‫عاصف وجاهمالموج من كل مكان وظوا أنهم أحيط بهم دعوا الله‬
‫ مخلصين له الدين‬Heit is solo letteth you travel by land and by
sea, until, when ye are on board of ships, and they sail away with
them (abrupt change of person, instead of with you) with a fair
wind, and they rejoice in it, there overtakes them (the ships) a
B
tempestuous gale, and the waves come on them from every side, and
they think that they are encompassed, (and) call upon God, professing
sincere religion ; ‫وشريتيمان جودة من الجبن والإنس والطير فهم‬
‫ يوزعون حتى إذا أتوا على وادي الهي قالت نملة‬and unto Solomon
were gathered his hosts, of jinn and of men and of birds, and they
were marched on in order, until, when they arrive at the Valley of
Ants, an ant says— . In this second example the meaning would
be substantially the same, if we rendered it by until, when they
arrived at the Valley of Ants, an ant said , but the translation would C
be less close *. In the next two examples, on the contrary, the

* [ Trumpp, Der Bedingungssaz im Arabischen, Sitz. Ber. d. phil.

hist. Cl. der K. B. Akad . d. Wissensch. zu München, 1881 , p. 432 8e940 ,
rejects the theory expounded in rem. c, which is also that of Fleischer
( Kl. Schr. i. 116 seqq .). ‫ حتی‬, being properly a preposition ,has no
influence on the signification of the perfect in the following clause.
This depends on that of the clause to which it is subordinated . The
same remark applies to the perfects of two correlative clauses intro
)

duced by ‫حتى إذا‬. For example : ‫ أجرى حتى إذا انتهيت‬I run until D
‫ر‬

‫ى‬I‫ت‬attain
‫عون ح‬the
‫يوز‬end‫فومياومشعترمتر بمشنئ خيحرتىأمةإذاقواجلاأسودم قنديقدتخرلب باآيلابتينات ;فهم‬
but before I was aware of anything, * El- Aswad had entered the room ;

‫ إذا كانوا قال أكبته بایاتی‬and one that day tohen toe bring together
out of every nation a company of those who have gainsaid our revela
tions, kept marching in ranks, until, when they have arrived (before
God ), He will say : Did ye treat my revelations as impostures ? A
comparison of this verse from Ķor'ān xxvii. with that cited above
 14 ParT TAIRD . — Syntax.
- [S 6

A repetition of the act justifies us in the use of the past. úlogi Lóg
‫ حتى إذا‬.... ‫من قبلك إلا رجالا يوحى إليهم من أهل القرى‬
‫ر ر‬ ‫م‬ ‫مہ‬
‫ آشتياس ال وظنوا أنهم قد كذبوا جاءهم‬and We have not
sent before thee (any) but men, to whom a revelation was made, of
the people of the cities, . . . . until, when the apostles were despairing,
and were thinking that they were deluded, Our aid came unto them ;
‫به فتحنا عليهم أبواب كل شئ حتى إذا فرحوا‬영 ‫فلا تنسوا ما قوا‬ 1

‫ بها أوتوا أخذناهم بغتة فاذا هم ميشون‬andwhen they had Forgotten

B their warnings, We set open to them the gates of all things, until,
when they were rejoicing over what they had got, We laid hold on
them suddenly, and lo, they were in despair.

6. (a) After the conditional particle ! if (Vol. i.,$ 367, ), and >

after many words which imply the conditional meaning of ‫معنی ) إن‬
‫ الشرط‬or ‫(معنى إن‬, the perfect is also said to take a future sense,
the condition being represented as already fulfilled. In English it
may usually be rendered by the .present. Such words, for instance,
WE
C are : Sí ands who, whoever, in whosoever, is what, on what
SOeter , ‫ مهمن‬ahoeter , ‫ مهما‬chatever , ‫ها‬ as often as, is where,
DE
20
wherever, cáo when ,bólás whenever, ivi where, basi wherever,
‫ف‬is
‫كي‬ how , ‫ا‬was
‫نم‬ however,wit in whatever way, however, úv and
‫أيان ما‬, ahen ,whenever, ‫ إنما‬schenever, Examples : ‫إني أخاف إن‬
‫ي عذاب يو‬sy
‫م عظي‬magnaulic
‫م‬gratis ‫ م‬Ifear, if I rebel (lit.have rebelled) against
‫ت رب‬bacó
‫ي‬mas
my Lord, the punishment of a great (i.e. terrible) day ; itcan be‫تل‬listy
‫واق‬
D guitar and slay them wherever you find them (lit. hare found them ) ;
‫معه أينما تم‬.a ‫وهو‬ he is doith nd
you coherever you are The same
remark applies to the perfects before and after gi or,in such phrases

‫ وشر شليمان الخ‬shows clearly theinfluence of the preceding verb

on the signification of those in the subordinate clauses. For in the
latter we ought to render until, when they arrived at the Valley of
Ants, an ant said . D. G.]
 The Verb . - 1. The States or Tenses. 15
$ 6]

as ‫ سواء غابوا أو حضروا‬it is all the samewhether they are absent or A

present; ‫ سواء على هت أو قعدت‬it is all one to me whether thou
standest or sitest; ‫ أكرم الضيف غنيا كان أو فقيرا‬honour a guest,
whether he be rich or poor .— (6) If the words !, si,s, &c., be
followed by two clauses, the first of which expresses the condition
‫[الشرط‬, and thesecondthe result depending upon it ]‫جواب الشرط‬ or

bien aljá ), then the verb in both clauses is put in the perfect*, both B
the condition and the result being represented as having already taken
place. For example : Sció sus éles ! if you do this, you will
perish, lit. if you shall have done this, you have perished or will perish
‫تر‬

($ 1, e) ; oslo come se s he who (= if one) keeps (has kept) his

oten secret,atainshis object; ‫الحكمة ضالة المؤمن أينما وجدهاأخذها‬
wisdom is the strayed camel of the believer , wherever he finds it (= if he
shall have found it anywhere), he lays hold of it (will lay hold of it).- C
(c) If the perfect after ! Esi, s, &c., is to retain its original
meaning, then üs, or one of the islaál the sisters of the verb
kāna (such as sló to become,jis to be by day, śý to be by night,
‫بح‬ol
‫ اص‬to be in the morning, camol to be in the evening), must be in
serted between those words and the perfect in the protasis, and the
apodosis must be indicated by the particle L. For example : vis !
Gócios y dio u kampus if his shirt is ( has been) torn in front, she D
* [ The verb in the protasis may never be a ide jes an aplastic
verb, such as have but one tense and no infinitive, as ‫لیس‬, ‫عسی‬.
Comp. $ 187, b. In negative clauses the jussive with
> is employed
($ 12) with very rare exceptions as Ķor'ân ii. 140 ÚJ Telug
‫ أوتوا الكتاب بعين آية ما تبعوا قبلتك‬،even though thou shouldest bring
every kind of sign to those who have been given the Scriptures, yet thy
kebla theywill notfolloup , for ‫لم يتبعوا‬.[
 16 PART THIRD. — Syntax. [S- 6

A has spoken the truth ; ‫ إن كنتم آمنت بالله عليه تولوا‬i ve have
believed in God,place your trust in Him ; ‫فهد العذر أوقامج إن‬
Boererate voor is accept my excuse readily or (at least) be
indulgent, if I have committed a crime or a fault.— (d) But if the
perfect after these words is to have the historical sense (English past
"
tense, $ 1, a ), the verb úls , or one of its “ sisters,” must be prefixed
to the correlative clauses ; e.g, ‫ ممن كانوا إن بالغوا بتغوا‬they eserted
B themselves to attain an object,they attained it ] ‫وكان كلما أتاه شی‬
‫ من الوحش لعودة افترسه‬and cohenever one of thewild animals came
to visit him , he made it his prey ; ‫وكان متى أراد خلعه دخل البرية‬
and as often as he would throw off his allegiance, he entered the desert];
though it is also sufficient that the correlative clauses should be
dependent upon others that are historical ; asa8 ‫ما أدرفت العلم‬
‫ بالحمير فلا قيمت قلت الحمد لله‬I attained knottledge only by
C praising (God ), for, whenever I understood (anything), I said, Praise
belongs to God. [(e) If, however, the verb us, or one of its sisters,
after these words, is followed by an imperfect or a participle, we must
render it by the present ($ 131), as sige atví energeting ‫إن‬
if welove God,then followme; ‫ولا يحل ن أن يمن ما خلق الله‬
‫ في أرحامهن إن ن يؤمن بالله‬nor is it lawful for them to conceal
‫رع‬

what God hath created in their wombs if they believe in God ;

D ‫ كنت صادقا لقد قتلتني وإن كنت گابا لقد فضحتنی‬: thou speakest
the truth, thou hast killed me ; if thou liest, thou hast disgraced me.)
REM . A. What has been said of the temporal 151 in § 5, rem . a,
is also applicable to the conditional !, for p is also originally a
demonstrative (compare y , ). In this case, however, the
language always employs the perfect, never the imperfect in
dicative, after the conditional word ; that is to say, the condition
is invariably represented, in reference to the conditioned, as aa
1
Ş.7] The Verb.- 1 . The States or Tenses . 17

completed action, and not as one in progress. On the alternative A

use of the Jussive, see $S 13 and 17, c.

RE3.b. The apodosis of ‫ جواب إن إن‬, like that of ‫) تو‬$ 4,

rem . ), is frequently omitted , when the context readily suggests it ;
as
‫ إن شهدت عدن من اليمين وإلا فاستوف منه اليمين‬: too
honest men of the Muslims bear witness in thy favour, (good and well) ;
but ifnot,demand ofKin
him theoath ; ‫إن ثبت ورجعت عن قولك وإلا‬
‫ أمرت العبيد بلخ‬: thout repentest and recontest molat thou hast B
said , (good and well, or I will forgive thee ); but if not, I will order
the slaves to flay thee alive. [Comp. § 186, rem . c, footnote. By
this omission is though ($ 17, c, rem . a) acquires the meaning of
>

nevertheless,as in the saying of the Prophet ; ride her

( the camel) nevertheless (though she be destined for sacrifice ), Lisān
xvi . 179. ]
REM . C. Where si, Ló and có are interrogatives or simple
WE WE

relatives, ‫ أيان أين أتی متى‬aund ‫ كيف‬interrogatives, and ‫ حيث‬C

a simple relative adverb, without any admixture of the conditional
signification of , perfects dependent upon them retain their
original sense.

7. After the particle Ló, as wng as, whilst, as often as (Vol. i. ,

S 367 , p), the perfect takes the meaning of the imperfect (present or
‫رش‬
future) ; as live common to como ý may you never meet with harm
)$ 1, f ),as longas you lite ! ‫ الناس ما داموا في الحيوة الدنيوية غاتون‬D
men are careless, as long as they live in this world (lit. remain in the
w

life of this world); Lá js Lo yunit ný I will not forget thee, as long

woor
us a sun rises ; ulat abors to care answers, as often as (or
whenever) you call it. If this imperfect is to be historical, the rule
laid down in $ 6, d, must be observed . The negative as long as not
is always expressed by có with the jussive (see § 12).
The Arab grammarians regard this ‫ ما‬as ‫مصدرية ظرفية‬
W. II . 3
 18 PART THIRD. - Syntax . (S 8

А or
älój, i.e.,as equivalent to a verbal noun or infinitive in the
accusative of time. They say that‫نت‬is
.
bes Ló, as long as thou
T.
remainest alive, is equivalent to a slólg's or La storgs bio
This cannot, however, be the case, for whence then would come the
conversive force of this ló ? It is in fact only a variety, in its
application to time, of the absencí Có or conditional ma (s 6, a).
JO OO

B
8. The Imperfect Indicative (ég no éslání) does not in
itself express any idea of time; it merely indicates a begun, incomplete,
enduring existence, either in present, past, or future time. Hence it
signifies :
(a ) An act which does not take place at any one particular time ,
to the exclusion of any other time, but which takes place at all times,
or rather, in speaking of which no notice is taken of time, but only of
duration (the indefinite present); as ‫الإنسان يدبر والله يقر‬ man

C forms
‫هر دو‬.
plans and God directs them (man proposes, God disposes) ;
w 0

jest weines the free man is enslaved by benefits (conferred

upon him ).
(6) An act which , though commenced at the time of speaking,
is not yet completed , -which continues during the present time (the
definite present); as ‫ الله يعلم بما تقمون‬God knowsthat we are
doing. Hence its use as a historical present
‫ر‬
in lively descriptions of
D past events ; . ‫قال طلحة فأخرج أغدو قالب دژعی و سیفی‬
‫ح درقتي في صدری‬iebig
‫ وأطر‬said Țalho,
Tall , So out I run,and put on my
coat of mail, and seize my sword, and cast my shield on my breast.
(c) An act which is to take place hereafter ( the simple future);
as ‫ واتقوا يوما لا تجزي نفس عن نفس شیا‬and for a day in
which ) a soul shall not make satisfaction for a soul ut all, or
‫هر ر‬

shall not give anything as a satisfaction for a soul; best att

1.0
är iog opin but God will judge between them on the day of the
resurrection. To render the futurity of the act still more distinct,
$ 8] The Verb . - 1. The States or Tenses. 19

the adverb gue (Vol. i. $ 364, e), or its abbreviated form in ( Vol. i. A
$ 361, b), in the end, is prefixed to the verb ; us ‫ومن يفعل ذلك عدوانا‬
‫فسوف تصليه تارا‬- ‫ وظلما‬whoevera n
does this maliciouslyd
and arrong .
fully , are till burn him with hell-fire ; ‫ تبينمهنفيعدومكوضعه‬ne arill
explain it in its (proper) place; jś jogi ing các thou
shalt be protected ( through God's grace) from every machination of thine
enemy.
REM. (. ‫ سوف‬may have the asseverative prefixed to it, as B
‫ ولسوف يعطيك ربك فترضی‬and terily thy Lord oill give thee
(abundance) and thou wilt be content ; and it may be separated from
its verb by a verb which is void of government, as in the verse
‫ وما أدري وسوف اخال أدري أقوم آل جضين أم نساء‬atI do
not know , but I shall (I think) know , whether the family of Ņişn are
a band of men or women . — Rare forms are ‫سف‬, ‫ سوو‬, and ‫سی‬
[REM. b. The simple future has sometimes the sense of a polite
order or request ; as ‫ فقال له سليمان تنصرفون ونرى فيما بيننا‬then C
Sulèimān said : Depart now, and we will consider between our .

.Selers
(Tabariii 144, 1.7(; ‫وقال لإيتاخ تدخل أصح الله الأمير‬
and he said to Itah: llave the kindness to enter, God bless the Emir ;
‫ فقال له اليد تؤمه يا أمير المؤمنين فأنه‬and Halilsaid to him :
Grant him indemnity, O Prince of the faithful, and he did so
('A9. xvii. 164, 1. 14 ). D. G. ]
(d ) An act which was future in relation to the past time of which
we speak. When this is the case, the imperfect is simply appended to D
the preceding perfect without the intervention of any particle, and forms,
with its complement *, a secondary, subordinate clause, expressing the
>

state ( jki) in which the subject of the previous perfect found

himself,when he completed the act expressed by that perfect [ jlé
* That is to say, any word or words governed by, or otherwise
connected with, .
it.
 20 PART THIRD. - Syntax. [S 8

A ‫ه ;([ مقدر‬as‫ و‬ogé

‫ جاء إليه يعوده‬he came to him to visithim ; ‫أتى إلى عين‬
‫ ما يشرب‬hecame to a spring of acater to drink; ‫ثم استوى على العرش‬
, ‫رو در ماه‬

jollow then He seated Himself on the throne to administer the rule

(of the Universe); bude kole just he sent to inform him of this;
[Donateto cool he determined to circumvent the Jews, Aj. xix. 96,
1. 6. R. S. ].
(e) An act which continues during the past time. In this case
B too the imperfect is appended to the perfect without the interposition
of any connective particle, and forms, with its complement, a second
ary, subordinate clause, expressing the state ( jlavi) in which the
subject of the previous perfect found himself, when he did what that
perfect expresses ) ‫ ;;(حال مقارن‬as ‫ جاء زيد يضحك‬zeid came
laughing ; oldes tone liči he returned , congratulating himself on
(lit. praising) his morning-walk ; aimju lär ſkä сies he set out, ‫درر‬

C leading (as it were) my heart by its bridle ; seyi aini á , meu limbo
and we remained watching for him as one watches for the new -moons of
the festivals; ‫ جاءته إحداهما تمشي على استحياء‬and one of them
came to him , talking bashfully ; ‫ وجابوا أباهم عشاء يبون‬and they
came to their father in the evening, weeping. As the above examples
show , the imperfect is in this case generally rendered in English by
the participle.
D Rem. a. After the negative particle ý, the imperfect retains its
general idea of incompletenessand duration ;as ‫خرج لا يعلم أين هو‬
he went out, not knowing, or without knowing, where he was ;
Juice sommitszeit s the liberal (man) does not respect the stingy.
- After the negative particle to it takes the meaning of the present;
a
‫ يرى الإنسان بشهادة أهل بيته‬-man
‫ ه ما‬isnot declared right
eousbytheevidence of his oion household ; ‫ما يود الذين كفروا من‬
‫ أهل الكتاب و المشركين أن ينزل عليه من خیر من بگم‬the
89] The Verb . - 1. The States or Tenses. 21

unbelievers among those who possess a (revealed) book, and among A

the polytheists, do not wish that any good should be sent down unto
you
‫ر ولا‬from
‫لا النا‬your ‫ بطو‬:‫إن الذين يعمثمنوان قلمايلاأنزألولئاكللهما مينأكاللوانبفي‬
‫نهم إ‬Lord
‫ويشترون به‬
‫ يكلمهم الله يوم القيمة‬theywho hide thebook which God hath sent
down, and buy with it something of small price, these swallow down
into their bellies nothing but fire, and God will not speak to them on
the day of judgment.
REM. b. According to the Arab grammarians, the imperfect B
indicative isused ‫للحال‬, to indicate presenttime )‫ الزمان الحاضر‬,
‫رهه‬

and
‫بااللمستقبل‬.‫للإستق‬, to indicate future time ) ‫ المستقبل‬less correctly

9. To express the imperfect of the Greek and Latin languages,

‫ كان‬is frequently prefixed to the imperfect ; as ‫كان يحب الشععرر‬
‫والشعراء‬heacuts fond ofpoetry and poets ; ‫كان يركب في كل يوم عدة‬
‫ مرار‬beused to ride out every day several times ; ‫ وكان يكون بها قائد‬،
‫ في ألف رجل‬and there used to be (stationed ) in it (the city (
a general ecith a thousand men ; ‫رجال كانوا يكونون مع الملوك‬
men who used to live with the princes. If this signification is to
be attached to several imperfects, it is sufficient to prefix üs
to the first alone. If one or more perfects precede the imperfect,
or if the context clearly shows that the verb in the imperfect
has the sense of the Latin imperfect, us need not be prefixed to it ; D
,

4 ‫ واتبعوا ما تلو الشياطين على ملك سليمان‬and they follouced achat

as

the evil spirits read (or recited , or followed) in the reign of Solomon ;
‫ قل قلم تتلون أنبياء الله من قبل‬Say , Why then did ye kill the
prophets of God before? Here ‫ تتلو‬and ‫ تفتون‬stand for ‫كانت تتو‬
and ‫تم تقتلون‬. ][So in poetry after ‫; قد‬.se $ 362 , 7 ,
Vol. i e
footnote, R. S. ]
 22 PART THIRD.-Syntax. [S 10
A .10 To express the future-perfect , the imperfect of ‫( گون ) كان‬
is frequently prefixed to the perfect, the particle is being sometimes
interposed
‫له وأوث‬.‫ونق‬Forexample
‫فكري بفعله‬, ‫أوناسآتخأرجهرمأوقلواامياكيوحنملبوقئهى إولرىائیمنزلشيئ ويأشكوغنل‬

‫قد استظهرت نفسي في إراحة بدنی عين التين بيسير أجرة أغطيها تهم‬
and I shall hire some people to carry it to my house, and I shall be the
last of them (to depart), and there shall not have been left ( shall not
B be left) behind me anything to occupy my mind with the doing or
removing of it, and by the trifling pay I give them , I shall have
provided help for myself (80 as) to spare my own body all the labour.
[Rem. In dependent clauses introduced by Åf the future-perfect
.becomes
the perfect of the subjunctive, e.g ‫يجب أن يكون ذهب‬ |

it cannot be butthat he has gone (abierit(; ‫اختلف المتكلمون في‬

‫ أن يعون الله ) أمر‬- ‫ قون الله‬the theologians disagree about
C God's having ordered (jusserit).] 1

.11 The Suljanotiee of the imperfect ) ‫ (المضارع المنصوب‬has

always a future sense after the adverb 3 not (Vol. i. $ 362, hh), and
the conjunctions ‫ أن‬that, ‫ أن لا‬or ‫ أو‬that not, ‫ گی‬and ‫ يمى‬that,
‫ غيلا‬and ‫ لعيد‬that not, ‫ تی‬till, until, and that ; as ‫لن يدخل‬
‫ الجنة إلا من كان هودا أو نصاری‬none shall enter Paradise except
D those toho are Jets on Christians; ‫ أم حسبتم أن تدخلوا الجنة‬do ge
think that ye shall enter Paradise ? See $ 15 .

.12 The Justice of the imperfect ) ‫(المضارع المجزوم‬, when

dependent upon the adverbs ‫ تم‬not, and ‫ لها‬not get (Vol. i.s362,
ff, gg), has invariably the meaning of the perfect. For example :
‫ ألم تعلم أن الله له من الشموات والأرض‬hast thou notlearned (or
dost thou not know)) that God's is the sovereignty over the heavens and
‫ه‬

theearth ? ‫أن تدخلوا الجنة ولا يأتكم مثل الذين تخلوا‬ ‫ام‬
$ 13] The Verb.- 1 . The States or Tenses. 23

ovo
‫ بیگم‬io
‫ من‬do ye think that ye shull enter Paradise,before there shall A
have come (lit, and there has not yet come) upon you the like of what
came upon those who passed away before you ? ce va cong labi
jes antic go us! Bi åól is this (the cuse ), before our parting is
an hour old (lit. and an hour has not yet gone by since parting) ? How
then
‫حالنا‬,tchenuemonthsshallhavepassedover
‫تا بر‬ it ? ‫أزف الرحل غير أن ركابنا‬
wilós jó our departure is close at hand, save that our camels BB
have not yet moved off with our saddles (i.e. we have all but started ) ;
érció sus jest o el if you do not do this, you will perish (S 6,6) ;
‫لم يكن يحب الشعر والشعراء‬heasmustfind ofpoetryandputs )99(.
REM . The grammarians put the distinction between and
‫ لا‬in this way, that ‫ لم يفعل‬is thenegation of ‫فعل‬, but ‫تا يفعل‬
the negation of les só, [meaning he has not yet done it, but he will
certainly do it afterwards ; see Bèid. on Ķor'ān ii . 136. R. S. ] С

13. After ! and the various words that have the sense of
the jussive has the same meaning as the perfect ($ 6) ; as
‫الله‬ ‫ إن تخفوا ما في صدوركم أو تبدو يعلمه‬whether ye hide that
is in your breasts, or disclose it, God knoweth it ; nec ig Igleit ús
‫ يعلمه الله‬whatever good we do,God knoweth it ; ‫إن تعمل في إسلامك‬
auto di lolo giac if, now that thou hast become a Muslim ,thou
dvest a good work, thou wilt be rewarded for it ; ji ý bizánci ! D
‫ إليهم‬uz ulg'ó if ye do us justice, O family of Mèrwān, we will
‫ه ر‬
drunnearto got; ‫أينما توتوا يدركه الموت‬shereveryeare,death
will overtake you ; vigine äskevi zaicsáo when I lay aside the
turban, we recognizeme; ‫فمن يشترنا لا يخف بعد عقيرنا ومن لا‬
‫ يصالحنا يبث غير نائم‬hewho seeks our protection hasnothing to fear
after our covenant ; but he who does not come to terms with us will pass
 24 PART THIRD . — Syntax. [$ 14
A his nights without sleep. See $ 17 , C. - When the first of two corre
lative clauses contains a verb in the imperative, and the second in
the jussive, then the jussive has the same meaning as if the first
clause had contained a verb in the jussive preceded by !*
‫ ; إن‬e.g.
‫ ځونوا هودا أو نصاری تهتدوا‬-they
‫قالوا‬ said , Become Jetsor Chris
tians, (and) ye will be guided aright. Here lei, s is equivalent to
logo !, If ye become Jews or Christians, ye will be guided aright.
See $ 17 , c.

B [Rem.
( a. Les and, according to the school of Başra, also
was form an exception to the rule that the jussive may be
employed in the two correlative clauses. Many grammarians allow
no other correlative clauses after these particles, but those that con
‫ر‬

tain theimperfect indicative of thesameverb ,as ‫كيف تصنع أصنع‬

as thou doest, so
80 will I do. See, however, an example of the jussive
in both clauses, $ 17, c.]
[Rem. b. After vi both the jussive and the indicative may
C be used in the two correlative clauses, as ‫ ألا تنزل تأكل‬and
‫ ألا تنزل تأكل‬oilt thoutnot alight and eat ? ‫ألا تأتيني أحثك‬
wilt thou not come to me, (then) I will tell thee ?]
14. The Energetic forms of the imperfect have always a future
sense ; as ‫تبين أنجيتنا من هذه تتكون من الشاكرين‬-ir
thou de
liverest us from this (danger ), verily we will be of (the number of) the
grateful; stás bus
‫ لأضرب‬atig by God ! I will cut thy head off (lit.
D strike thy neck). See $ 19.

2. The Moods.

15. The Subjunctive mood occurs only in subordinate clauses.

It indicates an act which is dependent upon that mentioned in the
previous clause, and future to it in point of time (see § 11) ; and
事
[ Trumpp, Der Bedingungssaz, p. 369 seq. , rejects this view of
the matter, making a distinction between the jussive in the apodosis
of an imperative and that of a conditional protasis.
§ 15] The Verb . - 2. The Moods. 25

hence it mostly corresponds to the Latin subjunctive after ut. It A

is governed by the following particles .
(a) a. By Ui that, after verbs which express inclination or dis
inclination, order or prohibition, duty, effect, effort, fear, necessity,
, etc ; ‫ أن لا‬or ‫ أ‬that not; and ‫) تن‬for ‫ لا أن‬, .i.e
.permission
i već Ý it will not be or happen that) certainly not, not at all.
Forexample : ‫ أردت وأحببت أن أين تهم طريق العلم‬Iwishedand
desired to make plain to them the path of learning; di Luis E B
‫ يغب‬let no onewho can write,refuse to acrite ; ‫ينبغي أن ينوى‬
‫ المتعه بطب العلي رضا الله‬itbehinotes the larnertostripeby his
seeking after knowledge to please God ; ‫ يجوز أن يكون التصب‬itmay
be the accusative ;; ‫ قال فاهبط منها ما يكون لك أن تتكبر فيها‬He
(God) said, Get thee down then from it (Paradise) , for it is not for
theetobehavenoith pride in it; ‫ أمرتك بأن تفعل كذا‬I commanded
thee to do such a thing : ‫ إني أخاف ألا يثرني‬I am afraid hewill c
not leave me, or, in accordance with a particular idiom of the language
[$ 162 ],I am afraid he will leave me ; nji sheró ló what hath
hindered thee from worshipping (him (? ‫تن تمنا النار إلا أياما معدودة‬
the fire (of hell) shall certainly not touch us save for ( shall certainly
touch us only for) a certain number of days ; v akcii je
‫من كان هودا أو نصاری‬ none shall enter Paradise save those who

areJewer or Christians,; ‫ فلن أبرح الأرض حتى يأذن لبیي أبي‬I will
therefore not quit the land (of Egypt) until my father gives me leave. D

[ Rem. If we wish to indicate that the thing ordered or resolved

upon has actually been done, the verb may be followed by i with
theperfect,as ‫له تعالی تا قدر أن أحياها أو قدر أن يحييها ثانيا‬
after God had decreed to call them to life for the first time (as He
did ), He decreed to call them to life a second time (see Fleischer,
Kl. Schr. i. 525 seq. , ii. 356). —In later times or with the indicative
of the imperfect is often employed as the equivalent of gf with the
W. II . 4
 26 PART THIRD . — Syntux. [S 15

A subjunctive, as in the verse ‫لما تمت أن أقدم خيرا يعادی وترمت‬

berit sit as often as I intend to send onward some good deedfor my
future life and to repent toward God (see Fleischer, Kl. Schr. i. 526
seq.).]

(B) But if the verb to which üi is subordinate, does not indicate

any wish, effect, expectation, or the like, -and the verb which is
governed by ý has the meaning of the perfect or present,—the
indicative of the perfect or imperfect is used after ; as ‫أعجبني أن‬
Beve it pleased me that thou stoodestup ; Jugent I know that he
said ;; ólás I know that he is asleep. As i quod ,óre,with a
pronoun (al , etc.), is more usual in such clauses, the native gram
marians designate 31,when
, it has the same meaning as ül and
governs the indicative, by the name of ‫ أن المخففة من الثقيلة‬the W
‫أن مالم‬
'an that is lightened from the heavy form , or, more shortly, átlán y
the lightened’an ; but when it is equivalent to the Latin ut, they call
Cit ‫ أن الاصبة‬the 'an thatgoversthe subjunctice ‫ المضارع المنصوب‬.
After verbs of thinking, supposing, and doubting, when they refer to
the future, i may govern the indicative of the imperfect, as ‫المحققة‬,
or the subjunctive,, as á‫ ; الاصبة‬.e.g ‫ ظننت أن يقوم‬I thinkhewill
get up

Rem. a. 3 is in these cases ‫مضرية‬, thatis to say, ‫أن‬with

the following verb is equivalent in meaning to the maşdar or
D .inf init
of that ‫ وأن تصوموا خيرتم‬and that ye fast
verb ; e.g ive
isbetter for you )‫ أريد أن أزورك ;(صيامكم أن تصوموا‬I wish to
visitthee ) ‫أعجبني قيامك =أعجبني أن قمت ز( زیارت =أن أزورك‬
REM . 6 . The omission of before the subjunctive is very
rare ; as ‫ وه يحفرها‬order him to bury it ; ‫ذ آلت قبل يأخذك‬
seize the thief before he can seize thee ; and in the verses is
$ 15] The Verb. 2. The Moods. 27

‫ الزاجرى أحضر الوغى وأن أشهد اللات هل أنت مخبری‬o tho A

that hinderest me from being present in battle, and from taking part
in amusements, canst thou make me live for ever ? * —The grain
marians tell us that some of the Arabs construed i always with
the imperfect indicative, as ‫ أريد أن تقوم‬I wish thee to stand
up ; and, according to the reading of Ibn Muhèişin, Ķor'ān ii. 233
‫ لمن أراد أن يتم الرضاعة‬for him solo desires tocomplete the time of
suckling ; whilst others let it govern the jussive, as in the half- B
‫ش‬
verse
‫ تعالوا إلى أن يأتينا الصيدتطب‬come,,until the gamecomes
(or is brought) to us, let us gather firewood .
‫ن قل‬to‫كا‬have
‫زم د‬s‫و أصنا‬seems
] REM .c. Sometime ‫بهج‬meaning
‫مة م‬the ‫ن عم‬for‫ر ب‬fear
‫ن بو‬of‫را‬lest, ‫عم‬
that, as in the verse
‫ أن أعرا‬Ihabe given Amr ibn Imran a hundred camels for ayoung
beast unable to rise, forfear lest I should be blamed ( Hamāsa, p. 256,
.1 3 ( ; ‫فارفعه‬‫ أعددت السلاح أن يجيء عدو‬Ihavepreparedarefor ) C
fear that an enemy should come, in which case I may repel him ;
‫ أن تضل إحداهما تذكر إحداهما‬for fear test the one of theme
should make a mistake, in which case the other may remind her
( Kor'an ii. 282). In these and similar phrases ( Kor. iv. 175,
vi. 157,, xlix. 2,, Lane p. 106, bb) the interpreters supply átlás Or
or
‫كراهة‬. In others it may be explained by the preceding words
implying a prohibition , as Kor. xxxv. 39, Tab. i. 657, 1. 8, 3026,
.1.2 In the verse (Hariri, Dorat, 88 ( ‫ أوصي أن يحمد اقارب‬D
‫ أوصيك ويرجع المسكين وهو خائب‬may have the meaning of
izle 1 warn thee lestthy near relations should praise thee,but the
poor return disappointed. D. G. )

]Beidawi on Kor'an i. 77 reads ‫أحضر‬, adding that, it ‫ أن‬is

omitted , the verb is put in the indicative. R. S.-Comp. Ņamīsa,
p. 438, 1. 6 seq. and see also Lane p. 104 c, on Ķor'ān xxxix. 64
‫أفغير الله تأمروتی أعبد‬.
 28 PART THIRD . - Syntax. [$ 15

A (6) By J that, in order that ([called is ósý) originally a

preposition, Vol.i. $ 366,c) ; is sú, and , that, in order that;
als, guió, and vis, that not, in order that not ; particles which
indicate the intention of the agent and the object of the act. For
‫ الله‬sú‫ ت‬je
example : eti repent, that God may forgive thee ;
3

‫ ينبغي أن يشل المشيم الله تع العافية ييونه عن البلايا‬it behotes

the Muslim to ask God (who is exalted above all) for health, that
B Hemay preserve him from misfortunes ; ‫إذا حفظت شيا فعليقه کي‬
Losbeiaté anong so when you learn anything, write it down, so that
‫ أعدهم‬means
you may constantly refer to it; which ‫ كيما‬that I may prepare
them ; ‫ تعلموا مى تعلموا‬learn thatye many teach ; ‫وأمرت أن أون‬
induet jõi and I am ordered (this) in order that I may be the
first of the Muslims (of those who surrender themselves to Him) ;
‫ يكيها تعلمينی صادقا‬that thou magest knoo me to be speaking the
C truth ; ‫ تريدين كما تضمینی والا‬thou desirest to takemeasthy
lorer together with Halid ; ‫تم نشتغل بذر ذيك كيلا يطول الكتاب‬
we have not occupied ourselves with giving an account of this, in order
that the book mightnot become too long; ‫كيلا يگون دولة بين الأغنياء‬
biso that it (the spoil) may not be a thing taken by turns among the
rich of you ; ‫ كيلا تأتوا على ما قاتل‬thatyemay notgrieve mer schat
D escapesgout; ‫ إنما قال ذلك لئلايتمم بالعلم‬hesaid this only in order
that learning might not be disparaged.
REM. a.
After y the grammarians assume the ellipse of Si,
which always appears before the negative, giá . The insertion of
‫أن‬is allowable, as ‫ جد لإقرأ‬or ‫لأن أقرأ‬, I am cometo thee to
real(whence some translate ‫ وأمرت لأن أكون أول المسلمين‬by
and I am ordered to be the first of the Muslims); except when it is
$ 15] The Verb . - 2. The Moods. 29

the ‫ لام الجحود‬or lan of lenial,ie.when it is the predicate of A

‫و‬

‫ ما كان‬or ‫تم بن‬, as ‫ ما كان الله ليعذبهم وأنت فيهم‬God was

not one to chastise themn tohilst thou coust among them ; ‫تم يغن زید‬
‫ب الخمر‬.Zeid
‫ليشر‬ upas not a man to drink wine
REY. b. The addition of ‫ ما المصرية‬appears‫نفع‬sometimes
‫ا أنت لم ت‬to‫إذ‬
interrupt
‫ر‬
the government of is, as in the verse
‫الفتى كيما يضر وينفع‬ ‫ قضر قائما‬phen thou canstnot benefit,
then harm ; for nothing is expected of a man but that he should harm B
or benefit. Sometimes is added to strengthen the regimen ; as
‫ ځيها أن تغير وتدعا‬that thout magest deceive and beguile ; ‫يليها‬
‫طير يقریتی‬.t ha
‫ أن ت‬thoutmayest Ay to myt village
(c) 4. By C ( also originally a preposition, Vol. i. $ 366, k),
i , k)
until, until that, that, in order that, when it expresses the intention
of the agent and the object of the act, or the result of the act, as
taking place not without the will of the agent or, at least, according to
his expectation . For example : ‫ تن تبرح عليه عاكفين حتى يرجع‬C‫و‬
‫ إلينا موسی‬we will not cease to stand by it (worshipping it) , till Moses
return to us; ‫ لا بد من الأمير قبل الكلام حتى يثون صوابا‬aremust
meditate before we speak, in order that our words may be appropriate ;
w

‫ ينبغي أن لا يضعف النفس حتى ينقطع عن العمل‬hemustnotneedahen

the spirit so thathe is hindered from acting; ‫قولوا له إن شاء فليجلس‬
‫ وليعطني يده حتى أقيه أو يعدنی‬tellhim , he choses,to sit down D
and give me his hand, that I may force him to rise or he force me to sit
‫ه‬

down. —B . But if s expresses only a simple temporal limit,or

, the
mere effect or result of an act, without any implied design or ex
pectation on the part of the agent, it is followed by the perfect or the
indicative of the imperfect. For example : ‫ساروا حتى طلعت الشمس‬
‫ر‬

‫ فيهرب حتى أبعشد‬and so he Red tillhe

they journeyed till the sun rose‫ي ; لا‬del
got a great way of'; água e vóó
‫ مرض‬he is so ill that they have no
 30 PART THIRD . — Syntax. [$ 15

A hope of his lining ; ‫يعبد‬ = "" ‫في‬ ‫خير الناس رجل في شقة‬
‫ الله حتى يأتيه الموت‬the best ofmen is aman on a hill-top,amid a
small flock of his own, who serves God until death comes to him.
REM . a.
After come the grammarians assume the ellipse of
‫أن‬, and say that it is equivalent in meaning to ‫ إلى أن‬or ‫کی‬
as
‫ اضرب الله حتى يثوب‬beat thethieruntil ‫ (إلى أن‬herepents
B LSÓ he may repent.
or that (is or sú)
REM. b. In some cases the regimen may be doubtful ; as
‫ ونزول حتى يقول الرسول والذين آمنوا معه متى نصر الله‬and they
tere agitated until the apostle said ) ‫( يقول‬. or so that the apostle
said (jo ), and those who believed with him, When (will) the help
of God ( come) ? —In fact, after a four constructions are possible,
‫ش‬

which may be exemplified thus : ‫اس إلى الثوقة حتى أدخلها‬

journeyed to al-Kaifa that I might enter it )= ‫;( كي أدخلها‬
( ‫ حتى أولها‬I journeyed to it till I entered it (hist., imperfect,
‫ سرت حتى أدخلها ;( حكاية حال ماضية‬I have journeyed to it till
II am (note) entering it )= ‫ ;( حتى أنا أدخلها الآن‬and ‫ست حتی‬
Más I journeyed till I ( actually) entered it.
(d) By us, when this particle introduces a clause that expresses
the result or effect of a preceding clause ) ‫قاء الشبب‬, ‫ذا السببية‬, or
‫(قاء الجواد‬. The preceding clause must contain an imperative
D (affirmative or negative) , or words equivalent in meaning to an im
perative; or else it must express a wish or hope, or ask a question ;
or, finally, be a negative clause *. The siguification of s in all these
*
[ In some cases the indicative is employed where at first sight
‫ر‬ ‫ر‬
w
should expect the subjunctive
. , as in Korane
lxxvii 36 ‫لايون ته‬
‫ فيعتذرون‬it shall not be permitted to them to allege eaccuses (they
an
‫ تفتقده‬excuse themselves
.c no
); Hamasa p 407, ‫ت‬t ‫فلا أم فتبعيه ولا أخ‬
no mother will weep over him, no sister will miss him . D. G. ]
 The Verb . — 2. The Moods. 31
$ 15]

cases is equivalent to that of ‫ حتى‬For example : ‫ إغفر پی یا رټ‬A

‫ فأدخل الجنة‬pardon me, O my Lord, so that Imay enter Paradise ;
‫مه‬

‫ رب انصرني فلا أدل‬O my Lord,help me,so that I benot forsaken ;

‫ تقدم إليه يخيطه‬order him to seto it ; ‫یا ناق سیری عنها فسيحا إلى‬
‫ و ئیمان فتشتريا‬camel, gn at a far-stretchinggallop to Suleiman ,
that we may find rest )‫ فسيكا‬and ‫ تتريكا‬in rhyme for ‫ فسيا‬and
‫ لا تؤاخذني فأهلك ;(تستريح‬do not punish me,w that (or best) IB ‫ت‬
perish ; ‫ و الله لا تعنا إلى أنفسنا نعجز ولا إلى الناس فتضيع‬God,
hand us not over to ourselves, lest we be too feeble for the charge), nor
to (other) men , lest te perish ; ‫ ولا تطغوا فيه فيحل عليه غضبي‬and
do not exceed therein , lest my wrath alight upon you (or become due to
you (; ‫ ليت لي ما فتصدق منه‬acould thatI hadmoney,that Imight
give part of it auruy in aims! ‫يا ليتني كنت معهم فأفوز فوزا عظيما‬
O would I had been with them , that I might have won great gain ; C
‫ لعلي أحج أزورك‬perhaps I may go on pilgrimage so as tovisit thee ;
‫ هل زيد في الدار فأمضى إليه‬: Zaid at home,that Ican go to him
.tell
)= mewhether Z.isat home,so thatetc (? ‫فهل تنا من شفعاء فيشفعوا‬
‫ لنا‬have methen any intercessors to intercede for us? ‫يا ابن الكرام ألا‬
‫ تدنو تبصر ما قد حدثوك‬0 son of the noble,uilt thoutnot drain near ,
that thou mayest see that they have told thee ? ‫ فلا تدرس تحفظ‬ah
dost thout not study,that thou magest learn by heart ? ‫ رب لولا أخرتنی‬D
‫ إلى أجل قريب أصدق‬my Lord, why hast Thou not grantedme »
respite for a briefterm ,that I might give alms? ‫لا يقضى عليهم فيموتوا‬
sentence is not passed upon them , that they die; ‫ما تأتينا فتحنا‬
thou never comest to us to tell us something.
Rem. The imperative must be pure or real (uáéó), not an
interjection like ano, nor a verbal noun in the accusative. You
‫ه‬ ,
say ‫ ه فأحسن إليك‬hollyour peace and I will treatyou kindly ,;
 32 PART THIRD.Syntas. [S 15
A ‫ عوا فينام الناس‬hush ,and thepeople toill go to sleep . The negative
clause must also be pure, not restricted by vi, nor followed by
.an negative; e.g er
impliedoth ‫ ما أنت إلا تأتينا تحدثنا‬thou dost
nothingbutcometo usand tellus something; ‫ما تزال تأثينا فتحدثنا‬
thou never ceasest coming to us and (never ceasest) telling us some
thing, Consequentlywe maysay ‫ ما تأتينا تحدثنا‬if weunderstand
the words to mean thou dost not come to us and (dost not) tell us
B
something )= ‫(قما تحدثنا‬. The poets allow themselves to use
‫ في‬with the subjunctive after a single future, e.g, ‫أثر منزلی‬
‫ه‬

‫ بني تميم وألحق بالحجاز فأستريكا‬I will leavemy abode to the

Benī Tèmim, and betake myself to the Higāz, that I may have rest.
( Comp. Jahn, Erklärungen zu Sibaweih, p. 53. ) D. G. ]

(e) By g, under the same circumstances as , when the governed

verb expresses an act subordinate to, but simultaneous with, the act
C expressed by the previous clause ; as ‫أم حسبتم أن تدخلوا الجنة ولا‬
‫ يعلم الله الذين جاهدوا منكم ويعلم الصابرين‬do yewe think thatyeshall
enter Paradise without God's knowing those of you who have fought ( for
Him ), and knowing thepatient!? ‫مثله‬, ‫ لا تنه عن خلق وتأتي‬do not
restrain ( others) from any habit, whilst you yourself practise one like it ;
‫ فقلت ادعي وأدعو إن أنتى يصوت أن يناير داعيان‬and I said (to
her), Call, and I will call (at the same time), for it makes the sound go
D further , if two persons call outtogether ,; ‫ألم أك جاركم ويكون بينی‬
‫المودة واللاإخاء‬ ‫ وبين‬ucas I not your neighbour, there being (all along(
between me and you love and brotherly affection ? slammen ‫هل تأكل‬
‫ وتشرب اللبن‬do you eat fish and drink milk at the same time? ‫ولبس‬
‫ عباءة وتقر عيني أحب إلى من تبس الشفوف‬and the tearing of a
coarse cloak, whilst my eye is cool (not heated with tears), is more
pleasant to me than the wearing of fine garments. The Arab gram
§ 15] The Verb . - 2. The Moods. 33

marians call , thus used, Leisis, or ‫واو الجمع‬, or ‫واو المصاحبة‬, A

the wāw of simultaneousness, and explain it by si ‫ع‬és‫م‬.
[ Rem. The school of Kūfa allow the use of the subjunctive
ܵ‫ܕܗ‬
also after in the manner of and ,‫ و‬e.g, ‫ا تعيبوا على قوم‬ý‫ل‬
helgene blazi do not upbraid people for actions, whilst you
practise them yourselves ( Tab. ii. 887, 1. 1 seq.). D. G.]
‫ أن‬aj; unless that, or to
(f) By şi, when it is equivalent either to si
W

‫ إلى أن‬or ‫ كى‬until that; asa8 ‫ لأفقتتنل الكافر أو يشيم‬I will certainly B
kill the unbeliever, unless he becomes a Muslim ; óć Bojové is dis ;
‫ قوم گرت كوبها أو تستقيما‬andwhen I squeezed the spear of a tribe, W.DE

I broke its knots,unless it stood straight ; tá wiki ji sa I

willstick to go tillyou give memydue ; ‫ستشهد الشغب أو أدرك‬
Cat I will deem everything difficult easy, until I attain my wishes ;
‫ فقلت له لا تبك عينك إما تحاول منها أو تموت عذرا‬and Isaid to
him, Let not thy eye weep, we seek nothing short of a kingdom , unless C
we die and so are excused (for not attaining it) ; bs,Wir vegi í ný
I will not go to thee till the gatherer of acacia berries (or leaves)
returns (i.e. I will never go to thee). In the former case, the preceding
act is to be conceived as taking place but once and as momentary ; in
the latter, as repeated and continued.
>

) 9 ( By ‫إذن‬ or
is in that case, well then, when this particle
commences a clause expressing the result or effect of a previous
statement, provided that the verb in the subordinate clause refers
to a really future time, and that it is in immediate juxtaposition to D
üb, or, at least,separated from it only by the negative ý, or by an
oath , or, according to some, by a vocative. For example, one may
say lúc ólji li I will come to thee tomorrow ; and the reply may be
ítási ös! well then,I will treat thee with respect, or ‫إذن لا أهين‬
well then, I will not insult thee, or štási alig is! well then, by God,
W. II . 5
 34 PART THIRD-Syntax. (S 16

AIwill etc.,or ‫) إذن يا عبد الله أكرمك‬though many preferin this case
‫(أغرك‬. If the particle ‫ و‬or ‫ فی‬be prefixed to ‫إذن‬,the verb may
be put in the indicative as well as the subjunctive, e.g. Ý us!
-

‫) خلقك إلا قلي‬.var‫ ينثون (يبثوا‬and in that case they arould not
hace remained after thee but a little while ; but if any of the other
conditions specified above be violated, the indicative alone can be
used : : 0.g.io I am fond of thee, lizló (or úúlép) útibi , well,
B I think thou speakest the truth (where the verb refers to present, and
not to future time(; ‫ أزور زیڈا‬Iwill risit Zaid, ‫ إذن زيد يو‬well
then, Zeid will treat thee with respect (where ‫د‬is
‫ زی‬separates us! fro

the verb(; ‫ أزورك‬Iwill oisit thee, ‫ إذن والله نده‬then, by God,thout

‫)أكرمك‬, ‫ن‬or‫ أغرك أإنذانإ‬Iwill
shalt assuredly repent it (where j is interposed
treat thee with respect in that case,or
, slojsius! viI in that case
C will treat thee with respect ; jest ý Us! alia by God, then, Iwill not
do it; sut es! cost of if thou comest to me,in that case I will come
to thee (in which four examples os! does not commence the clause, or
is dependent upon a preceding condition ).
REM. Owing to the Hebrew having lost the final vowels of the
imperfect, the form which it employs after such particles as ' ,
‫ פָּן יַעַן אֲשֶׁר לְמַעַן אֲשֶׁר‬, etc., can no longer be distinguished
from that which expresses the indicative. The same remark applies
D to the Syriac ; but the Æthiopic has introduced another distinction,
using, for example, the form 2:06 : Yěnágěr (root 11 ?: nagára,
' to speak ') for the indicative, and 23 : yếnger for the sub
junctive.

16. Since, in Arabic, the subjunctive is governed only by the

conjunction iſ, that, and other conjunctions that have the meaning
of I, the indicative must be used in all other subordinate clauses,
whether they be dependent upon a conjunctive or relative word, or >
§ 17] The Verb . - 2. The Moods. 35

‫ أعطانی ماآل‬he A
simply annexed to an undefined substantive ; as
gave me what I was to eat; ból w sjú ý he does not know
achere he is to go; ‫ یدخلهم جنات يخلدون فيها‬hewill bring them
into gardens, to dwell in them for ever . In such sentences the Arabic
language does not distinguish the intention from the effect. Hence
the first example may also be translated he gave me what I ate (at
that time), or what I am (now) eating, or what I shall (hereafter) eat ;
the second, where he is going or will go ; the third, in which they shall
duellfor ever . B

17. The Jussive, -connected with the imperative both in form

and signification , -implies an order. It is used :
DE

(a) With the particle J ( ósý the lãm of command) prefixed,

instead of the imperative ; as ‫ لينفق ذو سعة من سعته‬let the owner of
abundance spend ofhis abundance ; ils llc vaky let thy Lord make
an end of us. If the particleſ or sí be prefixed to y,J as is often the C
case, then y usually loses its vowel ; as ‫وعلى الله فليتو المؤمنون‬
‫دوره مو‬

in God, then,let the believers trust ; la de la Bislé ‫بی‬ ‫إن حدث‬

‫ل كذا‬Jansons
hús ‫ سبي‬cotc if anything happens to me,let it be sold and (the
proceeds)divided in such and such a tray ; ‫من أراد أن يثرك علمنا هذا‬
áčkovas ác whoever wishes to give up (the study of) this
science of ours for a time, let him do so now . It is the third person of
the jussive that is chiefly used in this way, while the second is very D
‫ قومواقصتي تم‬rise and let
rare ; examples of the first person are
me pray for you ; she joing and let us bear your sins ; [of the
second als make it (the tray of palmleaves) large, said to a woman,
Aġ. xvii. 90, last line. D. G. ].
REM. a. The particle J is rarely omitted in classical Arabic,
except in poetry ; e.g, ‫ا‬on
‫قلت يباب تديه دارها تأذن فانی موه‬
 36 PART THIRD . - Syntax. [S 17
A
coleg I said to a porter in whose charge was her house, Admit (me),
for I am her father-in -law and her neighbour (an instance of the
2nd pers
); .(; ‫ محمد تقيد تفسد كل نفس‬Muhammad,let every soul
be a ransom for thine ; ‫ ولين ين بلخير من تصيب‬but let there be
(granted to me) from Thee a share in good (deeds); aéit jih oben
stessi szló let thefeeble people of the fortress ofMáridin know—.
Some passages of the Ķor'ān, however, admit of being viewed in this
as
‫قل يعبادی الذین آمنوا يقيموا الصلوة وينفقوا مما رزقناهم‬
B say to my servants who have believed, let them observe prayer and
spend (in alms) of that which we have bestowed upon them ; but the
jussive may here be explained in accordance with what follows
under c, B.

Rem. b. The vowel of J is also sometimes dropped after 3;

as one on lyckas out then let them do away with their dirtiness, or
ignále
(6) After the particle ý not (‫ي‬suivi
‫ اله‬ý‫ لا‬the lalã of prohibition), in
C connection with which it expresses a prohibition or a wish that
something maynot be done; ‫ لا تحزن إن الله معنا وه‬be not grieved,
for God is with us; ‫ ربنا لا تؤاخذنا إن نسينا‬0 our Lord, punish us
not if ace forget ; ‫ لا يتخذ المؤمنون الكافرين أولياء‬letnotbelieverstake
unbelievers as friends; ‫ إذا ما خرجنا من دمشق قلا تعد‬achen ace
we go
forth from Damascus, let us not return.
D (c) a. In the protasis and apodosis of correlative conditional
clauses ,which depend upon or any particle having the sense of
8! (S$ 6, b, and 13). It stands in the protasis, when the verb is
neither a perfect, nor an imperfect preceded by ús, but a simple
imperfect ; and in the apodosis, when the verb is likewise a simple
imperfect, and not separated from the protasis by the conjunction
( for if this latter be the case, the indicative must be used ). For
example ‫ندم‬is‫ ت‬love ! if thou art hasty, thou wilt repent it;
$ 17] The Verb . - 2 . The Moods. 37

‫ من يعمل شوا يجز به‬he ocho doth evil,shall be recompensed for it ; A

‫ متى تأته تشو إلى ؤ نايه تجد خير نار عندما خير موقد‬then thon
comest to him , making for the light of his fire, thou findest the best of
fires,beside oohich is the best of kindlers: ‫حيثما تستقم يقدر لك الله‬
‫ تجاځا في غابر الأزمان‬teherever (or sohenever ) thou shalt pursue »
right course , God anill decree thee success in the time to come ; ‫اینها‬
‫الريح ثمنها تيل‬whithersoever the wind bends it, it bends ; ‫كيفما‬
‫ تتوجه تصادف خیرا‬however, thout setest out, thou wilt meet with B
good fortune; ‫خلیلی آتی تاتیانی تاتيا أخا غير ما يرضيكما لا يتناول‬
my two friends, however ye come to me, ye come to a brother who will
never do anything but achat pleases you ; ‫یا تومن تأمن غيرنا وإذا‬
‫ تم تدرك الأمن منا لم تزل حذا‬wohen we grant thee security ,thou art
secure from (all) others but us ; and when thou dost not obtain security
from us,thout ceasestnot to be afraid ; ‫فان ما تعدل به الريح ينزل‬
and whenever thewind turns it aside,it descends ; but ‫و من كان يريد‬
‫ حرف الآخرة نزد له في حرثه‬whosoever choosesthetillage of the life to
come,to him willwe give an ample increase in his tillage ; ‫إن يشرق فقد‬
‫ سرق أځ له من قبل‬: hesteals,(tohy, a brotherofhishas stolen before
‫ فمن يؤمن بربه قلا يخاف باولا مقا‬andwhosoever believein his
Lord , shall not fear a diminution (of his reward) nor wrong . - B. The
jussive also stands in the apodosis, when the protasis contains a verb
in the imperative for one of the expressions that have the meaning of D
an imperative (Vol. i. $ 368, rem . d)]; as ‫ عش قنا تكن لگا‬live
contented (and) thou wilt be a king; ‫ وأوفوا بعهدي أوف بعهدكم‬be
faithful to ( your) covenant with me, (and) I will be faithful to (my)
.covenant
with you ]‫عجقدروها ت;أل‬therefore
‫ أب‬let her at; ‫روني أقتل‬
‫ معنی‬let me slit his belly;:
csázó let me kil Müsā;cili eventi sie's
 38 PART THIRD . - Syntax. [$ 17

A ‫ وقولي لها جشأت نفسي عائلي حمدي أو تشتریحی‬andmysaying

to my soul, as often as it was stirred, Keep thy place (and ) thou wilt be
praised or find rest.] In this way may be explained the passage from
the Ķor'ân quoted under a, rem . a, viz. by supplying after Igió the
words ‫أقيموا الصلوة وأنفقوا‬, and regarding ‫يقيموا الصلوة وينفقوا‬ as

the apodosis to j *.—y. The jussive is used in a protasis that is

dependent upon 8 , etc. , because, when anything is supposed or
assumed , an order is, as it were, made that it be given or take place.
B That this is the correct account of the matter, is evident from the fact
of the jussive being employed in the apodosis as well of an imperative
as of a conditional protasis. The use of the jussive in the apodosis,
again, has for its reason, that, when a thing takes place or is assumed,
whatever depends upon it takes place or is assumed at the same time ;
and, consequently, when the one thing is ordered, the other too seems
to be ordered at the same time.

REM . a. It appears, then , that in two correlative conditional

clauses several modes of expression are possible ; viz. (a) perfect x
С perfect, as soon as if thou standest, I stand ; (B) jussive x
jussive,, as jomasdeins ! if thou art slothful,thou wilt suffer losst;
*
[It is sometimes difficult to say whether the second clause
contains an apodosis,or a qualificative sentence (åbo), or a circum

stantial definition )ijtó

‫)( حال‬. In the last two cases, of course, the indicative
Eg.in the words ‫ وليا يرثنی‬333
mustbeused. E.g. ‫)فهب بی من تدنك‬Koran
D xix. 5) give me, then, a successor of Thine own choice, who shall be my
heir, ‫يرثنی‬is a ‫صفة‬, but some readers pronounce ‫ يرثنی‬as an apodosis ;
in the passage ‫دعنا عافاك الله تعيش في هذا الظل ونشرب هذا الماء‬
‫ا الم‬Eko
‫ت‬B‫و‬odi ‫يأتين‬ sjWileave us (may God grant thee health !) abiding
under this shade and drinking this cool water, until death comes to us,
‫ تعيش‬and ‫شرب‬ are a ‫[ حال‬.
† (Very rarely poets have the imperfect indicative ; see Sibawèih
i. 388, Kāmil p. 78. D. G.]
$ 17] The Verb . - 2. The Moods. 39

)7( jussivex perfect ,as ‫إن تصبر ظفرت‬i thou art patient,thou wilt A
pretail ; (68) perfect x jassive, as ‫إن صبرت تظفر‬, in which case the
imperfect indicative is also admissible, with or without us, as
‫ وإن أتاه خليل يوم مئلة يقول لا غایب مالی ولا كرم‬and if a
friend comes to him on a day when he has need ) of asking, he says

) ‫ ټول‬instead of ‫(يقل‬, Mycamels areneither absent(ormy property

is neitherhidden)nor withheld (from thee(; ‫فإن كانت العرب جائلة‬
‫مظربه في أثرك لا تجد غيرك‬and if the Arabs go aboutin agitation B
on thy track, they will not find any other but thee. The third form
of expression is rarer than the others. The following remarks
may here be added : ( 1 If an oath precedes, the verb in the
protasis is invariably a perfect, whilst as a rule the indicative or
the energetic ($ 19, e) is used in the apodosis, e.g, ‫فوالله لئن‬
‫ خرجت منها لا ترجع إليها‬for, by God ! if thou go forth from the
toon , thon will never return to it ; ‫ والله إن قام زید تقمت‬by God!
‫تو‬

if Zeid rises, I rise also ; aos aj moj sto es atíg by God ! if a

I

Zèid come, I will honour him . There are, however, exceptions not
‫ر‬
only in poetry, but also in prose , as ‫وأيم الله تبين تقيم قائنی‬
‫ النصر لا تفي الشهادة إن شاء الله‬by the oaths of God ! if Imeet
them and victory escapes me, martyrdom will not escape me, 80 God
will ( Tab. ii. 644, 1. 15).
). (2 ) The jussive in the protasis is
necessary if the verb be preceded by the negative , thus after
‫ (إن = ) إ‬: ‫ م‬not,as
‫لا تفعلوه من فتنة في الأرض وفاز كبير‬
unless ye do the same, there will be discord in the land and great D
corruption ; ‫ إلا تنصروه فقد نصره الله‬ifwewill notaid him ,certainly
God did aid him . ( 3) The imperfect indicative is used in the
apodosis, if the verb is meant to express expectation or order, e.g.
‫إن أفرجت عنگم تخرجون وتأتمون بأيديه ما تجدونه في الأسواق‬
‫ من آلات وأخشاب‬if I let you go, wemust
ge go and take ashat of
implements and timber you find in the bazaars (comp. $ 8, c, rem . b).
(4) If the protasis be a nominal sentence , only the perfect may be
 40 PART THIRD . — Syntax. [S 17

A
used,as ‫ وإن أحد من المشركين استجارك فأجره‬، any one of the
polytheists ask protection of thee, grant it him . (5) After
though only the perfect, or the jussive with , is used , as ‫زیڈ وإن‬
‫ كثر ماله بخيل‬Zaid, though hebe rich,as stringy : ‫وإن الكثيب الفرد‬
‫ من جانب الحمى إلى وإن تم اته تحبيب‬and verily a solitaryhill
from the side of el- Ħimā is dear to me, though I have not been to it.
(6) In nominal sentences the conditional phrase is often placed
B
between the subject and thepredicate, as ‫إنا إن شاء الله تمهتدون‬
truly, if God please, we shall be guided rightly ; comp. the quotations
under (5). ]
REM. b. On the cases in which the apodosis of a clause con
>
taining ‫!إن‬,or any of its “ sisters,” must be introduced by us, see
$ 187.

REM. C. (1 ) When we have in an apodosis a verb in the jussive,

and there follows another verb in the imperfect, connected with the
former by a conjunction , then (a) if the conjunction be org,
Or
‫ رو‬the
C
second verb may be put in the jussive or in the indicative, more
‫وإن تبدوا ما في أنفسكم أو تخفوه‬
rarely in the subjunctive, as
‫ يحاسبهبه الله فيغفر لمن يشاء ويعذب من يشاء‬and iif ge disclose
what is in your souls or conceal it, God will reckon with you for it,
and will forgive whom He pleases, and punish whom He pleases ;
‫ افلياغسفترئناف‬and ‫ويعذب‬, and He will forgive and will punish ) ‫على‬
or

as beginning a new proposition ); or finally wees and

D ‫ ويعذب‬governed by ‫ أن‬understood ; but (R)if the conjunction be
3, the subjunctive is not allowed ( comp. $ 15, e, rem.). (2) When
we have in a protasis a verb in the jussive, and there follows
another verb in the imperfect, connected with the former by
‫ه لا‬in‫الل‬the‫فإن‬jussive
‫ في‬or ‫و‬, the second verb should‫ضيع‬be‫ ي‬put ‫ من يثق‬the
‫ويصبر‬, although ‫إنه‬
subjunctive is allowable ; as

‫أجر المحسنين‬terilythosoever feareth God and hath patience, God

inded willnot let theretoard of the righteouteperish ; ‫ومن يقترب منا‬
$ 19] The Verb . - 2 . The Moods. 41

one casing and whosoever approaches us and humbles himself,we A

grant him protection .
REM. d . The Hebrew cannot, owing to the loss of the final
vowels, distinguish in every case the jussive from the indicative and
subjunctive ; but the shortened form of the imperfect, wherever it
exists, is the proper one to be used in most of the above cases. It

has, however, no particle corresponding to J, and uses ‫ אל‬in

certain cases instead of MS (01). The Æthiopic employs the shorter
form of the imperfect, 2396 : yếngěr, to express the jussive as B
well as the subjunctive ( see § 15, rem. ), and often prefixes to it the
particle 0 : lă = J, of which J is a dialectic form .

18. The jussive is also used after the particles not,and is not
get (compounded of ‫ تم‬and the ‫ ما الديمومة‬, $ 7(; .e.g ‫فلم أر يوما كان‬
ise si but I have not seen a day in which there were more
weepers ; wrić lesz és cs they have not yet tasted my punishment o
( for splác). See $ 12. The verb after and has, however, only
the form , not the signification, of the jussive, and their effect upon
the following imperfect seems to be similar to that which the Hebrew
wāw consecutivum (-1) exercises upon the imperfect annexed to it.
Rem. If the particle j be followed by two or more imperfects,
of which the second depends upon the first, the third upon the
second, and so on, then, of co se, the first alone is put in the
jussive ; e.g, ‫ لم يكن يعرف يسبح‬he did not knoo (hono
( ) to savim .. DD
See § 12, and § 8, d , e.

19. The Energetic of the imperfect (see $ 14) is used : :

(a) With the particle truly,verily, surely, prefixed to it, both

in simple asseverations and in those that are strengthened by an oath ;
as ‫ بكنا‬sue ‫ والذين جاهدوا فينا لنهدينهم‬and those acho have striven in
our ((holy) cause, we will surely guide in our paths ; ‫الترون‬
‫ ال‬geo
W. II . 6
 42 Part THIRD. —Syntax. [S 19

A
ye shall surely see hell-fire; mogu se hodí
samonapolis verily within a
•
short time theywillrepent it ; ‫ والله لأوبكم غير هذا الأدب‬byGod !
I will teach you manners different from these; so stjerne
ivecoi then, by Thy glory, I will surely lead them all astray.
(6) In commands or prohibitions, wishes, and questions ; as
‫ فلا تموتن إلا وأنتم مسلمون‬so do not die unlesswe have become (or
w

B without having become) Muslims; Best slims would that thou wouldst
‫ أو تنزقلوت !القضية تيت‬why dost thout not come doun ? ) ‫وهل رجعن‬
comeback
Bongo but can “ would that” bring back the thing that has
passed ancany?[ ‫لا يركن أحد إلى الإحجام يوم الوغى متوفا يحمام‬
let no one incline to hang back on the day of battle, fearing death ;
‫ فلا تحرمنی نائلا عن جنابة‬do not then refusemea gift,after I have
come from such a distance ; [tõlá steji ý let me not see you here ;
$
‫و‬C ‫ أقسمت عليك لا تفعدن‬I beseech you to do it [.
‫رش‬

[Rem. The rare construction of his with the energetic, as in

óss hoy perhaps you will rise, is explained by native grammarians
as due to its meaning perhaps or sometimes which approximates to
a prohibition. In contrast to it, they say also sus já comes
you say that often. D. G. ]
(c) In the apodosis of correlative conditional clauses, in which
case J is prefixed to the protasis as well as to the apodosis ; as
D ‫الشمس والقمر توت الله‬ ‫ولئن سألتهم من خلق السموات والأرض و‬
and if thou askest them , Who created the heavens and the earth, and
obliged sun and moon to serve Him ? verily they will say, God ;
oli leimable andentert verily, if he does not desist,we shall seize
and drag (him) by theforelock.
[Rem. If ſ does not immediately precede the verb of the
apodosis, the indicative is used, as ‫ولئن مثه أو تتم إلى الله‬
§ 20] The Verb. - 2. The Moods. 43

ügent and certainly, if ye die or are slain, to God shall ye be A

gathered .]

(d) In the protasis of a sentence after op (= b6 w! iC) *; as

‫ إهماداتيضرفبلا زخيدوافأضعرليبهكم‬i‫تبع‬thou‫فمن‬beatest
‫ هدى‬Zaid‫مني‬, Iwill
‫يأتيتكم‬beatthee
‫و‬
‫منههباطواجم;يعا فإما‬
get ye down from it (Paradise) , all together ; and if there shall
(hereafter) come unto you guidance from me, then whosoever shall
‫نشر ه‬

‫ا ثقف‬LoL
follow my guidance, on them no fear shall come; comes ‫ فإم‬B
‫ الحرب فشرد بهم من خلفهم‬and if thou capturethem in battle,then
put to flight, by (making an example of ) them, those who are behind
them ; ‫فما ترين من البشر أحدا ولی إنی تر ينرحمن وما‬
and if thou shouldst see any one of mankind, say, Verily I have vowed
aa fast unto the God ofmercy : ‫منتقمون‬e ‫ قاماتهب بك فانا منهم‬and
if we take thee away (by death ), we will surely avenge ourselves
on them . С

[ (e) The energetic may be used (a)

( after her and similar
120
‫ تونين أتك‬lavoro wherever you may be, I will come to
, sui
compounds,as
you ; (8)after ‫) ما الإبهامية‬.Vol
. i $ 353 * ( 2 ‫ بجهد ما تبلغ‬with
as

WE

some painstaking you will certainly accomplish it ; sting to every

with some eye I will assuredly see thee.]

20. No negative particle can be placed before the imperative. D

Consequently, when a prohibition is uttered, the jussive must be
used ; a8 ‫ أمكث شهرين ولا تعجل في الإختلاف إلى الأئة‬remain two
months, and be not in a haste to run from one 'imām to another ;

* ][ This ‫ ما‬iis called ‫ ما يتأكيد معنى الشرط‬to strengthen the

conditional meaning, Beidāwi on Ķor'ān vii. 33. R. S. Sometimes
‫ إما‬isfollowed by a jussive,as ‫ إما تأتني أرمد‬:if thout cometome, I
will treat thee with honour. See an example § 152, d , rem. ]
 44 PART THIRD . - Syntax . [$ 21

A
Més ing som skuter sie do not then place me on a level with
( compare me with) one who is inexperienced . The energetic forms of
‫ أضر‬aty strike, by
the imperative serve to increase its force; as ‫ب‬voi
God ! ‫ تعلمن أن طول العيش تعذيب‬learn that length of life is a
punishment or torment ) ‫ تعذيب‬in rhyme for ‫الكبرياء ربنا ;(تعذيب‬
‫ واثق‬man i den ö ás glory belongs to God (alone), as an
attribute peculiar to Him ; therefore keep thyself afar from it, and
B fear (Him ).
[ Rem. a. In verbs that signify to go, to move ) ‫ذهب مضی‬,
‫أثی‬, ‫قام وراح رجع‬,etc.)the dual and the plural of the firstperson
of our imperative are often replaced in Arabic by an imperative
with ‫ () باء العدية‬$ 56 , rem .d'), tus
as ‫ امض بنا‬to a man , ‫امضي بنا‬ to a

woman,‫ امضابا‬to two persons, ‫ امضوا بنا‬or ‫ امضين بنا‬to more,let

us go. A modern manner of expressing the same thing is to employ
с
‫()تروح‬bigló)( lista
the imperative of a verb signifying to let, as eaö or

ego (ligés, lázcs) lič; (comp. Fleischer, Kl. Schr. ii. 636 seq.).
Rem.b. The imperative of the verb is with the name of a
person in the accusative is used to express one's guessing that the
person whom one sees coming, or whom one meets with, is that
w

ës I presume that the person approaching is

individual, as » Ś
Abū Darr; wij vi s I guess that you are Abū Zèid. (See the
D Gloss. on Țabari. ) D. G. )

3. The Government of the Verb.

21. The verb may govern either ( a) the accusative of a noun, or
(6) a preposition with the genitive of a noun, which takes the place of
the accusative and gives greater precision and accuracy to the ex
pression. This government is not restricted to the finite tenses of
the verb, but extends to the nomen verbi or actionis, the nomina
agentis and patientis, and other verbal substantives and adjectives,
§ 23] The Verb. — 3. Government of the Verb.—(a) The Accus. 45
whenever and in so far as these different kinds of nouns contain A
somewhat of the conception or nature of the verb. - The verb, too,
need not necessarily be expressed ; it may be understood , or it may
lie concealed, as it were, in a particle that has a verbal force.

(a) The Accusative.

22. The verb governs the accusative of the noun - which we may
call the determinative case of the verb or the adverbial case (see Vol. i.
§ 364)—either B

(a) as an objective complement (determinans), i.e. as that which ,

by assigning its object, limits and restricts the act ; or
(6) as an adverbial complement in a stricter sense, indicating
various limitations of the verb, which are expressed in non - Semitic
languages by adverbs, prepositions with their respective cases, con
junctive clauses, or (as in the Slavonic languages) by the instrumental
case .

23. Most transitive verbs take the objective complement in the C

accusative, though a considerable number of them are connected with
the object by means of a preposition. Not a few are construed in
both ways with a variety of significations, and different prepositions
may sometimes be joined to the same verb with a difference of
meaning ; e.g.ólás he called him, hiç ö los he prayed that he might
receive something as a blessing, atc le's he cursed him *; ]Is‫ب في‬vous
‫رغ‬
istui he coveted the thing, áic viss he shunned it). In other cases aa
transitive verb may be construed indifferently with the accusative or D
with a preposition and the genitive , the former being the older and
more vigorous, the latter the younger and feebler construction ; e.g.
áté to adhere to, to attach oneself to,and as to adhere to, to overtake,
are construed indifferently with the accusative of the person or with

[In a les he blessed him and autá lás he cursed him , the object
atí has been omitted. The proper signification is he prayed to God
for him and against him . D. G. ]
 46 PART THIRD . — Syntax . [$ 23
A and the genitive. More rarely the converse is the case, the
accusative being the later and less correct construction ; e.g. eu to
have finished, to have done with, is construed with. io, and lasto
have need of, to be in want of, with of,whereas in modern Arabic
both take the accusative.

REM . a . Transitive verbs are called by the Arab grammarians

‫الأفعال المتعدية‬, and they designate by this name not only those
B verbs which govern their object in the accusative, but also those
which connect themselves with it by means of a preposition. The
former are distinguished as ‫ الأفعال المتعدية بأنفسها‬theverbs that
pass on (to an object) through themselves (and not by help of a
preposition) and the latter as long
‫ة بغيرها‬as‫تع‬vendi
‫ل الم‬jlerjithe
‫ الأفعا‬verbs that
pass on (lo an object) through something else than themselves ( viz.
sem jy through a preposition ). For example, el to reach,to
arrive (of a message, etc.), is a ‫ متعت بنفسه‬jes
‫فعل‬, because wesay
с ‫ بلغنی الخبر‬the newsreached me; but ‫ قدر‬to have power, to be able,
isa ‫فعل مع بغير‬,because it is construed with ‫على‬, and wesay
se ots juí he was able to do something.
REM. b. Only careful study and the use of the dictionary can
teach the learner whether a verb is construed with the accusative,
or with a preposition, or with both ; and, if more than one con
struction be admissible, what are the different meanings that the
verb assumes. Here we merely remark that verbs signifying to
D come, which are construed in Latin and English with prepositions,
‫ا عامر‬listo
admit in Arabic also the accusative ; as joká ‫ جان‬Amir came to
us; ‫!إن الغباء وأولاد البراء يأتوني من أقطار الأ‬strangersand
the sons of the great come to me from (all) quarters of the earth
(compare in Hebrew X3 with the accusative, e.g. Ps. c. 4, Prov.
ii. 19, Lament. i. 10). Hence these verbs have in Arabic a personal
passive, so that we may say isang
‫ى بشئ‬sa‫ أت‬lemeascome to with a thing,
§ 24] The Verb . — 3. Government of the Verb.— (a ) The Accus. 47

i e. it was brought to him, the active construction being is ott A

he came to him with a thing, i.e. he brought it to him .
[ Rem. c. The place of the objective complement may be
supplied by an entire sentence, as ‫ علمت أن زيدا خارج‬I known
that Zèid is going forth.. Comp.. SS 35, 6, B, 78, 88, 114. It may
not be superfluous to note here that the verb jis to say, or a
derivative thereof,, is followed by ! if the saying to which that
verbrelatex is repeated )ål
‫(چگانية‬, as ‫ وقولهم إنا قتلنا المسيح‬andtheir B
saying , Verily uoe have slain theMessiah : ‫فإن قله إلا ظلمنا فلم‬
wimbo uć and if ye say that we did wrong, (our answer is) we did
no wrong ( ļamāsa 55); agus is felt I said, Verily Zèid is
standing. But when the following words explain what is said,
‫ أن‬must be used , as in the saying ‫لاما كما أن‬
WE
‫قد قلت تك‬
‫ أباك شريف وأنك عاقل‬Ihave said to the a good saying :thatthey
father is noble and thatthou are intelligent ; ‫و أول ما أقول أني أحمد‬
atſthe first word I speak is that I praise God. The conjunction ☺
is used also when jiś has the meaning of us to think (S 24, rem .c)
as
‫ متى تقول أنه منطلق‬then dost thou think that he is going ?
whereas ‫ متى تقول إنك ذاهب‬would mean then dontthou say that
thou art going ?]

24. Many verbs take tuo objective complements in the accusative,

either both of the person , or both of the thing, or the one of the D
person and the other of the thing. – These verbs form two classes,
according to the relation of their objects to one another; the first
class consisting of those whose objects are different from , and in no
way connected with, one another, the second of those whose objects
>

stand to one another in the relation of subject and predicate. — a) To

the first class belong all causatives of the second and fourth verbal
forms (Vol. i. S 41 and 45), whose ground-form is transitive and
governs an accusative ; as also verbs that signify to fill or satisfy, give,
deprive, forbid , ask, entreat, and the like, the most of which have
 48 PART THIRD . - Syntax. [S 24
A likewise a causative meaning. For example : alarm bls asió he taught
him the science of astronomy ;: ‫ ابنة أخي‬، ‫ زوجت زید‬I gave Zeid my
‫مهمه‬

brother's daughter in marriage ; jos i spółči he informed me of

the thing (lit., he made me know it); što
‫هر‬
i stó he filled the bucket 1

with water ; linea demil he let him eat as much bread as he could
)‫ شبع بزا‬he ate asmuch bread as he could (; ‫ أطعمه السيف‬helethim
B taste the stora (ran him through with it (; ‫قوا زيدا مرا مسموم‬
they gave Zeid poisoned wine to drink; lációvási
y borókasi he gave him the
book ;:‫رزقه الله العمر‬, God gave him his life ; ‫ وقاه اللبن‬he gave him
milk in abundance : ‫ أنشدنی شعرا‬lerecited a poem to me; ‫وعدنا الله‬
‫ الحيوة الأبدية‬God haspromised as everlasting Life ; ‫حمه الله بركة‬
‫ العلم‬God hats deprived him of theblessing of learning, ‫قنا عذاب النار‬
С preserve us from the punishment of hell-fire (ö imperative of sós,
.i 8178 (; ‫ اسئل الله العفو‬ask parda or God; ‫أستغفر الله با‬
.Vol
ances Band I beg forgiveness of God for sins that I am not able to
2
count (comp. $ 70, rem. e) ; ay smo jest do I have
enjoined thee (to do) the best ; do what thou hast been ordered to do).
(6) To the second class belong (a) verbs which mean to make, appoint,
call, name, and the like ; and (B) those verbs which are called by the
OE

D Arab grammarians wglörjlesi verbs of the heart, i.e.which signify an

act that takes place in the mind, or ‫أفعال اليقين والشبي أو الرجحان‬
verbs of certainty and doubt or preponderance ( of probability), such as
ests to see, think, know, ('sat (pass. IV.of sij) to think, believe],óté
to know , tag to find ,perceive,sis to know ; jlá to think,imagine,
buie to think, believe, fumé to think, reckon , suppose, its to think,
deem , is to count, reckon , love to think, opine, jest to believe, think,
mingi to imagine, fancy, jis in the sense of to think, and the im
 $ 24] The Verb. — 3. Government of the Verb.—(a) The Accus. 49

peratives ‫ تعلم‬learn , knour, and ‫ هب‬suppose, think . For example : A

)‫ الذي جعل م الأرض فراشا(ع‬arho hathmadetheearth a bed for you ;
‫ته ر‬
‫ صرت البين إبريقا‬Ihavemade the clau (into) a jug; ‫واتخذوهالبلنهیإبرهيم‬
bluda and God took Abraham ( for) a friend ; illis áví sending may
God makeme a ransom for thee ! ‫فرد شعورهن الود بيتنا‬and it (Fate
or Fortune) turned their black hair achite ; ‫ دعوته محمدا‬I called him
‫در ر‬

Muhammad ; ‫» وهيه تعليم المتعلم طريق العلم‬andd IInamed it (my B

book) “ The Instruction
‫ہ‬
of the Learner in the Path of Learning ' ;
)8(‫ إنهم يرونه بعيدا‬they indeed think it far af'; ‫رأيت أحق الحق حق‬
‫ المعتم‬I think the duty are one to a teacher the greatest of duties ;
‫ رأيت الله أخبر ځل شي محاولة‬I know thatGod is the greatest of all
in pourer oftill ; )‫ أين تي بشرا جالا‬scherethinkest thou that By :
sitting ?[; ‫ علمتك التبادل المعروف‬I know that thou art liberal in the
erercise of bounty ; ‫ وإن وجدنا أكثرهم تفاسقين‬and verily tec
are
found most of them evil-doers; ‫ وجدته شيا حليها‬I found him
a mild,or gentle,old man ; úléi iwej jlás I think Zəid is thy
brother ; ‫ وما أظن الشاعة قائمة‬and I do not think the hour )
judgment)isathand; ‫ حسب الثقى والجود خیر تجارة رباحا‬Ideemed
piety and generosity the best merchandise in respect of profit ; vg
‫ تحسبن الذين قتلوا في سبيل الله أمواتا‬and do not deen those dead D
who have been slain on God's path (i.e. fighting for their religion) ;
‫ فلا تغير المولى شريك في الغنى‬do not then reckon themala (Or
client) a sharer with thee in (his time of) affluence ; si Bis is
‫ أبا عمرو أخا ثقة‬Isupposed'Aba Amr tobe a trusty friend : ‫وجعلوا‬
‫ المملكة الذين هم عباد الرحمن إناثا‬and the believe the angels,who
,
are the servants of the Merciful, (to le) females ; ‫جعله عبدا شتمه‬
W. II , 7
 50 PART THIRD . - Syntax. [$ 24

‫أجهاد‬
‫ تول‬ajuns
A I thought he was a slave, and so I abused him ; şi ser jyát
‫ تعمر أبي أم متجاهلينا‬by thy father's life, lost thou think the song
of Lu’ay are ignorant, or (only) pretending to be so ? (in rhyme for
‫ تعلم شفاء النفس قهر عدوها ;( متجاهلين‬know that the healingof the
soulisthe conquering of its enemy; ‫فقلت أجنی با مالك و فهینی‬
LÓLÓ 1 Mot and I said, Protect me, O 'Abū Mālik, and if not, deem me
>

a lost man ( in rhyme for LÓ) ; lá có íú csinos suppose me a friend

B of thine.
REM . a . Of the two objective complements, that which is the
subject is called jo si Jocesji the first object, and the other, or
predicate, ‫مفعول الثاني‬.th e
‫ ال‬second otject
Rem .b. When verbs like sig and log are mere ‫أفعال الحس‬
or verbs of sense,-i.e. express nothing but acts of the external
organs of sense, --they may still be connected with two accusatives,

butthesecond accusative is no longer a ‫ مفعول ثان‬or second object,

С but a ‫حال‬ or circumstantial accusative, i.e. an accusative expressing
a state or condition of the object in actual connection with those
.acts
; e.g ‫ رايت نائما‬I saw thee sleeping,‫ وجدته مريضا‬I foundhima
sick in a state of sleep, of sickness *). In these and similar phrases
ist, and long may often be translated by the very same words,
whether they are ‫أفعال القلب‬ ‫ ;أفعال الحس‬but, in the latter
or

case, the object is merely the individual, apart from any predicate,
whereas, in the former, it is the logical proposition you were asleep,
Dhe was sick, that is to say, the individual as the possessor of this
quality.
REM . C. The above construction of juí is usually restricted to
the 2nd pers. sing. imperf. indic. in an interrogation, provided that

* [Instead of the predicative accusative the imperfect indicative

‫گه ر ر‬
may be used, as leis anoty I saw him do. Comp. $ 8, e, $ 74, and also
the perfect, as sás éles tiog I found that you had done such
and such a thing.)
§ 2+] The Verb . - 3 . Government of the Verb. — a) The Accus. 51
the interrogative particle is not separated from the verb by anything A
but a preposition with its complement or an object of the verb, as
in the example cited . Wemust not say ‫أأنت تقول عمرا منطلقا‬, but
Selais gjes in the nominative. [ Comp. $ 23, rem . c.]
Rem.d.
, . The fourth forin of the viãi jwi governs
‫أفعال القلب‬ three
.accusa; o.g ‫ يريكم أعمالكم خبيث‬hewillmake you thinkyour
tives
actions bal; ‫ أزى الله الناس أيوب صابرا وأعلمهم إياه صديقا‬God has
made men think Job patient and know him to be most veracious. B
Similarly ‫ حث‬, ‫ خبر‬or ‫أخبر‬,, and
and ‫نباأ‬ or ,
‫با‬.to
‫ان‬, tell or inforn
REM . e.
The wiór jest may also be construed so as to
exercise no grammatical influence upon the clause which is im
mediately dependent upon them. This happens ( 1 ) when the verb
is inserted parenthetically, in which case, however, the accusative
is preferable, as ‫ریدا ظنت جاهلا‬, or ‫زید ظننت جاهل‬, Zeid is,,
I think, a fool ; ( 2) when it is put at the end of the sentence, in
which case the nominative is preferable, as ‫زید صادق ظننت‬, or C
lósló lúj,Zèid is truthful, I think ; (3) when it is placed at
the beginning of the sentence, but the dependent clause is either
negative, or interrogative, or else an affirmative clause introduced
by the particle ſ truly, as ‫ ظننت ما زید صادق‬I think Zuld is not
truthful, ‫ ما علمت أزيد عندك أم عمرو‬I do not know whether Zeit
Je pense
is in thy house or “Amr, som való I know which of them is
thy father, est un jeu so I think Zèid is standing up. In the D

last example ‫ تزيد قائم‬is virtually ]‫على التقدير‬,.comp

. Vol.i
$ 310] in the accusative, for if another object be added, without the
particle ſ being prefixed to it, it is put in the accusative, as
‫ ظننت تريد قائم وعهرا منطلقا‬I think Zeid is standing up and awar
going away. — In the first two cases the infinitive bus may be used
‫ زی‬Zèid
‫ ذاهب‬últás ‫د‬mij
in the accusative instead of the finite verb,, as fuels
 52 Part THIRD.— Syntax. [S 25

A
is, away, ‫ ظنی مقیم‬,
s,asthou thinkest, going anony ‫ زيد أو بنی زید‬-
In modern Arabic the particle Bf is interposed between the
‫أناهلمقجلابء‬,‫يفعل‬and
‫ يج‬a‫تى‬dependent ‫الاسم ما هو ت‬clause
‫م أدر أنه م‬interrogative ‫ملاابعدلأمتن يأبنين أ‬
‫ول;ا أن‬as
it must be first explained what the noun is.

25. If the verbs of the two classes mentioned in $ 24 are put

B in the passive voice , one of the two accusatives becomes the nomina
tive. In the case of the first class, it is the accusative of the person ;
.e.g‫ علم علم النيئة‬heastaught thescience of astronomy; ‫أطعم الشيف‬
he acasmade to taste the sacord (was stabbed with it(; ‫شقى الوزير‬
logamo Ló the vizir was given poisoned water to drink, or poisoned
water was given to the vizir to drink ; jer j; life was granted him ;
‫ أنشد شعرا يغيره‬a0 poem by another (author)tas recited to me;;
C ‫ حرم بركة العلم‬heaus deprived of the blessing of learning. Should
it happen that both accusatives are accusatives of the person, that
which is next to the verb becomes the nominative ; as ‫زوج زید ابنة‬
‫ أخي‬Zeid aras given mybrother's daughter inmarriageor my brother's
daughter was given in marriage to Zeid. If both are accusatives of
the thing, that one becomes the nominative which designates the
thing that is affected by, or receives or passes into the other, or the
D reverse ; as ū ir málo the bucket was filled with water.-In the
case of the second class, that accusative which is the subject of the
.other
becomesthenominative ; e.g ‫ جعلت تته الأرض فراشا‬the earth
hasbeenmade a bed for you ; ‫ طير الطين إبريقا‬theclay hasbeenmade
into a jug,; ‫ زید مظنون شجاعا‬Zeid is thought brute : ‫حسبوا أمواتا‬
they are deened dead ; ‫ دريت الوفي العهد يیا غرو‬thou art known as the
faithful keeper of thy promise, O‘Orwa ( for ógó .
§ 26] The Verb . — 3. Government of the Verb.— (a ) The Accus. 53
REM. a.
As the verb ‫ی‬Lo‫رأ‬i, to come, is construed with the AA
accusative of the person (s 23, rem. b), its fourth form (Ls37)
becomes doubly transitive, and takes an accusative both of the
rso
and of thething
.pe ; e.g ‫لكتاب‬n
‫ آتی( موسى بني إسرائيل ا‬Mosed
brought the (holy) book to the children of Israel (lit. made it come to
them). Now, as this accusative of the thing is the nearer object of
‫آئی‬, we should expect it to become the nominative when the verb
passes into the passive (Gji); but the reverse is the case, because
the person is of greater importance than the thing. We say B
therefore ‫راأئويلتی بنو إسرائيل الكتاب‬the‫ي( إس‬holy
‫ب) بن‬book
‫ الكتا‬artsbroughtto
‫أوتي‬
the children of Israel, and not
REM . b. If the verb should happen to govern three accusatives
in the active voice ($ 24, rem. d ), that which is next to the verb
.b ec
the nominative passive ; e.g ‫ا‬es
to theom ‫أعلم زید عمرا قادم‬
Zèid was informed that ' Amr was approaching; westsites;
leve us and I used to think Zèid, as was (commonly) said,
‫و هه‬

aa lord; áásjó leje‫ بالعراق‬color rose I was told (that) Lèila was sick c
in čl- Irāk ; láis is when thou art told (that) I am sick.
26. All verbs, whether transitive or intransitive, active or passive,
may take their own abstract nouns ( nomina verbi or infinitives, Vol. i.
$ 195), as also the deverbal nouns of the classes nomina vicis and
nomina speciei (Vol. i. SS 219, 220), as objective complements in the
accusative. This may be the case either when they have no other
objective complement or complements, or when they have one or
more ; and the verbal noun may either stand alone, or it may be D
connected with an adjective or demonstrative pronoun, a noun or
pronoun in the genitive, or a descriptive or relative clause. For
example: ‫ا‬via
‫ ضرب‬já lit.he struck a striking, lagi oli he slept a sleep,
the most sil he journeyed a journey ; wpó lit. he was struck (with)
a striking; ‫ ضربه ضرب وضربني ضربتين أو ضربات‬I struck him one
‫ و‬,
stroke, and he struck me two or more strokes ; lines and lowej jes
 54 PART THIRD . — Syntax. IS 26

A lit. he struck Zeid ( as to) his head (with) a striking; la cual juos
or, omitting the nomen verbi, la ligne I gave him a violent
beating**; ‫ فرح فرحا عظيما‬he rejoiced (with )a great joy; ‫ضمني إلى‬
‫ صدرها ضما شديدا‬shecloped metightly toher breast, ‫مشي مشية حنه‬
he walked (with) a graceful gait ; vui lúdo gazó he beat me in this
manner , lit. (with ) this beating; ‫ يحفظون أسرارهم هذا الحفظ‬they
B keep their secrets (with) this keeping (i.e. so carefully); jus digué
‫ الظالم‬he beat him as a cruel oppressor does, or ‫» » ضرب المؤدب‬ (is

teacher does ; ‫ ځاى خوف الجبان‬he feared as a coacard Jears ; ‫نظرت‬

vzáji izlij and I looked at him ( with) the look of an angry (man );
‫م ه‬

Quj wój vi is! when the earth shall quake (with) her quaking ;
ségi só he beat me so as to hurt me much, lit.he beut me
)seith )a beating tohich painedme; ‫ضربني الضرب الذي لا يخفى عليك‬
C he gave me a good beating, as you know well, lit. he beat me (with) the
beating which is not concealed from you.This objective‫وہ ہر‬
complement,
which is called by the Arab grammarians bien joeivi, the absolute
2

object ř , orjanji(see Vol. i . $ 195, rem .), is used in the two following
)

ways.

( ru) When it stands alone and undefined Coro), it is employed

‫ پلأكيد‬for strengthening, or ‫ يلعظيم‬for magnifying,ie. to add
‫ د ره‬.
D greater force to the verb ; e.g. lus Mode He hath numbered them
(with) a numbering (i.e. with an exact numbering);vasi va 15!
‫ ضرب‬may,
‫ه شدیدا‬agus
• The undetermined object in such phrases as las
however, where the sense allows or requires it, assume a more definite
meaning,and be viewed as an accusative of time ; e.g. bigbo ilojko
may be translated they travelled a long time, scil. Diges úlój.
† Because it does not, like the object in a narrower sense, depend
only upon a verb that governs one, two, or three accusatives in the
active voice, or one or two accusatives in the passive.
§ 26] The Verb.- 3. Government of the Verb. —a) The Accus. 55

e juai dengesing when the earth shall beshaken (with) a shaking A

(i.e. shaken violently ), and the mountains be crumbled (with) a crumbling
)

(i.e. crumbled to dust) ; Gure est le momenting and they disdain ( with) a
E
disdaining (i.e. are hughtily disdainful); lo; áolis jos he crushed
his bones (with) a crushing (i.e. crushed them to pieces ). This sig
nification lies in the indefiniteness of the verbal noun , which leaves
the verbal idea quite unlimited in its force and effect.
REM. a. For still greater emphasis the maşdar may be repeated, B
Śs Šs ‫ض‬voi
as Š ‫ الأر‬Š; is! when the earth shall be crushed (with)
crushing, crushing.
[REM. b. For the same purpose sometimes the maşdar accom
panied by a suffix referring to the logical subject is put in the
nominative, as ómo koe he exerted himself strenuously ( properly
his energy exerted itself, became real exertion ); balls Ús he was
profoundly in error (prop. his error became error indeed ) ; ode des c
w

he was very far off; breve she became thoroughly mad ;

‫ هرر‬:
‫ه‬asso
‫ع جوع‬elo‫ جا‬he had a vehement hunger. We have a similar figure of
speechin the phrases que en intense whiteness of the hair ;
‫ شعر شاعر‬excellent‫ل‬poetry
‫ تيث لائل ;ويل وائ‬a very dark night; ‫مو مائت‬
a violent death ; vis is a great woe. D. G.]
REM . C. A maşdar of this kind cannot, of course, form a dual
or plural, for the mere fact of its doing so brings it at once under a
.diffe
head ‫ ضربني ضضرببيينني‬can only mean he beatme on tuoo D
rent
different occasions ; and in general the dual or plural is only
admissible in the case of a maşdar used agil (see the end of the
section), when there is a difference of kinds, as ‫سرت سیری زیږ‬
‫ح‬mais
‫ن والقبي‬commissi
‫ م‬I went the two paces (or courses) of Zeid, the good
w ‫و‬

and thebaad ; ‫ أحبك بين حب الوداد وبا إن أمن يذاقا‬Ilove

Thee (with) two kinds of love, (with ) the love of affection, and (with)
another love, because Thou art entitled thereto (or worthy thereof ).
 56 PART THIRD. - Syntax. [$ 26
A (6) When it is connected with an adjective or demonstrative
pronoun, a genitive, or a descriptive or relative clause ( see the
examples given above), it defines and limits the verbal idea by an
addition which is commonly expressed in our family of languages by
means of an adverb or a relative clause.

If the ‫ المفعول المطلق‬be a nomen vicis, it is used ‫إعداد‬

for enumeration ; and if it be a nomen speciei, or have an adjective,
,
etc.,connected ‫ النوع‬to indicate the kind, for
with it, it is used agail
B specification , or ‫بلبيين‬ or
‫لتمييز‬.fo r
‫ ل‬distinction
RE . 0. Instead of the nomen verbi of a particular finite verb,
that of another form of the same verb, or of another verb of the
same meaning, or else a concrete substantive, is sometimes em
‫ش‬ ‫ر‬

ployed ; as bókés úgórií Ý ye do not advance boldly (IV. and II.) ;

‫ اقتلوا قتالا شديدا‬they foughtwith oneanother VIII.)ahard fight
)III.(, ‫ وتبت إليه تښتيد‬and devote thyself (y ) to Him (toith ) an
C )exclusive) devotion (II.(, ‫جس عودا ;توا ضوا اغتسل غش‬
‫ أعذبهم عذابا شديدا ;أخته مقه‬Iwil chastisee them (toith (
chastisement, ‫ انهزموا هزيمة شنيعة‬they 3led a slameful night, ‫رجع‬
‫و ته‬

‫ القهقرى‬heretired backscords, ‫حبك بيني‬.see

‫ ) أ‬above,a, rem '(,
‫ تلوذ بأخقى لي من مجاشع عياد ليل دشنه بغلها‬thou hast
recourse to Nahéal for protection from Moģāsi' as a weak man ;
álveis jábat he was an intruder at the feast, uninvited.—
D Sometimes a specificative term may be interposed, as ‫فلا تميلوا‬
i es do not incline wholly away (from one of them),
‫ غرفهبعض المعرفة‬I kneun it in part, ‫جلدته ثلاث جلدات‬
II gave him three shippings, ‫ جلست أحسن الجلوس‬I sat
most comfortably ; or the maşdar may be omitted, and its place
supplied byanother word,as ‫) جلدته ثلا‬for ‫ قلت جدات‬, ‫ضربه‬
‫ وطا‬I beat him (titl )a vehip (for ‫(ضرب سوط‬.
$ 27] The Verb. - 3. Government of the Verb.- (a ) The Accus. 57
REM. b. The accusative of the nomen verbi remains, as we A
have seen, unchanged, when the active voice, on which it depends,
passes into the passive. It may, however, be changed into the nomi
native, when there is no other subject, provided that it is qualified
or specialised by some other word (an adjective or a substantive in
the genitive ), as ‫ضرب ضرب شديد‬, ‫سیر سیر طويل‬, ‫سیر سیر البريد‬
and not merely ‫سیر سیر وضرب ضرب‬

27. It has been mentioned above ( 21), that the nomina verbi B
derived from verbs which govern an objective complement in the
accusative, may be construed in the same way as the finite verbs
themselves. We shall here enter into some further details on this
point.
(a) If only the objective complement of the act (and not likewise
its subject) be expressed, it is put after the nomen actionis in the
genitive * ; unless it be separated from the nomen actionis by one or
more words, in which case it is put in the accusative, because the
genitive can never be divided from the word that governs it. For C
example : si us ‫ن‬in‫ م‬optió he hindered them from saying what
aras right; ‫ لا يسأم الإنسان من دعاء الخير‬a human being is never
meary of praying for areal ; ‫ أو إطعام في يوامس ډیقومسغبة يتيما‬or to
‫ بالشوف‬yjá by
feed in a day of famine an orphan; poi ungis ugunmetre
cutting off with swords the heads of some people. In like manner , the >

object is put in the accusative, when the nomen actionis is defined by

the article, because a noun, when so defined, cannot take a genitive D
after it;; as ‫ ضعيف التكاية أعداءه‬feelle in harming his enemies;
Koning ‫ فلم أثل عن الضرب‬and I did not desist from striking
Misma '.
REM. If there be two or more objective complements, they are
usually all put in the genitive ; but sometimes only the first is put
* This is called the objective genitive, to distinguish it from the
subjective genitive or that which designates the subject of the act.
W. II . 8
 58 PART THIRD . — Syntax. [$ 27

A in the genitive and the others in the accusative, as ‫كرهت أقل‬

‫ الخبز واللحم‬I am sick of eating bread and meat, for ‫واللحم‬
‫ قد نت داینت ها شانا ماقة الإفلاس والليانا‬Ihad taken her in
lieu of my debt from Hassān, for fear of (his) becoming poor and
‫والليان‬. payment,where ‫ والليانا‬is in rhyme for ‫والان‬, instead of
‫ي‬delaying

(6) If both the subject and the objective complement of the act
be expressed, three constructions are permitted. (a) The subject may
B be put in the genitive, and the objective complement in the accusative;
‫ كان قتل الخليقة جعفرا في هذه السنة‬in this gear the chalif put
Ga'far to death (lit. the chalif's killing G. was in this year); igjú
‫ الله زغرم آباءكم‬then remember God as ye remember your
fathers; ‫ باكا لضرب المؤدب إياه‬crying because of the tutor's haring
beaten him ; ‫ ما ظهر من فرك العمة عندك‬what is apparent of thy
C ingratitude for favours bestooed upon thee ; ‫فقال الفرزدق يذخر تفضيل‬
‫ي كتبتهم‬said
‫وقثاللهأخمطربايبدإيتاههم‬-Farazdah ‫باهل‬,mentioning ‫;لما كان من إهلاك‬
‫بن مشير ال‬how‫يبة‬tl‫قت‬-Ahtalpreferredhim

‫اهم‬
‫وصفعف‬ ‫بهم‬ ‫اقه‬-because
‫وإحر‬ of Koteiba ibn Muslim Al
Bāhili's killing their writers, and massacring their priests, and
burning their books and writings. ( B) The objective complement
may be put in the genitive and the subject in the nominative ;
Das
‫ قتهم ريح الفناء في المالي يد الدبور‬the aeind
of annihilation swept them away, as the hand of the west wind
8aoeeps aucas the sands; ‫تنفي ياها الحصى في خلي هاجرين في‬
‫ الدراهم تنقاد اللهیاریف‬her fore-feet scatter thegravel everymidday ,as
themoney -changers scatter the dirhams tohilst selecting them ; ‫لزوم ما‬
‫ علمت بباب داری توم الكهف أصحاب الرقیم‬faed at the door ofmy
house, as long as I know , as the Companions of år- Raķīm ( the Seven
§ 27] The Verb.—3. Government of the Verb. — a ) The Accus. 59

Sleepers)kept to the cate ; ‫ مع الناس كافة من مخاطبته أحد بسيدنا‬A

he gave orders to the entire people against any one's addressing him by
the title of “ our Lord.” (y) The subject may be put in the nominative
and the objective complement in the accusative; as ‫عجبت من ضرې‬
‫زید عمرا‬, or ‫من ضرب عمرا زید‬, Iwonder at Zaid's beating Amr;
‫ بلغنى القتل محمود أخاه‬I have heard that Mahmud hasmurdered
his brother; ‫ بلغني تطلي اليوم زيد ه بنداا‬I have heard that Zeid has
today divorced Hind ; ‫ أعجبني انتظار يوم الجمعة محمد عمرا‬I am B
surprised at Muhammad's expecting ' Amr on Friday. The first of
these three constructions is the most usual. The second is not
uncommon , especially when the objective complement is a pronoun.
The third, in which the nomen actionis may be accompanied by the
article, or by a specification of the time or place of the act in the
genitive, is of comparatively rare occurrence .
REM . a . If an adjective be annexed to the subject in the C
genitive, it is also usually put in the genitive, but the nominative
is admissible ; as
‫عجبت من قيام زیر الظريف‬, or ‫واجها ; الظريف‬
‫ طلب المعقب حقه المظلوم‬and pressed her, as the seeker after his
due, who is defrauded, presses (his debtor ), instead of Viesi
‫ الما‬mult
‫المظلوم حقه‬
REM. 6. If both the subject and the objective complement
be ‫د‬pronouns, they may both be suffixed to the nomen actionis ; e.g. D
‫مشه‬
elementi sconto quecon my love of him has taught me to be religious.
Here the suffix of the first person is the subject, and that of the
third person the accusative * .

is, strictly speaking, an ‫اسم مصدر‬, and not an actual‫مصدر‬

) see $ 26 ) ; but it is used, instead of ‫قباب‬ as the masdar of yol
(IV. of ( a) to love, [as mái; for wölés, maşdar of waivi to hate).
See rem. c.
‫پاس‬
UNION
L ' SEM NA
 1
60 PART THIRD . - Syntux. [$ 27
A REM . c.
Not only the nomina actionis, but also those nouns
which are of similar force and signification, and which consequently
can supply the place of the former, may be construed with the
genitive of the subject and the accusative of the object.
example : ‫ و أكيم إن مصابكم رجلا أهدی السلام تحية ظله‬Suleim ,
verily your afflicting a man, who has given the salām as a salutation,
is an act of) tyranny ) ‫(إصابة = مصاب‬: ‫بعشرتك الكرام تعد منهم‬
through thy associating with the noble, thou wilt be reckoned one of
‫ر‬ ‫مہ‬ ،
B
them )‫ من قبل الرجل زوجته الوضو ;(معاشرة = عشرة‬ablution is
)rendered necessary) by a man's kissing his wife )‫;( تقبيل = قبلة‬
‫ فتذروا تطمة البري القرشی‬and rememberhootheBekrite slapped
the Koreishite )‫ لطمة‬the nomen vicis(; ]‫فإن كلاميها شفاء لما بيا‬
for to speak with her is a remedy for my suffering ]; slúas weig
‫وبعد‬

‫ المائة الرتاعا‬and after they giving the hundred grazing (camels(

) ‫ الراعا إعطاء =عطاء‬in rhyme for ‫أنظر إلى طاعة هذا ;(التاع‬
C
‫ الولد أمر الله‬observe this childs obedience to thecommand of God
)‫(إطاعة = طاعة‬: ‫ وعيد الحبارى الصقر‬the bustards threatening the
falcon ) ‫(إيعاد =وعيد‬: ‫ أحاديث الضبع استها‬what thehyenan tells to
its
) ‫ تره بمحيس البقر أولادها ;(تحديثات = أحاديث‬I have
left him (or it) where the wild cattle lick their young (i.e. in some
lonely or desert spot, I know not where(,= ‫البقر‬ ‫بحيث يث‬
‫أولاها‬.
D REM. d. What has been said of the nomina actionis of singly
transitive verbs, applies equally to those of doubly transitive verbs.
The only difference is, that the latter take an accusative after the
objective genitive, or even add a second accusative to the first.
For example : ‫ تعليم المتعلم طريق العثيم‬the instruction of the
learner in the path of learning ; ‫ماأداه إليه من توليته إياه العراق‬
the favour which he conferred upon him by his appointing him
governor of al-Trail ; ‫إن الناس كرهوا إطعام مكبر عمرا با‬
$ 29] The Verb. — 3. Government of the Verb.— (a ) The Accus.
Loginó the people condemned Muḥammad's giving 'Amr poisoned A
bread to eat.

Res.. e. The complement in the genitive may also be expressed,

when it represents the subject of the act, by so; when it repre
sents the object, by J (see § 29) ; and when it indicates time or
place,, by ‫ وفي‬.. ‫حبيه‬, in rem . b,by ‫الفيحب الماالليحايلد) املندیبورته‬
the love (which accrues) from me to him ; your
in s 27,b,8,by ‫ ;الشفى من يد الدبور يلمال‬and ‫انتظار يوم الجمعة‬
ibid., Y, by ‫الإنتظار في يوم الجمعة‬. B

28. In the case of verbs which govern their objective complement

by means of a preposition, the nomen actionis retains that preposition :
, ‫; قدرت عليه‬
.e.g ‫ ما بي قدر على ذلك‬I haveno powerto do this,from
‫ ما بی فيه رغبة‬I have no noish for it,from ‫ما حاجة إليه ورغبت فيه‬
what need hast thou of it ? from and . –The same thing holds
good in the case of mixed government, the nearer object or accusative
being converted into the genitive, and the more remote retaining its C
preposition ; e.g.aciu ihanyi best man's being helped (by God )
to obey (Him ). Occasionally, however, the closer connection by means
of the genitive is substituted for the looser construction with a
preposition ; e.g. ocenjin judo inclination (of the mind) towards tl
' Islam , for ‫الميل إلى الإسلام‬
29. The nomen actionis often takes its objective complement not D
in the accusative but in the genitive with J, in which case this
preposition is used as an outward exponent of the relation that subsists
between the nomen verbi and its object. Hence the Arab grammarians
rightly call it toleraga ósūí the lãm that strengthens the regent
(the nomen actionis or the verbal power which it possesses) ; for, since
the verbal force which dwells in the nomen actionis is less than that
in the finite verb, the language helps the former to exercise its
 62 PART THIRD . — Syntax. [$ 29
A influence upon its object by annexing to it a preposition expressing
the direction of the action towards the object. This construction
with J is used in the following cases.
(a) When the nomen actionis immediately precedes the object
and is undefined (see 327, a(; ‫من غير تأمل يخطائه وصوابه وه‬
as
without considering what was false and what true in it, instead of
‫خطاءه وصوابه‬. This is especially the case when the nomen actionis
B is in the adverbial accusative (see $ 44); as ‫أقوم له تعظيما إشتاینی‬
I stand up in hispresence to sheto respect tomyteacher ; ‫ما قال ذلك‬
‫ إكراما له‬he said this only to do him honour ; ‫أمة عنهم انتظارا‬
‫ پلمهاجرين‬he refrained from (attacking) them , auditing the
Muhagiran ; ‫ والذين آمنوا أشد حبا لله‬but those who believe are
stronger in love of God .
(6) When the nomen actionis immediately precedes the object,
C and is defined by the article (see $ 27 , a) ; as ‫ترك المطالبة ياس‬
giving up pursuing the people ; ‫تهاا اجتمعت غطفان على المطابقة‬
‫ لطليحة‬after the tribe of ) Gatayan had agreed to take the part of
Toleiha.
(c) When the genitive of the subject is interposed between the
nomen actionis and the object (see $ 27, b) ; as ‫فبقى أن تشخين‬
2

‫ الشمس الأرض إلا هو على سبيل الإضاءة‬itresults,therefore,that the

D sun warms the earth in no other way than by his light (lit. that the
sun's warming the earth is only by the way of his light), for ‫ض‬weyyi;
‫;الأر‬
‫ لمطالبة أعدائی بی‬because of my enemies' persecuting me, for ‫زایای‬
‫رو رو‬
‫رویته‬ his seeing God ; ‫ تبلیغی تك إلى ما‬my enabling you to
attain your terishes ; ‫أنظر إلى هذه الوالدة الشفيقة الرحيمة وإطاعتها‬
atvímosyobserve this mother, affectionate und lwing,and her obedience
to the command of God.
$ 30] The Verb . - 3. Government of the Verb.- (a) The Accus. 63
It may also be extended to other verbal nouns of similar force and A

signification (see $ 27, b, rem. c);as vizing a lemonchás op jou

‫ أهل همدان بن أخته‬he wrentdown totheplacestherehis comrades
had fallen , and to the spot where the people of Hamadān had killed his
viror

sister's son ; )‫إلا أن فتوح المأمون وعبد الملك انت من قصد‬

Légció op but the victories of el-Ma'mūn and 'Abd l-Malik were
gained over those who aimed at their sovereignty ).
In such clauses the choice between the older and closer construction B
with the accusative, and the later and looser with the preposition, is
left in most cases to the taste and judgment of the writer.
REM . a .
In more modern Arabic ‫ إلى‬is often used ‫تقوية العامل‬
instead of y ; ‫ إتيكاړي إليه و‬mybearing him in mind; ‫ربي إلى‬
as

‫ الجواب‬my returning an answer .

Rem. b . This use of to designate the objective complement
of the verb is common in Aramaic, rare in Hebrew and Æthiopic o
(see Dillmann's Gr. , $ 179). See § 31 , rem .

30. The nomina agentis or participles, which hold a middle

position between the verb and the noun , and partake of the force of
both, may, like the nomina verbi, follow the government either of the
verb or the noun, or of both . The following rules are to be observed
regarding them .
( a) If the nomen agentis has but one objective complement, this
may be put either in the accusative or in the genitive ; as ‫ سارعوا إلى‬D
‫ جنة أعدت للمتقين والكاظمين الغيظ‬viewith oneanother in hastening
to a garden ( Paradise ), which is prepared for the God -fearing and
‫ ر‬2 ‫مهر‬
those who restrain their wrath , á, U woong and those who pay
the poor-rate ; ‫القاطنات البيت غير الريم أوالقا مئة من ورق الحبی‬
the slate-coloured pigeons ( svájí by poetic license for phisi) which
inhabit the sacred House (i.e. the Ka'ba), nerer quitting it (and )
 64 PART THIRD - Synta.r. [S 30

A domiciled in Makka )‫ أوالها‬for ‫ هديا بالغ الكعبة ;(أوالف‬an offering

coming,or (actually ) brought,to the Ka'ba ; ‫ طلاب العلم‬seekersafter
Knourledge : ‫ كل نفس ذائقة الموت‬ereyMulisa
soul taster of death (tastes
(
(
or shalltaste death (; ‫ ربنا إنك جامع الناس‬our Lord ! Thou wiltbeaan
assembler of (uilt assemble)mankind; ‫الذين يظنون أنهم لاقو ربهم‬
who think that they shall be meeters of ( shall meet) their Lord ;
W

‫ إن الموت الذي ترون منه فإنه لاقيه‬verily thedeath from schich

B flee, will surely be your meeter (will surely meet you ).-- The nomina
agentis of directly transitive verbs admit of being construed, in so far
as they have verbal power, either with the accusative or with the
genitive,provided they have the meaning of the imperfect lézlámi,
historical imperfect, present, future). As the genitive connection is in
this case ‫غير الحقيقية‬, improper or representative (see $ 75, rem .(,
>

‫س و‬the ‫ قاتل‬word may be defined by the article : ‫قاتل الناس‬, or

‫النا‬governing
one acho kils people; ‫القاتل الناس‬, or ‫القاتل الناس‬,he scho
killspeople = ‫;الذي يقتل‬as,accordingtoanother reading , ‫كل نفس‬
‫) ذائقة الموت‬see above(; ‫ و التراب المائة الهجان‬him who gives a
hundred fine white (camels) ; öghävi sending and those who perform
the (prescribed
( ) prayers ; ‫و ألا أيها الباغي البراز تقتربن‬0 thou that
desirest single combat, draw nigh. When, on the contrary, the nomina
D agentis of directly transitive verbs have the meaning of the perfect
(perfect, pluperfect, aorist , and future -perfect ), they approach more
nearly to the nature of the noun that springs from them (as ‫ كاتب‬,
writing, a writer), and hence are construed, like this latter, with the
genitive only. Further, since this genitive connection in ‫حقيقية‬
proper or real (see $ 75, rem .), the governing word cannot be defined
by thearticle : ‫) قاتل الناس‬and not ‫ القاتل الناس‬or ‫القاتل الناس‬ One

who killed , has killed , had killed , or shall have killed people,
 § 30] The Verb. - 3. Government of the Verb.-(a) The Accus. 65

‫الذی قتل‬, or ‫الذي كان قتل‬, or ‫ ; الذي يكون قتل‬a8 ‫ فاطر السموات‬A
‫موعه‬
as

.the
‫والارض‬ Creator of (or He acho has created ) theheavens and the earth
The same remarks naturally apply, when the genitive is aa pronominal
sufixinstead of a separate substantive : ‫ أحد يلومني = لائمی‬oneaho
reproaches me, and ‫ الذى يومنی = الئمى‬heacho reproaches me,as
‫ أيها الشاتمي يتخب مثلی‬o thou who recitestme,in order that thon
mayest be thought my equal; but he who reproached or has reproached
me, ‫الذى لامینی‬, is ‫لائمی‬, notB-
‫ الائمی‬If the nomen agentis be
undefined, it governs the accusative only in the following cases.
(a) When it is the attribute or the predicate of a (usually preceding)
subject, or stands in the accusative to express a state or condition of
.that
subject (see $ 44 ); e.g ‫زید ضارب عمرا‬, or ‫إن زيدا ضارب عهرا‬
Zeid is beating (or will beat) Amr ; ‫ زید ضارب أبوه أا بی‬Zeid's
father (lit. Zèid , his father) is beating (or will beat) a brother of
‫ بقار‬jó I passed by a horseman (who was) C
‫ طالب‬wglés
mine ; ‫ ثااررأبيه‬Yuu
seeking revenge for (the murder of his father ; ‫كم مالي عينيه من‬
‫ شئ غيره‬hoo many a one flls (or sites) his eyeswith thatbelongs
to others,= ‫مماالليي‬ ‫ ځاطح صخرة يوما ليوها; گم شخص‬tike aback
which was one day butting a rock to break it, = ‫جانی وقوع ناطح‬
‫ عمرو طالبا أبا‬Amr came to me seking instruction . (8) After an
interrogative or negative particle, when it is the attribute of a pre- D
.ceding or less usually ) following subject ; e.g ‫هل منم أنت زيدا‬
‫رہ‬

oilt thou treat Zaid with respect ? ‫أنجز أنتم وغدا وثقت به‬willge
fulla promise m schich Irelied ? ‫ ما أنت بتابع قبلتهم‬that dostnot
folloun (or adopt) their killa ; ‫ ما مجير أخذ عدو أحبائه‬no one give
protection to the enemy of his friends. (y) After an interjection
) $ 38), as the s
. e
predicate of a suppressed subject ; e
e.g ‫يا طالقا جب‬
W, Il . 9
 66 PART THIRD.Syntax. [S 30

A 0 (thou who art)climbinga hil ! =‫یا صارا عى المودة ; يا رجلا طالا‬

0 ( thou who art) turning away from me ( thy) love !
REM . a. The nomen agentis in the singular number, when
followed by a substantive in the genitive, can take the article only
when that substantive is itself defined by the article or governs
..anothersubstantive that is so defined ; e ‫ الضارب العبد‬he who
beatstheslave; ‫ الارب رأس العبير‬he solobeats thestateon thehead
B
‫ارب زیر‬the‫الش‬,head ofthe slave); but we cannot say ‫الضارب عبير‬
)lit.,beats
nor nor even
‫ الضارب عبير زيږ‬or ‫ الشارب عبده‬The
reason of this seems to be that a certain equipoise may be preserved
between the governing word, Lilági, and the governed word ,
‫المضاف إليه‬. On the other hand,the article may be prefixed to
the dual or the pluralis sanus masc., even when the following geni
tive is not defined in either of the above ways ; because, after the
C rejection of the terminations ‫ ن‬and ‫) ن‬Vol. i.s315, 6,c(, ‫المضاف‬
and ‫ المضاف إليه‬become more closely connected, and grow , as it
were , into one word, like the nomen agentis when defined by the
article and followed by a pronominal suffix. Hence we may say

‫الضاربا عبد‬, ‫الضاربی زید‬, ‫الضاربو عبير زيد‬, ‫الضاربی عبده‬, aswell
as ‫الاربان عبدا‬, ‫الاربيين زيدا‬, ‫الضاربون عبد زیرو‬, ‫اللهاربين عبده‬
‫ من إن يغنيا عني المستوطنا عدني‬thetoo toho reside at Aden can
D
dispense noithme (or do noithout me(; ‫الشامي عرضي ولم أشتمها‬
the two who revile my character, without my having reviled them ;
‫ المشتق و كثير ما وهبوا‬those whodema amall the great (sms) they
have given away. There is even a third form of expression admis
, arising out of a combination of thesetwo, viz ‫الضاربا عبدا‬
.sible
‫الضاربی زیدا‬, ‫الله ابو عبد زي‬, ‫لاربی عبده‬-in
‫ا‬, which the rejec
tion of the terminations ‫ن‬ andú serves only to indicate the close

logical connection , asin the phrase ‫جاء الأمير القاتلا أخواه محمدا‬
the 'amir came, whose two brothers killed Muhammad, in which
§ 30] The Verb. — 3. Government of the Verb.—a) The Accus. 67

‫ ()اخو‬is actually inserted ,, as the subject,, A

another substantive cólment A
between
) ‫ا‬. the nomen agentis in the dual ) ‫ (القاتلا‬and its object
-When a pronoun is annexed as object to the dual or
pluralis sanus masc . of a nomen agentis which is defined by the
article, three forms of expression are likewise admissible ; viz. ( 1 )
‫الارباه‬, ‫ ) ز الابوة‬2( ‫ الضاربان إياه‬or ‫الضاربان له‬, ‫الضاربون إياه‬
or ‫ ; الضاربون ته‬and )3( ‫الضاربانه‬, ‫الاربونه‬. In thelast case,the
pronoun , though apparently a nominal suffix in the genitive, is in
reality a verbal suffix in the accusative ; and even in the first case, B
the Arabs regard the pronominal object as an accusative, and not
as a genitive, using s instead of us , for the 1st pers. sing. ;
.e.g‫ تيس الموافینی پیوند خائبا‬hesolocomes to meto obtain a gift
is not disappointed ; ‫ وليس بعيینی‬and he isnot too heavy a burden
forme; ‫ هم الآمرون الخير والفاعلونه‬it is they solio order tohat is
right, and who do it themselves *.
Rem. b. When the nomen agentis is followed by two or more
objects connected by , or gi, it not rarely happens that the first C
alone is put in the genitive, and the others in the accusative, the
nominal force of the nomen agentis passing, because of the distance
of the complements, into the verbal ; as ‫جاعل الليلي بنا والشمس‬
‫ والقمر شبانا‬He tolo appoints thenight for rest, and the sun and
moon for the reckoning (or tine(; ‫ الواهب المائة الهجان وعبيرها‬of
him who gives a hundred fine white (camels) and their attendant
)either ‫ وعبدها‬or ‫هل أنت باعث دينار يحاجيا أو عبد رب ;(وعبدها‬
wilt thou send Dīnār for our need (to our help ) or ' Abd -Rabb ? D

(6) If the nomen agentis be derived from a verb which governs

two or three objective complements (SS 24, 25), it takes the first
either in the accusative (which is by far the more usual) or in the
genitive, and the others in the accusative ; as ‫أنا كاس زيدا ثوبا قارا‬
*
* [ El-Mubarrad, Kāmil, 205, 1. 16—206, 1. 9 speaks of this verse
>

as spurious, and says that such an annexion is not allowed even by

poetical license. R. S. ]
 68 PART THIRD.—Syntax. [$ 31

AIwill dress Zeid in a splendidrole; ‫أنا معطی زید دما‬, or ‫مغطى‬

‫عزایقدار‬ ‫دره‬, Iwill give Zaid a dirham ; ‫هل أنت ظا عما عاق‬ or

‫ ظان عمرو‬, doost thou think Amr intelligent ? ‫زیر مرا‬ ‫هذا معلم‬
.
‫ منطلقا‬t (man) inform h s Zeid thati s
Amr is going audy
REM . a.
If the objective complements of the nomen agentis of
a doubly transitive verb be pronouns, both may be appended to it
.as
sufixes; e.g ‫ مغطيه‬he wolto gives it to you ; ‫ مطعميها‬he solo
B gives me it to eat. [Comp. Vol. i. § 187.]
REM. b. The second of the two complements of a nomen agentis,
or that which is in the accusative, is very rarely inserted between
the nomen agentis and the first complement, or that in the genitive ;
‫مهر و‬
e.g. ‫ وسواك مانع فضله الا‬olilat others than thou southhold
their enefits from the needy;; ‫فلا تحسبن الله خلف وعده شده‬
think not then that God will fail to keep His promise to His apostles.
In the former of these examples, which is a half -verse of poetry,
this construction has been followed in order to bring the word
c i into the rhyme; in the latter, which is taken from the
‫المحتاج‬
Kor'an , xiv. 48 ,the preferable reading is ‫خلف وعده رشته‬
31. What has been said in § 29 regarding the use of the pre
position J after nomina verbi is equally applicable to nomina agentis.
(a) „ is used when the nomen agentis immediately precedes the object
and is undefined ; as ‫ معجب تك‬making thee wonder ; ‫وهى مجانب لتهه‬
D whilst she was avoiding him ( in which example the undefined nomen
agentis is the predicate of a ‫ جمة الية‬or circumstantial clause
)

]$ 183 [ ; ‫والحيلة لا تجوز إلا إذا كان الخضم متعبنا لا طالبا يلحق‬
and artifice is not allowable (in argument), except when the opponent is
a disputatious sophist, and not a seeker after the truth. This is
especially the case when the nomen agentis is in the adverbial
accusative [$44 ,c]; as ‫ وآمنوا بما أنزلت متمنيالها معه‬and believe
in what I have sent down, confirming that which is with you (the
§ 32] The Verb . — 3. Government of the Verb.— (a) The Accus. 69

Scriptures which yehave already received ();; ‫ نزل على المدينة محاصرا‬A
‫ تها‬hehaltedbeforethe city tobesiege it ; ‫وفي بلدة العلي داعيا وباعا‬
Jotéis the sweetness of knowledge is a sufficient inducement and
incentive to the intelligent. (b) „ is also used when the nomen agentis
immediately precedes the object, and is defined by the article ; as
‫الحافظون يلحدود الله‬thosewho keep the ordinancesof God ; ‫المفسرون‬
‫ بهذه الأبيات‬the empounders of these verses ; ‫ أقوى الأسباب الجالبة‬B
‫بالشعظيم‬,‫ يرزق إقامة الصلوة‬to perform one's devotionswith reverence
is the surest means of procuring one's daily bread; sus seg
‫ الشىء الصرف بلجير‬and he continued meditating about that thing
which governs the body. (c) Finally, y is used when a genitive is
interposed between the nomen agentis and the object ; as is
he who gave it to me to eat. с

REM. U must be used instead of the accusative, when the object

of the nomen agentis is rhetorically transposed and placed before it ;
as
‫ وكانوا كنا عابدين‬andthey worshippedas: ‫ما لكلنها يلغیب حافظين‬
‫ ته تحافظون‬u
we didnot know what was hidden (in the future); jstála
Perilywewill take care of him ; ‫ المرة ما تم تزړه تك مره‬a man ,
as long as thou dost not unjustly disparage him, treats thee with
respect.So also with the finite verb, ‫; إن كنتم رؤيا تعبرون‬if ge D
can explain a dream . If the transposed object be a pronominal suffix,
(Vol.i. $$ 188, 189) may beemployed instead of J ; as he ju
últs thee we worship and to thee we cry for help;
‫ ځائهم إياه يعنونا‬le thinke they mean him (in rhyme for ‫(يعنون‬.
Compare $ 29, rem . b, and Vol. i. $ 189, b.
32. If the verb, from which a nomen patientis is derived, governs
two or three accusatives in the active voice, its nomen patientis retains
one or two of them , the other having passed into the nominative ; as
 70 PART THIRD . - Syntax. ($ 33

A Wej odc she's Mj, Zºid's servant (lit. Zèid, his servant ($ 120 )
‫و‬ ‫و‬
is given a dirham ; LásT gió ij Zeid's father is thought to be
standing up ; ‫ا‬láttano
‫ مطلق‬le‫ أبوه عمرا‬stes
‫د معلم‬Mj
‫ زی‬Zeid's father is informed
that ' Amr is going away. See s $ 24, 25.

33. Verbal adjectives of those forms which differ in meaning

from the nomina agentis only in being intensive, may govern, like the
nomina agentis, either the accusative or the preposition J. Since,
B however, their verbal force is very slight, the latter construction is by
far the more usual, the former being chiefly poetic. This rule applies
principally to the forms jle and joes ( Vol. i. $ 232, and rem. d ,
$ 233) ; more rarely to other forms, such as her
‫( فعيل‬s$ 232), les
‫() فعل‬id.),(
and jais ($ 233, rem. b). Examples with the accusative : lái
Liz jsiinured to (lit. a brother of) warfare, constantly
tearing the garments suited for it ; ‫مقدما إلى الموت والها إليه الكتائبا‬
C rushing upon death , wading in search of it through the ranks (ÚTVÍ
in rhymefor ‫محلا طوق لم يكن من تميمة ولا ضرب ضواغ ;(الكتائب‬
wateja amac, adorned with a ring, which is not an amulet, nor manu
factured by a moulder of a dirham with his hands ; Main yogus
Javi ololo winismiting with the edge of the sword the heads of
men ; ‫ إنها على الشوق إخوان العزاء فيوج‬verily shestirsup thepatient
D (or continent) to desire (excites desire in them , and in rhyme for
‫ہر رر‬

‫ ;( هيوج‬je me omnis jać ready to forgive their sin, not boastful

)‫فر‬in rhyme for ‫ر‬jus(; ‫ فتاتان أما منها شبيهة هلالا‬tuomaidens,
(one) of them resembling a new moon (in beauty ); stes Zoom att !
‫ من عاه‬God hearsthe prayer of him toho calls upon Him ; ‫حذر أمورا‬
‫ لا تضير‬on his guard againstthings that cannot injure (him (; ‫أتاني‬
§ 34] The Verb.-3. Government of the Verb.— (a ) The Accus. 71
‫عشرہ‬

csodis ügis epit it has come to me (to my hearing) that they are A
defaming (lit. tearing in pieces) my character; “ Big jlandia he
is a slaughterer of the fat ones among them ( the she-camels);
Djali ja ingló haughty,looking with disdain on the limbs of the
slaughtered camel. Examples with y: ‫هاوكنايركعذنيبد أكالون يشحت‬
hearers of falsehond,eaters of what is unlawful; glo naić,Läs jó
may every hardened infidel, a hinderer of good ; vacy aches a great B
colector of books ; ‫ تؤول يما قال الكرام فعول‬ready to wty what the
noble say, and to do (it) ; etc.
34. Verbal adjectives of the form Jesi, corresponding to our
comparative and superlative (Vol. i. $ 234 ), when derived from tran
sitive verbs, take their object in the genitive with y, very rarely in the
>

accusative ; asociosizi bulgó he seeks after knowledge more than

‫ور‬
got do ; ‫المؤمن أحب لله من نفسه‬i the believer loves God morethan Cc
you
‫ر‬

himself ; ‫ أجهل الناس وأعداهم للعلم وامقهم للشرع‬the most ignorant

of men , and the most opposed of them to learning, and the most inimical
ofthem to the late ; ‫ فهمتها بغير حاجز أقلب‬they mustbe more aptto
change it (viz. the letter 9, into (s) without an intervening (letter );
‫ وأضرب منا بالشيوف القوانينا‬andmore ready than are to omite aith
swords the tops of helmets (hulgãi in rhyme for wilgwi, accus.) ;
‫ جيرانا‬.a
‫ وأمتع‬a better protector
nd of neighbours D

Rem. a. Verbal adjectives of the form jeji, derived from verbs

signifying love or hatred , take the object with y when they are used
in an active sense, as in the second and third of the above examples;
*
but when they have a passive sense *, they take the subject with
* As there is only one form for the comparative and superlative,
it may be derived from verbal adjectives of either active or passive
signification ; e.g. vai from a loving, or from beloved,
dear. Comp. Vol. i. $ 235. )
 72 PART THIRD.Syntaa . [$ 35

A
‫إلى‬, as ‫ الموين أحب إلى الله من غيره‬thebeliever ismore lovedof
God than anyone else ; ‫ هو أبغض إلى منها‬heismorehateful tome
than she.

Rem .6. Verbal adjectives of the form Jesi, derived from in

transitive verbs (i.e. verbs which govern their object by means of
a preposition, $ 23, rem . a), require the same preposition after them
as those verbs ; as ista ugot his this is lighter, or easier, forme ;
‫هو أزهد في الدنيا وأسرع إلى الخير وأبعد من الإثم وأحرص على‬
B
he abstains more from worldly pleasures, and is quicker to do
good, and keeps farther from (clearer of ) crime, and is more eager
after the praise ( of God). They often, however, take their signifi
cation from one of the derived forms of the verb (generally the
second or fourth ) ; as ‫ ذلكم أقوم للشهادة‬this confirms the evidence
0

‫م‬stillmore
‫أشت‬ (from ‫أقام‬, Iv .of ‫ قام‬to stand(; ‫ولين مول المرء بلدين‬
olwl but the obscurity of a man preserves his religion better (from
‫ ستم‬or ‫أشتم‬,II.or IV. of ‫ ي‬to besafe(; ‫قتل النهار أعز الإسلام‬
C ‫ وأهيب لمن وراءهم‬the slaying of unbelievere increases the potter of
Al- Islām and strikes greater terror into those who are behind them ;
‫ ذلك أجود يحميها وأصفی بدهنها‬this improves its crop andmakes
its oil clearer ;; ‫ الدجال أخونی علی‬-another
‫غير‬ besides the anti
Christ fills me (accus. ) with greater fear on your account (than he
does(; ‫ هو أحوج إلى متى إليه‬hehasmoreneed of methan I have
ofhim (from ‫إحتاج إلى‬, VIII.of ‫ اج‬, to have need of ). See Vol.
D i. S 235.
35. The accusative not unfrequently depends upon a verb which
is understood . This happens :
(a) In phrases expressive of command (positive or negative),
wish, reproach (worded interrogatively ), praise, salutation, and the
like, in which we must supply the verb from which the noun in the
accusative is derived,, and to which it serves as ‫) المفعول المطل‬$826 (.
Forexample : ‫ حتى إذا أثموهم‬. ‫فإذالقيته الذين كفروا ضرب الرقاب‬
 $ 3.5] The Verb. — 3 . Government of the Verb.-- ( a) The Accus. 73

‫ فشدوا الوثاق قاما ما وإما فدا‬and when yemeet (in batle)thosewho A

believe not, smite their necks (i.e. cut off their heads), till (at last ), >

when ye have made much slaughter among them , bind fast the fetters ;
and ( thereafter) either show kindness (by letting them go free) or take
ransom (for them ), where ‫ما واضربوا الرقاب ضربا = ضرب الرقاب‬
‫تمون ما‬, and ‫فتد ريق المال تدل الغالب تفون فدا = فدا‬
carry off camels, 0 Zuraiť, as foxes carry off (their prey), where
‫ صبرا لا جزعا ; أندير المال تد = ند المال‬be patientand do not give B
.anay
to immoderate grief,ie ‫ اصبر صبرا ولا تجزع جزا‬, ‫ مهلا‬gently !
! i.e ‫ ت ;أمهل مه‬.may
.softly ‫سقيا‬ God give thee rain ! ite ‫قاك‬
‫ عيا تك ;الله فيا‬may God keep thee! i... ‫تاتك زاك الله رعيا‬
.magest
thout stumble ! ice ‫ أكفرا بعد رد الموت عى وتعشت تا‬shall ‫ورر‬

I be ungrateful after thou hast averted death from me? i.e. jis šil;
‫ أوانيا وقد علاك المشيب‬dast thou delay (orliter'), seeing that grey C
have alreadyai
.h come upon thee rs
‫سب?حانه‬ice ‫سبحان الله ; أتتوانی توانیا‬
‫۔ سر‬
the absolute glory of !
God ! or almost His absolute glory ! scil. C
I praise (which is an ‫إخبار‬ or statement of fact), or ‫سبح‬,
a
etc.,praise thou , etc. (which is an ‫إنشاء‬, a command or wish ) [often
used as a phrase expressing wonder) ; avi ślés God forbid ! i.e.
‫ أعود معاذ الله‬I seek the refuge ofGod; ‫ حنائی یا رب‬havemercy on D
, O my Lord ! icee
.m ‫ تحن) على نائا‬or( ‫ لبيك اللهم ;زحث‬I trait
intent upon Thy service, O God ! i... ‫ الب تك لبابا = ألب تك لا‬,
áčkog léame hearing and obeying, or to hear is to obey,i.e. Lea ‫اسمع‬
‫وأطيع طاعة‬, ‫خیر مقدم‬.welcome
!ie ‫ قدمت خیر مقدم‬thout art
‫رت‬
arrived the best of arrivals ; [koljś his with love and honour (will I
. requirest)iceo
whatthoutd ‫أحبك حبا وأفركإكراما‬.
W. II , 10
 74 PART THIRD. - Syntax. [S 35
A .REM ‫ه‬.
In the cases of coinmand, wish, and reproach, the Arab
grammarians regard the verbal noun, not as a ‫ ) مصدر مؤكد‬$ 26 ( ,
but merely as ‫ بدل من الفعل‬a substitute for the verb, or ‫نائب‬
‫ مناب الفعل‬supplying the place of the verb ; so that, according to
then , ‫ د المال‬is simply = ‫أندر المال‬, ‫ قاك الله = سقيا تك‬, and
-

‫أكفر = أفرا‬
Rem . b. In such cases as ‫ نائيك‬and ‫ لبيك‬the dualis regarded
B
‫ للشية‬toexpresstooccasions,but ‫بغرير والكثير‬
as being used , not ‫ للتثنية‬to
to indicate repetition and frequency. [ Similar expressions are
‫ واليك وسعديك‬, ‫حجازيك‬, ‫ هذاذيك‬and ‫هجاجيك‬.
(6) In various other cases , in which the verb to be supplied is not
that whence the noun in the accusative is derived , but may be easily
guessed from the manner in which the noun is uttered and the circum
stances of the speaker. Such are :
(a) Phrases expressive of wish, salutation , and the like ; as
C ‫ جدا تك‬may thy nose le d'! ‫ تك‬..perdition
be cut off ‫تبا‬ to thee ! i
‫ الزمك الله الجدع‬or ‫مرحبا وأهلا وسهلا زالت‬, .scil ‫ أتيت‬or ‫ صادفت‬,
thou art come to, or hast found, a roomy (concenient) place, and
friendly people, and a smooth (comfortable) place; ‫مرحبا بك‬, .i.e
‫أتيت مكانا يرحب بك‬, thou art come to a place anhere there is plenty
of room for thee (to a comfortable place) ; phrases equivalent to
areleome! ‫ مرحبا بك الله ومنه‬may Gul give thee plenty of room
D and ease ! *

(B) Phrases in which an individual is called upon to guard

himself, or a part of his person, against some one or some thing
)‫ ;(التحذير‬or in which one or more individuals are urged to do
something or attack some object )‫(الإغراء‬. In the former case, the
*

]On thephrase ‫ا مريئا‬.comp

‫ هنيئ‬. $ 44,0,rem .1,footnote [
$ 35] The Verb.-3. Government of the Verb.— (a) The dccus. 75

speaker may mention (1 ) either the person who is to be on his guard , A

or (2) the person or thing he is to guard against, repeating the word
or not, at pleasure ; or lastly, (3) both together, connecting them by
the conjunction ſ. In the latter case, he mentions only the object to
be attacked, repeating the word or not, as he pleases. Examples :
‫إياك‬, or ‫ياك إياك‬.take
‫إ‬, care! ite ‫ إياك أحر‬thee I war7 ; ‫ رجل‬thy
joot ! scil. take care of; świj thy head ! seil. , bend aside ;
‫اد‬, or ‫سد الأسد‬.the
‫الأ‬, lion ' the lion ! scil ‫ احذر‬euture of guard B
‫ش‬

against : ‫ الجدار الجدار‬thewall ! the call ! ‫ الصبي الصبى‬the child !

‫ الطر‬road ! the road ! scil Já‫ خ‬clear;;
the child ! ‫يق الطريق‬.the
‫ك واد‬.mind
‫ إيا‬thelion !scil ‫إياك أرواحذرالأسد‬: ‫ياك والمعاداة‬
guard thyself against enmity ; ‫ك والمحدثات‬-keep
‫إيا‬ clear of innoct
tions or newo -fanglad tideas ; ‫إياك وأن تفعل كذا‬, or, less correctly,
‫إياك أن تفعل كذا‬, beure of doing 30 and s (wlere ‫أن‬, followed by C
the imperfect subjunctive, is put instead of the accusative of a noun
]S$ 23, rem . c[(; ‫ إياك وأن تشتغل بهذا الجدل‬take carenot to meddle
with this sort of contention ; ilusio óhut; thy head and the wall !
‫ه ه‬ ‫م‬

.scil‫ ماز رأس واليف تح رأس واحدي الحائط‬Mazi ,they haat

head
‫ر نه‬ ‫ر‬

.and
the stor ! scil ‫العدو العدو ز یا مازن في رأسك وأحذر الشيف‬
the foe ! the fve ! scil. stá seize, attack ; blái slái, Or ‫أخاك‬ or

‫حسان إليه‬.be
‫والإ‬, alrays kind to your brother, scil ‫الترم‬, cheative to ; D
stićó keep your place ! scil. Misli suy útá do as you like with
camels,scil ‫افعل‬,, do :; ‫ و‬á‫ ځل شئ ولا شتيمة‬everything but
.your
.re oil
a freeborz mun ! scil ing
‫;وايت كل شئ ولا ترتيب شتيمة حر‬
‫ أمامك‬before the ! ‫راءك‬.behind
‫و‬ thee ! scil ‫ أنظر‬look ; ‫ عذیر‬they
.ercuse
! scil ‫م‬, or ‫أحضر‬,, produce; ‫حديثة‬.thy story ! scil ‫هات‬
give here, tell.
 76 PART THIRD . — Syntax. [$ 35
А REM. a. If a noun in the accusative be uttered only once, the verb
may be added ; but if the accusative be repeated, or if there be two
accusatives connected by S, the verb is never expressed. — Vulgarly,
‫ إياك الأسد‬is usedinstead of ‫إياك والأسد‬.and
, thelike
REM. b. It is only the second personal pronoun which is com
monly thus used. Examples of the first and third persons are rare ;

‫ی‬.‫والش;ر عن‬ .keep

‫ إيا‬mefrom evil!scil ‫جنى عن الشر ونح الشر‬
B
; ‫ إياي وأن يحذف أحدكم الأرنب‬preserveme frontseeing any
of you throw at (or shoot at) a hare ! scil. jis õólans í Simon
‫ی‬wzólvang
‫إذا بلغ الرجل الستين الأرنب وتتم حذفها عن حضرتی ومشاهدت‬
ství Big óvis when a man reaches sixty, let him avoid the young
women (where observe the irregular use of u with a substantive).
a

(y) Various phrases, of which the following may serve as examples.

C We may say to a hunter, såvi stá ubicvi the dogs at the antelopes !
oz

scil.Junyilet loose ; or of a person who is aiming at a target,web

vi
atíg the target, by God ! scil.was he will hit; or if we hear people
shouting at the first appearance of the new moon,atig javjithe new
moon, by God ! scil. Igjuasi they have seen ; or to one who tells us a
‫ه‬ ,

dream , ja bóng live what is good and cheering, scil. Svety thou hast
seen or dreamed ; or to a man who has done something mean ,
Does this is all this out of stinginess? scil. Elés hast thou done ?
)(‫أمم الطلاق لين تغنى أحد منكم‬,.scil‫ قوا‬preserveyourmother from
being divorced, for if any of you sings a song (it will assuredly happen ).
'Aġ. ii. 52, 1. 8. D. G. ]
(8) Phrases in which a pronoun - generally of the first, rarely of
the second person - is followed by the noun, to which it refers, in the
accusative, without any verb intervening. The object of this construc
tion - named by the Arab grammarians wókáževi the specification or
particularisation (of the pronoun)—is to show that this accusative is
$ 35] The Verb . — 3. Government of the Verb.—(a) The Accus. 77

the noun which the pronoun represents and to which the statement A
made refers. It is to be explained by an ellipsis of suci I mean, or
vasi I specify. Examples : já es create some time we Arabs–
lit. we, (I mean ) the Arabs, -- are the most liberal among the generous ,;
‫ نحن المماليك لا طاقة بنا على المروءة‬ace,themiserally pur,have not
the ability to be generousas becomes men ; ‫نحن معاشرالأنبياء لا نورث‬
we, the band of prophets,have no heirs (among men);Láse como la B
‫ الباب‬by us, Tenim , the mist is strept qay; ‫إنا بني منقر قوم‬
qrama gg; we,the Bènū Minşar, are a people of high worth ; js
‫ أنا بنی دارم ژرارة مئا أبو‬seestthoutnot that Zuriard,the father of
Ma‘bèd, is one of us, the Bènū Dārim ? ( ies in rhyme for mes);
‫ر‬
‫ أنتم ابلمكؤمالنليهن تولاجوتاجلزفعضولا‬ge, Imean) the believers, griece not ye;
inin Thee - Goduce hope for bounty ; ‫وسبحان الله‬
‫) املهرعهظيم‬I assert) The absolute glory -- the great God ; ‫سلمان ما أهل‬
,, the kinsfolk of the Prophet[.
‫ البيت‬Salman is one ofus
REM . a. This kind of ‫ اختصاص‬is only a species of the ‫تصب‬
‫ على المدح والذم والشتم والترڅير‬or accusative of praise, blame,
reproach, and pity ; eg: ‫ الحمد لله الحميد‬praisebelongs to God ,
thepraiseworthy: ‫ الملك لله أهل الملك‬kingdom belongs to God, D
)the Being)entitled to kingdoma; ‫ وامرأته حمالة الحطب‬andhiswife,
the (miserable)carrier of firewood ; ‫ أتانی زید الفاسق الخبيث‬Zeid
came to me, the base ticked umretch ; ‫مررت به المسكين البائس‬
I passed by him, the poor wretch ; in all of which examples the
word gići, I mean, may be supplied.
REM. b. In such phrases as ‫يها‬.th
‫إل‬ ere
it is for you ! ‫هاك يدي‬
there's myhand for gonu ! ‫ نظا‬.here
‫هاك‬ then is a poem for you !
 78 PART THIRD . - Syntax. [S 36
A med slá take the sword ! [ to a woman ]the accusative is used,
because sway and jls (Vol. i. $ 368, rem. d ) are in point of sense
equivalent to já take )‫ ځها‬or ‫خذها إليك‬, ‫(ځد ټډی‬. Similarly,
in the phrases‫ عليك زيا‬, ‫عندك زيدا‬, ‫ ون زیڈا‬seize Zeid ! ‫ونگه‬
ógnacgs, take him ! the accusative does not depend upon ‫أن تأخد‬
( that thou shouldst seize) , to be supplied after the preposition, but
upon an imperative, such as já or ejl, implied in the preposition
B itself. The literal meaning is : seize Zèid, who is infront of, beside
or close by you. So also in the phrases iveti Jeroen come quickly
to the tèrīd (a sort of hash or stew), where the interjection is
equivalent to ‫ تيد زيدا زایت مسرعا‬gently aoitle Zeid ! treat Zeid
gently != ‫بله زیدا ; أمهله‬, or, with the genitive, ‫ بله زید‬let alone
‫هر‬ ‫رهر‬

Zèid, say nothing of Zeid = és or ‫ ; عه‬and ‫رويد زيدا‬, or

-

‫ روید زیر‬treat Zeid gently ! = ‫أروژه‬ ‫أمهله‬. In the case of ‫بله‬

and wg,
‫ روید‬with the accusative, the fėtha is a z
OE
or indeclinable
C ending (as in iii where? ); whereas with the genitive, it is the
termination of the construct accusative of iç = 3 leaving, letting
alone, and yy, the diminutive of syy, slow and gentle motion,
gentleness. Wemay also say ‫تيدك‬, ‫ رويدك‬, softly ! gently ! ‫تيدك‬
‫روید زیڈا زیدا‬, gently with Zeid ! ‫رومانی رویدنی‬,
‫درو‬, etc., gently with me ! the agent (Ú, etc.) being in the
wigasugg
genitive ; ‫ ژويدك شوقا بالعوازم‬drive thout the old camels gently,
D Fāiß ii. 139].
WE

36. The adverb truly, certainly, and the conjunction Up

that, as likewise the particles compounded with these two words,

such as Luci,or d's,but, yet, ils as if, as though, and 3ij because
(see Vol. i. $ 362, m , ee, and $ 367 , 9), take a following substantive or
pronoun (which, according to our idiom, ought to be in the nominative,
as the subject of a nominal or verbal proposition ) in the accusative,
§ 36] The Verb. - 3. Government of the Verb.- (a ) The Accus. 79

because the force of the verb to see )(est)( is embodied in these A

particles * This takes place both when the subject immediately
follows 3!, etc., and when it is separated from them by a portion of
w

the predicate of B, etc. , consisting of an adverb of time or place, or a

preposition with its complement. In the former case the affirmative
particle ſmay be prefixed to the predicate of Gf ;; in the latter, to its
subject. If, however, the predicate be negative, or consist of aa verb in
the perfect, not preceded by “, the particle ought not to be B
prefixed to it. Examples :‫ إن الله على مكحلل شئ قدير‬God ismighty
over all (lit.SeGal, He is mighty over all(; ‫إن الحداثة لا تدوم‬
youth does not last ; moj jedis att by God is forgiving, merciful;
‫ وإن فريقا من المؤمنين تتارون‬anda partof thebelieversarere arere;
‫ تعمك إنهم لفي غرتهم يعمهون‬buy thy life, they arere beuildered in
their intorication ; ‫ أنتم تتشهدون أن مع الله الة أخرى‬do yetestify C
thatthere are other godswith the(true) God? ‫إن بالشعب الذي دون‬
gimos el in the ravine that is below Sela' (there lies) a murdered
man : ‫ إن في ذلك تعبرة لأولي الأبصار‬in this thereis an example (or
‫نيك‬
warning) to thosepossessed of insight; Goglar bu ‫ي‬se‫إ!ن ف‬
‫ للمسلمين‬in putting thee to death , old man , there is a benefit to the
Muslims ; ‫ فانی تع نفر من الأنصار والناس في أمر عظيم إذ هومت‬D
även I was with some men of the 'Anşār,whilst the people were in
great distress,when ho Ihad a lightslumber [; ‫حكى أن ميا من ملوك‬
‫ الهند كان له زوجة‬it is narrated that one of the kings of India had
awife; ‫وفي الحډيث أن رجلا قال رسول الله إن أبی أفلتت فجاءة‬
and in the hadit - or collection of traditions -- (we read ) that a man

* Compare en and ecce in Latin, as en eum , ecce eum or eccum .

 80 PART THIRD . - Syntax . [s 36
‫ر‬
A ‫ا‬said
‫ وقر‬, O apostle of God ! mymother has died suddenly ; ‫كان في أذنيه‬
‫و‬
as if in his ears (avere) hardnessof‫ر‬hearing
‫مه‬
; ‫كأنها كوكب درى‬
as if it were a glittering star; ‫ وهذا لأن العلم نور والوضوء ثور‬and
'

(he did) this because knowledge is a light and the ablution (before
prayer)is a light; ‫ ولين المنافقين لا يفقهون‬but the hypocrites donot
understand
REM . a. These particles, along with those mentioned in rem . f,
B
are named by the grammarians Gölgesig ! 'inna and its sisters,
or
‫ الحروف المشبهة بالفعل‬theparticles wohich resemble the verb in
‫وتمنيت‬a ‫ك‬certain
having ‫استدر‬verbalmeaning
‫أدت وشبهت و‬and‫ثل‬force
‫ل م‬,‫لوأجنودمعامنعينهىا املعفاعلني فايلهافع‬
‫وترجيت‬. The word governed by them is called their ‫ اسم‬or noun,
and the predicate is called their‫ عبر‬or predicate..
C
Rem. b. If the predicate is placed between ‫ إ!ن‬or ji and its
noun, the logical accent lies upon the noun ; whereas, if the
predicate stands after the noun, it receives the logical accent
itself. For example, slots slés B! means your friend is with
you ; but sles sligió is your friend is with you .
REM . C. A second subject after ‫أين إن‬, and ‫لين‬,may be put
in the nominative, if the common predicate has been already
expressed ; as ‫إن زیدا جال وبشرا‬,or ‫وبشر‬, verily Zeid is sitting,
D Biar (ice ‫ وبشر جالس‬or ‫(وبشر ذيك‬: ‫علمت أن زيدا جال‬
.and
‫وخباشلردا‬,‫ و‬or‫لق‬,
‫ومبنشطر‬ I knote that eid is sitting, and Biar ; ‫بين عمرا‬
or vás, but 'Amr is going away, and Hālid ;

* ] In thephrase ‫ إن من خیرالقوم أو خيرهم نية زيد‬one of the best

intentioned of the people, or the very best of them , is Zeid, we must not
write is because 3! is to be supplied after gi,"A jānixviii. 77. D. G.]
§ 36] The Verb.-3. Government of the Verb.— (a) The Accus. 81

‫ إن الخلاقة والنبوة فيه والمماث وسادة أطهار‬verily the califate A

and the office of prophet are in them (in their tribe), and noble deeds
and chiefs of spotless character.

Rem.. d.. When tó is appended to !‫إن‬, *,

‫أين& أن‬is, and is, it
hinders their regimen , or, to speak more correctly, their governing
power does not extend beyond itself (á cãi có the hindering mā),
and hence their noun is put in the nominative ; as‫إما الربا في‬
‫ السيئة‬verily usury is in the delay (or payment(; ‫ إما الصدقات‬B
‫ بلفقراء‬the obligatory alms are only for the poor )‫ إنما‬is usually
restrictive, see $ 185, and Vol. i. $ 362,m (; ‫إما يوحي إلى أنها‬
‫ إله إله واحد‬it is onlyrevealed to methat yourGod is one God ;
‫ واعلموا أنما أموالكم وأولادكم فتنة‬and know that your neealth and
your children are a temptation ; ‫ كانها شغل الكبريت منظرها‬us : as

flamesof sulphurteere its face ; ‫ » انها عمامه بين الرجال لواء‬ifC as

his turban were a standard among men . The same influence is

exercised by the ‫ ضمير الشأني‬or ‫) ضمير القصة‬.Vol

.i.$ 367, 09(;;
as
‫ إنه أمة الله ذاهبة‬serily the handmaiden of God is departing;
‫ إنه من يأتيننا تأته‬Derily, wohoever comes to us,wewill go to him ;
‫ه أنا الله‬.v‫ إن‬erI il am Gody
RE3 . e.. If the lightened ) ‫ ( قف‬forms ‫كان أن إن‬, and
‫نعن‬, be used, their government is likewise hindered, and their D
noun is put in the nominative.- 1is in this case always followed
by j [‫ن‬Vol
‫را‬.‫ج‬i‫ا‬.‫ت‬$ 361
‫ذان‬,c‫ه‬, ‫ن‬ce)]‫إ‬, as ‫ إن زیدتطبيق‬verily Zeid‫ل‬is‫ك‬goin‫وإن‬
away; ülirahas ulté ! verily these two are sorcerers ;
‫جميع دتيناا محضرون‬ ‫ لما‬andverilyall,gathered together ) ‫ما مزيد‬
ustu), shall be brought before Ux. — As to ¿i , the grammarians
assume an ellipse of the ‫ضمير الشأن‬, as ‫علمت أن زيد مطيل‬
I know that Zaid is goingacan,i... ‫ أنه‬or ‫و علمواأن مايك زأته‬
W.II , 11
 82 PART THIRD .- Syntax. [S 36
A
‫ كل من يحفى وينتعل‬they know thatevery one who is barefooted
and shod, will die (alike). We find also such examples as suf zí
‫ في يوم الرخاء أثنى فراقك‬if thout hadat askedme to part from
thee in the day of afluence,for ‫) بأن ربيع وغيث مريع ;أ‬they
know ) that thou art autumnal showers and a plenteous rain, for
‫ زبان‬and even ‫ وإن لا ما يوقینهم ربك أعمالهم‬andoverily thy
Lord will repay every one (according to) their works (ó jó tó
B
‫ه(يمتفمضقلاين‬,‫يا‬where ‫وإن‬. Examples ‫ أن‬: ‫كأن‬
‫ ثد‬others rend ‫ كه‬of-
as if its breasts were two round ivory caskets ; iis
‫ ظبية تعو إلى وارق الشتم‬like a gazelle ophich stretches (ler headl) to
theleafy selena-tree ; where others read ‫ أن ثدييه‬, and ‫ كأن ظبية‬,
or (regarding ‫ أن‬as redundant( ‫كأن ظبية‬-in
the genitive
Examples of ‫لين‬: ‫ لين الظالمون اليوم في ضلال مبين‬but the
norong-doersare this day in manifest error : ‫لين الراسخون في العلي‬
C opio but those of them who arefirmly rooted in knowledge.
Rem. f. The words é, utinam, would that— ! and or

‫تعل‬, perhaps, are construed in the same way as ‫ إن‬etc. ; as

‫ يا ليت بينك وبيني بعد المشرقيين‬o that there arere between thee and
me the distance of east from aest ! ‫ألا ليت يا غرقته القوابل‬would |

that themiduoires had droloned Fais ! ‫وما يدريك لعل الشاعة قريب‬
and what lets thee know (whether) perchance the hour (of the resur
D rection ) is near ? If tó be added (see rem. d ), the government of
‫ عل‬or ‫ تعل‬is hindered, as ‫ تعلما أنت حالم‬perchance thon toile
behave with calmness (or moderation ); but the noun of land may be
put either in the nominative or in the accusative, as ‫قالت ألا تتما‬
‫ هذا الحمام تا‬she said, O sonald that these dones teere ours !
‫ يا ليت ما أمنا شالت تعامتها‬0 would that our mother took her
departure !—These words seem, as has been already remarked in
|

I
$ 37] The Verb. — 3. Government of the Verb.—a) The Accus. 83
Vol. i. § 364, rem . b, to be verbs ; and if so, they govern the A
accusative by their own force and not by that of an omitted or
implied verb *. Sed, however, sometimes (especially in the dialect
E

of ‘Oķèil] takes a genitive ; as mujú stig laini si jä perhaps

PAbu 'l-Mijwar may be near thee; iis linda ocás atí io
perhaps God may have given you some superiority over us.
Rem. g.. With the suffixes of the 1st person we say I,
‫إننا إنی‬I,
or
‫ا إلى‬1‫إ‬, and so with Ü , ‫ ځأ‬and ‫ و;لي‬but ‫ی‬she‫ لعل‬ismore
usual than wité, whilst conversely connu is very rare. The corre-
. B

sponding Hebrew particle to ës,‫ إن‬viz.. 737, also governs the

accusative, as appears from the forms '997 and 93.7 , ecce me.
Rem. h. Some of the Arabs put the predicate of these words,
0.02

as well as their noun, in the accusative ; eg.

.
as
bowls ji áósló his ears, when he looks out eagerly, are like a
W

quill or a pointed reed-pen ; it cameto us verily our guards are

lions ; leping smali oliEDÝ O would that the days of youth c
could return ! Ju si Ú O would that I were thou !
37. If the conjunctions connects two nouns in such a way that
the second is subordinate to, and not coordinate with, the first, it
governs the second in the accusative ; as ‫ مشی زید والطريق‬Zeid

went along the road ; Initig aj to I did not cease going almg
the Nile ; ‫ أجمعوا أمركم وشراءكم‬decide then upon your affair with D
your companions; ) ‫ استوى الماء والخشبة‬water and urood are equal[;
švis beo 6 what hast thou done, together with thy father ?
事
) ‫ تیت‬seems to be changed from ‫رأيت = ریت‬. Hence it can be
construed with two objective complements in the accusative (like the
‫ (أفعال القلوب‬e.g, ‫ و تیت زیڈا قائما‬might eid rise ! prop.ntinam
videas Zeidum surgentem .]
 84 PART THIRD . — Syntax. [$ 37

A ‫ سرت وإياه‬Iwent togetherwith him ; ‫ما شأنك وزيدا‬, or ‫ما ت وزیدا‬

mohat hast thou to dowith Zeid ? ‫قدطحول نجد‬
‫ ما تك وال‬what hast
thou to do with loitering about Nēģd ? ( súaſ or suis ( ‫ك‬une
‫حسب‬
‫ وزیدا درهم‬a dirham is enough for thee together with Zeid ; ‫وحسبك‬
)

‫ والا سیف مهد‬a sword of good steel is enough for thee with
(when thou meetest) ad-Pakļāk; eesti; suis do as thou pleasest
JI
)$ 33,b,R)aboutthepilgrimage)=‫امراونفسه;(عليك أنك مع الممج‬
B let a man alone (= ama co ass). This g is called by the grammarians,
like the į that governs the subjunctive (s 15, e), amedde sig or
‫ واو الجمع‬theaap of simultaneousness,and ‫ واو المصاحبة‬the acao
of association or concomitance t.

[Rem. a. The'ſ‫ و‬is called ngiti sig the www of adherence,if the
two nouns belong necessarily together,as deting
‫هر‬
‫ وثمنه‬is s each
С
thing has its price; a dog já every man has his own care.]
10.0
Rem. 6. This accusative is termed des jouesji or the object in
connection with which something is done. It occurs, though but
rarely, in Hebrew, as Esther, ch. iv. 16, ‫ן‬13
ֵּ‫ם ב‬DIXX
ּ‫' אָצו‬NTYI? ‫ּם־אֲנִי‬Da,
ַ‫ג‬
I too, with my maidens, will fast so.

*
‫ وإياه‬the modern preposition ‫ا‬uy‫ وي‬or úg
* [From this olurg ‫ ويا‬with has been
formed ( comp. Lane, p. 135 c). Spitta, Grammatik, $ 83, p. 166,
Dadduces this as an evident proof against Sprenger, who considered the
whole theory of the ‫ واو المعية‬as false ( Alte Geogr. p. 280). D. G.]
† Quite correctly too, for the subjunctive of the verb corresponds
both in signification and in form to the accusative of the noun . The
one shows that a person or thing depends upon an act, the other that
one act depends upon, or is affected or governed by, another act. [It
is perhaps superfluous to remark that the use of , with the accusative
is not limited by the conditions given for the use of 'ġ‫ و‬with the
subjunctive.]
$ 38] The Verb. - 3 . Government of the Verb.-(a) The Accus. 85

38. The person or thing called, sshi, is generally preceded by A

one or other of the ‫ حروف الداء‬, or ‫ حروف المناداة‬,, interjections. The
principal of these are :: , 10 , ‫یا‬, ‫ا‬vi, ‫) أيها اي‬.fen‫)ا‬,
‫ رأي‬sí;
‫ رهيا أي‬isi, ‫أيه‬
to which ý may also be prefixed ; and is.
(a) of the first seven of these particles the most common are
i, ý, and y . They require after them a noun not defined by the
>

article, which is put sometimes in the nominative, sometimes in the

accusative .
( a) The nominative - in the singular always without the tènwin- B
is used when the particular person or thing called is directly addressed
by the speaker, and no explanatory term of any‫ود‬description
‫ر‬
is appended
‫و‬ ‫ در‬.
to it ; as won ý Muḥammad (nom . id); ci o 'Ammár
).nom‫(عمار‬:; ‫ و یا عمرو‬.Amr
(nom ‫و‬gros
‫عمر‬.Vol
, .i.38, rem 0(; ‫یا طلحة‬
0 Tal ; ‫ و یا سیبویه‬Sibaweih ; ‫ و یا تأبط شرا‬Ta'alata Strran ;
‫ و یا فاطمة‬Fatima ; ‫ یا زینب‬0 Zeinel : ‫ و یا رقاش‬Rahas; ‫یا بی‬
O man of the tribe of Dabba (á) ; jos Ú O thou man ; avut ý
0 air ; ‫ يا عين‬0 eye ; ‫ یا جارية ما اسمك‬that is thy name, girl? C
‫ یا رجلان‬ho votetwomen
you ; ‫ یا رجال‬ho youmen ; ‫ و یا تبون‬prophets ;
--
‫يا لهذا‬,,‫يا هذه‬, ‫ يا هو‬, you there !
( B ) The accusative is used : ( 1 ) when the person or thing called
is indefinitet and not directly addressed by the speaker ; as when a
blind man says she is blog ý some man, take my hand , or
sem sjá áslo ý some woman,take my hand ; or a preacher, D
-

miks goig isté Ú O thou thut art hvedless, whilst Death is seeking
thee ; or a poet, ‫ة‬an‫ و یا راح يبغى زيارة طيب‬traveller that wishest to
举
i is used in calling one who is near, ī in calling to one who is
distant. ]
† [Nöldeke writes in a note on Delectus, p. 67 , 1. 15 : “ Ego quidem
in talibus nomen indefinitum esse nego ."]
 86 PART THIRD . - Syntax . ($ 38

A visit Taibat (e-Medina (;; ‫راكبا إما عرضت قبليغاتامای من نجران‬,‫أيا‬

wat ný jí o rider,if thou fallest in with (them), tell my comrades of
Nègrān that there is no meeting for us). (2) When it is directly
addressed by the speaker, but has an explanatory term appended to it,
namely, either a genitive, or an objective complement, or a preposition
with its complement, or a determinative or limiting term ; as mus ☺
atí o ‘Abdu -llah ; we gotto mention ý o lord of the wild beasts ;
B
incest vi ý o father of the little fortress ( an epithet of the fox );
‫ يا صاحبى‬0 ye turo companions of mine; ‫ يا موقد ناری‬0 yeto
kindlers of my fire ;; ‫ يا بني إسرائيل‬0O children of Israel ;; ‫إخواننا‬
;,
O brethren of ours ; glo best ý O thou that art ascending a hill
݂‫ ܟ݁ܰܕ‬jś she's ý o thou that art gifted with every good thing ;
‫ یا رفيقا بالعباد‬0‫ و‬thou that art kind towardsmen ; ‫يا خيرا من زیيرد‬
Co thou that art better than Zèid ; Lang hina ý o thou that art
handsome in face ; cóté gás O thou whose slave has been
beaten.

The simple stw , when the accusative is used, is merely an

exclamation, addressed to no one in particular ; but when the nomi
native is used, it is a real address, as, to a definite individual.
In the compound als no such distinction is made, and even in a real
a

address the accusative is used, as being the case that depends on a

Dverb, and to which , therefore, other nominal and verbal dependencies
can be more readily attached ; in contradistinction to the nominative,
which is independent and closes the construction . The reason of the
omission of the tènwin in the nominative singular seems to lie in the
energy with which the word is uttered, whereby its termination is
shortened, as in the imperative and jussive of the verb (see also
rem . b).
REM . a. When no interjection is expressed, the same rules
apply as above ; ... ‫ عبان‬0 ،1tban ; ‫ و ذا العرش‬Lord of the
$ 38] The Verb . — 3. Government of the Verb.— (a) The Accus. 87
‫ر‬

Throne; ‫ خليتي‬0 my two friends ; ‫ أحباب أنفسنا‬beloved of our A

w

‫ أحبتأنصاب!ح تیل‬0. friendsof ours ! ‫ يوساففتدأعمرخضنوقعن هذا‬Joseph,turn

sonals
away from this (leave it alone, take no further notice of it) ;
ja cup of become morning,O night ; fciamo mai ransom thyself,
‫ قوم وی‬sická hodie
O throttled one ; vuna sgángó may your noses be
cut off, ye two poets who belong to an honourable people ! With
pronouns this omission is very rare ; as ‫ ذا ارعوا‬thon there,, refrain
) from folly), for ‫ بمثلك لهذا توعة وغرام زيا ذا‬through the like of B
thee, thou (man) there, ( comes) heartache and torment (or ruin) ;
‫ ثم أنتم ولا تفتون أنفعه‬thereafter ye, yemen there, uoereslaying
your outon geles ; ‫ و من لا يموت ارحم من يموت‬Thout that diest
not, have mercy upon him who is dying.

REM . b . The suffix of the first person singular, ‫ی‬- , is generally

shortened in the vocative into kèsra, (see above, at the end of

the section) ; as jy ‫ا‬Ú‫ ي‬O0 my lord, sal jy my Lord,, show me;; C

‫ يا نفس‬0 my soul; ‫يا عبادی‬, or ‫يا عباد‬, O my servants ; ‫ أخلاء‬my
This remark does not, of course ,
friends! ‫ني‬.O
‫ يا ب‬my dear gon
apply to words ending in ‫ي‬- or , from radicals tert. ‫ و‬et ‫ ; ی‬as
‫تی‬

‫ يا فتای‬, from ‫ فى‬a youths, ‫يا قاضی‬, from ‫ قاض‬a judge. Other
forms are admissible, besides -
‫ی‬- and ; as , from ‫ عبد‬a slave ,
‫يا عبدي‬, ‫ یا عبدا‬or ‫ يا عبد ویا عبدی‬, and in pause ‫يا عبده‬, D
‫بداه‬.compare
‫) یا ع‬ no. 6, rem . d). E.g ‫ ابن أم‬0 son ofmymother ,
.Kor'a n , ‫ يابن عم‬0o sone of myuncle, ‫ یا بنی‬0 my dear son ,
vii 149
for ‫عو أمر‬, ‫ یا با تجاوز عنی بنی‬O my Lord ,forgive me ; ‫يا بنت‬
‫ ما لا تتومی واهجوی‬o daughter ofmyuncle,donot scold,but go
‫قط‬
to sleep ; Las ‫ و یا هاه هل نت أعور‬myuncle,acast thout ever blind
of one eye ? The words i father and a mother admit of the
peculiar forms ‫ يا أبت‬and ‫) يا أبنت‬also pronounced with fetla,
 88 PART THIRD . — Syntax. [$ 38

A ‫أبت‬, ‫(أمت‬, which become in pause ‫ يا أبه‬und ‫يا أمه‬. welikewise

meet with ‫ يا أبتاه‬and ‫يا أمتاه‬
Rem. c. On the principle alluded to at the end of the section,
as well as in rem . b, several classes of substantives admit of being
shortened in the vocative by the rejection of one or more of their
final letters. This abbreviation is called by the grammarians
‫ الرخيم‬the softening ofthe voice (compare vol.i. $ 283). Namely :
( 1 ) All substantives, whether proper or common, masculine or
B
feminine,that end in ‫ة‬á ; as ‫ یا توب‬for ‫يا توبة‬, ‫أجاري‬for ‫أجارية‬
‫ہر‬

‫ر‬
‫ یا غوى‬for ‫) یا مغوية‬names of men (; ‫ أأميم‬for ‫أميمة‬,‫ أاشسممىی‬for
‫شر‬

‫أسمية‬, ‫ یا مئ‬for ‫) يا منية‬names ofwomen (; ‫أعاذل‬, for ‫أعاذلة‬, o thout

) tooman ) that reproacluest (one(; ‫ يا تاق‬, for ‫ یا ناقة‬0 she-camel ;
‫) یا شا آدنی‬or ‫ (ارجی‬keep to the house, O sleep ! for ‫یا شاه‬
(2) Simple proper names, not ending in á, that contain at least
C four letters ; as ‫ ماز‬for ‫ أعام یا مازن‬for ‫أعامر‬, ‫ أمالي‬for ‫مالك‬,‫أ‬
‫ یا عا‬for ‫) یا عاد‬name of a woman)).. If the word consists ofmore
than four letters, and the penult is servile and quiescent, it
disappears along with the last letter, As
as ‫يا ثم‬, ‫یا مرو‬ ‫ يا من‬,
‫ یا جع يا مشك‬, for ‫مروان عثمان‬, ‫ ; جغئر مین منصور‬but
in other cases it must be retained, as ‫يا ختا‬, ‫يا قنو يا مجي‬,
‫يا فرعو‬, ‫يا غزنی‬, for ‫قنور مجيد مختار‬, ‫فرعون‬, and ‫غرني‬, though
D
some admittheforms ‫ یا فرع‬and ‫یا زن‬. Words not endingin ‫ة‬
may also be inflected without regard to the portion dropped ; as
‫ يا حار‬, ‫يا ثوی یا جعله‬, instead of ‫ حار‬, ‫ جغف‬, and ‫ ) و‬for ‫حارث‬
‫ جعفر‬, and ‫ ; (ثمود‬and the same thing is admissible when the
termination ä- is not of the fem . gender, as homió lý, instead of
‫مشتم‬, for ‫() مسلمة‬a man's name). Proper names compounded with
a genitive (as ‫ عبد شمس‬, or forming a complete proposition (as
‫برق تحت‬, ‫ (تأبط شرا‬do not admit of any abbreviation , though we
occasionally find such examples as ‫ يا تأبط‬, dropping ‫ ; شرا‬but if
$ 38] The Verb.-3. Government of the Verb.— (a ) The Accus. 89

they belong to the class called ‫) مركب مزج‬Vol.i.s264),they are A

shortened by the rejection of the second word,as ‫یا سیب یا معدی‬
for ‫معدي كرب‬, ‫ سیبویه‬. )3( To these may be added some rarer
cases, as
‫ يا صاح‬0 companion , for ‫صاح شبر ولا تزل صاحب‬
as

‫ ذاكر الموت‬friend, gird up thy dress, and cease not to bemindful

of death ; and ‫ گرا‬, for ‫ كروان‬, in the proverb ‫ أطرق گرا‬cronucle
down quietly, O bustard (or partridge); as well as the words
‫ ) یا فل‬for ‫ (فلان‬and ‫يا رجل = يا من‬. .Com
] ‫ ؟‬353 * , .2 [ B
. Vol. i p
These last are inflected as follows::
Plur. Dual . Sing.
‫یا فلون‬ ‫یا فلان‬ ‫ یا فل‬.M
‫یا فلا‬ ‫یا فلان‬ ) ‫فل‬, ‫ يا قلة ( ف‬.F
‫یا ممنون‬ ‫يا هنان‬ )‫يا هناه‬, ‫ (بیا ممنهن‬.M
)‫یا موناه‬ )‫يا هنانية‬
‫يا هنا‬ ‫یا هنتان‬ ‫ یا هنة يا من‬.F C

)‫یا ناتوه‬ )‫یا نتانیه‬ )‫يا هناه‬

Rem. d . We have said above that the noun which immediately
follows these interjections does not admit the article. One excep
tion is the name of God, ‫الله‬, from which we may say ‫ یا الله‬or,
irregularly retaining the hèmza, ati “ *. Another is produced by
the insertion of the pronoun is or his between the interjection and
the vocative ; as ‫يا لهؤلاء الرجال ريا هذا الرجل‬,instead of ‫ يا رجل‬, D
* Themore usual form , however ,is ‫اللهم‬, without any interjection
prefixed , though we find occasionally in verse ‫یا الله‬. The origin of
‫بوده‬
the termination is uncertain. [This is used as a corroborative
interjection in the expressions i tot unless indeed or unless possibly
‫برت‬.
( 186, a, rem . d), and be pati yes indeed or yea verily (Lane,
p . 83, c).]
W.II. 12
 90 PART THIRD. — Syntax. [S 38

A
‫ يا ذا الموقتا بمقتل شيخه ويا رجال‬o0 that
thou there,ashoterrifiestus
‫ ر‬. ‫مہ‬

withthe murder of thy chief. But cases like a O (thou |

who art like) the lion in strength ;; ‫ی‬wouis

‫من أجلك يا التي تمت قلب‬
because of thee (for events ins),O thou who hast enslaved my heart ;
and ‫ فيا الغلامان اللذان فرا‬and O ye two slaves,who have ed;
are very rare .

REM . e. If a vocative, expressed by the nominative, be simply

repeated, or another word be substituted for it ) ‫البدل‬, sees 139,
B rem . b, 2), or it be connected with another vocative by a conjunction :

)‫ عطف الشي‬see $ 139, rem . b, 3), the ordinary rules are followed ;
as ‫ یا زید زید‬0 Zeid, Zeid ; ‫ و یا رجل زيد‬thoutman there - Zeid ;
‫ یا زید وعمرو‬0 Zeid and Amr; ‫ و یا رجل وزيد‬thout man and
Zeid ; ‫ يا زيد أو عمرو‬0 Zeid or 'Amr ; but ‫ و یا تريد عبد الله‬Zeid
)Imean) Abdu 7ah ; ‫ یا زید وعبد الله‬.Ze
‫و‬ id
and Abdat 'tab
If, however, the connected word ) ‫ (الموق‬has the article ,both the 1
c nominative and accusative are admissible ;; as ‫ یياا عمرو والحارث‬, or
‫والحارث‬, o Amranal Al-Harid :; ‫يا زيد والغلام‬, or ‫والغلام‬, o Zeid
zaid
and the slave : ‫ يا جبال أوبي معه والطير‬, or ‫والطير‬, 0 mountains,
;
repeat ye ( the praises of God ) with him , and ye birds. - Should a
vocative be repeated in such a way that the repetition is necessarily
put in the accusative by a following genitive, then the accusative
may be used‫ہ‬in the first instance as well as the nominative. For
‫مہ‬

example, ‫يا سعد سعد الأوس‬, or tew ý , o Sa'd , Sa'd of (the tribe
D of ) Al-'Aus; ‫ یا تیم تیم عدي‬, or ‫ يا تيم‬, O Team , Teim of the tribe
of ) Adi; ‫ یا زید زید العملات الدير‬0 Zeid , Zeid of the high -bred
camels of slender make. The grammarians explain the accusative
by saying either that the second accusative is kis arbitrarily
inserted, or that the genitive has been dropped in the first instance.
In the one case the original construction is ‫ ; یا تعد الأوس‬in the
‫ہی مہم‬
other, ‫یا تعد الأوس سعد الأوس‬.
§ 38] The Verb . - 3. Government of the Verb.—a) The Accus. 91
Rem. f. If a vocative, expressed by the nominative, be con- A
nected with another substantive by a ‫) عطف الوكيډ‬see $ 139,
rem . a) or a. ‫) عطف البيان‬see $ 139,rem .b,3),the appositive
‫تهیه‬may‫یا‬
be put either in the nominative or the accusative ; as
‫د‬ ‫ت ر مت‬
‫أجمعون‬, or ‫أجمعين‬,o (tribe of ) Temam ,all ofyou ; ‫يا محمدالنبي‬
Or
‫التبي‬, O Muhammad the prophet ; ‫يا رجل زید‬, or ‫رزیدا‬ 0 thou
man there, Zeid ; ‫يا هذا زيد‬, or ‫زیڈا‬, .id; ‫ یا غلام بشر‬, or ‫بشرا‬
0 slave, Bisr ; ]‫ و یا أعرابي أحمق چلا جافا‬thou foolish,charlish, B
rough boor, Tab. ii. 1312, 1. 2 seq .); unless it has a genitive after it,
‫ تیم‬Ú‫ یا‬O (tribe of)(
when it must be in the accusative ; asocis vad
Teman , allofyou :; ‫ يا إبرهيم خلیل الله‬OO Abraham ,the
, friend of ‫گه ر‬

God ; ‫و یا زید ذا الحيل‬o Zeid, skilled in toiles ; ‫ازيد أخا ورقاء‬

Warha ; ‫ و یا زید ابن أخي‬Zeld,mybrothers
0O Zeid , brother of Warkā
80n ; ‫ یا هند ابنة عمنا‬o Hind , our uncle's daugluten.- If the word
ürl stands between the names of son and father, it loses its C
prosthetic ! (Vol. i. $ 21 , b), and the name of the person addressed
may be put either in the nominative or the accusative (though the
latter is generally preferred ]; as ‫یا زید بن عمرو‬, or ‫یا زید‬, 0 Zeid ,
son of ' Amr ; ‫ مرامرمرة بن تليد‬Murra, O0 Murra, Murra son of
Telud ; ‫ وتبني المجد یا عمر بن تیلی‬and thout buildest up glory,
o ،Omar son of Leila ; ) ‫ عليك سلام الله قيس بن عاصم‬Godspeace
upon thee,, OO Ķais ibn 'Aşim , Hamāsa 367 with the var.wod
. .D
The same construction holds with ‫ ; ابنة‬asa8 ‫يا هند ابنة عاصم‬ or

.O
‫يا هند‬, Hind, daughter of sina
REM. g. An adjective in connection with a vocative, expressed
by the nominative, may likewise be put either in the nominative
or the accusative ; as ‫ یا تريد العاقل‬, or ‫ والعاقل‬o Zéid
zeidt the intelligent;
‫يا لهذا العاقل‬, or ‫العاقل‬, o thou there,the intelligent;: ‫یا زید الكريم‬
‫الأب‬, or ‫الكريم‬, o Zedd,those father is noble : ‫عب بن مامة‬
 92 PART THIRD . - Syntux. [$ 38

A
‫ وابن عدي بأجود منك يا عم الجوادا‬not Kat 'abuallamanor
' Ibn Su'dā was more bountiful than thou , O ' Omar the bountiful;
liste en los ☺ 0 thou unrighteous man, the apostate, “ El-Mubarrad,
p . 573, 1. 1 ].
Rem. h. The interjection ų is sometimes prefixed to an impera
tive, as ‫ ألا يا اسجدوا‬0, prostrate yourselves ; ‫ألا يا اشلی یا دار‬
sui obé só o be thou safe,O house of Maiya, despite(all) wear
B
and tear, or duringtearand tear ; ‫ألا ياصبحانی قبل غارة سنجابي‬
O bring me a morning-draught before the attack on Singal; whá v
‫ یانفر‬come forth to unar, Abu Halid ; to the optative ‫ ) تیت‬see s 36,
rem . f'), as ‫ يا ليت شعری‬0 towould that I knew : ‫يا ليتني څن‬
opeo O would that I had been with them ; and to a nominal or
verbalproposition ,as ‫ یا بوش يزيد‬0, woe to eid, ‫یا تعنة الله‬
‫ والأقوام كليم والصالحين على سمعان من جار‬0, the curseof God
C and of all the peoples and of the just be upon Sim'ān as a neighbour ;
In these cases
‫قل خير الغوانی‬.title
‫ یا‬0, is thegood of the momen
some grammarians assumean ellipse of the ‫منادی‬ or person called ,
as
‫يا قوم بوش بزید‬, whilst others regard ‫ یا‬merely asa ‫حق تنبیه‬
or particle used to excite attention .

)1( ‫ أيها‬and ‫) يا أيها‬or ‫ (يائها‬require after them a noun , singular,

dual or plural, defined by the article, and in the nominative case ; as
‫ہر‬
D ‫ أيها الا‬0 people; ‫ يا أيها الملك‬0 king ; ‫أيها المرأة‬, or ‫أيتها المرأة‬
‫شهر‬

0 toman ; ‫ يا أيتها النفس‬0 woul ; ‫ أيتها العير‬0 caravan ; ‫يا أيبهأابیالذين‬

[ The ellipse of the Sóló is evident in such phrases as
contigo
‫ وامی‬0 thou, whom I would ransom with my father and my mother ;
‫ه‬
‫ الله المستعان عليك يا قدث نفسی‬Ipray God tohelp me against thee,
O thou whom I would ransom with my life, Agānī xviii. 185, lines 22,
23. D. G.]
§ 38] The Verb . — 3. Government of the Verb. — a ) The Accus. 93

‫ آمنوا‬O yewho believe : ‫]أيه المؤمنون‬for ‫ (أيها‬o believers. The demon- A

%

strative Is is also admissible ; as juis G ý thou there,comeforward !

and the housesevi hem ají o thou there, whose soul passion (or grief)
is(recilest)
killing the;sono
‫السي‬in cui
‫د‬Bènū ‫ا الاب‬is‫ ذ‬on theri 0 thou there, who barkest at
' s- Sid.
、

Rem. iniisoccasionally used wo haiešu,for specification (see

$ 35, 6, 8), by a speaker to call attention to himself or himself and B
‫ أما أنا فأفعل كذا أيها الرجل‬ts for‫نا‬meI
his companions ; as ‫للهم‬do‫ا‬
‫اغفر ل‬will
so and so, O man (meaning himself ); ákieli
O God, forgive us, 0 band (me and my companions) ;
áratáſand so we remained behind, 0 three (we three ). In this case
WE
weil must be preceded by a clause containing the pronoun to which
it refers, and ų is never prefixed to it.
(c) is, which is used to express sorrow or pain, and is hence C
called ‫ة‬a‫ الدب‬bé, the particle of lamentation, follows the same rules
as ‫ ; یا‬..e ‫ وا محمد‬alas Muhammad ! ‫ وا عبد الله‬als ،Abdu
‘ -lah
'llāh !
Generally, however,, the termination 1 , in pause ói-, is added , which
‫ا زیدا‬is,‫ و‬or olaj is, alas Zeid !
usually effaces the final vowels ; as less
‫ وا معدي كربا‬, ‫عبد المطلباه‬-If
ý ‫ وا‬a genitive follows, this termina
.
tion ‫و‬is‫هر‬annexed
‫م‬
to it, and not to the governing word ; as guolig
blinie alasfor the commander of the faithful! Similarly with it! D
son
Sn , ‫بن الزبيراه‬ is alas for 'Amr the son of èzez- Zubèir ! But as
‫عمرو‬

to an adjective, there is a doubt, some admitting bláucia woj is alas

for the noble Zèid , and others not.
REM . A. ‫ وا‬can be prefixed only to a proper name or a definite
word* ; we cannot say öghang is or old is. Nor can it precede
* [That is, not having a vague signification, for lid is definite in
the grammatical sense . The rule refers, of course, only to the cases
 94 PART THIRD. — Syntax. [$ 39

A
‫ ;الذي‬thought it may be prefixed to ‫من‬, as: ‫وا من حفر بئر زمزماه‬
alas for him who dug the well of Zemzèm !
.REM.6 ‫یا‬mayalso be used ‫بلدية‬, as ‫ ألا يا عمرو عمراه‬oO'Amr,
' Amr !
REM . C. Words ending in the elif makşūra ( LS-) usually reject
that termination before adding ól-, as ‫وا موتاه‬, from ‫ موسی‬Moses ,
thoughólmigó ig is admissible. See Vol. i. 368, rem . b.
Rem. d . The suffix pronoun of the 1st pers. sing. may either
B be retained or rejected ; as ‫دیا‬ ‫ روا‬or ‫وا عبدا‬, O my servant!
‫ يا إخوتاه‬O brethren ![ ‫ وا ظهراه‬0 my back ! ‫ یا أسفا وا أسفا‬or
‫يا أشقى‬, ‫وا حربا‬, ‫وا حسرتا‬, ‫ یا حسرتا‬or ‫یا حسرتی‬, ‫ يا ويلتی را تهقی‬,
O my grief! —The suffixes of the 2nd pers. sing. fem. and the 3rd
pers. sing. masc. retain their vowels in a lengthened form , to
prevent confusion : oićóglé is, alas for thy slave, is masc., the fem .
being apróstá ; ig; whereas to tá is is fem ., the masc. being
ogóslá iſ Compare certain forms of úró ý under a, rem. c, 3.
C REM . e. In verse the form ól is occasionally used, even out of

pause ; As ‫ يا هناه‬O thou there : ‫ و یا مرحباه بحمار عفرا‬welcome to

the ass of 'Afrā.

39. (a) When the negative ý is immediately followed by an in

definite object, of which it absolutely denies the existence, it governs
that object in the accusative ; and as the whole weight of the sentence
falls upon the negative particle, the substantive is abbreviated , when
possible, by the omission of the tenwin. If there be a predicate ex
D pressed, it must be likewise indefinite, but in the nominative case.
For example : lí co jej s there is no man in the house ;
where lg and \ are used to wail for the loss of a person , not to the
exclamations ‫ وا رها‬oh my spoliation ! )‫ وأسقا ( يا أفا‬or ‫ واجرا‬oh my
grief! maligo and alas my wonder (Lane sub ca ). Comp. however
rem . d . D. G. ]
§ 39] The Verb.—3. Government of the Verb . — a) The Accus. 95

‫ لا إله إلا الله‬thereis no god but God ; ‫ ذلك انتاب لا ريب فيه‬this A
book, there is no doubt regarding it; sű jog ý there is no man
standing; ‫ لا أحد خير منك‬there is no one better than thout ; ‫ا إلهين‬ý‫ل‬
there arenottuto Gods :; ‫ا‬lis‫ لا رجال هن‬therearenomen here ;: ‫لا مسلمين‬
‫ في المدينة‬there are no Muslims in the city : ‫ لا ناصرين لك‬thereare
no helpers for thee ; bris glákno ý there are no Muslim women in
our possession ; vel BlŰ "ý there are no pleasures for grey hairs ;;
‫ دواب الماء ا لتاي بدلا مئناتذ تلهاك‬the aquatic animals achich havenolungs ; B
[ sus ingyenes or áló ý there is no avoiding it (Vol. i.$ 364, h) ;
‫ ولا غرو أن يحذو القتى حذو والده‬there is nomondering that the
young man should follow the example of his father ). But if the nega
tive be separated from its object, it is put in the nominative ; as
‫ لا في الدار رجل‬there isno man in thehouse ; ‫لا فيها غول‬.in
it (viz
the wine of Paradise) there is no injuriousforce.
REM. a. The rule regarding the retention of the terminations C
‫ ن‬and ú in the dual and plural may seem to be contradicted by
such examples as livý sú sú ý thou canst do no wrong (lit.
thou hast not two hands for wrong); ☺ si ‫ ازز‬nj she has no ears;

‫ قمیض لا فهى تلهه‬a sharewithoutsleeves ; ‫ لا ناصری ت‬thou hast no

helpers; but in these cases the grammarians say that the preposition
is ‫مقحمة توكيدا يلإضافة‬, arbitrarily inserted to strengthen the
annexation, and that the preceding noun is really in the construct D
state . In the same way too they explain the phrases sú v Ý,
thou hast no father, and á lái ý, he has no brother, which are
generally used instead of jyi ý and ótái ý. [But compare
Vol. i.§ 315, footnote.] The form şi is, however, also used before
‫ه ول‬,
as
‫ أبي الإسلام لا أب پی سوا‬al -Islam ismy father, I haveno
father but it ; and if any transposition takes place, the j of the
 96 PART THIRD . — Syntax. [S 39
A
dual and pluralmust of course be restored ,nutsas ‫ا تك في هذا يدان‬Ý‫ل‬
thou hast nothing to do with this matter .

Rem. 6. The plur. fem . in si may, it is said, take fèth

instead of kesr ,as ‫لا مسلمات عندنا‬
REM . c .
The interrogative i may be prefixed to ý, either to
ask a simple question or to convey a reproach, more rarely to
express a wish ; as csóbbins
csörlend jubiót vi has Sèlmā no patience ?
B
and so on algsim ji has one no self-restraint, whose youth is
WO )
‫نطا‬
on the wane ? abgonj crevamo sing jene nji is there no life,the return
of which is possible, after it has passed away ? (would that a life,
which has once passed away, could possibly return !)

(6) If a genitive be attached to the substantive after ý, the

‫لا غلام رجل‬
accusative must of course be used in its construct form , as

‫ حاضر‬there isno slate of any man present ; ‫لا احب صدق موجود‬
C no true friend can be found. But if the substantive be followed by
an explanatory term of the nature of an objective complement, a
preposition with its complement, or a determinative or limiting term ,
the tènwin is retained (compare $ 38,a,
, B, ‫ب ظاه‬
b 2) ; as ‫ر‬jos giro ‫ا طالق‬gÝ‫ل‬
‫ا ج‬les
there is no one ascending a hill visible ; ötví
‫ا راكبا فرا في الطريق‬ý‫ ل‬there
is no one riding a horse on the road ; this wij is heteen ý there is
no better (man) than Zèid in our opinion ; Lisis may lábú ‫و‬ý there
D is no one who speaks good with us ; szóés les linna ý no one whose
deeds are good is blame-worthy; Sic utzi váló ý there is no
one among you who knows the Ķor'ān by heart.
REM. Nomina agentis, however, when they take their objective
complement by means of the preposition Y ($ 31 ), constantly reject
thetenwin ; as ‫إن يمسسك الله بضرفلا كاشف له إلا هو وإن يردك‬
aber sig sey if God touch thee with trouble, there is none to
§ 39] The Verb. — 3. Government of the Verb. — a) The Accus. 97
remove it but He, and if He seek thee with good, there is none to keep A
back His bounty ; atí skóló jó ý none can change the words
of God.

(c) If an adjective be immediately annexed to an accusative after

ý, it may either take the same form without the tènwin, or it may
retain the tènwin, or, lastly, it may be put in the nominative with the
tènwin ; as ‫ لا رجل ظريف فيها‬, or ‫ لا رجل ريا‬, or ‫ولا رجل ظریف‬,
there is no witty man in it (the house ). But if the adjective be B
separated in any way from the substantive, the first of these three
constructionsis no longer admissible ;as ‫لا رجل فيها ظریف‬, or ‫ظريفا‬
there is no witty man in it, but not list
( d) If another substantive be connected with the accusative by
the conjunctions, the particle 5ý may be repeated or not. (a) If ý be
repeated, the first substantive may be put in the accusative without
the tènwin , and the second either in the accusative, with or without
thetenwin,or in thenominative ; a8
as ‫و لا حول ولا قوة قوة قوة إلا بالله‬
there is no power and no strength save in God : or the first substantive
may be put in the nominative, and the second either in the accusative
without
‫ بالله‬thetenwin or in the nominative ; as ‫لا حول ولا قوة (قوة) إلا‬
atų. (B) If 5ýy be not repeated,, the first substantive is put in the
accusative without the tènwin , and the second either in the nomi
native or in the accusative with thetenwin ; as ) ‫الا رجل وامرأة ( وامرأة‬
glur so there is neither man nor woman in the house. Examples : D
‫ و نسب اليوم ولا ة‬there is no kinship today and no friendship ;
‫ لا أم بي إن كان ذاك و أب‬may I havenomother, if thisbe 80,
and nofeather ; ‫ أب وابنا مثل مروان وابنه‬ý‫ لا‬there isno father and
no sonam like Marman and his son ;: ‫ولا تغو ولا تأثيم فيها ولا حين ولا‬
‫ فيها ممليه‬and there is no idle talk in it (in Paradise ),and no accusing
( one another) of sin, and no death , and in it there is none to reproach ;
>

W , Il . 13
 98 PART THIRD. — Syntax. [S 40

A ‫ بيغ فيه ولا ځله ولا شفاعة‬ý‫ يوم لا‬a day in urhich there shall beno
bartering, nor friendship, nor intercession ; Les Vig onto zió
‫ يحزنون‬on them shall come no fear, neither shall they be grieved
(Kor’an ii. 36, where a var. reading is igé ). R. S. ]
REM. a.
. The particle Ý, when used as above, is called by the

grammarians ‫لا نافية الجنس‬ý,, or ‫لا ينفي الجنس‬, theta that denien
B
the whole genus, (and about ný the là that denies absolutely). The
substantive in the accusative is called Ý , the noun of lā,
and the predicate aj , the predicate of lã. The predicate may
be omitted, when it has already been sufficiently indicated ; as
when one asks jis jó is there a man in thy house ? and
Ý
you reply ‫رجل‬.there
is no one(scil ‫ ;(عندي‬or ‫مل من رجل‬
sú is there any one standing up ? and you say dong v no one (scil.
с
‫( قائم‬. The omission of the noun,,on the contrary, is very rare ; as
‫لا علية‬, for ‫لا بأس عليك‬, there is no fear for thee ornoharm oil
befall thee.

Rem.. b6. The noun of ý should, according to the grammarians,

be always indefinite (oc ). Apparent examples to the contrary,as
☺ dunia vi ng awas,a disputed case,and no Abū ļļasan for it (10
to
decide it), are explained to mean via ‫ی‬wote
‫ا مسمى بأب‬vg,and
‫ ول‬no one
D named 'Abu Hasan, or una
‫ حسن‬Loa jo výs, and no one like Abū
‫ الليل‬en ýý there is no Haitam tonight for the
Hasan ; isteri ‫ة‬avui
beasts that carry us ;
We donot ký there is no 'Umèiya in the land.
An adjective added to any of these names would be indefinite, as
vané vi syg and no compassionate Abū Hasan to decide it.
40. Having thus treated of the accusative as the objective
complement, we now proceed to speak of it as the adverbial com
plement in a stricter sense (see $ 22, b). This depends
§ 41] The Verb.3. Government of the Verb. — a ) The Accus. 99
A. On the idea of being or existence, when expressed (a) by the A
substantive verb js, or (B) by other verbs, the signification of which
includes that of ‫ن‬us.
‫كا‬. The general idea of existence is in this case
limited and determined by the accusative.

41. The verb ús, to be, to exist, when it supplies the place of
the logical copula, requires the predicate, to which the being or
existence of the subject refers, to be put in the accusative; as
‫ر‬
‫ إن كان البلاء قدرا يصيبه لا محالة‬: the calamity is decreed (or B
futed),itanillberallhim withoutdoulit ; ‫كان هو وأخوه عﻻميين بالطائف‬
heand his brother arereteachers in t-Taif : ‫يكونوا شداء على الناس‬
‫ ويعون الرسول عليه شهیدا‬that ye may be witnesses againstmankind,
and ( that)) the Apostle may be a witness in regard to you ; već nóg
‫ الشيطان له قريئا فساء قرينا‬andwhoever hath Satan as his companion ,
a bad companion is he ! ‫ فإن يثوبوا يالله خيرا تم‬and if they repent, C
‫ ث‬be acell for them ; ‫إن ينه فلن تسلط عليه وإن لا يكنه قلا‬
‫ه‬it‫ل‬will
ść do if it be he, thou wilt not be able to overcome him ; and
if it be not he, there is no good to thee in killinghim ; ‫څونوا چجار‬
‫ أو حديدا‬be gestones or iron ; ‫ببذير وحث ساد في قومه الفتى وكونك‬
‫ إياه عليك يسير‬byliberalityandmildness aman becomes a chief among
‫ دی‬es jó lóg
his people, and thy becoming so is easy for thee ; sin
‫ البشاشة كائنا أخاك‬and not every onewho shoursa cheerful fauce is thy D
brother. But if us has only a subject connected with it, to which
the idea of existence inherent in the verb is attributed , that subject is
put,like
, every other, in the nominative ; as ‫كان تاجر وكان له بنون‬
el there was (or lived) a merchant, and he had (lit. there were to him)
three sons
)‫ كان تاجرا‬would mean hewas a merchant(; ‫من كان له‬
‫ مال كثير‬but he acho has (lit. to nohom there is ) much property ;
 100 PART THIRD . — Syntax. [S 41

A is sesji what is fated will come to puss. In the former case,

the substantive verb is called by the grammarians ‫ كان الناقصة‬, the
incomplete or defective, relatire kāna, because it requires an attribute
to complete thesense ; in the latter, ‫ كان التامة‬, the complete, absolute
kāna, because it contains the attribute in itself and does not require
any other.
REM . a.
The subject is called ‫اسم كان‬, the noun of kana,
B and the predicate úls me the predicate of kūna. The natural
sequence of the three is verb, subject, predicate, as ‫; گان زيد قائما‬
but we may also say ‫زيد‬j ‫ كان قائما‬,, as ‫وكان مما علينا نصر‬
‫ المؤمنين‬and it uts Our duty (ie behoted Us) to succour the
believers ; ‫ وته ي خوا ته أحد‬and there is none equalunto Him ;
and even ‫قائما كان زيد‬, especially in interrogative and alternative
sentences,as‫ أكرم الضيف غنا كان أو فقيرا‬honour a guest,sohether
,
he be rich or poor ($ 6 , a). This inversion is, however, in some
C cases impossible ; for example, my brother was my companion must
beexpressed by ‫ كان أی رفیقی‬,because ‫ ځان رفیقی أی‬would
naturally mean my companion was my brother. (If subject and
predicate are both definite, it is allowed, in case of inversion , to
put the latter in the nominative, the former in the accusative,
converting thereby the logical subject into the grammatical pre
dicate, the logical predicate into the grammatical subject, as
‫ كان أخوك زيدا‬for ‫كان أخاك زيد‬ Poets allow themselves to
D do the same in other cases, as
‫ وما شر الثلاثة بصاحبك‬for
‫ صاحبك‬-‫ا بشر الثلاثة‬.T ab
‫ ) وم‬.i. 755,1. 2. D.G [
.REM
. b-may
‫كان‬ sometimes be omitted, especially in alter
native conditional clauses ; as ‫ سوق تجازي إن خيرا وإن شرا‬thout
wilt be recompensed either with good or with evil (i.e. jis !
‫قد قيل ما قيل إن صدا وإن كذبا ز; ( جزاك خيرا وإن كان شا‬
mohat is spoken asspoken ,be it true or false ; ‫معناه المبالغة في الشئى‬
§ 42] The Verb.-3. Government of the Verb.—(a) The Accus. 101

‫ ځانا ما كان إن خيرا وإن شرا‬itsmeaningin to do one's utmost A

in a thing,' be it what it may, whether good or bad ; jo Ő is
135 ! from the time they were pregnant, till their young were
.following
them (i.e ‫ایتنی بدابة ولو ;(من تدن كانت التياق شو‬
kao bring me a beast (to ride),even if it be an ass [$ 4, rem. 6).
REM
Rem. ‫را‬
c. üls is rarely merely redundant ; as we spentog ‫ه‬ólymo
‫ تنامي على ان المؤمة العراب‬the heroes of the Benu 'Abu Bakr B
ride upon branded Arab steeds; ‫فكيف إذا مررت بدار قوم وجيراڼ‬
is igis l and how when thov passest by the dwelling of a
tribe and of noble neighbours of ours ? opties vision og anul
their like was not found *.

Rem. .d . The verb is, Æthiop. 7% : kõna, does not occur in

Hebrew in the sense of to be, exist, happen , though it is so used in
Syriac ( rare) and Phænician. The construction of the Æthiopic C
verb is the same as that of the Arabic ; in the other Semitic
languages, which have lost the final flexional vowels, the case of
the predicate cannot be observed, but doubtless it was the accu
sative . - In Hebrew the radical j15 retains its original signification
of to stand ( compare Fr. être, older form estre, and Span, estar, from
Lat. stare),and the place of j's is supplied by 77977 or 117,,
Aram. 897 , 161, to fall ( sgá ), happen, be (compare 25g, to full,
happen , Lat. accidit, Eng. it fell out), of which the predicate must D
also be looked upon as in the accusative.

42. The same construction appertains to certain verbs, called by

the grammarians is sigái, the sisters of kāna, which add some
circumstantial or modifying idea to the simple one of existence. This
may be : (a) the idea of duration or continuity,as in óls to continue,
*
[ Different from this is the use of us after participles, infinitives
and other nomina verbalia, in the sense of he (it) was or was formerly.
See many examples in the Gloss. Geogr. and the Gloss. to Țabari. D.G. )
 102 PART THIRD . — Syntax. [$ 42
‫م‬

A to last, construed in the perfect with the ‫ ) ما الديمومة‬see s7, and >

.i $ 367,2 , ‫ بقى‬to remain,to last ; ‫زال‬, ‫انق فتئ برح‬,tocetose,

.Vol
construed, in the perfect or imperfect, with a negative particle ; (b) the
‫ رج‬wół, to turn out,
idea of change or conversion, as in jló, sc, ‫ع‬caj,and
to become ; (c) the idea of time, as in ☺s to be or do during the whole
‫ أضحى‬scholenight, ‫ رأاسحفر‬at daybreak,‫ غدا‬or ‫ أصبح‬in the
day , ‫ بات‬duringthe
morning, samal in the forenoon ,el or more in the evening, allof
B which verbs are often used as simple synonyms of us, without any
regard to the secondary idea of time; or, (d) the idea of negation, by
6

which that of existence itself is absolutely denied, as in cand not to be.

Examples : ‫لا طيب يتعيش ما دامت منصة تداه باكار الموت والهرم‬
there is no pleasure in life, as long as its joys are troubled by the
recolection of death and old age ; ‫لا تعد نفسك من الناس ما دام‬
‫ الغضب غالبا عليك‬do not count thyself among men ,as long asanger
Chuts the mastery over thee ; ‫ا يزال الله محسنا إليك‬ý‫ ل‬mayGod never
you : ‫ لا تزل ذاكر الموت‬never cettse bearing
cetuse being beneficent to ;
death in mind ; ‫ قالوا لن نبرح عليه عاكفين‬they said, wearewillnot
cease standing by it (worshipping it) ; bé lij's the clay became
pottery ; ‫ وكان يرى الماء يصير بخارا والبخار يصير ماء‬and he thought
that the water became vapour, and the vapour became water ; su
D ‫ قد شريت عدت عبدا بمكة‬and thou hast been sold ,andhastbecome a
slave in Makka; ‫ وما المرة إلا كالسراج وؤهيعود مادا‬man islike
nought but the lamp and its light, which becomes ashes ; géão slani vół
‫ر‬
‫ رج‬to ‫و‬její
hold the blackness of his hair became whiteness; lá o ‫ع‬co ‫العد ما‬
‫ره‬
an enemy never becomes a friend ; logamo Smernes Ús his face became
black ; ‫ والذي يبيتون لربهم سجدا وقياما‬and thosewho passthe night
prostrating themselves unto their Lord and standing up (in prayer ) ;
§ 42] The Verb. — 3. Government of the Verb.— (a ) The Accus. 103

goló já cotó igég and they went out in the morning with settled A
purpose : ‫ أصبحتم بنعمة الله إخوانا‬through the grace of God geare
become lorethren ; ‫ تمنيت أن تمسى فقيها مناظرا‬thout rishext to become
a larger skiled in disputation ; ‫لا تقولوا من ألقى إليه الشلام تست‬
liogo say not to me who gives you the salutation,, Thou art not a
believer; joves ‫الم‬to‫ء ع‬learn
‫ سوا‬movies one who knows and one who does not
known are not on an equality ,; ‫ قضى الله يا أسماء أن تست زائد أحبك‬B
God hath decreed, O Asmā, that I should not cease to love thee.
REM . (. To the above verbsmay be added ‫ جاء رأی‬, and ‫;*قعد‬
E ‫ر‬
as
‫ فالقوة على وجه أبي يأت بصيرا‬and throno it on my father's face,
(and) he shall become seeing (recover his sight, explained by Com
‫) البناءمنها ;(بصيرا‬or ‫ جاء (أي‬thebuildingbecame strong orfirm ;
‫ أوقف شفرته حتى قعدت انها ربة‬he sharpened his knife till it
became like a javelin (i.e. aja jio). Of these verbs three, viz. C
‫ فتئ ليس‬and ‫زال‬, are always ‫ ;ناقصة‬the others may be either
‫اقم‬ ‫ ت‬or ‫) تامة‬sees4l,, at the end().

REM .bb. The verbs ‫زال‬, ‫فقتئى برح‬,‫ و‬and “ ‫انق‬,must always be
accompanied by a negative, expressed (as in the above examples
‫ (زال‬or implied,as ‫وأبرح ما أدام الله قومی بحمد الله‬
with ‫ برح‬and (
‫ منتطقا مجيدا‬and I shall not cease, as long asGod preservesmy
tribe, through God's grace to wear a girdle and ride a noble steed D
) ‫ أبرح‬for ‫لا أبرح‬, and ‫ جيدا‬in rhyme for ‫فقلت تها والله ;(مجيدا‬
‫ قاعدا‬.and
‫ أکبرح‬and I said to her, By God, I will not cease sitting still.
‫ه‬
[Comp.5162, rem.]
REM . C.
‫وجد‬, to be found,, be extant, exist,, is often
The verb içs
reckoned one of the vis sigái, but erroneously ; for it is either =
may be added to these verbs ; see the Gloss. to 'Ibn
'al-Faqih. D. G. ]
 104 Part THIRD .— Syntax . [$ 42
A ‫ كان التامة‬, and hasno predicate, or it is the passive of ‫وجد‬, which
governs two accusatives, and therefore naturally retains the second
object ) ‫ ;(المفعول الثاني‬as ‫ يوجد منها شئ ؛ صقا‬ý‫ لا‬not oneofthem
is found pure (in a pure state ), where ‫ صرفا‬is a ‫حال‬ or circum

stantial accusative, or we (Fr. on, Germ , man) do not find one of

‫ صرفا‬is the second object [[S 25).
them pure,, where Lijs
REM .d. The negative particles ‫ ما‬and ,when ‫مشبهان بليس‬
assimilated to lèisa, or used pizor in the signification of lèisa,
B are also construed with the accusative of the predicate, provided
(1 ) that the predicate is placed after the subject, (2) that the
exceptive particle is not interposed between them , (3) thatthe
corroborative particle ! is not added to bó, and (4) that the
both undefined ; e.g ‫ما هذا بشرا‬
subject and predicate of.are
‫لا‬
‫رژه‬
this is not a human being ; les site ‫هم‬or long and they are not its
children ; ‫ ما هن أمهاتهم‬they are not their mothers: ‫تعر فلا شئ‬
‫ على الأرض باقيا ولا وزر ما قضى الله واقا‬take confort,for there
C is nothing on earth enduring, and no fortress can protect (one) from
nohatGod hath decreed ; ‫ تصوتك إذ لا صاحب غیر از‬I aided thee
when thou hadst no companion who was not faithless ; but on the
contrary, ‫ ما إن طبنا جبن‬orhabit is not coupardice ; ‫بنی غذائة‬
‫ر‬

‫ ما إن أنتم ذهب ولا صريف وأين أنتم الخزف‬ye Bena (udana,

ye are neither gold nor pure silver, but ye are pottery. The fourth
restriction is violated in such verses as: ‫وحث سواد القلب لا أنا‬
D ‫ باغيا سواها ولا عن حبها ت تررااختيیا‬and she doelt in myheart's core,
I desired no other than her and relaxed not my love of her (ut being
definite(; ‫ فلا الحمد معشوئيا ولا المال باقيا‬then neither is praise
aton nor does the money remains.If ‫ ما‬has a second predicate,
or
connected with the first by an adversative particle, such as
Lid, then the second must be put in the nominative, as ‫ما‬

‫ قائما بل قاعد‬Zeid isnot standing butsiting, i... ‫ ;بل هو قاعد‬but

§ 42] The Verb. — 3. Government of the Verb.—(a) The Accus. 105
in any other case, the accusative is preferable to the nominative, as A
‫ ما تريد قائما ولا قاعدا‬or ‫ولا قاعد‬. This government of ‫ ما‬and ‫لا‬
is peculiar to the dialect of el-ħigāz, and hence they are called
‫ ما الحجازية‬and ‫لا الحجازية‬
REM. e . The above construction of ló and is also extended to
‫) لات‬Vol..i. 182, rem ., b6), and to ‫ إن النافييةة‬or the negative 'in
(see [ Vol. i. 362, k and] $ 158 ) ; as ‫ إن هو مستوليا على أحد‬he
rules overnobody , ‫ إن ذلك نافعة ولا ضارك‬this cannot profit thee B
‫ و في‬thee ; ‫إن المره ما بانقضاء حياته ولكن بأن يبغى عليه‬
‫خذلا‬harm
nor
a man is not (to be counted ) dead when his life comes to an
end, but when he is wronged , and forsaken (by his friends) ;
‫ ولات حین مناص‬but it tas no time of escape; ‫لات ساعة مندم‬
it was not an hour for repentance. The government of @ý seems
to be restricted to nouns denoting time, and either its subject or
predicate
‫حين مناص‬is ‫ن‬omitted
‫س الحي‬,‫ي‬usually
‫(ل‬. the former ) ‫) = لات چین ناص‬

.REN‫ بم‬Instead of the accusative, the ‫ أخوات كان‬may take

after them a verb in the imperfect, following the construction of
‫ كان‬, $ 9, or s8,e; e.g, ‫كان لا يزال نائما ما دام الحداد يعمل شغلا‬
he used never to cease sleeping as long as the blacksmith continued
aorking at anywork ; ‫ فبقى ينظر إليها‬and he continued looking at
‫ر ر‬

them ; ‫ وصرت أقعد عنده وأطيل الحديث معه‬and I sat doo by D

him and converged with him at greatlength ; ‫ صار لا يتكلم‬he became
speechless; lis generisjló he began to reflect upon such and such a
antject : ‫ قظمتفون‬and weacouldbemarvelling ; ‫قبائا يأملان مياه‬
juu and they were all night hoping for (or longing for) the waters of
Badr; ‫ فأصبح يقلب كيو‬andhebegan toringinghis hands:; ‫تالله تفت‬
‫فاه‬

‫ تذكر يوسف‬by God, thou soilt not cense thinking (or speaking) of
(rem ph
.Jose 6(; ‫ تنفك تشع ما حييت بهالك حتى تكونه‬thon soil
W. II . 14
 106 PART THIRD.--Syntax. ($ 42
A never cease, as long as thou livest, to hear of some one being dead,
until thou art he (until thy own turn comes ). [The predicate of
üis and its sisters may also be replaced by a preposition and
the word it governs, or by a circumstantial clause, generally with
,
9 , as
‫لقد كنت وما أخشى بالزئب‬in former times I acasnot to be
frightened by a toolf ; ‫ لقد كنا وما تصتي عند الكعبة‬we
toe dared not
to praynearthe Ka'ba ; ‫ تحجب عن ذلك‬Ý‫ إذ كانت لا‬as they seera
not prevented from it ; ‫وإن بأيدينا الحديد تناط إذاما غدافي غيرها‬
‫هه ر‬
B o foi gog verily in our hands the steel is eloquent, whilst in other
hands it is dumb.]
REM . g. With the construction of the is sigái, mentioned
‫ أفعال‬or verbs of
in rem . e, we may connect that of the atjlécom její
appropinquation. These are principally of two kinds : such as
indicate the simple proximity of the predicate, and such as imply
a hope of its occurrence. — (1) To the first class belong jis, stól,
and ‫) قرب‬a( ‫كاد‬.1st
) p.sing. perf ‫ كدت‬, rarely ‫( كدت‬,.imperf
c ‫يعاد‬, .particip ‫كائد‬, was originally construed with the accusative

of thepredicate,as ‫ آئبا‬si
‫كدت‬s ‫ فأبت إلى فهم وما‬andso Ireturned
to ( the tribe of ) Fahm , but I was very near not returning ; but it
commonly takes the predicate in the imperfect indicative, as
‫ إن كاد ليضلنا عن التنا‬verily he songnighe leadingasastray from
our gods : ‫ من بعد ما كاد تزيغ قلوب فريق منهم‬after theheartsofa
part ofthem had wellnightserved ; ‫وجد من دونهاقوما لا يكادون‬
D Ými ús he found before them (the two barriers or hills) a
people who could scarcely understand speech ; ‫بحوها وما كادوا‬
üyleis then they sacrificed her (the cow), but they were nearly not
doing it ; ‫ إذا أخرج يده لم يكد يراها‬tolen he stretches out his
hand, he can hardly see it ; rarely the subjunctive with ül, as 9

‫ ما كدت أن أصى العصر حتى ادت الشمس أن تغرب‬I tecus

nearly not praying the 'asr (or afternoon prayer) till the sun was
nearly setting ; ‫ كادت النفس أن تفيض عليه‬mysoul aras nearly
§ 42] The Verb . — 3. Government of the Verb .— (a) The Accus. 107

expiring over him (for grief ). (B) stági, little used in the perfect, A
generally takes ji with the subjunctive, more rarely the imperf.
indic.;as‫ولو الناس الشراب وشتموا إذا قيل هاتوا أن يملوا ويمنعوا‬
and if men were asked for the (very) dust, when it was said " Give
here,they would well nigh be disgusted and refuse ; hivaji ići god
‫وشا بابا‬ ‫ أن تعود خلاف الأنيس‬and our landisnearlybecoming,
after our friends departure,a desolatetoilderness ; ‫يوشك من فر من‬
‫ منيته في بعض غراته وافها‬he solo flees from his fate,is likely to B
meet it on some occasion when he is off his guard . This verb is
either personal or impersonal, for we may say ‫وشك زید جی‬
) as in the third of the above examples), or ‫يوشك تريد أن يجيء‬
)as in the first),or ‫) يوشك أن يجيء زید‬where therealsubject of
‫ يوشك‬is the following clause). The form ‫وشك‬.is ‫ ي‬a vulgarism
)7( ‫) قرب‬rarely ‫ ( طرب‬is only used in theperfect, and is construed
with the imperf. indic., rarely with sf and the subjunctive ; as
‫ كرب القلب من جواه يدوب‬my heart aas nearly melting away
auony C
from grief; ‫ ربت أعناقها أن تقطعا‬.cohen
‫وقد‬ their throats (lit
necks) were nigh being cut to pieces (with drought or thirst ). To
these may be added such verbs as ‫ مثل يدركه‬he toas near
‫أرا‬
‫د‬overtaking him ; ‫ ألم يفعل كذا‬he was near doing so and 80 ;
.e.g ‫ فوجدا جدارا يريد أن ينقض‬and they found a tall achich
aords about to fall ; ‫ أراد المريض أن يموت‬the stick man is about to
die ; ‫ هم‬.. ‫ هم السراج أن يخمد‬the lamp eas on the point of D
going out ; and the like.—(2) To the second class belong comic,
‫ ری‬, and ‫) اخلولق‬4( ‫عسى‬.1st
) p. sing ‫ سيت‬, rarely ‫(عسی‬.
used, we may say, only in the perfect, [and having always the
meaning of the imperfect, mostly in the sense of the indefinite or
definite present ($ 8, a, b)], was originally construed, like jiś , with
the accusative, as in the half verse ‫لا تثرن إلى عيت تمائما‬
 108 PART THIRD . — Syntax. [S 42

A do not (abuse‫ ه‬me) so much, for I may become a faster, and in the
proverb ‫ عسى الغوير أبوشا‬perhaps the litle cate may become (may
bring) misfortunes, or perhaps el -Ġowèir (the name of a well ) may
become ( may bring) misfortunes ; but generally it is construed with
‫ه‬
‫ آن‬and the subjunctive, as ‫ عسى ربه أن يرحمه‬perhaps your
Lord may have mercy on you ; ‫ ما عسى أن تصنع‬what may she
perhaps do2[; ‫ هل عسيتم إن كتب علم القتال أ قاتلوا‬may
it not be, if it were ordained you to fight, that ye would not fight ?
B
rarely with theimperf.. indic.,,as ‫ ی فرج يأتي به الله‬perhaps
‫عمم‬

God manybring some joy ; ‫عسى العرب الذي أمسيت فيه يكون وراءه‬
‫ فرج قريب‬perhaps some joymay be close behind thesorroso in thich
thout noto art. This verb, like ‫أوشك‬, is either personal, ‫عسی زید‬
‫أن يقوم‬,as in the above examples,or impersonal, ‫عسى أن يقوم زید‬
as ‫ عسى أن تكرهوا شيئا وهو خير تم‬perhaps yemay be averse to a
thing, though it be good for you. Still another construction is
c
possible, wiz,with a pronominal suflix in the accusative, ‫عساك قائم‬
or ‫ اك أن تقوم‬, like ‫) تعل‬s 36, rem . f ), just as conversely ‫تعل‬
may be followed by the imperf. indic. or the subjunctive with
‫ أن‬as ‫ وما يدريك لعل الشاعة تكون قريبا‬andthat lete theeknoto
)whether)perchance thehour is near ? ‫تعله أن ينصركم على هؤلاء‬
.perhaps
‫الظلمة‬ Hemay aid you against these evil-doers )0( ‫ حرى‬,
rare, with ‫ أن‬and the subjunctive;; as ‫ ري زيد أن يقوم‬or
D ‫) حرى مأان أينكوتنمطذلرك‬7( ‫اخلولق‬, rare ,with ‫أن‬and thesubjunctive,
as
‫ اخلولقت الشماء‬theskyis likely torain ; ‫إخلوق أن يأتي‬
it is likely he may come. ( 3) With these two classes of verbs the

grammarians connect a third,which they call ‫أفعال الشروع‬ or

‫أفعال الإنشاء‬, the verbs of beginning. Such are: ‫جعل أمرمأ‬, ‫شرع‬
‫ ) طفق‬rarely ‫ طق‬and ‫( طبق‬, ‫علق‬, ‫أقبل‬, ‫قام‬, ‫أنشأ‬, and ‫ هب‬to
begin, used, we may say, only in the perfect, and followed by the
imperf. indic.; as ‫ جعل يومه‬he began to reproach him ; ‫وطفقا‬
§ 44) The Verb . - 3. Government of the Verb .— ( a) The Accus. 109

‫ يخصفان عليهما من ورق الجنة‬andthey began to get together of A

the leaves of Paradise (to cover their nakedness); j Songén öte
ve vláč Zlá is só when I was off my guard for a moment,
the nightingales, dipping in their heads, began to drink of my
cistern ; ‫ وعلق أقسم اللحم بين أهل صنعاء‬and I began to divide
themeatamongthe people of Sana ; ‫أثبتت الحمامة تحوم في طلب‬
‫ الماء‬the pigeon began to Ay about in search of seater ; ‫قامت المرأة‬
get the woman began to wail aloud ; google ears she began to B
reproach me.

43. The adverbial accusative depends

B. On any verbal idea which determines or limits in any way
the subject, verb, or predicate of a sentence, or the whole sentence.
In this case it supplies the place of a preposition with the genitive,
or of a conjunctive clause, and amply makes up for the want of adverbs
in Arabic.

44. By the adverbial accusative is designated : С

a.
a The time in or during which an act takes place ; as oli
‫ الخليقة يوما يتوضأ رجليه‬thecaliph sohim one daywashinghis feet;
‫ يدري كيف يموت يوم اللاك‬ý‫ لا‬heknotes nothono he shall die on his
dying day; ‫مشيت ل اليوم‬, or ‫بعض اليوم‬, Iwalked the schole day ,
or part of the day: ‫ لم أدر الأمس جاء إلى هنا أم اليوم‬I did notknow
arhether he camehere yesterday or today ; ‫ ممكن في بعض القرى أياما‬DD
he stopped (a feun) days in a village; ‫ اشتعذ بالله منه ليلا ونهارا‬implore
God night and day to protect you from it ; ‫ سيعطيك الكتاب غدا‬he
auill give you the book tomorrot ; ‫ وجابوا أباهم عشاء‬and the came
.‫ه‬
to their father in the evening , ‫ تأمل شرين في اختيار الشتاز‬reflect
.‫ه‬

ttoomonthsupon the choice of a teacher ; ‫تم يبث على الفراش أربعين‬

as he did not pass the night on a bed for forty years ; Juho se óló
 110 PART THIRD .-- Syntax. [$ 44

A ‫ الدرس أحيانا‬he stood up at times whilst lecturing; ‫وكنت برهة من‬

met myhour and I continued reflecting for a considerable time ;
‫ قتلته الشنة الماضية‬I killed him last year ; ‫ صمت رمضان‬I justed
during Ramadan ; ‫ جئت زمن الشتاء‬I camein the winter-time; ‫قال‬
‫ حين تقيه‬he said at the timeof hismeetinghim (or then hemet him (;
‫ عصر كان مشيب‬at the timethen old age is drawingnear ; ‫كأنهم يوم‬
B ‫) يرونها لم يلبثوا إلا عشية أو ضحاها‬it shall seem ) as if they, on the
day they shall see it, had not tarried ( in their graves) save an evening
or its morning ; ‫ جلست عنده طويلا من الدهر‬I sat with him
.for
a longtime,ie ‫ ثم من غير طویل زمنا طوي‬then hetarriednot
long, i.e. Moglo bise lioj. [To the same class belong the adverbial
expressions ‫ ذات مر‬once , ‫ ذات يوم‬oneday, aí
‫ ذات ليلة‬onenight,and
‫ ) يدين‬or ‫أول فيي (ذات‬.I
‫ لقيه‬met him first of all [
C REM. a. A maşdar is often put in the accusative of time by an
ellipse of some such word as ‫ وقت‬at the time of ; e.g, ‫جاء طلوع‬
‫الشمهيس‬ he came atsunrise,i... ‫وردت فوق زوقت طوع الشمس‬
‫ الجيم‬1 arrived at the seting of the Star (the Pleiades(; ‫كان ذلك‬
‫ مقدم الحاج‬thishappened at the timeofthearrival of thecaravan
of pilgrims, or ‫ صلوة العصر‬at the time of afternoon prayer,
or ‫ تحفة المأمون‬during the caliphate of e -Ma'man ; ‫وإدبار‬
D ‫ الثوم‬and at the setting of the stare ; ‫أنتظر به تحر جوری‬
they waited for him for the space of time in which one might
slaughter two camels. Examples of more violent elisions are :
‫ لا أكلمه القاريين‬I willnot speak to him as long asthetwo
gatherers of acacia berries (or leaves) are away (i.e. I will never
speak to him ),for ‫ لا آتيه الفرقدين مدة غيبة القاريين‬I willnot
go to him as long as the two Pointers (the two stars which point to
the Polestar) endure (i.e. I will never go to him), for easy to
‫الفرقدين‬
§ 44] The Verb. - 3. Government of the Verb.— (a) The Accus. 111
REM . b. Peculiar is theuse of ‫بثرة‬, ‫سحر‬, ‫شحرة‬, ‫ضحوة‬, ‫ دوة‬, AA
and it , as a sort of definite proper names, when they refer to the
.morning
of a particular day or to a certain fixed time ; e.g ‫لقيته‬
‫ سحر‬I met him thismorning ; ‫ جاء يوم الجمعة سحر‬he came on
Friday in themorning; ‫ جنت يوم الخميس بثرة‬I came on
Thursday in themorning; ‫الفينة بعد الفينة = لقيته فينة بغد فينة‬
Imethim timeafter time; )‫تقيه سكرا‬would mean Imethim on a
certain morning ).
b. The local extension of an act, and, if general and indefinite, B
theplace in which it isperformed ; a8 ‫ اروا أربعة أميال‬they traveled
as
four miles; we ‫ مشيت‬I walked two parasangs ; özlé sjó
no ‫جری‬
he run a bourshot ; )‫ تظر يمينا ويسارا وشمالا‬he looked right and left;
‫ انتصر على العدو برا وبحرا‬he conquered the enemy by land and sea ;
‫أمام‬, ‫ قدام‬before ; ‫ خلف‬, ‫ وراء‬, behind ; ‫ وسط‬in the middle ; ‫حول‬
around ; ‫ فوق‬above ; ‫ تحت‬under ; ‫ عند‬beside , by ; etc. Here we
may add the adverbial expressions ‫ ذات اليمين‬and ‫ ذات الشمال‬in the c
direction of the right hand and of the left.]
REM . a. When the place of the act is definitely specified, the

prepositions must be used ; as ‫ جلست في الدار‬I satdoun in the

house ; ‫ صليت في مسجد النبي‬I prayed in the mosque of the
prophet ; ‫ أقمت في مقتل الحسيني‬I stopped at the place tohere el
Hosein toas killed ;not ‫ججلست الدار‬, ‫ وصیت مسجد‬and ‫* أقمت مقتل‬
Excepted is the case when a vague noun of place, such as ‫ معان‬D
or . ‫مقام‬, is construed with a verb conveying the idea of stopping
or remaining, as ‫ جلست مكان زيد‬I sat down in Leils place ,
*
[Sometimes, however, the definite noun of place is put in the
accusativeagainst the rule,asin ‫ ذهبت الشام‬Iwentto Syria, ‫قالا خيمتي‬
tres of the two stayed during midday in the tents of Umm Ma'bad (see
the Gloss, to Țabari in v. we and comp. $ 70, rem . e). D. G. )
 112 PART THIRD.Syntaa . [$ 44
A and also the case when a noun of place is construed with the verb
from which it is derived,as ‫قعد مقعد زیږ‬, or ‫جلست مجلس زیږ‬
I sat dot in Zeids seat; ‫ قام مقامه‬he stood up in his place, or
supplied his place.The nouns ‫جمة وجه جانب‬, ‫ناحية‬, side,
quarter, ‫ خارج‬onutside, ‫داخل‬, ‫جوف‬, inside,require ‫ في‬as ‫نه في‬
‫ څارج الدار‬I slept outside thehouse ;but in later Arabicwe often
find theaccusatives ‫ جانب‬, ‫خارج‬, and ‫داخل‬ as also ‫ قرب‬near,
w

B
for ‫ شرقي في قرب‬on the east, ‫غربی‬ on the test, for ‫في شرقي‬
‫في غربی‬, and the like.Observe also such phrases as :
‫ مناط الثريا‬he is as far from one as (the place there) the Pleiades
)hang in thesky (; ‫ هو منی مجر الكتب‬he is as far from meas the
farthest place where one can chide (or cry out to) the dog ; sino. ‫و‬que‫ه‬
‫د الإزا‬ces
‫ر‬uljni ‫ معق‬he is as close to me as the place where my waist-wrapper
-
is fastened.
REM. b. The accusative of time and place is called by the
C grammarians ‫ الظرف‬the vessel (see Vol. i.s221, rem . a), or
‫عول فيه‬.that
‫ المف‬in thich the act is done
C.
The state or condition, ‫الحال‬, of the subject or‫كبا‬object ‫جا‬
‫زيد را‬of ‫ء‬an
act, or of both , whilst the act is taking place ; as

Zeid came riding ; ‫ وقف على باب المغارةماعليه قائلا له‬hestood

at the entrance of the cave, saluting him (and) saying to him ;
‫جدا‬ ‫ وادخلوا الباب‬and enter the gate , prostrating yourselves; ‫الذين‬
D ‫ يذكرون الله قياما وعودا‬who bear God in mind, standing up and
sitting doon ; ‫ يقوم بالتقاف العود تدئا‬a piece ofwood can bestraightened
arith the tikaf (a( kind of tool),ahile it is soft ; ‫ما‬ ‫مځحلی نشأت به‬
a habitwith which I grew upas a youngman ; ‫أن قلوب الطير طبا‬
‫) وياباتی وفرها العاب والكشف البالی‬it is) as if the hearts of
birds, fresh and dry, beside her nest, were the red fruit of the jujube or
$ 44] The Verb.3. Government of the Verb .— a ) The Accus. 113

decaying dates ; ‫ ركبت الفرس مرجا‬I rode the horse saddled ; ‫ لقيت‬A
subsis juisi I met the sultān in his house, weeping ;
‫ ومن يعص الله ورسوله ويتعد محدوده يدخله نارا خالدا فيها‬and achos0
shall rebel against God and his Apostle, and shall transgress his
ordinances, He shall make him enter into fire, to abide in it for ever ;
‫ برید جالا‬jó I passed by Zeid, (as he was) sitting down ;
-
‫ وجاءت به سبط العظام‬and she brought him forth longtimbed ; ‫كنت‬
josi wamet I was in the garden, whilst it was in bloom ; B
‫يشل‬se ‫ وأصبح عنى بالغميصاء جالسا فريقان مسئول وآخر‬and therearere
next morning two parties, (one) asked and another asking about me,
(whilst I was) sitting at el-Ġomèişā ; [őjéés visai liś , os
wincóg the Fates will overtake us,they being destined for us, as
we are destined for them ); usisah I met him , (whilst we were)
both riding;; wego sát to só whenerer thou meetest me, both (of C
us being) alone ; ijmais lúcias a I met him , (whilst the one of us
was) going up (and the other) coming down.
Rem.. a. The jló is, in relation to the grammatical structure
of the phrase to which it belongs, a diás or redundancy, for
Moj sło , Zèid came, is a complete, intelligible, sentence, without
the addition of sig riding. It answers the question is how ?
in regard to the state or condition of the subject or object of the D
5 W

act, (and may be são indicating a future state, or isléo indicating

a simultaneous state ($ 74), like the Imperf. (8 8, d and e)].

Rem. b. The jlá depends upon a regent (Jaji Jolé), which

may be either a verb, as ‫ ; جاء زيد راكبا‬or a verbal adjective
(Vol.i. $ 230, 231), as Kostolec haylá jej Zeid is beating “Amr
standing, ‫ زید مضروب قائما‬Zeidt is beaten standling, ‫زید حسن قائما‬
W. II . 15
 114 PART THIRD . — Syntax. [$ 44

A
Zetal lookshandsomestanding,‫ زیڈ قائما أحسن منه قاعدا‬Zeidlooks
more handsome standing than he does sitting ; or an expression that
has a verbal force ) ‫معنی فعلي‬ as a preposition with its com
plement, a demonstrative pronoun, an interrogative, or a word
like ‫تيت‬, ‫ تعل‬and ‫ أين‬, as ‫ زيد في الدار قائما‬Zeid is in thehouse
standing (where ‫ في الدار‬is equivalent to ‫(مستقر في الدار‬, ‫فيها زیڈ‬
‫نطلقا‬,‫ عندك هو جالسام‬beside thee (or in thy
‫ قائما‬in it is Zeid standing
house) is 'Amr sitting,, látais ‫و‬yees ‫ هذا‬this is ' Amr (in the act of)
‫ عمر‬vão
B going audy (equivalent in sense to ‫ أنظر إليه منطلقا‬look at him
going anony, or ‫ أشير إليه مطلقا‬I point to him goingany(,
‫ ما شأنك قائما‬oolat is the lject (in ) standing ? (where ‫ما شأنك‬
Mécs Ló what art thou doing ?) lábig sú to what art thou about,
standing (there) ? Le stes líog and this is my husband ,an old
man (=and this,myhenasland,is an old man (; ‫فيما تم عن التذكرة‬
imore's what then ails them that they turn aside from the warning ?
C REM . C.
The jló is usually (1) an adjective ( ciog or åéo)
expressing a transitory state cálamo jlá ); though it may also be
permanent )‫( غير منتقلة‬,as ‫ دعوت الله سميعا‬1I calelupon God asa
( constant) hearer (of prayer ).- It may likewise be ( 2) a maşdar,
substantially equivalent in meaning to a participial adjective
]comp . Vol. i. 8230, rem . c * ], as ‫ قتلته صبرا‬I killed him bound
‫کہ ر ر‬
.in
) cold blood ),ie ‫ أتيته ركا مصبورا‬I came to him riding hard,
D i...‫ أخذ ذلك منه تنهازاكا‬I received that from him by hearing
.I
) learned it from him by hearing him say it),ie ‫طلع بغتة ; امگا‬
..he
came into pieto
view suddenly, i ‫ لقيته فجاءة ; باغا‬I net him
suddenly oranacadres,i... ‫ لقيته عائا ; مفاجئا‬Imet him faceto face,,
‫ته ور‬

i... ‫شافة معايا‬..I

‫ كلمه م‬spoke to him face to face,i ‫;مشافها‬
áis áis as I met him face to face (each of us hindering the
[Rather, according to Nöldeke, to a gerundium .]
§ 44] The Verb. - 3. Government of the Verb.—(a) The Accus. 115
other, for añó áis ).— It may also be (3) a concrete substantive, A
‫وهو‬ ‫م‬

‫ طلع القمر بدرا كه‬themoon rosefall ;‫ ر زيد أسدا‬Zeid chargead

‫رت‬
) ‫مدا‬ ‫بعه‬
(like) a lion ; qeju‫مهر‬ czy sell it (at the rate of)) a mudd for a
dirham , ‫ جاء البر قفيزی‬the soleut i come, (at the rate of ) tabo
hanfia (for a dirham (; ‫ بنت الشاء شا ودرهما‬I have sold the sheep
at a dirhan apiece ; ‫ بايعته يدا بيد‬I dealt, or traded,with him ,
hand in hand (i.o. for ready money(; ‫بينت له حسابه بابا بابا‬
I eaplained his account to him items by iten ; ‫ هو جاری بيت بيت‬B
he ‫ت‬ismynestdoor
‫البي‬ neighbour (lit. house to house, for ‫بيا إلى بيت‬
or
‫ كلمته قاه إلى في ;(بیا ببیت‬I spoketohim face to face (lit.his
mouth tomymouth (; ‫ هذا عناأطيب منه زبيبا‬this (fruit) is betteras
a grape than as a raisin ; ‫تفرق القوم أيدى با‬, or ‫ أيادي سبا‬the
people dispersed (like) the bands of Saba (for Luv).— Lastly,the já
‫ر ہو‬

may be (4) a proposition, elan (see $ 183).—There may be more c

than one jló referring to the subject or object of an act,
or to
both ; .. ‫ جاء زيد راكبا ضاحكا‬zeid came riding (along)taughing;
‫ هذا زید واقفا متحدثا‬this is it standing talling ; ‫تقي ابني‬
‫ أخويه خائفا منجديه فأصابوا مغنما‬my son , in alarm ,methis tao0
‫ة‬brothers
‫ منحدر‬, coming to help him ,and they toon spoil ; ‫لقيت هنامصعدا‬
öjeno 1, (whilst) going up, met Ilind (a woman) coming down.
The only case in which a difficulty can arise is when both the hāls D
are of the same gender and number,as ‫لقيت زيدامعامنحدرا‬
or
‫رأيت زيدا ماشيا راكبا‬. Some of the grammarians say that,in
this case, the first jló refers to the subject and the second to the
object, I, (as I was) going up, met Zèid coming down ; but others
maintain that the first jlá refers to the object and the second to
the subject, I, (as I was) riding, met Zèid walking.
‫و‬

REM .d. The ‫ حال‬may be ‫مؤكدة‬, strengthening,or ‫غير مؤكدة‬

 116 PART THIRD .--Syntax . [$ 44

A As úszó it may refer either to the verbal regent or to a

preceding proposition as a whole. If it refers to the verbal regent,
it may be derived from the verb itself, though
.
this is a com
paratively rare case ; as‫ وأرسلناك يلا شو‬and woe have sent
thee to mankind as an apostle ; ‫ورتم الليل والنهار والشمس‬
‫ والقمر والنجوم مسرات بأمره‬and He haths subjected to you the
night and the day, and the sun and the moon and the stars, subjected
by His command. If it refers to a preceding proposition, this must
B be a nominal proposition, consisting of two definite concrete nouns
‫ر‬

assubject and predicate ; as ‫ زيد أبوك عطوا‬Zeid is thy father, as

being affectionate ; ‫ هو زید معروفا‬he is zeid , as well knoton ;
‫ أنا فلان بطشجاعا‬I am so and 80, valiant (and) brave ; ‫هو‬
‫ الحق بينا‬it is thetruth,as manifest ; ‫اها معهم‬
‫وهو الحقم ل‬
and it is the truth, as confirmatory of what is with them (of the
Scriptures which they have already received ); písí ‫ه‬ati
‫عبد الل‬ ‫أنا‬
‫ ما يأكل العبيد‬I am the servant of God, eating as the servants
C )of God) eat, ‫ أنا ابن دارة معروا بها نسبی‬I am the son of Dara ,
my lineage being well known through her.
‫در‬
The jlá is explained
in these cases by an ellipsis of ‫أغرقه‬, ‫أحقه‬, ‫ أثبته‬I knovo him (or
it), know it to be true, know him (or it) for certain, and the like ; e.g.
‫أنا فلان أحق بط شجاعا ورززيیدد أبوك أه عطوا‬, .etc
REM . e. The ‫ حال‬is ordinarily ‫ تک‬or indefinite ; but it is
allowable to define it by the article in cases where it may be
D explained as involving a condition )(‫ معني الشرط‬, ‫زيد الراكب‬
as

‫ أحسن منه الماشي‬Zeid,when he is riding )‫ إذا ركب‬, lookie more

handsome than he does when walking (csánó lóp), instead of the more
usual ‫ زید راكبا أحسن منه ماشيا‬Further,it may be defined by a
pronominal suffix, or otherwise, in various cases, in which it can
be explained by, or is equivalent to, an indefinite jl ; e.g.
‫ مررت به وحده‬I passed byhim byhimself or alone)= ‫(منفردا‬, ‫فعلت‬
§ 44] The Verb. — 3 . Government of the Verb.— (a) The Accus. 117
‫ ذلك جهدك‬thou hast done this to thebest of the ability )= ‫ ; (مجتهدا‬A
‫رو‬

‫تد كیلنمت= )ه قاهأيإدلى فسيبا‬Ispoke

‫ م‬tohim fauceto fuce )= ‫ ماهه‬: ‫تفرق القوم‬
‫رهو‬
( .seo
rem 6, 3(; ‫أتى شكليیم قممها بقضيضها‬
(the tribe of ) Sulèim came to me, its gravel with its pebbles (i.e. small
and great, one and all,= ‫ فأرتها العراك ;( جميعا‬andsohe let them
(the camels)) go in a body,, or a crowd, to water (= ás éo);
‫ جاوا الجماء الغفير‬they came all together (lit. in a great mass,
covering the ground, = ‫(جميعا‬.
Rem. f. The subject or object of the action to which the jlé B
refers, ‫ صاحب الحالي‬or ‫ و الحال‬,,is usually definite, ‫معرفة‬. The
principal cases in which it is indefinite, ‫تكرة‬ are the following:

)11( When the ‫ حال‬precedes it,tusas ‫ فيها قائما رجل‬in it (the house(
is a man standing; ‫ يعزة موحشا طكل قديم‬،4Azza's is an ancient
ruin , left desolate ; ‫ وبالجشير مبنی بیا تو علمتو شوب‬and in my
body there is, manifestly, if thou didst (but) know it, a sad change ;
‫ وتحت العوالي والقنا مستظلة ظباء‬and under the spearheads and C
shafts, seeking shelter, are gazelles (women ). (2) When the fols
‫ الحال‬is followed by an adjective or a complementin the genitive,
as
‫ أمر خيبر أمرا من عندنا‬jis ‫هتج(يت يا‬is‫ن‬
‫ فيها يفرق كث‬in it (that‫رب‬night
settled each wise thing, as a thing proceeding from us ;
‫ توا واستجبت له في قلبي ماخر في اليوم مشحونا‬thou didst deliver
Noah, O my Lord, and didst answer his prayer, in a ship cleaving
the sea heavily luden ;; ‫ا‬La‫ائه‬Cotedos
‫ رجل ق‬óstá
‫ غلام‬suis in my house is a D
man's slave standing; ‫ في أربعة أيام سواء السائلين‬in four days
complete— (this) for inquirers. (3) After a negative or an inter
rogation, as ‫ ما م من موت می واقيا‬there is no interdicted spot
appointed to preserve(one)from death :; ‫لايكن أحد إلى الإحجام‬
‫ يوم الوغی متوقا لحمام‬let no one incline to lang back on the day
 118 PART THIRD.-Syntux. $ 44

A
oflifebattle
, fearing deaths; ‫ یا ماچ هل هم عيش باقيا‬0 friend,is a
decreed as lasting ? –Sibawèih, however, admitted the correct
ness of such a phrase as ‫فيها رجل قائما‬, and in a tradition we find
‫ تی رسول الله صلعمر قاعدا وصی وراءه رجال قياما‬the Apostle of
God prayed sitting, and there prayed behind him (some) men standing.
REM . g. As to the position of the já in a sentence, the fol
lowing remarks must suffice, in connection with what will be said
B elsewhere.- ( 1) As a rule, the já is placed after the regent. It
may, however,precede it, if the regent be a fully inflected ( jució)
verb or verbal adjective, as ‫ راكبا جاء زید‬riding came Zeid ;
jol is légumo in haste is this (man) departing; but we cannot say ‫مهر‬

‫زی‬,
‫ ضاحہها ما أحسن زیدا‬and ‫د احهنرا أحسن من عمرو‬, instead
‫و‬

of ‫ ما أن زيد ضاحگا‬and ‫زيد أحسن من عمرو اگا‬, because

neither ‫ أحسن‬as: ‫ فعل التعجب‬nor ‫ أحسن‬as ‫أفعل التفضيل‬, ‫ن‬is‫د‬
C Speció. An exception to the latter case is when an object in a
certain state is compared with itself, or with another object, in a
different state, in which case the one ‫ حائل‬must precedle ‫أفعل‬, and
the other follow it, as ‫ زید قائما أحسن منه قاعدا‬Zeid standing
‫ره‬

looksmore handsome thathe does sittiny, or ‫زید فردا أنفع من‬

bles groc Zèid alone is more useful than ' Amr assisted (by others).
If the regentbea ‫) عامل معنوى‬see rem .6b), the ‫ حال‬must follow
it, with rare exceptions in the case of a preposition and its
D complement. We cannot use ‫مجردة تلك هند‬, ‫عطوا هذا أبوك‬,
‫للهذيات أزبيوداك عأطووكا‬, ‫بتايتكاني زايدأاميراأنأخأوميكرا‬, ‫رداك‬,‫أش‬for‫;تلأكنهندزيدماجررداةكبا‬
‫و‬

nor is it usual to say ‫ زید قائما عندك‬or ‫ زید قائما في الدار‬for

‫ زید عندك قائما‬or ‫زيد في الدار قائما‬,though some read in the
Koran ‫ والشموات مطويات بيمينه‬and the heavens, folded together,
§ 44] The Verb . — 3. Government of the Verb. — a ) The Accus. 119

(shall be) in his right hand,instead of glas, and the heavens A

(shall be) folded together in his right hand.— (2) The 31 may pre
code the ‫صاحب الحالي‬, when the latter is the subject (nomin.) or
direct object (accus.),as ‫ جاء ضاحگا زید‬, ‫ ; ضرب مجردة هندا‬unless
the ‫ حال‬be restricted by ‫وما ترسل المرشدين إلا مبشرين إلا‬
as

‫ ومنذرين‬and toe do not send the Apostles but as announcers and

warners .
If the ‫ صاحب الحالي‬be governed by a preposition , the
‫ حال‬must follow it, as ‫جالسة‬ ‫مررت بن‬, not ‫موت جالسة بيند‬. B
Only a poet could venture on an emergency to say ‫لئن كان برد‬
‫ الماء هيمان صاديا إلى حبيبا لها حبيب‬: eter the coolness of,
water was dear to me when parched and thirsty, verily she is dear ( to

me),for ‫حبيبا إلى هيمان صابرا‬,; or ‫فإن تك أنواد أصبن ونشوة فن‬
‫ ذهبوا فيرا بقث حبال‬and thongh (gonr ) herds of camels and
(your) women be seized, yet ye must not let the murder of Įibāl pass
anaeenged, for ‫بقثل جبال فرا‬. The ‫ حال‬may be dependent upon C
a preceding ‫ ) مضاف إليه‬see s75), when the ‫مضاف‬ or governing
word, is naturally capable of being its regent (maşdar, nomen
agentis,etc., see rem . 6), as ‫عجبني قيام وهذا ضارب هنډ مجردة‬
‫ إلى الله مترجم جميعا زیب مسرعا‬to God ahal beyour return
altogether ,: ‫تول ابنتي إن انطلاقك واحدا إلى الروع يوما تارکی‬
vi ‫و‬øý my daughter says,Verily thy departing alone to war will
one day leave me without a father ; or when the Jlás is a part, D
really or tropically,of the ‫مضاف إليه‬, as ‫ونزعنا ما في صدورهم من‬
S

ligen! Js and we will remove what is in their breasts of rancour

as brethren (uiga, dependent on the suffixed pronoun in ingús);
‫ ثم أوحينا إليك أن اتبع ملة إبراهيم حنيفا‬then We revealed unto
thee, Follow the law of Abraham as a hanīt, i.e. inclining to the
rightstate or sound in faith )‫ نيقا‬dependent on ‫إبراهيم‬, ‫ ملة‬being
 120 Part THIRD . — Syntax. [S 44

A
virtually a part of ongelmit, and the phrase quite clear and correct
withoutit, ‫(ابع إبراهيم حنيفا‬.
Rem. h . The vaji Jolo may be suppressed, either necessarily
or optionally. It is omitted necessarily, for example, in the case of
a
‫) حال مؤكدة لمضمون جملة‬seerem .d), as‫ ; زيد أبوك عطوا‬in
forms of salutation or congratulation, as, to one departing, láng
.taking
‫مهدیا‬ the right away and directed by God , scil ‫ إذهب‬go; to
B one returning from the pilgrimage, to je to rewarded and
accepted, scil.Eods thou art arrived , or blog thou art returned ;
‫ هنيئا‬easy of digestion and wholesome, scil. áls,
to one eating, ki jo lio ‫كله‬
ques, ogís, etc., eat it,= may it agree with thee or you * ; and in
such phrases as )‫ اشتريته بدهي فائدا (قصاعدا‬I bought it for a
.dirhame
andupoards, scil ‫قذهب ألم زائدا‬, or ‫صاعدا‬, and the
С
price toent on increasing or uoent higher ; ‫تصدقت بدينار قافلا‬
gave in almsa dinar andless, scil ‫ فذهب المتصدق به افلا‬and
.I
the amount ofwhat was given in alms went lower. But the omission
‫ ر;اكب‬riding,
is optional in such phrases as ‫ا‬usi riding,inanswer
in answer to más
hono didst thoutcome? for ‫أنميها مرة وقيسيا أخرى زج راكبا‬
a Tèmīmite at one time, and a Kaisite at another ? scil. josi or

Vesi, dost thou change, or turn, thyself into— ? or ‫ أتت‬dost

thout affect the nature - ‫أيحسب الإنسان أن تن تجمع عظامه‬
‫ بتی قادرين على أن تسوى بنائه‬doesnun think thatweshall not
.
re-unite his bones ? Yea, (we will re-unite
- them , wer j)) being able
to put together evenly the bones of his fingers . - It may even happen

*
* If ‫ هنيئا مريئا‬be considered as epithets of the masdar ‫أك‬
understood, this phrase belongs to the class mentioned $ 35, b, a.a
Comp. Lane sub go.]
§ 44] The Verb.—3. Government of the Verb. — a ) The Accus. 121

that the actual jló itself is suppressed , and only a word or phrase, A
which is dependent upon it, expressed ; ‫ه‬as ‫والميكة يدخلون عليهم‬
‫ورد‬

‫ من كل با سلام عليگم‬and the angels shall go in unto theme

through every gate, (saying, ‫قائلین‬.Peace
( be upon you
d . The motive and object of the agent in doing the act, the
cause or reason of his doing it ; as ‫ا‬6‫ هربت خو‬I ned for fear ;
‫ قعدت عن الحرب با‬thou didst refrain from going forth to our
out ofcocardice ; ‫ ضربت ابني تأديبا ته‬I beatmy son for the sake B
of correcting him ;; ‫ إذا رأيته أقوم له تعظيما وشستاندی‬nohen
‫ په‬I see him ,
I stand up before him to show respect to my teacher' ;, ‫بما اشتروا‬
‫ أنفسهم أن يفروا بما أنزل الله بغيا‬oile is the price from thich they
have sold their souls, that they should not believe in what God has
:
sent donen (revealed),out of eney ; ‫و كثير من أمير الكتاب لو يردونگم‬
‫ من بغير إيمانگه قارا سدا من عند أنفسهم‬many of thosewho have )
Scriptures would like if they could make you unbelievers again, after
we have believed,out of selfish eneg ; ‫ فعلت كذا مخافة الشر‬I did 80
‫الله‬, ‫ت‬or‫يرمىخانففةسهأنابتغلاوءمنمیرضا‬for ‫ن‬fear
and so for fear of harm ‫اس م‬that
‫ن الن‬thout
‫وم‬
shouldst reproach me ;
and of men there are ucho sell themselves (give up their lives) to win
‫ه‬
the favour of God (for ‫وأغفر عوراء الكريم ابرخاره وأعرض عن ;;(مرضاة‬
‫ ثم اللئيم تكرما‬Iforgive the harsh language ofthe noble,that Imay D
treasure him up (as a friend in time of need ), and I disregard the
abuse of the pile out of generosity ; ‫يجعلون أصابعهم في آذانهم من‬
‫ الصواعق حذر الموت‬they put their fingers in their ears on account
of the claps of thunder, through fear of death. Such an accusative
is usually either indefinite or else in the construct state ; definition
‫ر ر‬

by thearticle is not common , s ‫ لا أقد الجبن عن الهيجاء‬I refrain

not from battle out of cowardice.
W, IL , 16
 122 PART THIRD. - Syntax. [$ 44

A REH . This accusative, which mast always be a ‫مصدر قلبي‬

a mental or intellectual nomen verbi, is called by the grammarians
‫المفعول ته‬, or )‫المفعول لأجله (من أجله‬, that on account ofsolitch
something is done. It is the answer to the question áow why ?
. Various other determinations and limitations of the predicate ;
as ‫ طاب زید نفسا‬Zeid is cheerful in spirit ; ‫ طاب الورد توئا‬the rose
‫ ت‬streamed oith perspi
is charming in colour ; ‫ب زید عرقا‬-Zeid
B ration : ‫ واشتعل الرأس شيبا‬and my head glistens arith hoarines88 ;
‫ أحلامنا تزن الجبال زائه‬ourgrave minds surpass themountains in
areight (or firmness(; ‫ أبرهت گرما‬thou art a marvel of generosity ;
‫ رفعت الشيخ قدرا‬Iraised the chiefin dignity; ‫تحتالأرض شجرا‬
I planted the land with trees : ‫ وفجرنا الأرض عيونا‬and we made the
earth break forth noith springs ; ‫ الله عظيم قدرة‬God is greatin might;
‫ هو حاتم جودا‬he is a Hatim in generosity; ‫أنت أغلى منزلا وأكثر‬
C ‫ ما‬thou art higher in station and richer in teealth ; ‫فهى كالحجارة‬
ögonens i gf and they (your hearts) were like stones,or even harder (lit.
stronger as to hardness(; ‫ما أكرم أبا بكر أبا‬, or ‫أكرم بأبی بر أبا‬
hour noble is Abu Bakr as aa father ! ‫ نغم صاحبا زید‬excellent is Zeid
as a companion ! ‫ بس غلاما بشر‬very bad is Bir as a slave!
‫ فنعم الزاد زاد أبيك زادا‬and excellent is the provision , thy father
provision , as a provision ! ‫ حسبك به ناصرا‬thy sufficiency is in Him
‫در‬.
D (Ile suffices thee) as a helper; L,C os‫ در‬at what a man he is as a
horseman ! (lit. to God belongs his outflow or emanation, from none
other could he emanate ); siang daming what a man he is ! (ig being
herea ‫ حرف تعجب‬orparticle orsurprise(; )‫هو خير اجلا منه قارا‬
he is better as a pedestrian than as a horseman, $ 48, e, rem. ].
‫ر‬
REM . a.
This accusative is called ‫ التمييز‬or ‫المميز‬.the
, specifica
§ 44] The Verb. - 3. Government of the Verb.— (a ) The Accus. 123

tion ,and also ‫ االلتتففسير‬oror ‫االلممففسسرر‬,, and

and ‫ التبيين‬or ‫المبين‬,theexplanation . A
It is an indefinite substantive, ‫اسم تكرة‬, placed immediately after
the proposition of which it limits or defines the predicate. In the
‫فضته‬, like the jló
grammatical structure of the sentence it is a dís ‫حال‬
( see c, rem. a ). The grammarians regard it as governed by the
verb in the preceding clause, of which it was the ‫ فاعل‬or ‫مفعول‬
before its transference to the place of ‫ تمييز‬to the actual ‫فاعل‬ or

‫ ;مفعول‬or, if the preceding clause be nominal, as having been B

transferred from the place of the ‫مبتدأ‬. Thus ‫ طاب زید نفسا‬is
equivalent,they say, to ,‫ رفعت الشيخ قدرا ز طابت نفش زی‬to
‫ الله عظيم قدرة زرق قدر الشيخ‬to ‫ ; قدرة الله عظيمة‬and
‫مال زيد أكثر من مايك ما تريد أكثر من ما‬. The ‫تمييز‬maybe
explainedby ‫ من‬with the genitive when it is ‫منقول من المفعول‬
as
‫غشت الأرض من شجره‬, instead of ‫ ; شجرا‬but not when it is
‫هر‬
‫ز‬ c
nonsense
‫منقول من الفاعل‬, for ‫طاب زید من نفس‬.is [ Instead of

‫ قارا‬and ‫ رجڈ‬in the phrases quoted ‫ پله دژه قارا‬and ‫ويه جر‬
we may use
‫ من فارس‬and ‫من رجل‬. See $ 48,0.] - The ‫ تمييز‬may
occasionally be placed, by poetic license, before the predicate which
itlimits,as ‫أتهجر سلمى بالفراق حبيبها وما كان نفسا بالفراق تطيب‬
will Samă sever herselffrom her lover by going away from him),
thought she is not cheered in spirit by going auray 7? ‫ وما ارعويت وشيبا‬D
‫ رأسى اشتع‬and I did not refrain , thought my head glistened with
hoarinees. Such phrases as ‫ نغم صاحبا ید‬and ‫س غلاما بشر‬
are no exceptions to the ordinary rule, as they stand for us

‫ صاحبا تزمیيديز‬or ‫لاما بشر‬ ‫بث الرجل‬. The transposition of the

can take place only when the previous clause contains a verb

which is upció (see e, rem. 9), as ‫ تطيب‬and ‫ اشتعل‬in the

 124 PART THIRD.-Syntax. [$ 44

A
above examples * Should it even happen that the ‫فعل متصرف‬
bears the meaningof a ‫فعل غير متصرف‬, no transposition cantake
place;wecannot say ‫عالما كفى بزی‬, instead of ‫کی بڑی عالما‬
there is a sufficiency in Zèid ( Zèid suffices) as a scholar, because
‫ كى به عاليها‬ishere equivalent to ‫ما أخفاه عاليا‬, and a ‫فعل تعجب‬
is ‫غير متصرف‬.
B REM. 6. The accusative after the cardinal numbers from 11 to
19 and from 20 to 99 ( see Vol. i. SS 322, 323), is also of this class,
being a ‫ تتممييييزز االلععدددي‬or specification of number ,; as ‫أحد عشر رجلا‬
eleven men, ‫ تسع عشرة سنهة‬nineteen years, ‫ أحد وعشروونن عاما‬one
and twenty years, ‫ ابن ثمانين سنه‬eighty years old (lit. a son of
eighty years ).
REM . C. To this class also belongs the specification of weight
C ) ‫ (الوزن‬andmeasure ) ‫الكيل‬, ‫(المقياس المساحة‬, in which the ‫تمييز‬
follows a single indefinite noun, and specifies the article of which
‫ طل‬a pint of olive-oil,
‫ زی‬js;
that noun expresses thequantity ; as ‫ا‬wj
‫ منواننيزتنبڑهاا‬tuoo manas (four pounds ) of clarified butter (ghee (,
a kafiz of wheat, ‫ا‬lágt
‫ي جو‬utálji
‫ ذراعان‬two cubits of cloth,
‫ اشتريت اعين مرا‬I boughttoo sae of dates, ‫بی جریب تخلا‬
Iount a geral of date-trees; ‫ توب ماء‬a buchet ofwater , ‫هئا‬
D a skin ofghee, stá ‫د‬jubig
‫ راقو‬ajar of vinegar, ‫ا‬sino
0
‫ عل‬que a pot of honey ;
‫ خاتم حديدا‬a ring of iron , ‫ باب اجا‬a door of teak -wood,
‫ جة خيرا‬a coat ofsilk ; ‫ تي عندي ثقل خردئة مما‬I have not got
] The transposition of ‫ دمعا‬in the words ‫فلم أدر ماأنا كان‬
vi and I did not know , which of us two shed the most tears (Dozy,
Supplém . i. 654,, a,, ll. 6) is allowed because now is the comparative of
‫ ساچم‬pouring forth . But perhaps ‫ دما‬is here ‫ مفعول ته‬for tears
(Fleischer, Kl. Schr. ii. 556). D. G. )
§ 44] The Verb. — 3. Government of the Verb .— (a) The Accus. 125

the toeightofa graine of mustard-seed in gold, ‫ ما في الماء قدر راحة‬A

‫) كابا‬or ‫ (موضع كق حابا‬there is not in the sky a cloud thesize
re
‫ فل‬shallnotbere
of a hand ; ‫ن يبل من أكبر ملء الأرض مما‬-the
ceived from any one (ofthem ) thefull of the earth in gold ; jsi csíc
v bhio on each date its like in fresh butter (a piece of fresh butter
of the same size.) This ‫ تمييز الوزن والتي‬is equivalent to the
äló! (s 75) or to the preposition is with the genitive ; e.g. B
‫ قفیز بڑا‬ami
= ‫ز ب‬mis
‫ قفی‬or evo ‫قفيز‬.. In some cases, however, there may
‫من‬, jis
be a difference; e.g. ało sis means a bucket ( full) of water, a
bucketful of water, whereas sło wis may mean not only a bucket
of water, but also aa bucket for water, a water-bucket.

Rem. d . Finally, to this class belongs the accusative after the

interrogative nouns of numbers and sis, how much ? how
many ? and the indefinite lás , 80 and so much or many [ included C
under the name ‫[الكناياتمثل ما‬. )1( ‫) قم‬contracted for ‫ما‬ the like
of what, = Jás or to‫ ما‬jus,‫قدر‬, see Vol. i.. $$ 351, rem.) is either
>

‫ استفهامية‬interrogative,= ‫ أى عدد‬whatnumber ? or ‫ برية‬assertory

or predicative (or exclamatory ,) = jas much, many. (a) As
interrogative, ' s is followed by an indefinite substantive in the
accus . sing., as jais piens is how many men are there in thy
house ? frais GÚ Ló té ' s how many slaves of thine are going
attay ? ‫ قم عبدا تشتريه‬hoo many slaves wilt thout buy? D
‫هم مثهتك‬ hoomang like it hast thou ? ‫ كم غيره تك‬hoomany
besides it hast thou ? Sú aislas how many better than it hast
thou ? A phrase like this sú s how many slaves hast thou ? is
no exception to the rule,because theyhad of ' has been omitted,
.viz ‫نفسا‬, and ‫ غلمانا‬is in the accus, as a jlé ( see c, rem. b and
rem. c, 3). If governed in the genitive by a preceding substantive
or a preposition, the jos may be put in the genit, as well as the
 126 PART THIRD . - Syntax . [$ 44

A
.; e.g ‫ رزق كم جلا ( جبر ) أطلقت‬thepension ofhow many
.accus
mere huast thout granted ? ‫ بگم درهم (درهما)اشتريت هذا‬for hoomany
dirhamsdidstthou bythis ? ‫علی گم جدا( جذع) قفت بيتك‬ 0

how many beams hast thou placed the roof of thy house ? ( B ) As
assertory or predicative (or exclamatory ), ' s is followed by a
substantive in the genitive of the singular or of the broken plural,
and requires a verb in the perfect ; ‫ ځه غلاتي مكثت که‬many a
B slave have I owned, or hoomany a slavehave I owned ! = ‫كثيرا من‬
‫ كم درهم أنفقت الغلمان‬manya dirham have I spent,or how many
a dirham have I spent ! This genitive is explained by an ellipsis of
‫من‬,which is often expressed as ‫وكم من مكبر في السموات لا تغنی‬
‫ شفاعتهم شيئا‬and there is many an angel (or how many an angel is
there) in heaven, whose intercession shall be of no avail ; oss
có lietot amb and many a town have We destroyed , or how many a
C town have We destroyed ! If, however, ' s be separated from the
‫ سو‬. ‫ر‬

jutro, the latter should be put in the accusative, not in the genitive,
as ģić stá gcáscoming outas many a bounty have I receivedfrom
them tohen Iwous)in tant; ‫تو سنائا ومدونه من الأرض محدودا‬
Llé she (the camel) makes for Sinān, but on this side of him there
ismany a tract of land, the valley of which is deeply hollowed ; though
the genitive is also admissible in poetry, as ‫غم دون منية وما يهال‬
there is on this side of Maiya many a frightful desert ; useis
D
‫ بنی تنغير بين بغیر سید ضخيم السيﺉة اجد نفاع‬there isamongthe
Bènū Sa'd’ibn Bèkr many a chief large in gifts, glorious and useful
(to his tribe).- Unless it be governed by a preceding substantive or
a preposition, Ś always stands at the beginning of the clause.
‫روہو‬

If a singular juo be followed by a pronoun referring to it, that

pronoun may be either singular or plural, as ‫كم رجل رايته‬ or

‫ كبير امرأة لقيتها رايتهم‬or ‫وم من من الخ ولقيت‬The- ‫مميز‬

may, of course, be often omitted after ‫ كم‬, as ‫ غم مائة‬hoomuch
$ 44 ] The Verb. — 3. Government of the Verb.— (a) The Accus. 127

is thy property ? scil. sýlis; sütois is how many slaves hast A

.thou
? scil ‫سرت زنفسا‬.hono
‫گم‬ far hast thou travelled ? scil
‫ فرا‬or ‫ غم عبد الله ماكت زميلا‬hoo long till `Abda tal
.delay
? scil ‫ ساعة‬or ‫ كم جاء زید زوما‬hoo often has Zeid come
to the} scil, ‫بن و كان شان مقدم رسول الله صلعم ) ز;مرة‬
‫ المدينة‬how many years old age Hassan,when the Apostle of God
[ ) ‫ي‬sló
arrived at *El-Medina?).—(2) ‫ أين‬compounded of Ý B
‫ كأ‬or ils,
and the genitive of si who ? which ? [Vol. i. SS 351 , 353, rem. c]
is scarcely ever employed interrogatively, as ‫قال أبي بن كعب‬
‫ بن مسعود كاين تقرأ سورة الأحزاب فقال ثلاث وسبعين‬Ubei'abon
Ka'b said to 'Ibn Mas'ud, A8 how many (verses) dost thou read the
Chapter of the Confederates (Ķor. xxxiii.) ? And he said, Seventy
three. Its ordinary use is assertory or predicative (or exclamatory ),
‫ كابين رجلا رأيت‬many a mane
followed by the accus. singular, as
(or how many a man) have I seen ; but more usually by ins with C
‫بل‬
the genitive, as ‫ربيون كثير‬
‫ وكأين من تبې قاتل معه‬and hoo
many a prophet ( is there), with whom many myriads have fought !
‫وكان من آية في السموات والأرض يمرون عليها وهم عنها معرضون‬
and how many a sign is there in heaven and earth, by which they
pass,turning aupayfrom it ! ‫ وكأي من أي أعين الأسى‬many a
grief is too great to be consoled by any examples ( of resignation ).
It is disputed whether it can be preceded by a preposition, as in D
the phrase ugasi vás zmo stay for how much wilt thou sell this
piece of cloth ? (another example of the interrogative use).—— (3) liś
‫) ذ‬,so and so much or many [ Vol. i. $$ 340,,
( sometimes written ‫ی‬sis
rem . d ), requires after it an indefinite accus. in the singular, as
‫ ملت كذا عبدا‬I possess 80 and somany slaves ; ‫عندي كذا درهما‬
I have so and so many dirhams by me. It is more usually doubled,
‫ كذا وكذا‬,as ‫ قال من الشعر كذا وكذا بيا‬hemale (lit.said
)( 80
 128 PART THIRD . - Syntax. [S 45

A
and so manyperses of poetry ; ‫ إشترى الأمير كذا وكذا جارية‬the
. ‫ر‬
amir longit so and so many slave.girls ; ‫عد النفس تعا بعد واك‬
‫ ذاكرا كذا وكذا تطفا به سى الجهد‬promise thy soulease after
thy affliction , calling to mind such and such favours, through which
trouble is forgotten. The conjunction is sometimes omitted, and
some say that there is a distinction between ‫ كذا وكذا‬and
‫ ; كذا كذا‬.e.g‫لتهه على كذا كذا درهما‬means, according to them ,
B I owe him 80 and so many dirhams, from 11 to 19, whereas
‫ا وكذا ډرها‬.means
‫كذ‬ at least 21 dirhams
f. An act expressed by a nomen verbi, with which another act,
expressed by a finite tense,is compared ; as ‫قتلوه قتل ابنه أخاهم عمرا‬
they killed him in the same way as his son killed their brother 'Amr ;
‫ عب زيدا تغذيه إسمعيل أبو زيد‬he tortured Zaid just as 'Ismail,
Zeidsfather,had tortured him ;: ‫ولو يعجل الله يا الشر أستعجالهم‬
) ‫ بالخير تقضى عليهم أجله‬and if God should hasten evil upon men ,
as they would fain hasten good, verily their end (death) would be
decreed. For this accusative may be substituted j with the genitive
of the nomen verbi, or us with a finite tense of the verb ; e.g.in the
‫د‬
a

first example, ‫ كقتل ابنه‬or ‫] كما قتل ابنه‬.comp$ 27, [.

45. If an entire clause, consisting of a subject and a predicate,
be annexed to another clause, to define or limit either the subject
or object of the latter, then the predicate of the former is placed
D before its subject and put in the accusative, the subject being left
in the nominative (see § 73). For example :: ‫ا‬ingmaco
‫وی تهئنة معشور‬
‫ أوائله ومذعورا أواخره‬Timur-lenk (Tamerlane)turned hisback ,after
his can had been broken andhis rearstruck with panic ; ‫هو الذي أنشأ‬
‫ جنات مغروشات وغير مفروشات والخل والزع مختلقا أكله‬Heit is
who produceth gardens with trellises for vines and without them ,
and the palmtrees and the grain , with their various edible fruits
$ 48[ The Verb.3. Gov't of Verb -. (b) Prepositions: ‫ من‬129
)‫ أغس تی العار بالسيف ;( گائنا أكله ممتلئا = مختلفا أكله‬A
‫ جابا على قضاء الله ما كان جالبا‬Iwillwipe aaraymydisgrace
with the sword, let God's decree bring upon me what it may ( sté
= ‫ وإن جلب على‬, ‫ جالبا‬in rhyme for ‫( جايا‬.
(b) The Prepositions.
46. The prepositions all originally designate relations of place
( local relations), but are transferred, first, to relations of time ( tem- B
poral relations), and next, to various sorts of ideal relations, conceived
under the figure of the local relations to which they correspond. —
They are divided into simple and compound . — The simple prepositions
are again divisible into three classes, indicating respectively motion
proceeding from or away from a place, motion to or towards it, and
rest in it.

47. The prepositions which indicate motion proceeding from or

away from a place, are ‫) من‬en ) out of, from , and ‫) عن‬ab ) anay
from . C
REM. In Hebrew and Aramaic ja supplies the place both of
‫ من‬and ‫عن‬.
.48 ‫) من‬with pronominal sufixes ‫ (منه ومنك ما می‬-desig
nates :

(a) The local point of departure, departure from a place ; as

‫ خرج من مكة‬he scent forth from Makka ; ‫ سقط من يدها‬it fell
from her hand ; ‫سبحان الذي أسرى بعبده ليلا من المسجد الحرام‬ D

(I declare) the glory of Him who transported His servant by night

from the sucred Temple (at Mèkka ). Hence it is connected with
verbs which convey the idea of separation, departure, holding oneself
or another aloof from any person or thing, liberating, preserving,
feeing,, frightening away , forbidding , and the like; as ‫هو الحضن‬
‫ ينجي من جميع الشدائد‬this is the fortressachich preserves (as) from
W. II, 17
 130 PART THIRD . — Syntax. [$ 48

A all calamities; estivi ing ati igéi I take refuge with God (pray
God to preserve me) from covetousness ; masí como eu ví the world
holds (us) back from good; osals wäreis beáló sui who hath
created you (brought you into existence) from one soul. Hence too
its use to signify, on the one hand, by or through, as yui in Las
he came in by,or through,the door ; Cao Luis Su Ghi ‫ أبراجها‬its
B touters through which the acater ascends ; ‫إذا نظر إلى الشمس والقمر‬
what eis is when we look at the sun and moon through an open
ing in the clouds; and, on the other hand, in place of, instead of
)(= ‫ل‬j ‫( د‬, as ‫ أرضيتم بالحيوة الدنيا من الآخرة‬are ye contented with
thelifeofthis scort instead ofthe next ? ‫ولو نشاء تجعلنا منعم ملائكة‬
ügile movieis and if we pleased, we could place (or create) in
your stead angels to succeed (you) on the earth ; Ngeur is a very
comer and she had not tasted the pistachio-nut instead of (common )
vegetables ; )‫ فكيت لنا من ماء زمزم شربة‬ok acould that we had a
draught instead of the water of Zemzèm !]*.
(6) The temporal point of departure, the point at which an act
or state has commenced ; as ‫ عبد الله من شبابه‬he served God from
hissouth ; ‫ وقت التعلم من المهد !إلى الخير‬thetime of learning
eatends from the cradle to the grave ; ‫ثيون من أزماني يوم حليمة‬
D they have been chosen from the times of the battle (lit. day) of Halīma.

]In the words ‫ ولا ينفع ذا الجير من الجد‬Zamahsari,Fail ,

i. 159,explains in by Jü i.e. susús, stićús jás, riches will not
9

profit the possessor thereof instead of Thee, i.e. the obedience and
submissiveness to Thee. Commonly it is said to have here the signi
fication of his with Thee (comp. Lane in v. m). D. G.]
 131
§ 48] The Verb. — 3. Gov't of Verb.— ( b) Prepositions : " ..
Rem. a. The Arab grammarians say that is, when used in the A
above significations,is employed ‫ ابتداءالغاية في المكان والزمان‬to
denote the commencement of the limit in place and time, or simply
‫تداء‬.to
‫ للاب‬denote the commencement
Rem. 6. The tribe of Hudail used só in these senses as well
as
‫زمن‬.eg‫مه‬ ‫أخرجها می‬le brought it outof ) ‫ (من‬his sleeve;
‫ شرب بماء البحر ثه ترث متی تجج محضر هن نئيج‬they (the
clouds) drank of the sea-water, then they rose from (i) the dark- B
green flood with the sound of the storm .
[REM. c. On ‫من‬in thesignification of ‫ند‬.see
‫ م‬$ 61 ,rem .d [
(c) The causal point of departure, the origin and source of a
thing ; as
‫ ذلك من تب جاءنی‬this is in consequence of information
that reached me; ‫يتعجب منها‬ ‫ فوق‬and he stood admiring itat (or
wondering at it, his wonder proceeding from , or being caused by, it) ; C
>

‫ئاتهم أغرقوا‬-they
‫ منها خطي‬acere drowned because of their sins (the par
ticle 6 is merely expletive and does not interfere with the govern
ment of ‫ يغضي حياء ويغضي من مهابته ;(من‬he is silent out of
modesty, and others are silent through fear of him . Hence its use after
verbsmeaning to sell and to give in marriage, as ‫ باع‬, ‫ وهب‬, ‫زوج‬
e.g ,‫ باع منه فرا‬he sold to him a horse ; ‫بعث من رسول الله صلعم‬
‫ رجل راويل‬I sold to the Apostle of God a pair of trousers ; ‫ زوج‬D
‫ إسمعيل ابنته من ابن أخيه العيص بن إسحق‬Iahmael gave his
daughter in marriage to his nephew , Esau the son of Isaac.
REM . a. The grammarians say that is is used in this case
‫ للعليل‬to assign the reason ,

REY. b.. In speaking of persons ‫من أجل‬ on account of, is

always used instead of jo, and often too in other cases ; as

 3

132 PART THIRD.— Syntax. [$ 48

A
úton is one sajt sheon whose account, or for whose sake, thou
teepest ; ‫ فار ثم عار كث عار شقاء المرء من أجل الطعام‬it is a
threefold disgrace for a man to be in misery on account of ( for want
of )food ; asís de les because of what he said.
( d) The distance from a place, person, or thing, particularly after
words which signify proximity, such as ‫ب‬uji ‫ وئ‬to be near, agus
‫ قر‬or ‫ا‬Új ‫قريب‬
near, etc. (compare Lat. prope ab eo, Fr. près de lui, rapproché de lui) ;
.

..Be ‫ قرب الجيش منهم‬the armywas near them ; ‫ دنا می‬hewas not
far from me ‫ دنا إلى‬would mean he cameup close to me(; ‫يبغى يطالب‬
‫ العلم أن لا يجلس قريبا من الأستاذ‬it behotes the studentnot to sit
near, or close to , the teacher. (Hence its figurative use in the phrases
quoted $ 44,b, rem. a near the end : Couf bló so jó etc.,and in
the following examples : shis ósk síó what relation is this lad
C toyou ? ‫ هو منك وأنت منه‬he is close to you and you are close to him
)in birth and rank (; ‫ فإني لست منك وتت منی‬I am not in union
with you nor you with me; ‫ ما أنا من دير ولا اله منی‬I have no
concern with diversion , nor has diversion any concern with me. In the
last two phrases is may be supplied ,in which case is has the
partitive meaning, as in so se vlei is not he is in no part of
D science, i.e. he has nothing to do with science.)
(e) The difference between two persons or things which are con
trasted orcompared with one another ;as ‫هل تعرف الجيد من الردي‬
dostthou know the good from thebud ? ‫والله يعلم المفيد من المضيح‬
but God knows him that dealeth foully from him that dealeth fairly ;

‫ أين أنت من توح وطول عمره‬chata diference there isbetween the

and Noah in length of life ! lit. where art thou from Noah and his
length of life ? Hence the use of its after comparative adjectives ; as
$ 48[ TheVerb.3. Govt of Verb (b ) Prepositions: ‫من‬ 133
‫ هو أفضل منی‬he is more excellentthan 11; ‫ نحن أحق بالملك منه‬A
we are more deserving of (or have a better right to) the kingdom
than he.
REM. a. If an object be compared with itself in a different
respect, the appropriate pronominal suffix must be attached to the
preposition ‫ ; من‬as ‫ الناس أشبه بمانهم منهم بآبائهم‬people are more
like the time in which they are born than they are like their fathers ;
‫ مشفر يومين أقرب منهم الإيمان‬theywerenearer unbelief on that
daythanebelier; ‫أشوق می‬....‫ قال ياأةأنا والله إلى طعنة نافذة‬B
‫ إلى ابنی‬but he said : O my father ! I havemore longing for a
piercing thrust than I have to see my son ; ‫أنا منكم على العرب‬
‫ أخوف منى من العرب علیم‬I have more fears of injury to the
Arabs by you than I have of injury to you by the Arabs ; ‫ولانا أهم‬
‫ بجراج ولي الله متى بجراچی‬and terily Iwasmoreconcerned
about the wounds of the Apostle of God than I was about my own C
ooounds ; ‫أنا أميل إلى كونها من هذا الأصلي مني إلى كونها من‬
‫ ذوات الثون‬Iamamore inclined to itsbeing derived)from thisroot
than I am to its being (derived ) from (one of) those which contain
the letter ni
‫ وكان رحمه الله العلي أخبر مما هو بالحرب‬hepos
sessed, may God have mercy on him ! more knowledge of science than
of war (with lo explet.).— Sometimes, in a less careful style of
speaking or writing, the preposition is is annexed to the latter
of the two objects, instead of to the person or thing which is D
compared with him or itself in respect of these two objects ; as
‫ صار يقاتلهم بالعصا أقوى من اللاج‬hebegan to fight them with the
stick moreataurdily than with theaveapons (for ‫;(أقوى منه بالښلاج‬
‫ على أن الله من أقبح من غير‬because torong proceeding
from you isworse than from others (for ‫(اقبح منه من غيركم‬.-
..with
‫ من‬its complementis sometimes omitted ; e ‫ الله أكبر‬God
 134 PART THIRD . — Syntax. [$ 48
A
is most great, lit. God is greater og ing than any other being ;
‫ الله أعلم‬God knotos best, lit. God knowsbetter ‫ من غيره‬than any
other being ; ‫إن الذي من الماء بنی تاباتراه أعز وأطول‬
verily He, who reared the Heavens, hath built for us a house, the
props (or pillars) of which are more glorious and taller, scil. slides ing
than those of ) thy house, or ‫ من كل بيت‬than (those of every
( other ) house
B When thus used fel is invariable in form ; as lio
‫ أفضل من زینب‬Ilind (a woman) a better than Zeinab : ‫الان‬
‫ أفضل من الأمتين‬the two freeborn women are betterthan the taco
female slaves ; ‫ العلماء أفضل من الجهلاء‬the learned are better than
the ignorant; ‫ المؤمنات أفضل من الكافرات‬the (female) believers
are better than the unbelievers.
REM . C.
es with its complement is occasionally placed in
C poetry beforethe comparative adjective ; as ‫بل ما زودت منه أطيب‬
nay, what she gave (us) as provision was ( even ) sweeter than it
)honey‫ لا شيء منهنثةأ اكلظلعي;ن(ة‬nothing is lazier than they; ‫فأسماء‬
toi ahmetoví súz ‫ تلك‬ing
‫ من‬then 'Asmā is more beautiful than that
woman . In prose this inversion takes place only with an inter
e
rogativ pronoun or a word in the construct state before an inter
rogative pronoun ; as est
‫ أنت‬co
‫ من‬than whom art thou better ??
D
‫ من أبي أيهم أنت أفضل‬than the father of olich of there arethout
better ?
REM. d . In the other Semitic languages, which do not possess
peculiar comparative form of the adjective, the comparison is like
wise expressed by means of the same preposition ; Heb. 1?, Aram .
Sô, Æth. 290 : or 790 %::
‫ه أكبر‬stí
* [Fleischer denies that phrases like si ‫ الل‬are elliptical,taking
‫ أكبر‬as an absolute superlative ; Kl. Schr. i. 684, 789, ii. 721. ]
$ 48 [ The Verb.3. Gov't of verb-. (b ) Prepositions: ‫ من‬135
( f) The relation which subsists between the part and the whole, A
the speciesandthegenus ; as ‫ علم الطب سبب من الأسباب‬the science
ofmedicine is one of theprofessions : ‫ومن تعظيم العلم تعظيم الكتاب‬
and respect for the book is a part of the respect due to science ;
‫ الإنسان مرب من نفس وجير‬man is compounded of soul and body ;
‫ ورأى أن الحيوان والثبات لا تلتم حقائقها إلا من معاني كثيرة‬and
he saw that the natures of animals and plants are compounded of
numerous elements ; )‫ قفز من بر رابر‬a kafīz of wheat; is ‫ لباسه‬B
is
‫ الح‬garment
‫رير‬.h is of silk
REM . a. When evo precedes a definite noun, especially in the
plural, it often indicates an indefinite quantity or number, ‫شی‬
or ‫ شربت من الماء وه ;بعض‬I drank someofthewoater ; ‫أخذ من‬
as

‫ الدنانير‬he took some of the dinars ; ‫ قد أراكم من آیاته‬he has

C
alreadyshown you some of his signs; ‫ إلى تمهد من ثنای‬lo I am
about to pay the homage of my praise; ‫ وفجرنا فيها من العيون‬ant
wecausea number of springs to gush forth in it;; ‫منهم من قضا‬
‫ عليك ومنهم من ته نقصض عليك‬of somne Wehave told thee, and of
others We have told thee nothing. Accordingly bo with an indefi
nite genitive may be the subject of a sentence, e.g, ‫فمن قائل‬
‫ بالروحانيات ومن قائل بالهياكل ومن قائل بالأصنام‬there are
some who believe in the spiritual beings as gods, others in the celestial D
bodies, others again in the idols ]. Compare in French de with the
article, as du lait, " some milk .” We here see the nominal origin
.w
of ‫من‬, is clearlyhi
a substantive, meaning
ch a part orportion
REM. b. After negative particles, and after interrogatives put
in a negative sense, is
‫ مر‬prefixed to an indefinite noun means none

at all, not one ; as

‫ ما جاءنی من رجل‬or ‫من أكبر‬ 10 One came

to me ;
‫ ما جاءنا من بشیر و نذیر‬therehath come to us no bearer
 136 PART THIRD - Syntaa. [$ 48

A of good news and no warner ;

‫ر‬
‫ لا ييأأتتنیي من أكبر‬let no one come to

me; ‫ ما تم من إله غيره‬we have no god but Him ; ‫ما تم من‬

‫ ناصرين‬theyhavenohelpers )=‫لا في الدار من رجلي ;( لا تاصرين تم‬
thereisnoman in the house )= ‫وفة هل من مزيد ;( لا رجل في الدار‬
thereany addition or increase‫اللهدور?ه‬:‫ ة مهل من خالق غير‬there any
‫م من‬noting
creator but God ?? vai is ‫ منه‬wordt jó dost thou perceive any
B
one of them ? ‫ هل لنا من الأمر من شي‬have toe any portion of
thatthing ‫من أ‬ the Hebrew 982,Levit.iv
? With ‫حډ‬.compare
2, Deuter. xv. 7 .

[REM. c. Very often o preceded by an indefinite noun, is

followed by the definite plural of the same noun, in order to signify
that a person or thing is wholly undefined , as ‫و ملك من الموك‬
certain king; ‫من الوجوه‬. ‫ وجه‬certaina manner But when an
C
indefinite noun denoting a state or condition is followed by is
with the same noun defined in the singular, it signifies a high
degree of that state or condition , as ‫ عجب من العجب‬aa toonder
of toonders ; ‫ داء من الداء‬a very great disease; ‫و أن من الشأنن‬ 0

pery importantafrair : ‫ آلژین‬.a

‫ زين من‬great ornament. D.G [
]REN .d. The adverbialexpressions )‫ من غير (من الغد‬tomorrow ,
D ‫ من الليل‬at night correspond to the Latin demane (demain ), de
nocte, and signify properly in a part of the following day, in a part
of thenight. Other examples are ‫ خرج من يومه‬hewent out on
the sameday : ‫ رجع من قوړه‬he returned immediately (comp.Lane
.8 .2 and Fleischer, K. Schr. i. p.457 seg.(; ‫من داخل المسجد‬
inside the mosque.
This is called ‫ من بمعنى في‬min unith the
signification offi, though there is a slight difference between the
use of the two prepositions , as has been pointed out by Fleischer, i.
p. 414. D.G ..]
 $ 48 [ TheVerb.3. Gon't of Verb (b) Prepositions : ‫ من‬137
REM . 2.
When is indicates a part of a whole, it is said to A
‫ يتبعیض‬to indicate division into parts;; when it indicates
be used warsztaty
the parts of which a whole is composed, vas to indicate com
position.
( 9) The definition or explanation of a general or universal by a
special or particular term , the latter being one of several objects that
go to make up the former ; as ‫وكذلك يفترض علم أحوال القلب من‬
‫ اول والإنابة والخشية‬and in thesamedayweareenjoined to take
cognizance of the different states of the heart, such as trust ( in God ), B
and repentance,and fear (or Him (; ‫تصفح جميع الأجسام التي في‬
‫ عالي الكون والفساد من الحيوانات والنبات والمعاين‬and heexamined
all the bodies which there are in this world of existence and decay, both
animals, plants, and minerals ; Julio Joylon is is both (of them ),
Abel aswellasCain : ‫إخواننا اولا من الأنصار‬thesebrethren of ours,

the Angar (or Helpersofthe Prophet(; ‫و لا يحصل مقصودهم من العلم‬

their olject,namely learning , is not attained ; ‫فاجتنبوا الرجس من‬
‫ الأوثان‬therefore dovia the abomination of idols ; ‫والعرب تحذف هذا‬
‫من قال ويقول‬.
‫الفعل‬ a n
the Arabs omit this terh d
kala yakala
Hence it serves to indicate the relation between the material and the
article made of it, as )‫ صنم من الهب (من ذهب‬a statue of gold ;
)‫ ثوب من الحرير (من حریر‬a» garment of silk ; ‫م‬sie
‫ يعد‬als
‫ قصعب عليه‬D
‫ الآلات وانها لم تكن إلا من الحجارة والقصب‬and itasdificult
for him , because of the want of instruments, and because those (which
he had) were made only ofstones and reeds. In this way is is con
stantly used after the indefinite pronoun Lo [and loved], what, whatever,
which cannot be constrated with a genitive; as ‫ ما تهب من المال‬the
money arhich hasben spent; ‫ ما تنفقوا من خير يو إليه‬whatever
ye lay out in charity, shall be amply made up to you ; ‫ما يفتح الله‬
W. II . 18
 138 PART THIRD . — Syntax. [S 48

A ‫ياس من رحمة فلا ممسك تا‬themercy thich God sendeth forth for
man, none can keep back. [In some cases this is after 6 may be
considered as the partitive ‫من‬.[
Rem. In the language of the grammarians, is is here used
‫يلبيان‬ or
‫ يلبيين‬to make clear or explain , or ‫ لبيان الجنس‬to
explain the genus.

B ])Ah) The specifying )‫ (آمييز‬of thegeneral term , as ‫بله درك من‬

‫ فارس‬what a man thou art as a horseman ! (where wyli is is the
equivalent of ‫ قارا‬$ 44, e(; ‫ تاهيك من رجل‬mohat a aconderful man
heis! ‫ جزاك الله من أخ خرا‬may Godrepay the good,ercellent
brother as thou art ;
‫ عيدمك من‬might I only be rid of thee, love
)that makest memiserable(! ‫حتى يقولوا إذا مژوا على جثي أرشده‬
C ‫ الله بن غاز وقد رشدا‬that they may say then passingby my tomb,
God directed him aright, warrior as he was, and verily he followed the
right course ; ‫هذا ابن سید ریش وهو مسترضع فينا من غلام يتيم‬
‫ تيس له أب‬this is the son of the lord of Kures: he is nursed among
s, orphan as he is, having no father ; ‫وكان رجلا ناسها قاض فقيها‬
‫ من رجل كان يبين إلى مكتبة أهل بيت رسول الله‬hewas a pious,
D distinguished , and learned man , namely a man inclined to the love of
the family of the Apostle of God. A special branch of this is the use
of ‫من‬, which is called ‫ الجريد‬to designate the person or thing, in
which a certain qualityis prominent,as ‫ لاقيت منه الأسد‬I encountered
in him a lion ; ‫ بي من فلان صديق حميم‬I have in So-and-s an
afectionate friend ; ‫ لقيت منه بحرا‬I found him to be a man of ez -
ceeding generosity.. In such phrases iso has the same meaning as
and ‫في‬.
$ 49[ The Verb.3. Gov't of Verb . (b) Prepositions: ‫ عن‬139
REM . a .
Observe the elliptical phrases ‫ من بی من ابن الأشرف‬A
woho toill delivermefrom Ibn al-Aaraf ? ‫ أنا منك وإليك‬I am of thee
and related to thee, I belong to your family. On the meaning of
‫منك وإليك‬.see
‫اللهم‬, Goldziher in Zeitochr. D.M. G.xlvi. p 95
seq. (comp. p. 425 seq.) D. G.]
Rem. b. is is used in vulgar Arabic, like so in Syriac and
90: in Æthiopic, to indicate the agent in connection with the
passive voice of a verb ; as
‫ لا يضل بعد لشئ إلا أن يطرح‬B
wwliví ing wulang lagles it is good for nothing at allbut tobe
throuon outand trodden under foot bu ment, instead of ‫ويدوسه الثا‬.
49 .
‫) عن‬with pronominal suffixes ‫ عنی‬, ‫عنك عنا‬, ‫ ( عنه‬designates
distance from , motion away from , departure from a place or from
beside a person ; as ‫ جنس عن يمينه‬he sat at (a certain distance from (
his right hand comp. however, this $, ‫ ب‬rem . c[; ‫و رمى الشهم عن‬
‫ القوس‬he shot the arroto from the bot ; ‫ سافر عن البتير‬take thy
departure from thetoon ; ‫حتى لا تحتاج إلى تركه والإعراض عنه‬
that thou mayest not be compelled to leave him and turn away from him.
Hence it is used :

(a) After verbs denoting flight, avoidance, caution, abstinence,

self-defence, guarding and setting free, forbidding and hindering, and,
in general, to express the doing of something (e.g. fighting or paying)
for or in behalf of another comp.869, g]. For example : ‫ الهرب عن‬D
‫ قضاء الله تع غير مهيني‬it is impossible to fee from the decree ofGod
Almighty; ‫ تن ععين آانلقبيح‬avoid that is disgraceful; ‫ينبغي أن‬
‫ يجعتمناب تريدماه يتضفره‬it isnecessary thatheshould avoid what injures him ;
‫يصبر‬ ‫ ينبغي أن‬it isnecessary thatheshould patiently
abstain from what his souldesires(hispressionsdesire(; ‫برات عن ولائهم‬
I declare myself freefrom all connection with them (as client); var
 140 PART THIRD - Syntas . [ 8 49

A ‫ عن عذاب الآخرة‬he isacted from punishment in thenext georld ; ‫أطعمه‬

‫ عين الجوع‬he fed him (to savehim ) from hunger : ‫ كساه عن العزي‬he
clothed him (to save him ) from nakedness ; ‫لنهي عن المنكر‬-the
‫ ا‬prohibi
tion of whatiswicked : ‫ ينوب عنى‬he acts as mydeputy ; ‫ يقاتل عنه‬he
fights for, or to protect,him ; ‫لا تجادل عن الذين يختاثون أنفسهم‬
do not contend , or plead , for those who act wrongly to themselves ;
B ‫) لا تجزي نفس عن نفس شيئا‬one) soul shall notmakesatisfaction for
)(another) soul at all ; ‫ حمل عنه كذا وكذا درهما‬he paid so80 and 80
many dirhams in his stead, lit. he bore, or took upon himself, for him .
(6) After verbs denoting uncovering, laying bare, opening, reveal
ing, informing, asking and answering; for in these verbs there lies
the idea of the removal of a covering, real or figurative. For example :
‫ لو كشف عتی تور الدنيا‬if the veils of this tool were removed from
C me (from beforemy eyes(; ‫ التلال التي انشق عن بيوت‬the mounds
athich acere laid open so as to disclose chambers; ‫إن كنت تبغي شاهدا‬
‫ يخبر عن غائب‬if thou trantest atitness toho can inform theeregarding
mohat is hidden ;; ‫ سأنبئك عن مجموعها‬Iwill tell thee about al ofor
them ;; ‫ هذا سؤال یل عنه رسول الله صلعم فأجاب عنه‬this is a question
about which the Apostle of God was questioned , and he gave an answer
to it; ‫ وجه عنه إلى الأندلس أبوه‬his father sent to Spain to look for
‫وہ‬

D him ; ‫ فسألهم عني وقال وجهوا عنه‬and he asked them aboutmeand

said, Send to look for him ; ‫تبسفمقعدنت تواتلوخزامئننډ عن الأشيحة‬and‫ها‬they
‫ان‬
made for the arsenals to look for arms ;

gi she smiles so as to display (teeth like) strung pearls or hailstones

( in whiteness).

(c) After verbs denoting abandonment or neglect, and the ability

to dispense with (es) one thing because of the possession of another
$ 49[ The Verb.3. Gon't of Verb-. (b) Prepositions: ‫عن‬. 141
[$ 56, c]) ; because in them is implied the notion of turning away A

) ‫(أعرض‬. For example : ‫ رغب عن الشيء‬he did notaish for thething,

he avoided it ; ‫ صفح عن ذنبه‬or Széć I forgave him his sin ;
äis sós he was satisfied with him ( and had nothing more to ask from
him ) as in the words of the Kor'an ‫ رضی الله عنهم ورضوا عنه‬God is
well pleased with them , and they are well pleased with Him . D. G. ] ;
‫ ينبغي للإنسان أن لا يقل عن نفسه‬a man must not be neglectful of
himself ; ‫ وهو غنى عنها‬he does notrequire it; ‫ بي في طلاب العلم غنی‬B
‫ عن غناء الغانيات‬I And in studysuch contentmentthatIcan dispensewith
the singing of women ; ‫أغنني بحلالك عن حرامك واكفني بقضية‬
jis vis satisfy me with what Thou allowest,so that I may be able to
dispense with what Thou forbiddest, and suffice me with Thy goodness,
80 that I may not have occasion for any other but Thee. Similarly :
‫ شغله ذيك عن الفترة في كل شيء إلا فيه‬this circumstance occupied
him so that he could not think of anything but it ; Šis ‫ر‬já ‫بی حص‬ C
‫ [ المناقب‬I am unable tomention all thevirtues ; ‫إني أحببت حب‬
‫ الخير عن ذكرربی‬Ihave loved thegood (of this scort )so as toneglect
all thought of my Lord ; ‫ يبخل عن نفسه‬he is so sting as to deng
himself everything.

(d) After verbs signifying to leave one behind or to surpass one ;

as ‫ لا أفضلت عنی‬thout dost not surpass me in anything. Hence the
expression is gis not to mention, much more or much less (according D
W

to the context); as ‫فتبين ته في أقل الأشياء الموجودة فضلا عن أكبرها‬

‫ من آثار الحكمة ما قضى منه كل العجب‬and therebecamemanifest
to him in the smallest of existing things, not to mention (and much
more in) the largest of them , such traces of wisdom as set him in the
greatest custonishment : ‫لا يوجد في الأمر بأشيرها فضلا عن صفد‬Ý :it isnot
 142 Part THIRD . — Syntax. [$ 49
A found in the whole of Syria , not to mention (much less in ) Safed.
Hence too the use of Lć in comparisons (like is, $ 48, e) ; as
‫ أين أنت عين البيت النذر الجامع يمنات اغر‬cohereare thout (ophere
are thy verses) in comparison with this rare verse, which contains all
the things wherewith the mouth can be compared ? ús ‫تعالی‬
biler
He is exrlted above whatever ( gods) they join (with Him ).
)REM . If ‫ فضا عن‬is followed by a clause with ‫ عن رأن‬is very
often omitted , as is frequently the case with prepositions in general,
gi and Bl. D. G.]
before uſ

(e) Lić also indicates the source from which something proceeds ;
as
‫ إما البيع عن تراض‬selling or buying is only (resultant) from
mutual agreement ; vols sis üé jús he acted after the counsel of
such a one] ; sui Jei ý we will not do this at your word
( as it were, setting out from your word, moved by your authority );
‫ كانت اليهود لا تشعن مدينة مراكش عن أمر أميرها و‬the Jeusdid not
dwell in the city of Marrēkuś ( Morocco) by the order of its governor.
Hence it shows (a) the authority for any statement, tradition, or the
like; as ) ‫ أخذ العلم عنه‬I acquired knowledge from him ; ‫وی عن‬
uglo he related (a tradition) from such a one]; iszlási ic sha
is for
it is related on theauthority of e - Saf' ;; ‫وكان أستاذنا يحيى عن‬
‫ شيخ من المشايخ‬and our teacher aused to narrate on the authority
Dof a certain sheikh ; ‫ حديث صحيح عن شول الله‬an authentic
WE

tradition of the Apostle of God; jus al medi yućg and it is told of

the prophet that he said ; and (B) the cause from which an effect
proceeds as its source ; as dis
áić ojgũí that which necessarily follows
from it ;
‫ك أمر عن مشورة‬stió‫ ما هل‬no oneever perished through asking
advice (of others).
§ 49] The Verb. — 3. Gov't of Verb.— (b) Prepositions : s. 143
(f) Lastly, is is used of time as equivalent to ies after ; as A
võib let to ye shall encounter (or experience) state after
state ; obice plási jo es una decos as the temper of a ( good)
sword betrays itself (eren) after it has become rusty ; úzce yuz is
is in a short time it will be much ; ‫ عما قليل‬after a little chile
(where to is redundant, as in an example in § 48, c).
REM . a. Observe the phrases : ‫ مات عن ثمانين سنة‬he died B
aged eighty ; pas mus ' s só he died leaving a young child;
inges lobs they were slain to the last man. [In expressions
like oja is láš he forgave, though he had the power to punish,' s
can be replaced by cola, stic or co. — For marking the distance,
as
‫ عن خمسين قرامن عمان‬at a distance of fifty parasangs
from "Omān, it is synonymous with sió (comp. the Gloss.
Geogr... On the elliptical phrases ‫خذ عنك‬, ‫اذهب عنك‬, etc. see C
the Gloss. to Țabarī. D. G.]
Rem. 6. Because of their being related in meaning, is and
‫ عن‬are sometimes used indifferently ; for example, after ‫منع‬
to hinder, to avoid, is free from , clear of, and the like.
Compare $ 48, e, with $ 49, d . [After the verbs to take, to borrow ,
.ete ‫ من‬is used of transportable objects, as ‫أخذت منه الدراهم‬
I got from him the dirhems ; but we ought to say ciel cc Siéid
I acquired knowledge from him. Others say that is is used for
‫ سمعت‬I heardfrom him the narrative,
‫ه الحديث‬ais‫ من‬éémi
what is near,, as évues
‫ عن‬for whatisremote,as ‫ وهو الذي يقبل التوبة عن عباده‬Heit is
who accepts repentance from His servants (Kor'ān xlii. 24).]
REM . C. is is sometimes used as an indeclinable noun ,
‫ينه‬
signifying side,which is its original meaning ; e.g.aime Les ins
 144 PART THIRD . — Syntax. [$ 50
A
‫ ]وشماله‬or ‫ [ على عن‬on his rightandhis left ; ‫إذا ما جعل الشيف‬
‫ من عن شماليا‬mohen I place the sword on my left side )‫ شماليا‬in
rhymefor ‫(شمالی شمایی‬. Compare Ty , 709 ,
REM . d. According to the grammarians, ‫ عن‬is used ‫البعد‬
‫ والمجاورة‬to express distance from anything and passing acay
from it.

B 50. The prepositions which indicate motion to or towards a

place, are ‫ إلى‬to, ‫کی‬.Mp
up to,and .J. to

.51 ‫) إلى‬with pronominal suffixes ‫ (إليه إليك وإلى‬is opposed

) ‫ (معارض‬to ‫ من‬aund ‫ ;عن‬a8 ‫ من المهد إلى اللحد‬from thecradle to
the grave ; ‫ سرت من البصرة إلى بغداد‬I went from el-Basra - to
Bağdād; áić ebál he severed himselffrom him , abandoned his cause,
but ‫ إنقطع إليه‬hewas devoted to his cause ; ‫ إليك عنى‬stand aff ! (see
C the end of the section ). It signifies :
(a) Motion (or direction] to or towards a place ; as ‫جاء إلى‬
‫ المدينة‬hecame to thecity ; ‫بان الذي أسرى بعبده لي من المسجد‬
‫) الكرام إلى المسجد الأقصى‬see $ 49 , ‫ (ه‬to the Temple ethich is
mostremote (at Jerusalem (; ) ‫ الصلوة يومئذ الى بيت المقدس‬at that
time they used to pray turning towards Jerusalem ; ist ja he looked
towards me, he regarded me ; ‫ مال إليه‬he or it inclined toucards him
or it. Hence, because the notion of being inclined is implied in it,
D ‫ ت المرأة إلى المق‬theheart of aroman is inclined to foolishnese ;
‫ ځل مواللىي فرح‬each sorroo tends to joy : ‫ تونه إلى الشواد‬its colour
etergeson black ; ‫ هو إلى الطول ما هو‬itis sometchat luong ; ‫إن الدنيا‬
‫ إلى الرواب‬,thes
‫ي ما هى‬. e
world is someuchaton e
its decline *. D. G [
*
] Forthe explanation of this ) ‫هو (هي‬.s ee
‫ ما‬Fleischer,K. Sehr
i. 477 seq., Dozy, Supplém . sub lo and infra § 136, a, rem . e.]
$ 51[ The Verb.3. Gon't of Verb (b) Prepositions: ‫ إلى‬145
(6) Transferred to time, the point up to which something lasts A
or continues ; as ‫ مت إلى المغرب‬I fasted till sunset ; ‫خير من‬
‫) أزمان يوم حليمة إلى اليوم قد جوبن كل التجارب‬sees48,b) doun
to the present day (and) have been tested with every sort of test;
‫ لا تزال طائفة من أمتي ظاهرين على الحق إلى يوم القيمة‬، part
of my people shall not cease to hold fast the truth till the day of the
resurrection . It occurs in a somewhat different sense in the phrases
‫ه‬

‫ تجمعتكم إلى يوم القيمة‬Ie soill certainlyassemble uyue to the lany r B

the resurrection (for it)(; ) ‫ أنت طالق إلى سنة‬thout art divorcedl till
this day year ].
REM . In these two cases
‫ إلى‬is used ‫ للانتهاء‬to designate the
limit of the act. (See § 52, rem. b.]
)‫ إلى (ع‬also shows that one thing is added to another ‫المصاحبة‬
or
‫(يلية‬, and hence we find it constrated with ‫ زاد‬to incredtse ,
augment; as ‫ ممه هذا إلى هذا‬add this to that; ‫و لا تأكلوا أموالهم‬
‫ إلى أموالهم‬donot devour their substance in addition to your oion ;
‫ زادوا حكمة إلى حكمتهم‬they hate added knowledge to the knowledge
they (already) possessed . (Hence also it signifies reaching up to
)= ‫(منسوب إلى تام إلى‬, belonging to )= ‫(مضموم إلى‬, entrusted to
) = ‫ (موكول إلى‬etc., as ‫ وهو إلى بننيي أأممية‬and he belonged to the
Ben 'Umega ; ‫ تيمموا إلى قرب مئا فتعرفهم‬they belong to nme D
of our Arab trailers,that we should buouo them ; ‫وذكروا أن الجزيرة‬
‫ كانت إلى قنسرين‬and they said that El-Jazira belonged formerly
to Kinnasrin ; ‫ن إليه بيمارستان البرامكة‬-the
‫ ځا‬hospital of the Barma
kides was entrusted to him . ]— It is also construed with adjectives
of the form besi and others, derived from verbs signifying love or
hatred and used in a passive sense, to indicate the subject of the
feeling (see $ 34, rem . a); as ‫حبيب‬, ‫محبوب‬, dear ;: ‫ أحب‬dearer ;
vázs hated, hateful; vásvi more hateful.- It is used too with ‫ب‬ways
‫قري‬
W, II . 19
 146 PART THIRD. — Syntax. [S 52
A near, and similar words, in so far as they convey the idea of approach
‫ ب‬from , e.g ‫قائه أقرب إلى‬
or approximation , opposed to ‫عيد عن‬.far
obiegifor this comes nearer to reverence ; whereas in so far as they
convey the idea of the measurement of the distance of one place from
another, they are construed with ins (8 48, d). [ The same idea of
>

approach is indicated by ‫ إلى‬in the expressions ‫ إلى جانبه‬on his side ;

anime of our his tent ( stood) beside the tent of the other .] — Finally,
notice the phrases : ‫ إلى غير ذلك‬lit. on toother than this,and ‫إلى آخرو‬
B (contracted įht), to the end of it, i.e. et cætera ; sig, lit. to thyself!
and ‫إليك عنى‬,lit. to thyself from me!= ‫ تت‬xtand outf ! ‫هذا إليه‬,.scil
GW

elano or vögés, this is committed or entrusted to him.

[ REM. On the phrase was there it is for you ! see $ 35, b, d,
rem. 6. ]
w

.52 ‫ حتى‬differs from ‫ إلى‬in indicating motion towards and at

the same time arrival at an object, whether this object be actually
C touched and included or not; whereas ss! merely implies the motion
towards an object, whether this be arrived at or not ; as sa ‫سلام‬
‫ كى مطلع الفجر‬it ispeace till the break ofor day ; ‫نمت البارحة حتى‬
2

‫ الصباح‬Islept last night til itwasmorning: ‫أكت الشتة ثی راسها‬

‫روش و‬

I ate the fish to its (very) head ; voor local ‫ليسجننه‬ they would
imprison him for a ( certain) time. However, when ing and us! are

D used in opposition to one another to designate the terminus a quo and

terminus ad quem , s necessarily includes the idea of reaching the
object ( 51 , a, b). Further, when the reaching of the object is
distinctly expressed by the governing verb or verbal noun itself, the
meaning of s! is naturally modified thereby ; as a Brony I came
up to him ; al Tri the attaining to it. That was does not
necessarily include the object reached or attained is evident from
its being occasionally used to indicate exceptions, like the German
bis auf.
$ 53[ TheVerb.3. Gov't of Verb. (b) Prepositions: ‫ حتي‬147
REM . a.
Love is scarcely ever [i.e.only by poetic license) used A
with pronominal suffixes ; as ‫تحاك يابن‬ ‫فلا والله لا ينفي أناس فی‬
‫د‬a‫ا‬us‫ زی‬sino,, by God,, men will never find a man (coming)) upto thee,,
O Ibn Albi Ziyad , ‫ أتت تنتاك تثصد كل فج‬hehas cometo these,
making for every mountain -pass.
REM. b. The grammarians, when they wish to make a distinc
tion, say that ‫ إلى‬is used ‫لانتهاء‬,‫ ا‬to desiguate the limit of the B
act), whilst ‫ حتى‬is employed ‫لانتهاء الغاية بلغاية‬, to designate the
or

attainment of the extremity or utmost limit.

‫طف‬RE
‫ ع‬M. C. When ‫ حتى‬is a simple copulative particle ) ‫حرف‬
or åáblá, or liket), in the sense of even , it exercises, like
the other copulatives (such as ‫و‬, ‫ في‬, and ‫ ثم‬, no independent
influence upon the following noun, which remains under the same
government as the preceding one ; ..‫ قدم الحجاج حتى المشاة‬C
the pilgrims have arrived , even those travelling on foot ; curſ
‫ حتى الأنبياء‬men have died,even theprophets ; ‫وفارقوه حتى أخوه‬
and they left him ,even his brother ; ‫أعجبني الجارية حتى حديثها‬
the girlpleasedme,even her conversation ; ‫أكل السمكة حتى رأسها‬
I have eaten the fish,even the head of it ; ati jocs island ils ;
‫ت‬Apostle
‫ج البي‬of‫وائ‬God
‫ى ح‬used
‫ر حت‬to‫مو‬consult
‫ميع الأ‬his‫ ج‬companions and
‫أصحابه في‬on‫مع‬all‫عم‬matters,
‫ صل‬altheeven D
household affairs.

Rem. d . A dialectic variety of is ‫عتی‬, through which it

may perhaps be etymologically connected with the corresponding
Hebrew word 2 .

.53 ‫) إ‬with pronominal suffixes ‫لك إلى‬, ‫ (له‬is etymologically

connected with sl, and differs from it only in this,that s ! mostlym

expresses concrete relations, local or temporal, whilst u generally

 148 PART THIRD.-- Syntax. [$ 53

A indicates abstract or ideal relations. Hence J is rarely employed

‫)للإنتهاء‬see $51,b,rem
, .); asAs ‫( كل يجرى لأجل مسمی‬
goms each of them ()
travels to an appointed goal* Its principal use is to show the passing
on of the action to a more distant object, and hence it corresponds to
the Latin or German dative ; but it may also express the relation of
the action to a nearer object, and so stand in place of the accusative
( compare $$ 29, 31, 33, 34). Hence U indicates :
>

(a) The simple relation of an act to the more distant object ; as

BB ‫ وهبه له‬he gave it to him ; ‫ قال لها‬he said to her ; ‫هب !بی من تدنك‬
w ww

‫ ذرية طيبة‬give me from Thurself good descendants ; ‫والله جعل تثتمم منن‬
JOE
hoisi olandii and God hath made for you wites of yourselves (of your
own race ).
REM . a. After the middle forms of the verb, Y often expresses
the yielding. oneself up to the action
‫في‬
of another or to the effect of a
‫و‬
thing;; as Logobandi ő lejet, pull his (the camel's) leading
С rein as long as it can be pulled by you ; á litási ate ličná ús
if any one deceives us with God (i.e. with a pretence of devoutness ),
we let ourselves be deceived by him.

REM. b. Some grammarians say that the ‫ لام الجر‬, or preposi

tion », is used in this case ametu, to express the passing on of the
action ; but others consider that it is here employed Web and
she did, to signify the giving possession ( of something) or the
D like, and restrict the term acety to the cases laid down in SS 29,
31 , 33, and 34 .

* [ After verbs that signify to fall (as ſó, baém, 263) has the
meaning of on (= who),as ‫ يلقن‬os he fell down prostrate with his
, vítil
chin on the ground. Hence the expression qils , on which see
the Gloss. to Tabari sub . D. G. ]
 149
§ 53] The Verb.—3. Gov't of Verb.— (b) Prepositions : Y.
(6) The dative ( a) of possession ; as ‫ى صائب‬isis
‫ الرحجملد للمهن له رأ‬A
the man is he who has aa right opinion or a correct judgment ;
praisebelongs to God ; ‫ إنا لله‬ute are God's ; ‫ المال يزيير‬the property
is Zeids: ‫ الشرج للفرس‬the saddle belongsto thehorse; ‫رأيت له بريئا‬
I saw that it had a glistening) ; whence it is used to indicate the
author of a proverb, poem, etc .; as ‫ما قيل لمحمد بن الحسن‬
3

us has been said by Muhammad 'ibn El-Hasan ;omney si he recited B

)» poem )by one of theme (the poets(; ‫ » أنشدت وقيل أنه يعيتي‬poem a

was recited to me, and I was told it was by 'Alī ; ( ) of permission

[or right) ; as sus átó then this is allowed him (lit. is to him ); (dí
lís lees he has a right to do such a thing ]; (y) of advantage, as
opposed to ‫علی‬, which indicates injury ; as ‫الفقه معرفة النفس ما تها‬
Hola Lóg learning is the soul's cognizance of what is for its good and c
for its hurt ; [á los he blessed him , $ 23 ).
Rem . a.
The grammarians say that y, when it indicates
possession, is used suici to indicate the right of property, or
volaia ju to show that something is ascribed to one as his own, or
JánBus to show that he has a right to it. Compare the Hebrew
usage, 717? bin a psalm composed by David ;; etc.
REM . 6 . As the Arabs have no verb corresponding to our have, D
they are obliged to express it by the preposition J with the
genitive ofthe possessor; as ‫ كان يلي هير مائتا عبير‬kiking Zuhair
haid to hundreat slave; ‫ ته ببغداد أب ماوئلةا ابصناجب بر‬he had in
Baydad six hundred secret police ; un ng is
‫الی‬to‫ م‬I have neither
father nor son .

Rem. c. is often used, instead of a simple pronominal sutlix,

in order to avoid rendering a noun definite ;; e.g. ‫لي أخ‬. ‫ما‬ a
 150 PART THIRD. — Syntax. [$ 53
A
brother of mine is dead; whereas goi có would mean my (it may
be, only) brother is dead (S 92].
REM, d. In pecuniary transactions y is used to indicate the
creditor, whilst cała expresses the debtor [$ 59, c) ; as ‫بي عليك‬
mojs üi thou owest me (lit.there are to me upon thee) a thousand
dirhams
‫در‬.
REM . e . ‫ بله‬what a
Observe the expressions of admiration : Os all
B
man he is ! Les ing jis‫ درا‬at what a man thou art ! inget at what a
man thy father tus! ‫ لله أنت‬chat aman thou art : ‫لله القائل‬
beautiful is (the saying of ) the poet ! ( lit. to God belongs his outflow
or emanation, from none other could he emanate ; compare Jonah
.i 3,, ‫ וְנִינְוֵה הָיְתָה עִיר גְדוֹלָה לֵאלֹהִים‬and ‫ب‬Nineh ‫ك ف‬d‫هעلיטت‬
was a very
‫ي الشرا‬uns
large city ). Remark also such phrases as :
opouldst thou like sone toine ? ‫ هل تم في أن تفعلوا هذا‬haveye »
C wish to do this ? svelato uf sú jij dost thou wish then to give
me some food ? where we must supply the substantive aus , desire,
aish ; ‫ ما تنا أن‬what object or redtson haveme that ? ‫ما لي وله‬
what have I to do with him ? líś jest jigj s what has
happened to me that I (i.e. why do 1) see thee doing thus ? S s
who will befor me as helper ? ☺ u I am the manfor it).
D (c) The purpose for which, and the reason why, any thing is
done (relation of the action to its purpose and cause) ; as ‫قام معاونته‬
hearise tohelphim ; ‫ ضربته يأديب‬Ibeathim to correct him : ‫ما العم‬
Joel of science (or theory) is only for the purpose of being applied in
practice ; igjedą, josu blondiQuis he sought the dignity (or ofice) for
the purpose of ordering good ; Juilding and for this reason it is said ;
‫رد‬ ‫در‬
because it does harm ; wa Simić Iwondered at (because of)
 151
$ 53] The Verb . — 3. Gov't of Verb.— (b) Prepositions : Y.
what he said ; ojo viss sigjen sig and verily a feeling ofjoy A
comes over me at remembering thee ,
REM. In this case y is said to be used ‫العلي‬, or ‫للعلة‬, to
indicate the cause. (Comp. $ 44, d , $ 48, c. ]

(d) After the verb jló, it often indicates the object in reference
towhich somethingissaid ;as ‫ولا تقولوا لمن يقتل في سبيل الله أموات‬
say not in regard to those who are slain on God's path, They are dead B
(do not call those who are killed fighting for God's cause , dead ) ;
‫ أتقولون يلي تنها جاءځم أسحر هذا‬do nesay of the truth ,after ithas
cometo you,Is thismagic? ‫وكل كبيرة تم تجتمع الليمون على أنه‬
‫ ځفر يقال لصاحبها فسق ولا يقال له قاب على الإطلاق‬and a man
who has committed a great sin , but such as the Muslims do not agree in
calling infidelity, is said to have acted wickedly, but is not termed a
wicked man without restriction . Hence the very common á‫ له‬já c‫و‬
‫ر‬

‫ محمد‬he is called Muhammed , from the active ‫ يقول له محمد‬he says

of him Muhammed , ie. he calls him M.] Similarly : ‫قال مسلمة بن‬
‫ہ‬

‫عبد الملك يوما يصيب أمتدحت فلاتنا برجل من أهله قال قد فعلت‬
Mèslema, the son of ' Abdu'l-mèlik, said one day to Nosaib, Didst thou
compose a poem in praise of so and so ? meaning a man of his family ;
he said, I did . [And so frequently after aa demonstrative pronoun, as
‫ » إن عتبة أرسلني إليك بكذا وكذا يلذي قال‬e, Otha has sentmeto
you with such and such a message , according to what he had said ; D
‫هر‬

‫أن رسول الله حين وقف بعرفة قال هذا الموقد ينجبير الذي هو عليه‬
that the Apostle of God , when he stood on 'Arafa, had said : this is the
stution , meaning the mountain on which he found himself. D. G. ]

[(e) Finally, y is used to mark the time from which, or at which,

any thing took place ‫خ‬in‫تاري‬Bu,as
‫ ال‬satis licenso wejusted from the time
of the mist; an cotó he died on that same day ; asió i
‫من‬ ains
 152 PART THIRD . - Syntax. [S 53

A sohen one year of his reign had elapsed ;‫ يليلۃ مضت من الشهر‬mohen
one night of the month had passed , i.e. the first ; äid to the completion
of a year. See $ 111 , and an example $ 70, rem . b. D. G.]
REM.
After the interjection 6 , the preposition „ is frequently
prefixed to the name of a person called to aid, as well as to the
name of him against whom help is implored, in which case it
B is said to be used aflé gu to ask help. If there be only one
‫ منائی‬or ‫ به‬Le sector i.e. person called to aid, the preposition
takes the vowel fètủa ( just as with the pronominal suffixes, Vol. i.
$ 356, rem . b) ; as ‫د‬we‫ و یا تزي‬for Zèid ! i.e. help, Zeid !! jú‫ه يال‬o‫واد‬
$
qui alas for the humiliation ! help,tribe of Tajlib ! But if there
be several, j is used with the first alone, and y with the rest,
unless the interjection be repeated before each name, when j is
с
retained throughout; a8
as ‫ یا تزيد ولعمرو‬, or ‫يا تزيد ويا لعمرو‬, help ,

Zeid and Amr ! ‫ یا تلهو وللشبان‬help , old and young! ‫یا تقومی‬
Google yang ug help, O my family and ye who are like my
family ! If the name of the person against whom aid is required,
‫ المستغاث له‬or ‫المستغاث من أجله‬, be expressed,it takes (with
kesra )before it,as ‫ یا تزيد عمرو‬help , hid ,against ' Amr ! ‫ياناس‬
jlíu help, people,against this liar ! If an adjective be annexed
D to the a lot,it may be put either in the genitive or in the
accusative; as85 ‫ یا تزيد الكريم‬or ‫الكريم‬. In the case of the
‫به‬ Slove , the vocative termination í ( see $ 38, c) is sometimes
used instead of j with the genitive ; as goed ،luis ‫ا‬ý‫ ی‬help, Zeid,
against ' Amr !—These expressions are also employed [(1 ) to call or
‫ب‬invite,
‫ يلعج‬as‫و یا تدوجا و پيلمتاءان‬O ye ment, come to the touter ! ‫يا تثوب‬
come here, young and old, to wonder ; hence

(2)] ved,to express surprise,in which case the couro

$ 55[ The Verb.3. Gov't of Verb (b) Prepositions: ‫ فی‬153
or object that causes surprise, is treated in the same way as the A
‫ زمستغاث به‬.. ‫ و یا تعجب‬the wonder ! ‫ تلداهية‬ý‫ و یا‬the
misfortune ! ‫ فياتراني طالبيه يني ․ قضيه من العباد‬but o the
disgrace of those who seek it ( learning) in order to obtain benefits
from men.-- Similar forms of expression are ‫ يا ته‬, ‫يا تك‬, .etc,
followed by the accus. Or, more usually,‫لا‬by‫ رج‬the ‫مجناءني رجل وي‬
‫ا ته‬preposition
with the genit. ( see § 44, e, rem . a) ; as
or
‫ؤيا له من رجل‬, there cametomeaman ,and whataman hewas ! B
‫ یيا لها من ليلة‬0 mohat a happy night! ‫و یا تك من خير أسيل‬0 that
a soft cheek ! ‫ فيا لك من تیل‬and 0 achat a splendid night/ ‫یا ت‬
‫ من قبرة بمعمر‬O happy turk in a meadoo! In all these cases
seems to point out the person or thing, in reference to which
the exclamation is uttered, as being the origin and cause of it.
[ There can be no reasonable doubt that, as the grammarians of
#l-Kufa teach , this ‫ يال‬with following genitive was originally ‫یا ال‬
followed by the name of the kinsmen of the man who called for C
aid. See Fleischer, Kl. Schr. i. 393 seq., Lane sub JÍ. R. S.
This tear -ory of the Time of Ignorance ) ‫دعوى الجاهلية‬ was

forbidden by the Prophet, who substituted ‫ یا تلو‬and ‫يا تلمسلمين‬

54. The prepositions which indicate rest in a place, are usin,
‫تدی تدن‬, at, arith ,
into, y at,in, by, with, és with, along with ,i, or

in the possession of, and stá over, above, upon . D

.55 The preposition ‫) في‬with pronominal suffixes ‫ فيه فيك وفي‬,

on the difference between which and see $ ,
56, indicates :
(a) Rest in a place or during a time and motion into a place, in
which latter case it corresponds to the Greek eis or the Latin in with
the accusative ; as ‫ في البيت‬in thehouse ; ‫ في تلك الشئة‬in this year ;
) ‫ في أيام معدودات‬during a certain number of days[; ‫الماء في الكوز‬
W, il , 20
 154 PART THIRD . - Syntax. IS 55

A the water is in the jug ; ulamolar váš jí the racing is in the

meidan; ‫ وقع في البئر‬he fell into the sell; ‫وقع في ظهر الكتاب‬
he wrote on the back of the letter ; uten sig útíbeing God will
cast him into (make him dwell in) the villages ; theone josi
put thy hand into thy bosom ; ] ‫ أدخلت الخام في إضعی‬by inversion
forvlási szo! I inserted my finger into the signet-ring). This
B signification is then transferred to the relation subsisting between any
two things, the one of which is regarded as the place in which the
‫مش‬

other is, or happens, or into which it goes or is put ; as stezi ulo sa

in the state of pupilage; mais ing and to whatever good there is in it ;
‫ الجاة في الصدق‬safety lies in speaking the truth ; ‫تصير في صناعته‬
skilful in his trade ; vuoi sa las he looked into, or read in, the
book
‫ سعی فی حاجته ; ܐ‬he exerted himself louthisbusiness ; ‫دخل في‬
C ‫ التعليم‬he commenced studying; ‫ يدخلهم الله في رحمته‬God will let
them enter into His mercy ; li sese she is not he has nothing to
do with science)

)06 ( ‫ في‬is sometimes equivalent in meaning to &‫ مع‬aith , or ‫بين‬

among ; as ‫ أدخلوا في أمر قد خلت من قبله‬enterwith generations
arhich passed away before you ; ‫ أقبلت في نشوة من الحي‬she came
D forward with ( some) women of the tribe ; Lái mano go ao gi he set
out with 50,000 men . [The proper meaning of us being in the midst
of, the following noun ought to be a plural or a collective ; but the
signification of with became so prevalent, that we find actually
‫ وكان لا يخرج إلا في لام واحد‬and he did not go out aith more
than one servant. In a somewhat different sense us is used in the
‫ نح‬we werefour of us men.-—"The signification
‫ن في أربعة‬mass
phrase ulo, der
$ 55] The Verb.—3. Gov't of Verb.— (b ) Prepositions: 155

of with comes to denote a combination of two qualities, as ‫ واد في‬A

.blackness
‫ځمرة‬ blending toith redness, D. G [
(c) It indicates the subject of thought or conversation , that in
which these move ; as ‫ تأمل شهرين في اختيار الأستاذ‬redtect two
tu0
monthsupon thechoice of a teacher ; ‫ ينبغي أن يتفر في ذلك‬hemust
meditate upon this ;; ‫ك‬sus
‫ تعلم في ذل‬he spoke about this (whereas
subić would mean he spoke this out, he gave utterance to this B
opinion (; )‫ أحاوئنا في الله‬do ye arguewith us concerning God?
‫ فمن يك في بي بثينة متری‬whoever many doubtmylove for Butaina[.
Hence it is used in stating the subject of a book or chapter ; as
‫ صنف كتابا في الأخلاق‬he compild a book on morals ,; ‫فصل‬
‫در‬
‫ ماهية العلم‬a chapter treating of the nature of science ; ‫كتاب النجوم‬
‫ الزاهرة في مملوك مصر والقاهرة‬the book of the shining stars,treating
of the kings of Misr and l-Kahird . Similarly : ‫ نهض فيه‬he got up )
‫ر‬

(to go and look) for him ; Lormontsigning they sent me to look for them ,
or to fetch them ; ‫ قبعث في النطان أبي عبد الله‬and he sentfor the
Sultūān Abū 'Abdi 'llāh. [ It also denotes the assigning of a cause, as
‫ ضربه الحد في شرب الخمر‬he dagged him with the prescribed number
of stripes for drinking wine ; sus si corý he blamed him because of it ;
‫ إن امرأة دخلت النار في هرة حبستها‬erily a stoman entered Hell D
because of a cat which she confined without food .]

(d) css, is used after verbs signifying desire, like vis; and ést,
in connection with the object desired ; as‫من وجد لذة العلم والعمل‬
‫ به فلم يرغب فيما عند الناس‬achy should he, acho has experienced the
sweetness of knowledge and of the application of it in practice, desire
anything that men possess ? ‫ ينبغي أن لا يطمع في أموال الناس‬hemast
not coret people's property. Compare $ 53 , b, rem . e .
 1

156 PART THIRD. - Syntax. [$ 56

А (e) It is employed in the comparison of two objects, governing

the thing with which the other is compared ; a8
as ‫ما الحيوة الدنيا في‬
éló ben jîthis life is merely a temporary usufruct, compared with
the life to come ;
)‫ه ما تحسن من الأعمال‬ais‫ما خراجك بكثير في كن‬
thy tax is not high, in proportion to the number of handicrafts of
achich thou artmaster [;; ‫ ما علمك في بحره إلا قطرة‬thgknowledge is
B only a drop compared with his ocean ; lit. when put into it, the
smaller object being, as it were, placed within the larger one for the
purpose of comparing the two.

(1) Lastly, us is used to express proportion ( e.g. length and

breadth ) and multiplication ; as ‫طوله مون ذراعا في اثنی عشر ذراعا‬
boys its length is fifty cubits, by twelve cubits in breadth (Germ. bei or
auf,Fr. sur(; ‫ مقدارها عشرة فراسخ في مثلها‬its size isten parasangs
säilt three intofive or three timesfive, according
C by the same ; amma get
to the phrase zić se sus cujus he multiplied one number by another
(lit. struck the one into the other ).

.REX ‫ في‬is said by the grammarians to be used ‫الظرفية‬

indicate time and place.

56.
)with pronominal sufixes ‫بك ربی‬, ‫ (به‬differs from ‫في‬
in this, that is like the Latin and German in, shows that one thing
D is actually in the midst of another, surrounded by it on all sides ;
whereas merely indicates that the one is close by the other or in
contact with it, and corresponds therefore to the Latin prepositions
prope, juxta, apud, ad , and the German an or bei. For example :
‫ة‬odlar ‫قرية بب‬is a village at (close to or hard )
‫اب القاهر‬här by) the gate of
Al-Kahira ; ‫ مررت برج‬Ipassed by a man ; ‫ جلس به‬ke sat beside
)orby)him :‫)تضركم الله بدر‬God helped wout at Badr : ‫كان بالمدينة‬
‫تا‬
‫ر‬j‫ج‬ou there was at (or in ,, Germ . zu, Fr. à)) dl -Medina a merchant ;;
$ 56] The Verb. - 3. Gov't of Verb.—(b) Prepositions: 157

‫ قرية بمدصاعر‬a town in Egypt ; ‫ وبيده سيف‬voith a subord in hishand;; A

‫په‬ there is in him a disease : ‫إجتيب دارنا بالنهار‬avoid our houseby
day )= ‫ وإنتم تمرون عليهم مصبحين وباني ;(نهارا‬and perity ge
pass by them in the morning and at night (= ).-- Hence it is
construed with verbs signifying to attach, connect, or adhere to
).e.g, ‫تصق على‬, ‫ف وصل‬. ‫(ل‬.] roundg o
,surround (e.g ‫دار‬, ‫أحاط‬, ‫[( طائ‬,
seize, take, or begin (e.g. lái, i ), ask about, know, or be acquainted B
with (e.g. Jť, öté, je ), flee for refuge to, believe in, and swear by
J

)eg, ‫عاذ‬, ‫آمن‬, ‫أقسم‬. For example : ‫وهم لاصقة بأكتافهم لا‬
‫ أعناق تم‬their heads adhere to their shoulders (and ) they have nonecks;
‫ لأن الدود يتعلق بالمار‬because the worms stick to the fruit; ‫وصل‬
‫ الشيء بالشيء‬he joined theone thing to theother : ‫ ودرت بأعداء‬and I
hotered round enemies; ‫أحاط بالشی علا‬he comprehended it ,kneun C
it thoroughly[; ‫ بدأ بالشبق‬hebegan to study thelesson ; ‫يذ بالخطام‬
. ‫ه‬ ‫م‬

takehold of thenose-rein ; ‫فإن تونی بالنساء فانی بصير بأدواء النساء‬

and if ye ask me about women , truly I am skilful in the diseases of
dowmen ; ‫ تتععووذذ ببالله من سخطه‬we take refuge with God from His
orath ; ‫ آمنت بالله الواحد‬Ibelieve in the one God ; ) ‫أقسمت (خلف‬
‫ور‬

‫ بالله‬Iswear by God ; ‫ به زور بيتك‬by Thyself (I swear), Iwill

visit Thy house ; ‫ ق بك ما أبایی‬no,by thyself,I carenot; ‫ برأسة‬D
by thy head !—Hence, too, it is used after is lo ! see ! introducing a
person or thing that comes suddenly into view )‫إذا المفاجأة‬ or

‫ ; ( إذا الفجائية‬a8 ‫ بينا هو يسير إذاا بچ‬whilst he acas going along, he

as

suddenly perceived a cloud of dast; ‫قله توشط الدرب إذا أنا بصوت‬
patic and after I had got to the middle of the lane,I all at once heard
a great noise ; ‫ونحن في الحديث وإذا بضمة عظيمة على الباب‬
 158 PART THIRD.Syntad . [S 56
A and whilst we were talking, a great clamour suddenly arose at the
‫م‬

door ; ‫ إذا برجلي يقال له الشيد بركة قد أقبل‬behold ,aman called the
sèiyid Bèraka came forward. Here we must supply the participle of
the verb hai to perceive ( or jus to see ), which is construed with
s, for instance,in the second of the above examples, ‫إذا أنا مش‬
as
‫بصوت عظيم‬. The same remark applies to ‫ كأن‬in such phrases its
‫ كانی بك ادنی‬it seemstomethat thou art trying to deceiveme;
saw theebeing let down into
B ‫ كأني بك تنحط إلى اللحي‬it is as if I suno
the grate, ‫ پی قد يا دريځ قضيت‬sus it is, 0 Darīḥ , as if thou
sawestme already dead [; ‫ أتى بك قتيلا‬methinks I see thee slain ;
‫و‬
.i.e ‫ كاتی مچش بك‬, or ‫گ‬it‫ر ب‬was
‫ أض‬sets.
‫ كاتی‬--From the idea of contact
there arises, in the case of a superior and inferior or primary and
secondary object, that of companionship and connection ; as ‫سار بأهله‬
) hesetoutwith hishousehold ; ‫ دخل عليه بثياب الشفر‬hecame into his
presence in his travelling dress ; ‫ اشترى الحمار بيجامه‬le bought the
ass together with its bridle ; [posong well, properly with well-being in
answer to the question ‫ كيف أصبحت‬hour do you do this morning ?[
Under this idea are figuratively represented the following relations :
( a ) The relation between subject and predicate, especially in
negative propositions; a8
as ‫ أليس الله بكاف عبده‬is not Gol suficient
Dior His sent ? ‫ تشت بعالم‬I donotkne; ‫ما ربك بظلام للعبيد‬
thy Lord will not deal wrongly with His servants ; mioyo o 6
they arenot believers; ‫وإن مدت الأيدى إلى الترا تم أكن بأعجيهم‬
and if hands are stretched out to food, I am not the quickest of them
)to do it(; ‫فن بی شفیقا يوم لا وشاعةبغير قتيلا عن واد بين قارب‬
and be an intercessor for me on the day when no (other) intercessor can
wail Sewūd'ibn Kärib in the least. An example of the rare use of
 159
$ 56] The Verb. - 3. Gov't of Verb.— (b ) Prepositions : y.

in afirmativepropositions is ‫ أولم يروا أن الله قادر على أن يحيى‬A

csc do they not see that God has power to bring the dead to life?
[ Comp. in Hebrew 708 ) X37 Job xxiii. 13. D. G. )
TY :

(6) The relation between the act and its object. (a) This is
always the case after intransitive verbs, as ‫ی‬sigan
‫ بش‬Jans he was stingy
w

of something, opposed to a crow he was liberal of it ;; [ovvisa

‫رر بوالده‬ju‫ بہ‬he
treated his father with flial piety ; ‫ قد أحسن بي إذ أخرجني من‬B
wedi he acted well towards me, when he brought me forth from the
prison ; jut a job he gave an order respecting him ,and accordingly
‫ بالثبا‬st
he was slain; ‫ت‬she os Los he prayed (God) to grant me
stedfastness]; especially such as indicate motion , e.g. ile, wat
to come, vás to go away, ēls,jw to depart,set out,ólí, vám to get
up, rise, has to be high, etc. These verbs are construed with and

the genitive of the thing, accompanied by, or in connection with , c

which one performs the act they denote ; and they must be translated
into English by transitive verbs. For example : avis opgang gusto
then bring (lit. come with) a sūra (chapter) like it ; Mojglavivivas
God took away (lit. went away with) their light; cançóló he upheld
the truth ; ‫ بأعباء المهمة‬vári
‫ نهض‬he took upon him the burden of the
w

government ; a hom he lifted it up on high ; [oz isto bring thou him ,

$ 59 , rem. a). (B ) The same construction is also employed with D
transitive verbs, not only when they signify motion but in other cases
too, and the verbs must then be used absolutely *; as ons i
he sent them to me (lit. he performed the act of sending to me in
connection with, or by means of, them, using them as the objects
*
[ In many cases this construction is the consequence of the
6
omission of the proper object, e.g. with verbs signifying “to send”
without mention of the bearer of the message, etc. , with those that
signify “to throw ” without mention of the thing aimed at, etc. D. G. ]
 160 PART THIRD . - Syntax. [$ 56

A through which he realized that act ; omną säg he shot the arrow
‫ه إليه‬oras
( from the bow ); ang ‫ بيد‬sãvi he gave himself up, or surrendered
himself,to him ; ‫ شود المحاجر لا يقرأن بالشور‬dark-eyed (acomen),arho
do not read the sūras (the Ķor’ân). This happens particularly when
the transitive verb is used in a figurative sense , and the preposition
is then called ‫ باء المجاز‬the figurative ‫ زپ‬as ‫ كسر العصا‬hebroke the
stick , but ‫ كربقلبي‬hehas broken myheart [alongwith ‫;[ كسر قلبي‬
B ]‫ جبر العظم‬he set thebone
‫ جبر‬, but ‫ جبر بقلبي‬he has comforted myheart
(along with slimo. Likewise, cliui
slivo suihe
slái raised the building,
but ‫ أشاد بذكره‬heraisedhisfameas wellas ‫جذب الحبل ;;أشاد ;وره‬
he drew or pulled the cord, but sea vie he rendered his name
famous more generally used than demo vio] The relation of the
acts of breaking and setting to their objects, in a tropical or spiritual
sense, may be expressed by a prepositional exponent, as being a less
C immediate relation than when they are used in their ordinary material
sense.

(c) The relation between the act and the instrument with which,
the means by which, or the reason why, it is performed ; as ‫كتبت‬
‫ بالقلم‬Iwrote soith the reed-pen ; ‫ قتله بالشيف‬heslemo him arith the
saccord ; ‫ يرزقه الله الصبر ببركة دعائه‬God will grant him patience
‫بتوفيق الله‬
through the solutury power of prayer to Him ; Sementara att
D by God's help I have performed the pilgrimage (to Mekka ); million
OW

‫من الذين هادوا منا عليهم طيبات أجل تهم وبصيرهم عن سبيل‬
mais ati and because of wrong done by those who were Jews,we have
forbidden them good things, which were allowed them (before), and
because of their turning away many (men ) from the path of God ;
‫ فبما نقضهم ميثاقهم تعناهم‬herefore,because of their breaking their
covenant, we have cursed them (6 redundant, see $ 49 , f ).- Connected
>
$ 56] The Verb.—3. Gov't of Verb.—(b) Prepositions : Y 161

herewith is the use of Y with surnames, etc., after his to be known ; A

as also after ses to be enough, to suffice, with the person or thing
that sufices or is enough for one ; . ‫حسن بن علي المعروف‬
slavenou Hasan 'ibn 'Ali, known by the name of El-Marjīnānī;
‫ » قرية تعرف بقوى‬vilage knourn by thename of Bahua; ‫كفى بالله‬
a

‫ شهيدا‬God suficeth asawitness* ; ‫في بئة العثم داعيا وباعايعاقل‬

the pleasure of knowledge is a sufficient motive and incentive to a B
sensible man. [Comp. § 49, c.] The price of any article is also
2

expressed by the preposition after verbs signifying to buy, pay , etc. ,

>

as being the instrumental means with which the act is performed ; e.g.
‫ه‬

‫ اشترى قلها بدهيم‬he boughta reed-pen for a dirham ; ‫بعت الثوب منه‬
ylsy I sold the piece ofcloth ( or the garment) to him (see $ 48, c) for a
dinār ; wante van gesing and they sold him for an insufficient (or
‫مهر‬

trading) price ; ‫ اشتروا الضلالة بالی‬they have purchased error at

the price of truth ; úgitigiis on la miatheirs is a painful c
punishment, for having deemed (the prophet) a liar (igis kopa opaoc );
‫ قلت لي بهم قوما إذا كبوا شنوا الإعارة فرساناوبانا‬acould then
that I had, instead of them , a tribe who, when they ride ( forth ), pour
down (on their enemies) from every side, mounted on horses and camels
Come at the price of them, in exchange for them ,= o ).—[Hence its
use after verbs signifying to kill, slay, etc. in the sense of in retaliation
*
[In this and the following example the preposition is said to D
be redundant after csés in order to emphasize the relation between
subject and predicate, aví being the agent (comp. Bèidāvī i. 211,
1. 21 seq ., ii. 226, 1. 2 seq ., Abu Zeid, Nawadir, 204, 1. 3 seq. ). In like
manner it is said to be redundant before the predicate in ij slaman
Zèid is a person sufficing thee. It is better, however, to take cás
as containing its subject in itself, viz. åts , and thus being used
impersonally ( comp. Fleischer, K7. Schr. i. 199, Anm . 2, 374). D. G.)
]
W. II . 21
 162 PART THIRD . — Syntax. [$ 56

A for, as an equivalentfor, as wesing or‫ به‬the certainly, a chief of

your tribe will be killed in retaliation for him ; yals je eencontact
be thou slain as an equivalent for the thong of Kolèil's sandal.]
REM . a.
In such phrasesas ‫ بأبي أنت وأمی‬thou art as dear
to me as my father and mother, assg is wat dear to me as my
father is one whom I love, the preposition depends upon the word
‫ ممن‬ransomed ,,or sus may he be ransomed, which is understood,
B
‫فددیى‬és
and the literal meaning is : thou art to be, or shalt be, ransomed with
my father and mother, may one whom I love be ransomed with my
father. This is called by the grammarians a maiat the which
expresses ransom; but it is in reality the basiſ ac or y of price,
as used after sal eú, etc. (see above,, no.c, at the end). In
the same way are used ‫ نفسي‬and ‫ی‬th e-
‫بروح‬. Observe also
phrase ‫] فيها ونغث‬or simply ‫ (قبها‬good and well, as ‫إن أجبت‬
с
Sveing home sebig if thou consentest and obeyest, good and well ;
‫ من توا يلجمعة فبها ونعمت‬if one performs the toula ' for the
Friday, good and well. This is explained, by an ellipse, as equi
valent to ‫بهذه الفعلة أو الخصلة ينال الفضل ونعمت الفعدة أو‬
iso ákvájí by this act or practice is excellence attained, and good
is the act or practice. Others regard to as equivalent to ‫ك بها‬jules,
‫فعلي‬
ales,etc., keep thou to it, let him keep to it,etc. (see $ 59,
Ꭰ . rem .aa ); and other words, such as á innes the practice of the Prophet,
or
ás the ordinance of indulgence, may be supplied according
to circumstances.

REM.b. In phrases like) ‫ مات قبل البي بقليل (بيسير‬hedied a

littlebeforethe Prophet, ‫ قدم بعد ذلك بشهرين وأيام‬he arrived tuto
months and some days after this, Y is the of measure, and quite
different in meaning from the aecusative of time how long : vila
‫قبل يومين‬ means he travelled for two days before me, profectus est
56] The Verb. - 3. Gov't of Verb.-- ( b) Prepositions : 163

biduum ante me, Germ . er reiste zwei Tage lang vor mir, but A
weregoing some job , he started two days before me, profectus est
biduo ante me, Germ . er reiste zwei Tage vor mir ab. Observe
that Y with its genitive must in this case always be placed after

‫قبل‬, ‫بعد‬, .etc

REM . C. The preposition without is expressed in Arabic by
‫ بلا‬and ‫ بغیر‬more rarely by ‫ من غير‬and ‫بدون‬, as well as the
simple ‫) دون‬$ 69 , (. ‫ بلا‬can be used only with an indefinite
‫بل[ابدعوذنب كن‬with‫طان‬one
substantive, ‫] بغير‬and ‫من غير‬,, as also ‫ه درون‬and ‫ سل‬B
which is either definite or indefinite ; as
vis
‫ بلا‬a ruler without justice is like a river without water ; ‫چنت‬
To bi
‫ بلا زاد‬thoneart comesoithout (bringing any) provisions; ‫بغیر ضرورة‬
without necessity ; ‫ بغیر الحق‬unjustly ; ‫ من غير خلاف‬soithout
controversy : ‫غير سيف ودم مهراق‬.voithout
‫من‬ soord and bloodshed
Comparein Hebrew ‫בְּלֹא‬, ‫ן‬, ‫בִּבְלִי בְּאֵי‬ С

[Rem. d. Observe the phrases sich us! L's who will be re

sponsible to me for such a thing ? (where we must supply joló);
‫ أنا بها‬I have done it (where may be supplied (; ‫;ن(حننی بالله‬
‫ تم بك‬we put our trust in God, then in thee (suppl. szés or

liś jis is how wilt thou be, when such a thing is the
case? The ‫ ب‬in ‫ بسم الله‬denotes according to some the aid or
instrument; others say that we ought to supply sami I begin D
‫مه‬

with the name of God. In the expressions wij was I met

in Zèid the lion, etc. y is the equivalent of jo, see § 48, h. On
the expressions‫ هوأبفعضيلنهبزي‬or ‫ بنفسه‬see § 139. On the use of y in

the formula e iasi see Vol. i. $ 184 and rem. a.] .

REM . e. The grammarians denote the various uses of Y by

saying that it is used ‫ پلإلصاق‬to empress adhesion ; ‫ الظرفية‬tine

 164 PART THIRD . — Syntax. [$ 57
A
and place; ‫ةيلقي‬snearing
‫ المصاحبة ; يلعبري‬or ‫للملابس‬, companionship
and connection ; awatu,or ‫ق‬Játs,to
‫ي‬, render an (intransitive) verb
transitive; astean bu to indicate the instrument of whose aid we
avail ourselves ; ‫ة‬abomnibus,or
‫للسببي‬, ‫الليل‬, to express the reason or cause ;
Juletu ;

and ‫پلمقابلة التعويض‬, or ‫اللثثممينن‬, to state therecompense, equivalent,

or price givenfor anything.
B 57. és ( rarely 2ó) with, along with,indicates association and
connection in time or place )‫ ;(مكان الإصطحاب أو وقته‬A5 ‫از معی‬
he traveled with me;; ‫ جلس معه‬he sat with him ; ‫چك مع طلوع‬
‫ الشمس‬I cameto thee aith the rising of the sun ; ] ‫ مع الايام‬continually
‫و‬

)prop.along with thedays([; ‫ لا يصح الرفد مع الجهل‬devotion cannot

bereal along with is incompatible with )ignorance ; ‫مع تكرار ما تقدم‬
C dis with the repetition of that portion of it which went before ( repeating
‫م‬at
‫عك‬the
‫م‬ sametime what had been done before(; ‫قریشی نعم وهوای‬
ences and my substance is from you and my love is with you .. Hence
it is used to show that a person possesses something or has got it with
him ; as ‫ممححببررةة‬ ‫ هل معك‬hast thou got an inkbottle toith thee ? ‫ما معي‬
‫ دينار ولا درهم‬I have neither dinar nor dirham neither gold nor silver(
by me. ]Hence ‫ معنا‬according to our opinion , like ‫عندنا‬.-

D Sometimesit signifies in addition to,besides; as ‫ مع نمونه غريبا‬in

addition to his being (besides his being) a stranger . - More frequently
it meansnotuithstanding ,despite,,although ; as ‫ تل مع شجاعته‬despite
his bravery he eas killed ;; ‫تم يكن أحد أفطن من الرسول ومع ذلك‬
n
‫ أمر بالمشاو‬one aasmore
‫رة‬- clear-sighted thano
the Apostle (Muham
mad ), and notwithstanding this, he was ordered to consult (others) ;
‫ عجز عن هدم الأهرام مع أن الهدم أسهل من البناء‬hetas unable to
destroy the pyramids, although it is easier to destroy than to build
(compare in English withal ; in Heb. , by , e.g. Nehem . v. 18, ‫ וְעִם־זֶה‬,
$ 58] The Verb . - 3 . Gov't of Verb.— ( b ) Prepositions : &- 165

and ? ,e.g. Job i. 22,nar-ban, Deut. i.32, ‫ה‬717

ֶּ‫ הַז‬2729,, Num .. AA
xiv. 11 , nink:7 557; and in Pers., V and noong 6).— Lastly, és
is used in comparisons, and must then be translated into English by
compared to, in comparison with ; as ‫ وتد‬aro justájí compared with
him el- Hadir, or el-Hadr (Elias, the wandering Jew of the Mu
ḥammadans), is a tent-peg, i.e. fixed and motionless , an expression
used of one who leads an unsettled vagabond life.
Rem. ‫ع‬Es‫ م‬is, as the Arab grammarians remark, properly the
accusative of a noun, signifying association , connexion ; see Vol. i. B
$ 359. The expression aes is ons , I went away from beside
him , is recorded by Sībaweih.—To it corresponds in Hebrew Oy , >

in Syriac sa's .
.58 ‫) تدن‬with sufixes ‫تنی‬,‫تا‬, ‫ ( دند‬or ‫تدی‬, also written
‫) تدا‬with suffixes ‫تدى‬, ‫ دية‬,, ‫)(قديه‬, is aa comparatively rare word ,
signifying beside, near, at or by, in the possession of (Lat. apud ,
Fr. chez
‫حن;ا)جر‬as‫اتلبدایب ال‬ ‫ والفيا سيدها تا‬and they found her lord at the C
door ; jakis sú vylür 3sy when (their) hearts shall be in (their)
throats ;‫ إعتقد أن النار أفضل الأشياء التي تديه‬he believed that fire
was the most excellent of the things which were in his possession.
Rem . a .
e chiefly occurs in composition with Lvo (see $ 70),
and, like that preposition ,is used ‫بتداء الغاية في ماين أو مكاني‬b‫ا‬e
to denote the commencement of the limit in place or time. It may
connected with a proposition, as ‫ وتذكر ماه تن أنت يافع‬and D
thou art mindful of His benefits since thou art grown up ; (Islas
‫ رانی ضرني أن شنتنی تن أن نشأنا‬and tolat,thinkest thon , did
it harm me that thou hatedst me since we grew up ?] — When con
nected with the word ogvé morning, it usually takes it in the
accus., as we ögis
‫ نث‬cogie
‫ غروب‬ses from morning till it(the sun)
was near setting, though ogó is admissible. The former construc
 166 PART THIRD - Syntada . [$ 59
A .t an ellipse, viz ‫دوة‬n
is explained byio ‫ هتن كانت الساعة غ‬ince
the hour, or time, was morning. If another word be connected
with ögus, it may be put either in the accus. or the genit., as
‫ تدن غدوة وعشية‬from morning and evening. Some grammarians
admit the nominative likewise, ‫تدن غدوة‬, by an ellipse of ‫ كان‬,
.viz ‫دن كانت غدوة‬
Rem. b.b. Sú differs from his (s 66) in being restricted to
B material objects which are actually with, or on the person of, the
speaker [or the person spoken of]. You say ‫هذا القول عندي صواب‬
this assertion is right in my opinions; ‫ عند فلان علم به‬So-and-80
knotes about it ; not ‫لی‬and ‫تددىی فلان‬. And again you say
jíó suis, I have money, whether it be about your person or not,
] ‫ تدن‬s ‫تدى مال‬
wherea means that you actually have it about you.
can never form the predicate of a nominal sentence. One
C may say ‫ تدينا زید‬Zeidt is neith us, but not ‫تدنا زید‬.

.59 ‫) على‬with pronominal suffixes ‫ على‬, ‫علية‬, ‫ (عليه‬over, love,

upon , is used :

)‫بلاستعلاء‬, to denote higher elevation (;

( a ) In its original local sense (
as
‫ زيد على السطح‬Zaid is on the roof'; ‫قابلت توه على حائط‬
D and it (the pigeon )began to hocer over acall; ‫وجد إنسانا على الطريق‬
he founda person upon theroad ; ‫ نظر على الحائط صورة رجل‬hestan
on the wall the figure of a man ; ‫ على ثياب قطني‬I had on cotton
clothes ; ‫ فاذا استويت أنت ومن معك على الفلك‬and when thou ,, and
they who are with thee, are safe on board the ship. The same sense is
further exemplified in : ‫ جلس على المائدة‬he sat at the table (because
a person sitting at table rises above the level of it ( ; ‫وقف على النهر‬
$ 59] The Verb. —-3. Gov't of Verb.— ( b) Prepositions : cotó. 167
‫ داره‬ve
he stood by the ricer ; oyla
2
‫ باب‬stá
Lotc ves he sat at the door of his A
house ; yzo wowoty cats išg he stood by the head of So-and -so ;
‫ في وقت شهوته في الوقوف على خصائص أعضاء الحيوان‬at the time
when he was very eager to investigate the peculiarities of the limbs of
animals ; )[‫ القرية على اثني عشر ميلا من الفسطاط‬the village is
situated at a distance of 12 milesfrom Ol-Fostāt
el ]; als jó, or atá les
he passed by him ; ‫ن الحجاج أميرا على العراق‬B-
‫ كا‬Iraginajarms
emīr (or governor) of el-'Irāk ; si stá ejus he contemplated or
examined something ; ' cotó ! he became acquainted with,or
acquired a knowledge of, something; ato trys, either he (the pupil)
read (a book) before him (the teacher ), studied under him, or he (the
teacher) read (a book) to him (the pupil) i opta culundi nú he read the
letter to them ; ‫ محمر‬stá
‫ بدأ بكتاب الشلوة على‬he began the book of cC
( canonical) prayer before Muḥammad , began to read it under him as
his instructor. Similarly in the phrases : (wala) qui se he ( she)
:

fainted (lit. there was a covering of darkness over him or her); ‫ى‬soit
‫أغم‬
.do: )‫ مغشي ععليه (علیها‬in a faint: ‫ سلام عليهه‬peace be upon
‫ عليه‬.;
you ! ali avi‫ة‬am
‫م‬
God's mercy be upon him (may God have mercy
on him).
(6) In a hostile sense, in which case it can generally be rendered by D
against or upon ; as als
gitá ‫ج‬e‫ر‬já‫ خ‬he went out against him (with an army),
he rebelled against him ; ‫ دعا عليه‬he cursed him , $ 23 ; ‫ قضى عليه‬he
pronounced a (legalorother) decision against him, as opposed to fái];
‫ هجم عليه‬he rushed upon him ; autó üsti therefore give aid against
him ; ‫ ينبغي أن يصبر على البحين‬hemust bear his troublespatiently
)lit. must exercise patience against them (; ‫يلا يكون عقله وعلمه‬
‫ مج‬that his intelligence and his knowledge may not become an
ac ‫له‬deme
 168 PART THIRD .-Syntax. [$ 59

A argument against him ; ‫ الفقه معرة النفي ما تها وما عليها‬learning

is the souls cognizance of what is for its good and for its hurt (see
$ 53, b, y). Similarly in the phrases : Lista Comé) és difficult
for me, opposed to ‫ سهل يسيرر) على‬easy for me; ‫ عزيز على‬difficult
for me, but also dear to me, opposed in both senses to isto ‫هين‬to;;
‫على‬ hidden from me, obscure to me,opposed to sto se to clear
B to me . It is therefore construed with verbs signifying to be angry
with and to incite or instigate ; as ‫ه‬atá
‫ علي‬vit
‫ عتب‬he was angry with him ;
‫ تم عمه خطا عليه‬he did not speak to him out of anger arith him
[and als só, he was content with him, as opposed to al Sam'];
atá ‫ب‬ulici
‫ العن‬sãii he urged on the dog against him, set the dog at or
upon him (w would mean he made the dog attach itself to him).
Frequently, however, when construed with these latter verbs, it does
C not imply a hostile movement against an object, but merely motion
towards it to get possession of it or do it* ; e.g. Jeni coté laji
arging or inciting to action ; ‫خاطبوة محرضين إياه على تصنيف كتاب‬
they talked to him, urging him to compose a book ; borders
‫ الإنسان على الخير‬concern for the life to come induces man to do well

)lit . carries him touards good(; ‫ما حملك على هذه الدعوى الباطلة‬
D what induced you to set up this empty claint Hence too voja ,
to be greedy or covetous, and its derivatives vejo, greed, and vaja,
greedy, are construed with ris and the genitive of the thing
coveted. -- The phrase ubi cotó tás, to go in to one,is used when
* [Hence we can decide only by the context whether atá lyéria
and similar expressions are to be translated by they collected themselves
‫ الشي‬stá
against him or to him . Similarly ‫ء‬stáva ‫ على‬ali may signify he
helped him to avert the thing or to accomplish it.]
$ 59] The Verb.—- 3. Gov't of Verb.— ( b) Prepositions : cská. 169
the person sought is in his house or room , so that we actually find A
him ; y lo si las merely means to go into one's house or room.
(c) Of a debt which one owes, and a duty which is incumbent
upon one ;; as is atá he owes a debt, opposed to us as aa debt is
‫ علي‬s
due to him ; ukis ‫ك‬stc ‫ لی‬thou owest me two dinārs (see $ 53,6,
,b
.rem)(; ‫ طلب العنيد قرية على [ ميم‬the search after knowledge
is un ordinance for every Muslim (every Muslim is bound by divine
command to seek after knowledge); lío jest i slut it is incumbent B
upon thee to do this, thou must do this ; ‫عليك أن تتحوز عن الغيبة‬
thou must refrain from slander or backbiting. [Hence it is employed
with verbs signifying to decree, to make incumbent or unavoidable, as
csás, bé Cai, Lá, etc.]
(d) of the advantage, superiority, or distinction, which one
person or thing enjoys over another; as ‫قضت آدم على الملائكة‬
Adam's superiority over the angels ; ‫الذين يحبون الحيوة الدنيا‬
os stá who love the present life more than the life to come ; C
ou cotó (özlel) just hepreferred it to the rest, selected it in preference
to the others.
(e) of the condition in which any one is in respect to religion,
trade or profession, health, fortune, mental or bodily gifts, etc.
(properly, the ground or basis on which he stands in these respects).
For example : Saló is coté lõí people follow, or conform to,
the religion of their kings; i‫ا قالت اليهود ليست النصارى على شئ‬D
the Jews say, The Christians are not ( grounded) upon anything, have
nothing to stand upon ; ‫ كان على دين المسيح‬he followed thereligion
of the Messiah ; ‫ تم يجد أمرا على خلاف ما كان يعتقده‬he found
nothing contrary to achat he believed ; ‫سواء كانت على صورة إنساني‬
Lő mi no matter whether they be endowed with human form or not;
‫عشق قينه على أوفر ما يكون من الجمال والمعرفة بالغناء والضرب‬
W. II . 22
 170 PART THIRD.Syntas. [S 59

A he loved a slave-girl, endowed with the highest degree both of beauty

and of knowledge of singing and instrumental music ; ‫اسم الجنس‬
‫ على ضربين اسم عين واسم معنى‬thecommon noun is divisible into
two classes ; (it is) a noun denoting a concrete object, or a noun
denoting an abstract idea]; atá út ús the state or condition in which
I am ;
‫ كنت على أن أجيب داعى الأمير‬I was going tocomplywith
)the orders )
of the enmar'smessenger ; ‫ وكأس شربت على تة‬many
B a cup have I quated with delight ; ‫ودخل المدينة على حين غفلة‬
‫ من أهيها‬and he entered the city at a timethen its inhabitants arere
of their guard ; ‫على ضروف الدهر‬, or ‫على الحالات‬,amid the changes,
or oicissitudes, of timeor fortune; ‫ى التأبيد‬.always
‫عل‬ , continuously
( f) Of the ground on which, the cause or reason why, one does
a thing ; as ‫ أخذه عليها ما لا يميله‬heacasseizedwith a passion for
her which he could not restrain (lit. there seized him on her account
c somethingwhich hecould not master(; ‫ الحمد لله على ما صنع‬praise
belongs to God for that He has done ; ‫ يعاتبه على ترك المهاداة‬he
reproached him for having neglected to send him a present in return ;
‫ وتبروا الله على ما هديكم‬and that ye glorif God for having guided
‫اععةلىعلأىي وجشوهيهءماأعأطليفكديمنالری وأ;كثر‬achny
you ‫والخ‬you‫ية‬my
‫ير صن‬am‫ن غ‬I‫ ع‬to‫ادم‬give ‫?ت ا‬
‫لجار‬money
a slave, whether female or male, fetches, without taking account of any
D accomplishments they may possess, only for their faces, a thousand
‫شر‬

dinars and more[; ‫ جاء على أنه ملك‬he came, on the ground of his
being a king ; ‫ أتى باب الميك على أنه أخته‬hecameto theking's gate,
‫ه‬
pretending to be his sister : ‫ لا أسألم عليه ما‬I do not ask you for
.money one that account (scil ‫ بناء عليه‬buildingupon it, or ‫معتمدا عليه‬
relving on it); particularly in the common phrase ‫بناء على أن‬
building upon , reckoning or relying upon , such and such a thing.
$ 59[ The Verb.3. Gov't of Verb (b ) Prepositions: ‫ علی‬171
(g) of the terms or conditions, as the ground or basis, on which A
anything is done ; as ‫ على هذا الشرط‬on this condition ; ‫أجابهم إلى‬
‫ ذلك على أن يدوه بالسلاح‬heconsentedto this proposal of theira,
on condition that they should aid him (by providing him) with weapons ;
‫ صالحه على ألف‬he made peace aith him on (the condition that he
should pay him) a thousand dirhams.
(h) In saying that one thing happens in spite of or notwith- B
standing another thing, which might have prevented it ; as ‫أعذبة‬
‫ على كبر سنك‬I will punish thee,notwithstanding thy great age
)lit. in thy state of great age,see f'(; ‫ قتل أساعلى صغر سته‬he slet
aa lion ,nottoithstanding his extreme youth ;; ‫الخيل تجري على مساويها‬
horses run, notwithstanding their vices, or diseases ; gű saj 6
‫ مغفرة إلا على ظلمهم‬verily thy Lord ismercifulunto men,despite
.their
trong-doing (compare , Job x. 7, xvi 17(; ] ‫و فيها على الأين‬
ju; she can gallop in spite of her fatigue. R. S.]
( i) Of the rule or standard according to which something is
done ; as ‫ على هذه الطريقة‬after thismanner ; ‫على نسبة محفوظة‬
according to a duly observed proportion ; ‫على ما رأيت في الكتب‬
according to what I have seen ( stated ) in books ; obćá to stá
according to what he related. [Hence its construction with the verbs D
22

that signity to fitshion , to mould )‫جبل‬, ‫ طبع‬, ‫قطر‬, ‫ (ضرب‬19 ‫جبلت‬

as

‫ القلوب على حب من أحسن إليها وبغض من أساء إليها‬hearts are

created with 0a tendency to love him who does good to them and to hate
him noho doesevil to them ; ‫ و» يحمل اللفظ على نقيضه‬apord is made to
accord in form with its contrary in meaning. D. G. )
( j ) of the thing of which we speak, which forms, as it were, the
basis of our conversation (compare super, Germ . über ) ; as ‫قال على‬
 172 Part THIRD.—Syntax. [$ 59

‫توتون‬of
A sus he said concerning this, on this matter ; ó atí atá igézés
úgótér ý or do ye say concerning (or of) God what ye know not ?
[ (k) of a person who is excluded or thrust back (comp. uss,
$ 69, (, as ‫ تولوا عليهم هذا الأمر‬make yourselves masters of this
business over their heuds, excluding them ( Tab. i. 1841 , l. 13, 1842,
.1 10, 13(; ‫ أرعی سائر بلاد التربة الناس على بني ثعلبة‬hemade the
whole land of er- Rabada public pasture ground, without taking notice
B ofthe claims ofthe Benü Ta'labu ( Tab. i.1879, 1.6) ; btc wilde ‫أجير‬
dost thou grant protection to our enemy in spite (defiance) of us ? D. G. ]
REM. a.
Observe the following phrases : a sto fetch him to
me,scil . Iglési or some similar word (see b, at the end) ; why słó
woelig (it is) upon the head and eye, i.e. it shall be done most
aoillingly and promptly ; ‫ على الريق‬on an empty stomach, fasting
)lit. on the saliva (; ‫ علی جین ( عهد مملك) لاڼ‬in the time, or
с reign, of So-and-so ; (ou ) a stá, or simply autá, by his means,
through him ,as ‫ واتنا ما وعدتنا على شيك‬and give us molat Thou
hast promised us by Thy apostles, augu's islas coté ciś He said it
bythemouth (lit. tongue)of His apostle* ; )‫ لا عليك‬for ‫لا بأس عليك‬
there is nofearfor thee ($ 39, d ,rem . a), jest o smlo ý do what
thon likest];andtheadjarations ‫بحياتي عليك بالله عليك‬, Iimplore
thee by God , by my life ( to do so and so ), which are usually followed
D by the particle w for 1), lit., this oath with all its consequences
be upon you, if you do not do so and so.—The phrase lúj vilá,
seize Zeid, has already been mentioned in $ 35, 6, 8, rem . 6. In this
sense site is also construed with the preposition [$ 56, 6) ; as
‫ عليكم بالرجال‬attack thosemen, ‫ عليكم باليمامة‬invade al-Yemama ;
) ‫ن بالرفق‬
‫ايك‬
‫ عل‬keep thon to gentleness[.
* lub blind cotó often signifies under somebody's name,, i.e. falsely
ascribed to him . D. G.]
 ‫ منذ‬. 173
$ 61 ] The Verb. - 3. Gov't of Verb.-( b) Prepositions : to

Rem. b. As being originally a substantive, síc may take the A

a

preposition is before it, clé is from of" (lit. from upon, Heb.
‫; ( מעל‬ ‫ نزل من على فرسه‬he dismounted from his horse ;;
as ‫سه‬

‫ قفز من على ܘظهܐره‬hesprayfrom of itsback ; ‫تحدث من عليه بعد‬

convertido she (the bird called katā) left it (her young or her nest)
in the morniny, after her time of abstinence from water was at an
end (when she could no longer abstain from drinking); cotéis eji
‫ اليمين وأنا من على المال‬thout on the righthand and I on the B
left.

60. To these three classes of prepositions may be added

or ‫ مذ‬since, ‫و‬5 and 6 by ( in swearing), and i like, as.
61. is is derived, by assimilation of the first vowel, from
eo and gś ( see Vol.i. $ 340, with rem .c, and $ 347, with the rem. 6 C
and e,and compare the phrase jo sing seni that he may return
to his former condition). It is contracted into es, which usually
becomes in the wasl ús (see Vol. i. $ 20, d and $ 358, i). These
words signify from which time, and may be construed with the
nominative as well as the genitive, the latter being more particularly
used when a yet unexpired period of time is spoken of*. For

* ( Theoretically ‫مند‬sor
条
is construed with a definite noun of D
time in the nominative to designate the terminus a quo, as som ‫من‬
dendul since it was Friday, i.e. since last Friday ; with an undefined
noun of time in the nominative, when the expired period is spoken of,
as
es is it is a year since ; with a defined noun of time in the geni
tive to mark a yet unexpired period, as seguintes
‫ اليوم‬do ‫ منذ‬since the beginning
of this day, i.e. to -day. But in course of time THE CONSTRUCTION WITH
THE GENITIVE PREVAILED IN ALL CASES. Comp. Fleischer, Kl. Schr.
i . 4084-411, ii. 100 seq.]
 174 PART THIRD.Syntas. [$ 61

A example : ‫ ما رأيته من يوم الجمعة‬I have not seen him since last
‫ن أذوليوممانن أم‬for‫ل م‬the‫ أو‬last
Friday (lit. the terminus a quo is Friday ),‫س‬or ‫من‬
two days,or jöf óló és since last year, or working
since the day before the day before yesterday ; ‫من أنتصاف الليل‬
‫ إلى وقت الزوال‬fim midnight till the timewhen the sun has passed
the meridian ; ‫ من أول الشهر إلى متصفه‬from the first of themonth
B to the middle of it ; ‫ألم تر مذ عاما أملاك صرنا يصيح بهم بلموت‬
costo dig hast thou not seen, for the last two years, the kings of
our timesummoned by fate to death and slaughter ? ‫أنا أعلم أنه جائع‬
‫ منذ خمسة أيام‬Iknow thathe hasbeen stroing for the lastfive days ;
‫ ما كلمه م شهرنا هذا‬I have not spoken to him since (thebeginning
of)thismonth ,or ‫ ذ يومنا‬, or ‫ اليوم‬.since
‫من‬, thismorning,to-day
C REM. a.
The lexicographers give the rare forms sis and is
-ýs may be pronounced in the wașl as is, and the forms
e
‫ تم‬also mentioned
‫ اليوم‬and ‫ اليوم‬.ar
.RES
.b ‫ ممند‬and · areused ‫ لإبداء الغاية في الماني‬to denote
the commencement of the limit in time, or, as it may be otherwise
‫ہر‬ ‫كنم و‬

expressed, to denote ‫ الأمد‬the starting-point, or ‫أول المدة‬-the

con
‫مهر ش‬
D mencement of the period, and our come the whole ofthe period .
REM . C. ‫ من‬and is never take a pronominal suffix, and
is
cannot be joined with any substantives but those which denote
time. They may , however, be directly connected with propositions ;
as
‫ ما رأيته من خلق‬I have not seen him since hetax born , or
‫ من كل القوم‬since thetribe departed ; ‫قد عشتها مصطحبين من‬
‫ كناصغيرين‬yetoohave lived as companions since yewerelittle;
‫ لم ينسنی دكه م ته لاقت عيش‬nolife (however comfortable(
§ 62] The Verb . — 3. Gov't of Verb.— ( b) Prepositions : g, 5. 175
has made me forget you , since the time that I have not met you (since A
Ino longermeetyou (; ‫ ما زال مد ممدث يداه إزاره قسما‬hehas not
ceased to be handsome from the day his hands fastened his robe ;
‫ ما زلت أبغى المال م أنا يافع‬I have not ceased to seek after
wealth from the time I grew up.
REM. d . The Bėdawin use ‫ من‬instead of ‫منذ‬, as ‫م = من سنة‬
‫س‬.
‫نة‬.Co mpa
the Kor'an ,ix re
109, ‫أسس على التقوى من أول يوم‬
which was founded upon the fear of God from the first day. B

62. The particle s, which is frequently used in swearing, is

construed with the genitive of the object sworn by ; as ‫ والله‬tn God !
awei yg by the Lord of the Ka'ba (the mosque of Mèkka) ! This
9 is employed , however, only when a substantive follows, and the
verb of swearing is omitted ; before a pronominal suffix, as well as
when the verb is expressed, the preposition must be used ( see $ 56). C
Sometimes the particle ;G is prefixed to ś, as ‫ه‬atigi
‫ فوالل‬by God then !–
The particle Ś (the origin of which is very obscure [comp. Vol. i.
$ 356, b, footnote]) is construed like ,, but is seldom used except in
the oath atc by God ! Other examples mentioned by the gram
marians are : ‫ رب الكعبة‬by theLord of theKa'ba, ‫ تربی‬by my Lord ,
‫ تالرحمن‬buy the Compassionate,and ‫حيات‬.by
‫ ت‬thylife
REM. a. The oath ) ‫(القسم‬, whether expressed by ‫و ب‬, or Ó,, D
requires a complement Comasi visé ), of which the following are
the principal conditions.. If the complement be an affirmative
nominal proposition de notre ale , it is introduced by J, as

‫ والله محمد رسوله‬by God , terily Maltammad is Iris apostle : or

by ‫إ‬,as ‫والله إنن محمدا رسوله‬, in which case
case may be prefixed
to the predicate, as ‫والله إن محمدا ترشوله‬. If the complement
 176 PART THIRD . - Syntax. [$ 63

A be an affirmative verbal proposition )‫( جملة فعلية مثبتة‬, with the

verb in the perfect,it requires ‫لقد‬, as
‫ والله نقد ملك أبو جهل‬by
God, 'Abu Gahl is dead indeed ; but if the verb be in the imperfect,
it takes the energetic form , with prefixed, as ‫ والله فعدت‬by
God , I will do it ! (see
[. $ 19, a]. If the complement be negative, no
particleis prefixed to the ordinary negatives ‫ ما‬and ; as ‫والله ما‬
B ‫ محمد كاذب‬by God ,Muhammad is not a liar ; ‫والله ما غذب‬
‫ محمد‬by God ,Muhammad hasnot lied; ‫ والله لا يهيك المومن‬tyby
God , the believer shall not perish ! [On the oath preceding con
ditional sentences, see § 17, c, rem . a, ( 1 ).]
REM. .b. In such phrases as ‫ من الرب لأفعلن‬by the Lord , 1
anill do it ! ‫من بی‬ or
‫ بين ربی‬bymyLord! ‫من الله مين الله‬
‫من الله‬, and ‫ ه الله‬by God !the words ‫ من‬and a areabbreviations
C of voi oaths (see Vol. i. $ 19, rem. b), which is contracted in
various other ways. Some grammarians,however, regard ‫ من‬and
‫ من‬in ‫ من بی‬as being really the preposition ‫) من‬$3 48(.
63. Among the prepositions is usually reckoned j as,
, like.
This is, however, not a preposition, but a substantive, synonymous
with jg likeness. It is formally undeveloped (like gá), but may
stand in any case as lá,, or governing word , to a following noun
2.
D in the genitive (see 373 ); a8 ‫ وعلى رأسه كالقلنسوة‬and on the top
( pillar ) is (something ) like a pointed cap ,= ‫مثل القلنسوة‬
of it (the
‫ لن ينهي دوی شطط كالطغي‬nothinghinders oppressors (oracrongers(
like aa lance-thrust
- ‫ر ضعی‬joslas
; ‫ف‬viro ‫إتنك لتمه يفخر عليك كفا‬ no one Crows

over thee like a feeble boaster (one who has little reason to boast) ;
‫ بنانشوانی‬aith (a horse) like a falcon (in speed( = ‫بمثل السوداني‬
‫ يحثن عن البرد المنهم‬they laugh so as to shot (teeth ) the
like
$ 63] The Verb. — 3. Gov't of Verb.— ( b) Prepositions : ý. 177

( white as hailstones(; ‫ تين في الشجرة العادية‬A

melting hailstones (as
C

any Solutions it makes in (at the footof) an aged tree (something)

like a cell, to which it resorts, i jo; want to join it puts
forth ( something) like two horns. The name of preposition can be
applied to it, at the most, only when it virtually stands in the
accusative, as a áso, adjective or relative adjectival clause, to an
infinitive which is understood ; as jó áron thou camest like Zờid,
.i.e ‫ جنت مجيئا كمجيء (مثل مجيء) زیر‬thou camest a coming B
like the coming of Zdid. Or we might regard it as being a jló,
or conditional expression, dependent upon the pronominal suffix of
the second pers. sing.. masc. in si as ‫ فاعل‬or agent; i.e. évi
) ‫ا گزیر (مثل زیر‬.thout
‫ گان‬camestbeinglike Zeid
Rem. a. j is ( frequently joined to the personal pronouns of
the 3d person , as is, srs , bars , etc., sometimes also to those of C
the 2d and 1st person, as ‫ أنا وأنت‬, but very rarely to a
w

pronominal suffix,, as ‫ولا ترى بعد ولا ممثلا قه ولا كقهن إلا‬
Bila and thou dost not see a husband or wives like him and like
them , save one who is jealous ; and equally rare is the use of the
redundant ‫ ما‬after it,as ‫وتعتم أنه كما الناس مجروم عليه وجاره‬
and we know that he is, like ( other) men , sinned against and sinning
)Cógle in rhyme for izló (). In Hebrew ‫ܩ‬D33 ‫בָּהֶם‬, or ‫ם‬079,
ܸ‫ ܕܕ‬and 279, ֶ‫בָּה‬, D
Ś is
are used ; but with the other pronominal sufixes 129 = us
always employed, as also occasionally before substantives.

Rem. 6. jj is sometimes used redundantly along with the

synonymous ‫ ;; مثل‬as ‫ كمثله ششئی‬-.t
‫ليس‬ her
isnoughtlike Hime
]On the compounds ‫ گم‬and ‫اين‬ see Vol. i. SS 351 , rem. , 353,
rem . e . On the elliptical phrase eius keep where thou art, see
W. II . 23
 178 PART THIRD. — Syntax. [$ 64

A the Gloss. to Tabarī. Sometimes is means as soon as, e.g.

‫كما تدخل‬.salate
‫سته‬ as soon as thout enterest. D. G [
Rem. c. ☺ is said by the grammarians to be used amenitie to
compare ( one object with another ).
.REM
] . a ‫ ما‬may be prefixed adverbially to a verbal clause,
like aty (5$ 84, rem. b)) and with just the same meaning,, as
‫ انتظرني كما آتيك وارقبني كما ألقى‬wait for me, perhape 1
B may come to thee, and look out for me, perhaps I may overtake thee ;
‫ قلت يشيبان آدن من بقائه كما تعتري القوم من شوائه‬I said
to Śèibān, try to draw near to him (the ostrich), perhaps thou
mayest procure a morning mealfor the men with his roastedflesh .]

64. Many words, which are obviously substantives in the accu

sative of place (see $ 44, b), may be conveniently regarded in a certain
en
as prepositions
.s ; e.gse
‫عند نحو‬, ‫بين قبل‬, ‫تحت‬, ‫فوق‬, and ‫ون‬
C .65 ‫) نحو‬the accusative of ‫نحو‬, the nomen verbi of ‫ تیما‬to go
towards ; comp. $ 82, g) means (a) towards a place, as it is morethan
‫ بیت المقدس‬then theywill journey toucards Jerusalem ; ‫خرج نحو مئة‬
he set out towards, or in the direction of, Mekka ; and (6) according
to,as ‫ نحو قوله‬according to his saying, ashe says(compare theuse of
‫ ل‬in $ 53, d (.

D 86. is (the accusative of His a side or quarter) signifies beside,

near, by ; as ‫ عند الحائط‬at,near thewall[;‫وكان يضع عنده دفاتر‬
and he used to lay notebooks beside him : ‫أن لا يبتدئ الكلام‬
‫ عنده إلا بإذنه‬and hemustnot commence to speak beforehim unless soith
his permission. Used of time, it shows that something is closely
connected with what took place at a particular time, by happening
either simultaneously or immediatelyafter ; a8 ‫ فقال عند موته‬and he
$ 66] The Verb . — 3. Govt of Verb.— (b) Prepositions: is 179

said as he was dying; ‫ك عند طلوع الشمس‬

‫ج‬ ‫ چ‬I came to thee at A
sunrise; sus is whilst this took place or immediately after this took
place, hereupon ; Lo íis whilst, during, or immediately after —
Further, is, like éó ($ 57),implies [a] possession and [b] comparison ;
as (a) iais ils sis üis to I had only a single dinār by me;
‫ ما عند الناس‬mohat the people have or possess ; ‫لا أقول تتم عندي‬
ati ulje I do not say to you, with me (known to me) are the hidden B
things of God ; )[‫ بي عند فلاني حاجة‬Iwant a thing of such aa one;;
lásmó is he possesses goodness and excellence. Hence you say
of a woman
yuló is Sols she was married to such a one, in which
signification itisa synonym of ‫) تحت‬$68(; )b( ‫على صغر سنه عند س‬
jlés notwithstanding his youth as compared with the age of Moʻad] ;
‫ موك الأرض عند الله تراب‬the kingsoftheearth are dust compared )
with (lit. at the side of ) God.— Lastly sis (like the Latin apud,
Fr. chez, and Persian sl) implies in one's mind, in his opinion ;
as
‫ الصواب عندي ما فعله مشايخنا‬the right thing in my opinion is
that our sheikhshave done ; ‫ كان عنده أن القرآن مخلوق‬his opinion
was that the Ķorān was created; aber ji jamaissiis according
to you it is impossible that He should do it.
REM , a . [Báis means keep where thou art, take care, and also D
advance.j - On the phrase ‫ ذ زيا= عندك زيدا‬, see $ 35, b, d,
rem . 6.—On the difference between his and
. ‫تد‬, see $ 58,
or ‫ی‬Sw,
rem , b .

Rem. 6. His is sometimes (in modern Arabic generally) pro

nounced is, rarely is. It corresponds in form to the Heb.
‫ עמרני‬, but in signification also to ‫עם‬.
 180 PART THIRD.-Syntas. [$ 67

REM. C.
A Nearly synonymous with his, in its local sense, is jus
)the accusative of ‫ قبل‬front), Lat. coran ,apud,penes, as ‫حاضر قبله‬
be
present before him ; äs ‫ !لي قبل‬have a I
‫فلان‬- claim upon So-and
80; ‫طعين‬ ‫ فما الذين كفروا قبتك‬and what (has come) to (for
w 6 ) the unbelievers that they run hastily around thee ? It
also signifies towards, as ‫ليس البر أن تولوا وجوهم قبل المشرق‬
jedi, piety does not consist in your turning your faces towards
B the east and the west.

67. , between, among, is the accusative of the substantive

esset, signifying intervening space, which may be regarded either as
uniting or as separating two or more objects, whence may be
construed with verbs of either meaning ; as long téce he united us,
eine he parted us, lit. he united our separation and parted our
‫ الل‬vui God has united your hearts. —— If two
‫ه بين ق‬att
C connection ; ‫م‬et‫لوبه‬les
genitives follow me , and either or each of them is a pronominal
suffix, the preposition must be repeated before the second, and the
conjunction ‫ و‬inserted ; as ‫ بيني وبينه‬bettreen me and him ; ‫بیگم‬
onthe ‫وبی‬ between you and your brother. But if both are sub
‫ژان وال‬done ; as ‫السماء والأرض‬in ‫ بين‬between
stantives, this is ;not‫ژها‬usually
heaven and earth ; hinding van ons between Harrān and ' ar -Ruhā
D (Edesst(; ‫ بين الطوفان وبين الهجرة‬between the Flood and the
Higra.-- Instead of the simple is, we often meet with us
ohat is between ,and ‫ فيما بين‬in what is between ; a8 ‫واللب ما بين‬
‫ قشریه‬and the kernel between its two shells : ‫ افتتلوا فيما بينهم‬they
foughtnoith each other ; ] ‫ بین الايام‬or ‫ فيها بين الأيام‬in or during the
space of several days ). Both are and see us are often used in the
sense of both -- and, and of partly - partly (tam - quam , partim
$ 67[ TheVerb.3. Gov't of Verb (b ) Prepositions : ‫بين‬ 181
partim) ; as ‫ ما بین معروف ومجهول‬partly knoton and party A
anknown ; ‫ جانی ما بين فقير وغني‬there came to me both rich and
poor ; ‫ القوم بين قتيل وأسير‬the tribe acas partly slain , and party
taken prisoners; )‫ بين بير ومجسد‬sometimes in a bord (a garment
made of a certain kind of cloth) and sometimes dressed in a saffron
robe. R. S.]. In such cases ‫ بين‬or ‫ ما بين‬holds the place of a
substantive expressing that which unites both objects as parts of
one whole.-- If we wish to indicate the entire interval between two B
places or points of time, I is used before the second substantive ;
as ‫ بين البصرة إلى مكة‬betteer el-Basra and Mekha ; ‫فيما بين اليوم‬
‫ الثاني من شباط إلى اليوم الثامن من أذار‬between the second day of
śubāt and the eighth day of'Adār.–Observe the phrases Combi ‫بیر‬

or ‫ بين ظهريهم‬and ‫ بين ظهرانيهم‬in themidst of them [; ‫بين يدي‬

ugló before any one, in his presence, lit. between his hands ; as
‫قبل الأرض بين يدي الخليقة‬hekissed the ground before the caliph ; C
‫ أخطأت بين يديك‬I hate sinned before thee ; ‫انهزام التي بين يديه‬
the fleeing of the wolf before him (the dog ); of time, ‫مصدا لها بين‬
‫ يديه‬confirming what was before it (or preceded it(; ‫إن هو إلا تير‬
‫ عذاب شدی‬sú ‫تم بين يدي‬he is noughtbut a warner to you before
a severepunishment ; in the plural, ‫وجعل يكسر الدجاج ويضعها بين‬
hivi and he began to break up thefowls and to set them before us. D

REM. From im are formed the conjunctive adverbs of time

Ling and long whilst, which naturally exercise no influence upon the
following clause; as ‫ بينا نحن نرقبه أتانا‬mohilst woe terematching
for him, he came to us ; i cugins lines whilst we govern the
people ; ‫ بينما نحن في الحديث‬sohilot woe were conversing; ‫بينما‬
‫ي أشواقهم‬.whilst
‫الناس ف‬ thepeople are in theirmarkets. [Comp
Vol. i. 362, b.]
 182 PART THIRD . — Syntax. [S 68

A 68. És (the accusative of best the lower or under part)

signifies below , beneath, under, as som ‫ تحت‬to‫ ما‬what is beneath the
‫ الثرى‬best
soil ; le us at üss and under it (the wall) was a treasure
of theirs; metaphorically, ‫ اللي‬het
‫ تحت‬j' he travelled under (the
shade of) night; o4
ou , or gjoi , under his power or authority.
Itissaid of a married woman‫ن‬,‫ن كمانت عباتدنحات صفاللانحي‬shewas
‫ت عبدي‬under
‫(تا تح‬the
‫كان‬
authority of ) So-and -so, as
B they were under two righteous servants of ours ( viz. Noah and Lot).
REM. a.
. biesh has a diminutive me a little below or under.
.

REM . b. Opposed to ‫ تحت‬is ‫) فوق‬the accusative of ‫ فوق‬the

upper part),with its diminutive org, signifying above, over, upon,
as
‫ فوق موړ عبير‬upon awell-beaten road : ‫فوق سراة أدهم منجم‬
upon the back of a bridled black (horse) ; Cumbiji mogu áóbel the
turban is upon the head); metaphorically, ozhi jolär sig
С
and Heis the Al-pornoerful over his servants ; ‫وجاعل الذين اتبعوك‬
zás und (1) will place those who have followed thee
above those who have not believed ; hon yli sigo vic sotis
‫ كانوا يفسدون‬we will add to them a punishment in addition to the
punishment for their corrupt doings : ‫فإن كن نساء فوق اثنتين‬
and if they be femalee more than tuo0 ; ‫فعل بها فوق ما فعل بحلب‬
Ꭰ . he treated it worse than he had treated Aleppo ; Luigi Lógássés
a gnat and what exceeds it (in smallness or in largeness); is mos
W

Jedi legi and it is an animal a little above the size ofa cat).
69. úss (the accusative of iss what is beneath, under, less,
or inferior, related to us to come near, and it's to be low or vile), with
>

its diminutive ‫ وین‬, and ‫من دون‬, in which combination ‫ من‬has a

partitive force, signify under, below, beneath. They indicate :
$ 69] The Verb.—3. Gov't of Verb.— ( b) Prepositions: úgs. 183
(a) That a person or thing dwells or is situated, or that an action A
‫ قدم‬úgó
‫ ممد عدو‬stoc
takes place, below some place, or near it ; as ‫ك‬julle
may the cheek of thy enemy be under thy foot ; úgó SLUT ve
biçãoet in the ravine that is below Sala' (there lies) a murdered
man ; ‫ التقوا دون صنعاء‬theymet near Sana ; ‫مضرفما دونها من البلاد‬
Egypt and the adjacent countries.
(6) That one person or thing comes near or approximates to B
another, especially a higher one (properly, stands under it, does not
reach it) ; as completo cungsg buway üsit and he (the horse)
made us overtake the foremost (of the herd), whilst near him were
those of them that lagged behind ; jis úgó his this is nearer than
that ; stigs üsi come nearer (to me) ! lit. approach not far from
yourself ( towards me) ; kódj slogs seize Zeid (who stands not far from
.y , see $ 35, 0 ,ou
8, rem (; ‫ دونك الدرهم‬take the dirhamn ; ‫و ونموه‬
take ye him .
.REM ‫ئ‬ ‫ دونم‬as interjections, are equivalent to
‫ و‬and ecgs,
stings
stóloi, ecólof (see $ 35, 6, B) [and Ísis, $ 66, rem. a),look out !
take care ! (sometimes advance !] as selo ibig; beware of wrestling
with me; öyla jecigs take care [ or advance] (and) give them
no quarter ; list wie śligj take care (or advance) and keep to me).
( c) That one space, distance, or number, does not equal or D
complete another ; as : ‫ وبينهما دون رمية حجر‬and between them
thereadsless than a stone's throuo ; ‫ليس فيها دون خمس أواق صدقة‬
there is no poor-rate ( to be exacted ) on what is under (or less than)
fibe ounces; ‫ عشر ډيات‬úgó
‫ لن نقبل مسعود دون‬ace soil not accept for
we will
Masóūd less than ten fines for homicide.
( d ) That one thing is smaller or worse than another ; as ‫النحاس‬
‫ دون الفضة والحديد دون النحاس‬copper is of legs culuethan silver,
N1
Prici ürita
 184 PART THIRD.— Syntax. [$ 69

A and iron of less value than copper ; slig's bestog si he who shall
arise (as king) after thee,will be inferior to thee ; wheatis wigó ing
sigui si and magnificent splendour in the retinue of princes is less
(glorious) than it ( learning).
(e) That a quality which belongs to one person or thing is not
possessed by another, and that the latter is therefore in this respect
B opposed to the other : as ‫ منهم الايون ومنهم دون ذلك‬some of
them are good, and some of them not so (lit. and some of them remain
under that, do not attain to that quality (; ‫إن الله لا يغفر أن يشرك‬
‫ به ويغفر ما دون ذلك لمن يشاء‬terily God will not forgive the joining
of other gods with Himself, but He will forgive what is other than that
to tohom Hepleaseth *; ‫ومن الشياطين من يعوضون ته ويغمون عملا‬
sus ügs and of the evil spirits some who should dive for him ( into the
C sea ) and do work other than that. In this sense úgó is equivalent to
(see $ 82, d ). (Hence it can also signify beyond, of higher quality,
as in the last quoted sentence, where it may be rendered by and still
greater works. Likewise when a man has said vigas liej j? rerily,
Zəid is a noble man , another replies sus úság and above that;
‫بدون ما يقوى به على‬.thou
‫ تفوی‬artmorepowerful than Ali, D. G [
(f) That a person or thing is excluded or excepted, neglected or
D postponed (properly that the action affects him or it to a less degree
than it doesanother ); as ‫يدعو من دون الله ما لا يضره وما لا ينفعه‬
he invokes, to the exclusion or neglect of God, what can neither injure
him nor benefit him, he invokes what can neither etc., but not God ;
‫ أهل هذه المدينة يعبدون الأصنام من دون الله‬the people of this city
[Many interpreters render the words sus úgó orieg by and
others (that are) below them , and suý úgó ló by and what is less than
that. Compare Fleischer, Kl. Schr. i. 417. ]
‫) ؟‬9[ The Verb.3. Gon't of Verb. (b) Prepositions : ‫ون‬ 185
acorship idols and notGod ; ‫ ما تلككثمر من دون الله من ولي ولا نصير‬A
ye havenopatron and nohelper exceptGod ; ‫عملتم بأحدهما دون الأخير‬
we
‫هذ‬
ye act according to one of these two (rules), but not the other ,; ‫ي‬ist‫ا ل‬rid
ély's Ling this belongs to me exclusively of thee,thou hast no part or
share in it ; ‫ ينبغي أن يختار العتيق و المحدثات‬he ought to choose
the old in preference to the new ; ‫ وأمم دون الأنام را‬and he sought
you out in preference to all other men.-- Here must also be mentioned B
‫ ون‬, and the rarer ugby, in the sense of without ,; as ‫دون الجهر من‬
‫ القول‬without speaking loudly ; ‫ ليس اكتساب المال دون مشقة‬realth
cannot be acquired withouttrouble : ‫إن الإسناد لا يتأتى بدون طرفين‬
‫ ممسند ومسند إليه‬the 'isuad, or relation of attribution , cannot be
effected without two extremes, an attribute, or predicate, and a subject ;
‫ يأخدها تار بلاد المعبر دون ثمن‬themerchants of the; ‫د‬country
‫ فلا مج‬c
of Malabar take them without (paying any) price ( for them ) ;
‫ره‬

‫ يبنی بدون الجهاد ولا جهد يغني بدوير القدر‬for no glory is builtup
without a hard struggle, and no effort is of avail without the decree
)of fate in thy favour, ‫ القدر‬in rhyme for ‫(القدر‬.
(9) That one object is placed before another, either (a) as a
hindrance or obstacle to prevent a person from getting at it, or (B) as
.a protection to defend it from some one; e.g ‫ دون ذلك جمر الغضا‬D
‫ورط التالي‬before this therearethe coals of the gada and thestripping
of the katād, that is to say, before you can obtain this, you have many
serious obstacles to surmount (the wood of the gadā being noted for
its long retention of fire, and the katād for the number and size of its
thorns(; ‫ إن مزارها قريب ولكن دون ذلك أهوال‬the time or placefor
visiting her is near, but there are many terrors in the way; viss
‫ حجاب‬there is no curtain or barrier in front of them ; ‫وكان مجی‬
W. II , 24
 186 PART THIRD . - Syntax. ($ 69

A ‫دون من كنت أتقى قلك شخوص‬my shield (or protection ) against

those utham I fearedasthree persons: ‫إن امرؤ القيس جرى إلى مئی‬
)

Lúci úss áóbáo álcig’Imru’u 'l -Kais ran for a goal,but death
intercepted him beforehe reached that goal; ‫ دون النهر جماعة‬before
(thou reachest) the river, there is a number of men (to be encountered ), =
‫ قبل أن تصل إلى النهر‬Hence verbssignifying to shut a door against
B one, to fight for one, and the like , are construed with úgó ( compare
, ));; e.g ‫ مضرب !إلى جنبها فبعثها وقام دوئها‬then he struck her
$$ 49.a
(the camel) on the side, and made her get up , and stood in front of her
(to prevent any one from touching her ); áśli on mingis þú he fought
for, or in defence of, them for some time ; je oslaví
agreed uss an is a true friend gives up his life for his friend ;
‫ الله إلا أن تقد نار الجوع وتحول دون الجوع‬unless indedthe fire
‫ دون‬is
C of hunger burn and stand in the way of sleep. In this case Ügs
synonymous with oboi in front of, before.-- Hence too it often denotes
‫ جیحون‬úgó ‫ا‬ló‫ م‬érme
on this side of (cis, citra) ; as igennem ‫ جميع‬all the region
on this side of the Oxus ; in which case it is opposed to sing behind,
‫ء النهر‬styg
beyond, as your ló Transocania (lit. what is beyond the river Oxus).
‫ ورا‬ú
REM . Other important words belonging to this class of pre
positions are :
D )a( ‫قبل‬,with its diminutive ‫قبيل‬, before, oftime; as ‫قبل موته‬
before his death ; sú ju so se ☺ o would that I had died
before this ! ‫ وأعلم ما في اليوم والأمس قبله‬and I knote that
happened today and yesterday before it; she isjust before threatening
)withoutaaiting to threaten (; ) ‫ قدم مكة قبل المدينة‬he came to
Mekka before (his coming to) * El-Medina ).- Opposed to it is very
diminutive ‫ بعيد‬after ; asa8 ‫ بعد قلته أيام‬after three days ; ‫بعد‬
$ 69[ The Verb.3. Gov't of Verb - (b) Prepositions: ‫ ون‬187
stoms after thy arrival ; óses after him, i.e. after his departure, A
or afterhis death ; ‫ قد تغيرت بعدی‬thou hast becomechangeal after
me, i.e. after I parted from thee,since I last saw thee, = sans les
‫ فا ذا بعد الحق إلا الضلال وب‬and what is there after the truth
)eohen the truth is gone), but error ? [Tropically ‫فلان كريم‬
‫ وهو بعد هذا أريب‬So-and-so isi generous and moreover well
educated. A synonym of ‫ بعد‬is ‫غب‬.
)6( ‫ أمام‬and ‫قام‬,before,of place;as ‫ أن يمشي أمامه‬thathe B
should not walk before him ; w roli vyment his grave is before the
gate ; ‫ قتل في حصار قلعة سابور دام الأمير‬he was killed at the
siege of the castle of Sabür before the êmir ( in his presence, =
‫ ;(بين يديه‬tropically, ‫ الصلاة أمامك‬the time of ) prayer is before
thee ; ‫بل يريد الإنسان ليفجر أمامه‬aag, butman dishes to go on
in his wickedness (in the time that is) before him. [On the use of
stótói as an interjection see $ 35, 6, B.] C

)‫ وراء (ع‬behind ; as ‫ دخل عنتر وراءها‬Antar carne in behind her

)her back being turned to him (; ‫ فتبدوه وراء ظهورهم‬they cast it
behind their backs ; jay's to what is behind thee ? i.e. what news
dost thou bring ? hence beyond ( Lat. trans, ultra), opposed to úgó
) see $ 69, 9g, at the end ); and relating to time, after , as ‫ويكفرون‬
‫ بها وراءه‬but they disbelieve in that hath been sent donen or revealed (
after it (the Pentateuch ); tropically, beyond , besides, more than,
‫ وما وراء ذلك بلغة مجلس‬but anything beyond this (merely) seroes D
to makea alone in) society :‫وأحل تكم ما وراء ذله أن تبتغوا بأمواله‬
and He hath permitted you , besides this, to seek out (wives) by means
ofyouropealth ; ‫ فمن ابتغى وراء ذلك فأولئك هم العادون‬but theymucho
desire more than this, are transgressors. [On the use of satis as

an interjection , sees 3 ), b, p.] - Synonymous with ‫ وراء‬is ‫خلف‬

behind, after ; as ‫ والشعر يسحب خلف ظهرها‬and her hair hang
 188 PART THIRD . - Syntax. (S 70

A ‫ لئه‬guiary
down to the ground behind her back ; aílá ‫ الاعدو‬Seb and I got
up to run after him ; ‫ كيف مضيت لها إلى القط‬hone thout
ventest afterher to thebank ; ‫فجعلناها نگا لها بين يديها وما خلفها‬
and we made them a warning to their contemporaries and to those
after them ; ‫ وإذا لا يلبثون خلقك إلا قلير‬and in that case they
would not have tarried after thee but a little.

B )2( ‫ حول‬around; as ‫ فلها أضاءت ما حوله‬and after it (the fire(

has lighted up thespace around him ; ‫ثم تحضرهم حول جهنم جثيا‬
then we will set them around Hell on their knees ; We ju
he went round it (the temple) ; Szlovui ing alone Bogs around
him were a number of women.- lang in the midst of, in, among ;
as
‫ وسط روضة‬in the midst of a gardens; ‫ وسط اليراع‬among the
creeds;sevi laining among the houses.
70. Compound prepositions, though by no means rare in ancient
Arabic, are more common in the later stages of the language. The
first part of the compound is generally " o, and the second part
another so-called preposition, now however no longer in the accusative,
but in the genitive. Such are :

)a‫ ) من بين ( ه‬.Heb ‫ ; ()ج*;د‬as ‫المخضوض من بين كافة‬i‫محمد هو‬

D ‫ بالفضل والكمالي‬-Muhammad
‫الخلق‬ is the one preeminently distin
guished among all mankind for excellence and perfection (lit. from
among all mankind ); que no from his presence (lit. from between
his hands(; ‫ من بين أيديهم ومن خلفهم‬iron before them and behind
them ; ‫ في آذاننا وقر ومن بيننا وبين حجاب‬in our ears is hardness
of hearing, and between us and thee there is a partition -wall. In this
last example is is partitive, the literal meaning being : and in a
part of the space between us and thee, etc.
$ 70] The Verb.-3. Gov't of Verb.-- (b) Prepositions. 189

) 6 ( ‫ من فوق‬and ‫ زمن تحت‬as ‫ جعل فيها رواسي من فوقها‬he A

placed immorable (mountains) upon it (the earth (; ‫طلع من فوق‬
‫ الجبير ونزل من خلفه‬he ascended the hill and descended by the
other side (lit. behind it)(; ‫ جنات تجري من تحتها الأنهار‬gardens
under (the trees of) which streams flow. In these examples ing
is partitive ; the mountains form a part of what is raised above
the earth ; the man ascends a part of the hill-side, and descends
by a part of the other side ; the streams occupy a part of the space B
under the trees.

)e( ‫ من قبل‬and ‫ زمن بعير‬as ‫ الذين من قبله‬those achowere

before you ; ‫ من قبل صلوة الفجر‬before the morning prayer : ‫ته‬
‫ بثناكم من بعد موته‬then de brought you again to life after
your death; Lilá iones is vilás and there has come after them
an evil generation. Here again is is partitive, in a portion of the C
space of time before or after.

‫)الله‬d4( . ‫) من عند‬.Heb‫ ( لاد‬and ‫) من نتن‬but not ‫;(من تدی‬ as

is his this is from (lit.from the side of, from beside) God ;
‫ جاءت من عنده‬she came from him ; ‫قد بدت من تدتي عذرا‬
now hast thou obtained from me an excuse (for leaving me) ; ű
‫نك رحمة‬.g
‫ من تد‬usmercyiv
from (lit. from beside
e ) Thee
)e( ‫ زمن قبل‬as ‫ كان أميرا بالشأم من قبل عثمان‬hewasgovernor D
of Syria for ' Otmān (lit. from beside 'Otmān, with whom lay the
option of sending him as such (; ‫قدم عليه جواب كتابه من قبل‬
ve suf there came to him an answer to his letter from (Fr. de la part
de)Abu Bakr ; ‫ سلام من قبلی علی من تمنى بظرفها‬peacebe from
me ( Fr. de ma part) upon her who has enslaved me by her pleasing
uddress,
 190 PART THIRD - Syntaa. [$ 70
A
)2 ( ‫ من وراء‬and ‫زمن تخلف‬ as
‫ من وراء جدر‬from behind
aals ; ‫ إنه جالس من وراء الستارة يشرب‬he is siting behind the
curtain drinking ) ‫ من‬partitive(; ‫ من بين أيديهم ومن خلفهم‬from
beforethem and behindthem (see a(; ‫ ونزل من خلفه‬andhedescended
by the other side of it (the hill, see b).

)g( ‫ ; من حول‬as ‫ولو كنت فظا غليظ القلب لانقوا من حولك‬

B and if thou hadst been harsh and hard -hearted, they would have
dispersed from around thee ; ‫وترى القلعة اقين من ححولل اللععرشرش‬
and thou shalt see the angels surrounding the Throne (in partitive).
REM . a.
We have already spoken of is ino, $ 49,rem. c ;
‫ من مع‬$ 57 , .rem ; ‫ من على‬$ 59, rem.b; ‫ من دون‬$ 69 ; ‫بدون‬,
$ 56, rem .c,and $ 69 , ; ‫ يغير من غير‬, and ‫ بلا‬$ 56 ,.rem
.c
c REM. b. Other prepositions are occasionally found in com

position,as ‫ مد تدين الشيح إلى أن تتزول الش‬iron themorning

auntil the sun declines ; ( ‫رقني لن أمس هذا اليوم‬,‫ فا‬he left me
since yesterday]; especially ‫ إلى‬in the compounds ‫إلى عند إلى دوين‬
)and ‫(لعند‬, ‫إلى نحو إلى فوق‬,and ‫إلى وراء‬, which are, however,
condemned by the grammarians .
D REM.. C. The preposition is very rarely omitted, especially by a
poet, and the genitive notwithstanding retained ; as ‫كيف أصبحت‬
hotoart thou this morning 2 ‫ خیر‬quite avell,for ‫] على خير‬or ‫;[بخير‬
‫ إذا قيل أن الناس شر قبيلة أشارت كليب باق الأصابع‬chen the
question is asked, Who of mankind are worst as a tribe ? the fingers
Kulèib
pointwith thehandsto hauleib (for ‫تبخ;(أشارت إلى كليب‬
‫ فارتقى الأعلام‬untilhebecamelaughty , and ascended theheights of
pride , for ‫فارتقى إلى الأعلام‬
 The Verb. - 3. Gov't of Verb.— (b ) Prepositions. 191
$ 70]
Rem. d . The preposition is likewise very rarely separated by A
another word from the substantive which it governs ; as ‫إن عمرا‬
‫» لا خيرفي اليوم عمرو‬8 for ' Amr,there isno goolin 'Aurtoday,
instead of ‫ وليس إلى منها الزول بي ولا خير اليوم في عمرو‬and
there is novay (ormeants)to get doton from it,for ‫إلى النزول منها‬
‫ إشتريته بوالله درهم‬I boughtit,by God, for a dirham ,instead of
‫والله بدرهم‬
REM . e. Sometimes, by a more concise and bolder construction B

) ‫ اتساع‬or ‫(توشع‬,the accusativeis used instead of a preposition

with the genitive (especially J) ; as ‫ دخلت البيت‬I entered the
house, for ‫ في البيت‬or ‫ سنت الدار ; إلى البيت‬I inhabited, or
doels in , thehouse, for ‫ويوم شهدناه تيها وعامرا وفي الدار‬ and

we met face to face Suleim and amir, for ‫وشهدنا فيه‬

many a day toe
‫ فمن شهد من الشهر فليصمه‬therefore achosoever of you shall be C
present in the month , he shall fast therein , for ‫هديته ; فليصم فيه‬
‫ الطريق‬Ishouedhim thetasy for ‫ پالطريق‬or ‫خام القتال ;[إلى الطريق‬
heheld back in battle (through couardice),for ‫كما عسل في القتالي‬
‫ الطريق الغلب‬as the fog trots along the patli, for ‫) في الطريق‬see
$ 14, b, rem . a(; ‫ هب الأم‬he went to Syria, for ‫إلى الأم‬
‫ وأخفى البنی تو اسی قضایی‬and II hide(noithin me)that wohich,
were it not for patience, would be the death of me, for stó csomáš ; D
‫ انی صاحبي وقریبی‬my friends and relatives teere far from me, ‫ور‬
orkeptaloor froneme,for ‫أم الخيروفعل ما أمرت به زنای عتی‬
I bade thee do good, do therefore asthou trust bilden, for ‫وبالخير‬
‫ أستغفر الله نبی‬I ask pardon of God for mysin ,for ‫زمن نبي‬
‫ واختار موسی قوم سبعين رجلا‬and Moses chose from his people
eventy men , for ‫ ماالذي اختير الرجال سماحة زمن قومه‬of
or us
to
 192 Part THIRD.— Syntax. [$ 70
A was he who was chosen from among men for (his) generosity, for
‫ بغاه الشيء من الرجال‬he sought thething for him , for ‫بی له‬
‫صیدا‬ ‫ صد‬I canght game for thee, for ‫وإذا كالوهم زمدت تك‬
‫ أو وزنوهم يخسرون‬and when they measureanto them or weigh
aunto them , they give less than is due), for ‫; الوا تهم أو وزنوا تهم‬
‫ ولقد جنيتكأماواقلا‬and I have gathered for thee mushrooms
‫قر‬
of‫يتي‬different kints, for ‫ عاقلا) جنيت تك‬in rhyme for ‫; (عاقل‬
B
‫ ولكن رحلاها تقوا گريم‬butwemade ready noble spirits to
encounter these calamities), for ‫ تصنيفها زحلا تها‬he (the sila
he-ass) passed the summer with them (the she-asses), for " és ea .
Rem. f. As we have seen above, and is or ‫ من‬may be
directly connected with a following proposition (SS 58 and 61 ).
The other prepositions require the interposition of ‫أن‬, ‫أين‬, or ‫زما‬
as
‫ !إلى أن كبرت‬until I greto up ; ‫على أن تجني ثمانی ججج‬
C on condition that thou wilt be my hired servant for eight years ;
‫ على أن مشيري الكبر‬notuoithstanding thatold age hath comeupon me,
‫ وعلا عن أن يكون له نظير‬and Heisexalted abovehaving any equal;
‫) خير وأغرم بي من أن أی ما معقودة بيئام الناس في تقی‬-con
tented poverty is) better and more honourable for me than to see gifts of
thebasehang roundmyneck ; ‫ مع أن الهدم أسهل من البناء‬though it
is easier to destroy than to build ; ‫ذلك بأنهم كانوايرون بآيات الله‬
D that was because they used to disbelieve in the signs of God ;
‫ بعد ما أفنان رأسك كالغام المخلس‬after thesoaringlocke of this
head havebecomelikethe graytajam (a plant(; ‫قد دفنها الشراب منها‬
‫ تشفی الريح التراب على هذه الآبار‬the dusthasstopped up these
wells since the wind has swept the dust over them ; csáí bo
‫ تحبه في ملتقى الناس هوبر‬after (Ibn ) Hanbar perished on the
battle-feld ; ‫ ذلك بما عصوا‬that was because they disobeyed : ‫ها‬
 $ 71 ] The Noun . - The Nomina Verbi. 193

A
‫أرسلنا إلى فرعون ولا‬ (18
we sent an apostle to Pharaoh .
‫ ما‬is often inserted after ‫عن من‬,and without affecting their

regimen (and is therefore called ‫ ;[ ما الرائدة‬as ‫مها خطيئاتهم أغرقوا‬

S

‫ قلي‬moi
they were drowned because of their sins; mogli james ‫ل‬bour
after a little (while) they will become repentant ; atí ing access theme
by the mercy of God thou hast bren gentle unto them. After
ý this use of 6 is very rare ( see $ 63, rem. a). Compare in
‫ ) ج‬Job ix. 30, Keri(, ‫ دوچ‬B
) i.e. T ‫ (چ‬in Hebrew ; as ‫فيد‬-
)Ps.xi 2(, ‫ جد‬- ‫ ج‬.Job
) xxvii 14(, ‫چچا‬- ‫) ج‬.Exod .xv 5(.
[ REM . 9. Before si and i the prepositions are often omitted,
‫ا‬ ‫ تو نظرت إليها فإنه أحرى أن يؤدم بينما‬thout mightesthave a look
at her (before marrying her), for this affords a better chance of a
good understanding between thee and her (for ‫(أحرى بأن‬: ‫أغلب‬
‫ة أحدكم أن يصاحب الناس معروفا‬is any one of you unable to C
associate with men kindly? (for i cotó, lit.is he overpowered so as
to beunable 2(; ‫ لقد أثرت أن أفعل كذا‬Ihave assuredly purposed to
do such a thing (for ‫ترامی به الأمر أن صار يخديجة ;( على أن‬
and his affair led eventually to his becoming the property of Hadīga
) for ‫ إن الله لا ي(سمتنحيأين أن يضرب م ; إلى أن‬see ! God isnot
ashamed to use a parable ( for i ino). See also $ 49, d,rem . and
8167, rem . b.
On the omission of the preposition along with the suffix in D
relative sentences, see $ 175, c. D. G. ]

B. THE NOUN ..

1. The Nomina Verbi, Agentis and Patientis.

71. As we have already spoken of the idea of the nomen verbi or
( .. ii. $ 195), of its use as ‫ المفعول المطئ‬or
abstract verbalnoun (Vol
objective complement of the verb ($ 26), and of its rection , in so far
W , 11 , 25
 194 PART THIRD. -Symtax. (S 72

A as it possesses verbal power ( S$ 27-29), we have now only to remark

that it is not (as might at first sight appear) rendered definite by the
very nature of its idea, and, in consequence, able to dispense with
the article in order to become definite ; but is, on the contrary, like
other nouns, indefinite, when it stands without the article. E.g.

‫قتال فيه كبير وصد عن سبيل الله وكفر به والمسجد الحرام وإخراج‬
‫ أهله منه أكبر عند الله‬to fight in it one of the sacred months) is
( a ) great (sin) , but to turn (others) away from the path of God, and
B not to believe in Him and (to prevent access to ) the sacred mosque ,
and to turn His people out of it, is (a) greater ( sin ) in the sight of
God ) ‫ قتال‬a fighting, not the fighting, and so with its and is );
‫ الطلاق مرتان فإمساك بمعروف أو تشريح بإحسان‬the divorce many
take place twice (and the woman be taken back after each time) ,
but after that ye must either retain (your wives) with kindness or
dismiss ( them ) with benefits ( ŠvÚJÍ the divorce, ihned a retaining,
c ‫ » تشريح‬dismissing(; ‫ لا يستطيعون تم نضرا‬they are not able to
givethem (ang) help ) ‫ نضرا ما = تضر‬or ‫ين تضر‬, whereas‫ الضر‬would
mean, they are not able to give them the help necessary in the
particular case ).

72. Of the rection of the nomina agentis and patientis or concrete

verbal nouns, in so far as they possess verbal power, we have already
treated in S$ 30—32. They designate the person or thing, to which
D the verbal idea attaches itself as descriptive of it ; e.g. ésợi the
exciting cause, the motive ; ¿jVi the hindering object,the hindrance.
Now, as both the person or thing and the verbal idea are something
>

firm and abiding, it follows that the concrete verbal noun indicates a
lasting and continuous action on the part of an agent or passion on
that of a patient. This idea it possesses in common with the Im
perfect (see § 8), to which it is often related in outward form (see
Vol. i. & 236, with rem. a). The difference between them is, that

• .Viz ‫ فإمساك واجب‬or ‫ فالواجب ( هو ) إمساك‬.

§ 73] The Noun . — The Nomina Agentis et Patientis. 195

the concrete verbal noun designates a person or thing, to which the A

verbal idea closely attaches itself and consequently remains im
movable ; whilst the Imperfect, as a verbum finitum , expresses the
verbal idea as movable and indeed in constant motion *. The employ
ment of the concrete verbal noun as a perfect results from its use as a
fixed immovable substantive.

73. To what point of time this lasting and continuous state of

the agent or patient, as designated by the nomen verbale concretum ,
is to be referred, can be deduced only from some other word in the B
sentence, which points to a specific time, from the nature of the
thing or the character of the thought, or from the connection of the
context. The nomen agentis or patientis itself does not include the
idea of any fixed time. [ Comp. $ 30, a.]
(a) In a clause that is not circumstantial (comp. § 183], whether
it be absolute or dependent upon another clause, the concrete verbal
noun shows that the verbal idea contained in it refers either to the
present, the proximate future, or the future in general. E.g. Woj
‫ ناكح ابنه غدا زبيدة‬Zaid's son is to bemarried tomorrow to Zubaida C
)the reference of ‫ تاكح‬to the proximate future is shown by lúć);
cui ui I am going to kill him ; subió I will kill you (ego te
interficiam (; ‫ هذا مول‬this man must be killed ; ) ‫هي محمودة‬
she is praiseworthy ;] (in these four examples the context fixes the
meaning ( ; ‫واعلموا أثم غیر معجزى الله وأن الله مخزى الكافرين‬
and know that ye shall not escape God, and that God will put the
unbelieversto shane; ‫و ربهم‬ess
‫ الذين يظنون أنهم ملات‬ho think that D
they shall meet their Lord ; ‫ قد أطرق ينظر ما هم مانعون‬hekept
* The Arab grammarians ascribe to the finite verb, in general, the
3

idea of égtáji the becoming new ,the coming into existence of the act ;
to the imperfect, in particular, that of jeansaí constant renewal or
repetition ( see § 8) ; to the verbal noun, that of Si, or ‫البات‬,
fiscedness, immobility .
 196 PART THIRD. — Syntar. [$ 74

A silence in order to see what they would do ( the reference of useils

to the future results from ‫ينظر‬.
REM . d. When the perfect üls is prefixed to a concrete
verbal noun which refers to the future, the idea of futurity is
transferred to a past time ; as ‫ أمر كان مفعولا‬a thing aolich
should have been done (equivalent to ‫;(أمر كان حنيئا أن يفعل‬
‫ ما ان كائنا تو الخ‬quid futurum eset si ete. Compare the
B composition of the imperfect with ‫ كان‬, .s9
[REM. b. Verbal adjectives of the form Les with a passive
sense may refer also to the future, as
‫ بسلاح ما يتل القتيل‬by‫أ‬
one or another weapon will certainly be killed whosoever is destined
to be killed ; ‫ أنا ابن البيكيني‬I am the son of thetoo intended
victims.)
(6) But if the concrete verbal noun stands in a circumstantial
C clause j'é ), the state which it describes belongs to the same period
.of
timeas the verb in theleading clause. E.g ‫أنشد وهو حبوش بمكة‬
he recited, whilst he was in prison at Mèkka, (the following terses );
. ‫ر‬

‫جد المهدي في الرب وقدم طرابلس الغرب وزيادة الله وقع عليه‬
el-Mahdi fled with all speed and reached Țarābulus ( Tripolis) in
North Africa, whilst Ziyādètu'llāh was constantly on the look-out for
him ; ‫ومن شيم وجهه إلى الله وهو محسن فقير أشتمك بالعروة الوثقی‬
and whoso turns himself wholly towards God, whilst he does good , has
D laid hold on the surest handle. In such subordinate clauses the
imperfect is used in almost the same way as the concrete verbal
noun (S8 , e).

74. In like manner, the concrete verbal noun refers to the same
period of time as the verb with which it is connected, when it is
annexed to the verb as an adverbial accusative. This may happen
..even
when the subjects are different ($ 14, c). E ‫فوتی الور هاربا‬
$ 74] The Noun.--The Nomina Agentis et Patientis. 197

the on turned his back feeing, ‫ سافر باریا أخوة القوس‬he set of sohilst A
his brotheradsshaping the bot ; ‫ خرج قاعدا أبوه‬he utent outwhilst
his father was
attesented ; ‫ لقيت سلطان عنده باكيا‬Imet the sultan in
‫ كنت في البستان زاهرا‬I trusin the garden whilst
his house weeping; Livoli
it was in blon ; ‫ومن يعص الله ورسوله ويتعد محدوده دله تارا‬
‫ خالدا فيها‬and thoso shall rebel against God and His Apostle, and
shall transgress His ordinances, He shall make him enter into fire, to
‫مقا‬ever‫(حال‬here
abide in it‫رن‬for , the jlé or circumstantial term , ‫ خالدا فيها‬, B
is not a or hāl which indicates a state present at a
past time,, but a ‫ حال مقدر‬, or hāl which indicates a future state
]comp. $ 44, 0, rem . «a ]).. The same is the case after ‫ بقى‬to remain ,
ols to last, continue, ju ý he will not cease, and the like (see $ 42, a) ;
as
‫ تم يزل قاعداد‬hedid notcette sitting; ‫لا تزال طائفة من أمتي ظاهرين‬
‫ على الحق إلى يوم القيمة‬a part of my people shall‫ح‬notcease
0
‫ا دام الرو‬to‫م‬
hold fast the truth till the day of the resurrection ; óls tóc
‫الج‬ ‫ساكا في‬ as long as the spirit continues to dwell in the

body; ‫ فبقى محيرا‬he remained in amataement ; ‫و العلم يبئى‬

‫در‬
‫ عزه‬, the reputation of the learned shall continue multiplied
‫ مضاعفا‬Ois
(after his death ). The Imperfect is also used after these verbs in many
cases (S 42, rem . f ], with this difference, that the Imperfect designates
the constantly repeated action , the concrete verbal noun the lasting
condition of the agent ; as ‫ ما زال يقترعلى الشعون في قعر مغارته‬DD
he did not cease to restrict himself to sitting quietly at the bottom of his
cute ; ‫ ولم يزل ينعم النظر فيها‬and he did not desist from intestigating
it carefullu ) ‫(يمعن = نعم‬..Compare S8,e
Rem . The concrete verbal noun is sometimes annexed , like the
imperfect (§599)),, to the verb úls
‫ كان‬, to express the præsens præteriti
 198 PART THIRD - Syntax. [$ 75

A or Greek and Latin imperfect ; as ‫ كان ناز‬he was dwelling;

2

‫ كانت مركوز‬they (the spears )were sticking in the ground ) ‫كانت‬

Ś would mean they were stuck into the ground ).
2. The Government of the Noun.
The Status Constructus and the Genitive.

75. The idea of one noun is very often more closely determined
‫نتو‬

( ‫ ) تخصص‬or defined ( e ) by that of another** . When this is the

B us
case, the noun so defined is shortened in its pronunciation by the
omission of the tènwin, or of the terminations and ( Vol. i.
$ 315), on account of the speaker's passing on rapidly to the
determining word, which is put in the genitive. The determined
noun is called by the Arab grammarians Clási the annered ; the
determining noun, a lánvi that to which annexation is made or
to which another word is annexed ; and the relation subsisting between
C them is known as átlói the annexation. European grammarians
are accustomed to say that the determined or governing word is in
the status constructus.

Rem. The Arab grammarians speak of two kinds of annexation.

The one is called asji útlánji the proper or real annexation,
‫غيرالحقيقية‬, or ‫ الإضافة المعنوية‬the logical
‫الإضافة المحضة‬thepureaunteention
‫ الإض‬the improper annexa
annexation ; the other, dass den ‫ة‬új‫اف‬láží
tion , ‫ الإضافة غير المحضة‬theimpure anneaution, or ‫الإضافة اللفظية‬
D the (merely) verbal or grammatical annexation. The latter consists
in this, that an adjective, a participle active intransitive, or a
participle passive, takes a definite noun in the genitive instead of

* [The winners consists in qualifying an indetinite noun by an

adjective, or an expression equivalent to an adjective, as a preposition
with a genitive, or the genitive of an undefined noun, eyes is the
defining of the noun by the genitive of aa defined noun. ]
§ 77] The Noun.— Gov't of Noun.- Stat. Construct. & Genit. 199

an indefinite tèmyīz-accusative (see § 44, e) ; or that the participle A

active of a directly transitive verb, being used with the meaning of
‫المضارع‬ or the Imperfect (see $ 30, a) , takes the object in the
genitive instead of the accusative. In both cases the genitive is
only a looser, representative construction, instead of the stricter
accusative, and consequently exercises no defining or limiting
power ) ‫تعریف‬ or
wance ) upon the preceding governing word
(see § 89). We have here to deal almost exclusively with the
real annexation.

76. By the genitive is indicated : (a) the person to whom (or the B
thing to which ) the quality designated by the governing word belongs,
as ‫ نعمة‬the wisdom of God ; (almi ús the limpidness of the
ati bie
water ;] (b) the material of the form and the form of the material, as
‫ بيضة فضة‬an egg of silver, ‫ فتنة الدراهم‬thesilver of the dirhams (in
the former case the annexation is explicative,il volás, the original
expression being ‫بيضة فضة‬,.i.e‫ فة‬ist ‫ بيضة دى‬see $ 94);; (c) the
cause of the effect and the effect of the cause , as ‫ الى الأرض‬the C
creator of the earth, wehaveon the heat of the sun ; (d) the part of
the whole (partitite annexation , de dóló!‫ )إضافة‬and the whole as
embracing the parts (explicative annexation ), as ‫ رأس الحكمة‬the
beginning of wisdom ,bio jis the totality of created things ;
(e) the thing possessed by a possessor and the possessor of a thing
‫ آلبر‬jual D
possessed, as wualisi di jis the treasury of the sultān, mi
. .

sig the lord of the land and sea ; and (f) the object of the action
and of the agent,as ‫ خلق السماء‬the creation of heaven , ‫كاتب الرسالة‬
the writer of the letter.

77. The Arab grammarians say that in the real annexation is

implied the force of a preposition, which is either Į (which also
represents the accusative, $s 29—34), is
io, or so! For example :
 200 PART Third.—Syntax. [$ 78

‫ الذي‬oslájí the slure who (belongs)) to

‫ يزيد‬suší
A wij óstá Zeid's slace, -mije
eid ‫ة‬anås
; wis a cup (made) of silver
as is wils
‫ فض‬wit's a silver cup, aas ‫ شهر‬,

(see $ 48, f ); ou ogo to -day's fast, = ogräſ the fast (held )

on to -day ( see $ 55 a).

Rem. The annexation is resolved by exo, when the aid? Jlás

is the genus or material of the lás as
‫» ثوب خز‬a silk dress
B comp. $ 48, 9]; by ‫في‬, when the‫ عمرضبافالإلحيجهاز‬is the ‫ ظرف‬.see
) Vol.i
$ 221 , rem. a) of the Jlás, as jlovi ujú the Arabs of al-Hijāx,
his hatijó plotting by night and day.
78. The determining noun is, in the real annexation, always
either a substantive or a word regarded as such, a pronoun , or an
entire clause. For example : ‫ رسول الله‬the Apostle of God; ‫كلمة إن‬
c the acord 'anin ; ‫ معنی قتل‬themeaning of (theverb)katal ; ‫تثير إنساني‬
the indefiniteness of (the substantive) 'insan (not evi sats, etc.,
because words, regarded as substantives, are by their very nature
definite, just like proper names, and therefore do not require the
article ) ; ‫ معناه‬its meanin ; ‫م‬op‫ لهذا يوم ينفع الصادقين صدقه‬this is the
day (when) their truthfulness shall benefit the truthful; ügie mooi !
till the day (when) they (the dead) shall be raised ; úlélji cjg ingin
D is the day (that) the women (setting out on their journey) turned away
from us ; jei Coj at the time (when) el-ħaġgāj was dmir;
‫ وقت أن أستتر‬at thetime when he hid himself,= ‫ وقت استتاره‬atthe
time of his hiding himself; Willi so ime when they shall see the
punishment ; )‫من حين يخرج من بيته‬.from themoment he goes out
from his house]; is ta juos at the time (when) old age is coming
on ; vís leis si cáblás) uten for fear of his doing so-and-so;
§ 79] The Noun . — Gov't of Noun . - Stat. Construct. & Genit. 201
‫مہء‬

‫ تی ته المنية كأس ووا ما حميها‬till death madehim drink the A

cup of "and they were given boiling water to drink ” (el-Ķor'ān,
xlvii. 17).- The determined noun, on the contrary, can be only a
>

substantive ; for the numerals and prepositions (ue, mas five men,
‫ بعد سنة‬after the lapse of a gear) are in reality substantives, and
adjectives, standing in the position of defined nouns, have the force
of substantives , as ‫ خير البرية‬the best of (God's ) creatures (see 8 86(,
‫ حسن الوجه‬the handsome face , $ 89 , rem .[, ‫ عاجل طعنة‬a hurried B
thrust, ‫ ومشرف الآن بعالی اآسسيرم الصاحب أبي القسم‬andhonourednoto
by the exalted name of the $ āḥib ’Abu 'l-ķāsim . [Comp. $ 86 , rem . b,
>

$ 93 at the end, and $ 95, e. ]

REM . a. In the pure annexation, the article jí can never be

prefixed to the lás;‫ ز‬in the impure, it may (see $$ 30, a, and 89).
Rem. b. Occasionally in ancient poetry, and frequently in later
,
prose writers,we ‫ح زی‬20g
find such phrases as wij ‫ سيف‬Zeid's sword
‫ ورم‬vi
‫ سيف‬c
and spear,for which the correct expression would be us a
‫ ;ومه‬.e.g‫قطع الله يد ورجل من قالها‬may God outof thehand
and foot of him toho said it ; ‫ بين ذراعي وجبهة الأشد‬between the
two paws and the forehead of the Lion (the constellation Leo) ;
‫ لا محالة أو بداهة ابح‬save the after-running or the first running
of aa courser ; ‫ سقى الأرضين الغيث سهل وحزنها‬may the rain stater
the lands, both rugged and level,for ‫سهتها وحزنها‬. D

79. Not only common nouns, but also proper names, may be
determined by aa genitive;; a8 w‫ ربيع الفرس‬Rabia of the horse ;;
‫ تابعة بيان‬an -Nabiya of (the tribe of ) Dayan,= ‫; النابغة الذبیانی‬
‫ تغيب وائل‬Tajlib, (son ) of Waid,for ‫حاتم طي ; تغيب بن وائل‬
Hatim of (the tribe of) Taiyi'; ‫ ‘ عمرو القلب‬Amr of thedog (because
W. II. 26
 202 PART THIRD . — Syntax. [S 80

A hewas always accompanied by one(; ‫ حيرة الثعمي‬alel-Hara, (the

capital of the kingdom ) of en -Noʻmān ; olisi waliis Tripolis in
Syria ; ‫الغرب‬ ‫ طراب‬Tripoli in North Africa : ‫أقام ببغداد العراق‬
‫ وشوقه هل يمشق الشأم شوق مبرح‬he doelt in Bagdad of (in (
él- Irāk, but his yearning for the people of Damascus of (in) Syria
was a painfal gearning; ‫علا زيدنا يوم القا رأس زیږم بأي‬
‫ ماضی الشفرتين يمانی‬our Zeid, on the day (at thebattle) of tnên-Naha
B (or the sand hill), smote the head of your Zèid with a bright (sword)
of al-Yemen, the edges of which bit deep ; ‫فﺅادروا مسعودهم تجد‬
and they left their Masóūd thrown down upon the ground.

80. It often happens, too, that a noun is qualified by the genitive

of another noun , when in other languages an adjective would be
employed ; as ‫ رجل سو‬a bad man ; ‫ حمار وحش‬a coild ass ; ‫ثوب‬
0

‫و مش‬
‫ صدق‬a piece of cloth of good quality , ‫ مبوأ صدق‬a good place of abode,
) ‫ صاحب صدق‬a good comrade; ‫ إخوان الصفا‬thepure or sincerebrethren
(or brotherhood ). This is particularly the case in specifying the
‫ بيضة‬ovum argenteum ,,
‫ فضة‬kao
material of which a thing is made ; as änas
‫ ثوب‬vestis serica,a
aa silver egg ;; sjá ungum , silk dress (see $$ 76,77).
, In
the same way a genitive is attached to the name of a person , to
express something peculiar to and descriptive of him ; a8 ‫زيد الظلال‬
as

the erring (@postate) Zeid, = ‫ س غعدد الخير ;;زید دو اللهلال‬the good

D Sad, =‫سعد و الخير‬, to which would be opposed ‫سعد الشوء‬, or
‫ سعد الشر‬, thewicked Sea ,= ‫ سعد و الشور‬or ‫و الشر‬
w

]REM . This sortof annexation is called ‫إضافة العين إلى المعنى‬

i.e. the annexation of the concrete to the abstract noun.]

81. The Arabs also use several nouns, which convey, at least
secondarily, the ideas of possession, companionship, origination, etc.,
2
 § 81] The Noun . — Gov't of Noun . - Stat. Construct. & Genit. 203

in combination with a following substantive (usually expressing a A

quality) in the genitive, as a substitute for adjectives. These quasi
adjectives, when actually in apposition to a substantive, are placed
after it , like real adjectives. They are principally the following :
gs the (man) of such and such a thing, its owner or possessor (Vol. i.
$ 340, rem .c) ; is to companion, possessor ; joi family, people ;
Vi father, and of mother, i.e. originator, cause, origin, or principle
of a thing; ‫ ابن‬son ,and ‫ ابنة‬mening daughter, i.e. originating from , B
or

caused by, dependent upon or related to something; şi brother, i.e.

connected with or related to something. The nouns gó,bow , and
jsi, are constantly used in this way in ordinary prose ; the others,
being metaphorical, belong almost exclusively to poetry and poetical
diction . For example : ‫ و الخير‬the good, ‫ و العلي‬the learned ,
‫ و فضل‬gracious, ‫ و ما‬wealths, ‫ و جور‬a relation , ‫أرض ذا شوك‬
Oto

a piece of land covered with thorns, yw gigi intelligent persons, C

‫ذوو الأرحام‬, or ‫ أولو الأرحام‬relations : ‫صاحب الطبع المستقيم‬ one

with good natural parts, akási violó the person who has committed
a fault,‫ ه صاحب خبر‬scout, spy, or mouchard, ‫ صاحب علم‬a man
a

of learning, wij si blondi the inmates of Paradise and Hell ;

a men just those who conform to the practices (and sayings] of Muham
mad, ‫ أهل الأهواء‬persons of erroneous opinions, theretics, ‫ أهل العلم‬D
the learned , ‫ أهل اللغة‬tearicographers ; ‫ » أبو الأضياف‬hospitableman , JE

olási vi the father (supporter) of life, i.e. the rain, umassi mi 42

the father ( constructor) of the little fortress, i.e. the fox , Teji
the mother (cause) of disgraceful acts, i.e. wine, i barof the main
road : ) ‫ بنا الطريق‬thebranches of theroad ;[ ‫ اإببنن اآلوسیبيل‬the son of
the way, i.e. the traveller, yjó il a warrior,sat i! the son of
 204 PART THIRD . - Syntax. [$ 82

A howling, i.e. the jackal; hur brain the daughter of the mountain,
.,theecho ; ‫أوالخير‬, ‫أوالجهد‬, ‫أو الغني‬, ‫أوالعلم‬,,the good ,.
i.e
(
the laborious, the wealthy,the learned, gooi gói a brother of Tèmim,
one of the tribe of Temim ; Lundi gói the brother of wine,i.e. a man
drunk with wine. Connected herewith is the use of in ‫بنت ابنة‬
to indicate the age of a person , as ‫ هو ابن ثمانين سنه‬he is eighty
B years old (lit. he is the son of eighty years). A poet ( Hamāsa, p. 6)
employs ‫ أخ‬in the same manner :
‫أو خمسين‬Afty years old [.
82. Further, some secondary ideas, such as those of the whole,
the part, the like, and the different, which we usually designate by
adjectives, prepositions, or compound words, are expressed in Arabic
by substantives, taking the primary substantives, to which they are
attached , in the genitive. Such are :

С (a) is (Heb. Si, Syr. Veg, , Æth. Tra kwèll, the

totality, the whole (lit. what is rolled and gathered together ; compare
569 to roll, 1 6 ,is, a crown, 553 to make complete or perfect,
Sba
borbe perfect, the whole). If the leading substantive is definite, and
signifies something single and indivisible, is means whole, as
‫ ځل البيت‬thewhole house, ‫ كل اليوم‬thewhole day;ifit is definite,
but a plural or a collective, is means all,as ‫ ځل الحيوانات‬all the
D animals, wwwi is all mankind; if it is indefinite, jis means each,
every,as ‫ « ما كل سوداء تمرة بيضاء شحمة‬ot everything tohich isblack
is a date, and (not everything which is) white a bit offat ; suo jsi
‫ تحسبين امرا وار توقد بالليل تارا‬dost thou consider etery man a
(true) man, and (every) fire that blazes at night a (true) fire ( really
deserving of the name) ? mis js every stratagem, ogse jó every

day,)(‫ كل واحد (أي‬each single one, ‫ كل من‬every onewho (in

$ 82] The Noun . — Gov't of Noun.-Stat. Construct. & Genit. 205

which case theannexation is explicative, ‫إضافة التفسير والبيان‬, each , A

viz. stratagem , etc.)* .- Frequently, however, the definite primary
substantive is put first, and is is placed after it, in annexation to
a pronominal suffix agreeing with the primary substantive, which is,
as it were, repeated in the suffix ; as ‫ته‬ ‫ البيت‬the whole house,
‫و‬
‫ها‬ ‫ الأرض‬thewhole earth , ‫ الناس لهم‬al mankind. Instead‫ل‬of,
this construction,we sometimes find jäi, tò tây, and even
which is definite, notwithstanding the tènwin, and stands, according B
to circumstances, for ‫ ثم ثنا‬, etc.; as ‫وقد تجمعت االصععااليليك‬
‫ه‬

‫والأرامل والأيتام وانت قد أتوا ليشقوا جمالهم والأغنام وبوا الل‬

‫ عند البناء قياما‬andthe poor andaidous and orphans had assembled ,
and had all come to water their camels and flocks, and they all
remained standing near the auter ) ‫وعاد وفرعون ;( كلهم = اتغل‬
‫هه‬

‫ وإخوان توط وأصحاب الأيكة وقوم تبع كل محب الرسل‬and d, C

and Pharaoh, and the brethren of Lot, and the inhabitants of the
grove, and the people of Tubba ', all accused the apostles of imposture
‫ ثجعل‬or ‫وهبنا له إسحق ويعقوب ولا ;( كل واحد منهم‬
‫منا نبي)ا‬
we gave him ( Abraham ) Isaac and Jacob, and each of them
we
aremade a prophet )ats = ‫ كل واحد منهما‬or ‫كل يوث ; (منهم‬
.all
must die,ice ‫ قتل أجاب وبايع ; أي من الناس‬andthey al
[In poetry js, followed by an indefinite noun in the genitive D
singular, is often used, like the German word lauter, to denote a
number of objects all of which possess this or that quality, e.g.
erlo stato is yet výg and (he cared for) no treasure save
only mares,all of them short-haired and hard-hoofed ; woláás jó rés
vanami with me were comrades,each of them clail in a loose-fitting
tunic, in German, es begleiteten mich lauter Freunde mit weiten Kleid
ern .]
 206 PART THIRD - Syntax. [$ 82

A assented andstore allegiance; ]) ‫ إن كل إلا كذب الرشد‬there areas

the apostles of lying).
not any one but accused
REH . This last remark appliesalso to ‫ غد‬tomorroup, = ‫غد اليوم‬
‫م‬and
‫غد; قذالبكل اذلليكومالعا‬, and to ‫ قابل‬neast year, = ‫ قابل لهذا العام‬and
‫ أرسله معنا غدا‬send him with us tomorroup ;
‫ إذا ما ویت جنی تخلة ق تقربنا إلى قابل‬solten thout gettest
B the plucking of a palm -tree, do not put it off till next year.

(6) With the use of is coincides in most points that of emotion

the totality, the whole (lit. what is collected , from me
‫جمع‬, connected with
‫ ; )( جه‬as ‫جميع الناس‬ or ‫الناس جميعهم‬, all mankind (but also
‫الناس جميعا‬, whereas ‫ ألا کر‬is inadmissible (; ‫المدينة جميعها‬
the enhole city ; ‫ فلا ولی اللى قتل الجميع‬and after he obtained
C the Sovereignty, he put them all to death ) ‫الجميع‬, 3d ‫ ة‬۸oy,equivalent
in this case to ‫ فإذا هم جميع لدينا محضرون ;( جميعهم‬and lo, they
shall be assembled before us all together.
REM . Similar is the use of kólá the great mass or bulk, the
greatest part, (the whole] (properly the fem . participle of as to
comprise or comprehend ); as ‫يجري في سهم وعامة دورهم‬
‫ وحماماتهم‬it (thewater) runs in their streets and the greatest part
‫رہ‬ ,

D of their housesandbaths; ‫ وعامة أبنيتها حجارة‬and the greatestpart

‫ر ر‬
of its buildings are (of) stone; bolo ver mandi the great bulk of the
army,[the achtole arms[; ‫ قرأ العامة على الفعل المجهول فيهما‬most
( readers of the Ķorān) read according to the passive voice in both
)acords(; ‫ جاء القوم عامة‬the people came in a body.The word
sứu the rest,the remainder (properly the participle of a to be over,
to be left, Heb. 780 ), is incorrectly used by later [even elegant]
;
writers in thesenseof all,as ‫ قدم سائر الحاج‬all thepilgrims
$ 82] The Noun . — Gov't of Noun . - Stat. Construct. & Genit. 207

have arrived ; ‫ أشوفي سائر الخراج‬the wohole of the property-taa A

has been collected *.

((
c) war a part, a portion ,, is used with the genitive of a plural
or a collective to signify some one or more, a certain one, some one,
one , as
‫ خاطب بعض التلاميذ محمد بن الحسن‬one of his pupils
addressed Muhammad the son of al-Hasan ; ‫ في بعض المغاير‬in a
certain cate ; ‫ في بعض الأيام‬one day ; ‫ أنشد بعضيم‬herecited (the
following verses) composed by one of them ( one of the poets, by a certain B
poet(; ‫ وأحذرهم أن يفوك عن بعض ما أنزل الله إليك‬and bencare
of them, lest they lead thee astray from part of what ( from any of the
precepts which) God has sent down (revealed) unto thee.If vál
be repeated as a correlative, no pronominal suffix is added to it in the
second place ; as ‫ بعض الشرأهون من بعض‬some evils are easier to
be borne than others ; ‫ ولو كان بعضهم ببعض ظهيرا‬even though the
one of them should aid the other ; ‫و إن يعد الظالمون بعضهم بعضا إلا‬
gas the wicked make to one another only vain (or deceitful) promises ;
‫ ظلمات بعضها فوق بعض‬darkneses one upon another (darknessupon
darkness). In modern Arabic the second vás is often omitted.—
Lastly , ‫ ] البعض‬and even ‫ بعض‬without the article] is sometimes
used instead of ‫ بعض‬with the genitive ; a8 ‫إذا قام به البعض في‬
‫ بلدة سقط عن الباقين‬when some people) in a town observe it, it is
not required of (lit. it falls of from the rest ; ‫ وقد خالفه البعض‬D
• [ To the same class belong also to
* ‫ جد‬and also in expressions like

‫ جد لئيم‬erymean = ‫ ما أنا جد عالم زيم جدا‬I am notvery learned

‫ ح أمين ; عالم جدا‬most trustful := ‫ذائب أمين حقا‬ ‫ يوم‬an
intensely hot day = ‫ذائب كلها‬. Comp.9137, rem . b and the Gloss.to
s. v. i
.Tabar ‫حق‬. .D.G[)
 208 Part THIRD . - Syntax. [S 82

A ‫ في ذلك‬someopposed them in thismater : ‫أخذت بعضا وتركت بعضا‬

I took a part (of it) and left a part].

( d) alteration, diference, as a concrete, something different,

is used with a following genitive to designate one or more objects
other than, differing from , or the opposite of, the object or objects
expressed by the genitive. In the last case it corresponds to our
negative prefix un or in ; in the others it may be rendered by another,
‫هو ره‬ ‫و‬

B other, et cætera, and the like. For example : les jolikings

‫ن‬
and others; ‫ الشجاعة والقوة والشفقة وغيرها‬bravery,strength, clemency ,
and other qualities ; ‫ جاء الوزراء والقضاة وغيرهم‬there came the pairs,
, etc ; s‫ وغير ذلك‬et catera: ‫ أفغير دین الله تبغون‬do you then
.judge
seek another religion thanthatof God ??‫من إله غير الله يأتيگم به‬what
god is there but God, who would bring it (back) to you ? öglands
uncreated ; ‫ غير المخلوق‬the uncreated ; ‫ غير ممكن‬impossible ; ‫غیر‬
) ‫ العرب‬not Arabs; ‫ وجهه إلى غير مضر‬his face arasnot turned toacards
Egypt ; zło stá Jür and he halted away from water, or without
access to water. et is very rarely used instead of us with the
genitive ; as ‫الغير‬ ‫ تصافحها أ‬the hands of others clasp them
( ). -- When in the accusative, é, which always remains a
substantive, often requires to be translated by a preposition or con
junction, such as ercept, but; e.g. Ja see ogili ólá the people
D stood up, except 'Abū Bèkr; Jolante så ý thou wilt never seem
(or be thought) but a fool *.– On and women is, without, see $ 56,
rem . c. The expressions de sÝ and more common are used in the sense
.

of not otherwise, nothing more [Vol. i. $ 363) ; as you ý lom bio je

that which is used as an accusative of time, not otherwise; je vÝ jy
* [On u ‫ر‬er
‫ غي‬vi si
vip comp.the footnote to Vol. i.$ 367.]
$ 82] The Noun . — Gov't of Noun . - Stat. Construct. & Genit. 209

in the nominative, not otherapise ; ‫ عندی درهم ليس غير‬I have a A

dirham aboutme,nothing more ;i... ‫ليس غير ذلك ولا غير ذلك‬
REM. a. When the sense demands a repetition of the
particle Ý is used instead, likewise followed by the genitive ; as
‫ من غير أب ولا أمر‬suithoutfatherandmother ; ‫بغير علم ولا هی‬
‫ ولا كتاب منير‬without either knowledge or guidance or a book to
givethem right; ‫ أغرقه غیر خود ولا ظلوم‬I knoohim to beneither B
entionsnor tyrannical; ‫صراط الذين أنعمت عليهم غير المغضوب‬
‫ عليهم ولا الضالين‬the path of those to thom Thou art gracious,
with whom Thou art not angry, and who go not astray.
REM. b. Instead of in the nom., genit. or accus., followed
by the genit. of an adjective, we sometimes find gý with the corre
‫غير ذلول‬case of theadjective; as ‫ بقرة لا ذلول‬an unbroken heifer,
=sponding
= C

(e) Sony (rarely sợ and slow), another (besides So -and -so),

likewise runs through all the cases ; as
‫وسواك مانع فضله المحتاج‬
whilst others than thou withhold their benefits from the needy (see
$ 30 , ,b rem , b( ; ‫ فسواك بائعها وأنتت الممششتتريري‬then another than thou
is the seler and thou art the buyer ; ‫واكفني بقضية عن سواك‬
and suffice me with Thy bounty, so that I may have no need of any D
‫ر‬

other but Thee; ‫دعوت ربي أن لا ينط على أي عدوا من سوى أنفسها‬
I have prayed to my Lord that He would let no enemy conquer my
people, that belonged to another race than themselves; ‫ولا ينط‬
‫ الفحشاء من كان منه إذا جلوا منا و من سوائنا‬and no one of
them speaks a foul word, either when they sit with us or with others
than us; ‫ وإن سواك من يؤتيه يشقى‬and he acho places hope in
any other than thee is wretched .-- When in the accusative, it must
W, II . 27
 210 PART THIRD . - Syntax. [$ 82

A often be translated by besides (compare ‫ غير‬in d ); a8 ‫سوى العلم‬

besides science ;; ‫ سوی نمونه رونق المجلس‬besides its [or his ] being
an ornament in society.

)‫مثل ( ر‬, plur, ‫أمثال‬, likeness

‫ الربوا‬,‫ل‬as‫ مث‬an‫يع‬adjective
‫ر‬
‫ إنما الب‬,‫وا‬like
‫ قال‬,‫هم‬also
‫ بأن‬runs
‫ذلك‬
through all the cases ; as

thisbecause they say, Selling ismerely likeusury ; ‫إن أنتم إلا بشر مثلنا‬
Bye are nothingbutmen likeas, ‫ تها أجنحة مثل القاش‬they have
anings like (those of ) bats; ‫ على المرة مثلها بدا‬on each date the
likeofit in butter (a piece of butter of thesamesize(;‫ليس كمثله شيء‬
there is nothing likeunto Him ; ‫تېتي اجتمعت الإنس والجن على أن‬
‫ يأتوا بمثير هذاالقرآن لايثون بمثله‬if mankind and the jinn nunited
to produce the like of this Ķor'ün, they could not produce the like of it ;
‫ كذلك قال الذين لا يعلمون مثل قولهم‬similarly,thosewho have no
C knowledge say the like of their saying (of what they say ); at jy
‫ أحدكم كل يوم مثل أحد ذهبا‬if oneofyou spentevery day the likeof
(the hill of) 'Ohod in gold (a quantity of gold as large as the hill of
'Ohod(; ‫ كان السباع مصورين مثل بني آدم‬if ‫ من تو‬thewild beasts
acerepainterslike men ; ) ‫ممثل البرق‬he passed like the lightning[;
‫ بي مثلا ما تك‬I have twice asmuch as thout; ‫ يرونهم مثليهم‬they
thought them tuoice as@smany as themselves; ‫وبها قرود بيض كأمثال‬
D ‫ الكباش الكبار‬and in it are oohite apes, like (as big as ) large rams ;
‫ أمر أن يعلى عشرة أمثال ما سأل‬he ordered that he should be given
ten times as much as he asked ; ( judji is used instead of his with the
genitive in expressions like Midi Yat the price paid for a similar
O

thing (= atés), video japó the dowry given to a lady of her rank
) = ‫امثلها‬
§ 82] The Noun.—Gov't of Noun . - Stat. Construct.& Genit. 211
REM . a.
Exactly like us, but formally undeveloped,is ý the A
like of. See $ 63.

REM.b. Similar is the use of ‫] شبه‬or ‫شبیه‬.[ likeness, the like,

‫قدر‬, or ‫مقدار‬, measure,, size, quantity, uoorth , and ‫ا‬to‫ ه‬computation
(by conjecture ), which last may usually be translated by about ; as
‫ ونحت الأوتون في الجبل يشبه درج يصعد عليه‬and the ancients
have cut out in the mountain ( something) like steps (or a stair ), by
which onecan ascend ; [‫ هي في شبه الجزيرة‬it (the tolone)lies in a B
sort of peninsula ; ‫ هو شبيه شجرالأثرج‬it (this tree) has‫قر‬the
likeness of a lemon-tree ; also construed with y as áis emais
‫ب‬

‫ كتاب الطهارة في شبيه بألف وخمس مائة ورقة‬and he edited from

this work the Book of Purification in ( a volume) of about 1500
leaves[; ‫الصعناممقالدكرب ارلرجل المعتدل الخلقة‬a‫در‬statute ‫ رقة‬of‫(ش‬astall
‫خضر ق‬the‫ و‬size ‫طواوي‬
as) a well-proportioned man ;
peacocks, speckled and green, as big as large ostriches ; [ašlo je o C
they areasmanyasaa hundred[); ‫تحت المائة عن مقدار ستة أصابع‬
under the knob is a neck (or shaft) measuring six fingers ; to go
‫ كثير قدر ما يدير حی‬it is a large body of water, as much as
arould turn amil ; ‫بأرض الهند بحيرة مقدار عشرة فراسخ في مثلها‬
in the country of India is a lake, measuring ten parasanys (in
length ) by the same (in breadth (: ‫يجتمع ماها في غدیر مقدار‬
‫ة غلوة سهر في غلوة هم‬its touter collects in a pond,measuringaD
bownshotby a boualiot; ‫ رأى في الماء مكة مقدار ذراع‬hesame in
the upater a fish,measuringa cubit (in length(; ‫اجتمع له في أيام‬
‫ المأمون مهم زهاء ثلة آلاف غلام‬there avere collected of them by
him , in the days of Al-Ma'main , about 3000 slaves ; ‫تعله يكون‬
‫ على الميت منها هاه ألف ذراع‬perhaps there maybe on eaclecorpse
about 1000 els of it ; ‫إلى ماء نضفها‬ to about the half of it ;
 212 Part THIRD . — Syntax. [$ 83

A ‫ يگون طول النير هاء ثلثين ذراعا‬the length height) of the image
is about thirty cubits. This last word is sometimes construed with
‫ من‬as ‫تن ها؛ من خمس مائة رج‬ we were about 500 men
in number .

(g) geen properly signifies direction, quarter, and is used in the

accusative as a preposition (see $ 65). But more usually ‫ نحو‬is
employed , in all its cases, as a substantive or adjective, to signify
such as, like ; as ‫ رجل نحو زید‬a man like Zeid ; ‫وكذلك في سائر‬
,

B ‫ الأخلاق نحو الجود والبخل‬and similarly in regard to the other

moral qualities,such as liberality and niggardliness; ‫الصلوة والتموم‬
‫ ونحوهما‬as prayer , fasting,, and the like ; ‫) تعلم نحو زيد‬.i.e
‫ (تمتهاتوتكثير زيد‬he spoke like Zaid. Asa substantive it also
means about, in which case it may be followed ( like kaj in f, rem . b)
wax
by ‫ ;زمن‬as ‫ والشمع تو من مائة شمعة‬and the acas.candles teere
C about a hundred ; ‫ ثم يفيث من أفيها إلا نحو ثلثين رج‬there
escaped of its inhabitants only about thirty men ; ‫كان في نحو أربعة‬
‫ آلاف‬he was at the head of about 4000; ‫ على نحو ست مراحل‬at (a
distance of) about sin marches ; ‫ بها مماث صغار نحو القبر‬in it
are small snakes, about a span (long(; ‫ ضاد سمكة نحو القبر‬he
caught a fish about a spatin (long (;; ‫ هي في الكبير نحو من فید‬it
D is about the size of Feid ;; ‫ وهم نحو من أربع مائة رجلي‬and they
tere about 400 men (in number"(); ‫ا‬úss
‫ما ذكرن‬o ‫ روی نحوا‬he handed
‫أعطى عبيد مله‬
down nearly the same (story)) as we have mentioned ;; ati
‫ الخرك نحوا من خمسين ألف درهم‬،Obaidullah gate Al-Harig about
50,000 dirhams.

.83 ‫ كلان‬, .fem ‫ان‬.both

‫ كلت‬, , a pair (compare Heb ‫ديد‬
two things of different kinds, Æth. han : fem . nakt : two),
$ 83] The Noun.—Gov't of Noun . - Stat. Construct. & Genit. 213
is always construed with the genitive dual of a definite noun or A
pronoun, or, it may be, with the gen . sing. or plur. of a pronoun ,
when it is to be taken in the sense of the dual ; as ‫ كلا الرجلين‬both
the men ; ‫ كلتا الجثتين‬both the gardens : ‫ أحدهما أو كلاهما‬one of
the tuoo or both of them ; ‫ ويعته أن يلقاه كلانا‬and He knotes that
both of astillmeet Him (at the judgment(; ‫إن الخير والشر می‬
‫ وكلا ذلك وجه وقبل‬both good and evil have their limit, and both
are plain and clear (j in rhyme for job). This word is not B
inflected except when it is connected with a pronominal suffix ; as
‫ رأيت كلا أخويك‬Ihave seen thytwobrothers (not ‫مررت بكلتا ;( كلی‬
‫ أختي‬I pased by they too sisters (not ‫ ;( بعثتی‬but ‫إن المعلم‬
‫ والطبيب كليهما‬theteacher and thephysician,both of them ; ‫مررت‬
‫ زینب وفاطمة كلتيهما‬I passed by Zeinab and Fatima, both of
them . Although dual in form , it takes the predicate in the singular ;
as
[archa hao bógís each of them loves his friend, i.e. they c
love oneanother[; ‫ كلانا غنى عن أخيه كيوته‬each of uscan dispense
eith his brother, allhis life log ; ‫ كنا إذا ما نال شيئا أقاته‬mohen
either of us obtainsanything,he lets it slip ; ‫كلا أخوينا كان فرعا دعامة‬
each of our two brothers was an eminent man , a support of his people ;
‫ كلاما لم يصب‬neither of you has hit the right thing[; ‫كلتا‬
‫ الجثتين أتت أكلها‬each of the gardens produced its fruit ; ‫ هنا‬D
‫ رجلان كلاهما إليك بغي‬here are two men , both of tohom are
hateful to you.—In poetry it is sometimes joined to two singular
genitives,as ‫ كلاأي وخلیلی واجدی عضدا في النائبات‬mybrother
and my friend both find me a help in misfortunes ; but in prose we
cannot say ‫ كلا زید وعمرو‬both Zeid and Amr,instead of ‫زید وعمرو‬
‫ كلاهما‬or ‫كلاهما من زید وعمرو‬
 214 PART THIRD- Syntaa. [$ 84

A REM . (.
When ygis necessarily denotes both together, not
each of the two separately, it naturally takes the predicate in
thedual,as ‫ وكلاهما يعاني ځل ضار ونافع‬and thesetwo together
W

comprise everything hurtful and useful ; ‫كلاهما حين ج الشير‬

‫ بينها قد أقعا‬both of them ,when setting out becameearnest between
them (when they had to set out), started ; or even in the plural, as
‫ كلانا فعلنا ذلك‬we two have done this together.
B
.REM.6 ‫ كلا‬and ‫ كلتا‬are sometimes written ‫ کلی‬and ‫ کلتی‬,
and in poetry the shorter form éis very rarely occurs.
.84 ‫ رب‬many 0.۰۰۰ , Germ . manch, Fr. maint, is construed
with an indefinite substantive in the genitive, followed by an indefinite
adjective in the same case , or by a nominal or verbal clause (with the
verb in the perfect) standing in place of such an adjective; as
‫ ررب جلي كريم قد لتقیيت‬many a noble man have Imet ; ‫و رجل‬
C ‫ رأيته جاه‬many a man have I thought foolish ; ‫قد مره ذلك‬
‫ اليوم‬manya drinking-cup did I empty on that day ; ‫بن ورقاء موف‬
‫لی ذات شجو مدث في فتن‬-many
‫با‬ a cooling dose,Morrot
stricken, cries in the morning on a branch.-- Sometimes the pronominal
suffix ó* is appended to ‫ب‬y,
‫ ر‬, and the indefinite substantive put in
the accusative, as a ‫) تمييز‬$ 14, 2(, or by the verb ‫أغني‬, Imean ,
D understood ; as ‫ » ور ببهه عطا أنقذت من عطبه‬d many a perishing
(man) hast thou saved from destruction (atas in rhyme for clas).
When the substantive is feminine, or in the dual or plural,- ‫مه‬some ‫و در‬
grammarians allow the use of the corresponding pronouns ; ads ‫ربه امراة‬

[Called in this case ‫الضمير المجهول‬, because the noun to which

it relates has not previously been mentioned . Comp. Fleischer,
Kl. Schr. i. 419.]
 $ 84] The Noun.— Gov't of Noun . - Stat. Construct.di Genit. 215
‫رشوه‬

or ‫رها امرأة‬, many automan ; ‫ بهم رجالا‬many men ;, ‫ ربههن نساء‬A

many women .

REM, a. Other forms of this word are : ‫رببت رب‬

‫بت‬
‫ ژببت‬of which themost common are ‫ و‬and ‫ ; ت‬as ‫أميم مل‬
‫' تدرين أن رب صاحب فارقت يوم شاش غير ضعیف‬Umeema,dont
thou know that I parted on the day (i.e. at the battle) of Hośāś
from many a sturdy friend ) ‫ ضعیف‬in rhynefor ‫ رب خطبة ;(ضعیف‬B
‫ مسحنفرة‬many a long oration (in rhyme for ‫( حنفرة‬. The
addition of ‫) ما العلاقة‬sees36, rem . dl usually hinders the regimen
‫مہر‬

of , as ‫ بها الكامل المؤبل فيهم‬many a large and thriving

herd of camels is (to be found) among them ; but it is sometimes
added without producing any effect ))‫;( ما الزائدة‬.se
( ]; S 70,rem e f'(,
as
‫ بها ضربة بسيف صقيل‬many a stroke toith a polished acord ; C
‫ بتما غارة‬many a raid (see
( rem . c(.

Rem. 6. From *; and to is formed the adverb hnig many a

time, sometimes, perhaps, which may be prefixed to either aa nominal
]in which case ‫ ما‬is ‫ [ ما الكائ‬or a verbal clause [in
( which case ‫ ما‬is
‫ ;[ ما المصرية‬as ‫ رما زيد في الدار‬perhaps Zeid is in thehouse;
‫ربما جاونی زید‬many a timehas Zaid come tome; ‫ربما يود الذين‬
‫ كفروا لو كانوا مسلمين‬often till those toho have not believed , D.

wish that they had been Muslims ; ‫ربما يقول ما لا تقبله العقول‬
perhaps he may say something which our undertakings cannot receive
( which we cannot admit)* .
‫رشته‬
*
[In the verse ‫ما ته الشفو من الأمر ته فوجة حب العقال‬
for many a thing that the souls dislike there is a removal (as easy) as
the loosing of a camels rope, ‫ ما‬isa ‫) ما موصوفة‬Vol. i. $ 348 ), with
‫ من الأمر‬18 ‫بيان‬, and ‫ له فرجه الخ‬as dio. See Fleischer, Kl.Schr.
S

i. 420.]
 216 PART THIRD . - Syntax. ($ 85

REM. C.
A
is the accusative of a substantive ,Heb. 25,
‫درب‬
multitude, quantity, dependent upon the interjection ţ (8 38, a, B),
which is generally understood, though sometimes expressed ; as
‫ یا رب كاسية في الدنيا عارية يوم القيمة‬many a (tooman who is(
the resurrection ;
clothed in this world , (will be) naked on the day of
‫ائم‬
‫ن يصوم‬s‫ه ت‬andto
‫ه‬ásgás ‫ یا‬many a one who is keeping its fast (noro)
shall not keep its fast (again ), meaning the fast of Ramadān ;
B
‫یا ر خال بی أ أنتجا‬Ú many amaternal ‫ج‬uncle ; ‫ في‬I‫ك‬,noble
‫ (أبل‬have ‫رب مثل‬and‫یا‬
bright of countenance (litum in rhyme for
‫ النساء غري‬many aa one like thee among women , inexperienced in
,
love afraira: ‫ ماری یا تما غارة شعواء اللذعة بالبيشي‬Maulya,
many a far extending raid is like a burn with the branding iron .
Together with its genitive it has the value of a whole clause, to
the indefinite noun in which there is added a áig, that is to say,
a

с an adjective or a clause taking the place of an adjective. This

‫ صفة‬the grammarians call ‫ جواب رټ‬, the answer or complement of
3. It is curious to note that ‫ ب‬has passed, like the German
manch , Fr. maint, and Eng. many a .... , from its original signi
fication of multitude, into one which is almost the opposite, viz. not
a great many. The same remark applies to body and the Germ .
vielleicht, perhaps. Hence some of the Arab grammarians say that
‫ ژب‬is used ‫ل‬way
‫ القلي‬to denote a small number ; others, july to

D denote a large number.

‫ رب‬we frequently find the

85. In consequence of the elision of y,
‫ واو‬the wāw
indefinite genitive alone after the conjunction s ( sy's
of rubba, equivalent in meaning to rubba) ; as ‫ وكأس شرب‬many
a cup have I guaifed ; ‫ وأراكة ضربت ماء فوقنا‬many an 'araka-tree
formed a roof over us ; ‫ ولی موج البحر أي دولة على‬many »a
night, like (dark as) the waves of the sea , has let down its curtain
$ 85] The Noun.—Gov't of Noun. -— Stat. Construct. & Genit. 217

upon me; ‫ وقاحة من وين صيغ نفها ومن جلنار نضفها وشقائق‬A
there is many an apple, the one half of which is fashioned of a lily,
and the other half of a pomegranate blossom and an anemone.— The
same is the case, though rarely, after us, and still more rarely after
‫ ;; بل‬as
a3 ‫ ځبلی قذ طرقت وممرضع‬suiss ‫ فيثي‬many a one like thee have I
‫و مہ‬

misitedbynight,pregnantandnursingachild ; ‫بل بتير من الفجاجقمه‬

nay, many a town,the dust of which fills the wide roads and in rhyme
,
for ‫بل مهمه قطعت بعد مهمه ;(قته‬nay,many a desert after desert B
have I traversed ; ‫ بل جوز تهاء ظهر الحجفت‬nay,many a middle
ofa desert, like the back of a shield ( induſ in rhyme for a maji).
Occasionally even these particles are omitted, and the genitive alone
appears ; as ávís so seis els ning many a deserted abode, amid the
ruins of which I have stood (aub in rhyme for all ) ; ;sú mors
‫ قطع الدهر فيها وعذب‬j‫ منه روضة لل‬many a garden of lilieshoe IcC
visited early in the morning, in which it was sweet and pleasant to
pass the time )‫ وعذب‬in rhyme for ‫وعب‬.
[REM . The theory about this g with a following genitive is
that of most native and European scholars. Nevertheless, I think
it ought to be rejected. There are a great many cases where it
is impossible to render it by many a, as it appears from the
context that a single person, a single object, or a single fact is
recorded, so that we must translate it by I remember, I think of, D
o that ! etc.,As ‫اجر فاجر جاء الإله به‬-on
‫ وت‬that unbelieving wine
merchant, a real godsend ! whom the poet robbed ; ‫وجفين سلاح‬
ájs iš I think about that scabbard of mine that I have been
deprived of ; Noming langog Oh sender and sent one ! (on that
splendid evening); digig I think of those tender ladies, who spoke
on the day of my departure ; Jhis willing On that dust-coloured
wolf! says el-Farazdaḥ, telling of his meeting with a wolf. I take
W. II . 28
 218 PART THIRD.-Syntax. [$ 86

A this ‫و‬g to be the remnant of a word, like the sin avis (comp. Vol. i.
$§ 356, footnote ). In fact, though the elision of ‫ ر;ب‬after a copu
lativeſ is not impossible, as is sometimes the case after i and ,
I do not remember ever to have seen at the beginning of a
sentence, nor do we ever find us employed where only a single
person , object or fact is mentioned . D. G. ]

86. With the genitive are also construed verbal adjectives

B expressing the superlative, whether of the common form besi (Vol. i.
§ 234), or of any other form , such as ‫ل‬lees
‫() فع‬e.g. ‫ خير‬, jude);
‫ ( ژ‬as‫أعلم‬
‫ الفلاسفة‬the most learned of the philosophers, ‫ خير البرية‬the best of
created things (see $ 93). Here the genitive designates the whole,
out of which some one or something
JOE
is brought conspicuously forward
as its most remarkable part. As jei and Mes are in this construction
definite substantives, and not adjectives, they do not conform in
gender and number to the object or objects referred to ; so that
c ‫ خير البرية‬or ‫ أفضل القوم‬may besaid of a single man or woman ,or
of two or more persons of either sex [comp. $ 93, rem . a ).— To indicate
that an object is the greatest or most distinguished of its kind, the
substantive is often repeated in the form of the definite genitive
ఉంది , E
plural; as szobai mol the emir of the emirs, i.e. the chief emir ;
‫ قاضي القضاة‬the chief judge ; ‫ طلحة الطحات‬the Talha of the Talas,
i.e. the noblest of those who bear the name of Țalḥa . — To show that
certain objects possess the highest degree of a quality, the adjective
D which designates that quality is construed with the genitive plural
of the substantive, and becoming then virtually a substantive need
not vary with the gender and number of the objects spoken of ; as
loisosi umas the most precious gems (lit. the precious of gems) ;
‫ ابغ النعيم‬, or ‫سوابغ النعيم‬, themost ample faucours ; ‫صالح الإخوان‬
the trust friends ; ‫ صالح نساء قريش‬the best aromen of Kurdi ;
Jie yi allo the best manners.--Another manner of expressing the
$ 86] The Noun.- Gov't of Noun.-Stat. Construct.& Genit. 219

same is the use ofthesuperlative

‫ ان‬followed by ‫ ما (المصدرية‬with the A
corresponding person of us or another verb,, or with the cor
responding personal pronoun,as ‫ لهذا أأخخببثث ما ككان‬or ‫هذا أخبث ما هو‬
he is the craftiest man that lives ; ‫فقالوه أشير ما يكون من القتالي‬
they fought against him asfierce a fight as is possible ; ‫والآن أحوج‬
‫ ما څا إلى زاير‬and at present we have the greatest want of
provisions; ‫ بقيمة أكثر ما كانت‬for the highest price; ‫أوجر ما أنا‬
‫ سهل‬is I dislike nothing more than ( the name of) Samlașa ; B
‫ة‬áél.com
‫ه أجود ما خر‬.this
‫هو والل‬ (horse) is indeed most e.tcellently trained
Comp. Fleischer, Kl. Schr. i. 475 seq. , 685 seq . iii. 16 and my note
Journ. Asiat. 1883, i. 541 , 542. D. G.]
‫شر‬
REM . a. The numeral adjective jji first, being strictly a super
‫هر روہ‬

lative, is also construed with the genitive, as ongi the first of them ,
‫ أول يوم‬the first day= ‫ ;اليوم الأول‬but this construction is not
extended in classical Arabic to the other ordinal numbers (Vol. i. C
$ 328), which are nomina agentis from transitive verbs (see $ 109 ),
though later writers not unfrequently use them in this way, as
‫ ثانی‬for the second time= ‫ المرة الثانية‬Modern and vulgar are
=

such constructions as ‫ الثاني يوم‬the second day , ‫ الثالث مرة‬the

third time. [Comp. $ 108.]
REM.b. In such phrases as ‫ عزيز كتابگ‬your honored letter,
the genitive does not designate the whole, of which the láó is a
‫ہر مره در پس‬
part , butit is (as in ‫ نهر الأردن‬the river Jordan ) merely explicative D
)see $ 9.5 ); so that ‫= العزيز الذي هو كتابه = عزيز كتابه‬
-

‫ ] كتابه العزيز‬Similarly ‫ليس له رستاق كبير = ليس تلهه كبير ستاتي‬

it has no great territory * .]

* [On the use of jus and juis with a following genitive in

negative sentences, see the Gloss. to Tabari s. v. dol. D. G.]
 220 PART THIRD.Syntaa. [$ 87
‫ش رو‬
A 87. The interrogative pronoun isi, fem . åsi (Vol. i. $$ 349, 353),
is construed with the genitive, indefinite or definite ; as ‫أى رجل‬
‫تره‬

which man ? wehen 'si which two men ? unele di'si which of the
two men ? ‫ أ رجال‬hich men ? ‫ أي التيجاني‬which of the men ?
‫ أى من رأيت أفضل‬wohich of those whom thou hast seen is the better,
or the best ? ‫ أي الذين تقيت أمحرم‬schich of thosewhom thou hastmet
‫عدو‬ ‫رہ‬
B is the noblest ? ‫ ں ایہما‬hich of the tuto ? ‫ ایہم‬aphich of them ? In the
former case the annexation is explicative, in the latter partitive.
With a definite singular ‫ي‬isi‫ أ‬can be construed only when the annexa
tion is strictly partitive,as ‫أى الرجبي أحسن‬, or ‫أي زي أحسن‬
what ( part or feature) of the man, or of Zeid, is the most handsome ?
or elsewhen ‫ أى‬itself is repeated,as ‫اپی وأي كان شرا فأخزاه الله‬
whichever of us (two) be the bad one, may God bring him to shame ;
‫ه‬
) ‫ ألا تسألون الناس أټی وایم غداة التقينا كان خيرا وأخرما‬achy dost
thou not ask the people, which of us, on the morning we met, was the
‫شروه‬
best and themostnoble ? ) ‫ أبی وأبيك‬and ‫(اینا = أى وأيم‬.
88. The genitive of a verbal noun is not unfrequently resolved
into a clause consisting of gf or L and a finite form of the verb ; as
a

‫ عجبت من أن قمت‬I wonder at thy standing up,= ‫زمن قيام‬

‫ وقت أني أستتر‬at the time hehid himself,= ‫وإنما پهیي زوقت آتاره‬
D ‫طالب العلم ما تقول يكثرة ما يقولون في الماني الأول ما تقول في‬
a ois the student of science was named Mā-taķīlu (what dost
thou say ?) for no other reason than that, in the olden time, they
used constantly to say, What dost thou say (må taķūlu) about this
question ? = ‫ عجبت منها ضربت زيدا ; يكثرة قولهم‬I tronder at thy
beating Zeid,= ‫ با تشوا يوم الحساب من ضربك‬because they have
wrgotten the day of reckonin , = ‫وضاقت علمالأرض بها ; بنيانهم‬
$ 89] The Noun . - Gov't of Noun . - Stat. Construct.& Genit. 221

Song and the earth became (too) narrow for you , notwithstanding its A
breadth. In the same way , a verbal or nominal clause is often found
as the art
‫ إليه‬jlás or genitive after substantives, especially those
denoting time or portions of time. Compare SS (23, rem . c) , 70,
rem. f, and 78.

Rem. In this case the ji or to is ‫ة‬dynas,

REM .
‫ مصدري‬because the clause
which it introduces is equivalent to the maşdar or intinitive of the
verb, [Vol. i. $ 195, rem .].
89. Adjectives and participles may take after them a restrictive B
orlimitative genitive ; as ‫ حسن الوجه‬handsome of face; ‫طاهر القنب‬
pure of heart ; ‫ شديد الحرارة‬veryarm ; ‫ صري&ع الكأس‬smithen doon
by the wine-cup, intoricated (compare pri spasm ,Isaiah xxvii.1) ;
‫ صريع الغوانی‬smitten by (enamoured of) the fair ser ; ‫قليل الحيل‬
having few seiles or shirts; ‫ عظيم الأمير‬having greathopes ; ‫كل نفس‬
‫ ذائقة الموت‬every soul shall taste death ;; ‫ بالغ الكعبة‬isió
‫ هدى‬a victim
which arrives at the Ka'ba (ell is construed with the accusative of C
the object reached) ; el (a woman) whose waist-band,or
girdle,fits loosely ; opamdi
‫ السيرة‬sono
‫ حمود‬one whose conduct is praised or
praise scorthy; ‫ مرو&ع القلب‬sagacious ofmind; ‫مستجاب الدعاء‬ one

time ‫ن‬ublaj,
whose prayers are answered ; (wire gli iné ‫ن رجلا‬úlme
‫ چا‬jloc,
‫رجال‬
‫هه ر ر‬

ogo gl two or more men with handsome faces). Compare in Latin

aeger animi, integer vitae scelerisque purus, etc. This annexation is D
an improper one (S 75, rem. ), standing in place either of a tèmyiz
accusative ( 44, e) or an accusative of the object *. Hence the
genitive, though always defined by the article, exercises no defining
*
[The two constructions may even occur in the same sentence, as
‫ إما أولئك الصغار الأخطار الدقاق هما‬those (echo do such things) are
only the men of little dignity and of mean aspirations. D. G. ]
 222 PART THIRD . - Syntax. [S 90
A influence upon the governing word, any more than the accusative
which it represents ; and consequently, if we wish to define the
'
governing word , we must prefix to it the article ; as mell do con
‫ الوجه‬Muhammad, the handsome of face,or
angu , ‫ الجعد الشعر‬with the
2
curly hair , weilani waits uzlai vj Zèid, who smites the head of
the offender ; clási
‫ الوشاح‬ástandi
‫ الجائلة‬in Hind,whose
, girdle fits loosely ;
‫ الضارب الجير‬heachostrikes theman, ‫ الضراب الرجل‬those oohostrike
B the man , ‫ الضوارب الرجل‬those (women) echostriketheman, ‫الاربات‬
‫م‬

‫ غلام الرجل‬those (women ) achostrike theman's slave ; ‫المقيمو الصلوة‬

‫ره‬

those who perform (the rites of) prayer ; si He who created

thee; combui he who rebukes me (compare 17297, Isaiah ix. 12) ;
‫ الموعدی‬he acho threatens me; ‫ النساء المرضعات‬the acomen that
‫ هره‬,

have suckled thee; wysti he who has let her go out).

c Rem. Observe, however, that the annexation may in some of
these cases be a proper one, either of a partitive or an explicative
character. For example, amesema ana may possibly mean the
handsome ( part) of the face, or even the handsome face ; Vloero
‫ الدعاء‬that part oftheprayerwhich hasbeen angenered ; ‫شديد الحرارة‬
the most intense portion of the heat ( compare $ 86, with rem . b, and
$ 95). In this case the article can, of course, never be prefixed to
D the ‫مضاف‬.

90. No word can be interposed between the noun in the status

constructus and the genitive, and consequently an adjective which
‫كتاب‬
‫ الله‬ves
qualifies the former must be placed after the latter ; as ati
‫ العزيز‬thegloriousbook of God ; ‫ يده اليمنى‬his righthand. Exceptions
to this rule are very rare, and found almost exclusively in the poets,
who sometimes take the liberty of interposing an oath or some other
word. For example, in prose : ‫فلا تحسبن الله خلف وعده يه‬
$ 90] The Noun . — Gov't of Noun. - Stat. Construct. & Genit. 223
think not then that God will fail to keep His promise to His apostles A
)&l-Kor'an , xiv . 48, according to one reading(; ‫وكذلك زين يثير‬
‫ من المشركين قتل أولادهم شرائهم‬and in likemanner the killing
of their children by their companions was made to seem good to many
of the polytheists (él-Ķor’än, vi. 138 , according to one reading );
‫ره‬

‫ هل أنتم تارویی صاحبي‬do you not leavememycompanion ? (words

of the Prophet , reported by 'Abi -Darda( ; ‫ترك يوما تفسك وهواها‬
‫ عی تها في رداها‬to let your soul alone one day with its last is an B
efforttourardsitsdestruction ; ‫ إن الشاة تشمع صوت والله رټه‬thesheep
hears the voice, by God,of its master. Again, in poetry : [uis ats
Bieb wylis Eiás is how many kingdoms (to God the glory !) did
I not enter , and how many horsemen did I not pierce ! Țab. i. 1964,
.1 16 with ‫) بله‬$ 53, b, rem . e) put between the ‫ واو رټ‬and the
. D. G ;{ ‫ لله در اليوم من لامها‬acell done he acho has to -dan C
.genitive
reluked her ! ‫ كما خط الكتاب بكتم يوما يهود يقارب أو يزيل‬as »
book, or letter, was written one day by the hand of a Jew, writing
) the lines) nearer or further ( from one another(; ‫زججها بمزجة زج‬
‫ القلوص أبي مزاده‬and I stabbed her with a short lance, as Abu
Mezada statsa young camel )‫ مزاده‬in rhyme for ‫ققناهم سوق ;(مزادة‬
‫ البغاث الأجادل‬and ace put them to fight as falcons put to Right
‫م ده‬

kites ; ‫ يفرك حب السبل الكنافج بالقاع فرك القطن المحالج‬they DD

( the locusts) rub down the grains of the full ears in the fields, as the
miḥlāý (an iron instrument) rubs down the cotton , (clearing it of its
seeds(; ‫ وسواك مانع فضله المحتاج‬whilst othersthan thou arithhola
their benefits from theneedy ; ‫وقاق كعب بجیر نقد تك من تعجيل‬
‫ مهلكة والخلد في قر‬agreementwith Bujeir saves thee, Kat, from
speedy destruction and from remaining for ever in hell (for 6,
 224 PART THIRD . - Syntar. [$ 90

A ‫ كأن بذون أبا عصام زیر چمار دق بلجام ;(بجي يا كعب‬o Ala
* Işām , it is as if Zèid's hack were an ass made thin by the bridle
) by constant riding(; ‫تجو وقد بل المرادي يقه من ابن أبي‬
‫ شيخ الأباطح طالب‬Iescaped,but the Muradi ( Abdu r-Rahman
'ibn Mulgam ) wetted his sword with the blood of (‘Ali), the son of
Abu Talib , the chief of the valleys (of Mekka(; ‫ولئن حلفت على‬
B ‫ يديك لأحلفن بيميني أصدق من يمينك قسم‬and verily, if I sacear
before thee, I swear with the oath of a swearer which is more truthful
than thyoth (for ‫ولا تعوی عن نقض ;(بيين مسير أصدق من يبين‬
‫ أهواؤنا العزم‬but our desires do not refrain from breaking or
resolutions; ‫ هماأوا في الحرب من لا أخا له‬they are thebrothers
in war of him who has no brother. From these examples it appears
that the word interposed is usually either an oath, an objective
C complement of the ‫ مضاف‬an adverbial accusative of time , or a
vocative.

REM.
Of the insertion of óstöí có, or the redundant mã, after
‫تور‬

certain of the prepositions and we have already given some

examples, ss 70, rem. f, 84, rem, a. It sometimes occurs in other
cases, as : ‫ ويحما زیږ‬tooe to eid ! ‫ غضبت من غير ما جزم‬thout
art angry toithout any offence : ‫ أيها الأجلين قضيت‬hichever or
D the too terms I falfl ; ‫ت له‬ ‫ و یا شاة ما قنص لمن‬antelope of
chase for him ( to be chased and caught by him) for whom it is
lauful ; ‫ في كل ما تمام تليد‬who brings forth for ‫(تيد‬.every
year
[The insertion of ý is explained by its forming one word with the
followinggenitive, as ‫ غضب من لا شئ‬hetods angry for nothing ;
‫ جاء به راډ‬hecame topithout food ; ‫عيش به‬there
‫ا أ‬was
‫ لا م‬nothing
‫ي حين‬that
‫ركتن‬I‫ت‬
thou hast abandoned me at a time when
could live by. D. G. ]
$ 92] The Noun . — Gov't of Noun. - Stat. Construct. & Genit. 225

91. The relative adjectives ending in is- ((Vol. i..$ 249) , because A
standing to some extent in the place of a genitive, admit of a genitive
in apposition to them ; as ‫ رأيت اليمى تي عدي‬I saw the Teima,
)‫ي‬namely
‫تی)م عد‬orof ‫(س‬the
‫ قي‬tribe of) Teim (('ibn ) ' Adi, = ‫رأيت الرجل من تيم‬
‫ اختة البصرة عتبة بن غزوان المازنی مازن‬،) th
' ibn Ġazwān $ l-Mazinī, (namely) of (the tribe of ) Māzin of ķais,
founded el-Basra ; ‫يقول عبد الله بن الزبير الأسى أسير تريمة‬
says ' Abdu 'llāh 'ibn èz-Zebir al-Asedi, of (the tribe of ) Asèd (' ibn ) B
Hoceima ;, ‫لقى أبا الفتح ابن الوندانقاني بير بين سرخ ومرو‬
and he met Abū 'l-Fètì 'ibn 'ar- Rindānaşānī, ( from Rindānaķān) ,
a ton between Serats and Meru :; ‫لما كانت الأيام الناصرية محمد‬
hebt u after there came the Nāşirean days, (I mean the days of
il-Melik en- Nasir) Muhammad 'ibn Kalâ'ün ; and even with the
interposition of a word, ‫أبو عبيدة معمر بن المدي التيمي بالولاء‬
‫ تيم ریش‬Abu Obeida Ma'mar ibn al-Mutanna, by clientship fC
the tribe of Tèim , (namely) Taim of Ķorèis.
92. In the proper annexation, if the second noun be indefinite,
the first is so too ; but if the second be definite, so is the first
likewise. For example, suo bring is a daughter of a king,a king's
daughter, a princess, Fr. une fille de roi, Germ . eine Königstochter ;
but mai bine is the duughter of the king, the king's daughter,
Fr. la fille du roi, Germ. die Tochter des Königs (either his only D
daughter or that daughter of his who has been already spoken of ). -
If we wish the first noun to remain indefinite, whilst the second is
definite, we must substitute for the annexation the construction with
;preposition . . ($ 53, b,rem .ce); e.g ‫ بنت ينيك‬a daughter of the
.the
king ; ‫ مات بي أخ‬a brother of mineis dead (whereas ‫مات أچی‬
would mean my brother is dead, that is to say, either my only
brother or that one of my brothers of whom we have been speaking ).
W. 11 , 29
 226 PART THIRD. - Syntax . (S 93

A --There are some nouns, however, of a wide and general signification,

which may remain indefinite even when followed by a definite geni
‫ نحوه‬Conta , carmá , something like him or
tive ; for instance, alis oyes. ‫[ شبيهه نظيره‬
it ; ‫ بعض الفقراء‬somepoor people ; ‫ بعض المغاير‬a cate : (see $ 82, C,
f (and rem. b), g) ; Colisi some one of them ; olje a part of it ;
‫ ته‬a third of it. Likewise we find ‫ أول الناس‬and ‫ أفضل قومه‬used
B in an indefinite sense *) .
Rem .
In such phrases as ‫أمر آخرين ودنيا‬, a matter of this life
and the life to come, the indefinite and Slás shows that the
Láó is to be regarded as a single part, some one matter, etc. In
such cases the genitive may even be virtually definite, but never
theless it does not take the article, in order to preserve the govern
-0

ing word from becoming definite : sig bei 1vol is in fact equivalent
in meaning to ‫أمر من أمور الأخررةة والدنيا‬. The same remark
C applies to those indefinite annexations which supply the place of
compound nouns or adjectives ; e.g. stó vas, a royal castle, nearly
the same as
‫إمرأة حام [] ;قصر من قصور الملك‬may be a barber's
wife and the wife of a (certain) barber, though in the latter case it
would be better to write ‫امرأة حام من الحجامين‬. .D
.G [
93. Nouns of the forms lui, les, etc., used as superlatives
( see § 86 ), are construed as substantives in the singular masculine
D with the genitive of the word denoting the objects among which the
one spoken of is preeminent. The genitive is at times indefinite and
explicative, at times definite and partitivet . Examples of the indefinite
* [I owe this observation to Prof. Nöldeke. D. G. ]
† [ Such expressions as ‫ هو أفضل إخوانه‬heis themost earcellentof
his brethren,or
, almost go he is the best of hiscompanions,are not
‫اصحا‬

exceptions to the rule, for they mean ‫هو أفضل الإخوان الذي هو‬
Adai. Though Hariri, Durrat, 9 condeinns them strongly, they are
not rare . D. G.]
$ 93] The Noun.-—Gov't of Noun . - Stat. Construct. & Genit. 227

genitive : vos clási zó he is a for the] most excellent mun ; So A

‫ أفضل امرأة‬she is a [or the]most excellent acoman : ‫هما أفضل رجلين‬
they are two for the two] most excellent men ‫ل نساء‬hasi
‫ ;حافظ‬In ‫ هن أفض‬they
are most [or the most]excellent
] ‫ الله‬God is the
women ; biblé ‫ خیر‬átí
bestpreserve ;:wa
‫ تم خيرأمة أخرجت يا‬ye are the best nation
that has been created for mankind ; ‫الفقه أفضل قائد إلى البر وأعدل‬
woli learning is the best guide to piety, and walks in the straightest B
ofpaths ; ‫ وصف اليهود بالخير والحسد وهما شخصيتي‬he described
the Jews as being avaricious and envious, and these two are the worst
of qualities. Examples of the definite genitive : suivi lái so
‫ته و‬

she is the best of the women ; les wetti jadi svog and Maiya is
mankind and the
the fairest as to neck of all beings (ybláší means
‫ القوم‬jást
ģinn ); ogãi ‫ أفضل‬so these two are the two best of the tribe; C
islavi sisi hizi ye two are the most truthful of the truthful;
‫ ألا أخبركم بأحبه إلى وأقربكم مني مجالس يوم القيمة‬Iwill tell
you who are the dearest of you to me, and who of you shall have the
‫و تره‬

nearest seats to me on the day of the resurrection ; vojeni og

og or cató wyliví and verily thou wilt find them the greediest of men
‫ در مهر‬.
after life ; b wingigolines the best of things are the mediums (or
meansbetween two eatremes(; ‫ شر الناس من يذهب بدينه لديين غيره‬D
the worst of men is he who changes his religion for that of others ,
‫ أفضل الأوقات شرخ الشباب ووقت الشكر‬the bestof times are early
youth and early morning. Compare in general $ 86. Here must also
be mentioned the indefinite genitive after jji, first,and jo ī,last,
these words being (as already remarked in reference to the former,
w

$ 86, rem. a) really superlatives ; e.g. ( Sjú lőtt, écos en joi !

ášis the first house ( temple) which was founded for mankind, was that
 228 PART THIRD . — Syntax'. [$ 93
‫و‬
Bèkka (Makka(;;‫ مسجد أسس على التقوى من أوبر يوم‬a mosque
A in Bekha
which was founded upon the fear of God from the first day ( of its
eristence(; ‫عن ابن عباس أنها آخر آية نزل بها جبريل‬, )it is stated (
on the authority of 'Ibn ' Abbūs that this is the last verse (of the
Ķor'ān ) which was revealed by Gabriel (lit. with which Gabriel came
down). Instead of ‫ أول يوم‬it is,however, very usual to say ‫اليوم‬
‫مه تر‬
Jyyl. — On the construction of a positive adjective, used substantively,
with a definite or indefinite genitive, see $ 78 (at the end (Joko
B ‫ طعنة‬.and
[( $ 86, rem ) ‫( عزيز كتابكم‬.
Rem . a .
If the genitive be definite, the governing adjective
may also agree in gender and number with the object or objects
spoken of ; as ‫ هي فضلي النساء‬she is the best of the coomen ;
‫ هما أفضة القوم‬these too are the too best of the tribe :‫هم أفضو‬
‫القوم‬,or ‫هم أفضل القوم‬, they arethebestofthetribe,; ‫هنفيات‬
‫النساء‬, or ‫ من فضل النساء‬they are the best of the content ; ‫وكذلك‬
C
‫ قرية أكابر مجرميها ليروا فيها‬jis
‫ جعلنا في كل‬and similarly
We have placed in every town its greutest sinners to plot in it ;
‫ أحاسنكم أخلاقا‬thebest of you in moral character : ‫الناقص والأشج‬
‫ أعدلا بنی مروان‬the Legener (Yezid ibn al-Walid, so called
because he lessened the pay of the troops) and the Scarred (le
Balafré, 'Omar 'ibn `Abdu'l-'Azīz) were the two most just of the
Beni Mardan , ‫ أنت أشعر أهلي جلدتك‬thou art the greatest poet
of the people of thy colour (words addressed to the negro poet
D Noşaib). In these last two examples, however, many grammarians
say that ‫ أعدلا‬and ‫ أشعر‬are not superlatives , but stand for ‫عادلا‬
and ‫شاعر‬
RE3 .t. In such constructionsas ‫ خير أمة أول يوم وأفضل رجير‬,
‫شر خضتين‬, ‫عالی آسی الصاحب عاجل طعنة‬, and ‫عزيز كتابكم‬
the genitive is explicative (as in ‫مدينة بغداد‬, $ 95(, and not, as
$ 94] The Noun.-- Gov't of Noun.-- Stat. Construct. & Genit. 229
might at first sight appear, a substitute for a tèmyiz-accusative A
)$44, e2(. ‫ أفضل رجير‬is not = ‫ أفضل رجلا‬most excellent as aman
(très distingué en tant qu'homme) ; for we cannot say giási i
‫الرجل‬, as we say ‫ هما طويلا أللحية‬they are both long of beard,
instead of ‫ة‬a‫هما طويلان يحي‬, but, on the contrary, we must say
‫ما أفضل رجلين‬
94. The substantive that denotes the material of which anything
is made, is put in the genitive, definite or indefinite, after the B
substantive designating the thing; a8 ‫ ثوب حریر‬aa silk dress, ‫صنم‬
váší the golden image (see $$ 76, 77, 80, aud 92). Frequently, how
ever , --and this is the older construction , —the substantive denoting
the material is put in apposition to the object as a determinative of
kind ) ‫(بيان‬, both being either definite or indefinite . For example :
‫ الصنه الذهب‬the golden image (not ‫الكأس الفﺉة ;(الصنم الهب‬
‫د‬

the silver cup; ‫ الشنانة الصيني‬the porcelain (or china) dish ; C

‫ الشبان الخشب‬the stooden cro883; ‫ عج جدا‬a calf of red gold ;
‫اخذ ثوبا ديباجا‬he made a dress of brocade; ‫ووجد في وسطه حولها‬
‫ خاما مطبقا‬and he found in the centre of it a sarcophagus of marble,
‫و‬ ‫د‬

with a cover ; )‫ وعليها میلان اج ( مربعة‬and beside itareto[square[

posts ofteak -uood [S 136, , ren .e[; ‫ احمل إليه يرعى الحديد‬carry
‫ر‬

to him my iron coat of mail ; ‫ فنزعوا عنه ثيابه الحرير والبوه ثيابا‬D
‫ من الشعر‬and they stripped off from him his silken garments, and
clothed him in garments of hair ; ‫ الغراء البرطاسئ‬mantles or Burtas
)i.e. of fur from the country of the Burtas(; ‫ الغضائر الصيني‬porcelain
)or china) bowls or plates ; ‫ الثياب العاب‬robes of (thestuf called(
-2 Attaba (manufactured in ‫العتابية‬, one of the quarters of Bagdad );
 230 PART THIRD . - Syntax. [ 594

A ‫ الى الدرجينى‬cloths of (thestaffcaled) td -Dardana (manufactured

in Darýin in North Africa ) *.
REM . (. In this case the construction rises from the particular
to the general, from the individual or special to the generic ; but
the reverse may hold good . For example , instead of ‫عمامة سحق‬
‫رو‬

an old worn -out turban, eta oso on an old tattered garment, un

‫أخسلهالق‬, old tuttered clothes, ‫ بردة جرا‬a thread-bare old garment,
B ‫ قطيفة من‬or ‫ ثوب أشمال‬an oldworl-out garment, we may say
0 '

‫ره‬

‫ حق عمامة‬a uporn-out old (thing) of a turban, ‫ خل بود‬, ‫أخلاق‬

‫جرد بردة ثياب‬, ‫ أشمال متين رأسمال ثوب رسم قطيئة‬tuto
teer all
uporn-outroles )‫ ممليه‬dimin.of ‫ليس عندنا من مال المسلمين ;(ملاءة‬
‫ إلا جرد هذه القطيقة‬there is nothing in out possession of the
property of the Muslims but this thread -bare old garment.
REM . b. Different from the above are such constructions as
C
‫ » رطل زی‬pint of olive oil, ‫ البيت الحرام‬thesacred house (temple ,
‫ الكعبة الكرام‬the holy Ka'ba, ‫ الأشهر الحرم‬the sacred months,
‫ مدينة خراب‬arived or deserted city, ‫لرجل الشوا‬.the ‫ ا‬bad man
In the first of these, ‫ ززيیت‬is not a ‫ بیان‬, buta ‫ بدل‬or permutative,
instead of which we may employ a temyiz-accusative )‫رطل زيا‬
or a genitive )( ‫ زیت‬jbs
‫ ;() ط‬in the others, ‫حرام‬, plur: ‫حرم‬, ‫ راب‬,
and 2yw , are adjectives of both genders (originally infinitives ), (see
8136, a].
D REM . c.
. Similarly, in Hebrew and Syriac, nennt 122.7 the
0
brazen oxen (2 Kings,xvi. 17), Lori li, a golden dinār.
* ]It is not improbable that in the words of the Kor'an ‫بندة ما‬,
is to be considered as a substantive meaning a land that has not
yet been brought into a state of cultivation (for i , ‫مواث‬ as

is used for Sigó vezi), and put in apposition to its as the material
of which the tract of land consists ( comp. Fleischer, Kl. Schr. i. 672) . ]
$ 95] The Noun . — Gov't of Noun . - Stat. Construct. & Genit. 231

95. The genitive construction is also often extended in Arabic A

to things that are identical, the second of which ought strictly to be
in apposition to the first * This remark applies :
( a ) To nicknames in connection with the names of persons ; as
‫ سعيد كرز‬Said (nicknamed ) Kara, ie. arallet, = ‫عيد ازيلدذي هو محرز‬
á vem ķais ( nicknamed) Kuffa, i.e. dried gourd : á moj zeid
(nicknamed ) Batta , i.e. bottle.
REM . In such cases as
jś wąw the use of the apposition is B
equally correct, nom . ‫ عيد محرز‬, .gen ‫سعيد محرز‬, .ace ‫عيدا څرزا‬.
If the name is defined by the article, the apposition alone is
allowable ; a8
as ‫الحرث محرز‬. The same thing holds good,if either
.word
is a compound (e.g ‫ عبدد الله‬، Abdullah
Abdu 7al, oror ‫ أنف الناقة‬camera
nose); as ‫سعيد أنف الناقة عبد الله محرز‬, ‫أبو زيد له عبد الله بطة‬
,

Some, however, allow the nickname to be put in the accusative,

when the name is in the nominative ; in the nominative, when the
name is in the accusative ; and in either case, when the name is in
‫ه‬
the genitive ; as ‫) هذا سعيد أنف الناقة‬.scil ‫ أعني‬I mean (: ‫رأيت‬
‫) سعيدا أنف الناقة‬.scil ‫ (الذي هو‬: ‫مررت بعيد أنف الناقة‬
(6) [To specific nouns, when preceded by a noun designating the
‫م‬ ‫م‬
, as
genus,a3 ‫ شجر الزيتون‬thealive-tree )= ‫(الشجر الزيتون‬: ‫خشب الساج‬
teak-wood ; ‫حجارة الضوان‬.nint
-stones [ D

*
(Excepted are the definitions of measure, number, weight and
colour, as also those of the genus by its species, of the whole hy its
parts. It is not allowed to say ‫جزيرة خمسة فراسخ‬, ‫قصيدة خمسين‬
‫ريش ألوان بيتا‬, which ought
‫ن بيا‬to‫مسو‬be‫ جزيرة خمسة فراسخ خ‬an island
five parasangs in extent, coma gente con mas a poem of fifty verses,,
‫ ريش ألوان‬feathers of divere coloure,as a ‫ بدل‬or permutative ; comp.
Fleischer, Kl. Schr. i. 552, ii. 33 seq. ]
 232 PART THIRD. - Syntax. [$ 95
A (c) To the names of towns, rivers, mountains, etc., when pre
ceded by the words for toun, river , etc;. as ‫ مدينة بغداد‬the city
of Bagdad )= ‫ نهر الفرات في المدينة التي هي بغداد‬theriver Euphrates;
‫ بحر النيل‬the river Nile ; ‫ طور سینین‬mount Sinai: ‫شهر رمضان‬
the month of Ramadan.

(d) To words, regarded merely as such, and governed by a word

B signifying word , such as ‫ كلمة‬or ‫ ;لفظ‬..e ‫ كلمة كان‬theword
kāna (see $ 78).

(e) To nouns governed by other nouns, when the governing word

signifies something to which the object designated by the governed
word is similar ; as she was the silvery water (lit. the silver of the
arater'( , = ‫الجين الذي هو الماء‬, .ie ‫الماء الذي هو مثل الجين‬
Here the ‫ مضاف إليه‬is the primum comparationis, and the ‫مضاف‬
c the secundum comparationis.
(f) To adjectives defined by the article in connection with

‫و‬ ‫مہر‬
‫ت المقدس‬.the
substantives not so defined ; as ‫ بي‬Holy Temple (i.e‫ر‬

Jerusalem (, = ‫البيت الذي هو الممتد‬, or, shortly , ‫; البيت المقدس‬

‫ باب الصغير‬the title gate (as a name(, ‫ربيع الأول في الباب الصغير‬
the first Rabi', and jo vi eris the last ( second) Rabi' (names of
D months(: ‫ عام الأول‬last year ; ‫ جانب الغربي‬the western side, =
‫ مسجد الجامع الجانب الغربي‬thecongregational mosque,= ‫المسجد‬
‫ ممثلة الحمقاء الجامع‬the foolish herb, purslane,= ‫ البقلة الحمقاء‬:
‫ دار الآخرة‬the other aorld ,the arorld to come,= ‫اولصداورف الآخرة‬.‫لم‬In‫ ا‬these
‫إضافة‬
and similar annexations some grammarians see an
‫إلى الصفة‬ or annexation of the thing described to the descriptive
epithet, i.e. of the substantive to the adjective; but as such an
annexation is impossible (see $ 78), those grammarians are correct
$ 95] The Noun . — Gov't of Noun . - Stat. Construct. & Genit. 233
who regard the adjective as having been raised to the level of a A
‫ بیت المقدس‬means the house of the
substantive.. Strictly speaking, wievienot
holy place (taking wités, if we like, as nomen loci from us to
.sanctify
, Vol.i $ 227(; ‫ربيع الأولي‬, the Rall of the firstplace,first
in order ; ete. On the other hand, in ‫ صلوة الأولى‬the annexation
is an ordinary, proper one ) ‫(إضافة حقيقية‬, theword ‫ساعة‬,hour, being
understood ; ‫ صلوة الساعة الأولي = صلوة الأولى‬... ‫الصلوة في الساعة‬
=‫ل)غآروبتيی‬see877
‫م)كان ا‬.‫ال‬Similarly ‫ مجاسنجبدالالغمرعبايني الجامع مسجد الجامع‬B
‫ وجانب‬,somegrammariansconsider
or
‫بقة الحبة الحمقاء = بقلة الحمقاء مسجد الوقت الجامع‬, and
‫* دار الحياة الآخرة = دار الاخرة‬. Here too the constructions ‫أفضل‬
*
]Accordingly to0 ‫لسابع‬.is
‫ يوم ا‬explained by Zamalisari (Faik i
163( as ‫ يوم الليبي السابع‬on the day of the seventh night. The real
explanation, however, seems to be that we have in ‫و بیت المقدس‬
‫باب الغير‬, etc. the first instances of the omission of the article before
the qualified substantive, which is prevalent in modern Arabic. The
end-vowels of the word were generally not pronounced in common
speech, if no misunderstanding could arise, according to the rule
‫هر‬

‫لا تستعملوا الإعراب في كلامه إذا خاطبتم ولا تخلوا منه بم‬
‫ إذا كائتم‬do not make use of case-endings in your speech , collen you
address people, but employ them in full in your letters, when you
correspond . This was called ‫ الشليقية‬and deemed elegant (Faihi, 94). D
Hence this omission of the article caused no difficulty whatever, till
the grammarians attempted to find a place for these abbreviated
expressions in their syntactical system , comparing the Kor'anic ‫دین‬
‫ القيمة‬for ‫ ډين الملة القيمة‬and ‫ دار الآخرة‬for ‫دار الحياة الآخرة‬
The grammarian əl-Lèit ibn Nașr disapproved of the use of upmanns
‫عد‬
‫ع‬.etc
‫الجام‬, . which he called a mistake. D. G [
W. II . 30
 234 PART THIRD . - Syntax. [S 96

A , ‫ عاجل طعنة‬, ‫ عزيز كتابه‬, etc.,finda place(see $ 78, attheend,

8 86, rem , b, and s93).
REM. a. This sort of annexation is called by the grammarians
‫م‬

‫إضافة التفسي‬, or ‫الإضافة التفسيرية‬, theinterpretative anneacation ,as

also ‫إضافة البيان‬ or ‫ضافة البيانية‬.t
‫الإ‬. eaeplicatioe
he anneaution
The special sort mentioned under is named ‫ إضافة التشبيه‬the
comparative annexation .
B [REM. b. It may not be superfluous to mention here the
‫مه‬ ‫د‬
genitive by attraction , called ‫ جر الجوار‬or ‫ ) جزر المجاورة‬genitive
of proximity. Comp. Hamaya, 38,1.16),, as in ‫هو جحر ضب رب‬
this is a deserted hole of a dabb (a large kind of lizard), instead of
‫ ) أن غزل العنكبوت المرمل زخرب‬it is) as in thenoeen teen of the
spider, instead of ‫الرمل‬, though ‫بوك‬.is
‫ عن‬of the fem . gender
Other examples from poetry have been given by Jahn in his notes
C to Sībawèih i. 185. D. G. ]

3. The Numerals.

96. We have already mentioned, in Vol. i. SS 319–321 , that

the cardinal numbers from 3 to 10, when placed in apposition to
the things numbered, agree with them in case ; but when placed in
annexation before them, govern the genitive plural , as
‫ ستة رجال‬sia
D men , ‫ ثلث جوار‬three girls, ‫ثلنا‬methree (women (, ‫ أربعهم‬the four of
them (men). The genitive must, in every possible case, be that of the
broken plural (Vol. i. $ 300, b, and SS 304, 305 ) ; and if the substantive
has a ‫ جمع منقلة‬as well as a ‫) جمع الكثير‬Vol. i. $ 307),the former

ought to beused; e.g, ‫ خمسة أثواب‬fivepiecesof cloth, ‫ثمانية أجرية‬

eight sacks,‫ عشرة غلة‬ten slaves, ‫ ثلة أفلس‬three fals (a copper coin (,
not ‫ثمانية جرب وخمسة ثياب‬, ‫تة فلوس عشرة غلاين‬are-
‫قل‬. They
$ 96] The Noun . — The Numerals. 235

very rarely construed with the accusative ‫) يلتمييز‬$ 44,e); as ‫ خمسة‬A

‫أثوابا‬, instead of ‫خمسة أثواب‬.
Rem.. 0.a. The word åślo forms an important exception to the
above rule , being always placed after the governing unit in the
genitive singular, as ‫ ثلثمائة‬three hundred. Only a poet can
venture to say ‫ثلث مئين‬. On the use of the plural formsof ‫ألف‬
see Vol. i. $ 326, rem.]
REM . b . Should a ‫القتة‬ be little or not at all in use, the B

‫ جمع الكثرة‬must of course be employed ; as ‫ثقللثقةة شوع‬.three

shoe
atrings,because ‫ أشاع‬and ‫ أشغ‬arerareor doubtful. Even in the
Kor'an , however , we find ‫ ثلثة قروء‬three menstruations, instead of
‫گه ر ء‬

‫ اقراء‬or ‫اقرو‬.
[REM. C. It is perhaps superfluous to remark that the pluralis
sanus is used in cases where no broken plural exists, as ‫ایها سبع آيات‬
the verses of this sūra are seven in number (pl. of 47 ; ‫آی‬ is a C

; (‫ سبع بقراتبنا;ت‬Seven coups (pl. of ‫عشر سنين ;( بقرة‬

quasi-plural
ten years ; ob six daughters ;; la ‫ حدادين‬áits three smiths.
If, however, the word is properly an adjective or participle (đáo),
we ought to employ the preposition Do, or to put the noun in
‫ثلث من المؤمنين‬
apposition to the numeral, or vice versa, as
or
‫( مؤمنون له) ثلة مؤمنون‬, not ‫سبع عجاف ;ثلة مؤمنین‬
selen lean (coutes) not ‫سبع عجاف‬.[ D

*
[In Arabic, as in some other languages, a cardinal number may be
followed immediately by the next one,in order to rectify it ) ‫للاستدراك‬
‫ه‬ ‫و‬

comp. $ 18 ,, 6b, rem .), as ‫ ستة سبعة من الفرسان‬sias seen (i.e. six , or
it may be seven )horsemen ; ‫ مدار أربعين خمسين يوما‬a sum offorty
fifty (i.e. from forty to fifty ) days. D. G. ]
 236 PART THIRD - Syntas. [S 97

A 97. Of the two words ‫ واحد‬and -the

‫ أحد‬former is more com
monly used as an adjective, the latter as a substantive ; e. g.
‫ رجل واحد‬a single man , one man , ‫ بله الواحد‬to the one God ;
‫ أحد الناس‬one of the people, ‫ إحدى الثلث‬one (fem .) of the three,
‫أحدهم‬.one
of them -is
‫ أحد‬used absolutely in negative and inter
rogative phrases in the sense of any one ; as ‫ا أحد في الدار‬ý‫ ل‬there is
no one in the house ; ‫ ما جاءني أحد‬no onecametome; ‫هل أخذ رأي‬
B ‫ مثل هذا‬has any one seen the like of this ? As applied to God,the two
words are interchangeable, ‫ هو الواحد‬or ‫ ; هو الأحد‬and also in the
.compound
numbers 21,31,etc , ‫ أحد وعشرون‬or ‫واحد وعشرون‬,-.etc
‫انان‬,.fem ‫ اثنتان‬or ‫ نتانی‬,is not unfrequently placed,asan adjective,,
after a noun in the dual, to express the idea of duality more strongly ;
as
‫ لا تجدوا إلين اثنين‬do not take anto yourselvesto gods,
‫بدفاسمتنك مفميثهاليمانلحاكلجي ألفزاوجديننار أاثناين‬bring‫يني‬into
‫اح الد‬it ‫(ل‬the
‫ له (ص‬ark‫ج)عل‬of‫ذي‬every
‫وال‬
C (species of animals) a pair (lit. two individuals, male and female);

what Şalāḥo'd -dīn (Saladin) has assigned him in lieu of the tax levied
on the pilgrims is 2000 dinars; ‫ نازلين من شهرين اثنين‬dwelling
)in it) for the last twomonths ;; ‫ على ميلين اثنين منها‬at a distance
of twomiles from it ; ‫ مائتا يوم اثنتان وخمسة وأربعون يوما‬tertuto
hundred five and forty days). It is very rarely prefixed to the things
D numbered , and then requires the genitive singular ; as ‫ ثنا حنظل‬to
colocynth gourds,= ‫ حبة كبتا نظير‬grain,berry,being used, likethe
Persian ails, dāna, in counting fruit ). See Vol. i. $ 321 , rem . c.

98. When the numeral is followed, not by the noun expressing

the things numbered, but by a collective designating the whole species
or genus, the relation between it and the collective is indicated, not by
$ 99] The Noun . - The Numerals. 237

the simple genitive, but by the preposition is; as ‫ فخذ أربعة من‬A
‫ الطير‬take then four birds, = ‫تسعة من القط ; أربعة طيور من الطير‬
‫م ته‬

nine of the people, = ‫تسعة أشخص من النفط‬. Sometimes, however,

the collective itself is put in the simple indefinite genitive ; as
‫ وكان في المدينة تسعة رهط‬there were in the city nine persons;
‫ وهم أربعة نفر‬and they were four in number *
[Rem.. The construction with no is also employed when the
noun expressing the things numbered is properly an adjective or B
participle ; see 896, rem . c.]

99. The cardinal numbers from 11 to 99 take, as already men

tioned ($ 44, e, rem. b, and Vol. i. & 323, rem. b), the objects numbered
in the accusative singular; as ‫ ثلاثة عشر رجلا‬thirteen men ; ‫تسع‬
‫ عشرة امرأة‬nineteen coomen ; ‫ تلئة وسبعون رجلا‬seventy-three men ;
‫ تسع وتسعون نعجة‬ninety-nine sheep. They are very rarely followed
‫ر ر‬

by the accusative plural ; as ‫ وقطعناهم اثنتي عشرة أسباطا أما‬and ‫و‬

we divided them into twelve tribes ( or) nations. — As to gender, the tens
) ‫عشرون‬, etc.) are both masculine and feminine, but the units conform
to the gender ofthe noun denoting the things numbered ;; as ‫أحد عشر‬
‫ وبا‬eleven stars ; ‫مس وأربعون ناقة‬.for
‫خ‬ -five shety
-camels
Rem. žáz (also żás) is construed like the numerals which it
represents ( Vol. i. $ 319, rem. b, etc. ), but does not vary in gender,
according to the best authorities, when unaccompanied by another D
number and signifying from 33 to 10;; as ‫بضع رجال‬, ‫بضع نسوة‬
‫بضع سنين‬, but ‫ بضعة عشر رجلا‬, ‫بضعة وثلثون وبضع عشرة آمرة‬
‫ضعمنوأرابلعموسنلمسيننة‬some
‫ ب‬thirty , or thirty and odd, of the Muslions,
some forty years or forty and odd years.

*
[This is not allowed with and , according to Fāi£ ii.
384. D. G ]
 238 PART THIRD . - Syntax. [$ 100
A 100. If an adjective be appended to the noun denoting the
things numbered, after any numeral between 11 and 99 , the adjective
may agree either grammatically with the noun, or logically with the
cardinal number ; as
‫ عشرون دينارا ناصرنيا‬twenty dinars of e -Melik
en -Nasir (where ‫ ناصريا‬agrees grammatically with ‫دينارا‬,-accus
. sing
‫عشرون‬
masc .), or ‫) عشرون دينارا ناصرية‬where ‫ ناصرية‬agrees logically with
as representing the broken plural ‫ نانير‬, which requires an
B adjective in the sing. fem .).
101. When the object numbered has been already spoken of,
the cardinal numbers from 20 to 90 (the tens) may be construed, like
substantives, with the genitive ; as mj guins Zeid's twenty (camels);
jetzl your thirty (servants). Compare $ 108.
102. The cardinal numbers from 11 to 19 may also be construed
in the same way with the genitive ofthe possessor (except ‫ اثنا عشر‬and
Cits fem .). In this case they remain , according to most grammarians,
indeclinable, as ‫ خمسة عشر‬, .fem ‫خمس عشرتك‬.thu
, fifteen (nom ,,
gen. , acc. ). According to others, the jaws or latter part of the com
2

pound is declined ; as ‫خمسة عشر‬, .gen ‫ خمسة عشر‬, .acc‫خمسة‬

‫] ; شرك‬or both parts are declined ; as ‫ خمسة عشر‬, .gen ‫خمسة عشر‬
.acc ‫[ خمسة عشر‬. Others still admit the declinability of the ‫صدر‬
or former part of the compound, and put the jaws or latter part in
‫ شرك‬amics, acc. ‫خمسة عشر‬
‫ ت‬gen.Juis
D the genitive ; as suas ‫ة‬amass,
‫ہر‬

103. The cardinal numbers álo a hundred ,and cur a thousand,

and their compounds, are construed with the genitive singular of the
noun denoting the objects numbered ; as ‫ ماه رجبي‬100 men ; ‫مائا‬
‫ حمار‬200 asses; ‫ ثلثمائة كلب‬300 dogs; ‫ ألف مدينة‬1000 cities;
‫ ألفا كتاب‬2000 books ; ‫ أربعة آلاف رجلي‬4000 men ; ‫أحد عشر ألف دينار‬
11,000 dinars , ‫ ثلثيمائة ألف رجل‬300,000.men
$ 105] The Noun. -The Numerals. 239

REM . The accus. sing. or genit. plur, after ‫] مائة‬and ‫ [ألف‬is A

very rare ; as ‫ إذا عاش الفتى مائتين عاما‬then a man has lived
ttoo hundred years; ‫ ولبثوا في كهفهم ثلث مائة سنين‬and they
tarried in their cave three hundred years (where others read arlo,
and regard ‫سنين‬ ‫ بدل‬or permutative apposition to dílo áits).
as a

104. If a sum be composed of several numerals of different

kinds, the noun denoting the things numbered falls under the govern
ment of the last numeral ; as ‫ بين الهجرة وبين آدم على مقتضی‬B
‫گه‬

‫ التوراة العبرانية أربعة آلاف وسبع مائة وإحدى وأربعون سنه‬between

the Higra and Adam , according to the Hebrew Pentateuch, there are
‫ر‬ ‫مه‬

4741 years ; ‫بين تبث السني وبين الهجرة على اختيار المؤرخين‬
‫ ثلاثة آلاف وثلثمائة وأربع سنين‬bettreen the confusion of tongues and
the Higra, there are, according to the assumption of the chronologists,
3304 years. The substantive may, however, be repeated after each
numeral; as ‫و الغربية غيرها ألفا ألف دينار ومائة ألف دينار وأربعة‬
‫گه‬

‫ واربعون ألف دينار وثمانون دينارا جيشه‬therecenueof (theprovinceof(

el-Garbīya (in Lower Egypt) is 2,144,080 military dinārs. In large
amounts, consisting of millions, hundreds of thousands and thousands,
the word ‫ف‬ei
‫ أل‬must be repeated after each numeral; as ‫جملة ذلك‬
‫و‬

‫تشعة الآي ألف وخمسمائة ألف وأربعة وثمانون ألفا ومائتان وأربعة‬
‫دينارا‬. t
‫ وون‬total h
of this amounts to 9,584,264
e dinars
105. The higher cardinal numbers, as well as those from 3 to D
10 (Vol. i. $ 321 ), may be placed in apposition to the substantive
denoting the objects numbered ;; as ‫جذب الشبكة إلى الأرض ممتلئ‬
‫ گا كبيرا مائة وثلئة وخمسين‬he dren thenet to laud,fulloflarge
fishes,a hundred and fifty-three; ‫كان شعوب أولاد توح اللثة عند‬
‫مه گه ر‬

‫ تببير التنين اثنين وسبعين شعبا‬the nations sprung from the three
 240 PART THIRD . — Syntax. [S 106
A sons of Noah were, at the time of the confusion of tongues, seventy -two
in number (the substantive denoting the things numbered, Les, is
repeated here, because the last numeral requires it in a form different
in number and case from ‫( شعوب‬.
106. As regards the agreement in gender between the cardinal
numbers and the nouns denoting the objects numbered (see Vol. i.
$ 319), the following rules hold.
(a) If the plural of the substantive denoting the things num
B bered differs in gender from the singular, the numeral agrees with
the singular ; as ‫ بع سنين‬seven years (sing.. áim, fem .), but
‫سبعة أعوام‬.ad. (sing ‫ عام‬, masc.(;; ‫ ثلاثة حمامات‬three baths
).sing ‫حمام‬, masc.(; ‫ستة مجلدات‬.i evolumes (singn
‫مجد‬
masc. ). This rule holds even when the substantive itself is sup
WE

pressed ;; as á con eo I fasted five days (i.e. gui anno , from

‫يوم‬,masc.,a day(;‫ سر ما‬I travelled fivenights (ii.e.
... ‫خمس ليالي‬,
c from álið, fem ., a night) ; eloto comment isopis among them are
.creatures
aphich walk on four feet (ice ‫على أربع أرجل‬, from ‫رجل‬
fem.,a foot(; ‫بأربعة على الجراح‬, ‫يا عيني بی عند كل صباح ودي‬
O eye of mine,weep every morning (albo in rhyme for cho); shed
copious tears over el-Ġarrāḥ (lit. weep with the four channels for
tears, moet diebegy, from the sing. 3lá, masc.,or with the four
D corners of the eyes, ‫بأربعة جوانب العين‬.from
, the sing ‫ جانب‬,..masc
a side).
Rem. This rule is often disregarded by modern incorrect
writers and copyists.
(6) The numeral follows the grammatical gender of the sub
stantive, when the objects numbered are designated merely by a
noun of a vague, general signification ; e.g. wasiiálí three persons,
$ 106] The Noun . The Numerals. 241

from ‫شخض‬,.masc; ‫ ثلث أغيير‬three human beings, from ‫عين‬, fem . A

But if another noun be annexed to this, which determines the real
gender of the objects more precisely, the numeral agrees with the
second noun ; as
‫فكان مجتى دون من غنت أتقى ثلث شوم‬
ure's yhsis and so my shield against those whom I feared was 5

three persons, two girls and a young woman () ‫عب‬sis

‫ قا‬and ‫ر‬juais
‫ معص‬are

used only of women, Vol. i. $ 297, c, rem . b ; vogn is here

employed by the poet, through the exigency of the metre, instead of B
‫أشخص‬, $ 96 ;‫ مغر‬stands in rhyme for ‫(معصر‬. Again : ‫فإن كلابا‬
‫ هذه عشر أبطني وأنت بړۍ من قبائلها العشر‬this (tribe or ) Kitab
has ten branches, but thou hast nought to do with its ten branches
( is a plural of as, Vol. i. $ 304,rem . c,which is masc., but

the numeral takes the gender of the feminine substantive dimo,

which immediately follows in its plural form jūs); and in the
.Koran, ch . vii 16 )(, ‫ وقطعناهم اثنتي عشرة أسباطا أمنيا‬and are divided C
them into twelve tribes (or) nations ( is the plural of Law , masc.,. ,
Heb. bav , but the numeral agrees with dol, which follows in the
9
of Sometimes, however, the numeral agrees with the
plural form mol).
real gender of the objects numbered , even when the grammatical
gender of the noun used is different ; as mesi dito three persons (of
the male sex ), where dát is masc ., although it is fem ., because wees
is here equivalent to ‫ إنسان‬or ‫رجل‬ D

(c) If the substantive be suppressed, and its place be taken by

an adjective or other word expressive of its quality, the numeral
agrees in gender with the understood substantive ; e.g. ata vs
valcoh yes al aimait he who does a good thing,shall receive a
tenfold recompense for it, lit. shall receive ten ( good things) like it
Come is fem., because jo, plur. júði, though masc.,is here only an
epithet of olmé understood , the plur. of me, which is fem.).
W. 11 . 31
 242 PART THIRD.Santa .. [$ 106
A ( d ) When the numeral is connected with the substantive by the
preposition ivo (S 98 ), it agrees in gender with the substantive ; as
‫ أربع من الغنم‬for sheep )‫نم‬.being
‫غ‬ fem ., Vol. i $ 290, 4, 2(;
‫ ثلة من البط‬three ducks.being
)‫ بط‬masc.[by form ],Vol.i 292, (*.
This is the case even when an epithet follows which fixes the real
gender of the objects numbered ;; as ‫ أربع من الغنم خور‬four sheep ,
males; ‫ ثلة من البط إناث‬three ducks, females. If,however, the
B epithet be placed between the numeral and the substantive, the
numeral must agree in gender with the epithet ; as ús ‫ة كور‬deyi
‫ من‬jeśý ‫أربع‬
‫الغنيم‬, ‫ثلث إناث من البط‬.co mp[.
] . 596,rem
(e) The numerals as abstract numbers (Vol. i. $ 309, b, c) are of
>

the masculine gender ; as ‫ثلة نصف سة‬, or ‫التة نص الستة‬, three

is the half of six .
(f) In the enumeration of several groups of objects of different
genders, the following rules hold.—(a) The numerals from 3 to 5,
C inclusive, must be repeated before each substantive, and vary in
‫ه و‬
gender accordingly ; as ) ‫ بي خمسة أعبير وځم إماء (آج‬I hate free
male and five female slaces. (B) From 6 to 10, inclusive, they are
not repeated , and conform in gender to the nearest substantive ; as
) ‫ لي ثمانية أعبد وإما (آم‬I hapeeightmale and (eight)female slaves,
or, transposing the words, ‫) بی ثمانی ما (آه ) وأغبير‬۲( The
compound numerals, from 11 upwards, are not repeated, and take the
masculine form , when the following substantives designate rational
D beings ; as
‫ عندي خمسة عشر عبدا وجارية‬I have fifteen male and
).fifteen ).female slaves, or, transposing the words, ‫عندي خمسة عشر‬
‫جاري وعبدا‬. But when the substantives designate irrational objects,
‫البط‬۰* ‫[ن‬wemay
‫ بطات م‬of‫اثة‬course
‫ثل‬. say also ‫) من الغنم‬or ‫ أربع نعجات (شاه‬and
$ 107 ) The Noun. —The Numerals. 243

the numerals take the gender of the nearest substantive ; as ‫ عندی‬A

áttig planets and I have fifteen male and ( fifteen ) female camels,
or, transposing thewords, ‫عندي خمس عشرة ناقة وجمد‬.. If, however,
in the case of irrational objects, a vague, general expression, such as
‫ بین‬tó (8 67), be interposed between the numeral and the things
i
numbered , the numeral is always of the feminine gender ; as suis
‫عندي‬
‫ خمس عشرة ما بين جمبي وناقة‬Ipossess fifteen camels,male and
female, or , transposing the words, ‫ عندي خمس عشرة ما بين ناقة‬B
‫وجمل‬.
107. The cardinal numbers become determined or definite in the
same cases as substantives ; viz.
(a) When the numeral is used to express an abstract number,
.and
hence contains the idea of genus ; e.g ‫ القلقة نصف السنة‬three
(every three) is the half of six (every six). The article is here C
employed wmique, to indicate the genus [Vol.i. $ 345, rem. a). It is
not, however, essential, for, regarding the numeral as a ‫نسی‬ ‫عنه‬
(Vol. i. $ 191 , rem. b, 5 a), we may say with equal correctness
‫قلتة نصف سنة‬.
(6) When the objects numbered have already been mentioned ,
‫ش‬
or are supposed to be well known ; as ‫ فرجع السبعون بقرح‬and the
‫وقد جاوزت‬
seventy (disciples) returned with joy ; weyITa jglo tog since D
‫هه‬
I am already past forty, scil.á years (observe we ji by poetic
license for megji . The article is here used wizi, to indicate
previous knowledge.
(c) When the numeral is in apposition , as an adjective, to a
definite noun ; as ‫الخمسة‬i ‫ الرجال‬the five men (ot avapes oi nvr ,
see Vol . i . $ 321 ).
 244 PART THIRD. — Syntax. [$ 107
A (d) When the numerals, from 3 to 10, precede a definite noun
in the construct state (see § 92) ; as ‫ ثلثة الرجال‬.the three men

)lit. the triad of the mea (; ‫ عشرة الغلمة‬the ten states ; ‫عشر الجواړی‬
the ten female slaves , ‫ أربع الأذور‬the four houses ; ‫خمسة الأشبار‬
the fivespans : ‫ ثلث الثاني‬the three stones (onwhich thecooking-pot
rests ). Sometimes, however, the numeral too has the article ; as
‫ الخمسة الأثواب‬the five dresses : ‫ الثلاثة الأصوات المختارة‬the three
B selected airsor tunes ; ‫ لهذه الست المدني‬these sin cities *. According
to the later and now (but without case-endings) usual construction,
the article is dropped before the substantive and appears only prefixed
to the numeral ; as ‫ الأربعة أخماس‬the four-fifths: ‫ الخمس قری‬the
‫ ال‬threemenhe
five villages ; ‫ثقة رجالي‬.t (vulg ‫ (الثلاثة رجال‬.The-
same remarks apply to ello and wi, with their derivatives and
compounds; e.g ‫ ثلثمائة الدينار‬the 300 dinars, ‫قلقة آلاف الټرهم‬
.C
the 3000 dirhams; but also ‫الثلثمائة البينار‬, ‫اللثة آلاف الدرهم‬,
and in moremodern Arabic ‫ ) المملكة آلاف درهر الثلاثمائة دينار‬.vulg
‫الاثمائة دينار‬, ‫(الثلاثة آلاف درهم‬. Those numerals which take the
objects numbered in the accusative singular, must have the article

* [The grammarians of the school of Başra disapprove of this

construction. Nevertheless Zainahsari gives, in his Fath , three in
.D
stances from the Traditions,as i. 61 seq ‫المائة البقرة والمائة الائنة‬
.the
hundred coups and the hundred sheep ; i 313 ‫ السبعة الدنانير‬the
‫م‬

dinaire (withven
.se a var ‫;(الدنانير الشبعة‬.ii 384 ‫ الثلاثة التفر‬thethree
persons. Comp. Fleischer, Kl. Schr. ii. 52 seq . D. G. )
+ (Relatively old instances of this construction are Ibn Hiśām 331 ,
‫فباخيذت ال‬
1.14 ‫مائة ناقة‬.that I may get the hundred camels ; Ajani xv
147, 1. paenult. cena visivi iloi
‫ أجاز‬he completed the halfverse. Comp.
Fleischer, L. c. 49. D. G. ]
§ 108] The Noun.—The Numerals. 245

prefixed to them to render them definite, as ‫ التسعون رجلا‬the 90 men ;; A

and in the case of a compound of tens and units, the article must be
prefixed to both , as ‫لشبعة والسبعون جمر‬.the
‫ا‬ 77 cumels The
compound numbers from 11 to 19 , however, according to the best
grammarians, prefix the article to the unit alone, without making
any change in the termination , except in the case of 12 ; as ‫الثلاثة‬
piece is the thirteen camels. But others allow the repetition of the
2

article,as ‫قبر باب الحواري أحد الإثني العشر ; القلة العقر جم‬
‫ز‬

the grave of James the apostle, one of the twelve. B

REM. The peculiar construction of the numerals in modern

Arabic, is analogous to that employed by the same dialect in such
nominal compounds as ‫) الماورد‬.vulg ‫ (الماورد‬rose-coater, for the
classical ‫ماء الورد‬ ‫ الحصائبان‬rankincense in grains, for ‫حتما‬
‫ الشمال اللبان‬the capital or principal (in speaking of money (,
‫ي‬for‫سالتمارلمااللهند‬.‫ التمرهندی ; رأ‬thetamarind (lit. the Indian date), for
C

108. The ordinal numbers are often construed with the genitive ,
especially of the month (on the omission of the word for day, compare
$‫ذي‬101‫شر‬and
‫ي ع‬$‫اد‬106
‫ ح‬,‫ا‬a‫و ;ت)ه‬as ‫لتخامذسي اعلشقرعهدمة‬the
‫ قا‬fifteenth
‫زاز ونازتها‬of‫ ع‬them
‫اثملسسلاطران; إلى‬
amji next the sultān proceeded to Azūz, and laid siege to it on the
third of Du'l-şa'da, and took possession of it by capitulation on the D
eleventh of Du'l-Hijj ; ‫ وكان ثامن عشري تموز‬and it was the
twenty -eighth of Təmūz (in this example colis is in the construct
state before spine, lit. the eighth of the twenties*, and so also in
* [This construction has supplanted the coordinating of the units
with the ordinals from twentieth to ninetieth by means of according
 246 PART THIRD.Syntad. [$ 109

A the following onles, in which , however, the modern form ‫عشرين‬

.gen ‫عشرين‬ ‫عشرين‬, is used instead of the classical ‫عمرو‬, .gen
aCC ,

and acc .
‫ ;عشری‬just asin the noun we find ‫ سنی‬instead of ‫و‬
and sind, from ügin, plur. of año a year,Vol. i. $ 302, rem. d) ;
‫ مو عحشاريدنیه عتشوردينىي باتلشقارهيرة‬it is the twenty-first of Tier ; ‫في ثالث‬
on the twenty-third of this (month) there was
B a proclamation made in el-ķāhira .
109. An ordinal number is not unfrequently connected with
the genitive either (a) of its own cardinal, or (b) of the cardinal
which is one less than its own .
( a ) In the former case , the ordinal expresses indefinitely one
of the individuals designated by the cardinal ; as ‫لقد كفر الذين‬
‫ قالوا إن الله ثالث ثلقة‬terily they are unbelievers echo say, Glod *
a third ofthree (isoneofthree(; ‫إذ أخرجه الذين كفروا ثانی اثنين‬
C when those, who were unbelievers, drove him forth a second of two
(one of two, with a single companion); medo é co ‫د‬mujeres
‫ خرج زی‬Zeid
went out a seventh of seren (with six companions). With the numerals
from 11 to 19, we may either use the whole ordinal number, or (which
>

is better) suppress the second part of it, in which case the first part
becomes declinable ; as ‫ثاني عشر اثنی عشر‬, or ‫ثانی اثنی عشر‬, » a

.twelfth
of twelve, fem ‫ ثانية عشرة اثنتي عشرة‬or ‫ثانية اثنتي عشرة‬
D ‫ثالث عشر ثلثة عشر‬, ‫ة عشر‬.a
‫ثالث ثلث‬, u thirteenth of thirteen ,, fem
or

‫ ثالثة عشر ثلاث عشرة‬on ‫ ; ثالثة ثلاث عشرة‬..etc

to which ‫ ثامن‬in ‫ وكان ثامن وعشري تموز‬would be in the status
constructuty before ‫تموز‬ ‫الثاني‬
as in the cases mentioned $ 78, rem . b.
Kl. Schr.. ii.697. Hence also the use of silví
Comp.. Fleischer,, K.
‫ الشابع عشرين وعشرين‬for ‫) السابع والعشرون الثاني والعشرون‬.Vol .i
$ 330, rem .) D. (. ]
$ 109] The Noun . The Numerals. 247

Reu. Compare in Old German selbe vierde, i.e. mit drei andern ; A
zuo rîten sdhen einen ritter selben dritten, i.e. mit zwei andern ; der
grave selbe zwelfte in eine barken spranc, i.e. mit elf andern.
(6) In the latter case , the ordinals from third to ninth are in
reality nomina agentis (compare $ 86, rem . a ) from the verbs ált
to make ( two) into three, as to make (three) into four, etc.; as
wisi ju so he makes a third, lit. he makes three of two. Hence
they may also be construed with the accusative ; as ‫ هو رابع ثلاثه‬B
‫ رابعة‬s4 -- With the numerals from 11
he makes a fourth, fem . Gjú deti
to 19, we may in like manner say ‫ هو ثالث عشر اثنی عشر‬he makes
a thirteenth ; őzác egli özececerto so she makes a fourteenth (where
the cardinal number is in the accusative) ; though many grammarians
wholly disapprove of this construction (allowing only jus sai ejú
‫ عشر‬Sjú desig iso, with suppression of the ten).—With the c
and ‫ة‬özéć
numerals compounded of units and tens, only the unit is put in the
construct state, and the ten is suppressed ; as ingensgailis euis
he makes a twenty -fourth ; or,, with the accusative,tjú
, ‫ة‬deyils
‫ رابع‬so
‫هي‬
üzesg she makes a twenty-fourth.
REM , a. Examples of the ordinals used as nomina agentis, with
pronominal suffixes, are : ‫ما يكون من نجوى ثلثة إلا هو رابعه‬
there is no private converse of three, but He makes the fourth ; D
‫ره‬ ‫ہر‬

‫يقولون ثلة رابم بهم ويقولون خمسة ادهم قلبم رجا‬

‫ بالغيب ويونون سبعة وثامنه قلبم‬they will say, Three, their
6
6

dog making the fourth '; and they will say, ' Five, their dog making
the sixth , guessing at the secret ; and they will say, Seven, and
their dog making the eighth .'
Rem. 6. From ógns twenty is formed a (post-classical] quad
riliteral verb, the nomen agentis of which may be used in the same
as the ordinal number ; e.g ‫ و معشرن تشعة عشر‬hemakes a)
.way
 248 PART THIRD - Syntaas . [S 110

A twentieth (lit. , if we may be allowed to coin a word, he twenties

nineteen), from is to make ( nineteen ) into twenty. [Similarly
Lielow to make into seventy is formed from iger seventy .]
110. In stating dates, particularly when reckoning according to
the Muḥammadan era, the cardinal numbers are employed instead of
the ordinal. They are put in the genitive after the word denoting
year, but agree with it in gender ; as ‫في سنة ثمان وثمانين‬
‫ وثمانی مائة الإسكندر‬in the year 888 of the Alexandrine era ;
B ‫ ثم دخلت سنة ست وتسعين وثلثمائة‬then commenced the year 396 ( f
the Higra (; ‫توقی صلعم لها يوم الإثنين يثنتي عشرة تيله لت‬
‫ من شهر ربيع الأول سنة إحدى عشرة من الهجرة‬he (the Prophet(
died early in the forenoon, on Monday the twelfth (lit. twelve nights
being passed ) of the month of the first Rabi', in the eleventh year of
the Higra. But if the years of a life or a reign are meant, the
ordinalmustbe employed ;as ‫فيي السنة السادسة من ملك الأشرف شعبان‬
C in the sixth year of the reign of el- Asraf śarbān; avuliaisiai .
ació ing in sig in the forty -second year of his reign .
111. The Arabs have two ways of stating the day of the month .
They count either from the first day to the last, as we do, e.g.
‫ أول يوم من شعبان‬thefirstof Sa'ban : ‫اليوم الرابع عشر من شهر رجب‬
the fourteenth day of the month of Reget ; ‫يوم الخميس الثاني‬
D ‫ والعشرين لم‬on Thursday the twenty-second of Muharram ; or
they reckon by the nights of the month, the civil day being held by
them, as well as by the Jews, to commence at sunset. To illustrate
this, let us take the month of Règèb, which has thirty days.

1st of Reeb, ‫ لأول ليلة من رجب‬, or ‫لليیللةۃ خلت من رجب‬

one night of Règèb being past *.

* Wemay also say ‫)( غرة رجب " لغرة رجب‬from ‫ رة‬the blace,
or
 $ 111 ] The Noun . — The Numerals. 249

A
2nd , ‫يليكتيني لتا من رجب‬
3d , ‫ ;يثلاث ( ثلث ليالي ) خلون من رجب‬and so on up to the
10th , ‫عشر خلون من رجب‬
11th , ‫ ; لإحدى عشرة ليلة ) لث من رجب‬and so on up tothe
14th , ‫رجب‬. ‫لأربع عشرة لث من‬
15th , ‫ في النصف من رجب‬, or ‫في انتصاف رجب‬, or ‫في منتتصصفف‬ B
in the middle of Règèb.

16th , ‫ لأربع عشرة ليله) بقيت من رجب‬fourteen nightsremaining

of Règèb ; and so on up to the

20th , ‫ ;لعشر (يعشر ليالي ) بقيت (بقين) من رجب‬and so on up

to the

27th, ‫ثلاث بقین من رجب‬

28th , ‫يليكتين بقيتا من رجب‬ C

29th , ‫كيكة بقيت من رجب‬

30th , ‫ لأخر ليلة من رجب‬on the last night of Règèb *.
‫مشتها‬
Germ. Blässe, on a horse's forehead, the new moon ). The word Shrimo
(from joło the new moon) is likewise frequently used to denote the
first
‫ هل‬of the month , and more rarely ‫ هلة هل هلال استهلال‬, and
; eg ‫ كان ابتداء الوجع في مستهل ربيع الأوبر وثوقی صلعم في‬D
‫ الثاني عشر منه‬the diseasebegan on the first of the first Rabi',and he
( the Prophet) died on the twelfth of that month.
• or ‫ تلخ رجب‬or ‫لانسلاخ رجب‬, or ‫ملخ جب‬ The words

‫ ممرار‬and ‫شرر‬, more rarely ‫ سرار‬and ‫سرر‬, are also employed to denote
the last day of the month .

W. II . 32
A II. THE SENTENCE AND ITS PARTS.

A. THE SENTENCE IN GENERAL.

The Parts of the Sentence : the Subject, the Predicate,

and their Complements.
B 112. Every proposition or sentence cálce, plur. je a sum

or total of words) necessarily consists of two parts, a subject and a

predicate. The latter is called by the native grammarians tímar
that which leans uponJO.or is supported by (the subject), the attribute ;
the former, a time ithat upon which (the attribute) leans, or by
which it is supported, that to which something is attributed. The
relation between them is termed skim pi,properly the act of leaning
( one thing against another ), then, as a concrete, the relation of
C attribution .
REM . a. Some grammarians (e.g. Sībawèih ], however, call the
subject ‫ الشد‬or ‫الممسند‬, and the predicate ‫المسند إليه‬
[ Rem. b. An indispensable member of a proposition is called
ötas (lit. a support), whereas a dispensable member, as, for instance ,
the objective complement of a verb, when the suppression thereof
is not detrimental to the meaning, is called diás (lit. aa redundancy).).
D Comp. $ 44, c, rem. a. ]

113. The subject is either a noun (substantive or expressed

pronoun * ), or a pronoun implied in the verb ; the predicate is a noun
( substantive or adjective), a verb (or a preposition with its genitive =
adverb ]; e.g ‫ زید عالم‬Zeid is learned ; ‫ أنت شریف‬thou art mobile ;
.an
‫ الله هو ال‬God is the truth ; ‫ مات زید‬Zeid is dead ; ‫ ما‬he is
[ See, however, $ 48, f, rem . a .)
$ 113] The Sentence and its Parts.-- The Subject & Predicate. 251
dead (in which last example the pronoun gs is implied in the verb) ; A
(‫ل‬joms
‫ رج‬cólá here is a man).--Every sentence which begins with the
subject (substantive or pronoun ) is called by the Arab grammarians
‫ جملة‬nominal sentence
‫ اسمية‬.a Whether the following predicate
be a noun, or a preposition and the word it governs ( segle
attracting and attracted, $ 115, and Vol. i. $ 355) , or a verb, is a
matter of indifference ; és tej Zeid is dead, is in their eyes a
‫المسجد‬sentence just as much as ‫ زید عالم‬Zeid is learned, or ‫ زید فی‬B
nominal
domuji Zeid is in the mosque. What characterises a nominal
sentence, according to them , is the absence of a logical copula
expressed by or contained in a finite verb. On the contrary, a
sentence of which the predicate is a verb preceding the subject
(as wij stó Zəid is dead ), or a sentence consisting of a verb which
includes both subject and predicate (as áls he is dead ), is called by
them a les elecome a verbal sentence. The subject of a nominal sentence
a

... ‫در‬
is called Knoi that with which a beginning is made, the inchoative, C
and its predicate mari the enunciative or announcement. The subject
of a verbal sentence is called jawithe agent, and its predicate leist
the action or verb.
} .. ‫هر‬.
REM. a. Hii is, according to‫ره‬the
‫ه‬.
above translation, an
elliptical form of expression, for a livel. Compare Vol. i..§ 190,
rem . 6 ;; [where a similar elliptical expression occurs, viz.maí
and ‫ المضمر‬for ‫به‬뽀 ‫ الشمهیير‬and ‫المضمر به‬. Likewise ‫ المنطوق‬rapD
omrov is used for ‫المنطوق به‬, ‫ المعتمد‬for ‫ المعتمد عليه‬the relied
upon , ‫ مشترك‬for ‫ مشترك فيه‬shared in, and (in later times( ‫المغشى‬
for ‫) المغشى عليه‬$ 133 ( [.
[Rem. b. The difference between verbal and nominal sentences,
to which the native grammarians attach no small importance, is
properly this, that the former relates an act or event, the latter
 252 PART THIRD - Syntas. [S 114
A gives a description of a person or thing, either absolutely, or in the
form of aa clause descriptive of state (s 183, a). This is the constant
rule in good old Arabic, unless the desire to emphasize a part of
the sentence be the cause of a change in its position.]

114. The place of the subject both of a nominal and of a verbal

sentence may sometimes be supplied by an entire sentence compounded
of a verb and one ofthe particles i‫ أن‬or ‫) ما‬called ‫الحروف المصدرية‬
a

B the particles which supply the place of the maşdar or nomen verbi,
$ 88( ; a8 ‫ أن تصوموا خير تم‬it is good for you that ye should fast
or to fast )‫) أعجبني أن خرجت ;(صومعه = أن تصوموا‬it‫جت‬pleased
‫أن خر‬me=
that thou wentest out, or thy going out pleased me
‫ طال ما عادت الإسلام ;( روجك‬thou hast long been hostile to
el-'Islam ) ‫مادا = ما عاديت‬.
[Rem. Instead of a sentence compounded with l, sometimes
C an oratio directa is used, as ‫تسمع بالمعيدي خير من أن تراه‬
thy hearing of the little Ma'addi is better than thy seeing him ;
‫ فات أو وزيرا خير من أن أكون أميرا‬for mybeing trear
better than may being emir :; ‫فيأتي الله منهم أحب إلى من‬
‫ أن يأتي من قبلنا‬and that the breach of faith proceedsfrom theme
pleasesmebetter than that it should proceed from us; ‫قال أسير إليه‬
‫ أحب إلى من أن يسير إلى‬and,, said he,, rather still Imarch
towards him than that he should march towards me ; and in the
D predicate ‫قليل غرار الثوم أكبر مټه م النهار أو يلقى يا مسقعا‬
sleeping hardly at all, his principal object being to obtain his blood
revenge, or to meet an ironclad warrior ( Hamāsa, p. 245). D. G.]

115. The predicate may be, as mentioned in $ 113, a preposition

with its genitive;as ‫ زيد في المسجد‬Zeid is in themosque; ‫زید عندك‬
Zaid is loith thee or in thy house ; ‫ نحن بله‬we are Gods; ‫أنا من‬
‫ الصادقين‬I am one of those who speak the truth ; ‫ على دين‬I one
§ 116] The Sentence and its Parts.— The Subject & Predicate. 253
‫ تفعله‬:‫ أن‬GÚ
some money (lit. upon me there is a debt, see $ 59, c) ; ales ‫ تك‬A
thou mayest do it (lit. it is to thee that thou do it). When the subject
is placed first, these are nominal sentences (8 113 ) ; but when the
predicate precedes it, their nature is doubtful, most grammarians
holding them to be transposed nominal sentences in which case
‫ على‬in‫ وܝعܺہلܝىܺܝ دريانت و‬is a ‫ خبر مقدم‬or predicate placed in front,, and
a jego loss or subject placed behind ), whilst others regard them
as being in reality verbal sentences, with the verb suppressed (so that
‫ على‬is equivalent to ‫ يستقر على‬thererests upon me, and ‫ دين‬is the B
‫فاعل‬ or subject of this suppressed verb). A sentence, of which the
predicate is a preposition with a genitive indicating a place, is called
by the Arabs ‫ ظرفية‬lloc
‫ جملة‬a local sentence (see Vol.i.$
. 221 , rem . a) ;
and if the genitive indicates any other relation but that of place, it is
said to be ‫ة‬a‫ظرفي‬leva‫ ال‬siis
‫ مجرى‬äyle ellos
‫ جمله‬a sentence which runs the course,
or follows the analogy, of a local sentence. As, however, the expression
‫ ظني‬is often used in the general sense of ‫) جار ومجرور‬$ 113(, any G
sentence commencing with a preposition and its genitive as the
predicate may be called ‫) جملة ظرفية‬see 3§ 127, aa().
[Rem. The difference in signification between those sentences
in which the predicate and those in which the subject precedes lies
in the fact, that the logical emphasis always falls on that part of
the sentence that is put in the second place (comp. $ 36, rem . b) ;
‫ المسجد‬cs, wj Zèid is in the mosque (not elsewhere ), but us
D
Moj od in the mosque is Zèid (not any one else ).]
116. When the predicate is a preposition with its genitive (or an
adverb), and the subject is an indefinite substantive, or a sentence
compounded of ji and a finite verb (S 114), the predicate must
necessarily be put first ; as og
5
‫ك رجل‬jáis
‫ عند‬a man is with thee or in thy
house ; ‫ في الدار آمرأة‬a woman is in the house ; ‫ لك أن تفعله‬thon
magest do it ; and not ‫ عندك‬,
‫امرأة في الدار رجل‬, ‫أن تفعله ت‬
Unless the indefinite substantive be accompanied by an adjective,
 254 PART TAIRD.—Syntax. [S 117

A expressed or implied ,when either order is admissible; as ‫عندي رجل‬

‫ركجرييلم‬, ‫ا‬or‫رججلل كريم عندعیندن‬,, a noble man is with me or in myhouse ;
1

or ‫ جيل عندنا‬, there is a little man, or a mean -looking

‫هو‬ ‫و‬
fello ) ‫ رجل صغير = جيل‬or ‫جل حقير‬-j( neith us or at our house - [or
unless the sentence expresses a wish, when the indefinite subject comes
first ; s ‫ لام عليك‬, ‫) ويل يزيد‬$ 127, e). In case of inversion , the
subject inst be defined by the article ,as ‫وعليك اللام‬, ‫الزيد الويل‬.
B 117. This inversion of subject and predicate also necessarily
takes place in a nominal sentence : (a) when the ‫أ‬luxo
‫ مبتد‬comprises a
pronoun which refers to a word in the ‫خبر‬, ‫ ملو عيني حبيبها‬achat
as

an eye loves fills(or satisfies) it, imoloji so its master ( or owner)

is in‫ ره‬thehouse, not ‫حبيبها منؤ عيني‬, ‫) ; صاحبها في الدار‬6(when the
‫ مبتدأ‬is restricted by ‫ إما‬or ‫إلا‬,as ‫ إما في الدار زید‬only Zeid is in
the house, ‫ ما في الدار إلا زید‬there is no one but Zaid in thehouse,
C ‫ ما لنا إلا اتباع أحمدا‬wehave nothing (to do)butto follo Ahmed
)Muhammad),not ‫إلا زيد في الدار‬, which would mean Zaid is
only in the house ( comp. SS 115, rem . , 185] ; (y) when the is an

interrogative, as ‫ من أنت‬ho atthou ? ‫ ما لهذا‬sohat is this ? ‫اين زيد‬

where is Zeid ? yes és how is 'Amr ?
REM . a .
With the particle | under B we find occasional
exceptions;as ‫یا رب مل إلا بك الضر يرتجي عليهم ومن إلا عليك‬
‫ شب‬- ‫مهر‬

D ‫ل‬j‫و‬yesi
‫و المع‬O my Lord, can victory over them be hoped for save through
Thee ? and (on whom ) can one rely save on Thee ?
REM. b. The inversion likewise takes place when a nominal
proposition is preceded by an interrogative or negative particle, the
transposed predicate agreeing with the subject in number * ; as

* ] In thewords ‫) أأيقاظ أمنية أم نيام‬.Tab

.ii 1973 , 1.7( ‫ أمنية‬has
the sense of a collective : are the house of Omèiya waking or sleeping ?
D. G. ]
§ 119] The Sentence and its Parts . — The Subject & Predicate. 255

‫ ما قأاقئماام االلررجاجلاني‬thetoomen arenot standing; ‫ قائمون الرجال‬já‫مل‬, A

or are the men standing ? See $ 121 .

118. In verbal sentences the subject or agent must always follow

the predicate or verb ; as ‫ مات عمر‬،Omar is dead ; ‫عمر مات أبوه‬
'Omar's father (lit. ' Omar, his father) is dead ( see $ 120).

119. When the noun (substantive or pronoun ) stands first,

and the verb second , the former is not a ‫ فاعل‬or agent, but a B
..0 ,
inimo or inchoative,, of which the latter is the
logo or enuntiative,
the whole being not a verbal but a nominal sentence (see $ 113).
A sentence of this kind, consisting of an inchoative and a complete
verbal sentence, the agent of which is contained in the verb itself
($ 113), may be called compound; e.g. j Zeid is dead, =
‫ أنا قلت ;زيد ما هو‬I have said , where the agent is in ‫قلت‬
In such sentences, the pronoun which is contained in the verb takes
the place of, and falls back upon, the noun which stands before the
compound verbal sentence and constitutes its inchoative. The dif- c
‫د مات‬ij
ference between a compound nominal sentence, such as öld ‫زی‬,‫ر‬
‫ مات‬is this. In the former, the
‫ زید‬áló,
and a verbal one, such as tj
inchoative is always (tacitly or expressly ) contrasted with another
inchoative, having not the same predicate but a different or even
an opposite one ; e.g. isa para ‫ مات‬Wij Zeid is dead and 'Omar
jorg éló
is alive, = ‫ ; أما زيد فمات وأما مر في‬whereas in the latter, in
which the logical emphasis rests almost solely upon the verb, such a D
contrast of two inchoatives is not admissible. Even when the verb is
put into the background by the emphasis falling with specialising or
contrasting force upon some one of its complements, the very fact of
the emphasis so falling at once sets aside all question of a contrast
of the inchoatives ; for example : ‫إياك نعبد وإياك نستعين‬ THEE we

worship and to THEE mecry for help ; ‫ضرب زید رجلا واحدا وضرب‬
mini walang Mat Zəid struck one man, and “Omar struck two men.
 256 PART THIRD. — Syntax. [$ 120
A 120. Those sentences are also compound, which are composed
of a noun and a nominal sentence or a verbal sentence, consisting
of a verb and a following noun. For example : ‫زید ابنه حسن‬
Zèid's son (lit. Zeid, his son) is handsome ; ogni sú uj Zeid's
5 .

father is dead ; ógói jus jj Zdid's brother has been killed ;

Whic
‫بكتاب‬ so muj a letter has been brought to Zeid (lit. Zeid,
there has been a coming to him with a letter ). In compound sentences
of this sort, there is appended to the subject of the nominal or verbal
B sentence, which occupies the place of the mos, a pronominal suffix,
called laviji, the binder or connecter, which represents, and falls back
upon, the noun forming the Memo. Such a sentence is said by the
grammarians to be working
‫ وجهين‬is álom,
‫ جملة‬a sentence with two faces or
aspects, because, as a whole, it partakes both of the nominal and the
verbal nature.

REM . a . The pronominal suffix is sometimes omitted in cases in

с
which the sense isperfectly clearwithout it ;as ‫المن منوان بدره‬ bor
the ghee is (at the rate of) two manās for a dirham ; 'n and more
a

Wigs the wheat is (at the rate

‫ہر د‬
of) sixty dirhams per kurr ; i.e. ilgis
as two manās ofit, voi the kurr of it.
REM. b. A pronominal laxis is not required when the moon is
D wider or more general in its signification than the lis; as ;
‫ل‬voru
‫عم الرج‬e‫ ن‬Mj What an excellent man Zéid is ! Nor when the
‫ ܚمܝܼبܚܵتܝدܵܪا‬and
ܽBeton are perfectly identical in meaning ;; as ‫تقي الله‬
‫حبي‬myutterance (is),God ismysufficiency ;; ‫ا إله إلا الله‬ý‫قولي ل‬
what I say (is), There is no god but God .

121. (a) If a sentence consists of a verbal adjective occupying

the first place, and a noun occupying the second , it may be regarded
as a verbal sentence, the verbal adjective being looked upon as a verb
§ 121 ] The Sentence and its Parts. — The Subject & Predicate. 257

..and
the noun as its agent. E ‫ بير بو بهې‬the Bana Lahb are A
skilled (in augury (; ‫قير نحن عند الناس منعم‬and soweare better
than you in the opinion of men (where, according to the analysis of
‫ره‬
the grammarians, ‫ خبير‬and ‫ ځیر‬are the ‫مبتدأ‬, and ‫ و‬and ‫ نحن‬are
‫ش‬

each a ‫ قاعل بنا من الخبر‬or agentsupplyingtheplaceof thehabar (;

‫ زید ضارب غلاه عمر‬Zeidsslate is beating Omar (where ‫ غلام‬is
the ‫ فاعل‬of ‫ جاینی زید الحسن غلامه ;( ضارب‬there cametomeZeid , B
whose slave is handsome.—(6) The same is necessarily the case, when
the verbal adjective is preceded by an interrogative or negative
particle, and put in the singular, without regard to the number of
..the
following noun. E ‫ أقائم زید‬: Zaid standing? ‫ما ذاهبة هند‬
Hind is not goingaray (where ‫ قائم‬and ‫ ذاهبة‬are the ‫مبتدأ‬,,and ‫زید‬
and ‫ هند‬are each a ‫مست اآللخببر‬ ‫ أقام الرجال ; (فاعل اڈ‬are the men c

standing ? ‫ ما قام الرجلان‬the tro men are not standing ; ‫أقائم‬

‫ أبواه زید‬are Zeids parents standing ? (where ‫ قائم‬is a transposed
‫ خبر‬, ‫ أبواه‬its ‫فاعل‬, and ‫ زيد‬a transposed ‫هل مضروب بوك ;( مبتدأ‬
are thy sons beaten ? (where ‫ مضروب‬is‫ بز‬the ‫مبتدأ‬,,and ‫ بنو‬: ‫تائب‬
‫ قاعل بنا من البر‬or deputy-agent supplying theplace of the ‫( بر‬.
Similarly : ‫ أراغب أنت عن التی یا ابويه‬artthou going to forsche D
my gods, 0 Abraham ? homme igang wis to shutás my two friends,‫ر‬

ye do not keep your compact with me; ‫به‬

we ‫أنجز أنتم وغدا وثق‬
atill geye fulla promise on sohich II relied ? ‫غیر لاو عداك فاطرح‬
thy enemies are not in play, so do thou leave off" play (where
-

‫ ما لاه‬, ..i ‫(ما ترك أمرك‬. But ifthe verbal adjective agrees
with the following noun in number, the sentence is regarded as
; e l ‫ ما قائمان الرجلان‬thetwomen arenot standing (where
..nomina
W. II , 33
 258 PART THIRD . - Syntax. ($ 122

A ‫ قائمان‬is a ‫ خبر مقدم‬and ‫ه الرجلان‬a ‫أ مؤخر‬l‫(مبتد‬. See $ 117 ,

rem. b .

REM.
‫ زید‬sui
In the case of a singular 'noun, as is
uj ‫أقائم‬, aa double
analysis is possible ; ‫ ܕܝܼܝܵܝ‬of which is
may be regarded as a ܽ‫ܵܪ‬new
is the ‫فاعل بنا من الخبر‬, and this is the preferable view ; or
est may be regarded as a transposed , of which wuj
Last is is the
2.000
B transposed ‫مبتدا‬

122. The Arabic language, like the Hebrew and Syriac, has
no abstract or substantive verb to unite the predicate with the subject
of a nominal sentence, for úls is not an abstract verb , but, like all
a

other verbs, an attributive, ascribing to the subject the attribute of

existence. Consequently its predicate is put, not in the nominative,
but in the adverbial accusative (8 41). The same remark naturally
C applies to the ‫) أخوات كان‬342(.
123. If aa definite noun (substantive or pronoun ) and an indefinite
adjective are placed in juxtaposition , the very fact of the former being
defined (no matter in what way) and the latter undefined, shows that
the latter is the predicate of the former, and that the two together
form a complete nominal sentence ; for an adjective which is appended
to a noun as a mere descriptive epithet, and forms along with it only
one part (either subject or predicate) of a sentence, must be defined
‫ يوسف‬Joseph (is)
DD according to the nature of the noun. Eg.váró benz
‫ الشلطان مريض‬the sultan (is) sick, ‫أبو يوسف مريض‬I, Joseph's
sich , vágó
father (is) sick, ‫أبي مريض‬my father (is) sick, ‫ هو مريض‬he (is) sick,
‫ هذا مريض‬thisman (is)sick ; whereas ‫ هذا المريض‬would mean either
this (is) the sick (man) or this sick (man), and vás
sick sultān
jí the
.

124. When both subject and predicate are defined, the pronoun
of the third person is frequently inserted between them (see § 129),
§ 125] The Sentence & its Parts.-—-Subj.& Pred. Mais . 259
to prevent any possibility of the predicate being taken for a mere A
apposition. This is done even when the subject is a pronoun of the
first or second person . For example : ‫ الله هو الحي القيوم‬God is
the living, the self- subsisting, big boobs atí God is the life
and the truth,Egiöſ go sili the (only true) wealth is contentment,
‫ أولئك هم وقود الار‬these are fuel for the fire, ‫ ذلك الرجل هو أنا‬that
man is I, ‫ أنا هو الرب إلهك‬I am the Lord thy God, ‫ أنا هو الطريق‬B
‫ والحق والحيوة‬I am the acay and the truth and the life, ‫من هو أنا‬
who am I * ? [ The insertion of this pronoun takes place also fre
quently, when the predicate is a comparative, as ‫زيد هو أفضل من‬
spos Zờid is more excellent than Amr.] This interposed pronoun ,
which is equally common in the other Semitic languages, is called by
the grammarians ‫ ) ضمرير۔ الفصل‬or simply ‫ (الفصل‬the pronoun or
9
‫ہے‬
separation (between the lives and the já ), slicisono for simply c
shaví][ the pronoun which serves as a prop or support (to the sentence),
>

simply áóká víthe prop or support.

125. In the case of a definite subject in the accusative after

I, BÍ,etc. (5 36), the decir yomon is not required, because the
predicate is sufficiently marked as such by its remaining in the
nominative, as aút í ati ! verily God is one of three ; whereas D
a mere apposition would be in the same case as the subject, viz. the
accusative. A pronoun may, however, be inserted, provided it be of
the same person as the substantive or pronoun after G!, etc. ; as
‫ إن الآخرة هي دار القرار‬verily the world to come is the everlasting
* (This insertion of the pronoun of the 3d person after the
pronouns of the 1st and 2d person, is post-classical; comp. Fleischer,
KI. Schr. i. 588 seq. ]
 260 PART THIRD . — Syntax. [S 126

A abode, ‫ إنك أنت الوهاب‬Thou art thebounteous giver, ‫ إني أنا ربك‬I am
thy Lord. Very often the predicate after !, etc., is introduced,
for the sake of greater distinctness, by the particle j ( 36), as
wwwví
‫ الناس‬sté
‫ل على‬le
‫ فض‬gű
‫ تو‬átví verily God is good towards men ; and
even here thepronoun may be introduced after , as ‫إن الله تو‬
‫ العزيز الحكيم‬verily God is themighty,thenoise: ‫إن هذا هو القصص‬
si verily this is the true narrative.
B Rem.. The noun governed by 6!, etc., is not regarded by the
w

Arab grammarians as a le , but as the !, the noun of'inna,

etc. See § 36, rem. a.

126. When both the subject and the predicate of a nominal

sentence are indefinite, but the former consists of several words, no
doubt can arise as to whether they form a complete sentence or only a
part of one, because the subject, being cut off by the words annexed
c to it, cannot possibly form any one portion of the sentence ( subject or
predicate) in connexion with the noun which is separated from it by
thesewords. For example : ‫قول معروف ومغفرة خير من صدقة يثبعها‬
sif kind words and forgiveness are better, than alms followed by
‫ہره‬ ‫ہ‬

injury ; ‫ولأمة مؤمنة خير من شركة ولو أعجبكم‬andverily a female

slave who believes is better than an idolatress, even when she ( the latter)
pleases you (more).

D 127. The inchoative or subject of a nominal sentence cannot,

according to the Arab grammarians, consist of an indefinite noun *,

* Indefinite (BC) is here to be taken in the sense [not only of not

being defined by the article or the genitive of a defined word , but
even] of not having a genitive after it, for such phrases as 名 ‫عمل‬
‫ يزين‬a pious action or good work adorns (a man ), äcká Jić
‫ من عبادة ألف شهر‬an hour's justice is better than a thousand months'
§ 127] The Sentence and its Parts.—The Subject & Predicate. 261
or one which is not qualified by an adjective, or an expression equi- A
valent to an adjective (as ‫ رجل من الكرام عندنا‬thereis a man of the
‫ كړير‬jo;
noble with us,=os ‫ رجل‬a noble man);except
; in certain cases, of
which the following are the most important.

(a) When the sentence is of the class called as tij dhemji

(taking this term in its widest sense, $ 115 at the end), and (a) the
predicate is placed first,, as ‫ر‬Los ‫ی ال‬si‫ ف‬there is a man in the house,
‫دا‬yloi
‫سرچ‬ ‫ تحت رأی‬under myhead thereis a saddle,,‫ عند زیر چرة‬there B
is a leopard in Zèid's possession ; or (b) the subject is preceded by an
interrogative or negative particle , as ‫ أرجل في الدار أم امرأة‬is there
a man in the house, or a woman ? zlür is is there any
person in the house is so is there a young man among you ?
‫ ما أحد في الدار‬there isno one in thehouse, ‫ ما خل ننا‬wehave no
с
friend, stigma ist to there is no one better than thou art.
(6) When the subject is preceded by the affirmative j ; as

e to joinourcertainly there is a man standing.

(c) When the subject is a diminutive, because the substantive
then includes the idea of the adjective is small, or ‫حقیر‬ con

torship , ‫مثلك لا يبخل‬ one like thee cannot be mean , are quite D
admissible, and yet the governing noun is indefinite, according to $ 92.
The inchoative may, however, be an indefinite verbal noun, provided
that it retains the government of the verb from which it is derived ;
.e.g‫ رغبة في الخير خير‬a desire to dogood is good,‫أمر بمعروف صدقه‬
‫ ونهى عن منكر صدقة‬to orderthat is right is an almas and to prohibit
what is wrong is an alms. In both these cases, however, there is
evidently a sort of partial determination [wanas; comp. $ 75,
footnote ]
 262 PART THIRD . - Syntax. [$ 127

A temptible ; as ‫ جيل عندنا‬there is a mannikin (or a mean fellow ) at

our house (see § 116 ).
( d) When the subject is a noun of a general signification, such
as
" all ;as ‫ " فان‬allperish ; ‫ " يوث‬al die ;because ‫كل‬
,

is here equivalent to ‫ كل الناس‬all mankind,or

allmankind , or ‫ كل أحد‬etery one,
and is therefore virtually definite (see $ 82 , a).
>

B )e) When the sentence expresses a wish or prayer ; as ‫سلام عليكم‬

peace be upon you ! ‫ ويل يزيد‬oe to Zaid !
(f) When the subject is a word which contains the conditional
meaning ofthe particle ‫ إن‬if, such as ‫) من‬$ 6(; .e.g‫من يقم أقم معه‬
if any one gets up , I will get up with him.

)3g( When the subject is preceded by the ‫واو الحالي‬ or waw

which introduces a circumstantial clause ($ 183), or by the conjunction

) ‫ تو‬if not, or by the ‫] فاء الجزاء‬S187]; as ‫سرینا ونجه قد أضاءقد‬
‫ بامحياك أخفى ضوه ځل شارق‬ace travelled by night, after a star
had already shone out, but from the moment thy face appeared , its
light obscured every shining star ) ‫ شارق‬in rhyme for ‫تولا ;( شارق‬
‫ آصطبارودی ځل ډی مقة‬vereitnot forpatience,every lover arouta
would
die ; ‫عير فير في الهط‬-a
‫ إن ذهب‬:if acild ass departs (i.e. if a chief
tain dies) , there is a wild ass (another chieftain ) in the tribe.
D (h) When the subject is the answer to a question, its predicate
being suppressed ; as when one asks jáis is who is in thy house ?
and receives the reply, ‫ل‬.a
‫ رج‬man , scil ‫عندي‬.
( i) When the subject is an adjective, agreeing with and taking
the place of a suppressed substantive ; as
‫و‬
‫ مؤمن خير من كافر‬،
(

believer is better than an unbeliever ,i... ‫ مؤمن‬.a

‫ رجل‬believingman
(j) When the subject is connected with another subject, which is
$ 127] The Sentence and its Parts.—The Subject & Predicate. 263
definite or accompanied by an adjective ; as ‫ زید ورجل قائمان‬Zeid A
and a man are standing; ‫ر‬sl‫لدا‬av‫ ا‬i ‫ تويوى رجل في‬a Temimite and
3
( another) man are in the house, where somente soossáb
‫( اخو‬p. 260,note)

or
‫ ) رجل تیپی‬above, ( ; ‫ رجل وامرأة طويلة في الدار‬a man and a
tall woman are in the house.
[(k) When two or more indefinite subjects are put together anti
.

thetically or synthetically, as ‫ا‬wela

‫ علين‬nogus
‫ ويوم‬bม oge
‫ يوم‬one day is for us, B

another against us ; jus sgtg - jíó oging some say --others say.
(1) When the subject is in the accusative after ! 31, etc. (S 36),
w

as
buleting ‫ ثب‬dojí jis
‫ا كان‬vámi
‫ أمم‬G!‫ إن‬a lion had a wolf and a fox for
companions.]
In all these different sorts of sentences, there can be no doubt that
the words form a complete sentence, and not merely a part of one.
REM . a. The subject may also be indefinite in some cases in C
which a strong emphasis rests upon it ; as ‫ شي جاء بك‬SOMETHING
has brought thee, meaning ‫ عظيیم جاء بك‬:‫ شيء‬something great or
important,or equivalent to su u to sto Lo nothing has brought
thee but a thing (of importance) ; stí by asan ox has spoken !
Rem. b. European grammarians have often erred in their
analysis of the phrase ‫بر جميل‬.in
‫ فص‬the Kor'an,xii 18, ‫ بل ولت‬D
‫تم أنفهم أمرا فصبر جميل‬. This they have translated eitherway ,
your minds have made a thing seem pleasant unto you (and ye have
done it), but patience is becoming ; or mais la-patience vaut mieux ;
or ergo pati (patientem esse) pulchrum est ; according to which
..0 ,
translations ‫ صبر‬would be an indefinite in mod and in its e.
Still worse is it to regard the words as an exhortation , therefore
becoming patience ! ( also - geziemende Geduld !), which would neces
sarily ‫ر‬
be‫ي‬given ‫( فصبرا‬$ 35).( The Arab commentators are right
‫ جم‬imas
in regarding the words eitheras a compound , i... ‫فأمرى بر‬
 264 PART THIRD.- Syntax . [S 128

A June and therefore my business (or duty) is (to show ) becoming

E

patience, or as a compound ‫ مبتدأ‬.ice ) ‫فصبر جميل أجمل (أمل‬

and therefore (to show) becoming patience is more seemly. The
former of these two views seems to be the preferable one. [Comp.
Sībaw , i. irs.]

[REM . C. In such sentences as ‫ا‬to‫إن بذي الحليم قبل اليوم م‬

weest inü verily, before to-day the staffwas struck for an intelligent
B man (i.e. he, being heedless, has been called to attention ); Miros
engagierte en to and before now ye have been remiss with regard
to Joseph ; Lille Ló liég and to-morrow ye will see me, tó is not
pleonastic, as it has been called by some scholars, but forms with
the following verbal clause the subject of a nominal sentence of the
class mentioned under a. Comp. Fleischer, Kl. Schr. i. 479, ii .
390 seq ., where many examples are given. D. G.)

C 128. When both subject and predicate are definite, but the
former consists of several words, it is also clear, without the insertion
of the ‫ل‬waist
‫الفص‬ , that the words form a complete sentence ; as
‫د الله الإسلام‬his‫ عن‬wi the ( only true) religion in God's sight is
el-'Islam ; ‫من الذين ينفقون أموالهم في سبيل الله ملي ح بة أنثبتت‬
‫ل‬J‫اب‬o
‫ سن‬enne
‫ سبع‬the likeness of those who expend their wealth in the path
(or cause) of God, (is) the likeness of a grain of corn which produces
D seven ears.

129. The Maillynó is also not rarely omitted in sentences in

which both subject and predicate are definite, but the former consists
of only one word ; as ativi ‫ رسول‬intó
‫ الله‬jeans ‫ مد‬Muḥammad is the apostle of
God ; ‫ علی ولی الله‬t the friend of God ; ‫ذلك الفوز العظيم‬
this is the‫ هو‬great felicity (el-Ķor’ān, ch. ix. 90, but in verse 73 we read
ondisi jyvir sub). Here a doubt might at first arise, as to
whether these words form a complete sentence, or merely the compound
$ 130] The Sentence and its Parts.- The Subject & Predicate. 265
subject of one ; in which case we must only examine whether the A
words that follow can be taken as their predicate, without doing
violence to sense and grammar, or not.

.130 From the ‫ضير الفضل‬, or pronoun of separation ,must be

carefully distinguished the pronoun which is appended to the subject
to giveit emphasis and contrast its with another subject )‫ضمير التأكيد‬
‫ ;(أو التوكيد‬gas ‫ كان هذا هو السبب‬THIs aas the reason ; ‫إن كان‬
‫ هذا هو الحق من عندك‬: rHis be thetruth from Thee ; ‫ كان المسلمون‬B
‫ هم الجند‬the Muslims (and not slaves or mercenaries) formed the
army ;; ‫ كانوا هم الظالمين‬-.but
‫ ولين‬THEYwere the doers ofwrong
This pronoun is also frequently appended (as in the other Semitic
languages) to a pronominal suffix in any case, to give it emphasis
om
] . $ 139, rem
.c . a ]; e.g ‫هم‬p
SO
‫ ځنت أنت الرقيب علي‬THOU at the
ocatcher over them ; ‫ كان رأيه رهو ألا يتناول أحد شيئا‬mIs opinion oas
acas
that no one should take anything ; ‫) فأين نصيبي أنا من هذا النفل‬
achere then is My share of thisbooty? ‫ لمن هذاالكتاب تنا نحن‬schose
is this book ? OURS; ‫ ما منعكما أنتما من ذلك‬mohat prevented you to
from doing that ? ‫ن إن ترين أنا أقل منك ما وولدا‬i‫ م‬thou thinkest
that I have less wealth and (fewer) children than thou ; and more
‫و‬

rarely to a noun in the accusative, as ‫ وجعلنا ذريته هم الباقين‬and

we made his offspring the survivors. The emphatic j is sometimes
prefixed to it, as ‫إن كنا نحن الصالحين‬.w E
: be the righteous D

[REM. In the preceding quotations from the Ķor'ān some read

‫هو الحق‬, ‫هم الظالمون‬,‫أنا أقل منك ما ووندا‬,takingthesewords
as nominal sentences, which form in the first and second case the
predicate of ‫ كان‬, in the third the second object of ‫رأي‬, just as in
‫ أظث زیدا هو خير منك‬I think Zeid is better than thout art, the
words ‫ هو خير منك‬are the second object of ‫ظ‬.[
W. II . 34
 266 PART THIRD. — Syntax. (S 131
А 131. If, however, in a nominal sentence, a more precise indication
of time and mood be necessary, the Arabs use for this purpose is
or one of its “ sisters ” (S$ 41, 42). The imperfect úgt has in this
case the usual meanings of the imperfect (S 8) : whilst the perfect ús
admits of four significations ; viz. (a ) of the historical tense or Greek
aorist (§ 1 , a), in which case it has, according to the Arab gram
marians, the sense of jló to become; (b) of the actual perfect ($ 1,6) ;
(c) of the actual imperfect, as it were a shortening of već ús,
B which also occasionally occurs ($ 9 ) ; and ( d) sometimes, especially
in the Ķor'ān, of the present, but only by giving a peculiar turn to
its use as a perfect (has become by nature,népvxa),as
, ‫ كان‬átí
, úló ‫إن الله‬
Wij betó verily God is a watcher over you (Süra iv. 1). The perfect
üls expresses the present in particular after the negative particle ló,
‫ا يفتری‬ute
and the interrogative particles, such as ‫ ; †أ‬e.g.sive ‫ا كان‬Ló‫م‬
‫ حديث‬ülé
‫ ولكن تصديق الذي بين يديه‬it (theKoran )is not a story invented
C (by Muhammad ), but a confirmation of what (i.e. of the sacred writings
achich ) preceded it; ‫ ما كان لهم أن يدلوها إلا خائفين‬they cannot
enter them (lit. it is not to them that they should enter them ) but with
fear ; ‫ ما كان في أن تؤمن إلا بإذن الله‬no soulcan believe except
by the permission of God ; újás lo he is not ( the man) to
do asus any harm ;‫ ما كان الله ليضيع إيمانمز‬God is incapable of
letting — lit. is not (the one) to let — your belief perish (i.e. go un
Drewarded(); ‫أن أوحينا إلى رجل منهم‬i ‫ أكان ياس عجبا‬is it »a
wonder to men that We have made a revelation to one of them ?

132. The subject of a sentence is frequently not specified, either

because we do not know it, or do not choose to mention it. We have,
however, the option of expressing ourselves either personally, by such
forms as one says, they say, people say, Germ. man sagt, Fr. on dit ; or
impersonally, either by means of the passive voice, as it is said, Germ .
es wird gesagt, or of the active voice, as it rains, Germ . es regnet, Fr.
$ 132] The Sentence and its Parts. — The Subject & Predicate. 267
il pleut. The Arabs too express themselves in both ways (with the A
restriction stated in $ 133, rem. b). If they wish to use the personal
form , they employ (a) the third person sing. masc. of the verb with
its own nomen agentis, defined or undefined by the article ; as
‫ قال قائل‬،one said, jäi jtó id . (lit. he who, or every one who, was
in a position to say, said) ; jstor jyé one says, is wont to say
(lit. every one who is in , or gets into, a position to say , says ). The
determination of the singular subject by the article expresses in such
cases a distributive totality. (6) If the undefined subject is one of a
number of persons who are known to us, the suffix pronoun of the B
third person plural is annexed to the nomen agentis to indicate these
‫ قا‬one of them said. (c) If there be several
‫ل قائله‬jis
persons ; as ‫م‬it
indefinite subjects, the third pers. plur. masc. of the verb may be
used, as if they say, igos; they think ; but it is more usual to
employ the verb in the singular and its nomen agentis, defined or
‫ قا‬some said ;
‫ل قائلو‬júś
undefined by the article, in the plural, as ‫ن‬volt
‫ ما سمع الامعون قط شيئا أحسن من ذلك‬no one has ever heard
anything more beautiful than this (lit. those who can hear have never C
heard etc. ).
REM , a. Instead of the nomen agentis, defined or undefined,
ஏE , .
such words as ‫ جل‬a man, õlyol a woman , and the like, are
occasionally used, with or without the article ( compare 1 Sam.
ix. 9 ) ; as ‫يقول القائل = يقول الرجل قال قائل = قال رجل‬, .etc
For the nomen agentis with the plural suffix, the word vir
O,

a part, some one, is often employed ,as más jó = jl. D

[REM. 6. A peculiar manner of expressing the general terms
somebody, something, certain ones, etc. is to use the relative pronouns
‫ من‬and ‫ ما‬with repetition of theverb,as ‫من نزل‬o ‫ونزل من أهيها‬
there came down from its inhabitants who came down, i.e. some of
them ; silaci to solási he gave me what he gave me, i.e. much, or
little, or something between the two, according to circumstances . It
 268 PART THIRD . - Syntax. [S 133

A ‫ العظيم‬to magnify and multiply,,

‫ وانتي‬tebu
is specially employed ‫ر‬marketing
if an impression of something important or mysterious is to be
conveyed, e.g. Ķor'ān liii. 16 She Lo öz himaſ s! when that
covered the sidra -tree which covered it, i.e. hosts of adoring angels.]
133. If the impersonal form of expression is to be employed, the
Arabs use the third person sing. masc. of the passive voice, whether
of a transitive or of an intransitive verb, [which, however, may never
B be used absolutely like the Latin itur, fetur ]; as ‫ تب بالقلم‬it
has been written,it is written with the writing reed ; ghei ole
there was a travelling, they travelled towards ' Irāk; a celsi it
has been disputed, there has been a dispute about it ; lávné
there is vehement thirst felt, they thirst vehemently ; there
was a passing by Zəid ; ‫م‬on‫يه‬this‫ل عل‬just
‫ أنز‬a revelation was made to them ;
C autá send he fainted (lit. there was a covering thrown over him ,
comp. ‫ף‬kyn
. ‫علي‬
ֵּ‫) הִתְעַל‬, whence ‫ه‬auto erithe person in a faint,fem.
‫) المغشي عليها‬in later times incorrectly ‫المغشية عليها‬, and, without
the preposition [S 113, rem .[, ‫المغشی‬, .fem ‫(المغشية‬. ] Similarly
ben he repented (lit.there was a falling upon his hand ), and
ou ‫ي‬so‫ ف‬baw 23

lence ‫ هو مقوط في يده‬he is repenting ; ‫ الشجرة المنهي عنها‬the

forbidden tree , ‫ المنعم عليهم‬the benefited ones ; ‫ ميت عنها‬she was
D left an orphan, or a widow .] Verbs thus used are always of the
masculine gender, which the Arabs frequently employ where we should
use the neuter. The neuter plural of adjectives and nomina agentis
and patientis is, however, always expressed by the feminine plur. san.
or the plur, fract.; as ‫ الحسنات‬beautiful things (not ‫الحان‬, which
ww

means handsome persons(, ‫ الطيبات‬good (things not ‫الطيبون‬, which

means goodmen (, ‫ الموجودات‬existing things, ‫ الواجبات‬necessary things ,
‫ہر‬

‫ المئات‬possiblethings, ‫ الشدائد‬aflictions,calamities, ‫ البواعث‬eaciting

$ 133] The Sentence & its Parts.—Subj. & Pred .; impers. passive. 269

causes (from ‫(باعث‬, ‫ الموانع‬hindrances (from ‫( مانغ‬.. [The sing.fem . A

must be used for the neuter of the numerals, as ‫ ثلاث‬three things
or qualities, and may be used for that of the pronouns, as oid these
things. ]
REM . a. The passive of directly transitive verbs may be used
either personally or impersonally ; as iš it (a book or letter) was
written, and the act of writing was performed . In the former case, B
the direct object or accusative of the active voice for the sentence
that supplies its place, § 23, rem. c] becomes the subject of the
passive (Joleur ókés ); in the latter, according to the Arab
grammarians, the subject is the nomen actionis of the verb itself,
which, however, can only be used if qualified, as will be seen
hereafter ; so that, according to their view, the impersonal passive
becomes really personal. If a passive, which is, according to our
ideas, impersonal, governs an object by means of a preposition (as
abc sané), this object becomes virtually the subject of the passive C
voice, just as it was virtually the object of the active, and con
sequently if the nomen actionis be expressed along with it, it must
be put in theaccusative ; as ‫) سير إليه سيرا‬not ‫( سیر‬, from the active
eli sw he journeyed to him (a journeying). In either case , —
whether the passive be personal or impersonal, —it is out to
‫فاعه‬,
an act of which the agent, i.e. the acting person , is not named
(Vol. i. $ 74, rem. ), not even by means of a preposition, as with us
(for the subject of the passive voice is, as we have said above,
merely the ‫ مفعول به‬or object of the active voice *, converted into D
>

the subject, and so ‫ قائم مقام الفاعل‬or ‫نائب نائب مناب الفاعل‬
Joli uc, supplying the place of the agent). If the agent is to be
* The
‫به‬ ‫مفعول‬, or object,may
, be either < yo pure,, i.e. the
accusative, or
ayo mad impure, i.e. a preposition with the genitive
) ‫جار ومجرور‬.
 270 PART THIRD.-- Syntax. [S 133
A named, the active voice must be used *.-As stated in $ 26, b, rem . b,
>

the accusative of the nomen verbi ) ‫المفعول المطئ‬ can be changed

into the subject of the passive voice only when it is qualified or
specialised by an adjective or a substantive in the genitive. We
cannot say ‫سیر سیر وضرب ضرب‬, because such an undefined masdar
adds nothing to the meaning of the verb ) ‫ ;( لا فائدة فيه‬but we
may say ‫سير سير البريد ضرب ضرب شديد‬, ] and even ‫ضرب ضربة‬
B In expressions such as ‫ قد يف خوف‬and ‫قد قيل في ذلك قول‬
the words ‫ خوف‬and ‫ قول‬are not to be considered as maşdars, but
as substantives, the meaning being something was feared and
something was said about it).] The is
‫ ظرف‬can be put in the nomina #

tive also, but only when it is capable of inflection and adds

cannot say ‫كب سحر‬
wecannot
something to the meaning of the verb. We
he role early this morning ,nor ‫ جلس عندك‬from
from ‫ ركب سحر‬le
‫ جلس عندك‬le sat beside thee, nor ‫ ; سیر وقت‬but we may say
C ‫ سير يوم الجمعة‬Friday toas travelled, ‫ صيم رمضان‬Ramadan sons
‫مطق‬. ‫ول‬When
fasted ‫ مفع‬a passive verb is connected with a ‫مفعول به‬, and a
‫ هر و‬.. ‫د‬
or ‫به مصدر‬ ‫ظرف‬, or a ‫ومجرور‬ the
‫به‬ ‫مفعول‬
alone can , as a general rule, become the ‫ ;نائب عن الفاعل‬.e.g
‫ ضرب زید ضربا شديدا يوم الجمعة أمام الأمير في داره‬Since
the Arab uses many verbs as directly transitive, which in our
idiom are only indirectly so [S 23, rem. b], their passives may of
course be employed in both of the above ways ; e.g. not only
D
‫) جيء إليه‬impers.)means pentum est ad eum , but also simply ‫چی‬
(pers.). In the former case, only the third person sing. masc. is
‫چيیء بشئ‬
used , . a
‫ ج‬thing was brought, imperf ‫ ; جاء بشئ‬in the

** [In modern Arabic the agent may be named with the passive by
means of the preposition is by : see $ 48, h, rem . 6 and comp.
:

Fleischer, Kl. Schr. i. 91 , 599, iii. 68, Spitta $ 173, c, Nöldeke, Zur
Grammatik, p. 54. ]
$ 135] The Sentence & its Parts.—Subj. & Pred.; impers.passive. 271
latter, all the numbers and persons are employed, sing. 3 p. m. A
is, f. So, 22 .p.m. ‫ جئت‬, etc.,as ‫ چی بشئ‬something toas
m.

brought to him (act. si oslo he brought him something ).

Rem. b. Our impersonal actives indicating natural phenomena,
such as it snows, it rains, etc. , are always expressed by the Arabs
personally. Theysay either ‫ ثلج الثلج‬the anoto anous, ‫مطر المطر‬
the rain rains, or ‫ ثلجت الماء‬the skyenous, ‫ مطرت الماء‬thesky
rains. In the latter of these two forms of expression the substantive B
chami is sometimes suppressed, leaving only the verb in the 3d pers.
. fem , ‫ثلج‬, ‫ مطر‬- ]In like manner they say ‫أصبحت‬
.sing
I was in the morning, where we should say it was in the morning ;
‫ أمسي‬I am in the evening for it is evening; ‫ تم يلبث أن مات‬he
tarried not long that he died for it was not long before he died ,
etc. D. G. ]
REM. C.
In the case of words like jgts it is allowed,pic
it is necessary, were it behoves, etc., followed by ☺i with the
subjunctive, the subject naturally is the following clause, and
therefore the verb does not come under the head of impersonal *.

134. The complements of the subject and predicate are annexed

to them either by subordination (the accusative or a preposition with
the genitive) or coordination (apposition ).

135. When the pronominal suffixes are attached to a substantive

in the accusative, governed by a verb, or to one in the genitive, D
governed by a preposition annexed to a verb, they may refer to the
agent of the verb, and consequently have a reflexive meaning, for

* [On the impersonal use of sés see $ 56, c, footnote.

OES
Comp.
also Nöldeke,Zur Grammatik, p.76 seq. who adds movi so co lú
his opinion changed as to the matter, Jär so jis do when it was
next year, etc.]
 272 PART THIRD . - Syntax. ($ 136

A which the Arabic, like the other Semitic languages, has no distinct
‫م‬pronominal
‫نه‬ form ; as ‫ أنفق ماله‬he has spenthis (open)money ; ‫قالوا‬
ople they said to their (own) brothers. But a suffix attached to
the verb itself cannot have a reflexive meaning : to give it this, the
‫ وجه‬face,] (and in later Arabic
word met soul, hic eye, essence, [orámcg
; spirit, Sis substance, essence, or jló state) must be interposed ;
in
‫و‬as ‫ قتل نفسه‬he killed himself ; ‫ عز به نفسك‬console thyself thereurith ;;
B ‫روحی‬ ‫ أهتل‬I have destroyed myself ; ‫وجهی پله‬ ‫ أشتم‬I resign
myself to God ;] except in the case of the verba cordis ($ 24, b, B),
when the pronominal suffix is the first object and the second object
is either a noun or a whole sentence ; as bláóälá he imagined
himself struck ; les prése ots he saw himself (in a dream , it
appeared to him as if he were) pressing out wine. [A suffix attached
to a preposition annexed to the verb may have a reflexive meaning,
E

C as ‫ا‬homese ‫ مالا‬des delsi he took a large amount of money with him ;

‫ كثير‬výcó
‫به بخت نصر تهب معه بوجوه بني إسرائيل‬ ‫ فلها‬and then
Nebuchadnezzar had laid it ( Jerusalem ) waste he carried off with
him the principal men of the Bènū ' Isrä'al; ij isi vois I drew
my son to myself. This however is allowed only where no doubt can
arise as to the meaning of the suffix - which in this and the former
case happens oftener with the suffixes of the 1st and 2d person, than
with that of the 3d pers.—and even then the interposition of wes, etc.
D takes place frequently.]
Rem. Compare the use, in Heb. and Aram .,of way, Loai,
soul, dky or bya, Korte bone, and 413, body; and in Æthiopic,
of C20 : (re'es) head .
136. The complements which are coordinated with , or placed in
apposition to, the subject or predicate, are called by the Arab gram
marians exigőí,sequentia, followers or appositives (sing. e), and the
JA -

word to which they are placed in apposition is called Egidi, that

136] The Sentence & its Parts. - Appositives; the Adjective. 273
which is followed (by some word in apposition ). They are generally A
connected with a noun, more rarely with a verb.

(a) With the noun is thus united the adjective, which , like all
other words in apposition, follows the noun , and agrees with it in
respect of determination or indetermination, as well as of gender *,
.number, and case ; e.g ‫ رجل كريم‬a noble man, ‫ الرجل الكريم‬of the
noble man , ‫ زيدا الكريم‬the noble Zeid (acc.(, ‫ كتابه العزيز‬His gloriots
‫و‬

book :; ‫ة‬de‫تع‬jo‫ قاعدة مم‬a square pedestal; ‫ إمرأتاني حنان‬two handsome

women ; ‫ورا كثيرة‬ great treasures (acc.(;; ‫جبال راسية‬,, or ‫راسيا‬, B
or ‫رواس‬, firm mountains:; ‫قوم گریم‬,, or ‫قوم څرما‬,, aa noble tribe or
family, (úgáw inni wicked people. As the preceding examples prove,
the adjective following a collective noun denoting rational beings
(Vol. i. $ 292, b) may be put in the singular and agree with the
grammatical gender of the collective, or in the plural sanus or fractus
>

according to the natural gender of the persons indicated. The

pluralia fracta , even when derived from a masc. sing. are construed
with adjectives in the fem . sing. or plural (sanus or fractus). They C
can have an adjective in the masc. plur. only by a constructio ad
sensum, as has been remarked Vol. i. $ 306, for instance ügiobó jloc,
believing men. This is also applicable to the names of Arab tribes, as
úgós the noble Ķorèis (comp. § 147). The collectives
mentioned Vol. i. $ 291 , a, e may be joined to an adjective in the fem.
‫غنم راعياث غنم‬
sing. or in the plur.fem . (sanus or fractus) as ásis one or

pasturing sheep or goats ; those mentioned Vol. i. $ 292, a to an

adjective either in the sing,. masc. (as ‫(جمع‬, .e.g ‫ الحمام الطوق‬D
the ring-necked doves;or in the sing. fem. (as áčko), e.g.Mojlanci
angle trunks of palm -trees worm -eaten and empty ; or in the plur.
非
* ( Exceptions are Leef Lo feminine, i.e.soft water ; como los
‫رجل‬
a hermaphrodite.. For an exception to the agreement in number
see $ 100. D. G.]
W. II . 35
 274 PART THIRD.Syntas . [S 136

A sanus fem ., as ‫ تخل باسقا‬very tall palm_trees; or in the broken

plural,,as ‫ الشاب القال‬the heavy clouds; ‫ الحمام الورق‬the dashn
white doces. A noun may have two or more adjectives connected
with it ; as ‫ الكوكب الير الأحمر‬thebright redstar; ‫بسم الله الرحمن‬
‫ بر‬,themerciful.Sometimes
‫ الرحيم‬in the nameof God, the compassionate
a substantive is used adjectively; asjäyks a young woman (who
number of mosques ;
B is) a virgin (‫وام‬n‫ جج‬779 ‫ ماجد عدة ;(د‬a
۲- |

‫ تشتيل على‬it containsa numberofhorsesand men ;

‫ ځیينلي ورجالي عدة‬cortó ‫هر‬

‫ سنين عددا‬a number of years ; ‫ وذاك منه خل عادة‬and thisisa usual

custom of his. This is especially the case with nomina verbi ]‫الصفة‬
‫ ;[ بالمصدر‬see Vol. i. $ 230 , rem . c); a8 ‫ معي رجال فترة‬there are
plenty ofmen with me; ‫ ويحبون المال با جها‬and they love wealth
C with a great loe ; ‫ وأنتم معشر زید على مائة‬and ge are a band of
more than a hundred ; ‫ رجل موم‬a fasting man , ‫ امرأة عدن‬a just
woman, csó, igi people with whom one is pleased, Liebe
‫هو‬ ‫و‬ GO
or
isogg jü a cleaving blow and a violent thrust and a burning
shot * Compare ,in Hebrew , ‫ وجود‬5 * .Num
. ix 20, 9 ‫مجھ جو‬
Nehem .ii..12; and in Syriac,1 ‫ تر مف‬many guardens, ‫حمثال‬
14.00 121@ ó many sons and daughters.
*
D [It is sometimes a matter of taste or use, whether the qualifica
tion by a genitive ($ 80), or by apposition is to be employed ; for
instancesometribes of Keis sey ‫رجال أسواء رجلان واين رجل سوو‬
instead of the usual i
‫؛ رجلا و جل و‬
‫م‬
‫رجال سو‬, and a tradition
‫و‬

has ‫ مثل الجليس السوء مثل الكير‬a bad companion is to becompared to

a blacksmith's bellows (Zamahśarī, Fāiş i. 372 seq.; comp. the Gloss, to
.Ib ‫( سوأ‬. .D
al-Fakih s.v n .G [
$ 136] The Sentence & its Parts. — Appositives ; the Adjective. 275
REM. a. A noun in the dual or plural may, of course, be A
followed by two or more adjectives in the singular, if a contrast
between the objects mentioned be intended ; as ‫رأيت الزیدین‬
‫ الكريم والبخيل‬I saw the too Zaids, the liberal and the stingg ;
‫ مررت برجال طويل وقصير وربعة‬I passed by ( three)men, (one(
tall, ( one) short, and (one) of middle size.
Rem. b. If an adjective in the dual be connected with two
singular nouns, whose regents ) ‫ (عامل‬are identical in meaning and B
government, it agrees with them in case; as ‫ذهب زيد وانطلق‬
‫عمرو الكريمان‬, or ‫ مررت بيرد وجز على عمرو الكريمي‬But
if the two regents be discordant in meaning or government, the
adjective is put either in the accusative (supplying out I mean)
or in the nominative (asthe ‫ خبر‬of a suppressed ‫ بتدأ‬, .viz‫;(هما‬
as
‫ جاء زيد وذهب عمرو الكريميني‬or ‫مررت بزید وجاوزت ; أثريهانی‬
‫ عمرا الكاتبين‬or ‫الكاتبانی‬. If the two singular nouns be connected c
with only one regent, as subjects or objects, the same constructions
of the adjective are admissible ; e.g, ‫ قام زید وعمرو العاقلاني‬or
‫ رأيت زيدا وعمرا الكريمين والعاقلين‬or ‫الكريمان‬. But if the one
be the subject and the other the object, the construction varies
according to the relation of the regent to each in respect of its
meaning ; you say ‫ضرب زید عمرا العاقلان‬, where the relation is
different in respect of meaning (for Zèid alone is uskó,and 'Amr
alone is ‫(مضروب‬, but ‫ ام زید عمرا العاقلين‬, where the relation D
‫م‬is‫اص‬the
‫(مخ‬same
. ( for both Zèid and 'Amr are at once ‫ مخاصم‬and

REM. c. In later times a noun in the dual, whether masculine

or feminine, is sometimes construed with an adjective in the
singular feminine ; as ‫ ميلان إفرنجية‬tuo European miles ) ‫میل‬
(
sc.(; ‫ متلاصقة داراهما متصاقبة الحيطاني‬their tabo houses
masc . are
 276 PART THIRD. - Syntat. [S 136

A contiguous, the walls touching each other is usually fem . ). [ For a

third example see $ 94. This construction has become the rule in
modern Arabic.

Rem. d . It is always possible to break the natural connection

between a substantive and its adjective (elaiji),when the latter is
employed ‫مررت بير الكريم المدح والذم والشم والترحيم‬, or
; as

‫الخبيث‬,or ‫البشيئ‬, supplying,in thecase of thenominative, ‫هو‬

B and of the accusative, ‫ ) أعنی‬see $ 35, 5, 6, rem , a (.
REM . e. The pronoun to is often used in apposition to an
as
indefinite noun,with a vague intensifying force )‫ ;(ما الإبهامنية‬a8
‫قليل ما‬some(small) number or quantity : ‫ أعطنا كتابا ما‬giveus some
book (or other(: ‫ جئت لأمر ما‬thou artcomebecause of somematter
)of importance(; ‫إن الله لا يستحيي أن يضرب مثلا ما بعوضة فما‬
‫ فوقها‬verily God is not ashamed to invent (lit. strike, coin ) some
C similitude (or other), a gnat and what is above it (in the scale of
creation) ; có sü , nearly equivalent to sä isi, what a man !
‫ قتيل ماقيل بنی قری‬what aman tohave been slain toushe wohom
the Bènū ķorèim have slain ! [Another mode of expressing the
sante idea is the use of )( ‫ هو (هي () ما هو ()هی‬after a verbalnoun ,,
of ) ‫ ما هو (هي‬after an adjective or an equivalent expression such
as
‫) مائل إلى القلة = إلى القلة‬$ 51, a),in the sense that a person or
a thing possesses a quality in a certain degree, either between the
D two extremes, trptov 7 )‫ تقليل القلة‬, or
TL in an indefinitely high
‫رم به‬ ‫گه‬

degree. Instances of the former are ‫ازهر اللون إلى البياض ما هو‬
bright of colour,verging on white ; só tó ataí sú rather few than
many ; ‫ أسود ما هو‬blackish , etc;. of the latter ‫حاجة هي ما هي‬
‫و‬

a very great need ; ‫ حية خبيئة ما هي‬a very dangerous snake;

‫إلى الشمالي أقرب ما هي‬much more to the north . (This use of
$ 136] The Sentence & its Parts.-- Appositives ; dem. pronouns. 277
Úó is not to be confounded with its use in such phrases as A

‫و‬.he
‫ لأمر ما ه‬is in the woray which ought to be pursued,se ‫; مأموم‬
or
‫ یعنی ځل واحد أن الحمد ما هو‬everybody knousbohat is the
meaning of ḥamd “ praise " ). D. G.]
(6) As regards the demonstrative pronouns, which are looked
upon by the Arabs as substantives (Vol. i. SS 190, d, and 338 ), either
they may be placed in apposition to the substantive, or the substantive
to them ; as suaji hís this king, lit. this (person ),the king ; lisj B
Zèid, this ( person ), i.e. this Zeid or Zeid here. In both cases the
apposition is a qualificative one, whence the first word in each is
called by the Arabs gogcui that which is described ,and the second
díaſ the description or descriptive epithet. [The pluralia fracta are
construed with a pronoun in the fem . sing. , unless they designate
rational beings, in which case the pronoun may be in the plural , as
‫ هؤلا‬This last is also applicable to the collectives, as c
‫ء الرجا‬B.
‫ل‬jonkin
‫هؤلاء القوم‬, and the namnes of Arab tribes,, as ‫ریش هؤلاء‬. As the
demonstrative pronoun is by its nature definite, the noun in apposition
to it must of course be definite likewise. If it be defined by the
9

article, the demonstrative usually precedes, as Egio

‫مثبوع‬, very rarely
follows,as ‫ ; تابع‬..e ‫ هذا الرجل‬this man,seldom ‫الرجل لهذا‬. But if
the substantive be definite by its own nature (as a proper name or
a mere word , $ 78, and Vol. i. $ 292, c), or defined by having a genitive
9

after it, the demonstrative always follows; as léo mj this Zèid (see D
above(*; ‫ إذن هذه‬this (toord)'idan ; ‫المشهور في النحو أ إلى هذه‬
es sites it. ‫ܐ‬is‫ ܙ‬well known in grammar that this ’ilā has the meaning
of ma'a ; o sous these my servants or these servants of mine ;
* If the proper name has the article, lis may possibly precede,
because it is to a certain extent a common noun defined by the article
,, l-Harit .
)see above ); as ‫ لهذا الحرث‬, or ‫الحرث هذا‬.this
 278 PART THIRD.Syntas. [$ 137

‫هذه‬
A ‫ إلى وقتنا هذا‬to this time or age of ours; ‫ كتابه هذا الجيل‬this
famous book of his. On the other hand, in such a phrase as ású oss
‫ الله لكم آية‬the words ‫ تاقة الله‬are the predicate ) ‫ (خبر‬of ‫فنيه‬, and
Toő is a circumstantial accusative, this is the she -camel of God, ( as)
a

a sign unto you . [Likewise , in the saying ‫ هذا زید قائم بالباب‬the
words ‫ زید قائم بالباب‬must be considered as the predicate of ‫هذا‬,
see this is (= see there is) Zaid standing at the door , in ‫هذا عمر بن‬
‫ه‬ ‫م‬

B ‫ الخطاب متوشحا بالشيف‬here is ‘Omar the son of Al-Hattab girded

with the scord , ‫ عمر بن الخطاب‬is the predicate, ‫متوشحا بالشیف‬
a circumstantial accusative. D. G. )

.137,
‫جميع كل‬, and legs frequently ‫عام‬, totality, are often
placed after the definite noun which they might govern in the genitive
($ 82 , a, b), in which case a pronominal suffix is appended to them ,
2

referring to that noun ; as ‫ثم‬ ‫ألا‬, or ‫الناس جميعهم‬, allmen

C (also ‫الناس جميعا‬,$ 82,8b(; ‫القبيلة كلها‬, or ‫القبيلة جميعها‬,the enhole
‫ر ی‬ ‫قرر‬

tribe; ‫ الندات جميع‬alltheHinds ; ‫الجيش عامه‬thewhole army;

‫شرره‬ ‫ہر‬ ‫وہ‬

‫ القوم عامتهم‬the lohole tribe or family . If the noun be indefinite , this

construction is inadmissible, for the pronominal suffix, being by nature
definite, cannot refer to any other than a definite noun. There is,
however, one exception, namely, when the indefinite noun indicates a
‫ رج‬eci
‫ب‬period
.pr of time ; e.g se
‫ه‬ats‫ شهر ځل‬awholemonth ; ‫ سنة لها‬a schole
D year ; voy ‫ يا ليت عدة ولي ځله‬0 acould that the number (of
months) of a whole year were (all) Regeb ! Words of a vague signifi
cation, such as ‫زمن وقت‬, ‫حين‬, ‫ة‬.t
, ‫مد‬, ,aa im ,etc ,
space of timee
cannot be thus construed. - After is and its suffix we often find a
second apposition, agreeing with the preceding substantive in gender,
number and case,namely,the adjective ‫أجمع‬,.fem‫جمعاء‬.plur
, ,masc
‫أجمعون‬, fem . (see Vol.i. $ 309 ,a, 65( ‫جمع‬.the
) dual masc ‫أجمعان‬,
$ 137[ TheSentence & its Parts. Appositives; , ‫جميغ‬,.etc 279
fem ‫جمعاوان‬, are not admitted by the great majority of gram-
.and A
marians); as ‫ فسجد الملئكة كلهم أجمعون‬and the angelsall without
exception) prostrated themselves. Sometimes this word is used without
,
;i as
‫ لأغوينهم أجمعين‬verily I will lead them all astray;
‫ إذن ظينت الدهر أبی أجمعا‬in that case I could passallmy timein
aleeping )‫ أجمعا‬in rhyme for ‫ قد صرت البقرة وها أجمعا ;;(أجمع‬the
pulley creaked a whole day.
REM . a. Instead of using the pronominal suffix, the noun itself B
is occasionally repeated after ‫ل‬is‫ ك‬,; as in the verse of Kutèiyir,,
‫ و یا أشبه الناس كل الناس بالقمر‬thout most like of allmen to the
moon (in beauty), instead of ‫كلهم‬
Rem. 6. A peculiar use of is as an appositive is exemplified
bythe phrases ‫ هو الشجاع كل الشجاع‬he isa truehero, ‫هو العالم‬
‫ ځل العالم‬he is a thorough scholar ; ‫ أنت الفتي كل الفتى‬thout
‫لعال‬a‫ ا‬real man . Similarly, according to Az-Zamahsari, ‫و هذا العالم‬
‫م‬art
‫جد‬, or ‫ العالم‬, this is a thorough scholar )‫ جث‬toil,effort,
pains
.truth
; ‫حق‬ , reality, fact). [Comp. $ 82, b, rem , footnote [
REM . C.
To ‫ أجمع‬are
sometimes appended other synonymous
words, which form their fem . sing. and masc. and fem . plur. in the
.same
way ; viz ‫أبضع أكتع‬, and ‫أبتع‬. The usual sequence of
these synonymsis exemplified in the phrase ‫جاء الجيش كله أجمع‬
‫ر‬

‫ أكت أبصع أبتع‬the entire army came; but the order of the last D
two may be inverted, ‫ابتع أبصع‬. They are scarcely ever used
singly and without is ‫قا;ء‬as‫ صبجياانیم اعلقاوم تأحكمتلعنوين الل‬thewohole
‫تني كنت‬tribe
‫يا لي‬,
or people, came to me ;
‫ حولا أتعا‬0 could that I were a sucking child ,whom ad -Defa
(or she with the slender nose) would carry for a whole year ; lelgi
 280 PART THIRD . — Syntax. [$ 138

A
‫ الدواب واتقونا بنعمان بن زرعة أكتعينا‬they turned their backeupon
us and protected themselves one and all by ( seeking refuge from us
behind) en - Nomān ibn Zur'a.

[Rem. d . Cool is also often connected with the noun to which

it refers bymeans of the preposition ‫ې‬, as ‫ جانوا بأجمعهم‬they
came all of them , all together. Likewise ( 139) and the
words jumi ( properly a thong of untanned hide) and as a worn-out
B
rope), as ‫ ځذه بأسره‬take thout it all; ‫ جاء القوم بأسرهم‬the people
came altogether ; ‫ إليه الشىء برمته‬.he
‫ دفع‬gave him the thing al
together ; ‫برمته‬.I
‫ أتيتك بالشیء‬havebrought thee thething altogether
Similar corroboratives ($ 139, rem . a) are given by Hamadānī in
his Kitāb el- Elfaz, Beyrout ed. p. 214. D. G.]

138. Like js and its synonyms are used ibis, fem .cüis,
both ($ 83), ( város a part) and is a half. They follow the noun to
C which they refer, and take the appropriate pronominal suffix ; as
‫ إن المعلم والطبيب كليهما‬the teacher and the physician,both of
them ; ‫ آمنت بطبيعتي المسيح ومشيئتيه كلتيهما‬I believe in thetwo
natures of the Messiah and His two wills, both of them ; [
ömées a part of the people came to me); aia
‫صفه‬
wamajihalf the army.
REM . Upis is very rarely used in apposition to a feminine
D ‫ تم بقربي الزينبيين كليهما‬thou favourest (ne
substantive, as me(
with the proximity of the two Zèinèbs, both of them .

139. Wies, soul, and is, eye, essence (of a thing), are often
employed in the sense of ipse, self ( compare § 135). They are then
not seldom prefixed to a noun, which they govern in the genitive ; as
‫ عين الهوان‬degradation itself,atter degradation ; ‫ عين الكوكب‬the
star itself; ‫ هو عبارة عما الثاني فيه عين الأول‬this is an expression
$ 139[ The Sentence and its Parts. Appositives ; ‫عين‬, ‫ت ننفسه‬281
‫رأي‬
for that wherein the second (term ) is identical with the first;; andthe A
I hate seen himself; ‫ إزالة الجهل عن نفسه‬the removing of ignorance
from himself. But more generally they are used, like is, as

appositives to a definite noun , and are followed by the appropriate

pronominal suffix ; 4s ‫ جاء زید نفسه‬zeid himself came; ‫جاءت زینب‬
‫مهر‬
‫ نفسها‬Zeineb herself came ; ‫ رأيت عهرا نفسه‬I squo Amr himself
If the noun be in the dual or plural, the plural forms met and
‫ه‬

‫ أعيان‬should be employed, as ‫ رأيت الأميرين أنفها‬I saw the B

tuo'amira themselves; ‫ مررت بالهنديين أنفسهما‬I passed by the two
‫ر ر‬
Hinds themselves; ‫ قتله الوزراء أنفسهم‬theoars themselves kiled him ;
‫ان دراهم‬-these
‫هذه أعي‬ arethy dirhems themselves]. Some authori
ties admit in this case the use of the singular or the dual, as
‫م‬

‫ جاء الزيداني تفهما‬, or ‫تفاهما‬, the too Zaids themselves came ;

(comp. Vol. i. $ 317 , rem. d). These words are also often connected
with the nouns to which they refer by means of the preposition C
‫ زب‬as ‫ جاء الأمير بنفسه‬the 'amir came in person ; ‫الهوان بينه‬
degradation itself : ‫ والآن يختارون بأنفسهم‬andnow they are choosing
in person ; ‫ العوالی الرماح بأعيانها‬the quala (spear-shafts) are the
spears themselves ; ‫يقسم لين هو لم يرد لهؤلاء النسوة بأعيانه تيغرونه‬
he swears that unless he restores the women themselves, he will assuredly
attack him ; ‫ بعينه‬, etc. after an indefinite noun meansa certain , as D
‫ وأما العواصم قاسم الثانية وليس موضع بعينه يتمنى العواصم‬-E
Awāşim is the name of a district, there is no place of this name).
Occasionally, too, is is appended in the form of an adverbial
accusative, or by means of the preposition but without any suffix ;
as
) ‫هذا هو علينا بعين‬, this is the very person (or thing(--- ‫ نفس‬and
may be put in direct apposition to a pronominal suffix in the
accusative or genitive ; as ‫ مررت بك نفسك‬, ‫رأيتك مررت به نفسه‬
W, 11 , 36
 282 PART THIRD.—Syntax. [$ 139
‫و‬

A ‫نفسك‬, ‫رأيته نفسه‬. But if the pronominal sufix represent the agent,
as in the verb, the insertion of a separate pronoun is a matter of
necessity ; as ‫ هب هو نفسه‬he went atay himself , ‫القوم حضروا هم‬
‫گه ر ر ره‬
‫ أنفسهم‬the people arere present themselves ; ‫ قمت أنت نفسك‬thout
‫ر ر‬
thyself stoodest up ; ‫ قوموا أنتم أنفلم‬stand ge up yourselves (whereas
we can say ‫ قوموا ثم‬standup all ofgout(.
REM . a. The words ‫ ل‬, ‫أجمع عامة جميع‬.etc ‫لان‬s‫ ك‬and
, ugi
B ‫كلان‬, ‫تنف س نصف‬, and ‫عين‬, form one division of that class of
appositives, elszí, which the grammarians name ‫ ) التأكيد‬or ‫و‬

‫(التوكيد‬, the strengthening or corroboration , and ‫المؤكد‬-the

corro
borative, because they strengthen the idea of totality or of self,
5

already contained in the go, by the addition of their own. This

class of appositives is designated by the special name of ‫التوحيد‬
‫المعنوي‬, the corroboration in meaning, to distinguish it from
‫ه‬
C
‫الوحيد اللفظی‬, the verbal corroboration , which consists in the
‫حبس‬repetition
emphatic ‫االللتكارحيقرو)ن أحبس آ‬or‫أ(تاالتككرأاثراك‬of‫لي‬the
‫بتغ‬word
‫نجاة‬itself
‫ى ;أن ال‬as‫إل‬in‫ن‬the
‫فأي‬
verse

whither, whither can I escape with my mule ? The pursuers are

comeup to thee, come up to thee ; halt! hale ! ) ‫ إحبس‬in rhyme for
‫(احبش‬. So also in answers,, ‫ نعم نعم‬yes,yes; ‫ لا لا‬.no
, no If

a word is governed by a preposition or other particle, both must

D be repeated ; as ‫ موت بك بك‬Ipassed
I by thee, by thee ; ‫في الدار‬
‫ في الدار زید‬Zhid is in thehouse,in the house ; ‫إن زيدا إن زیڈا‬
‫ قائم‬Zeid, Zeid is standing up. A suffix pronoun may,however ,
be strengthened in this case, as well as in others, by the cor
responding separate pronoun [$ 130 ]; as ‫ مررت بك أنت‬Ipassed by
THEE, or ‫ به هو‬by Him ; ‫ أكرمتني أنا‬thout didnt shoun kindness to MP;
‫ رأيتنا نحن‬thout saucest us ; ‫ قمت أنت‬THOU stoodest up ; [ or by a
$ 139] The Sentence & its Parts. — Appositives; the Adj. díãi. 283

construction with , ‫ك‬jy ‫ك إيا‬weety

as
‫ رأيت‬:I saw thee
THEE (Vol. i. $ 189)].] A
Only a poet could venture to say ‫ إن إن الكريم يحلم‬indeed ,
indeed the noble man is grave or sedate.

Rem. .b. Besides the iss , the Arab grammarians acknow

ledgethreeother classesof ‫;توابع‬via
.viz ‫ العت‬or ‫ألصق‬,thedescription
or descriptive word, qualificative, adjective ; jui, the substitution
or permutative ; and Wils, the explanatory apposition .
9

(1) The Sc or åso may refer to the gas either directly B

)in which case it is a simple adjective),as ‫ جاءني رجل حسن‬there
came to me a hanılsome man ; or indirectly, in virtue of a following
word which is connected with it, as ‫ جاءني رجل حسن أخوه‬there
came to me a man whose brother is handsome. In this latter case
‫ت ر‬ ‫ر‬

the adjective (called mell the connected ] belongs, as a prefixed

predicate, to the following noun (called under the connecting),
which is its subject, and the two together form a ‫صفة‬, or C

qualificative clause, of the preceding substantive, with which the

‫ر‬ ‫گه‬
adjective agrees in case only by attraction * ; as lámé phong city
‫أخوه‬i I sain a mnanthose brother is handsome‫ر‬,‫رأيت امرأة حسنا وجهار‬
I saw a mooman anlose face is handsome, ‫دوه‬22‫مررت برجل كثير ع‬
II passed by a man tohose enemies are many, ‫ة أمه‬aime
‫مررت برجل حسن‬
I passed by a man whose mother is handsome. If the following
noun be in the dual or plural, the adjective is still left in the D
singular ;‫ مرت بامرأتيني حسين أبواها به‬I passed by twowomen
as

mohose parents are handsome, ‫ مرز برجا حسنة وجوههم‬1 passed

by somemen solose faces are handsome, ‫رأيت رجالا كريما آباؤهم‬
* [ Also when the preceding substantive is only understood, as
‫) ومن النجدي أوطانها‬.se ‫ (القبائل‬and from the tribes that are
domiciled in Negd ( Hamdāni, p. 118, J. 11 ). D. G. )
 284 PART THIRD . — Syntax. [8 139

A I saw some men whose fathers are noble ; though, if the noun be
plural, the broken plural of the adjective is admissible, as ‫رأيت‬
‫ رجلا كريما آباؤه‬or ‫ كاما آباؤه‬, I san a man tohose forefathers are
noble. If the preceding noun be defined in any way, the adjective
takes the article; as ‫ رأيت زيدا الحسن وجهه‬I saw Zeid,whose
face is handsome; ‫ گی أبو الفتوح العجين المتقه يره‬Abu
Fatal Al- Igti, woho hasbeen mentioned before,narrates ; ‫جاء الرجل‬
B ‫ الفاضل أبواه‬the man came,tohose parents are eacellent; ‫جاء يوم‬
‫ الكاملة طبيعتاه‬Jesus came, solose tuto natures are perfect, ‫الملوك‬
‫ ابلقماتسيقةه يقلروهبهمم‬the kingswho havebeenementioned before :; ‫فویل‬
woe to those whose hearts are hard ! The Arab

grammarians assume that every adjective contains a pronominal

agent within itself, when no other agent is expressed, and they
therefore call the adjective wedi that which is like the verb.
C Consequently ‫ رجل حسن‬is with them = ‫منن هو‬ ‫حس‬‫رجل = رجل م‬
)‫ ; حسن (هو‬but ‫رجل حسن أخوه‬, where another agent is expressed ,
is‫تزجبلرحجسنم أمخونه =أمه‬and
‫ مرر‬so‫هم‬with
‫ آباؤ‬therest
‫ كريما‬:‫=رأميرترتجابلراج= رأيستنةرأجاملها‬
. ‫وو‬
‫ گرم آباؤهم‬, ‫رايت زيدا الذي حسن وجهه = رأيت زيدا الحسن وجهه‬
etc. In such cases the seemingly nominal sentence is in reality a
verbal sentence, serving as árs to the preceding substantive. On
D the other hand, if the substantive precedes the adjective, as in
‫جاءني رجل أبوه حسن‬, the second substantive and the adjective
which follows it form together a really nominal sentence, of which
...
the substantive is the ‫ مبتدأ‬and the adjective the ‫ زخبر‬and
consequently both must remain, under all circumstances, in the
nominative, and the adjective must agree regularly with the
substantive, as ‫مررت برجل أمه حسنه رايت رجلا أوه حسن‬, .etc
(2) The ju, or permutative, is of four kinds. ( a) JÖT JA
$ 139] Sentence & its Parts. — Appositives; Permutative, JMI. 285
‫ من العين‬the substitution of thewhole for thesolole ; as ‫ جاونی عمر‬A
‫ أخوك‬،Omar,thy brother,cametome: ‫جاءنی قوم المدينة براوهم‬
‫ وعفاؤهم‬the people of the city came to me, great and small ;
‫ إلى صراط مستقیم صراط الله‬to a straightpath,thepath of God ;
‫ تنفقا بالناصية ناصية قارية خاطئة‬we soil
will seize and drag (him (
by the forelock, a lying, sinful forelock ; ‫رايت زيدا إياه‬, ‫مروت‬
‫بزی به‬. A noun may be substituted for the suffix pronouns of
the 3d pers.,as ‫ زه خالدا مررت بهه زید رأيته ززیيدا‬visithim ,Halid,, B
‫ها عجائب‬ ‫ على أنها الأيام قد صرن‬notorithstanding thatthey
the times—are all become marvellous ; but not for the suffixes of
the 1st and 2nd pers. , unless a plurality of individuals is distinctly
referred to, as‫)تون لنا عيدا ولينا وآرا مد‬which)may be a festival
for us, for the first of us and the last of us. We cannot say

‫ ;; مررت بك زي رايتك زيدا‬nor even ‫الويل لي أنا المشكين‬

toe to me, the poor | ‫عليك الكريم‬
‫و‬
on thee, the noble *. In such cases C
as
‫رايتك إياك‬, those are right who regard ‫ إياك‬not asa ‫ بدل‬but
as a
‫ ) توكيد‬see rem .a). [To this kind belong the permutatives
that indicate the parts of the whole, the species of the genus, the
definitions of measure, number, weight and colour ($ 95, foot
note).]—(6) Joi ing weesi ja the substitution of the part for
‫ أكل الرغيف له‬1 ate theleaf,thethird part of it,
the whole ; as

or I ate a third of the leaf : ‫ قبله اليد‬kiss him , his hand ; D

‫ أوعدني بالسجن والأداهم جیلی‬he threatened me,my foot, south
.the
prison and fetters )‫ الإشتمال (ء‬-the
‫ بدل‬comprehensive substi
tution , i.e. the permutative which indicates a quality or circumstance

* ]In the former case we ought either to write ‫المسكين‬ as

predicate of the emphatic ‫) أنا‬$ 130(, or to use the accusative of

specification ($ 35, 6, 8), which must be used in the latter case.)
 286 PART THIRD . - Syntax. [S 139

A possessed by or included in the preceding substantive ; as ‫أعجبني‬

‫ه‬Loic ‫أعجبتني كلامك‬
‫ علم‬j Zeid's learning filled me with surprise ; stóvís
thy speech filled mewith surprise ; ‫ ما ألفيتني حلمي مضاعا‬thout
hast not found my understanding lost (or thrown away) ; S;Š íg
‫برد مائها‬ has and she called to mind the coldness of the water of
Tahtad ; ‫ يسألونك عن الشهر الحرام قتال فيه‬theywill question thee
about fighting in the sacred month, lit. about the sacred month,
B (about) fighting in it. (d) The fourth case is where the per
mutative ) ‫ (المبدل‬iswholly different from the ‫ مبدل منه‬or word
for which it is substituted )(‫(البدل المباین بلمبدل منه‬. It is of
two sorts :(a) ylényi Jūs the permutative of retractation (from
ril, to turn away from ), or ‫ بدل البداء‬the substitution of a neto
opinion , something one would like to substitute for the original
statement ; as, for instance, when one says he isi I ate bread,
but then, preferring to state that he had eaten meat, adds the
C word ‫(أكل بڑا تحما تحما‬. Here, to use the words of the

grammarians, ‫ يقصد المتبوع كما يقصد التابع‬themethod is designed

as well as the tâbi'; and this is what distinguishes it from (8 ) já
bereiding bibî the permutative of error andforgetfulness, in which
the ‫ع‬gis
‫ متبو‬is uttered merely by mistake, and the correct word
‫مرو‬
immediately substituted for it ; as when one says wante vulc ‫ت‬Bajmo
I
I passed by a dog, (I meant to say) a horse. The wayijus is
D equivalent to the use ofthe particle ‫(أكلت بڑا بل تحا) بل‬.
(3) The War ils or explicative apposition is the asyndetic
connection of a substantive with a preceding substantive, which it
more nearly defines; as ‫ جاءني أخوك زيد‬thy brother Zeid came to
me; ‫ عمر‬waia Abū Hafs ،Omar
‫ أقسم بالله أبو حفص‬Ala ' stcore by God
) ‫ مز‬in rhyme for ‫ يشقی من ماء صديد ;(عمر‬heshall be givenue to
drink water, watery humour (or matter); as,toopen is very
$ 140] The Sentence and its Parts.— Verbal Appositives. 287

vrstoj (which) is lighted with (the oil of) a blessed tree, an olive. A
This apposition is equivalent to the use of ‫وهو‬, ‫وهی‬,.etc . (e.g
‫( جاني أخوعكطفوهوالزنیسدق‬, and, being asyndetic, is opposed to the
or connection of sequence, which takes place by means
of connective particles, such as ‫و‬, ‫في‬, ‫ م‬, ‫حتی‬, ‫أم‬, and ‫أو‬. To
this kind belong the appositives to a vocative ($ 38, rem. f ), those
that denote the material ( 94), the nicknames (8 95, a, rem .), etc.)
REM . C. One verb may be substituted for another by the ju
‫العت من القت‬, as ‫ من يفعل ذلك يلق أثاما يضاعف له العذاب‬B
whosoever doeth this, shall find a recompense of sin-his chastisement
shall be doubled ; ‫ ديارنا تجد حطبا جز‬country
‫ بنا في‬- ‫م‬thou
‫ا تلو‬shalt
‫ تأتين‬find
‫متى‬
when thou comest to us— -visitestourus in
fireupood in abundance ; or by the ‫بدل الإشتمال‬ as
‫من يصل إلينا‬
Le lit Lisans whoever comes to us (and) asks help of us,is helped.
REM. d. The word to which a is zo is annexed is called by the
grammarians iui that which is strengthened or corroborated ; C
that which is followed by a ‫ صفة‬or ‫الموصوف نعت‬, or ‫المنعوث‬, the
qualified or described ; that which has a ‫ بدل‬after it , ‫المبدل منه‬
that for which something is substituted ; and that to which a
‫ عطف البيان‬is appended, ‫ المعطوف عليه‬the voord to which (an
explanatory word) is attached (by means of a virtual conjunction ).

REM.e. In phrases like ‫تقائلوا بعضهم ببعض‬, they fought toith

one another, the words vies des are a permutative of the agent D
contained in the verb ‫تقاتلوا‬, and serve to strengthen the idea
of reciprocity belonging tothat verbalform . The ‫لام لتقوية العامل‬
in ‫لبعض‬, which supplies the place of the accusative,is dependent
upon ‫قاتلوا‬, they fought with , contained in ‫تقاتلوا‬
140. One finite verb may also be put in apposition to another.
In this case either (a) the first is the preparative act, introductory
 288 PART THIRD. - Syntax. (S 141

A to the second, as á inni óló he arose (and) prostrated himself before

him ,ovi su otci jaw,li then he sent (and) informed his father of
>

this, ‫ وعادت الفتن وقعت‬and disturbancesbrokeout again ; or (E)the

second modifies the first, as ‫ سجد أطال‬he continued long prostrate,
‫نى أحسن‬.
‫ غ‬h
sang e
trell In both cases the older and more elegant
form of expression is to insert the conjunction : ‫ قام فسجد ته‬,
‫ عاد فسات‬he asked again , ‫سجد فأطال‬. If the first of thetwo verbs
B be a perfect, the second must be so likewise, for the imperfect would
‫و‬
be a ( lás or]jis jtó (see $ 8,d, e), and,as such,would virtually
stand in the accusative (comp. $ 44, c, rem . a) ; as‫يغل‬ ‫ أرسل‬misit
nuntiaturus, he sent to inform. If both verbs are in the imperfect,
the second may either be an apposition [$ 139, rem. c) or a ‫; حال در‬
as
ben jeweils he sends (and) informs, or mittit nuntiaturus, he sends
to inform *
с Rem. The later Arabic construction , without the conjunction,

very common in Syriac, eg. or he sent ( and) seized him,

ois en or they rebuilt; and also occurs in Hebrew , e.g. names
ְ‫אֶרְעֶה צֵאנְך‬,.G
? en
. xxx .31

2. Concord in Gender and Number between the Parts

of a Sentence.
D 141. In verbal sentences, in which (according to § 118) the
predicate (verb) must always precede the subject (agent), the following
rules hold regarding their agreement in gender and number.
142. (a) If the subject be a singular substantive, which is
feminine by signification (Vol. i. $ 290, a) , two constructions are
possible. (a) If it immediately follows the verb, the verb must be

+ [In this case also the conjunction may be inserted, as

bibi
‫ فاده‬uit I will come to take it, Tab . i. 1526, 1. 13. D. G. ]
 § 142] Sentence and its Parts.—Concord of Predicate & Subject. 289

putin the fem . sing.; as ‫ جاءت هند‬Hind cume, ‫ قالت امرأة العزيز‬the A
wife of al-Azīz said . But (B) if it be separated from the verb by one
or more words, the verb may stand in the sing. masc. , although the
fem . is preferable ; as ‫ حضر القاضي أمرأة‬a woman came before the
judge ; ‫ » تقد ود الأخيطك أمر و‬bad mother gdoe birth to thatpoor
‫تو‬.
a

Əl-Ahtal; óvois Lucis ogé bison G! a man,whom one of you (women)

has deceived. [As to the collectives mentioned Vol. i. $ 290, a , e, see
$ 145. ]
REM a.. The form of expression ási jlé, So-and -so said , is B
Rem.
mentioned by the grammarians only to be condemned.
[ Rem. 6. The concord remains if, in negative or interrogative
sentences, the subject be preceded by ivo, as ‫ما جاءت من امراة‬
‫ ليلة‬linn
no woman came,aide
, ‫ مضت‬is
‫ من‬Sisas ‫ قد‬is how many nights have
gone by ! D. G.]
(6) If the subject be a singular substantive, which is feminine
merely by form or usage (Vol. i. SS 290, 6 , 291 ), the preceding verb
may be put either in the masculine or feminine, whether the subject C
immediately follows it or not, though in the former case the feminine
is preferable,, as ‫ طلعت الشمس‬the sun rose, ‫ة‬á‫ اللبن‬Š
‫ كسرت‬thebrick
aras broken ,rather than ‫ طلع الشمس‬, ‫كسر اللينة‬. In the following
examples the verb is masculine : ‫فينظروا كيف كان عاقبة الذين‬
compliance is and see what was the end of those who preceded them ;
‫ځة‬. ‫ يت يكون ياس عليهم‬thatthepeople maynot have anypretert
against you ; ‫ فمن جاء موعظة من ربه‬and othersDeter receives an D
admonition from his Lord ; ‫ ولو كان بهم خصاصة‬even if there be in
them poverty or straitness.
( c) If the feminine subject be separated from the verb by the
w

particle jį, the verb is put in the masculine ; as ól v us

swi ui no one was innocent except the maidservant of ' Ibnu ’l-Alā
W. II . 37
 290 PART THIRD . - Syntax. [$ 143

A (i.e. isiis ; có). The feminine is, however, admissible, especially in

poetry,asin theabove example, ‫) ما تركت الخ‬.i.e‫(فتاة‬.
(d) The verbs re and men ( Vol. i.$ 183) take the masculine
form in preference to the feminine, even when the subject is feminine
JED D

by signification ; as amembeli Zèinèb is an excellent woman !

ratherthan ‫نعمت‬
B 143. If the subject be a plur. sanus masc., or a plur. fractus
denoting persons of the male sex, the preceding verb is usually put in
the sing. masc ., particularly when one or more words are interposed
‫ قال المؤمنون‬the believers said ;
between it and the subject ; as
‫ من‬jlang
átó is ‫ رجال‬mo sisse there came one day (some) men from
‫کر و‬
Məkka ; Cách có hos osishall we believe as fools have believed ?
But ‫ قالت الرواة‬narrators say ; ‫ وما ذا تبتغي الشعراء منی‬andthatis
C itpray that thepoetsacantofme ? ‫ »فقد ذبت ل من قبلك‬postles
have been accused offalsehood before thee.
REM . a. A similar construction may be found even in Old
German ; as do wart genuoger ougen von heizen trähenen rột ; uns
hazzet liute unde lant.

.REM.6 ‫ بنون‬sons (pl. of I), and other similar words

(Vol. i. $ 302, e, and rem . d ), are exceptions, being treated as
plurales fracti (see $ 144), and therefore admitting the verb in the
D fem . sing. This remark applies, however, to ügis only when it is
used to denote a family or tribe (compare $ 147) ; as gas ‫قالت‬
justyny the Bènū 'Isrā'al ( Children of Israel) said.
144. If the subject be a pluralis fractus, no matter whether
derived from a masc. or a fem . sing. , the preceding verb may be either
masc. or fem. ; as sus meningis niet eens
embin then, after this, your
).(; ‫متى كان الخيام بزی طلوج‬
heartsbecamehard(from ‫قلب‬,masc
when the tents are (set up ) at Dū Tolūḥ (from one , fem .). See $ 143.
$ 146] Sentence and its Parts.—Concord of Predicate & Subject. 291
Rem. The remark made in § 142, c, regarding the particle A
oj, applies here too. An example of the fem . is jy long
‫ النوع الجراش‬and nothing remained but the low rugged ridges
of hills (from číó, fem .),where a prose writer would have said
‫وما بقى‬, .scil : ‫شی‬
145. If the subject be a collective of the class mentioned in
SO

Vol. i. $ 290, a, e, like sheep or goats, y birds, or one of the B

collectives or other nouns mentioned in Vol. i. § 292 , the preceding
verb may be put either in the masculine or feminine, though the fem .
is preferable ,if thesubjectbe feminine; as ‫قالت اليهود ليست الصاری‬
coć the Jews say, The Christians stand upon nothing (have no
foundation fortheir belief(; ‫إني أراني أحمل فوق رأی بڑا تأكل‬
‫شهر‬ ‫م‬

äis veti I saw myself (in u dream ) carrying upon my head ( some)
bread , of which the birds were eating. С

146. If the subject be a feminine noun in the plural number,

whether plur. sanus or plur. fractus, the preceding verb may be put
either in the masc. or fem . sing. ; unless the plur. sanus refers to
persons of the female sex, in which case the fem . is decidedly to be
preferred. Examples : ‫هيالهبمينات‬
‫ من بمعدا ماكتبتجاأيد‬after the convincing
proofs have reached you ; omnino as long because of what their
hands have written ; ight to the servehoti the evil consequences of D
what they did, came upon them ; Bogense solo cocco and my
‫ه قد‬as‫لأن‬hy because its signs
daughters lamented their misery; Gibatedo us
have already appeared ; aiseen sistegang jú (some) women in the
‫ره‬
city said ; jog tainment ‫ تبى‬who
‫ هدان‬ýgi had it not been for these two,
their women
‫مور‬
would have been taken prisoners ; but such instances as
Choisite 15!, when believing women come unto you,are com
paratively rare.
 292 PART THIRD.Syntax. [ $ 147
A 147. The names of the Arab tribes, which are mostly of the
feminine gender, take a preceding verb in the fem . sing. (see § 143 ,
rem . b) ; but a following verb may be put in the plur. masc. , because
s
names have
. the senseu c
of collectives ; e.g ‫قشير‬h
‫تجمعت عقيل و‬
‫) وتاكوا ما يلحقهم من سيف الدولة‬thetribesof) Okail and Kosair
assembled and complained to one another of what was being done to
them by Sèifu ' d -daula.

B 148. In general, when once the subject has been mentioned, any
following verb must agree with it strictly in gender and number ; as

‫خرج عليه الصيادون فانهزم منهم فأما وهو في الشه فلم يروه‬
the hunters came out ( sing.) against him and he fled from them , and ,
whilst he continued on level ground, they did not overtake him (plur.) ;
‫ يتاج له المفارقون مما يتاجون يتوح الحمام‬those parting are
moved (sing. ) by‫ ری‬it as they are moved ( plur.) by the mournful cooing of
C doves; ‫ كان فيه قبة تعرف بقبة الهواء‬there ads (masc.) upon it a
cupola, known (fem.) by (the name of) the cupola of the air ; blémig
‫ الخضر يثرك الزوار أسبابهم ويصعدون ميكيين إلى أعلى الجبل‬and
the pilgrims leave ( sing .) their baggage at the cave of el-Hidr, and
ascend (plur., julgui being a plur. fract. denoting rational beings)
ttoo miles to the top of themountain : ‫ بله ملائكة يتعاقبون فيگه‬God
has angels who watch over you in turn (plur. , for the same reason as in
‫ه‬ ‫م‬

D the last example (; ‫ قجال الشوار واثقين بقوب‬andtheherd heeled

)masc.) and guarded (their recor ) arith an old buck )‫ اتقين‬.fem,
because, with the exception of the single buck, the rest of the herd
were does(; ‫ قبرز منه وقاعا قد تبين بألوان الأصباغ‬and he took out
of it scraps of paper written with (ink of) various colours (where
Buis might also be used).—If irrational or inanimate objects are
spoken of ( for example, in fables) as persons, the plur. fractus may
be followed by the verb in the plur. masc.; as ‫كلاب مرة أصابوا‬
 $ 149] Sentence and its Parts.-- Concord of Predicate & Subject. 293

‫ جلد بچ‬once on a time ( some) dogs found the skin of a beast of prey ; A
‫ وقالوا يجلوبهم له شهدتم علينا قالوا أنطقنا الله‬and they shall say to
their skins (members), Why have ye borne witness against us ? They
shall answer , God hath made us speak.

[REM. When the subject in the plural denotes irrational or

inanimate objects, the plur. fem. of the verb is preferred in classic
Arabic, if their number does not exceed ten, the sing. fem., if it be
9

more, as
‫ ثلاث لون‬and ‫) لإحدى عشرة خلت‬$ 111(. The same
rule applies to the pronouns that refer to them , which in the B
w
former case are is, wo, in the latter so and lá (as a suffix).
Comp. Fleischer, kl. Schr. i. 695.]

149. If the subject be a substantive in the dual number, the

preceding verb must be put in the singular, but must agree with the
subject in gender. Examples: ‫ ودخل معه السجن فتيان‬and tuto
young men went into the prison along with him ; ubi séjlis 10
after the two men disputed with one another about me ; js bo ves o
‫ » بيننا من الأمر ما لا يفعل الأخوان‬fter something had taken place
between us, which brother and sister do not do; ubicei lýý
‫ يوم وليلة إذا طلبا أن يدركا ما تيما‬the two times, day andnight,
when they seek (to effect anything ), are never long in attaining what
they aim ot; ‫ورث يداه وعداه ورجلاه‬and his hands and arms
and feet acerepierced with nails ; ‫ شبيه بمن قطعت قدماه‬like one
anhose feetarecut off ; ‫ و كان بذر حاضرا وابن حمل ما تقث كقاك‬D
had Bedr been present and ' Ibn Hamèl, thy hands would not have
been branded ) ‫ حمل‬in rhyme for ‫لا رأت عيناه من طول البقاء ;( حمل‬
mayhiseyesnever cette from constant ateeping; ‫خذ من شاربك حتى‬
‫ تبدو شفتاك ومن ثوبك حتى تبدو عقبات‬cut yourmoustache till your
lips can be seen , and your dress till your heels can be seen (compare, in
 |

294 PART THIRD.Syntas . [S 150

!

.A
IIebrew , Mical iv 11, ‫دو‬ ‫ جو‬PTI۲(; ‫وكذلك تتوي هتان‬
‫ اللغتان في الرجال أيضا‬and thusthese twowords (vit. ‫بلاد‬2andEg
oby)(
are alike in their application to men also.- A following verb must, of
course , agree strictly with the preceding subject in number as well as
gender ; as ‫ إذ هممت طائفتان منمأن تفشلا‬when two troops among
you were on the point ( sing .) of behaving with cowardice (dual). But
if it be a collective, designating rational beings, the masc. plur. is
admissible ; ‫و‬as ‫وإن طائفتان من المؤمنين اقتتلوا فأضحوا بينهما‬
B und if two parties of believers fight with one another, make peace
between them.

REM. Sometimes, however, a preceding verb is found in actual

agreement with a following subject in the dual or plural, or even
‫و‬
in virtual agreement with a singular collective ; as ‫وقد أسماه بعد‬
océg after both far and near (after every one) had abandoned him
) ‫ حميم‬in thyme for ‫ إحمرا عيناه ;( حميم‬his eyes evere red ;
C
‫ رمتا يداه‬hishands thereo or aduot ; ‫رأين الغوانی الشيب لاج بعارضی‬
the women saw the white hairs which glittered in my whiskers ,
‫ يلوموني في اشتراء الخيل أهیی‬my family abuseme for the
purchase of the pal -trees : ‫ نصروك قومی فاعتززت بنضرهم‬my
people aided thee, and thou becamest powerful through their aid.
The phrase ‫أكلوني البراغيث‬, the lets devoured me, is generally
cited by the native grammarians to exemplify this construction,
(which, they say, is peculiar to the dialect of the tribe of Țeiyi').

150. If the preceding verb has several subjects, it may be put

in the plural, as ‫ جئنا أنا وأنت‬thout and I are come; or it may agree
in number and gender with the nearest subject,,as ‫ویسند هرون وبنوه‬
‫ أيديهم على رأسه‬and Aaron andhis song shall lay their handsupon
his head ; ‫ تكلمت مژیم وهو في موسی‬Miriam and Aaron spoke
about Moses. --- If the subjects precede, and are either three or more
$ 151] Sentence and its Parts . — Concord of Predicate & Subject. 295
singulars, or a singular and a dual, the verb is put in the plural ; if A
they aremerelytwo singulars ,in the dual;as ‫البطن والرجلان تخاصموا‬
‫د‬ JOO

turn feet disputed aith one another ; ‫ا ملبشردهروالحر‬

the belly and the two
‫ ځاصما‬the cold and the heat disputed with one another ;‫والنجم والشجر‬
‫ يسجدان‬and the plants and trees aorship (not ‫يسجدون‬, because
‫ الجم‬and ‫ الشجر‬are not individuals but species(; ‫وحول الأرض‬
‫ والجبال فتا ة واحدة‬and when the earth and themountains
shall be lifted up and dashed in pieces at one stroke (not B
; or

viss, juají being a plur. fract.). If the subjects be of different

genders, the verb is usually put in the masculine, as in the first of the
aboveexamples,orin ‫الكل وكثرة النوم يبعدان من الله ويورثان الفقر‬
indolence and excess of sleep remove us far from God and make us
heirs of (reduce us to) poverty.

151. The verb frequently agrees in respect of gender, not with

the grammatical subject, but with its complement (the genitive C
annexed to it), which is the logical subject ; us ‫ولو جاءتهم ځل آية‬
even though every sign should come (be shown) unto them ; ma songs
‫ كل نفس ما عملت من خيرمحضرا‬on theday(uchen)every soul shall
find the good it has done present (along with itself before God );
‫ إسترت جميع أأعصضابئعیه‬all my timulus aere rela.read ; ‫قطعت بعض‬
some of his fingers were cut off'; ‫تفتدي منه بعضها ببعض‬
some of them ransom themselves from him with others (by giving up D
‫ہے‬
others to him (; ‫ إذا بعض السنين تعرقتا‬when some gears shall have
gnated at as
us :
; ‫ كنتم خير أمة أخرجت ياس‬ye are thebestpeople
‫و‬ ‫ش‬
thathas been brought forth (created ) for mankind ; ‫مشين كما اهتزت‬
‫ وما تسقت أعاليها ميز الرياج الواسم‬theyawlhudasspearstrave,the
tops of which are bent by the passing of gentle breezes; ‫إنارة العقل‬
 296 PART THIRD.- Syntax. [$ 152

A söö egles gustó the brightness of the intellect is obscured ( or

eclipsed ) by obeying lust. As the above examples show , this agreement
of the verb with the logical subject most frequently and naturally
takes place when the grammatical subject expresses a subordinate
‫ جميع‬vizes andá
is, eges,
idea, like , ‫( غیر‬see $ 82).
(Rem. The verb sometimes agrees with a subject that is to be
supplied from the context, as ánis
‫ كلمة‬, áles, etc. Examples : Lelis
‫فبعث‬
B ati İsa's this (threatening) reached the Apostle of God ; w . Soos
Kliág lenu wes this (saying) remained in the mind of êr- Rasid
and he kept it in memory. Comp.the phrase ‫ما كان يحتلها تك‬
he is not the man to forgive thee this (deed ). D. G. ]

152. What has been said regarding the concord of gender and
number in a verbal sentence, is nearly all applicable to a nominal
C sentence.

(a) When the predicate [being a verb, or an adjective) follows

the subject, they must agree strictly in gender and number (see $ 148) ;
unless the subject be аa plur. fractus, in which case the predicate may
also be put in the fem . sing. , as ‫ تعمى القلوب والعيون ناظرة‬the
hearts are blind, whilst the eyes are seeing. This latter remark applies
also to the names of the Arab tribes (see $ 147) ; as jogar uns gig
‫ نازله في بني عامر بن صعصعة‬and the Benu "Absaere at that time
D dwelling among the Bènū ‘ Amir ’ibn Şa'şa'a .
(6) When the predicate precedes the subject, as happens in
negative and interrogative sentences, then (a) if the sentence be
nominal (see $ 117), the predicate and subject must agree in number ;
but (B) if the sentence be verbal (see $ 121 ) , the predicate is put in
the singular.
(c) If the subject be a collective , the predicate may be put in
the plural; as úgáló ő is all are obeying him . Similarly,when a
$ 152] Sentence and its Parts. — Concord of Predicate & Subject. 297
‫ ولكن أكتر‬A
verb is placed after a collective subject (see $ 148) ; as
‫ الناس لا يشعرون‬but the greatest part of mankind are thankless ;
‫ قریش منهم يخشون الناس‬a part of them are afraid of men ; ‫أثروا‬
‫ده‬
soś to j let the Turks alone as long as they let you alone ;
‫ لأن جيشه متوا‬because his army had perished[].
( d ) The predicate frequently agrees in gender, not with the
grammatical subject, but with its complement, which is the logical B
subject (see 8 151); as ‫ ځل نفس ذائقة الموت‬every soul shalltasteof
death ; ‫ أثي الفواحش عندهم معروفة‬the commiting of crimes is held
laudable bythem. [Less frequent are such expressions as usi jó
‫ اظر‬eine jus, zowo every ear is hearing, and every eye seeing.)
ist
]REM . In the words of the Prophet ‫ألا إن كل دم ومالي‬
‫ى مائيين‬sous
‫ ومرة كانت في الجاهلية فهى تحت قدم‬verily,,mohatever
claims of blood, money or privilege there existed in the time of C
Ignorance, are under these my feet, i.e. are abolished by me, the
fem. form of els and (replaced in 'Ibn Hisām 821 , 1. 6 and
Tab.i.1642, 1.9 by or CCM),is to be explained by is having
‫ر‬the
‫يسي‬senseof ‫ جماعة‬totality, just as in the verse of Gamil ‫إن الزيارة‬
men yani verily the visiting is easy for the loving one, the
predicate has been put in the masc. gender according to the sense
)‫فإالنزياالرةحواعدلثى أاولدمعىن بیها‬being= ‫المزار‬,and in ‫فإن تسأليني عن شي‬
sögi ésigavui els and if thou ask me about my locks, lo ! the D
vicissitudes of time have taken them away, the verb agrees, not with
‫الحوادث‬, but with its equivalent ‫الحدثان‬.. In the words of the
tradition (Zamahśarī,Faik, ii. 490) å @maro ati laman sosio je
death on the path of God is purifying (from the filth of sin ), the
predicate is according to some interpreters fem ., because misi has
.

the meaning of osci martyrdom . Others say that has a

practice is to be understood. Neither explication is necessary,

W. II . 38
 298 PART THIRD . - Syntar. IS 152

А for the nomina actionis are of both genders (Vol. i. $ 292, d ).

‫م شہر‬.

Other examples are Țab. i. 2185, 1. 9 seq. Siziang ito sguais

and fasting makes weak and feeble ; Lèbīd, Mu'all. 33 óslá ejiss
w

holas sc say is áio and it was his wont, to let her precede,
when she drew back, where also some interpreters say that the
predicate agrees with ‫;الإقدام = القيمة‬.Faik
i 246 ‫ما هى إقبال‬
jus! this is only an advancing and a retreating (comp.e). D. G.]
B (e) If the subject of a nominal sentence be a personal or demon
strative pronoun, and the predicate a feminine substantive or a plur.
fractus *, then the former is generally put in the fem . sing. , even
when the preceding substantive, to which it refers, is of the masc.
gender; as ösü ois ! this is an admonition (Germ. dies ist eine
Erinnerung, Fr. ceci est un avertissement); ati giá sl such are
God's ordinances (Germ. dies sind Gottes Regeln, Fr. ce sont-là les
regles de Diet(; ‫ تلك آيات الله وما عليك بالحق‬such are Gods
C signs, which we repeat to thee with truth. [In like manner, if ás
or one of its “ sisters” be used ($ 131 ), this may agree in gender with
the predicate, as ‫ وإن كانت الأخرى‬and if the contrary should
happen ; ‫ وقد صار ببيی منه في العرب‬and it hasbecomea custom ‫رشو‬

ofmine with the Arabs (*El-Mubarrad, 279, 1.4 with the variant );
‫قالو‬
‫ا‬gjit LCD then shall no other excuse be theirs
but to say (Ķor'an vi. 23 according to some readers); SSLC SS
orosjá and they bore down upon them and this was their defeat ; see
D other examples in my note on * El-Mubarrad ii. 108. This is also the case
after the interrogative pronouns ‫ من‬and ‫) ما‬$ 170(, as ‫من انت أمة‬
who was thy mother ? solo (Sjlé =) Solo to what became (or was)
thy want ? 1

oja in the expression is ili oss this is aa thousand

* [ The word ocs, a

dirhems, is explained by the grammarians as standing for Gold CÓ]

§ 154] Negative and Prohibitive Sentences. 299

REM. In order to express the neuter this, it, etc. both the A
masc. and fem. sing. of the personal and demonstrative pronouns
may be used. Examples of the latter : ‫أتاني أبيت اللعن أنك‬
‫ متنی وتلك التي أهتم منها وأنصب‬Ihaveheard,mayestthout avoid
imprecation ! that thou hast blamed me, and because of this I am
anxious and distressed ; lá slóg and so indeed did it happen
les ye have done it, it is your fault
( Tab. i. 2951 , 1,. 1 ) ; legales
9

( Tab. i.2755,
. 1. 12)) ; aägningumés láglés ‫د‬iš‫ ق‬they have made it to be
treachery, such as was committed against * El- Hosèin . This is B

applicable also to the ‫ القصة‬on ‫ير الشأن‬.which

or
‫ضم‬, is masc.or fem
according to the gender of the subject in the following sentence .
‫مہه‬
An example of the fem.is Kor'ăn xxii. 45 - 3=0
for it is not the eyes that become blind . D. G.]

B. THE DIFFERENT KINDS OF SENTENCES.

1. Negative and Prohibitive Sentences.

153. The negative particles may , as in the Indo -European

languages, deny any part of the sentence, —the predicate, the subject
‫ الجنس‬kajú ý, $ 39), the object, the ḥāl or circumstantial
(e.g. wij >

expression , etc.

154. The negative particle sometimes immediately precedes that

part of the sentence which it denies, at other times is separated from
it by some other part ; as ‫ لا يغرم الشخى البخيل‬the liberal man does D
not respect the niggardly ; vendosim não có this is not a human being (see
$ 42, rem. d ); líó jló ló he has not said this.
[REM. If only a part of an affirmative sentence is to be
strongly denied, the negative particle must precede that part
immediately, as ‫ جاء زيد لا احنا ولا باكيا‬zeid came neither
laughing nor weeping. If to the affirmative part of a sentence, a
 300 PART THIRD.- Syntax. TS 155

A parallel negative is to be opposed, the latter must be preceded by

the negative particle without a conjunction, as ‫رأيت زیا و عمرا‬
I have seen Zeid , not Amr.]

155. The predicate of a simple declarative verbal sentence,

which is neither asseverative nor optative (§ 1 , e and f ) , may, when
denied by ý, be put either in the imperfect or the perfect. (a) When
put in the imperfect, it may be rendered into English by the present,
the future, or, when connected with preceding past tenses, by the
B Latin imperfect (S$ 8, 9) ; as jooni
>
‫ى البخيل‬sono
‫م الشخ‬se
‫ يقو‬s‫ لا‬the liberal man
does not respect (or will not respect, or, under certain circumstances,
did not respect, non honorabat) the niggardly. (6) The perfect can
properly be used only (a) when ý is repeated twice or oftener in
clauses connected by 9, in which case it may be translated by the
perfect or the past (§ 1, a and b), as ‫ی‬crits
‫ا صل‬yg‫ق ول‬bis
‫ا صد‬ý‫ ل‬he has neither
believed nor prayed , or he neither believed nor prayed ; or (B) when
Ý is connected by ś with a preceding negative, such as L, , or , > >

C and merely carries on the negation of something past (see $ 1, e, rem. a,

and $ 160) *

156. The particles (a contraction of ji vý), which is construed

with the subjunctive of the imperfect ( SS 11 and 15 , a , a), is a very
‫فإن لم تفعلوا وتن‬
strong negation of the future, not at all, never ; as
jui igati igless and if ye do not do it — and ye will never do it
then dread the fire (of hell).
D REM. On and Lou see SS 12 and 18.
157. The particle to, when joined to the perfect, denies the past;
when joined to the imperfect, the present (see § 8, e, rem. a).

158. The particle 8 [Vol. i. $ 362, f'] is often found with

negative force, in verbal as well as in nominal sentences (see $ 42,
e), and that before both the perfect and the indicative of the

[Comp. § 1 , e, rem . b.]

$ 158] Negative and Prohibitive Sentences. 301

imperfect.. For example : ‫ إن الهإلا پله‬judgment belongs to God A

alone(lit. is not except to God(; ‫ الكافرون إلا في غرور‬u‫إن‬-the
un
believers are in utter deception (lit. are not except in deception );
‫ إإلان إأحجسراينا إلا على الذي قطنی‬it‫دنا‬is‫ أر‬for‫ إن‬Him
‫ بالله‬alone
‫لفون‬to‫يح‬rewardme
‫تم جانوك‬,
who has created me ;
then they will come unto thee, swearing by God (and saying ), We
intended nothing but doing good; ‫ولئن زالتا إن أمتهما من أحد من‬
osé and if they ( heaven and earth ) should quit their place,no one B
could withhold them after Him (if He, i.e. God, should withdraw His
support); combo B usi günlering and verily they will swear,
We meant only what is best ; elevi aj úsenosti they merely follow
their own fancy. In elevated prose style, as well as in poetry, the
negative ‫ ما‬is often prefixed to this ‫ ; إن‬.e.g ‫وما إن ينجح لها عناء‬
butherpains teere(all)or no avail ; ‫و ما إن يمش الأرض إلا منيب منه‬
only one shoulder of his touchesthe ground; ‫ما إن رأيتأمثتاهلما في الناس‬
njenost thou hast never seen (any) like them among men (of in rhyme
for ‫ ما إن أتيت بشي أنت تكرهه ;(أما‬thou hast never donea thing
which thou didst not like.

REM . a.
This ‫) إن‬called by the grammarians ‫ إن النافية‬the
negative 'in ) is not to be confounded with the conditional particle
of the same sound (ábaví ysthe conditional "in):for (a) it admits D
of a nominal sentence after it ; (6) it does not govern the jussive ;
(c) it lets the perfect retain its past signification ; (d) its predicate
is sometimes put in the accusative, like that of tó (8 42, rem. e) ;
and (e) it is joined, as a corroborative, to Ló. It seems rather to be
connected with the Hebrew negative 7:8, l'X , and occurs itself in
that language in the form ‫אם‬.

[Rem. b. ' Abū Zeid, Nawādir, 60 seq . gives an instance of v

 302 PART THIRD . - Syntax. [S 159
A
being prefixed to instead of ló, apparently because a relative to
precedes. D. G. ]

.159 The verb ‫) تيس‬Vol. i. s182) is used (a) as the negative

sometimes of ‫) كان الامة‬$ 41(,.e.g‫ليس لصحيح العقل والبدني عذر‬
‫ في ترك الشعلي‬for him utho is healthy in mind and body,there isno
excuse for neglecting the acquisition of knowledge ; at other times of
‫) كان الناقصة‬$ 41(, .e.g ‫تليس قالها‬, or ‫يس بعالم‬.he
‫ل‬, is not learned
B [It has always the meaning of the imperfect, mostly in its sense of
the indefinite or definite present ($ 8, a, b) . ] But it is also em oyed
(b) as an indeclinable negative particle, stronger than ý , to deny some
.part
of the sentence to which it is prefixed ; e.g ‫ليس بهذا لنت و‬
‫ بذا أمت‬thout acast not created for this,nor bidden to do this
‫ ليس كل ما فات يدرك‬nothing that has escaped us can be overtaken
can opportunity once lost neverrecurs(; ‫ما يجزي الفتى ليس الجمل‬
it is only the man that makes a return, not the camel (jami in rhyme
for ‫ أليس قد نويت أن تعتقني ;(الجمل‬hast thou not formed the
intention of setting me free ? In connection with an imperfect, it
expresses a strongly denied present or future;; as ‫تشت أقصد الحرب‬
‫ بل جئت لأهدم الكعبة‬I donot intend to makeaar (upon you),but
Iam come to destroy the Ka'br ; ‫ تشت تنال العز حتى تذتها‬you will
D never attain greatness till you humble it ( your spirit) ; js i molto
‫ بعد الجثة النار‬for the fire (of hell ) is never entered after (onehas been
a duveller in ) Paradise ; ‫ ليس ترجي لفائدة‬no good is hoped of thee
)‫ لفائده‬in rhyme for ‫(لفائدة‬. It may even be governed by ‫كان‬
so as to express thenegative imperfect of that verb ; as ‫كان النبي‬
‫ صلعمر ليس بالطويل ولا بالقير‬the Prophetwas neither of high nor
low stature,
§ 160] Negative and Prohibitive Sentences. 303

160. When to a clause containing one of the negative particles A

‫كما تم ما‬, or ‫تن‬, or the negative verb ‫يس‬,, there is appended, by
means of the conjunction 3, another dependent clause, then, in place
of repeating the particular negative of the former clause, the general
negative Ý is used , because the special kind of negation has already
been sufficiently made known. For example : ‫تن تغنى عنهم أموالهم‬
‫ و أولادهم من الله شيئا‬neither their goods nor their children shall
atil them aught against God ; ‫ رأى أن ذلك البدن تم خلش ته عبا‬B
‫ولا قرن به لأمر باط‬hesaw thatthisbody wasnot created for him in
jest,nor connected with him for any vain purpose ; ‫لم يبق عليه مشعل‬
‫ في الشرع إلا تبين ولا مغلف إلا انفتح ولا غامض إلا اتضح‬there
remained for him no difficulty in the (divine) law which did not
become clear, and nothing sealed up which was not opened, and nothing
oliseure arhich aras not made plain ; ‫تشت أغنى بالقلب قلب آنچشم‬
‫ و الروح الذي في تجويفه‬Iunderstandby the term )heartneither c
the corporeal heart nor the spirit which dwells in its cavity. [Comp.
§ 180. ] If, however, the second clause be conceived as independent
of the first, and the connection be merely an external one, the
particular negative is repeated ; as ‫هل هو أمر ته يزن موجودا فيها‬
‫ شلف ولم يسبق العده بوجه من الوجوه‬is it a thingthich hasnever
ceased existing during the past, and which a period of non -existence
has never in any way preceded ? [But if the connected words have
not the character of a dependent negative clause, but that of a simple
continuation of the preceding part of the sentence, only the conjunc- D
tion ‫ و‬is used, as ‫ ما جزعنا إذ وتوا وإذ تظى الصلاة‬we did not despair,
when they fled and when the fire (of war) burned ; új, e shans vý
ué vers do not keepfoodfor to-morrow and the day after to-morrow .]
REM . a.
When ‫ غیر‬, ‫ ون بلا‬,, etc. (see $ 56 , rem . c)) require to
be repeated, their place is supplied by ý, which is followed by the
 304 PART THIRD . - Syntax. [S 161
A genitive governed by res, etc.; as ‫ نحرها غير محبة و معلة‬and
he slaughtered them without their being shut up or bound ; jauns
yunc ng you this is neither strange nor wonderful (see $ 82, d,
rem . a(; ‫ بلا حب ولا حياء‬withouthonour or shame; ‫دون جبڼ‬
mju vg without cowardice orfear.
Rem. b. ýğ is sometimes repeated emphatically after a pre
B ceding negative, and requires to be rendered in English by even ;
as ‫لا و أخذ‬ýnot even one; ‫ ولا أرى أن خرج منهم ولا واحد‬butI
do not see that there has come out even a single one of them.

161. In oaths and asseverations ný is followed by the perfect

‫والل‬
with the signification of our future (see § 1 , e) ; as suas obras ‫ا‬ý‫ه ل‬aží
by God , I will not disobey my Lord ; ‫والله و فتح هذا الباب‬
by God, I willnot open this door ; ‫لا خرجتم من هذا‬Ý ‫وحيوة فرعون‬
C by the life of Pharaoh,ye shall not quit this place; and the Soviet ný
Spes I will never reproach him (again) during the remainder of my
life. In blessings and curses it is followed by the perfect as an optative
)see $ 1ſ
, ); as‫ لا رأيت شا‬mesest thou never see(suder) evil ! ‫لا ان‬
Glami yg may he not be ( may he perish), and never come to life !*
162. When verbs signifying to forbid, fear, and the like, are
followed by 3f with the subjunctive, the negative ý is sometimes
D inserted after ‫ أ{ن‬con‫ لا‬vi his without affecting the meaning (see
‫ أن‬or )
$15, a , a); as ‫ ما منعك ألا تسجد‬whatprevented thee from arorshipping
WE ‫رہ‬

)him (? ‫ ما منعك إذ رأيتهم مملوا ألا تتبعن‬mohat hindered thee, sehen

‫ن‬.
‫ إستگا‬this i
sense is of raren
occurrence The old expression
was
cố ý , có ý. In the Crestom, of Kosegarten, p. 16, 1. 12 .seq.
we must read with Dozy See vg is ý would that I had never
come to life ! D. G.]
§ 162] Negative and Prohibitive Sentences. 305

thou savest that they had gone astray, from following me? USA
comola carese igłamas nji and if ye are afraid of being unjust towards
the orphans (but if we read Islam , ý is no longer redundant : if ye
areafraid ofnotbeingjust,etc.(; ‫وقد نهی زیاد في ذلك ألايفعله أحد‬
and Ziyād forbade concerning this matter, that anybody should do it.
REM. In accordance with a curious idiom of the language,
whereby an oath or execration seems to be regarded as a virtual
negation , the negative particle may be omitted in denial by oath, B
and, on the contrary, be inserted in affirmation. For example, in
poetry : ‫أقسم بالله أشقيها وأشربها حتى تفترق ثوب الأرض أوصالی‬
by God I swear, I will not give it (to others) to drink, nor drink it
(myself ), until the dust of the earth separates my joints ; com o
‫هار‬
♡ ló ást juis suró csłć and so I swear, I will never mourn
‫يمين‬
‫ الله‬ima
for one dying, sor ask a mourner what ails her ; ali toli
‫ ابرح قاعدا‬and I said, By God I swear, I will not cease sitting
(see $ 42, rem . b);and in the Ķor'ān,ég sé et atú by CC
God , thou wilt NEVER cease thinking of, or speaking of, Joseph.

Conversely,in the Koran : ‫فلا أقسم بمواقع النجوم وإنه لقسم لو‬
ambao ugotes and I swear by the places where the stars set, and
> ol
verily that is a great oath,if ye (only) knew (it) ; amor om siaj
I swEAR by the day ofthe Resurrection ; ‫ لا أقسم بهذا البل‬ISWEAR
by this town. [ As to the latter case, many interpreters say that ý
is the denial of a preceding objection that is to be supplied, so that D
we must translate : no ! (it is not as ye say), I swear, etc. In the
former case the omission of the negative particle is allowed, because
no misunderstanding can arise . For, when affirming, we ought to
‫د‬ wa

sayuno kong marami ng atig (see $$ 14, 19). Therefore the negative
particle may be omitted even where no oath is expressed , as in the
‫ عمر‬ý
old verse (Nöldeke, Delectus, p. 65, 1. 14) ‫و‬joc ‫فإن‬
‫ا أمه‬ý‫ ل‬36
jjú s 1 and if my life be spared,O 'Amr ! I will not cease to
W. II . 39
 306 PART THIRD . — Syntax. [S 163
A seek vengeance for thy blood, and in that of Abū Nowās (Tab. iii.
705, .1 1() ‫ى الثقی‬coté
‫ا آنطوينا عل‬to‫» نزال بخير م‬re shallnever cette tobe
we

in good condition, as long as we keep the fear of God in our heart.

See two other examples $ 42, rem . b. D. G. ]

163. The prohibitive ný governs either the jussive or the

energetic. See $$ 17 , b ; 19 , b ; and 20.

B 2. Interrogative Sentences.

164. The Arabic language ignores the difference between a direct

and an indirect question, in so far as regards the arrangement of
words and the mood of the verb. Every interrogative clause, even
when dependent upon a preceding one, takes the direct form .

165. A question is sometimes indicated merely by the tone of

the voice, both when it stands alone, and when it is connected with
C another question by ‫ أم‬or ‫ ; أو‬a8
as ‫فقالوا تخشى علينا من نفسك شيئا‬

and they said, Dost thou fear any evil to us from thyself? sliqui song
‫رمی‬

biais jási sis is it better to cast the stones (one of the ceremonies
of the pilgrimage to Mèkka) riding or on foot ? i Svät to see
‫ څنت داريا بسبع رمين الجمر أمر بمان‬by thy life,Iknoir not,though
I am knowing, (whether) they pelted the Ġamarāt (see the last example)
with seven (pebbles) or with eight; ‫لا أدري هو من حث أو من أرحت‬
I do not know whether it comes from rohtu or from 'araḥtu . In
D general, however, a question is introduced by one or other of the
interrogative particles mentioned in Vol. i. SS 361 , 362.

166. The simplest interrogative particle is , which may be

prefixed to the word !, and to the conjunctions s, š, and ; as
‫ أأمنتم من في الماء‬are ye safefrom Him who is in heaven ? ‫انوم‬
‫ ما آمن الشفها‬shall arebelieve
we as fools have believed ??‫أئذا متناوا‬
$ 166] Interrogative Sentences. 307

we are dead, and become duse and A

‫ ترابا وعظاما أنا تدينون‬sohen are
bones, shall we indeed be recompensed ( for our deeds)? jy sizi
‫ يوسف‬art thou really Joseph ? ‫ألا تقاتلون قوما نكثوا أيمانهم‬willge
not fight a people who have broken their oaths ? atuí ing womenand woi
arethout not ashamed or thyselfbeforeGod ? ‫فقال أبو بشر أوله رايه‬
‫ على هذا‬and Abu Bakr said, Are ye all of this opinion ? ‫أقسمتی‬
‫ أقول إلا خيرا‬hast thou then heard me saying aught but good ? B
‫ أولا يعلمون أن الله يعلم ما يسرون‬do they notknow that God knots
arhat they keep Secret ? ‫ أما نحن بميتين إ مونتنا الأولي‬areare not
then liable to die stee our first death (in this world(? ‫أولم يروا إلى‬
‫ ما خلق الله من شئ‬have theynotlooked atthat God has created ?
‫ أثم إذا ما وقع آمنتم به‬schen it falls(upon gout),willyebelieve it then ?
If another clause be connected by oi with the one beginning with
) in this case called ‫همزة التسوية‬, the hemza of equalisation ), there cC
arises a disjunctive or alternative question ; as ‫أزيد عندك أم عمرو‬
is Zeid in the house, or Anr ? ‫ أفي الخابئة وبك أم في الزي‬is thy
date-honey in the jur or in the skin ? ‫ وا علينا أجزعنا أم صبرنا‬it is
all the same to us, whether we bear (our torments) impatiently or with
patience; ‫ سواء عليهم أأنذرتهم أم ته نذرهم‬it is all one to them ,
ahether thou hast aerarned them or not ; ‫ومن العجائب عجب من‬
‫و‬

‫ هو جاهل أهو الشعيد أم الشقى أم كيف يختم عمره‬one of thestrange D

things is the self-conceit of him who does not know whether he will be
saved or damned ,or how his life will end. Instead ofjöf we may use
‫ ;; أو‬as ‫ أزيد عندك أو عمرو‬is Zaid in thy house, or Amr ? ‫اختلافهم‬
‫ في نعيم البيئية أهو من جنس نعيم الدنيا أو غيره‬their diference of
opinion in regard to the delights of Paradise, whether they are of the
same kind as the delights of this world , or of a different kind.
 308 PART THIRD.-- Syntax . [$ 167

А REM . a. The interrogative particle is frequently omitted at the

beginning of an alternative question ; a8 ‫أنا الهيك شقته أو أبيتم‬
I am king,,whether ye like it or not (for each
er plyw ).. If both parts
of the sentence be dependent upon the same verb, it is placed
between them ; as ‫ غنيا كان أو فقيرا‬tolether he be rich or poor
)for ‫ صباحا جاء أم ماء ;(أغنيا‬solether he contes in themorning or
in the evening (for labai). See $ 6,a, and § 165.
B Rem . b. It is said that there is a difference of meaning between
‫ أو‬and ‫أم‬. The question ‫ أزيد عندك أو عمرو‬impliesignoranceas
to whether either of them is there, or not ; but ‫أزيد عندك أم عمرو‬
implies the knowledge that one of them is there, and asks which
it is.

[Rem.c. öi cácbéide of the unconnected 'am ) signifies often

or rather, nay but, serving like Ý (S 184, c) to denote digression or
с
to rectify,as is,o joy wij verily they (the animals seen moving
at a distance) are camels ; nay but are they not rather sheep ? This
is also its meaning in alternative sentences after jo;; see § 167.]
167. The interrogative particle is introduces questions of a
more lively sort ; a8 ‫ هل أتاك حديث الجنود‬hast thou heard the tale
of the armies ? ‫ هل أدل على تجارة تنجيه من عذاب أليم‬shallI
direct you to a merchandise, which shall save you from sore torment ?
)

D ‫) أأميم هل تدري أن رب صاحصباحابلخي‬$ 84 , rem .a(; ‫هل أنتم تارو‬

S! (S 90). It may be preceded by ý, s , and ; as

‫ وهل أتاك حديث موسى‬and hath the story of Moses reached thee ?
‫ إن أقمت إلى الماء فهل أنت رائح معی‬: Istay til theevening,milt
thou go with me ?-js cannot be prefixed to a negative clause (ex
cepting giá, $ 169) ; nor to a conditional clause; nor to !,s, š, and
a

; nor, in general, to a nominal clause of which the predicate is a

 Interrogative Sentences. 309
$ 168]

finite verb (s 119) ; as été ij jó [except in poetry ).— It may be A

followed in an alternative clause byói orji, with the former of which
W

particles ‫ هل‬is mostly] repeated ; as ‫هل غادر الشعراء من متردم ام‬

‫ هل عرفت الدار بعد توهم‬have the poets left any place to be putched
or pieced (any decaying ruin to be sung of ) ? Nay but ( I have
something to say :) hast thou recognised the abode (of thy beloved ) after
doubtina (regarding it(? ) ‫هل يستوي الأعمى والبصير أم هل تشتوي‬
‫ الظلمات والثور‬are the blind and the seeing equal? Or rather
W
are B
darknessand
‫فس من ببالها‬lightequal
‫الن‬ ?[ ‫سائل أسيد هل ثأر بوائل أم هل شفيت‬
Vui Livno maii ask ' Usèiyid whether I have taken my blood-revenge
on Wā'il, or (rather] whether I have cured my soul of its grief ;
w

‫ ب من أكبر أو سب أوبلا‬is ‫ل‬jó‫ م‬did he recite any one,or aushe

reviled, or was he avaricious ?

REM . a. Some grammarians say that jó is originally equi- C

valent in meaning to es, and that its interrogative force is really
due to the particle i understood. The two are sometimes combined ;
as
‫ أهل رأونا بسفح القاع في الأم‬didtheyareus atthelover end
or the plaine soith thehillocks ? ‫فقال مخاطبا لنفسه أهل عرفت دار‬
We stá vies is and he says, addressing himself,Hast thou
recognised the abode of thy beloved, after thy doubting regarding it ?

On the elliptical expression ‫هل تك في كدا‬, see DD

$ 53, b, rem . e. When followed by a clause commencing with
E

GI, the prepositions may be omitted (comp. $ 70, rem. y), as

‫ هل تك أن تنام‬dost thou toish to go to sleep ? Similarly , ‫هل لك إلى‬
‫أن ت‬ thoutbecomepure ? scil ‫هل تك تميل إلى أن تزی‬
‫زی‬.tooldst
hast thou an inclination to becoming pure ?

168. The compound negative particle ni, nonne, is often used

to draw close attention to the certainty of the following assertion, and
 310 PART THIRD . - Syntax . [$ 169

A hence admits of being rendered into English by truly, verily, certainly

(compare in Hebrew = 137), in which case it is frequently
followed,as a farther asseverative, by 6!* ; 0.g. bleji ju ý nyi
came ugg certainly thou wilt never attuin warning save through six
things (lit. is it not so ? thou wilt not,etc.); sgut välissi vi
por ca ‫رہ‬

verily youth does not last for ever ; Zylind od ovil vi verily these are
the folv; ‫ألا أيها ذا الاب اليد إن على أبها مشتل من ورائها‬
B. O thou that barkest at ( revilest) the Bènū 's- Sīd, verily I am ready to
fight to the death in their defence, though they are far away. It is also
used as a corroborative before the optative perfect (s 1 , f), the
imperative, jussive, and energetic ; as ‫ك‬sing
‫ وجه‬átví ‫ا قبح‬nýi‫ أل‬may God
‫ الله‬enn
disfigure thy face ! Here ☺ is often inserted ; see $ 38 , a, rem. h.—
>

The synonymous particle ‫[ أما‬also, before an oath, written ol] is used

in the same way as ‫ ;;ألا‬e.g, ‫ أما والله لو تعديتها قت‬overily, by
God , hudst thou transgressed it, I would have put thee to deuth ;
C ‫ أما إنه لا خير بخير بعده الار‬terily there is no good in prosperity
achich is followed by the fire(or
of hell(; ‫أما والراقصات بذات عرق ومن‬
‫ ا تی نعمان الأراك لقد أضمرت بك في فوای‬the galloping
camels at Dāt ' Irķ, and by those who pray at Na'mān abounding in
'arāk -trees, ( I swear that) I have treasured up love for thee in my
heart.

.169 ‫أ‬, ‫هر‬, ‫كولا‬, and ‫) توما‬called by the grammarians ‫حروف‬

D vormelig wanceBíthe particles of requiring with urgency, or with
gentleness), are used before the imperfect to incite one to perform
‫ تصف‬vi
an act,and before the perfect to rebuke the neglect of it ; as wat
e why dost thou not compose a book upon asceticism ?
equivalent to compose one, pray ; but website sur Ýis é o 11 why
[And also by Big and by ; see the Gloss, to Țabarī. D. G.]
$ 170] Interrogative Sentences. 311

hast thou not composed a book upon asceticism ? Como hacer vis why A
didst thout not inform me (or it(? ‫يقول الذين كفروا ولا أنزل عليه‬
wa

any ‫ن‬is‫ م‬vī those who do not believe, say, Why has no sign from his
Lord been sent down to him ? ‫ تو كتنا الله أو تأتينا آية‬ohn doesnot
Golspeak toesor a sign comeunto to? ‫توما تأتينا بائلةإن كنت‬
‫ من الصادقين‬mohy dost thou not bringtheangelstous,if thou art(one(
of those who speak the truth ? In later times the simple ‫ا‬to‫ م‬is so used ;
as
szát té dost thou not stand up ? or thou dost not stand up ! equi- B
valent to pray, stand up.
Rem. a. vi is used in the same sense as ji, but with less
force ; as ‫ ألا تقاتلون قوما نكثوا أيهائهم‬aley oill ye not fight a
people enhohave broken their oaths? ‫ألا تحبون أن يغفر الله تم‬
why do ye not like that God should forgive you ?
REM. b. Sometimes the verb is suppressed after these particles,
and a substantive follows in the nom. or accus.; as ‫هلا خيرا من ذلك‬
.nohay
not better than this scil ‫ تفعل‬doxt thou do, or ‫ هلا خير‬C
‫و‬
‫من ذلك‬, .scil ‫ كان منك‬sons from thee ; ‫هلا التقدم والقلوب صاح‬
why did ye not do so before, when our hearts were sound ? scil .
‫ر‬
‫تعدون عقر التيب ه; كان ذلك من ابنها = هملاا وجد القدم‬
‫ أفضل مجرم بني ضوؤططرريی ولا ألقى المتعا‬we reckon the
slaughtering of she-camels your greatest glory ; ye sons of a good
for-nothing, why not the helmed warrior ? scil. Úgités, i.e. giá
‫ تعدون من الفخر القوى المقتع‬nohaydo yenotreckon the helmed D
warrior something glorious ?

170. The interrogative pronouns to who ? and to what ? may

stand in any one of the three cases, nominative, genitive, or ac
cusative ; as ‫ من أنت‬who art thon ? ‫ بنت من أنت‬archose daughter
art thon ? ‫ من قتلت‬athom hast thou slain ? ‫ ما تلك بيمينك‬what is
 312 PART THIRD. - Syntax. [$ 170
‫و هر و‬

A that in thy right hand ? já to what sayest thou ? So o in what

( state) were ye ? Even when they ought, strictly speaking, to follow
another word in the genitive, they may be put first in the nominative
absolute, and their proper place supplied by a pronoun which falls
back upon them )‫ عائد‬or ‫ ;( راجع‬Aas ‫قل من بيده ملكوت كل شئ‬
as

( instead of ) Say, In whose hand is the kingdom over every

thing ? But no such pronoun can be used, unless is and to precede
in the nominative absolute. To render the interrogation more lively,
B the demonstrative pronoun is is appended (like the Heb. 7 !) to the
interrogatives is and hó, even when the subject of the inter
rogative clanse is introduced by the relative pronoun siji; as

‫ ما ذا تقول‬, or ‫ل‬job
‫ تقو‬svi is lá, what is it (that) thou sayest* ?
‫من الذي أمر‬, or ‫ من ذا الذي أمر‬atho is it that has given orders ?
OW

‫) لما ذا وليت بعد مجيك إلى هنا‬pron . lina da), achy dost thout run
away after thy coming hither ?–The pronouns is and Ló are always
C used substantively, but can neither govern a genitive nor be followed
by another substantive in apposition to them in any case (nom ., gen .,
‫ارس من‬yLos‫ ف‬Liso, do not mean rís áráp; quisnam vir ?
‫ فی‬Mo,
or acc.): Los
quis eques (est ille quem vides) ? but quis (est) vir ? quis (est) eques ?
és being the subject and the following word the predicate. For
example : ‫ أثني عنيث‬Sio
‫ا القوم قالوا من فتى خلك‬is‫ إذ‬when the tribe
ask, Who is a man ? I think that I ammeant ; his win jis
D ‫ واحد قدوا من فارس الهم إياه يعنونا‬:fthereteereoneof usamong
a thousand , and they cried out, Who is a horseman ? he would think
)that)theymeanthim )‫ يغنونا‬in rhyme for ‫من إله غير الله ;(يعون‬
Ciut, lit.who (is) a god,beside the (true) God, (that) could give
*
]We find not unfrequently ‫ فعلت ما ذا تقول ما ذا‬arhat hast thout
done? I ló go w usand what do you wish from me ? D.G.]
$ 170] Interrogative Sentences. 313

you light ? the words -Converse en control forming a relative clause in con- A
nection with the indefinite substantive aj! (see $ 172). Even such a
case as is represented by the words ‫من زيد من زیڈا‬, in no way
violates this rule. One person says hij ; I have seen Zdid ;
another, repeating the exact words of the former speaker (álji),
asks asj s who is ( the person meant, when you said " ra’èitu
9

Zeidan,” by the word) “ Zeidan " ? Similarly, in the genitive, s

‫ بزیر‬I passed by Zeid , ‫من زید‬. In general, however, the ‫ حكاي&ة‬B
( imitation, citation or quoting of 5the exact words of a speaker ) is
neglected ,and the questioner asks tj to who is Zeid ? in the nomi
native. The acca is allowed only when the word quoted is a proper
name, and is is not preceded by any connective particle, such as s.
We can only say ‫ ومن زید‬and acho is Zeid ? ‫ من غلاه زید‬soho is
the slave of Zeid ? The word is may be used by itself alone, in
reference to an undefined substantive, with the inflections mentioned C
in Vol.i. $ 352 ; e.g, ‫ جاءني رجل‬there came tome a man ,‫ مو‬ocho ?
‫ رأيت رجلا‬I sanaman , ‫ منا‬alhom ? ‫ مررت برج‬I passed by aman,
sio whom ? —As interrogatives, cs and 6 are construed with the
masculine singular of a verb, but occasionally admit of the feminine,
when the predicate is of the feminine render; ass ‫ من كانت أمك‬alho
was thy mother ? (see § 152, e].—If inquiry be made regarding the
nature, qualities, social position, etc., of a person , tó is used, and not D
‫; من‬ e.g. ái cóás úlí; and we said to him, What art thou ?
‫ ما رب العالمين‬what is the Lord of created things? ‫أخبرني عن قولك‬
‫ولها أث ;ركب الثميري أعرضت وكن من أن يلقينه ذرا *ت ما‬
‫ من أنذرات‬by poetic license for ‫من أن‬,and ‫ حذرات‬in rhymefor
W, II . 40
 314 Part THIRD . — Syntax. [$ 170

A ‫كم قال كنت على چهار هزيل ومعی صاحب پي على أتاني مثيير‬
(
the cavalcade of the
tell me about thy verse : “ And after she descried
Numèirī, she turned aside, and they were on their guard against
meeting him ” ; — what were ye ? He said , I was upon a lean he-ass,
and with me was a friend of mine upon a she-ass like it.
.REM ‫ه‬. The dico of a proper name is inadmissible, if the
name be qualified in any way, except by l in a genealogical
series. If one says ‫رایت زید بن عمرو‬, you may ask ‫من زید بن‬
B ‫ ;عمرو‬butif one says ‫رأيت زيدا ابن الأمير رأيت زيدا العاقل‬
or

you cannot ask ‫ من زيدا العاقل‬or ‫ من یا آبن الأمير‬In these

cases the nominative only is allowed .

Rem. b. From is formed an adjective sur [Vol. i. $ 352,

rem . c], which is used in asking questions regarding ‫صفات العلم‬
) . i.s249). E ‫ جاءنی زید‬zeid came‫رشي‬to‫الق‬me ;
or ‫اليباث‬..Vol
of
is i of which tribe ? to which the answer might be
c xorèis, as distinguished from Mj Zèid of the tribe of Takif;
‫منی هوا‬, ‫ أنت‬isio of which tribe art thou, is he ? instead of the
usual ‫من الرجل‬.
REM . c. The interrogative 6 is very rarely used of persons ; as
‫ر‬ ‫ہ‬
‫ولی أدلكم على رجلي ما هو أقوم بما دعوتموني إليه فقالوا ما هو‬
but I will point out to you a man amongst vs, who is better able to
carry out what ye have asked me to do ; and they said, Who is he ?
D
‫ نظرت إلى جبر متماوت فقالت ما هذا‬whesamoaman pretending to
be dead, and said, Who is this ? The conjunctive (relative) is and
.
‫) ما‬$ 172 foll.a n
)are more frequently interchangedd
; e.g ‫منهم من‬
‫ يمشي على أربع‬among them are creatures tohich walk on four
) feet( : ‫أسر القطا هل من يعير جناحه تعتي إلى من قد هويت أطير‬
O covey of katas (a sort of bird) is there one (among you ) who will
lend (me) his wings ? Perchance I might fly to the one whom I love ;
$ 171 ] Interrogative Sentences. 315

‫ فانکحوا ما طاب لكم من النساء‬then marry nohat zooment seene goodA

to you ; ‫ يلبي ما نتوا والقثير ما ولدوا‬those tohom theymarried
(their wives) were (doomed ) to captivity, and those whom they begat
(their children) to slaughter ; jair jis aobhisi sitliécé ‫فما شنا‬
Súgó qug and ( as to) those about whose virility we are in doubt, the
decision shall be asyou please; ‫ئی عا جميع ما كان بحضرته‬
then he ordered all who were in his presence to retire and leave us ;

‫ وكل مايختص به من أقاربه وذويه‬and allalonehehad

whom
abouthim B
of hisfriends and relatives " .
Rem. d . On the shortening of ló into é, see Vol. i. $ 351 , rem ..
171. Regarding the interrogative pronoun ist, of which we
have spoken before (8 87 ) , there are here two remarks to be made.
( a) is (when followed by a noun in the genitive) is used, not only
.instead
of the fem .but ‫ ; أيون‬as‫ من أي ده‬c)
‫أية‬, alsoinstead of the plur l
‫ قبيلة أنت‬fwhat tribeart thou ? ‫ تموت‬i ‫وما تدري نفس بأي أرض‬
and no soul knows in what land it shall die ; évi wwii isi is of
what people art thou ? [when prefixed to a fem . pronoun, it may be
‫تر و ت‬
masc. or fem . ; though it is the more common ; see Vol. i. $ 353].
(6) A nominal sentence with a nominal predicate, of which the subject
--010
hindi)
( is 'siwith a pronominal suffix,, may, as a whole, without any
*
[ In reality, the above examples form no exception to the rules. D
In the two first the question relates to the quality or position of the
man, not to his name. In the others ló is used in a collective sense.
But as in many cases the interrogative what is he ? and who is he ?
the relative what and whom are equally admissible, we find to and is
sometimes interchanged by different authors and in different manu
scripts. Comp. Fleischer, Kl. Schr. iii. 14 seq. D. G.]
+ [ The reading wozi ay is compared by Sibawòih to an equally
rare form , viz. Biś .]
 316 PART THIRD - Syntaa. [S 171
A change of case, supply the place of an accusative to a verb or of a
‫رہ‬ .

genitive after a preposition ; a8 ‫ عرفت أيهم في الدار‬Iknow achich of

them is in thehouse; ‫ثم نزع من كل شيعة أيهم أشد على الرحمني‬
his then will we take forth from every band those who have been
stoutest in proud rebellion against the Merciful; ‫مضغها لينظر أيها‬
who he bit them with his teeth in order to see which of them was the
hardest ; ‫ إذا ما لقيت بني مالك قسم على أنهم أفضل‬achen thout
B meetest the Bènū Mālik , salute him who is most excellent amongst
them . In such cases, however, it may be put alone, without any
suffix, in the accusative or genitive, the vacant place of the subject
in the nominal clause being supplied by the pronoun of the third
person ;as ‫عرفت أي هو في الدار‬. In the former case ‫ أي‬is treated
as an interrogative, in the latter as a relative pronoun. We may also
say ‫عرفت أيهم هو في الدار‬, andeven ‫عرفت أيا في الدار‬
C REM . a. isl likewise serves to express astonishment, in which
case it may always be put in the masc. sing., and the noun which
>

it governs in the genitive is undefined. If the preceding noun, to

which isi refers, be indefinite, then ‫ى‬I‫ أ‬agrees with it in case ; as
‫ما‬

‫ جتنی برجلي أي رج‬thou hastbroughtmea man ,(and)tchat a

man !=thataman thou hastbroughtme! (or ‫مررت بامرأة أية (أي‬
E 0

‫ة‬o‫را‬zot
‫ ام‬I passed by a woman,, (and) what a woman !!] But if the
preceding noun be definite, sí is always put in the circumstantial
D as Jos
accusative or hal ; a8 ‫ أى‬moj
‫ رجلي‬si )(
‫ جانی ترید‬Zeid cametome, (and
what a man (he is) ! The reason of this is, that the interrogative
and exclamatory isl, being by its very nature indefinite, can never
be in concord with a definite substantive. Instead of sl we also
find ‫ ; ( أما أيما‬a ‫جتنی بجلي أيها رجل‬, ‫جاونی زید أايمها رجلج‬
as

‫مررت بامرأتيني أيتها امرأتين‬, ‫ هذهأمة الله أتيتها جارية‬this is the

handmaid of God,( , and) what aa girl is she !]! Mais ‫اء‬TanpaLogi
‫فأومأ إيم‬
$ 172] Relative Sentences. 317

‫ حبتر فيله عنا حبتر أيها فتى‬and I gave a slight pink to Ilabtar, A
and how keen (see $ 53, b, rem. e) were the eyes of Habtar, the noble
youth !—The substantive which constitutes the object of wonder
may be understood, when it is virtually contained in the verb, and
si must then be put in whatever case that substantive would have

stood,had it been expressed ; as ‫ التكوا أى نكاية‬novo they have been

‫ش‬

tormented !i... ‫انتوا نگاه أى نكاية‬

‫عیب و‬
[Rem. 6. From is formed the relative adjective is '; see B
Vol. i, S 353, ren. c.]

3. Relatice Sentences.

172 . There are in Arabic, as well as in the other Semitic

languages, two kinds of relative sentences ; namely ( a) indefinite,
i.e. such as are annexed to an immediately preceding indefinite
substantive, without the aid of a conjunctive noun (Vol. i. $ 346) ;
and (6) definite, i.e. such as are introduced by a conjunctive noun, C
whether substantive or adjective, which is definite by its very nature.
A sentence of the former kind is called åso, a descriptive or qualifi
cative sentence ; of the latter kind, alo, a conjunctive sentence ; and
the conjunctive noun itself is called ‫الاسم الموضول‬, or simply
‫ الموصول‬Examples of the first kind: ‫ مررت برج پلناامس‬1 passed by
a man,who
, was sleeping; ane s wylicos,como ‫ !إن أول‬the D
‫ وضع‬poreljäi
first temple, which was founded for mankind, was that at Bekka
)Mekka (; ‫ حتما من أهم الكتاب‬-Jirmly
‫آیا‬ constructed (ie,un
ambiguous) verses, which form the basis (lit. are the mother ) of the
Scriptures ; ‫ ه يوم لا بيغ فيه ولا لة ولا شفاعة‬day in which there
shall be no bartering,nor friendship ,nor intercession ; ‫دم(نة تمهنتكتم‬
traces of an abode, which speak not (plő in rhyme for etc );
‫ نقلنا إلى مجلس آخر قد ش بماء الورد‬we were removed to another
 318 PART THIRD . — Syntax. [$ 172

A room , which had been sprinkled with rose-water. Examples of the

second kind : ‫ الملك الذي يعدل‬the king who is just ; ‫گانی التی‬
‫ گاانئثت بی‬my shop ,which had belonged to my father ; ‫أو الذي‬
‫ مر على قرية‬or (hastthou seen ) the like of him acho passed by a toun ?
‫ الذين ينفقون أموالهم‬thase ooho spend their dealth (in almsgiving(;
‫ ومن أظته ومن منع مساجد الله من أن يذكر فيها اسمه‬and otho
B does a greater wrong than he who hinders the temples of God from
having Hisnamementioned in then ??‫فمن عفى له من أخيه شئ ؟‬
but he to whom anything is forgiven on his brother's part ; suis
‫بجميع ما يتركه‬he letme know all that hewaslaoimg.- Sometimes,
however, a noun defined by the article is followed by a qualificative
sentence, when that noun indicates, not a particular individual
(animate or inanimate), but any individual bearing the name * ; as
‫ ما ينبغى ينجلي يشبهك‬that which beseensthe man who is likethee ;
C ‫ كثير الحمار يحمل أسفارا‬likethe ass architch carriesbooks ;‫كالجمر‬
‫ يوضع في الماد‬like the coulwhich is put among the ashes. In such
‫ر‬ ‫م‬
phrasesas ‫نعم الرأى رأيت‬,ahatan ercellent counsel thou hast adopted !
the substantive Slui is the first nominative after the verb of praise,
and the clause ‫ رأيت‬the second nominative, standing for ‫ما رأيت‬
so that the expression is equivalent to ‫نغم الرائى رايك‬.comp
][ .Vol.i
$ 183].
D REM . a. The Arabs, like the other Semites, have no relative
pronoun which they can employ when the antecedent to the relative
clause is indefinite. Further, it should be observed that is and
‫ الذي‬are always definite, whether the latter be used substantively

* l
]The article is then employed ‫ لتعريف الجنس‬to indicate the
genus ( Vol. i. $ 345, rem. a).]
§ 173] Relative Sentences. 319

or adjectively ; whilst bo and to, which can only be used substan- A

‫ من‬he who comes or
‫ء‬£‫ جا‬bo
tively, are either definite or indefinite, as te
one who comes,s' to that which I have or something which I have.
When employed indefinitely, is and to are not regarded by the
Arabs as conjunctive nouns, but as indeclinable substantives (equi
valent in meaning to vará,
‫ شخص‬a person, and a sá ,a thing ), to which
a

the words that we regard as the complement of the relative

pronoun , are annexed as a qualificative clause, virtually in the
same case.
We even find, though very rarely, a single adjective so B
annexed to ‫ من‬or lo, and actually agreeing with them in case
]e.g, ‫ مررت بمن محسن‬I passed by a generonutspersons; ‫مررت بها‬
sű yes I passed by something pleasing to you ]. When thus
used, is and Có are said to be a gogó [Comp. Vol. i.$ 353, 1.]
REM. b. The pronoun in the qualificative clause, which falls
‫ ال‬co
back upon the antecedent (‫عائد‬Tior soluí (§ 173]), ought, strictly
speaking, to be of the third person, even when the subject of the C
qualified substantive is a pronoun of the first or second person . In
practice, however, the one is usually
۵ ‫رو‬
brought into agreement with
the other ;; as ügliamenteno
‫ قوم‬son verily ye are a people who are

foolish ; ‫ إنا لقوم ما ترى القتل ستة‬verilywe are people ooho count
it no disgrace to be slain ; ‫ إلى امرؤ تجد الرجال عداوتی‬verily I1
am a man whose hostility ( brare) men find (to be terrible). Compare
$ 175, rem.
[REM. C. Among qualificative sentences may be reckoned also D
the qualificative clauses mentioned $ 139, rem . b, ( 1 ). ]

173. The qualificative sentence necessarily contains a pronoun

)‫ العائد‬or ‫(آلتراجع‬, referring to the qualified noun and connecting it
with the qualificative sentence. This pronoun is either contained in
‫رجل‬
the verb of the qualificative sentence, as its nominative,e.g. sło dos
a man who came ; or, in case of its being a nominal sentence, is
by a separate pronoun, e.g ‫ رجل هو صدیقی‬a man who is
.expressed
 320 PART THIRD - Syntas. [$ 174

A my friend ; or, lastly, appears as a suffix in the genitive or accusative,

.e.g‫ مررت برجل أبوه نائم‬I passed by a man whose father acas asleep ;
‫ زوجت ابني بامرأة كان عمرو يحبها‬Imarried my son to a troman ,
with whom ‘Amr was in love ; [ us i us a striking wherewith he
was struck ]. The suffix is, however, not unfrequently suppressed,
when the sense clearly indicates the connection between the qualified
‫کے‬
noun and thequalificative clause ; as ‫وما أدري أغيرهم نا وطول العهد‬
B ‫ أم مال أصابوا‬and I donot knoto achether distance and length of time
have changed them , or wealth which they have won ( for ógiloi);
‫و‬

‫الميت‬ ‫ ضربه ضرب‬I struck him a bloo atmohich he felt like

dead (for ‫ واتقوا يوما لا تجزي نفس عن نفس شيئا ;( خر بها‬and fear a
day, in which a soul shall not make satisfaction for (another ) soul at all
) for ‫(تجزي فيه‬.
C 174. The conjunctive noun -may
‫ الذي‬beused either substan
tively or adjectively. In the former case, it includes the idea of a
person or thing, that is to say, it is equivalent to the substantive
Les and to,when they are definite (ägógó), he who, that which. In
the latter case, it agrees, like any other adjective, with its antecedent,,
which is always a definite substantive, in gender, number and case,
and thus markedly differs from the relative pronouns of the Indo
german languages ; as ‫ أيها الذين أضنا من الجين والإنس‬shown as
D (those two) of the ginn and of mankind, who led us astray, scil.
‫ أرنا الشيطانيين اللذين أضنا‬shown asthetwodevils arho bedasastray ,
‫ت‬

viz . Iblis and Kabil or Cain ; ‫یا من أحش بني اللذين هما سمعی‬
‫ وطرفي قطرفي اليوم مختطف‬0 thou toho saucest my two little sons,
who were my hearing and my‫وه‬sight,
‫م‬
-my hearing has to-day been
‫ة‬snatched ‫ویم‬:‫إن أحد الرجلين اللذين توا من الأنصارإلىحيانلشقذيهقبةواع‬
‫بن ساعد‬away
one of the two men of the Anşār (or
§ 175] Relative Sentences. 321

Helpers of the Prophet) whom they met, when they went to the porch, A
aag Oneim 'ibne Saida ; ‫ثم أصيب جرجة ولم يصلي صلاة جد فيها‬
was ‘Owèim
‫ إلا الركعتين اللتين أسشلتمه عليهما‬then Garenwasslain ,withouthaving
prayed a (single) prayer in which he prostrated himself, save those two
rehas ‫ويناهما‬which
‫جحظة‬by‫عن‬praying ‫ ر‬he became a Muslim ; ‫قائا نذرالتموين‬ S

áfico é boligs we biand we shall (now ) quote the two songs

(or airs),which we have received from Gaħza; vicevi juos los
JO

wiss ósát wití in the time of the two kings,who have been B
already spoken of ; ‫ثم إن وديه اللذين قتلاه في نينوی مربا إلى‬
Jordi jho then his two sons, who had murdered him in Nineveh ,
fled to the mountains of Moşul.
REM. Somewhat similar to this is the attraction or assimilation
of the relative in Greek and in the older forms of German, as dusint
punt des allir bestin goldis, DES die vrouwen tragen woldin.

175. As the case in which the conjunctive nouns stand, is C

independent of the conjunctive clause, they cannot express the
syntactical relations of our relative pronouns. If they stand (as
always happens with có, tó, and isi, and frequently with suší)
as substantives at the beginning of an independent sentence, they
form its subject or inchoative (ii ), and are consequently in the
nominative ; and the same thing occurs with suši, when it is annexed
as an adjective to any such subject in the nominative. In every other
instance, they stand, it is true, at the commencement of the con- D
junctive sentence, but are in whatever case the preceding governing
word requires, be it noun, verb, or particle ; that is to say, they are
in that case which, according to our idiom, pertains to the demon
strative pronoun implied in them , or to the substantive antecedent to
which they refer. The syntactical place of our relative pronoun is
supplied by a pronoun in the conjunctive sentence, which falls back
upon the conjunctive noun and agrees with it in gender and number.
W. II . 41
 322 PART THIRD . - Syntax. ($ 175

A This pronoun is called by the grammarians ‫الضمير العائد التراجع إلى‬

Joogui, the pronoun which returns to, or falls back upon , the con
junctivenoun,or simply ‫ العائد‬or ‫الراجع‬.
(a) If this pronoun stand, as the subject, in the nominative case ,
it is represented, in a verbal sentence, by the personal pronoun
implied in the verb ; e.g. janvis is what II love him who is just;.;
‫ن إليك‬usernameis
B vidt ‫ من يستمعو‬coming
‫ منهم‬among them are some who hearken to thee ;
yhetsb es jis Lő (if so,)we shall be like those,O wolf,
acho are comrades ; ‫ أخاف من الملك الذي يظم الناس‬I am afraid of
the king who oppresses the people. But in a nominal sentence, it is
expressed by a separate pronoun ; e.g. is he who is pious;
‫ ما هو ضلال‬of thatwhich is error ; ‫محدث الشيخ الذي هو مريض‬
I have visited the old man who is sick. In nominal seutences of which
C the predicate is an adverb, or a preposition with its genitive, depending
upon the idea of being understood , the virtually existing subject of the
substantive verb suffices to connect the clauses, without any separate
pronoun being expressed ; a8 ‫ مررت بمن ثم‬I passed by him who is
thereorthose toho are there; ‫ته من في السموات والأرض ومن عنده لا‬
‫ يستكبرون عن عبارته‬to Him belong thosewho are in heavens and upon
earth, and they who dwell with Him are not too proud to serve Him ;
D ‫ إن أول بيت وضعياس للذي ببكة‬verily the firsttemple which aras
founded for mankind is that which is at Bekka ( Mekka ). The etc
may also be omitted in a nominal sentence of more than the usual
limited length , as ‫ هو الذي في الماء إله وفي الأرض إله‬He it is
noho is a God in heavens and a God upon earth, ‫ما أنا بانی قائل‬
śÚ I am not he who says anything to thee ; but this omission is
rare in short nominalsentences, as ‫من يعن بالحمد لا ينطق بها فله‬
he who cares for praise, does not speak what isfoolish.
$ 175] Relative Sentences. 323

(6) If the wło be an objective complement in the accusative, A

.it
is appended as a suffix to theverb ; e.g ‫ من رأيته‬he achom I have
seen ; ‫ عرفت من عرفته‬Iknoto him whom thou knottest ; ‫الارق الذي‬
‫ قتله ابنی‬the thiefwhom myson killed . The sufix is,however , not
unfrequently omitted ; as ‫ ولكم فيها ما تشتهي أنفسه‬and yours (shall
;

be) in it (the future life ) oohat your souls desire (for ‫ تشتهيه‬: ‫الكتاب‬
‫ الذي أنزل الله‬the book wohich God has sent doun or revealed (for B
‫ر‬

‫ عى الأيام أن يرجعن قوما الذي كانوا) ;(أنزله‬itmay bethattime

‫[( كانوا‬.
will restore some people to their former state (for ógils or at
(c) A pronominal suffix also supplies the place of our relative,
when it stands in the genitive, dative, etc. , or is governed by a
preposition ; as ‫ الطبيب الذي ابنه عندی‬the physician schose son isat
my house ; ‫ من له مال كثير‬he acho has great possessions; ‫و ما تدعوهم‬
and that to which thou callest them. If the governing word be an
active participle of the form icló, referring to present or future time,
the genitive suffix may be omitted ; as ‫ فائض ما أنت قاض‬doom then
( ‫(قاضيه‬. If the suffix be governed by the
what doom thou toilt (for
same preposition as the preceding conjunctive noun , the suffix and its
preposition may be omitted ; as ‫ أنا عند من أنت‬I am at the house of
the same person as thou (for ‫ مررت بالذي مر كیيممن ;(أنت عنده‬D
I passed bythe same person as Suleiman did (for ‫ويشرب ما ;(ممر به‬
‫ تشربون‬and he drinks of chat we drink (for ‫وقد كنت ; (تشربون منه‬
‫ تخفي حب سمراء حب قبح لأن منها بابني أنت باح‬thou didast
conceal thy love of Semrā for a time, but now disclose what thou wilt of
it ) ‫ لان‬by poetic license for ‫الآن‬, ‫ منها‬of her = ‫ من حبها‬oflove ofher,
=

and ‫ بائ‬for ‫(بائح به‬. Butthisis not allowed when the preposition
 324 PART THIRD.—Syntax. [$ 175

A is used before the suffix in a different meaning from that which it has
before the conjunctive noun , nor when the preceding verb is a different
one ; as ‫ مروت بالذي مررت به على يد‬II passed by him on those
account thou didstpassbyZeid (where y in ‫ بالی‬is ‫للإلصاق‬, whilst
in ‫به‬ it is ‫ لسببية‬5 56, rem . d(; ‫ زهدت في الذي رغبت فيه‬I hate
had no longing after thatwhich thou desiredst (not ‫(فی الذی رغبت‬.
B REM.a. The ‫ عائد‬after -ori
‫الذي‬ gina lly
was,and,strictlyspeak
ing, ought to be, a pronoun of the third person, even when the
preceding subject is a pronoun of the first or second person ; as
‫ نحن الذين أصبحوا إصباحا‬it is woewho arose early . Moreusually,
however, the Vic is brought into agreement with the word to
which it refers (compare $ 172,rem. b) ; as soon be CSÚT Á
‫ حیدره‬I am he whom his (lit. my mother named Haidara (Lion ( * ;
C ‫ أنا الذي يجدوني في صدورهم‬I am hetohom they found (a choking
morsel) in their clesta or throats ) ‫ يجوزی‬for ‫ألست ;(يجدونني‬
‫ العبد الأسود الذي كنت راعينا بموضع كذا‬art thout not the
negro slave, who used to attend upon us in such and such a place ?
] REM . b. Ibn Malik alone permits the phrase ‫ضربت فيمن‬
‫ رغبت‬for ‫ ضربت من رغبت فيه‬I beat him tohom thout desiredst
(see Lane s. v . 15), while some other authorities sanction the
D following likewise ‫ل‬ico
‫ إن لم يجد يوما على من يتك‬, some day,
he fails to find oneon tohomehemay rely, for ‫) من يتكل عليه‬see
.Lane
s . v ‫( علی‬. .D
.G [
REM . C.
On the occasional use of ‫آل‬in the sense of ‫الذي‬ see

Vol. i. 345, rem . b.

‫یش‬

‫ سمتن‬by poetic license for and ‫ حیدره‬in rhyme for

‫حيدرة‬. Another reading is ‫متنی آابمیی‬
 Copulative Sentences. 325
$ 177 ]

Copulative Sentences.
4. A

176. We have already spoken of the difference between the

copulative particles 9 and 3 in Vol. i . § 366, a, b. To what has
been there said, the following remarks may be added.
177. If to the subject implied in any form of the finite verb,
another subject be appended, the former must be repeated in the
shape of a separate personal pronoun ; a8 ‫ويعقنووب‬ ‫ حضرت أنا‬I and
Ya'kah ( Jacob )arere present : ‫ أتى هو وأصحابه‬he and hiscompanions B
came ; ‫ فاذهب أنت وربك‬go therefore,thout and thy Lord ; ‫اشتن أنت‬
‫ وزوجك الجنة‬do thout and thy toire dwell in the garden ; ‫تم‬ ‫لقد‬
‫ أنتم وأباؤهفي ضلال مبين‬verily seandyour fathershave been in
clear error. Exceptions are very rare ; ads, in a verse, ‫قلت إذأقبلت‬
Last mojs I said ,when she and (other) fair (women) advanced with
elegant gait ) ‫ تهادی‬for ‫ فقال والذين معه ;( تتهادی‬he and those who
were with him said ('! ab. i. 2449 , 1. 2)]. If, however, the verb has a C
>

pronominal suffix in the accusative, the repetition of the implied

subject in a separate form is unnecessary as ‫ أكرمك وزيد‬1 and
Zeid have shown the honour ; ‫جنات عدن يدخلونها ومن صلح‬
gardens of everlasting rest, into which they shall enter and those who
are righteous. — This form of expression may be varied by repeating
the verb after ġ, but even then the separate pronoun is still usually
employed ; as ‫ حضرت أنا وحضر يعقوب‬: D

*
[Sometimes there is hardly any difference between this construc
tion and that with ‫) واو المعنية‬$ 37(, e.g, 'Ibn Hisam , 318, .1 11
‫ فوجين‬... ‫ وكاوأضحابا لنا فارقوا الدی‬weoeand some of ourcomrades
coho left the right path became like to parties, where ‫كنا نحن‬
‫ وأصحاب تنا‬would convey the same meaning . R.S. We may add
here that it is usual to say ‫ سرت وزیدا‬rather than ‫وید‬, but
‫ شار زید وعمرو‬rather than ‫وعمرا‬.[
 326 PART THIRD - Syntax. [$ 178
A 178. If a substantive be connected by 9 with the objective
pronominal suffix of a verb, the suffix may be repeated in the form
‫هر‬

of a separate pronoun, butnotnecessarily ; as ‫وبني أن تعبد‬ ‫واج‬

‫ الأصنام‬and keep away from me and my sons our aporshipping idols ;
‫ أجلاه وقومه‬he made him and his people emigrate. But if a pronoun
is connected with a substantive or a pronominal suffix in the accu
sative, it must be suffixed either to the word Up (Vol. i.Ş 188) or to
the repeated verb ; as ‫قتله وإياها‬, or ‫ تله وقتها‬, he killed him and
B her. If a substantive object is annexed to a pronominal object, the
verb may be repeated or not ; as ‫ رأيتك وزيدا‬I saun thee and Zaid ;
‫ قتله ومن كان معه من أهله‬he killed him and those of his family
echoarerewith him , or ‫قتله هو ومن الخ‬, or ‫قتله وقتل من الخ‬
179. If to a pronominal suffix in the genitive there be joined a
substantive in the same case, the governing word is usually repeated ;
C as ‫ ربهم ورب آبائكم‬your and your fathers' Lord . The form ‫كتابك‬
ujgti,thy book and Zeid's,is of rarer occurrence, except with the
suffixes of the third person , as ‫ اتفاقه هو وأخيه‬his and his brothers
agreement. If a substantive be connected by 5‫ و‬with the pronominal
suffix of a preposition,, the preposition must be repeated ; as ‫ه‬que‫خی‬nous!
‫بی و‬
to me and his brother. This rule is occasionally violated in poetry,
D scarcely ever in prose ; as ‫ فقد خاب من يصلي بها وعيرها‬and balked
is he achto is scorched by it (war) and its name; ‫فاذهب فما بك والأيام‬
‫ من عجب‬afrthen ,for there isnothing strange in thee or the times
.be
REM. If a genitive belongs alike to two or more nouns, it is,
in classical Arabic, attached to the first of them , and represented
after the others by a pronominal
pronominal suffix ;; as ‫ بنو الملك وبناه‬the
king's sons and daughters. On an exception see $ 78, rem . b ; it is
common in later prose writers,as ‫يذكر أولاد وأحقاد آدم‬ ‫موسی‬
 Copulative Sentences. 327
§ 181]
Moses mentions (by name) the sons and grandsons of Adam , for A
‫ أطيب وأحلى نومة ; أولاد آدم وأحفاده‬a most pleasant and steel
alhnumber, for ‫أطيب تومة وأحلاها‬
180. The negative particle ý, when it follows 5, connecting two
nouns, supplies the place of a preceding negative sentence (see $ 160) ;
as good neither my father nor my mother remains alive,
‫درہ‬

where ‫ و‬is equivalent to ‫ تم تعلموا أنتم و آباؤكم زولم تبق‬we have

ye

not known , nor your fathers; ‫ تو شاء الله ما أشرنا ولا آباؤنا‬: God B
had pleased, we would not have given Him companions, nor our fathers.
If the two nouns be both separate words, sÝ is sometimes prefixed to
the first also, notwithstanding the negative which precedes the whole
sentence ; as ‫ ما وقع بيننا لا قتال ولا كلام‬there has been neither
combat nor dispute between us. — Similarly, if two verbs are dependent
upon another verb, which is preceded by a negative particle, the
second of the dependent verbs usually takes the negative ý with the
conjunction ‫ ; و‬as ‫ ما أمكنني أن أعمل شيئا ولا أقطع أمرا‬it acasc
impossible for me to do anything or to conclude anything, where yg
is equivalent to ‫وما أمكنني أن‬
181. When two verbs, connected by and referring to the
same subject, precede that subject, one of them (in general the
second) agrees with it in gender and number, whilst the other is put
in the singular masculine ; as ‫ بغی واعتديا عبداك‬, or ‫بغيا واعتدى‬
jims, thy two servants acted insolently and with violence ; immer D
‫ويسيان ابناك‬, or ‫يحيان ويسى ابناك‬, thy teco song do good and
evil. This involved form of expression occurs, however, but rarely in
classical Arabic, in which we usually find ‫بغی عبداك واعتديا‬
‫يحسن أبناك ويسيان‬. It is called by the grammarians ‫التنازع في‬
tieſ, the conflict in regard to government. Some further illustra
2

tions of it are given in the remarks.

 328 PART THIRD. - Syntax. [S 181
A REM. a. Sometimes a noun belongs to two verbs as the subject
of the one and the objective complement of the other. ( 1 ) When
this is the case, if the verb to which it is the complement be placed
first, the noun is expressed only as the subject of the second verb,
and the first verb is left without any complement ; as ‫ضربت‬
‫ وضربنی زید‬struck (Zeid ) and Zeid struck me
.I Some Arab
grammarians, however, allow the first verb a pronominal com
plement; as ‫إذا كنت ترضيه ويرضي صاحب ضربته وضربنی زیڈ‬
B when thou satisfiest a friend and he satisfies thee. (2 ) If the
verb, of which the noun is the subject, be placed first, the second
verb takes a pronominal complement, and the first verb agrees
with the noun according to the rules laid down in § 141 , etc.;
‫هر‬

as ‫ضربني وضربته زید‬, ‫ ضربني وضربتهما الرجلان‬the toomen struck

me and I struck them . The omission of the pronominal complement
is rare ;as ‫استنی زضربني وضربت الرجلان ضربني وضربت زید‬
‫ وناﺉب القرود‬the apestere akin to me and I to then [; ‫بعكاظ يعشی‬
0 ‫ الناظرين إذا هم تموا ششععااععهه‬at ‘ Okāz the sheen , or gleam , (of
weapons, <3lají) dazzles the eyes of the beholders when they look at
it. The noun may also be made the complement of the second
verb, and the first verb, which has now no subject expressed, must
agree with the noun in gender and number ; as ‫ضربني وضرب زیڈا‬
‫م‬

)Zeid ) struck me and I struck Zaid , ‫ ربانی وضربت الرجليني‬the

two (men ) struck me, and I struck thetoomen ; ‫ضربوني وضربت‬
D .‫ الظالمين‬t and I struck y
) struck me,e
(the evildoersh the evildoers
All these involved forms of expression occur but seldom in classical
‫وضربنی‬, the
Arabic ‫ وضرب‬and
‫تها‬usual ‫ربنى الر‬constructions
‫جلان‬regular ‫ضضرربنتي يادلاظالمون‬
‫ وضربتهم وض‬being
,
‫ضربت الظالمين وضربونی ضربت الرجلين ربانی‬
REM . b. In the case of a verb which must be connected with
both a subject and a predicate (such as ‫ كان‬or jló), if the
predicate be common to two propositions, it is expressed only once,
$ 181 ] Copulative Sentences. 329

being either entirely omitted the second time or having its place A
supplied by ☺ and a pronominal suffix. For example,we may
‫ ميريا‬I‫يد‬acas
translate ‫ن ز‬sick ‫ إياه‬Zeid
‫وكا‬and , sick by‫ نت وكان زید مريا‬,
‫ نت‬aras
or
or lastly ‫كنت وكان زید مريا‬
‫إياه‬, the first of the three forms being preferable. These involved
forms of expression likewise occur but rarely in classical Arabic,
the ordinary construction being‫ نت مريلها وكان زید مريا‬, or

‫] وكان زيد ياه‬An example from poetry in ‫ مانی بأمر نت‬B

Hai swing ais he accused me of a thing of which I and myfather
were innocent (sawāhid al-Kassiūf 311). D. G.]
REM. c.
Almost the same thing takes place after the verbs
Es to think, believe, fumé to think,reckon, suppose, etc., which
take for their objective complement a clause consisting of a subject
and a predicate ($ 24), as ‫ زیدا عالما‬.I
‫ ظننت‬thought Zeid learned
The predicate of the clause, which serves as complement to the C
‫لب‬-may
‫فعل الق‬, belong to two different propositions, and con
sequently refer to two different subjects ; whilst the noun, which
is the subject of the vidí jej in the one proposition, may in the
other be the subject of the clause which is dependent upon the
‫ فعل القلب‬When this is the case,we may, in accordance with
rem . b, translate such a phrase as Zèid thought me learned and I
thought him learned by ‫نی وظننت زيدا قالا‬ ‫ظني إياه‬
or

‫وظنت زيدا عالما‬, or laustly ‫نی وظننت يدا الا إياه‬ The D
first of these modes of expression is the most common , but all three
are rare,the natural and usual construction being ‫نی زید عالما‬
‫ إياه‬-If
‫وظننته‬. the subjects difer in gender or number,the pre
dicate must be repeated ; as ‫أظن ويظنانی أخا زيدا وعمرا أخوين‬
I think Zèid and 'Amr two brothers ( of mine), and they think me a
brother (of theirs).
W. II . 42
 330 PART THIRD . - Syntax. [S 182
A 182. The Arabs, as well as the other Semites, often connect
single verbs and entire sentences with one another merely by means
of the particles g and us, where we should employ particles of a more
definite meaning to indicate the precise relation between them .
They use ġ, for example, where we would prefer a disjunctive or
adversative particle ;; as ‫ا تعلمون‬ý‫ الله يعلم وأنتم ل‬God knots,but
ye do not know . In such cases, however, 9 has in reality only a
copulative force ; the adversative relation lies in the nature of the
B two clauses themselves. — The Arabs also use g and with a separate
verb in some cases in which we avail ourselves of a subordinate
modifying expression ; e.g. júltó hoãn he prostrated himself and
made long (his prostration), equivalent to he prostrated himself for a
long time, instead of ‫أطال الجود‬ as we may also say (see $ 140).

183. The particleſ in Arabic, like its equivalents in the

other Semitic languages, often serves to connect two clauses, the
C second of which describes the state or condition either of the subject
or one of the complements of the first clause, or else of a new subject.
This takes place in such a way that
(a) The clause descriptive of the state is nominal; as wj óls
w

uý going Zèid rose up weeping; ¿gács going isop slá he returned to me

beaten ; ‫ جاءت من عنده وهي مخترقة الثياب باكية‬shecame from his
house noith her clothes in tutters, crying; ‫انقرض في وقته قرنان من‬
‫ وهو حی‬webítwo generations of men passed away in his time,whilst
Live W

Dhestilldieval ; ‫ الذي مر على قرية وهى خاوية على عروشها‬likehim

who passed by a town, falling down upon its roofs ( in ruins, its walls
falling in upon its fallen roofs (; ‫ كذبتم وأنتم تعلمون‬ye lied ,
knowing (that ye did so) , ye lied wittingly, in which example the
nominal circumstantial clause has a finite verb for its predicate ;
‫د وعمر‬isj
‫و با‬gjasa
‫ق‬ju ‫ زي‬Frós Zeid went away, whilst Amr remained ;
JO

‫اتها‬ ‫ وقد أغيري والطير في‬and sometimes I go forth early,whilst

§ 183] Copulative Sentences. 331

the birds are (still) in their nests, where the circumstantial clause has A
a distinct subject ; ‫ ذهب زید وعمرو يشتغل‬Zeid utent auay,whilst
'Amr was busy, where the circumstantial clause has a distinct subject
and a finite verb for its predicate.
REM . We sometimes find a nominal clause merely appended

to the preceding proposition,without ‫ و‬as ‫وهبطوا بعضكم لبعض عدو‬

get ye doctor , the one of gout an entenny to the other ; ‫جاء زيد يده‬
‫ على رأسه‬Zeitcarewith his hand on his head ; ‫ لقيته علیه جبة وشي‬B
I net him tearing an endlyroidered coat ; ‫راحوا عبق المسك بهما‬
they returned, (whilst) the perfume of musk clung to them ]; and
‫نما‬

even without a pronoun, as ‫ مررت با تبر قفيز بدرهم‬1I passed by the

wheat, (whilst) a bushel (of it was selling) for a dirham (for
‫يز منه‬.S
‫ ] قف‬120 , rem ‫([ه‬.
(6) The clause descriptive of the state is verbal and affirmative,
the verb being in the Imperfect Indicative, preceded by tig;; as C

‫ لم تؤذونني وقد تعلمون أني رسول الله إليكم‬shuy do ye harm me',

weherewe
knowing (as ye do) that I am the apostle of God unto you ? If the
particle is be not employed , ġ must also be dropped, so that the
circumstantial Imperfect is outwardly unconnected with the previous
proposition ; as ‫ جاء زيد يضحك‬Zeid came laughing ; ‫جاء الأمير‬
‫ قاد الجنائب بين يديه‬the enar camewith led horses precedinghim
(a very common construction, see $ 8, e). D

(c) The clause descriptive of the state is verbal and negative,

the verb being in the Imperfect Jussive, preceded by us, or the
‫ إليه شيء‬Indicative,preceded by ‫ ;زوما‬as ‫أو قال أوحى إلى ولم يوح‬
Imperfect
or has said, ' Something has been revealed to me,' whilst

nothing hasbeen revealed tohim ; ‫وما يخدعون إلا أنفسهم وما يشعرون‬
but they deceive only themselves, without knowing it. In this case is
often dropped ; as ‫فانقلبوا بنعمة من الله وفضل لم يمسسهم شو‬
 332 PART THIRD . - Syntax. [$ 183

A and so they returned , (laden) with favours and benefits from God,
without any harm having touched them . Where the negation is
expressed by ý, the particle ‫'و‬ġ is rarely used ; as ‫إرتفاع‬ ‫تو أن قوما‬
‫ن قبيلة دخلوا الماء لا لا‬if‫ م‬any personsentered heaven
because of distinction of tribe, I would enter it without being hindered .
( d) The clause descriptive of the state is verbal and affirmative,
the verb being in the Perfect , preceded by ‫ ; وقد‬as ‫هذا غناؤها وقد‬
B de mai such is her singing, now that she has grown old; vú nji l lóg
‫ في سبيل الله وقد أخرجنا من ديارنا وأبنائنا‬andwhyshould seemore
fight in the path of God, since we have been driven out of our dwellings
and (parted from ) our children ? Sometimes tog is omitted , and,
less rarely , eitlier 9‫ و‬or ‫ قد‬alone ; as ‫أو جاوم حصرت صدورهم أن‬
‫ يقاتلوم‬or they comeunto you ,their hearts being reluctant to fight
c against yout; ‫ الذين قالوا لإخوانهم وقعدوا تو أطاعوا ما قتلوا‬ucha,
having remained (at home), said of their brethren (who went out to
battle ), ' If they had taken our advice , they would not have been
killed ' ; ‫ما كان ينفعني مقال نسائهم وقتلت دون رجالها لا تبعد‬
what can it boot me that their women say, ' O do not perish ! ' when I
have been‫علی‬slain fighting for their husbands? ‫رأيناه قد تغير تزيد وكان‬
onio stá we saw him enraged against Zeid,, who was in command
of his army.
D (e) The clause descriptive of the state is verbal and negative ,
‫وما‬, or more rarely by 6
the verb being in the Perfect, preceded by log
alone ; as ‫ جاء زيد وما ركب‬zeid came without having ridden ;
‫ جاء زيد وما قام أبوه‬, or ‫ ما ام أبوه‬, Zeid camewithouthis father
having stood up.
REM. The g which introduces such a circumstantial clause, is
called by the Arab grammarians vesi sis, the wāw of the state,
§ 184] Copulative Sentences. 333

condition or circumstance, and ‫واو الإبتداء‬, theaap of commence- A

ment. The clause itself is called ‫جملة حالية‬
5. Adversative, Restrictive, and Exceptive Sentences.

184. The principal adversative particles in Arabic are sý,‫ن لا‬Lisa

‫لك‬
or
‫لين‬, and ‫بل‬.
( a) v is opposed to a preceding affirmative proposition or a
command ; as ‫ زید عالم لا جاهل‬Zeid is learned , not ignorant; B
‫ہر‬

‫ عمرو‬nj ‫ جانی زید‬Zeid came to me,not 41mr; ‫د زيدا لا عمر‬

take Zeid , not 'Amr. [ In comparisons yg has the meaning of but not,
as‫ في ووللاا املاشلعكان‬a man but not the like of Mālik ('ibn Nuwèira );
‫مرغی‬ süss sý5 C;ó water - but not so good as that
of the well of Soddā, pasture -- but not like the sa'dān . In later times
‫ ولا‬was very often used in the sense of etent more than , as ‫دوت ولا‬
‫ اغتداء الغراب‬I roseearly, even earlier than the croup does ; ‫ ولقد قمت‬C
‫ لله ولا عمرو بن عبيد‬and perily thou hast defended the cause of God
better than even mr 'al Obeid ; ‫فخروا و خرس شان المقابر‬
they were silent, even more than the inhabitants of the sepulchres.
In reality, neither ‫ لا‬nor
-have
‫ولا‬ an adversative force ; the adver
sative relation lies in the nature of the two clauses themselves, as has
been remarked in the case of 9 $ 182. D. G. ] D

)5( ‫ پين‬or .also

‫ ) لیر‬,especially in MagribiMss , ‫(لاك ولاكن‬.
which is often preceded by ‫و‬ġ,‫ ر‬is more particularly opposed to a
preceding negative proposition or a prohibition ; as ‫جانی زید ليث‬
‫في‬

‫ عما ته يجى‬Zeid came to me, but Imr did not come; ‫لا تضرب‬
‫ زيدا نين عمرا‬do not beat Zaid,but Amr ; ‫وما ظلمونا ولين كانوا‬
 334 PART THIRD.Santas. [S 184

A ‫ أنفسهم يظلمون‬andthey did not injureus,but they injured themselves ;

‫لا صدق ولا صلی ولكن كذب وتوتی‬ r he neither believed nor
prayed,but deemed (the truth) a lie and turned away ; is sügisel
‫ څټ تیلی عوازلی ولكني من حبها تعميد‬myreproachers blameme
for loving Lèilā, but I am deeply smitten with love for her and
in rhymefor ‫إن ابن زرقاء لا تخشى بوادره لين وقائعه في ;(عمید‬
B ‫ الحرب تنتظر‬no errors of sudden passion are feared in ’ Ibn Zarkā,
but his onslaughts in battle are looked for (with dread ). When
introducing a nominal clause, s 'requires the subject to be put in
the accusative (see $ 36), whereas iad leaves it in the nominative ; as
‫ كفر شليمان ولي الشياطين كفروا‬-a
‫وما‬ Solomonnd
aasnot an
believeing, but the devilswere unbelieving; ‫بين الظالمون اليوم في‬
Como yakó but the evildoers are to-day in manifest error.
.REMI ‫ لين‬and ‫ تين‬are said to be used ‫ پلاستدراك‬to rectify or
emend (the previous statement).

( e) é is opposed either to a preceding affirmative or negative

proposition , a command or a prohibition ;a8 ‫ قام زید بن عمرو‬Zeid
stood up - not so, it was 'Amr ; gjos į i j ólí 6 Zèid did not
stand up, but Imr (stood up (; ‫ اضرب زيدا بل عمرا‬beat Zeid - no,
D :Amr; ‫ لا تضرب زيدا بل عمرا‬do not beat Zaid,but (beat) Amr ;
‫ما نرى تم علينا من فضل بل تظنه اذبين‬aedo not seethat yewe
are in any aany superior to us -na , ute thank you liars; ‫قالوا قلوبنا‬
‫ غلف بل تعنهم الله بقرهم‬they say, "Ourheartsare ancircumcised
not so! God hath cursed them for their unbelief ; ‫خلعوا عنه خلعته‬
‫ بل وثوب الحيوة‬they stripped him of his dress, may, also of the
garment of life ; ‫ أأنت رجل أم امرأة فقال بير امرأة يا مولاي‬are
$ 186] Adversative, Restrictive, and Exceptive Sentences. 335

thou a man or a woman ? And she said, A woman (lit. , not a man, A
but a woman ) O my master. Sometimes it is strengthened by the
addition of ‫ ; لا‬as ‫ هجرتك لا بل زادنی غنما مجر وبعد‬Lóg
‫ وما‬and II have
not abandoned thee; no , on the contrary, separation and distance have
increased my love. [In the answer to a disjunctive question ý vý
‫ بل بعده‬deny onemember (the first), as ‫أفي مانی أم بعده قال لا‬
and
éses ü whether in my time or afterwards ? Ile said : Nay, but
afterwards ('Ibn Hiśām 10, lines 5 and 3 from below, 11 , l. 1 , Tab. i.
)

912 , 11. 3, 4 , 9 ). R. S. ] B

Rem . After a negative proposition or a prohibition, U is said

to be used wish BU (see above, b, rem . ); after an affirmative
proposition or a command, ylös to denote turning away, or
digressing, from what preceded ( JoyTub).
185. The particle is one of the most important in the
language as auas jos, particle of limitation or restriction. It
stands at the beginning * of a proposition , and the word or portion of c
the proposition which is affected by it, is always placed, for emphasis'
sake, at the end ( compare $ 36, rem . b,d) ; as used we ‫ا‬want
‫إنم‬
we are only mocking (at them) ; läbi mají b1 the obligatory
almsare only for thepoor ; ‫ما تلدين في كل عمرك واحدا أو اثنين‬
{........

thou givest birth in thy whole life to only one or two ; je ne sai con
suét I fear the overflow only of my own streamlet ; liso uvi ‫ما‬
abomisi verily, usury is in the delay of payment]. D

186. ( a) The most important of the exceptive particles is ,

compounded of !, if,and ý, not (sce Vol. i.$ 367, e). The exception
‫ر‬

)‫ (أستثناء‬is considered to be of three kinds : ‫الاستثناء المتصل‬, in

(But not always ; comp. Fleischer, K.Schr, i. 508. ]
 336 PART THIRD . — Syntax. [S 186

A which the thing excepted (con moll

un tir)is joined to, or of the samekind
as, the general term (áis com out that from which the exception is
made); ékáni T Tizi,in which the exception is severed from , or
‫منرهو‬

wholly different in kind from ,the general term ; and Eredi ‫الاستثناء‬,
or the exception made void (of government) *, in which the general
term is not expressed. The rules for the construction of the exception
are as follows.
(a) When the thing excepted is placed after the general term , and
B the proposition containing that terin is affirmative, the exception is
put in the accusative; as ‫ قام القوم إلا زيدا‬the people stood up , except
Zèid; lúj Logių 3 jó I passed by the people,except Zeid ;
‫ منه إلا قليلا منهم‬.and
‫ فشربوا‬they drank of it, save a felo or them
(B) When the thing excepted is placed after the general term ,
and the proposition containing that term is negative, or interrogative
implying a negation ) ‫ استفهام بمعنى النفي‬or ‫ (استفهام إنكارئ‬f, the
C exception may be put either in the accusative, or in the same case
with the general term (as a jás or permutative, or more specifically
>

as a
aino con un väes jus, $ 139, rem . b, 2, ), but the latter
construction is preferred ; as ‫) ما جاءني أحد إلا زيد‬or ‫)إلا زيدا‬,
‫) ما مررت بأكبر إلا زیږ‬or ‫)إلا زيدا‬, ‫د إلايريد‬is‫لا يقمأح‬ý letnoone stand
up but zeiad (or ‫ ل مررت بأحب إلا ريب إلا زيدا‬hast thou passed by
D any one butZeid (or ‫(إلا زيدا‬:? ‫ ما فعلوه إلا قليل منهم‬they acould not
do it,save aset of them ; ‫ ومن يغفر الذنوب إلا الله‬andacho forgives
sins save God? Látí výs ay wý there is no deity other than God ).
Sometimes the place of cis
aig sammui is occupied by a preposition and
*
[Comp. Fleischer, Kl. Schr. ii. 96. ]
+ Also in sentences like ‫ تو كان فيهما اله إلا الله تفدتا‬$ 4, a ,
the proposition implying a negation. D. G. )
§ 186] Adversative, Restrictive, and Exceptive Sentences. 337

its complement (‫ ( جار ومجرور‬or the like, which does not however A
affect theconstruction oftheexception ; as ‫ما جاءنی من أحد إلا ریڈ‬,
where ‫ما رأيت من أحد إلا زيدا ; أحد = من أحد‬, where ‫= من أكبر‬
‫ لا أحد في الدار إلا عمرو ;;أحدا‬there is nomein thehousebut Amr,=
‫ زید بشئ إلا شيئا لا يعبأ به زلا في الدار أحد‬,
‫لیس‬, or ‫ما زید بشی‬
‫إلا شيء لا يعبأ به‬, Zeid is nothing but a thing of no account;
‫ أبینی بینی نشتم بيد إلا دا کیست تنها عضد‬ye Bena Labeina, ye are B
no hand but a hand that lacks an arm . - On the contrary, if the thing
excepted is wholly different in kind from the general term, the
preference is usually given to the accusative, in accordance with the

dialect of el-Hi :12 ; as ‫ ما جاءني أحد إلا حمارا‬no one (ice.noperson (

came to me, but an ass ; ‫ ما قام القوم إلا جمارا‬the people did not
stand up,
, but an ass , but the Tèmīmites [ and some others) adopt the

permutation, as ‫ ما مررت بالقوم إلا چمار ما قام القوم إلا حمار‬-

If the general term is not expressed, the thing excepted is put in c
whatever case the general term would have been, had it been
expressed ; s ‫) ما جاني إلا زيد‬not ‫( تریدا‬, ‫ا مترو إلا بی‬,‫م‬
‫)تم يضرب إلا زيدا‬for had the generalterm been expressed, we should
have said ‫ما مررت بأحد ما جاء أحد‬, and ‫فلم يدر ;(كم يضرب أحدا‬
‫ إلا الله ما هيجت تا عشية إناء الدیار وشامها‬and none but God knew
what ( feelings the thought of ) her tattoo -marks excited in us on
the evening when the abodes ( of her people) were far away. D

(y) When the thing excepted is placed before the general term ,
it is invariably put in the accusative, if the proposition containing
the general term is affirmative ; as ‫قام إلا زيدا القوم‬. But if that
proposition be negative, the nominative is also admissible, though the
usual construction is the accusative ; as ‫فما لى إ آل أحمد شيعة‬
‫ وما بي إلا مشعب الحي مشعب‬I have no helpers but the family of
'Aḥmad ( Muḥammad), and I have no way but the way of truth ;
W. II . 43
 338 PART THIRD.Syntaa. [S 186

A4 ‫ ما زاد إلا ضعف ما بي كلامها‬but conversing with her only doubled

my pain (lit. whatwas in me); but ‫قائهم يرجون منه شفاعة إذا تم‬
‫ النبيون شافع‬- a
‫ يكن إلا‬they expect fromn d
him (Muhammad) inter
cession, when there is no intercessor save the prophets; nest
‫أنخااصكر‬. ‫ أخوك‬I have no helper but thy brother ; instead of ‫ النبيين‬and
B REM . 0. If several exceptions are specified, the following rules
are observed. (1 ) If the general term , from which the exception
is made, is not expressed, the regent (verb) affects one, usually the
first, of the exceptions, and the others are put in the accusative; as
‫ما قام إلا زيد إلا عمرا‬, ‫ ) ما مررت إلا بريد إلا عما إلا بكرا‬2 ( If
the general term is expressed, and the exceptions precede it, they
are all put in the accusative, whether the proposition containing
the general term be positive or negative ; as ‫قام إلا زيدا إلا ما‬
‫نق‬

C
‫ما قام إلا زيدا إلا عمرا إ بترا القوم القوم‬. If the exceptions
follow the general term, and the proposition containing that term
is affirmative, the exceptions are likewise all in the accusative, as
‫ا‬negative,
‫را إلا ب‬one
‫ ;قام القوم إلا زيدا إلا عم‬but if the proposition be
of them (usually the first) is construed in the
‫ر‬ :: ‫ه‬ ‫ه‬
ordinary way as a permutative of ‫المستشی مه‬, and the others
are put in theaccusative,as ‫ما قام أحد إلا زيد إلا عمرا إلا بترا‬
)but ‫ إلا زيدا‬in the accusative is rare). (3) If the exceptions be
different in kind from the general term , the ordinary rule is
followed for all; ‫ ما قام أحد إلا جمارا إلا فراإلا م‬in the
D accusative is preferable to the permutative in the nominative.

REM.b. Iftherepetition of ‫إ‬bemerely emphatic )‫يوكيډ‬

it exercises no influence upon the word following it, which may be
connected with the preceding exception, either as a permutative or
by the conjunction ‫ و‬.e.g ‫ ما مررت بأحد إلا ريب إلا أخيك‬Ipassed
by no one but Zèid — but thy brother, meaning but Zèid thy brother,
‫ش‬

‫إلا زيد أخيك‬, ‫ قام القوم إلا زيدا إلا عمرا‬the people stood up,
$ 186] Adversative, Restrictive, and Exceptive Sentences. 339

ercept Zèid and except Amr, only slightly more emphatic than A
‫ إلا زيدا وعمرا‬escept Zaid and mr ; ‫هل الدهرإلا ليله ونهارها وإ‬
‫ طلوع الشمس ثم غيارها‬is‫و‬Time
‫ تغ‬ought butnight and its ( following(
day, and (aught but) the rising of the sun (and) then its setting ?
where the second 5ý} is a mis or superfluous word, which does not
count in the construction ; ‫ما تك من شنجك إلا عمله إلا سيمه‬
alog Big thou hast nothing from thy old camel but its toil,(nothing
but) its jog and (nothing but) its trot, for álogy cong alas B
)‫ شنجك‬by license for ‫شنجك‬, but others read ‫(شيك‬.
REM . C.
The exception after ‫ إلا‬may also be expressed by a
sentence ,which may be introduced by ‫روو‬, ‫وقد‬, ‫أن‬, etc.;us ‫ما أرسلنا‬
‫ في قرية من نبي إلا أخذنا أهلها بالبأساء والضراء‬Wehavenever
sent a prophet to any city without our afflicting its people with
adversity and trouble ; ‫ ما تشقط من ورقة إلا يعلمها‬no leaf fals
but Heknows it ; ‫ ما رأيت أحدا إلا زيد خير مثه‬I have seen no G
onethan multom Zeid wasnot beter ; ‫فلا تموتن إلا وأنتم ميمون‬
do not die then unless ye be Muslims; ‫ما في قلبك شيء إلا وفی‬
‫قلبي أكثر منه‬thereisnoemotion in thyheartbutthereisa stronger
onein mine; ‫ فلم ألبث إلا وجارتی قد أقبلت‬and Ihadnotwaited
‫و‬

long butmy girl cameup ; ‫ فما أشعر إلا وقد جاءت من عنده‬and
before I was aware ( of it), she had come from his house ; Gillió la
‫م‬

‫نلالقومقاد ذهب الرجل‬ ‫ل م‬before

‫ إ‬and ‫في ك‬Ihadunloosed
‫ن يأتيهم الله‬it‫أ‬my‫إلا‬foot‫ر)ون‬,theman
‫ هل ينظ‬D
was
gone ; ‫الغمام‬ ‫ظل‬
can they expect but that God should come to them overshadowed by
clouds ? The phrase ‫ نشدتك الله ( الله) إلا فعلت‬I beseech tilee
by God to do (it)*, is explained by ‫ ما طلبت منك إلا فعلك‬I beg
*
]Properly I remind thee of God, therefore ‫الله والحم‬ ‫نشد‬
I remind thee of God and the ties of relationship is often = I beseech
 340 PART THIRD.— Syntax. [$ 186

A of thee nothing but thy doing (it),equivalent

, to ‫ا‬vip‫ك إل‬sila
‫أقسمت علي‬
éles (compare $ 59, rem. a )). [In this sense o is often replaced
by lied ; see Vol. i. $ 367,1. ]
wowa

Rem. d.
.
sometimes strengthened by profixing to it YUÍ
výV}! is
O God ! as
‫ اللهم إلا أن تقد نار الجوع‬unless inded the fre of
hunger be kindled . (Comp. the footnote to $ 38, rem. d. ]
>

REM . e. V! is very rarely used in poetry with pronominal

B suffixes ; as
W
‫ ما لي عوض إه ناصر‬and I have never anyhelper but
Him ; ‫ ما علينا إذا ما نت جارتنا أن يجاورنا إك دیار‬anal i
is nothing to us, when thou art our neighbour, that no one is near to
us but thee,

Rem.f. The exception is sometimes suppressed after 511, as in

the phrase ‫) ليس إلا‬compare ‫ ليس غیر‬and ‫ ولا غير‬$ 82.d
, ); e.g
‫ فأما ما عدا ما لا قلتضب ليس إلا‬as regards ma ada and ma
С halā, they are used with the accusative, not otherwise ; igig is
of wines the agent is one ( in kind), no more.
[Rem. 9. ül ‫ أن‬yg‫ إلا‬and üles
‫ غير أن‬are often used in the sense of but,
even if the preceding proposition be affirmative . — On the phrase
‫ا أن‬v‫ إل‬ģó tó vix, see the Gloss.to Țabarī.]
ji
(6) ve (see $ 82 , d ) is often used in the sense of besides, except,
but. It is construed with the genitive, and must itself be put in the
D same case as would be the thing excepted after nig; e.g. og íólí
‫ =) ما قام أحد غير زيد ;(إلا زيدا=) غیر زیر‬j ‫إلا زيد‬, better than
thee by God to think of the ties of relationship, as ‫تقدتك والزيادة‬
I beseech thee to give us the increase of pay (Agānī xiv. 120, 1. 16 quoted
by R.S.). The words sites ‫ ܐܵܢܵܐ‬are properly an elliptical phrase (s 6,
‫ إن‬to do (iot
rem . 6b), as ‫ فعلت‬.n
! t), e.g.
o.g ‫والأرحام إن‬, ‫نشدتك الله‬
Sana's I beseech thee by God and the ties of relationship not to
disgrace me. D. G.)
§ 186] Adversative, Restrictive, and Exceptive Sentences. 341

‫ ( إلا زيد = ) ما قام غير زير ; (إلا ردا = ) غير زير‬: ‫ ما قام أحد غير حمار‬A
)= ‫إلا حمارا‬, ratherthan ‫إلا حمار ) غيرحمار‬.
REM . a.
o is sometimes used as a ‫تابع‬,when we should rather
have expected , and is then followed by a substantive in the
‫عر‬

.same
case as that which precedes it ; e.g ‫لو كان فيهما الهة إ‬
‫ن الله تفسدتا‬if‫ م‬there had been in them (heaven and earth )) gods
besides God, they would certainly have gone to ruin ; Sát Báni B
‫ بلدة فوق بلدة قليل بها الأصوات إلا بتمامها‬shetonsmade lie donon,
and laid her breast upon a tract of ground in which there were
h ) ;
(heard)fewsounds except her own murmured ory; ašlúc Bus
‫ أخوة تعمر أبيك إلا الفرقدان‬and every brother is forsaken by
his brother, by thy father's life, except the two ( stars called the)
Pointers. . The noun which precedes VI is in this case usually an
‫هور‬

indefinite plural or its like (apie), such as a substantive defined by C

the article used ‫الجنس‬
REM .b. The construction of ‫) سوی‬see $ 82,e, )in the sense of
besides, eacept, is similar to that of ‫ ; غیر‬as ‫قام القوم سوی زی‬
) = ‫ ولم يبق سوى العدوان ;(غير زيد‬and there arenothing
was left but
violence )= ‫( غير العدوان‬.
(c) The verbal clauses bíá ls, what is free from , and lúc ló,
what goes beyond , are often used in the sense of except, but, and D >

‫ر‬
govern the accusative ; as ‫ فأنزلوهم ما لا باشا‬and they made them
alight,escept Abbas , ‫ ألا كل شيء ما خلا الله باطل‬overily everything ,
‫ تقديمه‬God
except ‫واز‬,is
‫لا ج‬vanity
‫( ما خ‬in ‫طه قائ‬for‫اجلمميبعتدمامذنكرأصنفايفه خوبأرحوزال(هباطولشرائ‬
‫م فيه‬rhyme

all that has been said regarding the habar of the mubtada', as to its 3

kinds and states and conditions, holds regarding it (the habar of 'inna ),
 372 PART THIRD. - Syntax. [S 186

A except the allocability of placing it first; ‫ذقت أنواع الحلواء ما عدا‬

vamasi I have tasted all kinds of sweetmeats, except the habīş.—
When ló is dropped, as is frequently the case, płá and lis may be
construed with the accusative or the genitive, though the latter is
disputed in regard to ‫ ; عدا‬as ‫لا الفراء أنها تعمل‬ ‫ومذهب الكوفيين‬
cuando las and the opinion of the Kūfīs, except el-Farrā , is that it
governsin thesameacay asleisat ; ‫وما حول خمسةآلاف من المسلمين‬
B ‫ والمتاولة واليهود عدا النساء والأولاد‬and about 5000 Muslims and
Metacoila and Jeus, besides the women and children : ‫لا الله لا‬
‫ أرجو سواك‬saving God , I have no hope but in thee ; ‫تبست الملابس‬
‫ الفاخرة لا الشواد‬I haveworn all sorts of splendid garments,except
‫ ہ‬, ‫نقرہ‬

black ;‫أبحا حيهم قث وأسرا عدا الشمطاء والطفل الصغير‬megave up

their tribe to slaughter and bondage, except the grey-haired woman and
the little child. These words may of course, like , ‫ غير‬, and ‫سوی‬
C be followed by a clause commencing with ‫ أن‬or ‫ ;زأأنن‬as ‫إن‬ ‫لا أن‬
‫ تجعل الفعل پلاستقبال وإن كان ماضيا‬eccept that the conditional(
'in turns the verb into a future, though it be in form ) a past ;
‫و‬

‫ خلا أنه لا يحمم إبدال الكرة من المعرفة إ موصوفه‬except that

it is not elegant to make an indefinite substantive the permutative
of a definite one, unless an adjective be annexed to it. This is
also the ordinary construction of ‫) بید‬rarely ‫(مید‬, used in an
D ‫ ; استثناء منقطع‬a8 ‫ زيد كثير المالي بيد أنه بخيل‬Zeid ismealthy,
but he is sting ; ‫أنا أفصح من تطق بالضاد بيد أتى من قريش‬
‫ واستوضع في بني سعد بن بر‬II have theparestpronunciation orof
the letter dād, but I am of Ķorèis, and I was put out to nurse among
the Bènū Sa'd’ibn Bèkr (words of the Prophet).
) ‫) کاشی‬lit. he excepted *) or ‫حاشا‬, rarely ‫ کاش‬and ‫حشی‬, is
*
* [ That ( sárlás is originally a nomen verbale, and not a verb, as
§ 186] Adversative, Restrictive, and Exceptive Sentences. 343

construed with the genitive (or with y) or the accusative ; as Primal A

‫ إلى الأكابر والأصاغر كاشی آلبرامكة‬I havebenefted the high and the
lo ,eacept the family of Barmek ; ‫حاشا أبي ثوبان إن به ضدا عن‬
‫ المنحاة والشتيم‬eccept Abu Talan - verily he is sparing of abuse
and foulwords :; ‫لهم على البرية بالإسلام‬ ‫کاشی فقرریيا فشإنا الله‬
wwig except Ķorèis, for verily God hath given them the superiority
‫ شورت مہ‬,
over all creation through al-'Islam and the (true) religion ; ‫ اللهم اغفر‬B
‫مه‬

‫ بي ولمن يسمع كاشي الشيطان وأبا الأصبغ‬0 God,pardon me and

those who hear, except Satan and Abu 'l-'Aşbaġ. It is rarely preceded
by ‫ زما‬as ‫ ) فاطمة‬or ‫' أسامة أحب الناس إلى ما كاشي ( كاش‬Usama
is the dearest
‫ر رہ‬
of mankind to me, except Fātima (words of the Prophet) ;
‫ أما الناس ما حاشا قربنا فإنا نحن أفضلهم فعا‬and as regards
mankind , except Korèis, we are the noblest of them in deeds.

[Rem. at csáló in Ķor'ân xii.31 and 51 is an expression of C

wonder at the power of God, like ‫ ; سبحان الله‬used by later
writers in the sense of ‫ معاذ الله‬God forbid ! God keep us! ‫حاشاك‬
or ‫ حاشی تك‬means saving you, you excepted .]
)e( ‫ لیس‬and ‫ لا يكون‬are also occasionally used, in these forms
only, as equivalents of ý , and are followed by the accusative ;
as ‫قام القوم تيس ریڈا‬, or ‫لا يثون يدا‬. Here the grammarians
suppose an ellipse of the subject, orces. With pronominal suffixes D
we may say games and someone ( as well as ‫(کيیس ای‬, ‫كيك‬, .etc
] . Vol.i. $ 182, rem . a]; e.g ‫ إذ ذهب القوم الكرام تیسی‬since
.comp
the noble have departed, except me ; ‫تيت هذا الليل شهر لا ترى‬
‫ فيه غريبا تي إياي وإياك ولا تخشى رقيبا‬could that this night
the school of el -Kūfa taught, has been proved by Fleischer, Kl. Schr.
i. 405, 462 seq.]
 344 PART THIRD. — Syntax. [S 186

A were a ( whole) month, during which we might see no stranger, but only
me and thee,and might fear no sp ; ‫ما وصف لي أحد في الجاهلية‬
‫ر‬

‫ قرايته في الإسلام إلا رأيته دون الصفة كيك‬nooneaas described to me

in the (time of ) ignorance, whom I saw (afterwards) in (the time of)
èl-' Islām, but Ifound him inferior to the description, save thee (words
of the Prophet to Zèidu 'l-Hail) .

) f( ‫ لا سيما‬especially, above all (see Vol.i. $ 364,e),may be

B construed either with the nominative or the genitive ; as áunis song
‫ تعظمها النصارى غاية العظيم ولا سيما موك الفرنج‬and it isachurch
which the Christians hold in very great reverence, but especially the
kings of the Europeans; ‫ ولا سيما يوم بدارة جلجل‬but especially a
day in the valley of Ġulgul. The word ‫سی‬
is the accusative of the

‫ سی‬an equal ( see $ 39), and, if the construction with the

noun is
C genitive be adopted, 6 is regarded as redundant (compare ş 70,
rem . f) . Often a preposition with its complement, an adverbial
accusative, or a circumstantial clause introduced by ‫و‬g or bg (compare
a, rem. e), [or a conditional (temporal) sentence introduced by s or
‫[إذا‬, follows ‫ ولا سيما‬as ‫ لا سيما بحضرتك‬especially in the presence ;
.
‫ وعليك بالحمل لا سيما من الشقهاء‬takecare tobear insultspatiently,
especially from fools ; ‫ لا سيما وأنت في زي الخليفة ولباسه‬especially
D since thou art in the garb of the caliph and his dress; using the
‫ أغدق جنح الظلام‬especially as the shadone of darkness has fallen ;
‫ر‬
‫ ) أتيتهمما‬or ‫ إن زيا تگریم ولا سيما إن (إذا‬berily Zeid is generous,
especially if thou come to him whilst he is engaged in prayers). Later
writers incorrectly use hermowe
‫سيما‬, without ý ;; as
a8 ‫هذا مع مزيد إحسانه‬
‫ إليه سيما في زمن الغلاء‬this,notuithstanding hisexcessivekindness to
him , especially in time of dearth.
>
 § 187] Conditional and Hypothetical Sentences. 345

6. Conditional and Hypothetical Sentences. А

187. To what we have said above ( SS 4–6, § 13, and § 17),

>

regarding the use of certain moods and tenses in the protasis and
apodosis of conditional and hypothetical clauses, we must here add a
few words on the use of the particle at the commencement of a
conditional apodosis.—This particle is used to separate the protasis
and apodosis of a conditional sentence , (or of a clause introduced by
13 !], when the conditional particle of the protasis either cannot B
exercise any influence upon the apodosis, or is not required to do so *.
This is the case-

( a) When the apodosis is a nominal sentence ; as rús eit !

újuló svo est if thou sayest this, thou art one of the unbelievers ;
‫ إن عصي فويل له‬:if he be disobedient, nroe to him ! ‫إن تفعلوا فإنه‬
guns if yedo, it will be a crime in you (lit. attaching to you );
‫ إن كنتم فی ریب من البعث قانا خلقنام‬if ye are in doubt about 0
the resurrection ,verily we have created you ; ikaw ayi até loc to
Lieli by whichsoever (name) ye call (upon Him ), His are the best
.names ‫إذا المرة لم يدنس من اللؤم عرضه فكل داء يتويه جميل‬
when a man's honour is not sullied by meanness, every coat he wears is
becoming to him.] In this case, after a conditional ! or , we may
substitute for the so -called IT IS! (see Vol. i. $ 368, rem. e),
we Oso
as
‫ وإن تصبهم سيئة بما قدمت أيديهم إذا هم يقنطر‬and if evil befal D
them for what their hands have previously wrought, lo they despair ;
provided always that the nominal sentence does not partake of the
nature of an imperative ( as in the above ő is), and is not intro
duced by a negative or ‫إن‬
* [When the protasis is deprived of its conversive influence on the
verb
545. ]
of the apodosis this is called Tess Comp.. Fleischer,, Kl. Schr. .i.
W. II . 44
 346 PART THIRD . - Syntax. [S 187

A ‫ي الغ‬. ‫ ف‬The
‫ي]ر‬REM ‫ فالمنية‬is‫بل‬sometimes
‫ سيعلقه ح‬.‫ه‬omitted
‫ا بد أن‬in‫وم ل‬poetry
‫ي الي‬,‫ف‬rarely
‫ يمت‬in‫لم‬prose
‫فمن‬,
as

whoever did not die to -day, the snare of death will certainly lay
hold of him tomorrot ; ‫ وإذا ما غضبوا هم يغفرون‬and then they
are angered, they forgive; ‫قاف لا وزر ولا أجر إني‬ ‫وإن جو‬
bens and if 1 escape on equal terms, neither condemned nor
rewarded , lo, I shall be fortunate.]

B ( 6) When the apodosis is a verbal sentence, but the verb is a

‫ ماض جامد‬or defective perfect (without imperfect or masdar),, such
as ‫ ليس‬he isnot, ‫ سی‬perhaps he is, ‫ نغم‬hono good is, and the like;
.eg ‫من تم يثن تعظيمه بعد ألف مرة تعظيمه في أول مرة في‬
‫ بأهل العلم‬hewhose reverence (for histeacher )is not the sameafter
(seeing him) a thousand times as after ( seeing him) for the first time,
is not arorthy ofor science ; ‫ إن تبدوا الصدقات فنعها هي‬:if ge give alms
C openly, it is well.
(c) When the apodosis is a verbal sentence, expressing a desire,
wish, command, or prohibition ; as ‫إن كنتم تحبون الله فاتبعونی‬
if ye late God , follow me ; ‫من شاء أن يحتوى آماله جم فليتخذ‬
‫ تيته في دركها جم‬achoever arishes to attain his desires as a whole,
let him make use of his night, as of a camel, to overtake them .
[Comp. § 1 , f, at the end.]
D (d ) When the apodosis is a verbal sentence, preceded by one of
the affirmative particles , ‫شوف‬, and ‫قد‬, or one of the negative
particles ‫ ما‬, ‫تن‬, and ‫ ; تیس‬gs ‫إن يشرق فقد سرق أخ له من قبل‬
if he steals,a brother of his has stolen before him (; ‫إن تشتغفر لهم‬
‫ فلن يغفر الله ته‬iif thou askest forgiveness for them , God will not
forgive them .
$ 188] Conditional and Hypothetical Sentences. 347

REM . a. If the perfect in the apodosis conveys a promise or A

threat (§ 1 , e), the use of 5 is optional, as the verb really refers to
future time.

Rem. 6. With the negatives and Ý, the use of G is optional.

If í be inserted, ý requires the imperfect indicative after it
($ 17,> c, a ).
(e) When the perfect tense in the apodosis is intended to retain
thesignification oftheperfect (see$ 6,0c); as ‫إن كان قويهقد د من‬
Gócać w if his shirt is (has been) torn in front, she has spoken the B
truth.

[Rem. The apodosis of the temporal clause introduced by L ,

is, sometimes in old poetry, frequently in later prose, preceded by
U (Vol. i. $ 366, b, footnote ; an example, Vol . ii. $ 3, a), especially
if the protasis consists of many words, or is separated from the
apodosis by a circumstantial clause (comp. the Gloss. to Țabarī).]

188. The particle Ý (Heb. 15), which forms hypothetical clauses,

and the particle ! (Heb.Dx), differ from one another in this, that C
the latter simply indicates a condition, whilst the former implies that
what is supposed either does not take place or is not likely to do so ;
as
‫ إن تدعوهم لا يسمعوا دعاءكم ولو سمعوا ما استجابوا تم‬if we
call them , they will not hear your call; and even if they heard (it),
they would not answer you .
REM . a. Sj is sometimes used optatively (compare 5 o si,
w

autinama)), as ‫ ولو ترى إذ وقفوا على ربهم‬and if thou couldst see

( = couldst thou but see) when they are set before their Lord ! D
EW

Loves her og deres ü u gj had we but a return (to life), then

would we keep ourselves clear from them !] gjes ‫ولو يعلم الذين‬
‫ يتقون عن وجوههم النار‬ý‫ چين لا‬andif thosewho disbelieveknwer
(= did those who disbelieve but know ) the time when they shall not
(be able to) keep off the fire ( of hell) from their faces !* Especially
来
* [ According to el-Bèidāwī, as Trumpp p. 354 observes, j has
 348 PART THIRD . — Syntax. [$ 189
‫ره شوه‬
A after ‫ وڈ‬to love, wish , like , as ‫سنة‬
5
‫أحدهم تو يعمر ألف‬ : one

‫ طائفة‬35g
of them would fain be kept alive a thousand years ;; así ‫و‬
‫ من أهل الممتاپ تو يضلونگم‬a party among the people ofthe Book
would fain lead you astray.

Rem. 6. Before nominal clauses i en is (generally) used

instead of ‫ ;تو‬as ‫ أن الناس سمعوا‬j‫ن تو‬if‫ م‬the people had heard ;;
‫ لو أنك دعوتني إلى غير ذلك‬if thou hadst asked meto do something
B
else than this ;‫ تود تو أن بينها وبينه أما بعيدا‬it (thesoul)ooould
be glad if there were between itself and it (the evil it has done)
a wide space. [ Examples of the omission of i are ‫وتو زات‬
sobiejigu, and if a bracelet-wearing (lady)) had struck me ;;
‫ و أنتم تهیگون خزائن رحمة ربی‬i got possessed the treasures of
my Lord's mercy.]

C 189. Sometimes the two particles and ‫تو‬js are combined

.compare
) the Aram 28 , ‫ ;( كة‬as ‫ولعمري إن تو حاول أمير‬
‫ المؤمنين مكافأتك‬and by my life,if the Commander of the Believers
sought to recompense thee ; ‫و ستم توم ذيك وإما يلزم إن تو‬
‫ا‬ ‫ كان د‬we do not concede the necessity of this, for it is necessary
lis
only if itbethus (and thus(; ‫يو له الكاتب إن تلو كان في طق كتابه‬
because of which (longing) the writer would fain be in the inside of his
Down letter.

190. The particle J is prefixed to the apodosis of hypothetical

sentences (see Vol. i. $ 361 , c, y) like i to that of conditional sen
tences ; as ‫لهم عبيدي أعتقتهم‬ ‫ من توكان الناس‬all mankind were

here its hypothetical meaning, the apodosis ‫) تما استعجلوا‬verily

they would not ask for speed ) being omitted (s 4, rem. a). ]
$ 190] Conditional and Hypothetical Sentences. 349

my slaves, I would set them free *.. The employment of this particle A
is, however,unlike that of us, quite arbitrary ; and it is only in the
case of a long protasis that it is never omitted, in order thereby to
mark the apodosis more distinctly (compare the German so). The
same remark applies to ſ before a negative apodosis of this sort
introduced by ‫ما‬,as‫فلو فتشت على جميع الأقاليم لما وجدت لها شد‬
and if thou didst search all climes, thou wouldst never find any one
like her ; but it is never prefixed to , in order to avoid the B
cacophony produced by the repetition of the letter l.

[Sometimes J is preceded by us then, in that case, e.g. Ķor'ān

xvii. 102. ]
 PART FOURTH .
PROSODY *.

I. THE FORM OF ARABIC POETRY .

A. THE RHYME.

A 191. Poetry Keidis always takes, during the classical period,—

that is to say, from the earliest times down to the fall of the ' Umawi
dynasty (A.H. 132, A.D. 749—750 ), — the form of short poems, rarely

* On this subject, more especially as regards the oriental doctrine

of the metres, the student is advised to consult the following works :
‫ر‬

Samuelis Clerici gölgüís vogues is scientia metrica et rhythmica,

seu tractatus de prosodia Arabica ex auctoribus probatissimis eruta
B (Oxonii, 1661 ) ; Freytag, Darstellung der Arabischen Verskunst
( Bonn, 1830) ; De Sacy, Grammaire Arabe, t. ii. pp. 615-661 ;
and the more recent grammars, e.g., Lagus, Lärokurs i Arabiska
Språket (Helsingfors, 1869), pp. 354–376 ; Palmer, A Grammar
of the Arabic Language (London, 1874 ), pp. 291-376. Also :

C. v. A. Van Dyck , ‫كتاب محيط الدائرة في علم العروض والقافية‬

)Beirut, 1857(; ‫ نقطة الدائرة‬printed as an appendix to the ‫مصباح‬
) ‫ الطالب‬of Burus l-Bistani (Beirut, 1854),and to the ‫كتاب مجموع‬
wie ugin siyasi of Nâşif al-Yázigi( 2nd edit., Beirūt, 1869) ;
.

and Ibn Kèisan's ‫ي‬solső

‫القواف‬í ynal
‫ب تلقيب‬vls
‫ كتا‬, in my Opuscula Arabica
( Leyden, 1859). [A very able treatise on Arabic prosody was
published in the Journal Asiatique for 1877 by M. Stanislas Guyard,
$ 193] The Rhyme. 351

exceeding the length of a hundred and twenty verses. Such poems A

are called hasidas, ‫قصيدة‬, .collect‫قصيد‬, .plur ‫ ;قصائد‬whereas a
mere fragment, consisting of only a few verses, is termed delas,
.plur‫قطع‬, also ‫مقطعات‬. A poem ,thespecial object of which is the
eulogy of an individual or a tribe, is named ‫مديح‬, plur, ‫مدائح‬
3
a satire, Lone or
,
‫ أهجية‬.plur‫ ; أهاجئ‬an elegy, ‫مرثية را‬ or

, o
plur.Bizo; and a poem in the metre rağèz (see $ 204), ögo ;), B
.plur‫أراجيز‬. Verses set to musicare termed ‫أغنية‬,.plur ‫أغاني‬
REM. Rhyme without metre or measure je) does not con
stitute poetry, but merely rhymed prose, ew.

192. Each verse, (lit. tent, house), plur. Swi, consists of

‫( مصرع‬one half of a folding- door ),,
two hemistichs,termed Elias or Emas
.plur ‫ مصاريغ‬and ‫ مصارع‬or ‫طر‬.a
‫ ) ش‬half'), pl ‫ شطور‬and‫أشر‬. The C
first of these hemistichs is called stöví (the breast), and the second
‫) العجز‬the rump (.

193. The rhyme, áowi,plur. Gölgbi,labours under peculiar

restrictions, for, according to ancient rule, the two hemistichs of the
first verse of a ķaşīda must rhyme with one another, and the same
rhyme must be repeated at the end of every verse throughout the

Théorie nouvelle de la métrique Arabe. Compare, however, Prof. D

M. Hartmann's Essay, Metrum und Rhythmus (Giessen, 1896). In
1879 Dr A. Gies (Leipzig) published a dissertation on modern metres :
ärnt ügil. Ein Beitrag zur Kenntniss sieben neuerer arabischer
Versarten ; Prof. Hartmann, in the Actes du dixième Congrès inter
national des Orientalistes, session de Genève, 1894, III. pp. 45—67
(“ Ueber die Muwaššah genannte Art der Strophengedichte bei den
Arabern"), made some excellent remarks about Arabic metres, and
announced his intention of soon publishing an exhaustive treatise on
the subject.]
 352 Part FOURTH . — Prosody. [S 194
‫ و‬. ‫ش‬. ‫ر‬
A whole poem. The rhyme may be of two sorts, més and its
GW
It is called öes or fettered , when the verse ends with a consonant,
and abiks or loose, when it ends with a vowel.
194. The essential part of the rhyme is the letter called issui,
which remains the same throughout the entire poem, and, as it were,
binds the verses together, so as to form one whole ( si, to bind fast).
Hence a kașīda, of which the rawi is the letter l is called ómas
B ‫ زلامية‬r, ‫ ز;رائية‬t, ‫;تائية‬.and
so on
REM. The letters I , ‫و‬9 and is cannot be employed as rawī, when
they are (a) long vowels, e.g. ljé, ovls ; (b) inflexions of the
feminine singular, the dual,and the plural of verbs, e.g. s,
‫) أقتلوا وقتلوا ويقتلا‬unless they form a diphthong with a preceding
fėtha, e.g. Igog, soos!); (c) inflexions of the dual and plural of
nouns ; and (d) the final letters of the pronouns gó, s , and Ló.
The same remark applies to the tènwin, and to the letter of the
с second energetic form of verbs; as also to the letter o, when it is
not radical,as in ‫ رحمه‬for ‫رحمة‬, ‫ كتابه‬for ‫) كتابيه كتابه‬pausal
form for ‫كتابی‬ or
‫( كتابی‬. The 5o of the pronouns ó and Ló
may, however, be used as rawī, if preceded by a long vowel ; e.g.
‫عصاه‬, ‫عصاها‬
195. The loose ķāfiya (see § 193) terminates in what is called
áläí, the annex or appendix to the rawī, which may be either a
, the letter o, preceded by one of
D long vowel (i.e. -í , S-, or ‫و‬3–),or
the short vowels (á-, år,, ‫ه‬å-).(.
REM . a. We say “ a long vowel ,” because the final vowel of a
verse is regarded as being followed by the homogeneous letter of
prolongation, whether this latter be written or not. The vowel
letter I is invariably expressed, but ,‫ و‬and is
s are frequently omitted ,
.evenwhere they are always written in prose ; e.g ‫ويير‬, for ‫ویدی‬
and my hand ; znó, for géins or igeno, they made.
$ 196] The Rhyme. 353

REM. 6. If the letter o has a long vowel after it, as in the A

suffix pronouns Lá, s ó (=ss), the letter of prolongation,
ló o (= ( 50),
í
‫ دی‬is called gjest,that which goes beyond (the șila )); as in
1 , or s,
!,9
‫تتو = ) تعنيه‬, ‫ تعصبی = ) تغصه‬, ‫موكبها‬.
REM . C. Both sila and horūſ must accompany the rawī, without
the slightest change, throughout the whole poem.

196. The rawī may also be preceded by one or two letters,

which form , to a greater or less extent, a necessary portion of the B
käfiya (whether loose or fettered). These are named wood Bi, Maci ví,
and ‫الروف‬.
)»( ‫التأسيس‬ or the foundation, is the name given to an 1 of
prolongation, preceding the rawī, and separated from it by a consonant,
which is called the joins, stranger or guest. The former is invariable,
the latter variable ; but the vowel which separates the dahil from the
rawi ought, strictly speaking, to remain unchanged. For example, C
in a verse ending with the word job , the , is the rawī, the long
vowel , the ta'sīs, and the the dahil, whilst the vowel which
separates this last from the rawi is i ; but the next verse may
terminate with the word jig ví, where the dahil is 's, though the
other parts of the ķāfiya remain unchanged. The same rule holds
when the ķafiya is loose, instead of fettered , as in yol and julgui
(where the dahil is in the one case , and in the other ~), or ‫ باطله‬D
and ‫واحته‬
, the technical name given to
(6) The 3 ,, or what rides behind,is
one of the letters of prolongation !, is or 9, when it immediately
precedes the ral: as in thewords ‫جناحان‬, ‫الشلام هاله‬, ‫رجامها‬,
‫ب وقر‬most.
‫ح‬e‫ي‬lő, ‫ طرو‬The long vowel ā remains invariable,but the poet may
use i and ù indifferently ; eius is regarded as rhyming with
‫ مشيب‬with ‫ طوب‬, ‫ شوقه‬with ‫بريقه‬
W. II . 45
 354 PART FOURTH . — Prosody. [$ 197
А Rem. a. Strictly speaking, the rawi and the ta'sīs should form
parts of the same word, but exceptions are allowed in the cases of
the separate pronoun us, and of a pronominal suffix preceded by a
as ‫لا‬, ‫ ) پلیيا‬for ‫ولی‬or ‫(لی‬.
preposition ,sus
Rem. b. When the kāfiya is unaccompanied by either a ta'sis or
a ridf, it is said to be öss to, naked or bare ; otherwise, it is either
‫ موسسة‬or ‫مردفة‬.
B 197. The vowels which accompany the ķāfiya are also designated
by peculiar names.
(a) The mèýrā, simi, is the vowel which follows the rawi
in the loose kafiya ; e.g. a in ‫) سارا‬for ‫(سار‬, a in ‫بعض‬, a in ‫توا‬ or

Lulbi. It is, strictly speaking, invariable.

(6) The nèfäd ,juží, is the vowel between the letter o, as sila,
and the horūſ (see $ 195, rem. b) ; e.g. fètħa in Sogó, kèsra in
‫)تعصبی‬, and damma in atter (= site ). It is, of course,
) ‫ =( تغصه‬lsmae
Cancés
invariable.

(e) The taugih, ogsí,is the vowel which immediately precedes

‫و‬

therauzin a ‫قافية مجردة‬,,e.g ,fetha in ‫) جبر‬for ‫(قجبر‬, and kesra in

‫) أفر‬for ‫ ;(أفژ‬or separates it from the dalal in a ‫) قافية مؤسسة‬see
$ 196, rem .b), e.g.kesra in ‫) تامر‬for ‫ (تامر‬or ‫ والواتر‬The latter is ,
however, more frequently distinguished by the special name of cheyi.
D The 'iśbā ' ought, strictly speaking, to be invariable ; whereas, in the
taugih,the vowels damma and kèsra may be interchanged, as in joi,
for 3i, and mor, for ( compare the case of , and s as ridf,
$ 196, b).
Rem. The taugih is absolutely necessary in a fettered ķāfiya,
unlessitbe ‫ذ)مرردفه‬as‫ ;(اللیل قریح مالطعامعر ق‬but it isnot necessary in
a loose ķāfiya, as .
§ 198] The Rhyme . 355

.
((d ) The rass, wwwr
wo , is the vowel which accompanies the letter A
preceding the ta'sīs (see $ 196 , a). It can,, of course , be none but
fetha.

(e) The ḥadw, si jí,is the vowel which accompanies the letter
>

preceding the ridf (see § 196 , b). It is either fètha, kèsra or damma,
according as the ridf is !, s or 9 ; but the vowel fètha before , ors
( , 's-) is also included under this name.

198. The last two quiescent (sw) letters of a verse form, B

according to the preceding sections, the limits between which is
comprised the rhyme. Hence the Arab grammarians divide the
rhyme into five kinds, according to the number of moving (3)
.letters
which comebetween these two*; vit ‫ مترادف‬,‫متواتر‬, ‫مدارك‬,
‫متراكب‬, and ‫ماوس‬
(a) The Islands is where there is no moving letter between the
two quiescents, -in other words, a fettered ķāfiya, in which the rawi C
is preceded by a ridf; as ‫جناحان‬, ‫ لونين الليل وقريح حول‬It is
of comparatively rare occurrence.
(6) The julgão is where one moving letter intervenes between
the quiescents ; as ‫ ظلمی = ) ظلم‬, ‫(سحرو = ) سحر‬, ‫شيبانا‬, ‫جميل‬
)= ‫(جمیتو‬, ‫ظنونی‬
(c) The isláíó is where there are two moving letters between D
* The reader should bear in mind that the grammarians designate
the vowels by the term ‫حركاث‬.motions
, (sing ‫ ;( حركة‬whence a
consonant, which is followed by a vowel, is said to be usió or in
motion, and one that has no following vowel, to be istú, at rest,
inert or quiescent. Hence too the gèzm is often called č. See
Vol. i. $ 4, rem. b, and $ 9, with rem . a.
 356 PART FOURTH .—Prosody. ($ 199

A the two quiescents ; as ‫(آلباستو =) الممباس‬, ‫يزورها‬,‫(هیی =) هیتل ر‬.

‫قد ظكم‬, ‫الملتهب‬
(d) Thesis is where there are three moving letters between
‫قد حسدو (وضی = ) على وضيم ولا فرقا‬
the quiescents ; as

(@) The wykcó is where there are no less than four moving
‫قد‬
letters between the two quiescents, as in the half -verse cimost us
Bambus óníníGod has healed the (true) religion,and it has become whole.
This sort of rhyme is of rare occurrence.

199. A violation of any of the rules laid down in SS 194—197 is

regarded as a fault ( ms). Of these faults the grammarians reckon
.five
, viz ‫ السناد‬, ‫لإكفاء والإقواء‬,‫الإيطاء ا‬, and ‫ التضمين‬or ‫الميم‬
с (a) The sinād, shimoli, consists in a certain change of the vowels
>

called ‫الإشباع الوجيه‬, and ‫) الحذو‬a) In the tangih ,kesra and

damma may freely interchange, but the use of fetha to rhyme with
either is a sinād (see $ 197 , c). 'Imru’u l’ķais, for example, commits
>

this fault in rhyming; (for 5) with ; andM. (B) In the'izbāʻ,the

same faultis exemplified by rhyuning ‫ جانب‬with ‫ يتجائب‬or ‫فالقوارع‬
with sluší. (y) In the ḥadw ,i may be interchanged with ū (see
D $ 196, b), and ai with au (e.g. Logu may rhyme with y) ;; but to
rhyme ‫ خموشا‬with ‫ عيشا‬or learning is a sinäd. In the case of the
tauſīh and 'izbā ', this fault is but a trifling one, and not seldom
committed even by the best poets.

REM. The name of Shami is also applied to cases in which a

word, having a ridf or ta'sīs before the rawī, is rhymed with one
which has not ; e.g.Gogé and mai, samas and soundcar soling
and ‫العالم‬.
$ 199] The Rhyme. 357

(6) The 'ikwā, ilgiyi, is the name given to a change of the A

‫ق‬ ‫ر‬ ‫ر‬

vowel‫ور‬called
‫لمجرى ن‬.s ‫ ) ا‬$ 197, ee a); e.g ‫ مود‬and ‫الأسود‬, or
and 226. Though this fault is considered a serious one, the older
poets not unfrequently allow themselves the interchange of kèsra and
damma (compare $ 196, b, and $ 197 , c)* If, however, the rawī is
followed by the letter o as sila ( 195) , any alteration of the mègrā
is exceedingly rare;; to rhyme ‫ دوئها‬with ‫ا‬alb,
‫ ونه‬, or ‫ انتقامه‬with ‫أسامه‬,
is condemned by all the native critics. B

(c) The 'ikfā, tásýí, is the substitution of some cognate letter

for the rawī; as when one rhymes Muí with beti and , or
‫ غ‬with cés,
to ‫ ع‬, or ‫ ؤطا‬with ‫العندا‬. This is a very grave fault,and
carefully avoided by all good poetst.
Rem . Many authorities call this change izbyi, and apply the
term zás jí to the alteration of the mèýrā (see b).
(a) The ’ītā, lúa yi,is therepetition of the same word in rhyme c
in the course of a kaşīda. However, not to impose too great a
restriction on the poet, this repetition is held to be allowable, provided
there be some slight shade of difference in meaning, even if it be only
to the extent of the word having the article in the one place and not
in the other. Many authorities, too, permit the repetition in the
same sense, provided at least seven verses intervene.
(e) Each verse of a poem ought to be independent in construction
and sense (Sis). That two or more verses should be so connected D

*
[The reason is given in the Agānī ix. 164. The final vowel was
indistinctly enunciated in simple recital, but prolonged in singing.
When en-Nābiġa came to Yatrib and heard his own verses sung, he
perceived his fault at once and corrected it in many places. D. G. ]
† ( The most common is the interchanging of mim and nūn, as
) i 89(, ‫ شوئها‬and ‫) يستديمها‬Lisani. 137seg.(.
‫ مبین‬and ‫ القضيم‬.Faik
D. G.]
 1

358 PART FOURTH . - Prosody. [S 200

A with one another, is regarded as a fault, and technically named
tadman , ‫الضمين‬, or tètmim, osi. It is not, however, a serious
defect, unless the one verse be wholly destitute of meaning, if
separated from the other ; as when en -Nabiga says
‫رز‬
‫أصحاب يوم عكاظ إلى‬ ‫وهم‬ ‫هم وردوا الياه على تويم‬
They water their herds at the wells in spite of Temim , and they are
the victors on the day of ' Okāz ; verily I—which is unintelligible,
B because the habar of ☺ is unknown, till we hear or read the
next verse :

‫أثبتهم بودالصدر منی‬ ‫شهدت تهم مواطن صالحات‬

have seen them fight many a good fight, ( for which) I reward them
with my heart's whole love.

B. THE METRES.

с 200. Every verse in Arabic poetry consists of a certain number

of feet, called individually bris, plur. locks, but as constituent
parts of a verse, jos (a part), plur. lii. A certain collocation of
feet constitutes a metre, je (a sea ), plur. jur. To scan a verse is
expressed by theword ‫طع‬.to
‫ ) ق‬cut intopieces ),infin ‫تقطيع‬ [ The
last foot of the first hemistich is called vegys, that of the second
‫ضرب‬.
D ( Rem. The constituent parts of a foot are called ( cord )
consisting of two letters, either is
vivió w a movent letter followed
‫ سبب ثقی‬two movent letters, and is ( peg)
by a quiescent letter,, or ‫ل‬just
consisting of three letters,either
, gás iſ ‫ وتد‬two movent letters
followed by a quiescent letter, or ‫ وتد مفروق‬one movent, then one
quiescent, then one movent letter. Three successive short vowels
‫متفا‬
followed by a quiescent letter, are called yugto valamint e.g. b .
 ‫] ‪$ 201‬‬ ‫‪The Metres.‬‬ ‫‪359‬‬

‫‪in iclás, two parts each consisting of a movent letter and a‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬

‫‪ .e.g.‬سببان مفروقان ‪quiescent letter‬‬

‫‪ The‬مستفعلن ‪ in‬ممتف ‪..‬‬
‫[‪ )Gr,wompa(.‬مقطع ‪ is‬و ‪ and‬سبب ‪common namefor‬‬
‫‪201. The metres are ordinarily reckoned to be sixteen in number,‬‬
‫‪and are exemplified in the following composition , made up partly of‬‬
‫‪verses, either taken from the poets or written for the occasion, and‬‬
‫‪partly of sentences from the Ķor'ān.‬‬

‫أبحر الشعر وهى ستة عشر بحرا‬ ‫‪B‬‬

‫*‬
‫البحر الأول الطويل‬
‫طويل مدى الهجران من كنت أهواه أذاب فؤادی والتبر أفناه‬
‫فعولن مفاعیلن فعولن مفاعين ولا تقتلوا النفس التي حرم الله ‪:‬‬
‫*‬
‫البحر الثاني المديد‬
‫یا تبر أنشروا بی ځليبا‬ ‫‪ C‬فاعلاتن فاعلن فاعلاتن‬
‫*‬
‫البحر الثالث البسيط‬
‫يبط في أأمیى أأبنیي أذاهم خوفا من الجور تا أن أعام‬
‫فأصبحوا لا يرى إلا مساكهم‬ ‫مستفعلن فاعلن مستفعلن فعلن‬
‫البر الرابع الكامل ‪.‬‬
‫مجتبی خير الورى تسليما‬ ‫‪ D‬یا کام تم وقل تعظيما‬
‫صلوا عليه وسموا تشييها ‪::‬‬ ‫متفاعلن مفاعلن مفاعلن‬
‫البحر الخامس الوافر ‪+‬‬
‫على غير الأعای والكود‬ ‫وافر يد شغری فی مزید‬
‫ألا تغدا تغار قوم فود می‬ ‫مفاعلن مفاعلن فعوئن‬
 ‫‪360‬‬ ‫‪PART FoURTH.Prosody .‬‬ ‫‪[s 201‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫البحر الابن الهزج *‬
‫عن الأوطان باانس‬ ‫مترجم يا منى النفس‬
‫أن تم تغن بالأمس‬ ‫مفاعیلن مفاعیلن‬
‫البحر الشابة الرز ‪.‬‬
‫أجزاءه بين الورى لا تنتر‬ ‫الرجز الموروث إذ تجڑوا‬
‫‪B‬‬ ‫يا أيها الذين آمنوا اصبروا ‪:‬‬ ‫مستفعلن مستفعلن مستفعلن‬
‫*‬ ‫البحر الامن الرمل‬
‫لذة تختفي والمجتلی‬ ‫مل أكرم به من میر‬
‫والذي أطع أن يغفر بی ‪:‬‬ ‫فاعلاتن فاعلاتن فاعلن‬
‫البحر آثاغ الشريع ‪+‬‬
‫*‬

‫‪C‬‬
‫كبير على سمعی به یا ډیم‬ ‫تريغ يخرق شداه الحكيم‬
‫ذلك تقدير العزيز العليم‬ ‫مستفعلن مستفعلن فاعلن‬
‫البحر العاشر المنسرح *‬
‫من تراهم عين التي تتوا‬ ‫مسرح العراقه الأول‬ ‫‪------‬‬

‫با تم شيئا ما عملوا ‪:‬‬ ‫مستفعلن فاعلا مستفعلن‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪D‬‬ ‫*‬
‫البحر الحادي عشر الخفيف‬
‫ت في مسمعي فكان طريفا‬ ‫ځ تها أردت أشدو الخفيفا‬
‫إن كيد الشيطان كان ضعيفا‬ ‫فاعلاتن مستفعلن فاعلاتن‬
‫البحر الثاني عشر المضارم ‪-‬‬
‫أيا محى البلاد‬ ‫مفاعلن فاعلاتن‬
$ 203] The Metres. 361

‫مہ‬
‫البحر الثالث عشر المقتضب‬ A

‫فن معشر الأدبا‬ ‫اقتضبه چين صبا‬

:: ‫ماله وما كسبا‬ ‫فاعلات مفتعلن‬
‫البحر الرابع عشر الميت‬
‫في القلب منی عشقا‬
‫ه‬
‫مجتث شعرى ألقي‬
‫والله خير وأبقى‬ ‫ ممتنعتن فاعلاتن‬B
* ‫البحر الخامس عشر المتدارك‬
: ‫جاءنا عامر سالما غانما‬ ‫فاعلن فاعلن فاعلن فاعلن‬
*
‫البحر السادس عشر المتقارب‬
‫فيا أيها الناس أثوا الصلاة‬ ‫تقارب موعد جمع العاه‬
‫أقيموا الصلوة واثوا الركوة‬ ‫فعولن فعولن فعولن فعول‬
202. Instead, however, of following the system and arrangement C
here laid down*, we prefer to adopt that of Ewaldt, and to treat of
the metres in the following order : .1 ‫الرجز‬, .2 ‫الشريع‬, .3 ‫الكامل‬,
.4 ‫الوافر‬, .5 ‫الهرج‬, .6 ‫ المتقارب‬.7 ‫الطويل‬, .8 ‫المضارع‬, .9 ‫المتدارك‬
.10 ‫البسيط‬, .11 ‫المسرح‬, .12 ‫المقتضب‬, .13 ‫الرمل‬, .14 ‫المديد‬
.15 ‫الخفي‬, and .16 ‫المجتث‬. Among these,if we leave the rap
out of account, the favourites with the old poets are the țawal, kūmil,
D
wāfir, bèsiť, mutèķārib, and sarī.

203. The iambic metres are four in number, namely, the ragès ,
sari', kāmil, and wāfir.

* See the note on p. 350.

† See his work entitled De Metris Carminum Arabicorum Libri
Duo ( Braunschweig, 1825), and the second volume of his Grammatica
Critica Lingue Arabicce, pp. 323-343.
W. II . 46
 362 PART FOURTH. — Prosody. [$ 204

A 204. The most common varieties of the rağèz (jají the trem
bling) are the dimeter and the trimeter, both of which may be
catalectic. The trimeter is the more usual. The basis is u - u
(diiamb), which may be varied in one or two places by the substitution
of or -uu-, and more rarely vuu-, The older poets
almost always use this metre as islands, that is to say, each hemistich
(a) forms, as it were, an independent verse and rhymes with the
preceding one. The more modern, on the contrary, not unfrequently
B follow the rule of the other metres in rhyming only the second
hemistich of each verse .
Trimeter acatalectic --u - lo - u - lo
l -v -

Yuu - uu - 1 uu
catalectic - v - To cu
- - I ---
Yuu -luu - ---
Dimeter acatalectic J - U - 10
Yuu - 1 uu
catalectic --u----
21)1

с Yuu - 1 ---

205. The sarī ( pics the swift) admits in its first and second
feet the same variations as the ragèz. Its normal form is
-- 1- 1 o- lo - u - l
Yuu -luu - l luu -
but is frequently substituted for at the end of the second
hemistich. The use of final vu- in either hemistich , but more
especially in the second, is very rare.. A few later poets have taken
the liberty of adding a syllable to the second hemistich, so that the
last foot of the verse becomes -V

206. The kūmil ( jolõi the perfect) is either dimeter or trimeter.

The normal form of the trimeter is
- 1 lu ll we -w - u - -u
but we frequently find it catalectic
- iw | Il w - u - w - u - iw
The omission of another syllable, so as to convert the last foot of the
$ 210] The Metres. 363

verse into is more rare, though sometimes even both hemistichs A

are shortened in this way.
W - u-- 1 - | ‫ بيد‬- - || ‫ به‬-u - w -u - 1
luua 11 1 Iw
The normal form of the dimeter is
w - volw - u- || 14
It is sometimes used as catalectic (w-- for w - v- in the last foot
of the second hemistich), but far more usually the verse is lengthened
by the addition of aa syllable B

-w - u- || cu - lucu - l
9

in which case it is said to be jo having a train.

207. The basis of the wāfir ( ilgi the exuberant) is the same as
that of the kámil, but with the order of the component parts reversed,
U - W- . It is either trimeter or dimeter, but the latter is com
paratively rare . The trimeter is always shortened by one syllable in
each hemistich , so as to become С
u - wal U - W - lu-- || U - W - lu - W - l u-
The dimeter has the form
U - W - lucu - lu - w- |
for the last foot of which there may be substituted u --- ; but these
two forms are not used indiscriminately in the same poem.

208. Of antispastic metres there is only one, namely the hazèſ

la vui the trilling), which consists in a single repetition of v-
(antispast), varied by u --- It may be either catalectic or acata- D
lectic.
Acatalectic u --ou--- || U
Catalectic oll v --- |

209. The amphibrachic metres are three in number, mutèķārib ,

ţawil, and mudāri.

210. The basis of the mutèķūrib ( lámi the tripping, lit.

taking short steps) is u - u ( amphibrachys), for which may be substi
 364 PART FOURTH . — Prosody. (S 211
A tuted u-
-- . The latter is indeed almost invariably employed as
the penultimate foot of the hemistich. One great peculiarity of
this metre is, that the first hemistich may be either acatalectic or
catalectic, independently of the second. If, however, the first be
acatalectic and the second catalectic, then the last syllable of the
first half -verse must be short, and must coincide with the end of a
word. Of this metre no form but the tetrameter is in common use.
Acatalectic
B
- |--0-- | -01- |-- |-- |--
Catalectic

--- | --- | --- | -- ||-- | - | --- | --

A rarer forin reduces the last foot of the second hemistich to a single
long syllable, in which case the preceding foot must be v-- .

-- | -||| - | - | - | - | -- |
С 211. The tawil (Jgwi the long) is one of the finest, as well as
the most common, of the Arabic metres. It is formed by the single
repetition of uV -- u and u - u- , for the first of which may be substi
tuted - , and for the second v --- , The latter is restricted to
the first place in each half -verse, where it is, however, far more usual
than v - u The verse may be either acatalectic or catalectic. If
the latter, then the last syllable of the penultimate foot should be
short,
Acatalectic
D u - olu - y - lu - olu - u- | v - olv - y - lu - olu - u
Catalectic
v - olv - E - lu -olu - u- llu - olu - e - Iu - ulu-
In the acatalectic verse, the last foot is also changed into --- .
v - olv - y - lu - olu - u- llu -olu - y - lu - olu ---

212. The muļāri (Ezkámvi the similar*) is one of the rarest

* Namely, to the muģtett (§ 222), as may be seen by adopting
another mode of scansion, u - o - u-- || -Oil
§ 215] The Metres. 365

metres, and not employed by any early poet. Each half--verse consists A
of u - u and u - u- , with a single syllable appended, and the two
generally rhyme with each other, as in the ragèz. For vou
u - u may be
substituted -- , and for u--u- , -U- ; but both changes must
not take place together. Consequently the entire verse is
u - ole - u - 1 - ll 0-0 Y -u -1 -

213. The anapæstic metres are likewise four in number, namely,

the mutèdārik, bèsīt, munsariḥ, and muktadab.

214. The mutedārik (geluiddi the continuous) is one of the rarer B

and later metres * . The basis is (anapæst), which is convertible
into -V- or It is generally either trimeter or tetrameter, the
former having occasionally
‫ر‬
an extra syllable in the second hemistich,
so as to make it jó (see $ 206).
Trimeter w - w - lüll w = w- |
Tetrameter ürlü ürü = || @ = = = @=
215. The bèsīt (Saman is the outspread) is a favourite metre with C
u and uu- , which may
the older poets. Its base consists of u --u-
be repeated so as to yield either a trimeter or a tetrameter verse.
In either case, u - u- may be converted into -u- , and occasionally
into or even vuur , though these changes are very rare
indeed in the second place. may be changed in the first place
into -u ) but either remains unaltered in the second , or becomes

Hence arise the following forms of the tetrameter.

Jua | - | --|--TEJE| --/|* --- *

The trimeter may be either acatalectic or catalectic, more usually the D
latter. If the loss of a syllable be extended , as is commonly the case ,
to both hemistichs, the last foot in each is u-
DI

Acatalectic
| - | ---- | --10
* [In the Muhit the name of this metre is pronounced mulèdārak
i.e. the supplied, so called because it was ignored by el- Halil and
afterwards supplied by el-Ahfaś. ]
 366 PART FOURTH . — Prosody. [$ 216

o
-
DOI
Catalectic
A
|--10 - v - 10

)
C

)
or jus --| --JET --- | --
216. The munsarihlamadi the flowing) has the same base as
the bèsīt, but the first wu- is reduced to a single long syllable. It
scarcely occurs in any form but the tetrameter.
B
= 1-1 ---- |----------
Rem. This verse may also be scanned as follows.
-o = -

EJUS | ---- |-vu- JUST-0--| *

217. The muştağab ( train the lopped or curtailed ) is an
exceedingly rare metre, the normal form of which appears to be
Yu - lu - luu- || Yu -1
- lu - luu
C It is said that v- may be transferred to the first place, thus giving
the form
v - l - u - l vuell u - l - u - luu
V

REM . This verse may also be scanned as follows.

yo - ul - uy || Co - ul

218. The ionic metres are also four in number, namely, the
ramel, medīd, hafif, and muģtett.

D 219. The ramèl (Jogji the running) has for its base vu-
( ionicus a minore ). It may be either dimeter or trimeter. The
trimeter is almost invariably catalectic in the first hemistich, and
generally so in the second ; the dimeter very commonly in the second.
For may be substituted -u- and, though very rarely ,
-u - u, or vucu , in which case the next foot must begin with a
>

long syllable.
Dimeter

-Your-lou- lovat
§ 221] The Metres. 367

Trimeter acatalectic A

ou -- lou -- lou-- || ou --Jou -- 1

Trimeter catalectic
-

REM . a.
| ou -- lous 1 --- Tour -Hous
lo
The tetrameter catalectic is a late innovation, in
which has entirely usurped the place of uur- ,
-u -- / -u ---Il --u -- |l -0-
u-- -u- || -u
- ---ii - u ---u -- -u
REM
Rem .. 6. In this metre the later poets occasionally rhyme the
single hemistichs, as in the rağèz. B

220. The mèdid asusi the extended) has for its base two
-- , separated by Either wu--, but more especially
>

the second, may be converted into -u-- ; the uue v- into

GU -- lou - lou -- ll|| ou -- lou - lou-
The second hemistich is sometimes catalectic, whilst the first remains
complete ; but usually both are catalectic, in which case the last foot
is almost invariably uu-- , passing at the end of the verse into -- .
>
-

с
-Jou - love -you - you - you
ou - ou - luu- Il cu -- ou - w
w
REM . a. A very rare variety shortens the first hemistich and
leaves the second complete.
-1 vu
- Il cu-- Ju - l - U-
-1
Rem. b. A still rarer species consists in a repetition of the
entire base, each hemistich rhyming, as in the ragèz. The last
foot is usually
- I Ju - lou -- lou- ||- -1 -13Ju -- lou D

221. The hafif ( iási the light or nimble) is one of the more
usual metres. Its base is uue- and u - u- , The former may be
varied by and more rarely by -u - vor vuru ; the latter
by -u- , and occasionally by --Vuor The second
hemistich is sometimes catalectic, in which case the last foot is by
preference
ou
---- | ------
 368 PART FOURTH . — Prosody. [$ 222
A A far more usual form , however, is the trimeter, which is generally
acatalectic, though we now and then find it defective in both hemi
stichs, or in the second only. In the acatalectic verse, --- may be
substituted for the last > and in the catalectic --
for uur .
Acatalectic au- -1 ll ou -1 -1
Catalectic
|--v -love 10---1
222. The muģtett (I er the docked or amputated )) has the
B same base as the hafif, but with the order of the component parts
reversed, namely u - u - luu-- . The changes which the feet may
respectively undergo, are also the same as in the hafif. It is used
only as dimeter acatalectic.
o - u - lou-- | o--u---
-
[REM. The three metres mudāris (§ 212), muștadab ( 217) and
mugtett (S 222) are not employed by the ancient poets. It is not
improbable that they were invented by al-Halil (Guyard, pp. 168,
c 272 seq.]

II . THE FORMS OF WORDS IN PAUSE

AND IN RHYME.

223. We must next treat of the forms which the final syllables
of words assume at the end of a verse ; and as these are often identical
with those which they take at the end of a sentence in ordinary prose,
D or of a clause in rhymed prose )‫ الشجع‬or ‫(الشجيع‬,weshallhandle
the whole subject briefly in the following sections.

224. As a general rule, all final short vowels, both of the noun
and verb, are dropped in prose ; e.g. ‫د‬Wojsła
‫زي‬ , instead of j ; só
‫ بریبده‬, instead of ‫ضربت الرجل زبرید‬, for ‫رأيته ف;ي الرجل‬, for ‫;; رأيته‬
a jó, for .
ay. But in poetry it constantly happens that the vowel
is retained as long, the tènwin of the noun disappearing at the same
.time
; eg ‫ وفيهم شبت النار‬whilst fire is kindled among them ; ‫في‬
$ 226] The Forms of Words in Pause and in Rhyme. 369

‫ زمن محل‬in a time of sterility,for ‫محلي‬. In this case, the final A

vowel fetha is invariably accompanied by an elif ; e.g , ‫قراع قوم‬
‫ يحسنون الضربا‬as a people strike, techo can strike avell, for ‫; الرب‬
‫ إيه يعنونا‬him they mean , for ‫يعون‬.
Rem. It is even allowable to double the final consonant after
‫هه‬
the elision of the vowel, as ‫الجمل‬, for ‫أحمر (الجم ) الجمل‬, for
. ‫ه‬
‫;)(أحمر ) أحم‬
; provided always that the penult letter has a vowel,, B
and that the final letter is neither dlif with hèmza (as thící) nor

elif maksira )‫العصا‬, ‫(الفتى‬.

.225 The accusative termination ‫ ا‬generally becomes , both
in prose and poetry, though it occasionally disappears, like the short
,as ‫ أصبدحن كئيب‬he was deeply grieved,for ‫) كئيبا‬.i.e ‫(كئيبا‬. The
termination or l in the Energetic of verbs, and in the particle
‫ إذن‬or ‫إذا‬, is also changed into a ; but ‫ ن‬in the plural of the C
Energetic becomes üs-.
REM. The Beni Temim and Kais] use ‫ تن‬for ‫ راا‬as ‫أقتی‬
‫ اللوم عاؤل والعتابن‬sparereproach and blame, 0 fault.finder ‫عادل‬
for ‫يا عاذلة‬, and ‫ والعتاب‬for ‫والعتابا‬.
226. 'The feminine terminations ő-, 6-, and ő-, become ó-,
more rarely 3. The same remark naturally applies to é and 6 , D
.whether
masculine or feminine ; e.g ‫ حمزه‬, for ‫) حمزة‬namne of a man (.
In rhyme, the ő may also be changed into , and the final vowel
.retained
as long ; e.g ‫ وأهتك بالتوی قائحلت‬whilst thy family areat
#l- Liwā and al-Hilla, for at jű ; Blisi jući; and a liberator of
prisoners, for ‫العناة‬.
REM . ( .. In this pausal on the ois sounded, ah, wherein it
W, 11 , 47
 370 PART FOURTH . — Prosody. [$ 227
A
differs from the vulgar ending o , a, and the Hebrew 7 , ā (see
Vol. i. p. 7, note, and $ 294, rem . b). This is proved by the fact of
its rhyming with a radical o, and with the pronominal forms
‫ ) ديه‬for ‫ (پی سی‬and ‫) ده‬for ); as ‫ العدل العذله‬, ‫إبله) بله‬,
and ‫له) ووله‬.Diwan
‫( وو‬, of el-Mutenebbi', p ۳۹۳; ‫ أمامه أمامه‬,
‫(السلام ) السلامه‬, and ‫(دعامة) عامه‬.a 452 ; ‫أقواليه‬
, -Hamasta, pl
) ‫أقوالی‬, ‫ أقوالی‬, ‫(قال ) قاليه‬, and ‫(آلبالية) الباليه‬,.ibid
. p .۷۹۷
B Rem. 6. The plural terminations & usually become in pause
‫ ;ا اثه‬, but sometimes (particularly , it is said ,in the dialect of Taiyi'(
as
‫البناه‬, ‫الأخواه‬, for ‫البنات‬, ‫الأخوات‬. Similarly, ‫میها‬
‫ (أيها‬ar, or aunty, emote is‫ و‬- ,becomesin pause ‫أيهات هيهات‬
or ‫ ;(أيهاه) ميهاه‬and ‫تابوث‬, a boa,a cofin , ‫ تابوت‬or ‫تابوه‬
C 227. Nouns ending in s
‫ ی‬or ‫ ځا‬simply drop the tènwin ; e.g.
‫ ى‬becomes ‫فتى‬ ‫ا‬ ‫ت‬ ‫ز‬‫ا‬ ‫ع‬, ‫عصا‬. Those ending in - drop the
tènwin, and either resume the third radical or not, at pleasure ;
‫قاضاض‬,‫ب‬,for example ,may become either ‫ قاض‬or ‫ بقاض قاضی‬either
Or
‫) جوار ربقاضی‬plur,of ‫ » جارية‬girl) either ‫ جوار‬or ‫جواری‬
‫) معاني‬plur, of ‫معنی‬meaning) either ‫ معان‬or ‫معانی‬. The accusative
merely loses the tenwin , e.g ‫) قاضيا‬and not ‫ (قاضی‬for ‫; قاضيا‬
.singular
D the accusative of the broken plural commonly drops only the final
vowel in prose, but may retain it as long in poetry, e.g. stigs for
‫) موالی‬accus. of ‫ مولی‬a client), in rhyme also ‫مواليا‬.
REM . a. If a word ending in .
has lost another radical besides
the final ‫ و‬or ‫دی‬ the only pausal form admissible in the nominative
and genitive is that which ends in the long vowel ; e.g. jo,
participle active IV. of sis, to see, can become only szó, never
$ 228] The Forms of Words in Pause and in Rhyme. 371

Rem. 6. Words of the form les, in which the third radical is A

i, as súői fodder, forage, usually let the i become quiescent in all
three cases, síőí ; but sometimes the final vowel acts upon the i
so as to change it in the nominative into ‫العتو رو‬, and in the
genitive into ‫الگلی ی‬.
228. The long vowels , S-, S-, and s-, usually remain
unchanged ; as ‫بتی وا قتلا‬ ‫يرمی‬, ‫يغزو‬. In nounsderived from B
radicals third , or us, the omission of final s– is allowable in the
nominative and genitive,as ‫القاض‬, ‫الاد‬, ‫المتعال‬, for ‫القاضي‬, ‫النادى‬
‫ ; المتعالی‬theaccusative,however,admits only the form ‫القای‬,.etc,
and the vocative is ‫یا قاضی‬.
REM. a. The interrogative pronoun Ló, when governed in the
genitive by another word, is frequently shortened into s (see Vol. i.
$ 351, ren .). In pause, if governed by a noun, it takes the ‫ های‬C
‫) الوقف‬see S 230), as ‫اقتضاء مه‬, ‫ل مه‬-but
‫ ; مث‬if governed by a pre
position , it may also drop its final vowel, as ,
‫عمه‬, ‫ بهه‬or ‫ لمه وبم‬or
‫ حتا مه لم‬or ‫ختام‬
Rem. b. The genitive and accusative suffixes of the first
personal pronoun , ‫ سی‬and ‫ نی‬have several pausal forms,, namely,,
in prose ‫ = ی‬or ‫يه‬ ‫ ني‬or ‫) نيه‬see s 230), and in poetry also ‫ يا‬,
‫ ;نیا‬besides which , the long vowel may be altogether omitted , as D
‫أانتكروننی‬,,‫مبانیی‬. ‫أر‬, ‫أهائن‬, ‫أثرن‬, ‫بال‬, for ‫أغرمنی قانونی‬, ‫هائنی‬,‫أ‬
REM. C. In rhyme the long vowels ( s = and s are often

expressed merely by kesra and damma, as ‫ يير‬for ‫ صنع ويډی‬for

‫نغو‬ ‫حاشية‬is done for the purpose of preserving the
or ‫صنعوا‬. This
uniformity of the audio or fringe (i.e. the succession of rhyming
syllables) throughout a poem .
 372 PART FURTH.Prosody . [$ 229
A 229. When the penult letter of a word has no vowel , the vowel
of the final letter may be transferred to it in pause ; as ‫ر‬,
‫ه‬
‫النقر ب‬,
‫الدو‬, ‫الظبي‬, ‫ببر‬, ‫أضربه‬, ‫ضربه‬, ‫رحله‬, for ‫ القر ) النقر (بر) بنز‬,
‫ النو ) الداو‬, ‫الظبي ) الظبي‬, ‫ ببر) ببر‬, ‫أضربه‬, ‫ضربه‬, ‫جله‬. With
regard to the vowel fetha, however, the grammarians are not agreed ,
.some
allowing the transference in all cases , e.g ‫ البكر‬for ‫;(البكر ) البكر‬
others limiting it to the case in which the final consonant is elif with
B hemza,as ‫ الخبأ‬for ‫ الخبأ‬or ‫الخبء‬. This transference is technically
called ‫النقل‬
Rem. (.a. The j is forbidden when it would give rise to a
form which has no example in the language. For instance, there is
no substantive of the form les, and therefore we should not say in
pause ‫(العلم ) العلم‬. Some grammarians,nevertheless, allow this
form when the third radicalisdlif with henza,as‫(آلوو ) الرد؟‬,whilst
Cothers recommend the change of the damma into kèsra, pronouncing
‫می‬
‫ آلوده‬or ‫ البريئ‬instead of ‫ الرد‬Oror ‫الرددوو‬, or substitute ‫ و‬or ‫ ی‬for the
lemza and say ‫ الدو‬or ‫الوری‬.
]REM .b. According to theanalogy of ‫ أضربه‬for ‫أضربه‬, ‫أرمة‬
for ‫أرمه‬, we find also ‫ تم تلقمه‬for ‫ لم تقمها‬and even ‫ أخافه‬for
‫ أخافها‬and ‫ به‬for .Ni
‫) بها‬ , lde
Zur Grammatikke
, p 14(.[
D 230. Indeclinable words, ending in a vowel , take in their pausal
form a final , technically called the ‫هاء الوقف‬, or ‫هاء الشعت‬, the ha
of pause or of silence ; e.g.aas, , for cars ,
‫رتمه‬ The same
letter is added to verbal forms in which both the first and third

radicals have disappeared ; as ‫ قه‬for ‫) ق‬imperat. of ‫ وقی‬, ‫ تميفه‬for

‫ ) تم يف‬jussive of ‫ ;(وفی‬also ‫ ره‬for ,,and ‫ ته يره‬for ‫لم ير‬,.imperat
and jussive of sig (comp. Vol. i. $ 175, rem. a). It may also be
appended to those in which only the third radical is dropped ; as
$ 232] The Forms of Words in Pause and in Rhyme. 373

‫ إرمة‬for ‫) إرم‬imperat. of ‫ تم يغيره (رمی‬for ‫ ) تم يغز‬jassive of ‫(غا‬, A

om for vi (imperat. VIII. of lás) [comp. Vol. i. $ 167, b, a,
footnote]. We likewise find it added to é, the shorter form of the
interrogative pronoun tó (see $ 228,rem . a) ; and to 's- and 's, the
older forms of the genitive and accusative suffixes (S- and us; (see
‫ أكرمت‬for ‫ك‬si
$ 228, rem . b) ; more rarely to ý,) as ‫ه‬árosi ‫أكرم‬
REM . a . or to B
The ‫ هاء الوقف‬is never added either to nouns >

the perfect of verbs, or to adverbs ending in u (see Vol. i. $ 363),

with the single exception, it is said , of ‫ من عله‬for ‫من عل‬. The
Arabs do not say ‫يا رجله وقتله‬, ‫لا رجله‬, ‫ ومن بعده‬for ‫يا رجل قتل‬
etc.

Rem. b. The ordinary pausal forms of uſ and ģó are ÚT and gó,

but we also find | ( see Vol. i. $ 89, 1 , rem . b) and ögb. - ojgs and
‫ هناه‬are likewise used instead of the common man and Chinese C

231 . Double consonants, as a rule, are not sounded as such

in pause ;; ‫أفر‬, ‫قر‬, and ‫) أجر‬for ‫قر رأفژ‬, and ‫(أجر‬, rhymewith ‫يأمر‬
and Moo (for et and go. See, however, $ 224, rem.

III. POETIC LICENSES.

232. The Arab poets allow themselves a certain latitude, both as
to the forms of words and the construction of sentences. We shall D
here confine ourselves to the illustration of some of the principal
licenses which fall under the former of these two heads.- The poet

* [An exception is given in the Lisān xx. 379, 1. 4 from below .

‫ الح‬girl
If somebody says ‫سن‬and Louisło al-Hasan
dl came to me, another, as
tonished to hear it, will exclaim ögimají really now , dl-Hasan ? or if
gjené
‫سرو‬ suisto Amr came to me, ogjeći really now , Amr ? with
prolongation of the final vowel and with the pausal o. D. G.]
 374 PART FOURTH.— Prosody. [S 233

A may find himself obliged, by the exigencies of metre or rhyme

)‫ ضرورة الشعر‬poetical necessity),to make some slight change either in
the consonants of a word, or in its vowels.
233. Under the former of these divisions we include : (a) the
various affections of the letter 1 ; (6) irregularities in the use of the
tèśdid ; (c) the employment of ancient uncontracted forms instead of
the more modern contracted ones ; and ( d) the suppression of the
letter u in certain nominal and verbal forms.
B (a) Affections of the letter * Elif.
234. "Elif with hèmza (i) may be affected in several different
ways.
(a) It may be totally absorbed by a preceding vowel, like the
‫) ألف الوصل‬Vol.i.$ 19); eg ‫ ألا آبلیغ‬convey the neus, for ‫ألا أبيغ‬,
imperat. IV. of ‫ وابشر بتغ‬and rejoice, for ‫وأبشر‬, imperat. IV. of ‫; بشر‬
‫ مجير ام عامر‬he who gave shelter to 'Umm Amar (a name for the
C hyena), for ‫ هل ریت ; جير أتم‬hast thou seen ? for ‫رأيت‬: ‫دو الشنان‬
one acho hates, for ‫ لابی ;(الشنان) الشنان‬tomy end or fate, for
‫ وتسمع من تحت العجاج تها آرم و لما ابی لمبی‬and thout hearest
;

beneath the dust a sound produced by them , for ‫إن تنصونا ; أزمة‬
;

‫ يال مروان نقترب‬: ye do us justice, 0 family of Maraan ,we arill |

drate near(toyou),for ‫ في روسها ;(أل ) یا آل‬on their heads,for ‫; رؤوسها‬

D ‫ماتی‬myhurt, for ‫ماءتی‬, from ‫ساء‬.
Rem. By a double license, the verb ist, becomes first iſ and
then ‫ وراء‬.pass ‫] ړۍ‬Vol.i. 176, rem .6]; ‫ن‬
as ‫من را مثل معدان ب‬
‫يحيي‬whohasseen the like of Mardan ibn Yahya? ‫لا خلق أسم‬
‫ منك إلا عارف بك راء نفس لم يقل تك هاتها‬no human being is .

more generous than thou art, save one (who), knowing thee (well), has
seen thy soul (and)) has not said (to thee), Give it here ; ing is, lág
$ 234] Poetic Licenses. 375

‫ قبلی غریق مدامج‬and soas there (ever seen beforeme one dronoued AA
in tears ?

(6) When preceded by a vowelless consonant, the vowel of the

‫أ‬ may be transferred to that consonant, as in the case of so, when
followed by the article (Vol. i. $ 20, d ), så for six (Vol. i. $ 176),
>

and the like. Examples: ‫ تو آن‬: that,for ‫ من أجيك ; لو أن‬on the

account, for ‫ عن أجبيها من أجلك‬from her hills,for ‫;عن أجبيها‬
‫ من أن يلقينه‬from meeting him ,for ‫ إن آغز بیدا زمن أن‬: Imake B
a raid upon Zaleid ; ‫ اولو الشداد‬.t
‫نزار‬ uprighthe
Nizar (pron
Nicara -na-lus),for ‫ أوتو‬: ‫ و یا دارا آمی دارا رسمها‬house,whose site
has becomedesolate ! (pron.dark-nam ),for ‫من آل أبی موسی زامى‬
of the family of Abu Mast, for ‫فقل إذا بلاوی ;(أل) من آ‬
‫ الاوى الأن الأذى‬say then to the enemy acho non aimsat doing
mischief (pron, nawă lāna, see Vol. i. $ 20, b), for uji (újí) ; c
‫الآن يعود حياة الأمل‬note thelifeofhoperevices ; ‫بين الزوج والمرت‬
between husband and wife, for olycji.
Rem. In this case, the i1 is sometimes assimilated to a preceding
‫ ی‬or ‫ زو‬.g.6 ‫ فلم يغير البكاء عليك يا‬but to aoeep over thee tods of
no avail, for ‫شي‬.
(c) i, preceded by a vowel, may also be converted into the letter
.of
prolongation which is homogeneouswith that vowel ; e.g ‫ قلم يجد‬D
‫م‬

‫ عنده النصر الذي شالا‬but he did not find with him the help oohich he
demanded , for ‫ ) سال میل ژسول الله فاحشة ; أل‬the tribe (
Hudail asked the Prophet of God (to do) something base, for ejl ;
‫ أطعتهم وانا على وقاز‬I obeyed them , though Iwas in haste,for ‫وأنا‬.
This is most frequent when I is the third radical of a word, in which
 376 Part FOURTH . — Prosody. (S 235

A case the word virtually becomes third , or s ( compare Vol. i. $ 132,

rem. a). For example, in verbs, só ý may it do thee no good ! for
‫ فمن أنباك وهناك‬ho told thee ? for ‫ وابطا ; أنبأ‬and it delayed , for
2

‫داری ; أبطأ‬,‫ أ‬for ‫أداری‬, III.of‫ درأ‬:; ‫ جيه‬, for ‫توجه‬, TV .of‫ ; رجأ‬and
in‫ظمأ‬nouns
, , ‫ مما‬thirst, ‫ رشا‬a fawn , lai the name of a mountain, for
‫رشا رقم‬,‫ أجأ‬: ‫ قار‬a reader,for ‫قارئ‬, participle of ‫ واجی زقرأ‬one who
B strikes,in rhyme for ‫واج‬,.ie ‫واجئ‬,participle of ‫لو اورثنی ) زوجأ‬
‫ܝ‬
‫ الأسد ضارية تغلباما تهيج الوقت‬even if therapacious lions sprang 2

upon me, I would master them if my time had not yet come, for sad].
2
(d) *Elif with hèmza and gèzm () is constantly changed by the
poets into the letter which is homogeneous with the preceding vowel :
.e.g ‫ القال‬the omen (for ‫(الفأل‬, rhyming with ‫) أقفال‬plur, of ‫; قفل‬
‫ الراس‬ofthe head (for ‫(الرأس‬, rhyming with ‫ الرود ;الناس‬of thetender
c (for ‫(آلرود‬,rhymingwith ‫) الشود‬plur,of ‫ ډي ;(أشود‬a wror(for ‫ ذئب‬,
rhyming with Ms. See Vol. i.$ 17, b, rem .b.
>

235. *Elif mèmdūda (see Vol. i. $ 23 , rem. a) is not unfrequently

.changed ‫ ; قفرا‬e.g ‫الشها‬, for ‫الشتاء‬, the sky ; ‫بلا‬, for
‫بلا‬, into elif maksiira
a misfortune ; Wii, or si, desert, desolate, for atás, fem .of
visi; atá sa palsied hand, for eziá, fem , of jui; lái, for sãi,I wish,
D 1st pers. sing. Imperf. Indic. of stá .
REM . a . On the contrary, dlif maksūra is rarely changed into
elif memdūda ; as ‫) ينشب في المشعلي واللهاء‬which ) sticks in the
mouth and throat, for çuís, plur. of óúti the uvula.
Rem.b. The short interrogative i is sometimes lengthened into
1, when the next word begins with i ; as ‫م‬oli
‫م سال‬to
‫ أم أ‬jiſ
‫ أأنت‬is it thou
or 'Umm Salim ? ‫ تفگر آإياه يغنون أم قردا‬he thankstohether it is he
they mean or an ape.
$ 238] Poetic Licenses. 377

236. The elifu 'l-wasl is often retained in poetry, where it would A

naturally be elided in prose (see Vol. i.$ 19, rem. e) ; e.g. Somos
and be patient, for ‫ من افتاد ; واصبری‬like one who leads, for
‫ينرآفتاة‬‫زمی‬‫ في البذل والإمتناع ز‬in bestooring and withholding,for
‫ وأنت شابينا إبن ژبی زوالامتناع‬and thoutaast a fosterchild of our
sheep,for ‫ إذا جاوزالإثنين يرزيقاتنا ابن‬when a secret goes beyond
B
tur , for ‫الاثنين‬
(Rem. The vowel à before a double consonant (Vol. i. $ 25,
rem. ) is sometimes resolved into two a's by inserting a hèmza, as
, ‫ش‬

‫ الأثون‬for ‫الضالون‬,‫ احمر‬for ‫احمار‬. Nildeke, Zur Grammatik

‫اشماز‬,
p. 8, thinks that this is the origin of many ſtel forms, as
‫احتراث‬, ‫اطمأن‬, and, with substitution of ‫ ع‬for ‫ابذعر وء‬.[
(b) Irregularities in the use of the Tesdid . C

.The
.337 necessary tesdid is occasionally dropped ; e.g ‫ایہما‬,
for ‫أيهما‬, ohich of them ; ‫ من فلو أنك‬that thou , for ‫أيها السائل ; أتك‬
‫ عنهم وعنی‬0 thou that askest after them and after me ! for ‫وعنی‬.
Similarly in the rare verbal forms ‫ تقی‬, ‫يتسع‬, for ‫يغ يتقی‬, as

‫ فأخلصوها قائا لا يتقي بأثر‬and they cleaned them (andmade them ,

the swords) light, all of them guarding themselves (against the evil eye)
D
by (their) lustre, where others, however, read gas.
238. Sometimes too the tesdid is introduced where it would be
inadmissible in prose *, through a false application of the pausal form
mentioned in $ 224, rem.; e.g. Jciciſ i, for jcicii,the breast;
* (Excepting the saj", for we find (Zamahśari, Faik i. 145 seq. )
for ‫ ممه‬, in order to rhyme with ‫مه ورمه‬. .D
.G[
W. II . 48
 378 PART FOURTH. — Prosody. [$ 239

A ‫الأضخها‬, for ‫أضخما‬, ace. sing. of ‫أضخم‬, large, stout; ‫في مرووها‬
on her bodkin (for applying kohl to the eyes), for ‫في الطول زمرودها‬
in the tether, for ‫لقد خشيت أن أرى جدا في عانا ذا في الطول‬
‫بعد أن أخصا مثل الحريق وافق القصبا‬verily Iwas afraid of seeing
drought (spreading) in this our year, after it had been fertile in
herbage, as a fire (spreads) which encounters (a bed of ) reeds (cho
B ‫ أخصبا ز جذبا‬and ‫ القصبا‬for ‫ أخصبا‬and ‫(القصبا‬.
(c) Uncontracted Forms for contracted ones.
239. These are most common in the case of radicals in which
the second and third letters are identical (Vol. i . $ 119) , and occur in
.b the noun ; e.g ‫وا‬h
the verb and ot ‫ وإن ضن‬though they be stingy ,
for ‫ وإن تم تفتييه فأنيمي زوا‬and if thou dost not actually) kill
C him, yet come near it,for woulo; poing and he is blamed, poetic
form in rhyme for ‫ ويذمم‬, and that for ‫ولا يبرم الأمر الذي ;ويدمر‬
‫ هو حايل ولا يحلل الأمرالذي هو مبرم‬chathe loosenscannotbe bound
fust, and what he binds fast cannot be loosened, for já and
‫ الحمد لله العلي الأجل‬praise belongs to God , the exalted, the
glorious, for ‫الأجل‬. Compare, in Hebrew , ‫ جده‬, ‫جديد‬, and
: |

D similar forms *.

240. The poets also use the uncontracted forms of nouns derived
from radicals third , and s,
‫ ی‬instead of the contracted (see Vol. ii.
$ 167,8, 8(; ..e ‫ غير ماښې‬notpast,for ‫ورأسه حرزنا برای زمانی‬
*
‫ لا يغررك‬for. i
‫ يعرك‬a tradition (Faik i. 130n
,Lisan vi 232(
is said to be unique in prose. Abū ‘Obèida suspects that it is a clerical
error
)‫ (تحريف النقلة‬for ‫يغروك‬. .D
.G [
$ 241 ] Poetic Licenses. 379

‫ الابي بن زیاد‬and hisheadwecutof (in retaliation) for thehead of A

an-Nabi'ib Ziyad , for ‫موالى كباش العوي مما زالئابی‬
freedmen as (fat as) rams of the breed called “ūs, for yigó; 3jú
>

‫ اله في الغوانی‬may God not bless the comen ! for ‫وفي الغوانی‬
‫ړې يلعبن في الصحراء‬.l
‫ ځوا‬girls ik mead
sporting in thee
Rem. It sometimes happens that the usual accusative form
‫تی فمعوالیا‬incorrectly
.is ‫بد الله مو‬transferred
‫وه والي ع‬to‫مج‬the‫ئی‬genitive
‫ ;الله مو‬e.g ‫ ولو كان عبد‬B
were 'Abdu'llāh a
freedman , I would lampoon him, but Abdu'llāh is merely a freed
man's freedman , for ‫مولی موال‬
(d) Suppression of the letter j in certain Nominal and
Verbal Forms.

241. This is aa license of which the poets rarely avail themselves,

but it occasionally occurs in the dual and plural of nouns, and in the C
and us
.j verbs; e.g ‫م‬ve
energetic of si ‫هما ممتااإما إسار ومئة وإما‬
these are alternatives, either captivity and quarter,
‫ع‬
or bloodshed , for
‫أني كيب إن عمى اللذا قتلا الموت وفها الأغلا وطتان‬
ye Benī Kuldib, 't was my two uncles who slew kings and burst
asunder the wokes (of captices),for ‫هما نفا الأرض اللذا تو ز اللذان‬
lo ;si these are the two pillars of the earth, which, if they were shaken ,
for ‫ إن الذي كانت بفلج يماؤهم ; اللذان‬those whose blood was D
shed attenyed at Feli, for ‫اضرب عن أموم إن طرقت ;الذين‬
drive away sad thoughts from thee, if they come by night,for jól
(compare Vol. i. $ 20, rem. c) ; and more frequently ší , jú , sú ,
for ‫ ممن يثن‬, ‫نن‬, jussive of ‫كان‬.
REM. a.
The same elision of u occurs in the particle Lid but ;
as
‫ أشقني‬.but
‫ ولا‬givemeto drink
 380 PART FURTH.Prosody. [$ 242

A REM. b. On the contrary, some poets have even dared to add

the energetic ý to the perfect and participle of the verb ; as
‫ر‬

‫ دامن عدك إن رحمت متيما‬may they good fortune last, i thou

hast compassion upon one enslated (by love),for ‫أقائك أحضر ز دام‬
‫ الشودا‬oillhesay, Bring in thewitnesses for ‫أقائل‬.
242. Other letters, and even whole syllables, are sometimes
dropped under the pressure of metrical necessity *. For example,
B (a) at the beginning of aa word : ý for uji (compare $ 234, b), as in
the half-verse ‫ قبح لان منها بالذي أنت با‬butnown disclose schat
thoutmayest disclose of it ; ‫ لاو‬for ‫ رله‬as ‫لاو ابن عټة لا أفضت في‬
sabit yma what a man thy cousin is ! thou dost not surpass me in
‫بورت‬
noble qualities (compare S 53,6, rein . e(; ‫ ه‬for ‫اللهم‬, as ‫لاهم إن‬
‫ ځنت قبلت‬0 God ! if Thou hast accepted my pilgrimage
rare pausal form for ; ‫ تقوا رتق‬for ‫اتقوا اي‬
fear in ourcase,, ‫توه أيها‬
C imperat. VIII. of ‫وقی‬, as ‫ تق الله فينا‬JeurGod
‫ الفتيان‬fear Him , 0 young men ! (b) In the middle of a word :
‫ )اطاع‬X. of ‫(طوع‬, .imperf‫ يسطيع‬, for ‫ ; يستطيع استطاع‬A5
)
as

‫ ولو أني أسطيع يوم حمامه تقاتلت عنه‬and had I been able,on the
day of his death, I would have fought in his defence ( cf. Vol. i. $ 118 ,
rem. b). (c) At the end of a word : us for oss, in the half-verse
:

‫ وأخوك عد الأمر الذي وعدوا‬and they have failed to perform for

D thee the thing which they promised ; yuls (also written yló jo)
for ‫() من المال‬see Vol.i. $ 358 , rem . Cc), as ‫فما أبقت الأيام منها‬

.We
* ] find in a tradition (Fath ii 229 ( ‫ نهی عن تغلوطات‬for
‫أغوطات‬, as ‫ تحمر‬is said for ‫أحمر‬.c
‫ () ال‬. Volom
.i. $ 345, remp‫)(ه‬. 1

D. G.]
$ 2+2] Poetic Licenses. 381

‫ عندنا‬Fate has left (lit. the dayshave left)no evealth in our possession ; A
‫) علماء‬or ‫(عل ماء‬, for ‫على البي على الماء‬, an-nel ,for ‫; على النبي‬
‫من الرزق‬, mir- i hi, for ‫ عن في زمن الرزق‬for ‫) عن فلان‬owing to
the vocative form ‫ يا فل‬$ 38, 4 , rem . C, 3). Similarly , ‫ بلعنبر‬,
>

*
‫بلحرث بعجلان‬, for ‫ و العنبر‬, ‫بنو الحرث بنو العجلاني‬, .etc *
Likewise, in quadriliteral and quinqueliteral plurales fracti (Vol. i.
5305 ), as ‫ تم تعالي أراني ضفاير‬, for ‫ تلاميد ثعالب أرانب ضايع‬B
e.g , ‫ ولادی جمه نقان‬and the frogs in its pond are always(
croaking; ‫ قد أحرز شتها مع اللام‬the seums of which skilful
apprentices have joined firmly together ) ‫ قد أحرز‬for ‫قد أحرز‬, s234,b(.
‫ر‬

Further , ‫ثال‬, ‫ اير‬, for ‫ثالث‬, ‫ ; اس‬as ‫زوج خام وأبوك ابری‬
then thyhusband is fifth and thy father sirth ; ‫قد مر يومان وهذا‬
Joll i two days are already passed and this is the third.. Properc
names are also liable to be abbreviated, especially in the vocative
(see $ 38, a, rem. c), but also in other cases , as
>
‫تنمالفتی تشو إلى‬
‫ صور تاره طریف بن مال ليلة الجوع والخضر‬earcellent istheman ,the
light of whose fire thou makest for (from a distance) on a night of
hungerandcold ,(namely ) Tar7/ 'ibn Malik ) ‫مال‬,, or ‫ما‬, for ‫ (مالك‬.
Rem. The following are specimens of even still more violent
abbreviations: ‫ الهنا‬for ‫المنازل‬, as in the half-verse of Lebid , ‫ درس‬D
‫ المنا بتالي فأبان‬thedoellings are desolate at Mutali and Aban ,

* [In later times we find even ‫ تنفر‬for ‫المظفر‬ ‫) أبا أبو‬Ibn ali
'Oseibia, ii. 108). D. G. ]
f [Very rare is an abbreviation likethat in ‫ألا يا أم فارع لاتلومي‬
for ‫ قارعة‬.A bu
‫ ) یا هر‬Zaid, Naroadir ,30,58). D.G [
 382 ParT FOURTH.—Prosody . [S 243

A
and alsofor ‫) المنايا‬plur,of ‫(المية‬,as in ‫تريك ألمنا برؤوس الأل‬
toil letthee see leath at the points of the spears; ‫ الشبا‬for ‫البائ‬
)

)plur, of ‫( شبيبة‬, used by Allama in the half-verse ‫مقدم بسبا‬

bogató vlőí having its mouth covered and enwrapped with strips of
linen ; ‫ الحبا‬for ‫الحباحب‬, as in the words of 'Ibn Durèid,
Wij hun sigi he strikes out of them small sparks of fire;
‫ی‬Loadi,
‫ الحب‬used by &l- Aggäý for óhají in the half-verse áćó lábios
B
‫ ورق‬is the slate-coloured doves which inhabit Mèkka ;
womenin wis ‫هه ر‬

‫ العنا‬for ‫العنان‬,, in the words ‫ حتى إذ!ا أعييت أطلقت العنا‬til ,

when I was exhausted, I let go the reins ; les for kids
‫حجاج‬, in the
words ‫ي حجا حاجب ضمیر‬is‫ ف‬on the bone of a slenıler eyebrow ; and
even
sīj for the womb (see el-Maķşarī, tom. i. p. Tro, l.1 11 , and
tom . ii. p. s . 1. 8), and for ‫حبا‬ , according to one rendering
of the line ‫ فلم يقم إلا بمقدار أن قلت له أهلا وسهلا ومر‬but he
С stopped only for the space of time that I could say to him , Welcome
( others think that ‫ر‬you
‫ وم‬is here nothing more than the usual pausal
form of jog and passed on ). Such abbreviations are not, however,
‫ر‬ ‫م‬ ‫و‬
more violent than the Homeric γέλω,ιδρώ, έχω, δω, for γέλωτα , ιδρώτα,
ixwpa, dwua, and the like.

243. Under the second of the two heads mentioned in $ 232 ,

namely, poetic licenses in regard to the vowels of a word, we include
(a) the lengthening of a short vowel in the middle of a word ; (b) the
D shortening of a long vowel ; ( c) the suppression of a short vowel ;
(d) the addition of a final vowel to certain verbal and pronominal
forms, and to some particles ; and (e) the irregular use of the tènwin
and other case-endings in the noun.

(a) The lengthening of a short vowel in the middle of a word.

244. This is technically called clexi, filling full or saturation,

and is not uncommon with the vowels a and i, rarer in regard to u.
 Poetic Licenses. 383
$ 245]

Examples : ‫ينباع‬, for ‫ ينبع‬,in the half-verse of Antara, ‫ ينباع من‬A

Omno ygóć sos Aows from behind the ears of a fierce,bulky
she-camel ; ‫الثعال‬, for ‫الكنعل‬, in the words ‫قلت وقد تمت على‬
‫ الكنعاني‬I said , after she had fallen upon her breast , ‫منتزاح‬, for
‫منتز‬, in thehemistich ‫ ومن ذم الرجال بمنتزاج‬and (art thou)for
removed (i.e, quite free) from the blame of men ? ‫عامود‬, for ‫عهود‬, in
the half-verse ‫ فيه من الب الإبريز عامو‬in it thereis a pillar of B
pureet gold ; ‫ الصياړیف‬and ‫الراهيم‬, for ‫ الصيارف‬and ‫الدراه‬, in the
hemistich ‫ في الدراهیم تنقاد الضاريف‬asthemoney-changers scatter
(

the dirhams,whilst selecting ( those that are of full weight) ; jslai,

for ‫أنظر‬, in the words ‫ من حيثما توا أونو فأنظور‬I drano near to
whatever place they go and look (at them ).

(b) The shortening of a long vowel.

245. This may take place either in the middle or at the end of a C
word . (a ) Examples in the middle of a word : ‫ تم‬, for ‫تتام‬, as in the
‫عواور ; مق‬, plur, of ‫ غوار‬a mote
‫صورة‬darkness
words ‫ في تمه‬in itsdust or its
‫عواوير‬
in the eye, jolás, plur. of iguais a cell or chamber, for jigiga,
‫مقاصير‬, and the like ; ‫ ) هذا‬-(, instead of ‫ ) لهذا‬--(, as in the
half-verse ‫ إلى قم هذا الهجران في كل ليلة‬hote long shall this
estrangement last every night? ‫(پ ب ) الله‬, for ‫) الله‬- - -(), as in the D
hemistich ‫ ألا لا بارك الله في شهيب‬may God not bless Suhail ! and,
with double license, ‫ تن‬, for ‫ كان‬, in thewords ‫بين الحرير وبين‬
Kuci partly silk and partly linen . (6) Examples at the end of
word : ‫لنووااحح‬,‫ اا‬for ‫الواجی‬, as in the hemistich ‫گنواح ریش‬
a w

‫ هامة تجدية‬likethe tips ofthe feathers of a dose of Nagd; ‫الأيد‬,

 384 PART FOURTH.Prosody . [8946

A for ‫الایی‬,asin thewords ‫ دوامي الأيد‬aith their fore-feetbleeding ;

‫الناس‬, for ‫الاسی‬, as in thewords ‫ عن الناس أبرادا وأثوابا‬from one
who forgets robes and garments. ( Examples in prose are ‫ لا يال‬for
‫ لا يأتو‬not falling shortand ‫ لا أدر‬for ‫ي‬.
‫ لا أدر‬know I
not. Comp
Vol. i. $ 6, footnote. D. G. ] The 1st pers. plur. of the Perfect,
‫ ر) قتلنا‬--(, is also sometimes shortened into ‫ ) تتلن‬- (, but the
elif may be retained in writing, in order to distinguish it from the
‫شه‬

B 3d pers.plur. fem .; e.g. Gió comerciale dhe mending and many a one on the
pointof surrender have ace
we relieved ; ‫ ولو أدركته لقضين تحبا به‬and
if we had overtaken him, we would surely have slaughtered him.

(c) The suppression of a short vowel.

246. (a) In the middle of a word this license is of most frequent

C occurrence in the case of the very few nouns of the form les
(becoming je ), and of verbs of the forms Jes and jes (becoming
‫ فعل‬see Vol. i. $ 183, rem . 0), and ‫) فعل‬becoming ‫ ; (فعل‬as ‫ما‬
>

‫ أستوقضت خیل پښتها الإبلا‬ashorses scattercamels by their charge

) for ‫وإن أهجه يضجر كما ضجر بازل من الإبير دبرت فتاه ; ( ابلا‬
ilośg and if I lampoon him, he cries out,like a nine-year -old camel
D whose sides and withers are galled ( for jpvo, luni, and Sms);
‫ أو مثل ما جزى هرون وداود‬or as Aaron and David were recompensed
)for ‫ حث بور دالي ;( جزی‬skas ‫ إذا تمطى‬when it is draun, it tungs
with the curved bow ( makes the curved bow twang). Rarer instances
are exemplified by ‫رجل‬, for ‫رجل‬, as in the half-verse ‫فقد كان‬
long sing sloj for he was a man,and ye are men ; mür, for
‫ر ر‬ ‫مه‬
‫) العبر‬plur. of ‫(العبري‬, in the words ‫ هى الأنف الكبر التی‬these are
$ 247] Poetic Licenses. 385

the great souls athich ; ‫زفرات‬, for ‫ ) فرا‬plur . of ‫زفرة‬, Vol.i.s 301, A
rem .b),as ‫ فتستريح النفس من زفراتها‬and thesoulfinds rest from its
sighs. —This license has resulted in the production of such forms as
‫ يجد‬for ‫يجد‬.) ‫ جد‬, jassive of ‫(وجد‬, and ‫ يثير‬or ‫ يد‬for ‫يلين ) يثن‬
‫م‬

jussive of ‫ ;(ولد‬as‫ ولكني لم أجد من بگم با‬but I have not been

able to avoid cursingyou ; ‫د وليس له أب وډی وډ ته‬one‫مولو‬generated
‫ألا ب‬
‫] يده أبوان‬verily,there is scarcely ( used ‫قليل‬
without having a father, ] and scarcely one who has offspring is there B
whom two parents have not begotten (except Adam ).
Rem. The poets also take the contrary liberty of adding a
supplementary vowel in the nominal form je, using, for example,
jbs for jbg,flank, and ito, for ilç, skin.
(6) The same license at the end of a word is exemplified by
such a form as ‫ ييتق‬, for ‫يق‬, in thehalf-verse ‫ومن يتق فإن الله معه‬
(and whoso fears (God ), verily God is with him * [ The pronouns C
‫ هو‬and ‫ هي‬are often shortened into ‫ هو‬and ‫ههیي‬. [ Compare also
the suppression of the final vowel in the pronominal suffixes of the
.1
pers. st
sing ‫دی‬ and ‫ نی‬S 228 ,rem .b, and the use of ‫ تم أبل‬for
‫بال‬.
‫ تم أ‬did I
not care [
(d) The addition of a final short vowel to certain verbal
D
forms and to some particles.
247. The vowel kesr is frequently added in rhyme to the 3d
pers. sing. fem . of the Perfect, the 2d pers. sing. masc. of the

* This happens especially if the last consonant of the word and

the first of the following are identical, as ‫ وتفرو الخورنق‬.Tabarii

853, .1 ult for ‫ أزمان بیت زوتفگر‬ib. 1119 ,1.1 for ‫أضرب وأزمان‬
‫بسيف الله‬ib. 1427,1.1 (iii.2414,1. 14) for ‫أضرب‬. .D.G[
W. II . 49
 386 PART FoURTH.Prosody . [$ 248
A Imperative, and those persons of the Jussive which end in a con
sonant ; as ‫ أناخوا المطايا قد أمن وكلت‬they made the camels lie
down,achich arere tired and areary (for ‫يقولون لا تنهيك أي ;( قلت‬
winning they say, Do not die of grief, but bear it like a man (for |

‫ » وإن يأتيك الأعداء بالجهد أجهد ;( جلد‬nd if the foe comeupon

thee with all their might, I will do my very best (for thei).
B REM . The vowel preceding the final consonant may have been
originally long, and only shortened because of its being in a shut
syllable, but it is, nevertheless, not restored after the addition of
this kesra . For example : ‫ ) غرث‬for ‫ات‬.3d
‫غز‬, pers. sing. fem . Perf
of lúć, Vol.i. $ 166, a, rem.) becomes ‫غزت‬, not ‫) طرز غيرات‬for ‫ طير‬,
2d pers. sing, masc. Imperat . of ‫ طار‬, Vol. i. $ 152 ) becomes
not ‫) أئمز طیری‬for ‫أنام‬, 1st pers.sing. Jussive of ‫ تامر‬.Vol
.i $ 151(
becomes ‫أنم‬, not ‫أنام‬
C 248. The same license is allowable in the case of particles
which end in a consonant, particularly such as are monosyllabic ; e.g.
‫لاتزل برحالنا وكأن قد‬they(the camels)have not get moved of with
our sauddles,but it is as good as done (namely , ‫ وكان قد زالث‬but it is
as if they had already moted off af '(; ‫أحباب أنفسنا غم ذا النوى وكم‬
beloved of our souls, how long will this absence continue ? how long ?
REM. The reader may here be reminded that, instead of the
D ordinary pronominal forms ‫أنتم‬, ‫هم‬, and ‫ فه‬, and the verbal form
‫ر ر‬
‫فعلتم‬, the poets constantly make use of the archaic ‫أنتم‬, ‫هم‬, ‫ م‬,
and bles. The final vowel is in these cases more usually long
than short *. When is changed into ‫هم‬, either ‫هم‬ or may
be used .

* The quantity of the singular suffix o also varies.

$ 249] Poetic Licenses. 387

(e) The irregular use of the tènwin and other case-endings A

in the noun .

249. The poets constantly use the triptote inflection of a noun,

when the diptote inflection alone is admissible in prose. This remark
applies equally to the singular and the broken plural. Examples of
the singular : ‫تتنوع ما بطن نعمان إن مش به زينب في نسوة‬
Blybas the vale of Na'mān is scented with musk, if Zeinèb walks in it
>

amid (her ) perfumed attendants (for ‫قالوا يزورك أحمد وتزوره ; زینب‬
they say , Almed oisits thee (ad thout visitest him (for ‫(احمد‬: ‫ يسقيهم‬B
‫ش‬

igest og gá a smart bluck-eyed (page) hands them wine (for jgai);

‫احور‬
‫ قد قال شاعر كندة فيما مضى‬the poet of the tribe f) Nida lants
said in olden time (for ‫تقول لي المعروف يحيى بنأم;( كندة‬ .
thou sayest, Ask largesse of Yahyā 'ibn *Ektèm (forse);
‫ ثمائا يدفع خطوبه‬and I rearned Othman torepel the dangers
rhich threatened him (for ‫و ونسيت أن الله أخرج آدما ;(عثمان‬
and thou forgettest that God turned Adam out of it ( for sal ) ;
‫ فلا تودع الدهر سرك أحما‬never the entrust thy secret to a fool
)for ‫(أحمق‬. Examples of thebroken plural : ‫إلا وهم شركاء في دمائهم‬
but they are companions in ( shedding) their blood (for īs ); e
‫) عليها مساعير حربہ‬horses) with shaggy maes, on which ride
tarriorsewhostir up the fire of their battle for ‫عجائزا مثل ;(مساعير‬
hanno los lájí old women , like vipers, five in number (for jules); D
‫ غشی منازلا بریښنات‬Ivisited duelings at Oreitiat (for ‫( منازل‬.
Other instances of the irregular tènwin are : in the vocative, as
‫ سلام الله يا مطر عليها‬the peace of God, O Matur, be upon he
) for ‫أحمد وأنت ممن تجيبة من قومها والفحل فحل ) ; ( يا مطر‬
és o Muhammad, since thou urt the ntfspring of a highborn
 388 PART FOURTH . — Prosody. [$ 250

A lady in her tribe, and thy father was a noble (for úl

‫(];;)( ام‬
‫ یا عدا تقد وقتك الأواقی‬-
‫ و‬, everyd
circumstance
i has com
bined to protect thee (where a writer in prose would have said
‫ ; ( یا عدى‬after ,usel‫ ) لنفي الجنس‬$ 39 ( , as ‫ألا رجلا جزاه الله خيرا‬
is there no man (may God reward him with good) — ? (for jeg vi) ;
in words of the form Jees (Vol. i. $ 98, rem. c ; $ 309, c, 0) , as
B ‫ حذار حذار من فوارس دارم‬lettre,becare of thehorsemen of Darin
)for ‫ أبا مطر منه إلى صلاح ;( دار دار‬o Alia Matar,conehither
to Salah (i... Mekka,for ‫ ;(صلاح‬and in proper names before ‫بن‬
or (Vol.i.s21, b), as ‫ جارية بن قيس بن ثعلبه‬a young troman
son of 0

(ofthe tribe) of ķais 'ibn Ta‘laba (pron. Þaisini’lni,for vi wym ).

250. On the contrary, the tènwin is sometimes suppressed in
C cases where it could not be dispensed with in prose ; as ‫فما كان‬
‫وقاني مرداس في مجمع‬ ‫ حضن ولا حابس‬neither His nor Habis
surpassed Mirdas in any assembly (for ‫عمرو الذي هشم البريد ;(مژدانا‬
aogás amr, who broke up (bread to make) soup for his people ( for
‫عمرو الذي‬, but there is another reading, ‫ عمرو العتی قشم‬the molle
‫و‬

1m broke up(; ‫ فألفيته غير متعب ولا ذاكر الله إلا قليلا‬and I
found him not seeking (( the Lord's) favour, and seldom thinking upon
D God (for ‫ »وحى محارب الأبطال قدما ;(ذاكر‬d thetribeofMolarib ,
heroesofold (for ‫ كسور مغلوب يصول على الكتب ;(محارب‬like an
ternatched cat,achich springs at the dog (for ‫على جسم ;( كسور‬
‫و نیره‬

‫ مصفر من التبر أملس‬upon a yellorbody, smoother than gold (for

and watoi in rhyme for comboi,instead of chói, s 249).
251. The genitive plural in ús is sometimes changed in rhyme
‫وقد جاوزت حد الأربعي‬
); as ‫ن‬wes,or
into vx = (see Vol. ii. p. 236, note);
$ 252] Poetic Licenses. 389

since I have already passed the limit of forty (for ‫ لا بارك ;(الأربعين‬A
‫ الله في بضع وستين‬may God not bless sity and odd gears! (for
‫ وأنكرنا زعانف آخرين ;( وستین‬and we synore the ridiaf of other
tribes (for ‫(آخرین‬.
252. In verbs and nouns derived from radicals of which the
third consonant is , or us , the poets not unfrequently use the
Indicative form of the Imperfect instead of the Subjunctive or Jussive,
and the nominative case instead of the accusative. Examples of B
God not wilted that 1I
the verb : ‫) أبی الله أن أشمو بأم و أب‬ithas
should be of noble descent either on the mother's or the father's side
) for ‫قالت لا أوژی تها من كلالة ولا من حى حتى تلاقی ;(أشمو‬
‫و‬

-nd
‫ » محمدا‬I swear, I acill not shouo her pity for teariness or font
soreness,until she encounters Muhammad (for ‫منت نف ;( لاقی‬
‫ أن تسامی دارما‬thany soulhasmade thee wish to pie with Darim (for
‫ إذا تم أن يسى الفتى فيه أو يضحا ; اوى‬when to spend an C
evening or a forenoon in it,fills a man with vain delight (for is!
‫ألم يأتيك والأنباء تنمى بما لاقت تبون بنی زیاد ; (الفتى أن يمسى فيه‬
did he not bring thee word -- for news travels fast - of what has
befallen themileh -canet of the Bend Ziyad (for ‫هجوت زبان ;(ياتك‬
‫ ثم جئت معتذرا من هجو زبان تم تهجو ولم تدع‬thout didst lampoo
Zabbūn, and then thou camest making excuses for having lampooned
Zabban , — (so thut) thou didst neither lampoon him nor let it alone D
)for ‫ غوجى علينا يحييك آب عتاب ;(تهج‬taur aside to asus, ( nal(
'Ibn Annāb will salute thee, i.e.receive thee with honour (for so );
‫ ما أنس لا أنساه آخر عیشتی‬whatever I forget, I shall not forget him
to the end of my life (for ‫)(أنسه‬. Examples of the noun : ‫ومن أراد‬
‫ التأسي في مصيبته‬and unhoever seeks for consolation in his misfortune
)for ‫ وجدت معاليك ألايشعری زالتأسي‬I found thy nobile qualities
 390 PART FOURTH.Prosody . [$ 253

Aasubject for mypoetry (for ‫ تركن راعيهن مثل الش ;(معالي‬they

have left their shepherd like an old (useless) waterskin (for marij);
‫ كأن أيدي في القاع القرق‬asif their forefeet tere on levelground
)for ‫ ولو كان طاوی الحشا جائعا ;(أيديهن‬nd if hehad been hungry
and famished (for ‫( طاوي‬.
253. The poets occasionally use pausal forms ( see SS 223-230)
B out of pause. For example : wój for isos, in the verse samo ‫بسرور‬
‫ أخدمه إن رضی بی وبسمعي والبصر‬with joy,my Lord,will I acuit
upon him, if he be contented with me, and with my hearing and sight
(i.e. most willingly and cheerfully); sj for 'Sij = (sjs, in the words
‫ى أحد في الناس عله ما زئت‬sis‫ن ز‬is‫ا إ‬to‫ م‬no one among men, whom
we know, was afflicted us thou art afflicted ; gå for g, in the half
C verse ‫ فلا هو من الدنيا مضيع نصيبه‬and sohe doesnot losehis share
of ( the pleasures of) this world .
[REM. At the end of a word the tènwin is sometimes used
instead of the letter of prolongation ) ‫ حرف الإطلاق‬, as some read
.in the Koran lxxxix‫ ت‬3 ‫ يسر‬for ‫يسري‬.see )( Beidawi ii 401, 1.13(.
‫ه‬
This is called ‫ تنوين الترتر‬the trilling or quanering prolongation
1(, as in ‫شقیت الغيث أيتها‬
and modulation of the voice (yaylasu),
D ‫) الخيامن‬see Fleischer ,K. Schr.i.323seq, and comp. supra $ 225,
rem .)). In like manner the ‫) ألف الندبة‬Vol.ii.. $ 368, rem . b)is
sometimes lengthened to sí, as in a tradition given by Zamahśarī
)Faik ii. 95) Fatima is heard crying for her two sons ‫یا حنان یا‬
‫سينان‬. The addition of the ‫ ما ن‬a fettered rhyme )$ 193 (,
|
called ‫ الغابی‬. .
‫التنوين‬, condemned i
by many grammarian
s s. D [
 ‫‪INDEXES .‬‬

‫‪I.‬‬ ‫‪TECHNICAL TERMS, MNEMONIC WORDS,‬‬

‫‪PARADIGMS, ETC.‬‬

‫‪The Roman numerals indicate the volume, the Arabic numerals the‬‬
‫‪page. The letters A B C D refer to divisions of the page.‬‬
‫ا‬
‫‪, .i 269 ..‬أداة التعريف‬
‫‪, . 28 c‬‬
‫‪.i‬ابجد ‪,‬ابجد‬
‫;‪. .i 284 8‬إذا المفاجأة أو الفجائية‬
‫‪, . 359 B, i‬أ‬
‫‪.i‬بحر الشعر‬ ‫‪361c‬‬ ‫‪ii. 157 D, 345 .‬‬
‫مہر‬ ‫ر‬ ‫گه‬

‫‪.i‬بنية المبالغة‬
‫‪, . 136 D‬أ‬ ‫‪,.ii‬أرجوزة‬
‫‪. 351 B‬‬
‫‪.ii191 .‬والإتساع‬ ‫‪B‬‬
‫‪, .220i‬الإز‬
‫‪.‬دواج‬ ‫‪, 222D‬‬
‫‪.i‬اثفاعل‬
‫‪, . 40c‬‬ ‫‪ :‬أسباب الامتناع من الصرف‬
‫‪245 B.‬‬
‫‪.i‬لفعل‬
‫‪, . 38 c‬ا‬
‫‪,.ii‬الاستثناء‬
‫‪.335 D‬‬
‫‪.i‬ار‬
‫‪, . 274B; ii. 73c‬الإخب‬
‫‪, .i 10 ..‬أخت ألة‬ ‫المتصل‬
‫مهر ‪ .‬تو‬
‫الفتحة‬ ‫‪ii. 336 A.‬‬
‫المفرغ‬ ‫‪...‬‬

‫‪, 342D.‬‬
‫الكرة‬ ‫المنطع‬
‫‪.ii‬اختصاص‬
‫‪, . 76 D, 77 , 93 A‬ال‬ ‫‪.i‬راك‬
‫‪, .235 , 334 c, 335 B‬الإستد‬
‫‪.‬أخوات إن‬
‫‪, .i‬‬
‫‪80 B‬‬ ‫‪.i‬ستفعال‬
‫‪. . 116 B‬ا‬
‫كان‬ ‫‪, .i 44 ..‬استفعل ‪ii. 15 , 16 , 101 D,‬‬
‫‪.‬و ‪103 D , 258‬‬
‫انتقام انگاري أو بمغنی الفی‬
‫‪.i‬داة أدوات‬
‫‪, . 278c‬أ‬ ‫‪ii. 336 B.‬‬
‫‪392‬‬ ‫‪Indexes.‬‬

‫‪,.ii‬الأستقبال‬
‫‪. 21B‬‬ ‫‪ .i‬المرة‬
‫‪, . 109 ,123B‬اسم‬
‫‪.i‬لاسم‬
‫‪, . 104D‬ا‬ ‫‪, .i 107 ..‬اسم مزید فيه‬
‫‪, .105 8,264D‬اسم‬
‫‪ .i‬الإشارة‬ ‫مشتي‬
‫الالة‬ ‫‪i. 109 , 130 B.‬‬ ‫‪, . 117 D ;: ii. 59 D‬اسم‬
‫‪.i‬مصدر‬
‫إن‬ ‫‪.. ,> ii. 80 B, 260 B.‬‬ ‫‪.i‬سم المصغر‬
‫‪, . 110 A, 166 B‬الا‬
‫‪.‬سم مع‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, . 107‬ا‬ ‫‪B‬‬
‫التفضيل‬ ‫‪...‬‬ ‫)‬ ‫‪i. 140 , 141 B.‬‬

‫‪.i‬سه جامد‬
‫‪, .106 D‬ا‬ ‫‪ .‬المفعول‬ ‫‪...‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪i. 109 A, 131c.‬‬
‫الهان‬ ‫‪i. 109 B, 124 D.‬‬
‫‪, .181 Ai‬اسم ا‬
‫‪.‬لجمع‬ ‫‪.i‬لأمم المتبر ‪, 224 D, 234A‬‬ ‫‪, . 166 B‬ا‬
‫ب ‪i. 107 B, 180 D, 224 D,‬‬
‫جنس‬ ‫و‬ ‫س‬ ‫ن‬ ‫الم‬ ‫‪.‬و ‪i. 109 D, 149‬‬
‫‪234 A.‬‬

‫‪ .‬الحدث‬ ‫‪...‬‬ ‫‪Add. et Corrigenda‬‬ ‫الموصول‬ ‫‪i. 105 B ; ii. 317c.‬‬

‫‪(Vol. i. 110A ).‬‬ ‫‪.i‬اسم نکر‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪ .98c, 123‬و‬ ‫‪A‬‬
‫الرمان‬ ‫‪i . 109 B , 124 D.‬‬
‫‪, . 109i‬اسم‬
‫‪B, 123 p‬‬
‫‪ .‬النوع‬
‫الظرف‬ ‫‪... , i. 109 , 125 B.‬‬
‫‪ .‬الوحدة‬ ‫‪i. 109 , 147 BD.‬‬
‫العدد‬ ‫‪.. , i. 105 A.‬‬
‫‪ .i‬الوعاء‬
‫‪... , . 109 D, 149A‬‬
‫‪.i‬سم علم ‪, or‬اسم علم‬
‫‪, . 107 B‬ا‬ ‫‪.i‬لإسناد‬
‫‪, .250B‬ا‬
‫‪.‬سم عيني‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, . 107‬ا‬ ‫‪B‬‬
‫‪. , i. 109 A , 131 B.‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫‪, ,249 D; ii. 354 G,382p‬الإشباع‬
‫الفاعل‬ ‫‪, .718, 84B,89 B‬الإشم‬
‫‪.i‬ام‬
‫الفعلي‬ ‫‪. , i. 109 A, 110 A, 296 B.‬‬
‫‪.i‬الأصوات‬
‫‪, . 294 B‬‬
‫كان‬ ‫‪...‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬
‫‪ii. 100 A.‬‬
‫‪.i‬إضافة‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, . 125B,198c‬ال‬
‫العثرة‬ ‫‪i. 109 D, 148 B.‬‬
‫إضافة البيان أو الإضافة البيانية‬
‫اليفة‬ ‫‪...‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪i. 110 A, 165 B.‬‬ ‫‪ii. 199 B, 205 A, 234 A..‬‬
‫‪ii. 98 B.‬‬
‫‪...‬‬ ‫>‬
‫‪ .ii199 .‬والإضافة التبعيضة‬
‫المبالغة‬ ‫‪i. 137 B.‬‬
‫‪. 234 A‬‬
‫‪.ii‬إضافة الشبيه‬ ‫|‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪, .i 107 .8‬اسم مجرڈ‬ ‫‪,ii.205A ,‬إضافة التفسيرأو التفسيرية‬
‫‪.i‬لأسهم المحقر‬
‫‪, . 166 B‬ا‬ ‫‪234 A.‬‬
 I. Technical Terms, Mnemonic Words, Paradigms, etc. 393

‫الإضافة الحقيقية‬, i. 64 D, 198c, | ‫فعال المتعدية‬.‫الأ‬, .51 Ai

; ii 46 ..
233 A. ‫لأفعال المتعدية بأنفسها‬.i
‫ا‬, . 46 B
,. i
‫إضافة العين إلى المعنى‬. 202D ‫بغيرها‬
‫ و‬.64i
‫الإضاقة غير الحقيقية‬. 8,19i
8c ‫أفعال المدح والذم‬. i
, .97A
‫لإضائة غير المحضة‬.i
‫ا‬, . 198c i
‫فعال المقاربة‬.
‫أ‬, .106 B
‫لإضائة أللفظية‬.i
,‫ ا‬. 198c
‫المحضة‬
‫مي م‬
‫أفعال اليقين والشك أو الرجحان‬
ii. 48 D.

‫المعنوية‬ ‫فعال‬. iA
‫إ‬, . 116
‫إضافة الموصوف إلى الصفة‬, i ‫افعال‬. i
, . 43A
232 D.
‫ راف‬.43i
‫ائل‬. c, 63 D
‫الإضراب‬.i i
, .335B
‫ وا‬. 116 B
‫فتعال‬.i
‫لإغراء‬,‫ا‬..i74iD
‫که دو‬
351i
‫اغنية‬,..i B ‫افعل‬.i
, . 41D
, . 34 B
‫أفعل‬.i
jeli, plur. fr., i. 226 c, 227D ; ‫أفعل‬, adj., 133D, 136 8, 200 ‫; م‬
)

secondary pl. fr., 231 dD..

compar. and superl., i. 140 c ;
‫أفا‬, p
‫عيل‬. l
,fr.,i. 228u r
A; seco nd derived from conjug. II., IV.,
ary pl. fr., 231 D. VII., and VIII. , i. 141 D, ii.
,frl
‫أفع‬, p
‫ال‬. u
.,i. 169 rA
1, 211 72 B ; from verbs signifying
love or hatred , ii. 71 D , 145 D ;
i8iD
‫وأفعال االلإشنشعابء‬..10 formed from the passive voice ,
> .i 98 ‫و‬. i. 142 D ; from intransitive
verbs , ii. 72 a ; from words
, ii. 50 B. denoting colours or defects,
‫الكس‬
‫الشروع‬ ... ii. 108 D. i. 143 A ; compar,with ‫من‬
ii. 133 A-134 D ; superl, with
‫الأفعال غير المتعدية‬,.i.5A1 the genitive, ii. 218 B , 226 c ;
with the accus., ii . 71 B ; with
‫أفعال القلب‬, ii.48 D,50 , 51 AB, >

329 B. ‫ل‬, ii. 71 B ; with ‫إلى‬,.ii 728,

145 D ; substantive, i. 227 D ;
‫الأفعال اللازمة‬, .i 51‫ه‬.‫ب‬. 50
W. II ,
‫‪394‬‬ ‫‪Indeares.‬‬

‫‪, .i 116 .1‬افعيلال ; ‪, i. 184 B, 240 D‬فعتی ‪.fem‬‬

‫‪.fem .i‬‬
‫‪, . 185 8, 240 D‬قع‬ ‫‪, .357 AB‬ا‬
‫‪.ii‬لإقواء‬ ‫|‬

‫‪.‬فعل التفضيل‬
‫‪, . 140i‬أ‬
‫ہے ‪c‬‬ ‫‪. 357 B‬‬
‫‪.ii‬والإطفاء‬
‫‪5 -‬‬ ‫‪E‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫‪, . 227 D , 240 D‬أفعل‬ ‫‪.i‬كلوني البراغيث‬‫‪, . 294c‬أ‬
‫‪,.i‬‬
‫‪.‬أفعل به‬ ‫‪98c‬‬ ‫‪.i‬الإلغاء‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, . 345p‬‬
‫‪Add.‬أفعل‬
‫‪pluret, ftCorrigenda‬‬ ‫‪.i‬إلحاق ‪209Di.,‬‬
‫‪, i. 169 ,( Vol.‬‬ ‫‪, .152 BE,157A,179c‬ألف ال‬
‫و‬

‫‪210 D).‬‬ ‫‪.i‬لألف الفاصلة‬

‫‪, . 11 A‬ا‬
‫‪.‬ل‬
‫‪ .43i‬وافع‬
‫‪4, 91 B‬‬ ‫‪, . 214i‬أل‬
‫‪.‬ف القطع‬ ‫‪, 269c‬‬
‫‪.plu‬أفع‬
‫‪, , fr., i 219‬‬
‫‪r , 240 .8‬‬ ‫‪.i‬لف المقصورة‬
‫‪, . 11 B, 25 B‬الأ‬
‫‪.s‬علاث‬
‫‪, ecplon‬أف‬
‫‪.ft.,i. da‬‬ ‫الممدودة‬
‫‪232E ry‬‬
‫‪.i‬افعل‬
‫‪, . 116B‬‬ ‫‪.i‬ق النداء‬
‫‪, . 294 B‬أل‬
‫‪.i‬افعل‬‫‪, . 117 D‬‬ ‫‪.i‬لندبة‬ ‫‪, . 295 D;ii.320p‬ألف ا‬
‫‪ ... i. 21 A.‬الووقصايلة ‪, plur. fr., i. 170 A. 212 B,‬أفعله‬
‫‪Add. et Corrigenda ( Vol. i.‬‬
‫>‬ ‫‪i. 11 A.‬‬
‫‪210 p).‬‬
‫‪.i‬تل‬
‫‪, . 43 G,G3D‬افق‬ ‫‪.i‬ألف واللاام‬
‫‪, . 269 A‬ال‬
‫‪.i‬افقتل‬
‫‪ . 48c‬ر‬ ‫‪,.ii‬الألف و اللام الجنس‬
‫‪. 243c‬‬
‫‪ii. 243 D.‬‬
‫‪.i‬افعن‬
‫‪, . 116c‬‬ ‫العهد‬
‫‪.i‬لال‬
‫‪, . 116B, 117 D‬افعت‬ ‫‪.ii‬لى الانتهاء‬
‫‪, .145B,147 E‬إ‬
‫‪.i‬عنتل‬
‫‪ . 46 D,48c‬واق‬ ‫‪,.ii‬إلى تقوية العامل‬
‫‪. 63B‬‬
‫‪w‬‬

‫‪ .i 47 ..‬واقعنتی‬ ‫‪, .145 B‬إ‬

‫‪.i‬لى المصاحبة أو يلمع‬
‫‪.i‬فعوان‬
‫‪, . 116 B‬ا‬ ‫‪.i‬أم المنقطعة‬
‫‪, . 308i‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪ .i 46 .‬افعول‬ ‫‪.i‬لإمالة‬
‫‪ , 10c‬ا‪,‬‬
‫‪.i‬افعول‬
‫‪ .46p‬ر‬ ‫‪.i‬لإمتناع من الصرف‬
‫‪, .245B‬ا‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫هه ر‬
‫‪.i‬فعيعال‬
‫‪, . 116 B‬ا‬ ‫‪.‬الامر‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, . 6lp‬‬
 ‫‪I. Technical Terms, Mnemonic Words, Paradigms, etc. 395‬‬

‫‪, ,i‬‬
‫‪.‬أمرمحض‬ ‫‪31 D‬‬ ‫‪ .ii164 ..‬والباء ببتغعلویيلض‬
‫‪ ii.26 B,‬وأن المقة (من الثقيلة)‬
‫‪81 C.‬‬ ‫‪,..i‬باه الفدية‬ ‫‪162iB‬‬
‫‪ .‬المصدرية‬ ‫‪ . 26i‬وأن‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫الثمين ‪,2218,232 A‬‬ ‫‪164 A.‬‬

‫‪, . 29i‬أ‬
‫‪.‬ين المفسرة‬ ‫‪2c‬‬ ‫‪.‬باء الللظسربفبية‬
‫‪, . 164‬ال‬‫‪i‬‬ ‫‪A, i‬‬‫‪324 A‬‬
‫‪ii . 163 D.‬‬
‫‪.ii‬وأن الاصبة‬‫‪. 26c‬‬
‫للقسم ‪ , .i‬إن بمعنى الشرط أو الشرطية‬ ‫‪ii . 164 A.‬‬

‫‪14 B, 301 D.‬‬

‫‪, .i‬‬
‫‪.‬باء المجاز‬ ‫‪160iA‬‬
‫‪.‬لباء بلمصاحبة ‪,i.283B,‬إن المخففة من الثقيلة)‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, . 164‬ا‬ ‫‪A‬‬
‫‪284 D ; ii. 81c .‬‬
‫المقابلة‬ ‫‪...‬‬
‫‪...‬‬

‫‪, . 105i‬إن‬
‫‪.‬الافية‬ ‫‪8, 301c‬‬
‫للملابسة‬
‫‪ , . 29i‬إ‬
‫‪.‬ن الوصلية‬ ‫‪2D‬‬ ‫‪i . 4 A.‬‬
‫الموحدة‬
‫‪, .i‬‬
‫‪.‬إن وأخوتها‬ ‫‪80 E‬‬ ‫‪ii. 164 A.‬‬
‫يقلي‬
‫{‬
‫‪,..i73ic‬الإنشاء‬ ‫‪.‬باب الفاعل و المفعول‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, . 50B‬‬
‫‪, . 116 B‬ا‬
‫‪.i‬نفعال‬ ‫‪ii . 358 C.‬‬
‫‪.i‬انفعل‬
‫‪, . 40c‬‬ ‫‪, ii. 90 8, 230 c, 231 D, 283 A,‬البدل‬
‫أجية‬
‫‪.‬أنيت‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, . 56‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫‪284 D.‬‬

‫‪.‬أه‬ ‫‪351i‬‬
‫‪, .i‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫‪.‬دل اللاإشتضمراالب‬ ‫‪85 D,2i‬‬
‫‪ .2i‬ب‬ ‫‪87B‬‬
‫‪ii. 286 B.‬‬
‫‪ .ii 361 .‬رأى يجب‬
‫‪,.ii 357 .‬الإيطاء‬ ‫البداء‬
‫به ‪ .ii 93‬أيها بلاختصاص‬ ‫‪ .ii285 .‬بدل البعض من الغير‬
‫‪, ii‬بدل البعض من المستثنى منه‬
‫‪336 C.‬‬
‫‪.i‬الباء پلپالساتتعصاانقة‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, . 164A‬‬ ‫‪.‬بدل االنغلتط مونالانلسعييان‬ ‫‪ic‬‬
‫‪, . 286‬‬
‫‪ii. 163 D, 324 A.‬‬ ‫‪ii . 284 D ,‬‬
‫‪ii . 44 B, 164 A.‬‬ ‫‪287 A.‬‬
‫بلدية‬
 ‫‪396‬‬ ‫‪Indexes.‬‬

‫‪.ii‬والحذر ‪, .ii‬البث المباين يلبد منه‬

‫‪. 74D‬‬
‫‪286 B.‬‬
‫‪.‬تحريف النقلة‬ ‫‪ii‬‬
‫‪, .378‬‬ ‫‪D‬‬ ‫|‬
‫‪.‬لحقير ‪,.ii.748‬بدل المصدر من الفعل‬ ‫‪, . 166‬ا‬
‫‪i‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬
‫‪, .ii 365 .‬البسيط‬
‫‪.‬التحقيق‬
‫‪, .i‬‬
‫‪4B‬‬
‫‪,.ii‬بناء‬
‫‪. 78B‬‬ ‫‪.‬صيص‬‫‪, .198 Di‬التخ‬
‫‪, 199 8, 261D‬‬
‫‪ , .i 50 .‬بناء الفاعل والمفعول‬
‫‪.‬يان‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, . 229‬ب‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪B, 230‬‬ ‫‪c‬‬ ‫‪.i‬فيف الهمزة‬
‫‪ .18 ,73B‬تخ‬
‫‪.ii‬بی‬
‫‪, . 351 B‬‬ ‫‪.i‬ترخيم‬
‫‪, .174 D; i 884‬ال‬
‫‪.i‬لتركيب‬
‫‪, . 245 B‬ا‬
‫‪.i‬لاء لتأكيد المبالغة‬
‫‪, .139A‬ا‬ ‫‪.i‬ركيب إشادی‬
‫‪ .160B‬ت‬
‫بتخصيص‬
‫ر‬ ‫ر‬
‫‪i. 147 D.‬‬ ‫‪.ii‬التشجيع‬
‫‪, .368 p‬‬
‫‪.‬المناة من فوقها‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪i. 4 B.‬‬ ‫‪.‬غير‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, . 110A‬الص‬ ‫‪,166 B‬‬
‫‪, .ii 272 ..‬تابع‬ ‫‪.i‬صغير الرخي‬
‫‪, .174 D‬ت‬
‫‪,,.i‬تتاءأسيس‬
‫‪. 353i‬‬
‫‪B‬‬ ‫‪, .i 14 ..‬الشديد‬
‫‪.i‬لتأكيد أو التوكيد‬
‫‪, . 282B‬ا‬ ‫‪.i‬الضمين‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, .358A‬‬
‫‪ ... ii. 282c.‬التنظى‬ ‫‪.‬العدية‬
‫‪,.i‬‬
‫‪34 B‬‬
‫‪, .i 139 ..‬تأكيد المبالغة‬ ‫‪.‬‬‫‪, .247c;i‬التعريف‬‫‪ii.198 D, 199 A‬‬
‫‪, .it 282 .‬التأكيد المعنوي‬ ‫‪.‬‬
‫‪, . 166 D;i‬العظيم‬
‫‪ii. 54 c,268 A‬‬
‫‪, .i 164 .‬تأكيد التسبة‬ ‫‪, .i 190 ..‬التغليب‬
‫‪.i‬لتأنيث اللازم‬
‫‪, .245B‬ا‬ ‫‪.‬تفاعل‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, . 38‬‬ ‫‪D‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬

‫‪,.ii‬البيين‬
‫‪. 123A‬‬ ‫‪.‬فاعل‬
‫‪, .116‬ت‬
‫‪i‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬
‫‪.ii‬أليم‬
‫‪, . 358 A‬‬ ‫‪.p‬فاعل‬
‫‪ , ,fr‬ت‬‫‪lu‬‬ ‫‪.,i. 226rc‬‬
‫‪.i‬النية‬
‫‪, . 52 B‬‬ ‫‪.‬فاعل‬
‫‪, . 116‬ت‬
‫‪i‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫‪I‬‬

‫‪.i‬التثنية على التوكيد‬

‫‪, . 62D‬‬ ‫‪.plu‬فاعيل‬
‫‪, . fr.,i. 228r‬ت‬‫‪A‬‬
‫‪,..i‬الجدد‬
‫‪195i‬‬
‫‪D‬‬ ‫‪.ii‬التفسير‬
‫‪, . 123 A‬‬
 ‫‪1. Technical Terms, Mnemonic Words, Paradigms, etc. 397‬‬

‫‪ . 115B,i‬تفعال‬
‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪116 D, 117 B‬‬ ‫‪, .166 B‬ا‬
‫‪.i‬لتعبير‬
‫‪intens . adj . , i. 138 D.‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, .318;i.74‬ألتثير‬ ‫‪B,216c,268A‬‬
‫‪ . 115 c,i‬تفعال‬
‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪116 D, 117 B‬‬ ‫‪.‬لغرير أو التكرار‬ ‫‪i,28‬‬
‫‪, . 74B‬ا‬ ‫‪i‬‬‫‪2c‬‬
‫‪intens . adj., i . 138 D.‬‬
‫‪.122iD‬‬
‫‪,.i‬التمييز‬
‫‪, .116i‬تفقال‬
‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪A, 117A‬‬ ‫‪124iB‬‬
‫فعالة‬ ‫‪intens. adj., i. 138 D.‬‬ ‫‪..i‬تمييز العدد‬
‫‪ii. 124 , 125 A.‬‬
‫‪... , i. 139 D.‬‬ ‫الكيير‬
‫‪,‬تفعالة‬ ‫‪...‬‬
‫‪i. 140 A.‬‬ ‫المساحة‬
‫‪.‬فعل‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪ , . 116‬ت‬ ‫‪D‬‬ ‫المقياس‬
‫‪125 A.‬‬
‫‪.i‬تفل‬
‫‪, . 36 c‬‬ ‫الوزن‬
‫‪.i‬فعل‬
‫‪, . 116 A‬ت‬ ‫‪,.ii327 ..‬النار في العمل‬
‫‪ . 115 B,i‬تفعله‬
‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪116cD,122 c‬‬ ‫‪.‬الثير‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, . 247c‬‬
‫‪, . 115i‬تفعل‬
‫‪.‬ة‬ ‫‪B, 116 D‬‬ ‫‪, .i 12 ..‬التنوين‬
‫‪.i‬عله‬ ‫‪., i.138s‬‬
‫‪. adjen‬‬
‫‪, nt‬تف‬ ‫‪D‬‬ ‫‪.‬و ‪ .ii 390‬تنوين الترنم‬
‫‪ ,.i 48 .‬تفعل‬ ‫‪,.i‬النوي يطریپ‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪. 390c‬‬
‫‪.i‬تفعت‬
‫‪, . 117c‬‬ ‫‪.‬نوين المين‬ ‫‪iB‬‬
‫‪ . 235‬ت‬
‫‪.‬يفعلن ‪, for‬تفعلن‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, . 56‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪.‬تنوين الكير‬
‫‪, . 23‬‬ ‫‪5c‬‬
‫‪.‬ول‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, . 115D‬تفع‬ ‫‪,116 D‬‬ ‫‪, .i‬التنوين الدال على المائة‬
‫‪.‬ل‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, . 115B‬تفعي‬ ‫‪, 116 cD‬‬ ‫‪235 B.‬‬

‫‪, .i 358 .‬تفاعيل ‪... , .pl‬‬ ‫‪ i.235c‬تنوين العوض‬

‫‪.‬تفعيلة‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, . 123‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫‪.‬التنوين الغالي‬ ‫‪ip‬‬
‫‪, . 390‬‬
‫‪, nt‬تف‬
‫‪.i‬عيله‬ ‫‪., i. 139s‬‬
‫‪. adjen‬‬ ‫‪p‬‬ ‫‪.‬نوين المقابلة‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, . 235‬ت‬ ‫‪B‬‬
‫‪.‬تقدیری‬ ‫‪iB‬‬
‫‪, . 246‬‬ ‫‪.‬وابع‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, . 272‬الت‬ ‫‪D, 282 i‬‬
‫‪B, 283A‬‬

‫‪..i35i‬تقطيع‬ ‫‪8c‬‬ ‫‪.‬و ‪,.ii 354‬التوجيه‬

‫ت ‪ .‬در‬
‫‪, .286ci‬القلي‬
‫‪.‬ل‬ ‫‪; ii. 216c‬‬ ‫‪.‬التوسع‬ ‫‪19i‬‬
‫‪, .i‬‬ ‫‪1B‬‬
‫‪. 276i‬‬
‫‪.i‬تقليل القلة‬ ‫‪D‬‬ ‫التأكيد ‪. See‬اوكيد‬
‫‪398‬‬ ‫‪Inde.ces.‬‬

‫‪.i‬جمع ليس علی زنته واحد‬

‫‪, . 245c‬‬
‫‪,.. i‬الاء المتت‬
‫‪4B‬‬ ‫‪, .i 191‬الجمع الاملصتحشحر‬ ‫‪..‬‬
‫‪,.ii195 ..‬الثبات أو الثبوت‬
‫‪,.i 29 ..‬ثلاثي‬ ‫‪.ii‬جملة‬
‫‪. 115c, 250 B‬‬
‫ج‬ ‫‪. 251 A‬‬
‫‪ ,.ii‬جملة اسمية‬
‫‪.‬لجار‬
‫‪, .235B‬ا‬
‫‪i‬‬ ‫‪.i‬جملة اسمية مثبتة‬
‫‪, . 175 D‬‬
‫‪ ,‬جار ومجرور‬ ‫‪ , .ii‬جملة جارية مجرى الظرفية ‪ii.251A,2536,269 D,‬‬
‫‪337 A.‬‬
‫‪253 B.‬‬
‫‪.‬لج‬ ‫‪iB‬‬
‫‪, . 235‬ا‬ ‫‪.i‬جملة حالية‬
‫‪ . 68 D, 333‬و‬
‫‪i‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬
‫‪.‬د‬
‫‪.ii‬جر الجوار أو المجاورة‬
‫‪, .234E‬‬ ‫‪ ,.i‬جمة ذا وجهين‬ ‫‪. 256i‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬
‫‪ ,.i‬جزع‬
‫‪. 358i‬‬
‫‪c‬‬ ‫‪ ,.ii 2531 , 201 ..‬جملة فظعرفلية‬
‫‪.i‬جزاء الشرط‬
‫‪, . 15 A‬‬ ‫‪ii. 251 B.‬‬
‫‪ , .i 13 .8‬جزم جزمة‬ ‫‪.‬جمع القلة ‪ See‬جموع القلة‬
‫‪.‬لجماع‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, . 52B‬ا‬
‫‪.i‬لجماعة‬
‫‪, . 180 D‬ا‬
‫الكثرة‬ ‫‪.‬‬

‫الكثرة ‪See‬‬
‫‪i‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬
‫‪,.i‬الجميع‬
‫‪. 52c‬‬
‫‪.‬اللتكجسميعر‬
‫‪, . 52‬ا‬
‫‪i. 102A .‬‬ ‫‪.omitted‬جواب إن‬
‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪,ii. 17 A‬‬
‫‪. ii. 216 C.‬‬
‫>‬

‫‪i. 231 C,‬‬

‫الجمع‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫الشرط‬ ‫‪. ii. 15 A.‬‬
‫>‬

‫‪, .191 D‬أ‬

‫‪.i‬لجمع الشال‬ ‫‪, i, 175D.‬‬
‫القسيم‬
‫جمع السلامة‬ ‫‪... , omitted ,, ii .. 8c.‬‬
‫تو‬
‫‪.‬لخمع الصحيح‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, . 191p‬ا‬ ‫‪.‬لجوار‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, . 278‬ا‬ ‫‪D‬‬
‫‪ .i‬القلة‬
‫‪, . 169 , 234 B ; ii‬جمع‬ ‫ج‬
‫‪234 D, 235 B.‬‬
‫‪,.ii‬الحاشي‬
‫‪.371 D‬‬
‫‪ , . 170i‬جمع‬
‫‪ .‬الكثرة‬ ‫‪A, 234 B; ii‬‬
‫‪234 D, 235 B.‬‬ ‫‪.i‬الحاضر‬
‫‪, . 51 D‬‬
 ‫‪I. Technical Terms, Mnemonic Words, Paradigms, etc. 399‬‬

‫‪,.ii‬حرف جر ‪ i. 51D; ii.5c, 19 , 20 B,‬الحال‬

‫‪. 46 B‬‬
‫‪21 B, 38c, 50c, 104 A, 112 ---‬‬ ‫‪ii. 335 B.‬‬
‫‪.‬و ‪120 A , 196‬‬ ‫الحصر‬
‫‪i . 287 A.‬‬
‫‪ ,.i‬كال غير مؤكدة‬ ‫‪. 115iD‬‬ ‫الردع‬
‫منتقلة‬ ‫‪ii. 114C.‬‬
‫‪...‬‬ ‫‪.i‬حرف ساكن‬
‫‪, .13B‬‬
‫‪.ii‬ال مؤكدة‬
‫‪ , . 115D, 120 A‬ح‬ ‫‪.i‬حرف شرط‬
‫‪, . 292 D‬‬
‫مقارن‬ ‫عطفا ‪... ii . 203, 113D , 197B,‬‬ ‫‪i. 290D ; ii . 147B.‬‬
‫‪288 B.‬‬

‫مقدر‬ ‫‪...‬‬ ‫‪. ii. 19 , 113 D, 197 B ,‬‬

‫‪7‬‬
‫‪ .i‬متحرك‬
‫‪, .13B; ii.355B‬حرف‬
‫‪288 B.‬‬ ‫مخفف‬ ‫ر‬
‫>‬ ‫‪.‬و ‪.i 14‬‬
‫ته و‬ ‫ر‬
‫‪.i‬ر ‪ ...‬منتقلة‬
‫‪. 114C‬‬
‫‪i‬‬ ‫مشدد‬

‫‪,.ii93 .‬حرف الدبة ‪,.i147 B..1‬حتى العاطفة أو يتعطف‬

‫‪,‬حتى يلغاية أو انتهاء الغاية‬ ‫‪, .i.51‬الخرفان اللويتان‬
‫‪.i‬لحدوث‬
‫‪, , 195 D‬ا‬ ‫‪.i‬كة‬
‫‪ , . 88 ; ii.355 D‬حر‬
‫‪3:55i‬‬
‫‪,.. i‬الحذر‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫‪.‬حركة بين الضم والكسر‬ ‫‪iB‬‬
‫‪, .84‬‬
‫‪.‬حرف‬ ‫‪, . 278c‬‬
‫‪i‬‬ ‫‪,.i‬الحروف الأسلية‬
‫‪. 4D‬‬
‫‪.i‬حرف الاستثناء‬
‫‪, . 292p‬‬
‫‪i. 282 B.‬‬
‫‪, .i 278 ..‬حروف الإضافة‬
‫الإستفهام‬ ‫‪ , .i‬حروف الحضيض والعرض‬
‫‪.‬و ‪.ii 390‬‬
‫الإطلاق‬ ‫‪310c.‬‬

‫ترتیہ‬ ‫‪i. 290 , 293 B.‬‬ ‫‪ , .i .18‬حروف الهجي‬

‫‪i. 278 D.‬‬
‫تعجب‬ ‫‪ii . 122 D.‬‬ ‫الجر‬
‫‪, i, B.‬‬
‫التعريف‬ ‫‪i. 269 A.‬‬
‫الحلق‬
‫تعليل‬ ‫‪.i‬‬
‫‪ . 293D‬ر‬ ‫‪, ...‬الحروف الحلقة‬
‫‪ow‬‬

‫>‬ ‫‪i. 268 A ; i. 92 c.‬‬ ‫‪.i‬حروف الفض‬

‫‪, .278D‬‬
‫ر‬
‫‪i. 282 D.‬‬
‫التنفيس‬ ‫‪,.i 15 ..‬الحروف الليبية أو الدولقي‬
‫الثوقع‬ ‫‪ii. 4 B.‬‬
‫‪.i‬الحروف الجوية‬ ‫‪,.5A‬‬
 ‫‪400‬‬
‫‪Indeares.‬‬

‫‪.‬حروف الشرط‬ ‫‪ic‬‬

‫‪, .290‬‬
‫خ‬
‫‪.‬بر ‪, .4ci‬‬
‫‪.‬الحروف الشفهية أو الشفوية‬ ‫‪, . 251i‬الخ‬
‫‪6, 255B‬‬
‫رق و‬ ‫‪ -‬و‬
‫‪, .i.15‬الحروق الشمسية‬ ‫‪.‬خبر مقدم‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, . 253‬‬ ‫‪4, i‬‬
‫‪257c‬‬
‫‪, .i 290 ..‬حروف العطف‬ ‫‪,.i‬خبر إن‬
‫‪. 80i‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫العلة‬ ‫گان‬ ‫‪ii . 100 B.‬‬
‫‪ i. 5 B.‬ر‬
‫‪9‬‬

‫لا‬ ‫‪ii. 98 B.‬‬

‫‪, .i.15‬الروف القمرية‬
‫‪.ii‬الخروج‬
‫‪, .353A‬‬
‫الثوية‬ ‫‪ .i4c‬ر‬ ‫‪,..i86ic‬خطاب‬
‫‪,.i‬حروف البين‬‫‪. 5B‬‬ ‫‪.‬فض‬
‫‪, . 235i‬الخ‬
‫‪8, 279A‬‬
‫‪, .i .58‬الحروف اللينة‬ ‫‪.‬لخفيف‬
‫‪, . i‬ا‬
‫‪367 D‬‬
‫‪, .i 9 .‬حروف الهد‬
‫‪.‬الروف المشبهة بالفعل‬
‫‪, .i‬‬ ‫‪.‬لدخيل ‪80B‬‬ ‫‪, . 35‬ا‬
‫‪i‬‬ ‫‪3B‬‬
‫‪,.i‬الحروف المصدرية‬ ‫‪.252iA‬‬ ‫‪, .i 259 .‬الدعامة‬
‫‪.‬حروف المضارعة‬ ‫‪iB‬‬
‫‪, . 56‬‬
‫المعجم‬ ‫‪i. 1 A.‬‬ ‫‪.‬و الحال‬ ‫‪iB‬‬
‫‪, . 117‬‬
‫‪, .i .48‬الحروف المعجمة‬
‫‪,.i‬حروف المناداة‬
‫‪.85A‬‬‫‪i‬‬ ‫‪.‬الرابط‬
‫‪, .i‬‬ ‫‪256i‬‬‫‪B‬‬
‫‪, .i .48‬الحروف المهملة‬ ‫‪, ii. 312 A, 319 BD, 322 ..‬الراجع‬
‫‪, .ii 85 .8‬حروف النداء‬ ‫‪.‬اعی‬
‫‪, . 29i‬رب‬ ‫‪8, 47B‬‬
‫‪ .ii 351 .8‬ورثا ‪,.i .58‬الحروف التطعية أو التطعية‬
‫‪.‬م ‪, .ii 362‬الرجز‬
‫‪ , .18.i‬حروف الهجاء‬
‫‪.i‬الروف‬
‫‪, . 353ip‬‬
‫‪, .i.14‬الحروف الهجائية‬ ‫‪, . 355i‬‬
‫‪,.i‬الرس‬ ‫‪A‬‬
‫‪.‬لحكاية‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, . 313‬ا‬ ‫‪AB,i‬‬
‫‪314 A‬‬
‫‪.i‬رفع‬
‫‪, .84,235 A‬ال‬
‫‪ , .ii 30 ..‬حكاية حال ماضية‬ ‫‪.i‬الرقم الہندی‬
‫‪, .28p‬‬
 ‫‪I. Technical Terms, Mnemonic Words , Paradigms, etc. 401‬‬

‫‪.ii‬الم‬
‫‪, . 366 p‬‬ ‫‪,.ii‬قطر‬
‫‪. 351c‬‬
‫‪ ,‬شهر‬

‫‪.‬لروم‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, . 27‬ا‬ ‫‪6c‬‬ ‫‪.‬لشعر‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, . 350‬ا‬ ‫‪A‬‬
‫‪352i‬‬
‫‪,..i‬الروی‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫‪,.i‬شکل‬
‫‪. 8B‬‬
‫ز‬
‫‪. 21iB‬‬
‫‪,.i‬الرمان الحاضر‬ ‫به ‪ , ii.117 B, 119‬صاحب الحال‬
‫‪, . 238 , i‬ا‬
‫‪.i‬لصدر‬ ‫‪351c‬‬
‫‪abs, indef. relat. cl. , ii. 38 c,‬‬
‫‪ , . 13 Bi‬ساك‬
‫‪.‬ن‬ ‫‪; i.355 BD‬‬
‫‪216B, 317‬‬
‫‪.‬السبب‬ ‫‪283i‬‬
‫‪, .i‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬
‫‪, i. 105 A ; ii . 114 c , 277 B,‬الضفة‬
‫‪,.ii‬سبب‬ ‫‪.358 D‬‬ ‫‪283A B.‬‬

‫‪.i‬س‪.‬ب‪.‬ب خثفقیيلف‬
‫‪, . 358 D‬‬ ‫‪, .i 187 .8‬صقةحاثادبثتةة‬
‫‪i . 187 C.‬‬

‫‪, . 35i‬ال‬
‫‪.‬شجع‬ ‫‪1 B, 368 D‬‬ ‫‪,.ii276 ..‬الصفة ياشي و الترح‬
‫‪,.ii362 ..‬الشريع‬ ‫المدح و الدم‬
‫‪ .i‬فعل‬
‫‪, . 46 A‬‬ ‫‪274iB‬‬
‫‪,..i‬الصقة بالمصدر‬
‫‪, . 13 A; i. 355 D‬الشح‬
‫‪.i‬ون‬ ‫الصفات المشبهة بأسماء الفاعل و‬
‫‪.i‬الشنب‬
‫‪, . 36A‬‬ ‫‪ .i 133 ..‬المفعول‬
‫‪, . 233 D‬‬
‫‪.ii‬الشليقة‬ ‫‪, .i .198‬الصلة‬
‫‪.‬لسناد‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, , 356‬ا‬ ‫‪c‬‬ ‫‪def. relat. cl. , i. 105 B ; ii .‬‬
‫‪.‬و ‪, .ii 250‬السند‬ ‫‪317 C.‬‬

‫ش‬
‫‪áhæi, in metre, ii. 352 c.‬‬
‫‪.i 50 B‬‬
‫‪, .‬صيغة الفاعل والمفعول ‪, .i 179 8, 181 8, 190 ,‬شبه الجمع‬
‫‪224 D ,‬‬ ‫‪234 A.‬‬ ‫ض‬

‫‪.‬شبه الفعل‬ ‫‪284i‬‬

‫‪, .i‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫‪di‬‬
‫‪. etdCorr‬‬
‫‪,-A‬الاد المبطوحة‬
‫‪genda ( Vol. i. 6 c).‬‬
‫‪, .i .140‬شدة‬
‫‪i58i‬‬
‫‪,..3‬الضرب‬ ‫‪c‬‬
‫‪, .ii 15 ..‬الشرط‬ ‫‪51‬‬
‫‪W. II ,‬‬
 ‫‪402‬‬ ‫‪Indeares .‬‬

‫‪.‬ورة الشعر‬
‫‪ , . 236Di‬ضر‬
‫‪; ii 374 .8‬‬ ‫‪.‬لعجمة‬
‫‪ , . 245‬ا‬
‫‪i‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬
‫‪ , .i‬مة‬
‫‪, . 7D‬‬ ‫‪, .i 245 .‬العدل‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪, . 53 B, 105BDi‬الضمير‬
‫‪.i‬لعروض ‪; iii. 251c‬‬
‫‪, , 3:58c‬ا‬
‫‪ , .ii 914, 283 4,‬عطف البيان العائد ‪, and‬التراجع الرابط ‪See‬‬
‫و منع‬
‫‪286 D.‬‬
‫‪ .i‬يير التأكيد‬
‫‪, . 265A‬‬
‫الشأن‬ ‫>‬ ‫‪i. 285 A,‬‬ ‫; ‪293 B‬‬ ‫التوكيد‬ ‫‪, ii. 91 4, 282B.‬‬
‫‪ii. 81 c D, 299 B.‬‬ ‫الق‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪ii. 90 B, 287 A.‬‬
‫العماد‬ ‫‪...‬‬
‫‪, ii. .259c.‬‬
‫)‬
‫‪, .i 235 .‬علم الإضائة‬
‫الفضل‬ ‫>‬ ‫‪ii. 259 B, 264 C D.‬‬
‫الفاعلية‬ ‫‪i. 235 A.‬‬
‫القصة‬ ‫‪7‬‬
‫المفعولية ; ‪i. 285 4, 293 B‬‬ ‫‪i. 235 B.‬‬
‫‪ii. 81 C, 299 B.‬‬
‫‪.‬الضمير المجهول‬
‫‪, .i‬‬
‫‪214iD‬‬ ‫‪.‬جنس‬
‫‪, .107i‬علم‬
‫‪c; i. 243c‬‬
‫ط‬
‫شخصی‬ ‫‪i. 107 D.‬‬

‫‪,.ii 364 ..‬الطويل‬ ‫‪.‬لعلمية‬

‫‪, . 245B‬ا‬
‫‪i‬‬
‫ظ‬
‫‪,.ii 166 ..‬على الاستعلاء‬
‫‪, .i .60‬الظاء المقالة‬ ‫‪.‬على التقدير‬ ‫‪,. i‬‬‫‪5lD‬‬
‫‪.‬ظاهر‬ ‫‪iB‬‬
‫‪, . 246‬‬ ‫المعن‬ ‫‪ii. 297 C.‬‬

‫‪.‬لظاهر‬
‫‪, .105‬ا‬
‫‪iB‬‬ ‫‪,..i‬العماد‬‫‪259ic‬‬
‫‪.‬ظرف‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, . 112‬ال‬ ‫‪,253ci‬‬
‫‪, 270B‬‬ ‫‪ , i, 250 .‬هدة‬
‫وره‬
‫‪ .ii 144 .8‬وعن يلبغي و المجاوزة‬
‫ع‬
‫‪.‬ائد‬
‫‪ . 31i‬والع‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪2A,319 BD‬‬‫‪,322 A‬‬ ‫‪.‬و ‪, .i 290‬العواطف‬
‫‪.‬امل‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪ , . 27‬ع‬ ‫‪5B‬‬ ‫‪.‬عين الفعل‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, . 30A‬‬
‫‪ ,..356‬يوب الشعر ‪, ii.113 D;suppressed ,‬عامل الحال‬
‫‪iiB‬‬
‫‪ii. 120 A.‬‬
‫د‬
‫‪, .i.118‬عامل معنوى‬ ‫‪.‬الغائب‬ ‫غ‬
‫‪ic‬‬
‫‪, . 52‬‬
‫‪.‬لعجز‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, . 238‬ا‬ ‫‪c, i‬‬
‫‪351c‬‬ ‫‪.‬ير جملة‬ ‫‪iB‬‬
‫‪, .108‬غ‬
 I. Technical Terms, Mnemonic Words, Paradigms, etc. 403

‫غیر مممتكعدن‬, .i 30 ‫م‬. ‫ل‬.i

‫فعا‬, ., i. 111nf
, 122 B; adj ,
i. 133 , 136 A.
i. 234 D.
jlés, intens. adj., i. 137 a ; with
‫منصرف‬ the accus. or , ii. 70 B.
jles, proper names, i. 243 D.
‫قاء االلججزاویب‬,.i
. 262c
i ‫قال‬, plur,fr, i. 220 c, 240 .8
.ii 30 ‫و‬.
... )
ués, imper., i. 62 B ; proper
names, i. 244 A ; as vocative,
‫قاء الشبب أو السببية‬,.ii
. 30c i. 244 B.
‫قاء الفعل‬, .i 30 .. ‫فعال‬, inf.I.,i. 111 D, 113 B 122B ;
‫قال‬.i
, . 32c inf. III., i. 116 A, 117 AD ;
subst. , i. 175 D ; plur. fr., i.
icts, participle, i. 131 c, 133 B ; 202 D.
.ii 323 0; = ‫فعل‬, i. 132 B ; ‫ل‬.
-
‫فقا‬, .i II., i. n f
115c; inf. II ,
verbal adj ., i. 136 B ; fem .,
i. 187 A. i. 116 A ; inf. VIII. , i. 116 B.

‫لفاعل‬.i
‫ا‬, .123 1, i
251c ‫فعال‬, inf. I., i. 111 D, 113C D,
122 B ; adj., i. 133 , 136 A ;
‫اذ من الخبر‬ ‫اع‬.i
‫ق‬, .257A subst., I. 1755 D, 176 CD ; plur.
fi , i. 204 D.
‫قاعة‬, intens. adj., i. 139 A, 177 B ;
collective, i. 233 A. .in
‫فال‬, ten
. adj s
., i.137 D ; plur
fr. , i. 207 B.
‫عووللة‬.int
‫قفاغ‬, .adjens
.,i. 137 D
i. 139 D.
jles, numerals, i.241 D, 262 D.
‫لاث‬.secondary
‫فعا‬ plur ,i. 232B
‫ فتح فتحة‬i1.77C.
JO
‫فعالة‬, inf., i. 111D, 112D, 113 A ;
‫الغرد‬. i
, . 52 B subst ., i. 159 A.
‫الفصل‬,.i
. 259i
)B äilés, intens, adj., i. 139c ; subst.,
i. 176 c ; collective, i. 233 A.
‫لة‬.i
‫فض‬, . 113,123 i
, 250c
‫لة‬..inf
‫فعا‬, ., i. lllD, 114 A ; subst
‫قائل‬, plur. fr ., i. 215 A, 222 D, i. 159 A, 176 A ; plur, fr., i.
223 4, 239 D ; secondary plur, 224 A.
fr ., i . 231 D.
‫لة‬.i
‫فعا‬, .,i. ull D ;nf
subst ., i 159 8,
Sites, secondary plur. , i. 232 B. 176 BD.
404 Enderes.

‫الة‬.i
‫ ق‬, nt
. adjen
.,i. 139c
s ‫عل‬.ad
‫ ف‬, .,i.133 D, 136
j A
jules, plur. fr.,i. 226 c,239 D. ‫فعل‬, inf.,i. 110 ;adj., i. 133D ;
subst. , i. 158 C ; numerals, i.
‫فعالة‬.plu
‫ و‬,fr.,i r 230 .8
264 B ; for ‫فعل‬,.ii
. 384c
‫فعالی‬, plur,fr
. .,i. 221 B, 240 .8
‫فعالی‬ .
‫الفعل‬, . 29 Ai
; ii. 251c
Cíles, plur. fr., i.i. 222 B.
‫الفعل الأجوف‬.i
, . 81c
‫لی‬-i
‫فعا‬, nt
, adj.,ien
. 165 B;s
nu ‫به‬
‫الاصم‬
‫مه‬
i. 68 B.
meral adj., i. 263 c.
‫ عالية‬.inf
, .,i. 111D ‫فعل تعجب‬,.i 124.. A.

‫فعاليل‬.plu
, , fr.,i r ‫فعل جامد‬,.ii
228 8, 239 .. . 15D
‫الین‬..231.
‫فع‬, plur,ft.,i ary ‫الم‬
second i . 53 A.

.i
‫فعل‬, . 30 A, 49 D ‫ صحيح‬..
‫ل الدال على الغلبة‬.i
‫فع‬, .43D,58B ‫فعل غير متصرف‬.ii
, .124A
‫قل‬. i
, .31 A ‫متعت‬ ... ) i. 30 A.

‫فعل‬, for .i
‫فعل‬, . 97c ; ii. 384c ‫فعل الفاعل‬.i
, . 50 B
.inf
‫فعل‬, ., i. 110 , 112 D ; adj , | ‫فعل ما لم يسم فاعله‬.i
, . 50 B
i. 133 , 136 A ; subst. , i. 158 c,
192c ; plur,ft.,i.224c ;used | ‫الفعل المبنى أو المصوغ يتفاعل‬
instead of ‫فاعل‬, i. 132 D ; ‫و على الفاعل‬.i
‫أ‬, . 50 B
superl. with genitive, ii. 218 B,
226 C. ‫الفعل الميني أو المصوغ المفعول‬
‫فعل‬, inf., i. 110 , 112 D , 113 8, ‫و على المفعول‬.i
‫أ‬, . 50 B
. B
121 ; adj.,i. 133C ; plur ‫وفعل متصرف‬.i i
.124A
fr. , i. 224 B.
‫ر‬

jës, proper names,, i.. 243 A ‫الفعل المضاعف‬,.

. 68B
i
.i
‫ فعل‬. 30 B, 49 cD ‫عل معتل‬.i
‫ف‬, . 53A
‫عل‬. i
‫ف‬, .,i c; adjf
. 110n , i. 133 ‫و‬c, ‫الفعل الناقص‬, .i 88 .8
136 a ; subst ., i. 159c ; with les, inf., i. 110 d, 121 B ; plur.
accus. or J, ii. 70 B. fi., i. 202 B.
 I. Technical Terms, Mnemonic Words, Paradigms, etc. 405

üles, intens. adj., i. 139 B ; plur.

‫ف‬, p, l
‫عل‬. . 207rB
fr.,iu fr., i. 208 B.
‫فعل‬, subst.., i. 159 c ; for ‫فعة فعل‬.inf
, ., i. 111 A
ii. 385 B.
Dles, inf. , i. 111 B ; fem . adj., i.
‫فعل‬, . 97ci
‫فعل‬, for. ; ii . 384c 185 A B, 240 D.
‫ عل‬,inf.,i. 110D ; adj.,i. 133 D ; ‫قع‬.inf
, .,i. 111 B
subst. , i. 158 c ; plur. fr. , i .
200 A ; numeral, i. 263 D. ‫فعلا‬, plur, fr ., i. 218 D , 225 B ,
240 A.
‫ عل‬, .
. i
., i. 110 121 B ;f
D, n adj i.
133 D ; plur, fr., i. 199 B. ‫ غلاث‬for ‫دث‬.i
‫ مح‬.192c,sqq
Jei, proper names, i. 243 D ; as
vocative, i. 244 B.
‫ل‬. i
‫قلا‬, . 117cD, 118A
‫ل‬j‫ ع‬, intens,adj
. .,i. 137D ; plur: ‫علالة‬.i
‫ف‬, .123 A
fr ., i. 206 D. bles, inf., i. 111 B ; adj., fem ..
‫ف‬, . 159 c
‫عل‬.i ‫فعلانة‬, . 133 Di
. , 1846, 241 B
jes, proper names, i. 243 A. ‫ فعلان‬.a dj‫فعلی‬, i. 133D,
., fem
je , adj., i. 133 D ; plur. fr., i. i. . A
136 , 184B, 241B ;fem ‫فعلآ‬
200 D ; numeral, i. 263 D. i . 185 B.

‫فعته‬,inf.,i. 110 D ; subst .,i. 123A, ‫ا‬.inf

‫فعل‬, .,i. 111 , 113 c; adj,
158C. i . 241 C.

‫فعنة‬ names of men , i. 193 A. isés, inf., i. 111 c ; plur. fr., ii..
dles, inf., i. 110 D, 121 c ; plur. 216 A ; proper naines, i. 242 D.
fr. , i . 207 c . jsie , inf. , i. 111 c ; adj., fem .
‫لة‬. ; subst.,if
.111 A n
‫فع‬, .,ii .159 ‫ علانة‬, i. 133 D, 1846, 241B ;
; subst.. i. 123 D , plur, fr., i. 217 ,
‫فعلة‬, .inf,
, 175 , 192c ; c
158 . ‫قعت‬, . 47B,i
plur , fr , . 48 c, 120 D
i . 169 D , 209 B.
‫عتلة‬.i
‫ق‬, . 117cD
‫ف‬, p, l
‫علة‬. . 208rD
fr.,iu
. 384iA
‫فعلنا = فعلن‬,.i
‫ف‬, ., inf
‫علة‬.i . 111A , ., i.nf 111c
., ist
;.sub 158 ‫و‬,
‫عوت‬.i
‫ علة‬, .inf ,
175 , 192c. ‫قوتی‬, .inf ,
406 Indexes.

‫علولة‬.i
‫ق‬, . 120 A ‫فيعيل‬, i. 166 c, 170 ..
‫قعل‬, ., i. 111 ; femnf
‫ی‬.i . adj.,i ‫فعيل‬,inf.,i. 112 8,113cD, 122A ;
184 B, 241 B ; plur. fr. , i. 220 A, adj., i. 133 , 136 A - D , 146 A D,
240 A. 186 A ; with accus. or y, ii.
‫قعی‬.inf
, ., i. 111 A 70 B ; with passive sense , ii .
196 B ; subst , i. 154 , 159 B ,
stes, inf., i. 111 B ; plur. fr.,i.i 176 D ; plur, fr., i. 223 c ;
220 C. numeral, i. 263 D.
‫ی‬.i lll B ; femnt
‫ عل‬, , i. 111 . adj.,i ‫فعيل = فعل‬, .i 167 .8
184 CD , 240 D.
‫عيل = فعيل‬.i
‫ ف‬.136D
‫علی‬.inf
‫ف‬, .,i. lllB ‫يل‬.int
‫فع‬, .adjens
.,i. 137 D
‫علی‬..154B
i ‫فعيل‬ 1. 138 A.

‫قول‬, inf.,i.112 A ; adj.,i. 133D. i

, ‫فعيل‬, . 154c,159B
, 166 B, 174c
136 c , 146 D, 185 B ; with
accus. or
‫ول‬ ii. 70 B. ‫فعي‬, .,i. 112nf
‫لة‬.i B ; intens. adj ,
i . 139 B ; subst , i . 154 B, 159B.
‫ل‬.int
‫قو‬, ,adjens
.,i.137D
‫ فعول‬, inf., i. 112 AD, 113A , 121 D ; ‫عية‬.int
‫ف‬, ,adjens
.,i. 139 c
plur. fr., i. 205 B. ‫ة‬.i
‫ عين‬, .154 B, 159 B
‫ول‬.intens
, ,adj.,i. 137 D ‫ة‬.‫فعي‬, . 115iD, 116c
‫فع‬,
‫ولا‬.seco ndary
pl., i. 232B . ‫فعیلی‬, . 115 ci
, 116c, 117B
äises, inf. , i. 112 A ; intens. ,
adj. r
‫ و‬, , fr.lu
‫اعل‬.p , i. 213 c, 239 D
i. 139 B ; fem . of ‫فعول‬, .i
185c ; subst. , i. 155 D. ‫ف‬, p,frl
‫واعیل‬. . 228rA
.,iu
‫عولة‬.in
‫ف‬, .ten s ‫و‬.
adj.,i 139 ‫في الظرفية‬.ii
. 156c
‫فعولة‬, inf.,i. 112AD, 113 A, 121 D ; ‫فيعا‬, . 116A, 117 A
‫ل‬.i
plur, fr., i. 223 p.
‫فيل‬, ‫فيل‬, adj. (for ‫(فعيل‬, .i 146 8,
‫ ق‬.,i.nf
‫وية‬.i 112 A 155 B.

‫فعولية‬, .inf, ‫ق‬

‫ يعل‬i. 166 B,167 D, 174 ‫و‬. ‫قافية‬,.ii
. 351c
 ‫‪I. Technical Terms, Mnemonic Words, Paradigms, etc. 407‬‬

‫‪.‬م ‪, .ii 354‬قافية مؤسسة‬ ‫‪ ,.ii125 c.‬قبر البرية‬

‫مجردة‬ ‫‪, . 105 i‬العنا‬
‫‪.‬ية‬ ‫‪c ; ii. 125c‬‬
‫‪.‬كنية‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, . 107‬‬ ‫‪D‬‬
‫مردفة‬
‫مغلقة‬ ‫>‬ ‫‪ii. 352 A.‬‬ ‫ل‬

‫مقيدة‬ ‫لا غنى لي أو مشبهة بليس‬

‫‪ii . 104 A.‬‬
‫‪.‬ائم مقام الفاعل‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, . 269‬ق‬ ‫‪BD‬‬
‫‪,.i‬قبو‬
‫‪. 8A‬‬ ‫‪ . 98in‬و‬
‫‪.i‬لا التبرئة‬
‫‪,.ii‬قد بلحقيق‬
‫‪. 4B‬‬ ‫‪.i‬لا الحجازية‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, .105A‬‬
‫لا ينفي الجنس أو تافية التي قد يتقريب الماضي من الممالي‬
‫‪ii. 4 B.‬‬ ‫‪ii. 98 A.‬‬

‫‪.‬د يثلي‬ ‫‪ic‬‬

‫‪ . 286‬ق‬ ‫‪.36i‬‬
‫‪,.i‬لا الهی‬ ‫‪B‬‬
‫‪175i‬‬
‫‪,..i‬القسم‬ ‫‪D‬‬
‫‪, .i 30 ..‬لازم‬
‫‪.i‬قصر‬
‫‪, . 24 D‬‬ ‫‪ósüí (the article), i.269 a.‬‬
‫‪. 351i‬‬
‫‪.i‬قصيدة‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫‪...‬‬ ‫‪ (, .i 30 ..‬فعل ‪ in‬ل ‪)the‬‬
‫‪, .ii276 ..‬القطع‬ ‫‪(, .28i‬‬
‫‪.‬ق ) لام الإبتداء‬ ‫‪3B‬‬
‫‪.ii‬قطعة‬
‫‪, . 351 A‬‬ ‫‪(, . i‬‬
‫‪ ) .‬اللام بلاختصاص‬ ‫‪149c‬‬
‫‪(, . i‬‬
‫‪.‬ك) الكاف يشبيه‬ ‫‪178 A‬‬ ‫للاشتقاق‬ ‫‪( ),‬‬
‫‪.362i‬‬
‫‪,.i‬العامل‬ ‫‪D‬‬ ‫پلاستغاثة‬ ‫‪( ), ii. 152 B.‬‬
‫‪.i‬أين الخلقة‬‫‪, . 81c‬‬ ‫‪.‬لام الأمر‬‫‪) (, . 291i‬‬‫‪B; ii. 35B‬‬
‫‪.‬ان الامه‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪ , .1001,10‬ك‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪4A,302A‬‬ ‫‪(, . 148 A‬‬
‫‪ ) .i‬الميلانتهاء‬
‫‪( ), ii. 151 D.‬‬
‫‪...‬‬

‫الشاقة‬ ‫‪302 A.‬‬

‫‪ii . 15 , 16 A, 101 D ,‬‬

‫التأريخ‬
‫وأخواتها‬ ‫‪( ), i. 152 D.‬‬
‫الشعب‬
‫>‬

‫‪103 D, 258 , 328 D.‬‬

‫سعدية‬ ‫‪( ), i. 148c .‬‬
‫‪ ,.i‬كسر كسرة‬
‫‪. 7c‬‬
‫‪i‬‬ ‫‪.‬ام التعريف‬ ‫‪articleh‬‬
‫‪) t‬ل‬ ‫‪e‬‬
‫‪),i. 269‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬
‫‪ ,.i‬كم الإستفهامية‬
‫‪. 125c‬‬
‫‪408‬‬ ‫‪Indeares.‬‬

‫‪ )the article(,‬اللام لتعريف الجنس‬ ‫‪ ) (.ii‬اللام بلين‬

‫‪, .149c‬‬
‫‪i. 269 B ; ii. 318 D.‬‬
‫الاصبة‬ ‫‪.‬و ‪) (, .i 291‬‬
‫‪ )the article(,‬اللام لتعريف العهد‬ ‫‪,.ii‬تغو‬
‫‪. 339 A‬‬
‫‪i. 269 C.‬‬

‫‪(, . 291ci‬‬
‫‪ ).‬اللام للعبيل‬ ‫‪.‬فطئ ‪;ii‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, .246B‬ت‬
‫‪.‬م ‪151‬‬ ‫‪.i‬قب‬
‫‪, .108 A‬ل‬
‫‪287 D.‬‬
‫‪.i‬أين المنيقة ‪Gl D,‬‬
‫‪ ) (, ii. 61‬اللام لتقوية العام‬ ‫‪, . 81D‬‬
‫‪ ) (,.ii‬ألم بلمليك‬
‫‪. 148c‬‬
‫‪ .277Di‬ما‬
‫‪.‬الإبهامنية زرق ‪ ،‬دم اوكيير أو التأكيد‬ ‫‪;ii 43 ,‬‬
‫‪276 B.‬‬
‫‪283 B.‬‬ ‫ر‬

‫‪. 29 A‬‬
‫‪(,.ii‬ل ) لام الجه‬ ‫ما معنى ليس أو شبهة بتيس‬
‫‪104‬‬
‫‪ii.‬‬ ‫‪A.‬‬
‫الجير‬ ‫‪148i‬‬
‫‪ ( ,..i‬ل )‬ ‫‪c‬‬
‫‪.i‬ما الشعبية‬
‫‪, . 98c‬‬
‫‪ ) articlehe‬لا‬
‫‪.t‬م الجنس‬ ‫‪ ....ii‬الحجازية ‪),i. 269 B‬‬
‫‪.105A‬‬
‫‪ ) 0.i‬لام جواب القسم‬
‫‪(, . 282D‬‬
‫‪, i.277c,‬ما الديمومة أو المانية‬
‫‪.i‬ل ) لا جواب تو و تو‬
‫‪(, . 283 A‬‬ ‫‪294 A ; ii. 17 C, 41 B, 102 A.‬‬

‫;‪ i.278 A‬ما الزائدة أو المزيدة‪. 148ci‬‬

‫‪ ) (.i‬اللام يشبه المليك‬
‫‪ () (.i‬اللام بتعلة‬
‫‪, . 151i‬‬
‫‪A‬‬ ‫‪.‬و ‪ii. 193 A, 215 B, 224‬‬

‫‪) article ),i e‬‬

‫‪.th‬لام العهد‬ ‫‪269 ..‬‬ ‫‪.i‬لشرطية‬
‫‪ , .277 B; ii.18 A‬ما ا‬
‫‪.‬ا الكائة ‪ ) (,.i‬اللام القارقة أو الفاصلة‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, .814‬م‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, 215‬‬ ‫‪Bc‬‬
‫‪283 B.‬‬
‫‪, .ii43 ..‬ما تأكيد معنى الشرط‬
‫‪.i‬لام الفعل‬
‫‪, . 30 A‬‬ ‫‪,.i ..81‬ما مزيدة يشكي‬
‫ی‬ ‫‪ ) (.i‬ه‬
‫‪, . 28 A‬‬ ‫ينفصل‬ ‫‪ii. 82 A.‬‬

‫‪ ,i. 277 B; ii.29 A,‬ما المصرية ‪(, .i 283 ..‬ق) المالوطئه يلقسم‬
‫‪ ) (.i‬الم المزحلقة‬
‫‪, . 285 B‬‬ ‫‪215 c, 219 A, 221 A, 252 A.‬‬

‫‪,.ii 18 ..‬ما مصدرية مافنييةة (لب) الأم أانلمثم توكيدا‬

‫‪ .ii.95‬والإضاقة‬ ‫ظر‬ ‫‪ii. 17 .‬‬
 ‫‪I. Technical Terms, Mnemonic Words, Paradigms, etc. 409‬‬

‫‪.‬موصوفة‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, . 273 c, 277‬ما ال‬ ‫‪.i‬متدارك | ‪A ; ii‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪. 355BD‬‬
‫‪319 B.‬‬
‫‪,.i‬المتدارك‬‫‪.365iB‬‬
‫‪ .‬الموصولة‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, . 273c‬ما‬‫‪; ii 320 ..‬‬ ‫‪.ii‬مترادف‬
‫‪, . 355 B‬‬
‫‪.i‬ما أفعله‬
‫‪, . 98 c‬‬ ‫‪, . 355B‬مراكب‬
‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬ ‫‪, 356 AA.‬‬
‫‪ .‬يسم فاعله‬ ‫‪.i‬صرف ‪. 269c‬‬
‫‪, . 50c; iii‬ما لم‬ ‫‪, . 118 , i‬م‬
‫‪123p‬‬
‫جامد‬ ‫‪. 346i‬‬
‫‪ ,.i‬ماض‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫‪.i‬مصل‬
‫‪, . 53 c‬‬
‫‪, . 51ci‬ا‬
‫‪.‬لماضي‬
‫وہ رگ به ر‬
‫‪l A.‬‬
‫‪; ii .18‬‬ ‫‪, .ii 152 .‬المتعجب منه‬
‫‪282i‬‬
‫‪,..i‬الموقد‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫‪,, . 30‬‬
‫‪.‬متعد‬ ‫‪i‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬
‫ہر‬
‫‪,..i‬الموقد‬‫‪28i‬‬
‫‪7c‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪.‬لمتقارب‬
‫‪, . 363p‬ا‬
‫‪, .i 52c, 177 .‬المؤنث‬ ‫‪i, i‬‬
‫‪.. 355‬تگاوس‬ ‫‪356 A‬‬
‫‪.i‬لمون الحقيقي‬
‫‪, .177c‬ا‬ ‫‪.i‬التكتم‬
‫‪, . 52c‬‬
‫‪.i‬لموت غير الحقيقي‬ ‫‪, . 177c‬ا‬ ‫‪ .‬من في الإسمية)‬ ‫‪iD‬‬
‫‪. 234‬‬
‫‪, .179 A‬ا‬
‫‪.i‬لمؤنث اللفظي‬ ‫‪.i‬متمكن أمكن‬ ‫‪, . 235 A‬‬
‫‪i . 177 D.‬‬
‫الجازی‬ ‫‪.i‬ممكن غير أمتن‬ ‫‪, . 2345A‬‬
‫المعنوي‬ ‫‪.ii‬متواتر‬
‫‪, . 355 BC‬‬
‫‪.i‬التی ‪,i. 318, 43 B,116 , 139 A,‬المبالغة‬ ‫‪,, . 52 B‬‬
‫‪150 C.‬‬
‫ہر‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫‪..‬المی پلتغرير و الكثير‬ ‫‪74B‬‬
‫‪, . 123 B, 251 i‬ال‬
‫‪.i‬مجد‬ ‫‪6, 255 B‬‬
‫ر‬ ‫ت‬ ‫ر‬
‫‪.i‬الجت‬
‫‪, . 368i‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪, ii. 253 A , 257 G, 258 ..‬مبتدا موخر‬
‫‪354i‬‬
‫‪,..i‬الهجري‬ ‫‪B‬‬
‫‪. 286 B‬‬
‫‪,.ii‬المبدل‬ ‫‪, . 60 D‬‬
‫‪.i‬الهجوم‬
‫‪.i‬بدل منه‬
‫‪, .286 B, 287 c‬الم‬ ‫‪, . i‬ا‬
‫‪.‬لمجموع‬ ‫‪52c‬‬
‫‪.‬بنی‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, . 23‬م‬ ‫‪4 D‬‬
‫‪, .i 50 ..‬المجهول‬
‫‪ii. 54 C.‬‬
‫‪.i‬الخاطب‬
‫‪, . 52c‬‬
‫‪123i‬‬
‫‪,..i‬المبین‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫‪.i‬ف‬
‫‪, . 14c ; ii.81c‬مق‬
‫در‬

‫‪, .i‬‬
‫‪.‬المثبوع‬ ‫‪272iD‬‬ ‫‪.i‬مث ‪,‬مدة‬
‫‪, . 24c‬‬
‫‪.i‬محرك‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪. 355B‬‬ ‫‪,.i 351 ..‬مديح‬ ‫‪52‬‬
‫‪W.IL.‬‬
‫‪410‬‬ ‫‪Indexes .‬‬

‫‪.ii‬المديد‬
‫‪, .367B‬‬ ‫‪,.ii122 ..‬المصدرالقلبي‬
‫و‬ ‫مهر‬
‫‪,i. 52 c,.177‬الذر‬ ‫الموكد‬ ‫‪, ii. 74 4 .‬‬

‫‪.‬رة‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪ , . 122‬م‬ ‫‪D‬‬ ‫الميهي‬ ‫‪...‬‬‫‪i. 119 , 126 C,‬‬
‫‪127 A C, 128 BD, 129 p.‬‬
‫‪.i‬مرتجل‬
‫‪, . 108c‬‬
‫‪,.ii‬مرثية‬
‫‪. 351A‬‬
‫‪ii‬‬
‫‪,..35‬مصرع ‪ ,‬مصراع‬ ‫‪1B‬‬
‫رو‬ ‫ر‬
‫‪ , .ii 363 3, 36.5 .1‬رقل‬ ‫‪, i. 60c; ii. 64B, 199 2,‬المضارع‬
‫‪364 D.‬‬

‫‪.‬المرفوع‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, . 60‬‬ ‫‪D‬‬ ‫)‬

‫‪.i‬المضارع المجزوم‬
‫‪, . 22n‬‬
‫مب‬ ‫‪, . 108 B‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬ ‫المرفوع‬ ‫>‬ ‫‪ii. 18 B.‬‬

‫‪.‬كب إسنادی‬ ‫‪i‬‬

‫‪ .108n‬مر‬ ‫‪,160B‬‬ ‫المنصوب‬ ‫‪.‬و ‪.ii 22 , 26‬‬
‫>‬

‫زجی‬ ‫‪, i. 108 c ; ii. 66 B, 119 c ,‬المضاف ‪160 c,‬‬

‫‪161 , 191 B, 196 B, 244 B,‬‬ ‫‪198 B, 200 4, 201 B.‬‬
‫‪245 B ; ii. 89 A.‬‬
‫وه ر وه ر‬
‫‪.‬المسبب‬ ‫‪283i‬‬
‫‪, .i‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬
‫)‪, i. 108 c, etc. (s‬ا‪(.‬لاملضماضفاف إليه‬
‫‪336i‬‬
‫‪,..i‬المستثنی‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪ , . 53 B , 105‬المضمر‬
‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪B D ; ii . 251 D‬‬
‫‪. 336i‬‬
‫‪,.i‬المستثنى منه‬ ‫‪A‬‬
‫‪,.i‬المستغاث‬
‫‪ i. 35 D, 36D, 38D, 40 ,‬مطاوع‬
‫‪i‬‬
‫‪.152B‬‬ ‫‪41C .‬‬

‫‪.ii‬المستغاث به‬
‫‪, . 152B‬‬ ‫‪.‬مطة‬
‫‪,.i‬‬
‫‪24c‬‬
‫‪.‬لمستغاث له أو من أجله‬ ‫‪.i‬لظهر‪i‬‬
‫‪, .152c‬ا‬ ‫‪, . 105B‬ا‬
‫هه ر هه ر‬

‫‪, . 51 i‬المس‬
‫‪.‬تقبل‬ ‫‪D ; ii. 21 B‬‬ ‫مع لمكان الإصطح‪B.‬اب‪ 164‬أو‪ ii.‬وقته‬
‫‪, . 250i‬‬
‫‪.i‬المسند‬ ‫‪B‬‬
‫‪.‬معرب‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, . 234‬‬ ‫‪D‬‬
‫‪.i‬لمسند إليه‬
‫‪, . 250B‬ا‬
‫‪.‬لمعترف‬ ‫‪ic‬‬
‫‪, . 247‬ا‬
‫‪.i‬مشاركة‬
‫‪, . 32 D, 39 A‬ال‬
‫‪.‬مدة‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, .235 c,247c‬المعرفة‬
‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪; ii.117 B‬‬
‫‪, , 13‬‬ ‫‪D‬‬
‫‪, .ii 362 .8‬مشطور‬ ‫‪, .i 50 ..‬المعروف‬
‫‪, . 110i‬المص‬
‫‪.‬در‬ ‫‪B ; ii. 54c‬‬ ‫‪,.ii‬المعطوف عليه‬
‫‪. 287c‬‬
‫‪, .i 50 .‬المعلوم‬
‫‪, .ii‬المصدر بأكيد أو‪ .‬ي‬
‫‪54c‬لعظيم‬
‫‪ .ii14 .‬معنی إن‬
 ‫‪I. Technical Terms , Mnemonic Words, Paradigms, etc. 411‬‬

‫‪.‬معنى الفشعرلط‬ ‫‪i‬‬

‫‪, . 14B‬‬ ‫‪iD‬‬
‫‪,116‬‬ ‫‪, . 130 B, 149B‬مفع‬
‫‪.i‬لة‬
‫‪ii . 114 A.‬‬ ‫‪.i‬مفعلة‬
‫‪, . 148c‬‬
‫‪jclés, plur. fr., i. 226 c, 227 B.‬‬ ‫‪, . 149 B‬‬
‫‪.i‬مفعلة‬

‫‪, .116 A, 117A‬مفا‬

‫‪.i‬علة‬ ‫‪.i‬قعيتة‬
‫‪, .148 D‬‬
‫‪.p‬فاعيل‬ ‫‪lu‬‬
‫‪, ,fr‬م‬‫‪.,i. 228r‬‬‫‪A‬‬ ‫‪, arti‬‬
‫‪.p‬مفعول‬ ‫‪131cp‬‬
‫‪., i.ci‬‬
‫در هر‬ ‫‪,.e‬فعل‬ ‫‪tc‬‬
‫‪.,i.132‬‬ ‫‪c‬‬
‫‪.‬المغرد‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, . 52‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬
‫‪.‬مفعول‬‫‪ ) t‬ال‬ ‫‪objecth‬‬ ‫‪e‬‬
‫‪), ii.12‬‬ ‫‪3A‬‬
‫‪ , . 108 i‬مفرد‬
‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪B ; ii . 357 D‬‬
‫ہر و به ر‬
‫‪123i‬‬
‫‪,.ii‬المفعول الأول‬‫‪.50 B‬‬
‫‪,..i‬المفسر‬ ‫‪A‬‬
‫‪104 A.‬‬
‫الثانی ; ‪, subst., i. 129 A, 130 B‬منال‬ ‫‪ii. 269 D.‬‬
‫‪i. m‬‬
‫‪.n,u‬‬ ‫‪D; r‬‬
‫‪263e‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬
‫‪inten‬‬ ‫‪s l‬‬
‫به‬ ‫>‬

‫‪adj., i. 138 B ; com. gen ., i.‬‬

‫‪,.i‬المفعول به الصريح‬‫‪.269i‬‬‫‪D‬‬
‫‪186 c ; with acc. Or , ii.‬‬
‫‪70 B.‬‬
‫‪..i209i‬والمفعول به غير الضريح‬
‫‪D‬‬
‫‪, nt‬مف‬
‫‪.i‬عالة‬ ‫‪., i. 139s‬‬
‫‪.adjen‬‬ ‫‪D‬‬ ‫‪,..i112ic‬المفعول فيه‬
‫‪, .,i.112B;substnf‬مف‬
‫‪.i‬عل‬ ‫‪ ii‬والمفعول لأجله أو من أجله ‪,i.124D‬‬
‫‪122 A.‬‬
‫‪.‬ل‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪ , . 241D‬مفع‬ ‫‪, 262D‬‬
‫‪.‬ل‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, .,i.112‬مفع‬ ‫‪.,i.124D f‬‬
‫‪B ;sulstn‬‬ ‫‪.122iA‬‬
‫‪,.i‬المفعول ته‬
‫‪ 2 D ,‬ة ‪ ,‬إن ‪, .ii‬المفعول المطلق‬
‫‪.i‬مفعل‬
‫‪, . 112 B‬‬ ‫‪193 D, 270 A.‬‬ ‫‪6,‬‬
‫العول المطلق بتأكيد أو ; ‪, subst , i. 130 B, 149‬مفعل‬
‫‪intens. adj., i. 138 B ; com ,‬‬
‫‪.‬و ‪.g.,ei n186‬‬ ‫‪,.i‬العظيم‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪. 54c‬‬
‫‪.i‬فعل‬
‫‪, . 131 A‬م‬ ‫والمفعول المطل يلبيين أو التمييز‬
‫‪149 B.‬‬ ‫‪ii . 6 B.‬‬
‫مفعل‬
‫‪, .,ii‬مف‬
‫‪.‬علة‬ ‫‪n‬‬
‫‪.1121;sub‬‬ ‫‪st.,if‬‬
‫‪ ..‬نا ‪.ii‬والمفعول المطل يتعداد ‪128 ,‬‬
‫‪148 B ; plur. fr., i. 225 A.‬‬
‫‪dició, inf., i. 112 B ; subst ., i.‬‬
‫‪ ..‬نام ‪ .ii‬والمفعول المطلق بنوع‬
‫‪128 c ; plur, fr. , i. 225 A.‬‬ ‫‪,.ii‬المفعول معه‬
‫‪.84c‬‬
‫‪.‬نتة‬ ‫‪sulst., i f‬‬
‫‪. 112 B ; n‬‬
‫‪ , ., ii‬م‬ ‫‪ ;.plur‬ا ‪tc132‬‬
‫‪,.e.,i‬فعل‬
‫‪, Les‬مفعوی‬
‫‪128 c ; plur. fr. , i. 225 A.‬‬ ‫‪.‬و ‪fr , i, 25‬‬
‫‪412‬‬ ‫‪Indexes .‬‬

‫‪.e‬فعل = مفعولة‬
‫‪, .,i.tc‬‬
‫‪132 D‬‬ ‫‪ ,‬مند ابتداء الغاية في الماني‬
‫‪ii . 174c.‬‬
‫‪.in‬عيل‬
‫‪,‬مف‬ ‫‪ten‬‬
‫‪,adj‬‬‫‪.,i.138B ; com‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫‪gen ., i. 186c.‬‬ ‫‪,.ii‬من يمد‬
‫‪. 174c‬‬
‫‪, . 366 B‬‬
‫‪.ii‬المقتضب‬ ‫من أول المدة أو بجميع المدة‬
‫‪ ,.i‬مقحم‬
‫‪. 90i‬‬
‫‪D‬‬ ‫‪ii. 174cD.‬‬

‫‪,.ii‬مقطع‬
‫‪, 3:59 A‬‬ ‫‪,.ii 366 .A..‬المسرح‬
‫‪,..i‬مقاعات‬
‫‪351i‬‬
‫‪A‬‬ ‫‪,.ii‬المنشوق‬
‫‪.90 B‬‬
‫‪.‬المكر‬
‫‪,.i‬‬
‫‪52c‬‬ ‫‪.i‬منصرف‬
‫‪, .234 D‬‬
‫در‬
‫نیر‬ ‫در‬
‫‪122i‬‬
‫‪,..i‬المميز‬ ‫‪D‬‬ ‫‪.i‬المنصوب‬
‫‪, . 60p‬‬
‫‪.‬وت‬
‫‪, .104 i‬المنع‬
‫‪D ; ii.287c‬‬
‫; ‪, i. 273 c, 2778‬من الموصوفة‬
‫‪ii . 319 B.‬‬
‫‪.‬منفصل‬ ‫‪.i‬‬‫‪53c‬‬
‫‪.‬الموصولة‬
‫‪, . 273 i‬من‬
‫‪c; ii. 320 c‬‬ ‫‪.i‬منقول‬
‫‪, . 108c‬‬
‫‪, .ii 131 ..‬من الابتداء‬ ‫منقول من الفاعل‪ BC.‬أو‪123‬ال‪ii.‬مفعول‬
‫‪, .i 247 .‬منگر من بيداء الغاية في المكان و‬
‫‪,.ii‬الرمان‬
‫‪.131 A‬‬ ‫‪.‬ف‬
‫‪, . 104D;i‬الموصو‬ ‫‪ii.277B ,287c‬‬
‫‪,.ii‬من البيان‬ ‫‪. 138 A‬‬ ‫‪, .ii 317 .‬الموصول‬
‫‪.ii‬ومن بيان الجنس‬ ‫‪.138 A‬‬ ‫‪.i‬لموصول الأسمى‬
‫ی‬ ‫‪, . 105 B‬ا‬
‫‪.i‬ن يتبعیض‬ ‫‪, . 137 A‬م‬ ‫ن‬

‫يلبيين‬ ‫‪ii. 138 A.‬‬ ‫‪.ii‬نائب عن الفاعل‬

‫‪, . 269 D‬‬
‫الجريد‬ ‫‪ii . 138 D.‬‬ ‫‪ .ii‬نائب فاعل شاد م‪c.‬ن‪257‬الخبر‬
‫‪ii. 137 A.‬‬
‫التركيب‬ ‫>‬
‫‪.ii‬نائب مناب الفاعل‬
‫‪, . 269 D‬‬
‫‪ii. 131 D.‬‬
‫بتعليل‬ ‫‪.i‬نائب مناب الفعل‬
‫‪, . 74 A‬‬
‫التمييز‬ ‫‪ii . 138 B.‬‬
‫‪.‬ناتی‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, . 56B‬‬
‫‪.ii‬ومن بمعنى في‬
‫‪. 136 D‬‬ ‫‪.‬نبرة‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, . 16‬‬ ‫‪D‬‬
‫‪.i‬النادي‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, . 85 8,92c‬‬ ‫‪, . 108 A‬ن‬
‫‪.i‬بز‬
 ‫‪1. Technical Terms, Mnemonic Words, Paradigms, etc. 413‬‬
‫و‬
‫‪. 86 c‬‬
‫‪,.ii‬ابلتهدا‬
‫‪, . 52 B‬‬
‫‪.i‬الواحد‬
‫‪.‬و ‪, .i 109 , 149‬النسبة‬
‫‪.ii‬الوافر‬
‫‪, . 363B‬‬
‫‪Ai‬ح ‪8‬و‪, .‬ااالل‬
‫‪.‬نملصبوب‬ ‫‪, 235 B‬‬
‫على المد‬ ‫‪.4‬ب‪333‬ه ‪ .i‬واو الابتداء النصب‬
‫‪ii. 33 A ; with acc. ,‬‬
‫الجمع‬ ‫‪...‬‬ ‫>‬

‫‪,i.77c, 276 ..‬الشرو الترحيم‬ ‫‪ii. 84 B.‬‬

‫‪ii . 262 B, 332 D.‬‬
‫‪, . 105 i‬العث‬
‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪A ; ii. 283 A‬‬ ‫الحال‬
‫رب‬ ‫‪... , ii. 216 D.‬‬
‫‪.ii‬القاد‬
‫‪, . 354 B‬‬
‫‪ii. 175 B.‬‬
‫‪, i.4A‬نقطة‬ ‫القيم‬
‫‪ii. 84 B.‬‬
‫‪.ii‬القل‬
‫‪, .372 B‬‬ ‫اللزوم‬
‫‪ii. 33 A ; with acc .,‬‬
‫‪,117i.235‬ترة‬ ‫‪...‬المصاحبة ‪c, 247 c ; ii. 116 c,‬‬
‫‪B , 260 D.‬‬ ‫‪ii. 84 B.‬‬
‫‪ii. 33 A ; with acc .,‬‬
‫‪.‬ون العماير‬ ‫‪ic‬‬
‫‪ . 101‬ت‬ ‫المعنية‬ ‫‪ii . 84 B, 325 D.‬‬
‫‪, .i 61 ..‬اثون المؤقتة‬ ‫‪,‬‬‫‪ .i‬وتد‬ ‫‪. 358ip‬‬
‫‪.‬تون‬
‫‪ ,‬الوقاية‬ ‫‪iB‬‬
‫‪. 101‬‬ ‫‪.358i‬‬
‫‪ .i‬وتد مفروق‬ ‫‪p‬‬
‫مقرون‬
‫‪.‬‬

‫‪, .i .78‬هاء التأنيث‬ ‫‪ ii . 351 B,‬روزن‬

‫الشت‬ ‫‪...‬‬
‫‪ii . 372 p.‬‬ ‫‪.‬وزن الفعل‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, . 245c‬‬
‫‪ii. 371 , 372 D.‬‬ ‫‪.‬لوصف‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, . 105‬ا‬ ‫‪A‬‬
‫الوقف‬ ‫شر‬ ‫وہ و‬
‫‪.‬لوصفية‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪ , . 245‬ا‬ ‫‪B‬‬
‫‪. 351i‬‬
‫‪,.i‬هجا‬ ‫‪A‬‬
‫‪, .ii 363 .‬الهزج‬ ‫‪.i‬وصلة وصل‬
‫‪, .19 A‬‬
‫‪.‬همزة ‪ ,‬همز‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, . 16‬‬ ‫‪D‬‬
‫‪, .i‬‬
‫‪.‬الياء المثناة من تحتها ‪, i. 152 B, 157A,‬همة الإتحاق‬ ‫‪4B‬‬
‫‪189 A.‬‬ ‫‪, .i 94 ..‬يا بشدة‬
‫‪, .ii 307 .‬همزة التسوية‬ ‫به ‪,.i 16‬يمون‬
‫‪ , . 21i‬هم‬
‫‪.‬زة القطع‬ ‫‪1,74B‬‬ ‫‪, .22i‬ي‬
‫‪.‬قاعي‬ ‫‪8A‬‬
‫‪269 B.‬‬ ‫‪, .i 19 ..‬فعل ‪ , from‬يفعل ويفعل‬
‫الوصل‬
414 Indexes.

II. ARABIC WORDS, TERMINATIONS, ETC.

‫ا‬
- , ‫خر‬.i
‫آ‬, . 240 A
- for – or (S-, in the vocative, jesī
‫آخر‬, ii. 227 DD.
ii . 87 C.
‫ض‬. i
‫أ‬, . 102 A
. for ‫ا‬- .i
, .9D
‫ال‬, .i 181 .۸
‫را‬.i
‫ راه‬. 295 D ; ii. 93c
‫ا‬- for .in
‫ ا‬, pause, ii . 369 B , 370c
‫الف‬, ‫الائی‬,.i 259 ..
‫ دا‬for ‫ من‬, ist, interj., ii. 85 a.
‫ دا‬for ‫ی‬.i -, the vocative, n
ii ‫أب‬, i.249 4, 251 D; i. 203 A; ‫أب‬
87c.

1 for ‫ ن‬.i , . 61 D
for ‫أبا‬, i, 95 D; ‫أ = أبا‬, .i
‫ ء‬for ‫ أ‬, . ‫وی ؤ‬.i. 17c
249 c; ‫أبون‬, i, 196 ; ‫ أبت‬,
‫أ‬,.eli,ded
i 19 ‫و‬.
‫أبه‬, ‫بتاه‬.ii
‫أ‬, .87D, 88A
1, omitted in writing, i. 23 A. .i
‫أنت‬, .240 B;i.279c
I for i, i. 18 D. ‫لأبدان‬.i
‫ا‬, .190 c
‫ أ‬for initial ġ, i. 214 D. ‫ابص‬, . 240 i
‫ع‬. B ; ii. 279 c
., i. 294erj
.int
‫ا‬, B ; ii . 85 A ‫ أبل‬for ‫أبال‬,.ii 385 ..
‫أ‬,
.i ,i24 er
nt ro
8, 2832 B ;ii 96 A,‫ به‬g‫ابن‬, i. 20 8A,23 B, 249 B; ii. 91c,
306 D. 93 D, 203 B, 204 A, 314 A.
. , . 284 ‫و‬i
‫اام‬ c ; ii . 307 B ‫بناری‬.i
‫أ‬, .163A
! for initial i. 119 A.
.i
‫ابنة‬, . 20 4, 250 A; ii.91 , 203B
! = ‫ای‬, interj., i. 285 c,
‫ ابنم‬, . 20i
. 4, 239 B
.for
‫ أ‬initial , i.80A, 119 A, 172B
I =‫أ‬1, interrog ., ii . 376 D. ‫بی‬.i
‫ أ‬.93 B |

‫ات‬- for ‫رات‬.ii

. 96 A ‫لأبيضان‬.i
‫ا‬, . 190c
., i, 294erj
.int
6, B ; ii 85 ‫به‬ ‫اجر‬.i, .76 D
.i
‫ ا‬, . 157 A, 185 A, 240 B ‫اد‬
...

‫آتی اوتی‬, .i 53 A.8 ‫تزر‬

 II. Arabic Words, Terminations, etc. 415

‫اته‬
‫ام لن‬. i
, . 77 A ‫أخرى‬,i.184D, 199 p, 240 A..8
‫لخلوق‬. i
‫ا‬, . 107 p, i
108 D
‫إ‬, dv, ier
‫ذ‬.a b
. 283D
‫أ‬, .229 p
‫ثون‬.i
i 74c 93 A ii 46 D 53 A ‫ذ‬.‫إ‬, c.o 291j
, i.n D
‫ أثی‬. , ; . , , . c o n
‫إذا‬, ., i. 292 A ; wit h thej
Perf ,
103 B.
ii. 9c ; with the Imperf., ii.
‫ واثنتان واثنان‬i. 204, 255cD ; 10 A ; with the Jussive, ii.
ii. 236 B.
12 B ; ‫ إذا‬or ‫ إذا ما‬with two
‫ وا‬. 15i
‫ثنهني‬. 3B correlat. clauses, ii. 9 D.
‫إذا‬, ad
. ,itv e
.283D ;r b
ii. 345 c
‫الأجدان‬, .i 190 .c.
, .i
‫إذا ب‬. 157ip
‫أجل‬, .i 283 ..
‫إذا‬, . 292i
‫أجمع‬, i. 1958, 240 n ; in 278p, | ‫ ما‬. A; ii 9 ..
282 A. ‫إذاك‬, ‫ذ ذاك‬. i
‫إ‬, . 284B
‫احتاج‬,.ii46 .A.. ‫ا‬.‫إذ م‬, . 291iD ; ii. 14c
‫۔‬.i
‫ا‬, . 35 D
‫إذن إذا‬. i. 284 B, 292 ۸ ; with the
Subjunct ., ii. 33 c.
‫أحد‬.i
, . 236A
i
i ‫اذهب عنك‬.i
, , 143c
‫حدى‬.
‫إ‬, . 184 D
‫أ‬, . 19i
‫حرون‬. 6B ‫أذواة اليمني‬, .i 266 .8
‫ إ‬, .12i
‫ إرا‬for ‫راءة‬. 1A
‫أخلاقي‬,.i 163 .8
‫أراد‬,.ii
.107c
‫الأحمران‬, .i 190 ..
i . 249 A, 251 D ; ii. 203 B, ‫راض‬. iB
‫ أ‬. 221
‫أخ‬ D . ic
204 B; ‫أون‬,.i 196 .8 , . 195
‫أرضون‬.
D.
‫اخ أ‬ i. 295 A. ‫اأرږدي‬, .i 48 ..
‫است‬, .i 20 ‫م‬.
‫الأخبان‬, i , 1900
‫أفك‬, ‫أخوات‬.i
‫ و‬. 194c ‫ استاع‬i. 68 A , 87 p.
i
‫فتاة‬. i
‫أ‬, .233 B
.
‫أخذ‬, . 76 77 A ; ii, 108 D
‫است‬. i
. . 77 B
‫أأخغر‬,, i. 199 D , 240 .8
 416 Indexes.

‫استگان‬.
‫هر‬
, .i304ip ‫أكب‬. i
, .35D
‫اسر‬,.ii
. 280 A .
‫اكتع‬, . 195 A, i 240 B ; ii. 279c
‫اسرندی‬.
, . 47
i B jí, the article, i.15 c, 19 c, 23 D,
‫استاع‬.ii ‫ع‬380‫اوشطا‬., ‫أنشطاع‬,i.688,87D; 269 A.

‫الذى = ال‬, .i 269 ..

‫اسفر‬.ii
, . 102 A ‫مل = أل‬, .i 288 ..
‫اسم‬, .i 20 .. VI, interj., i. 294 c.
‫الأسوداني‬,.i 190 ‫و‬. VI, interrog ., i. 284 B ; ii. 24 B ,
‫ی‬.
‫أشگ‬, A
. et Cord
rigenda d
(Vol.i 309 D, 311 B.
36 A). ‫إن‬.
‫ألا‬, . 284i
B;i 310 ..
‫ء‬.
‫أشيا‬, . 211i
, 240 B ‫ألا يا‬.
, .i310i B
‫أصب‬.ii
, .15c, 102A ‫ ه =أ‬, i.284 G, 288 .8
‫إضطرزی‬.
, .15i
3D ‫الا‬, interrog.,
vji , ii. 310 c.
‫الأصغر‬, i , 190 .. ‫أن لا = أ‬, i., 16 A , 292c; with
the Subjunct., ii. 22c, 25 A,
‫الأولان‬,.i 191 .. 304 D.
‫أضحى‬.
, .i
102i
A ‫إلا‬, i . 16 A, 292 D ; ii. 32 A , 39 ,
‫اضربا تقه‬. 104 B, 172 D , 254 B, 289 D,
,.i 62D
‫لأطبان‬.
‫ا‬, . 190
ic 291 A8, 335 D, 341 A ; ‫ إلا‬-re
peated ‫ يوكيد‬ii. 338 D ;
‫أغ‬ ‫ أو‬, .i 295 ‫و‬.
‫ نشدتك الله إ‬ii. 339D; ‫إلا‬
‫غذ‬.
‫أ‬, . 14i
0D with pronom.suffixes, ii. 340 A.
‫ قا في‬.
, e
.,i.t
29c
5A ‫= إلا أن‬.
‫لين‬, . 293i
D;ii.340c
‫ أفعو‬for ‫ رأفعی‬.i 12 .. ‫ود أودي‬.
‫أ‬, .26i
5p
‫فلا‬.‫أ‬, . 29i
1B ‫التی‬, .i 271 .۸
‫و‬ .‫ه‬
‫فواه‬.i
‫ أ‬, . 233 B .
‫الخ‬, . 25 Di ; ii. 146B
‫ إقام‬for ‫إقامة‬, .i 121 .. ‫ذي‬.
‫ال‬, . 270iD; ii 318 D , 320 ..
‫أقبل‬.
, .i
108i
D ‫السنة‬, ‫يمن‬.
‫أل‬, . 21i
‫و‬ ‫ر‬
0 BD
|
 II. Arabic Words, Terminations, etc. 417

‫ام‬, . 284ci
. ; ii. 310 B
‫ألف‬, .i 259 ‫د‬.ii
‫ ز‬. 238 , 244 B
‫لقيا‬. i
‫أ‬, .62p ‫ام‬.ii
, . 203 A

‫ألك‬.
,.i
77c ‫أما‬, . 284c:
. i; ii . 310 B

. 383ip
‫ (ب ) الله‬for ‫ الله‬-(,.i ‫ن‬.i
‫أما إ‬, . 284c; ii.310c
‫اللهم‬,ii.89 D; before y and ‫تعه‬, ‫أما‬, followed by ‫ي‬.
‫بو‬
iB
‫ف‬, . 292
ii . 89 D, 340 A. ‫ أما‬- ‫أن ما‬.i
, . 16B
‫اق‬
, . 107i
‫الم‬.i c ‫ ما‬, .i 292n ; ‫إما أو‬, or ‫او ما‬
‫ألو‬,.
‫أوتو‬, . 195i
, 265 p ibid .

‫لوف‬. ic
‫أ‬, . 259 ‫ن ما‬ed‫إ‬,byi.a 16A
‫= إما‬follow ; ii.. 43 A;
Jussive , ii. 43 D.
‫ آتي‬or ‫الذى = التي‬. ic
, . 271
‫إلى‬, .280 B ,281Ai
. ; ii. 63 B, 144 B ‫ إمالا‬or ‫مائی‬. i
, . 284c
‫أمام‬, .281ci
‫ إليك‬- ‫ ذ‬, .i 788 ; = ‫ تن‬.ii . ;ii.187B
304
303

‫أمامك‬.i i
, . 75 , 187c
333:

146 B ; ‫إليك على‬, .ibid

‫ دها = إليها‬,.ii
. 77D ‫اأمقت‬,‫ ممه‬, ‫ ممتاه‬,ii.87D, 88 .8
‫إلى آخره‬.i‫ و‬. 146iA ‫امرو‬, ‫امهرراة‬, .i 20 .
‫إلى أن‬, .i 285 .. ‫امر‬, ‫مرو‬. i
‫ا‬, . 23 9B
‫إلى دون‬,.ii. 190c ‫امس‬, .i 290 ‫م‬.
‫مسی‬. i
‫ا‬, . 15 i
c, 10 2A
‫إلى‬
‫لى غير ذلك‬.i‫إ‬, . 146 A ‫مهات‬.i
‫أ‬, . 233 B
‫إلى قوق‬.i
, . 190c ‫موان‬. ic
‫إ‬, . 217
‫مواه‬. i
‫ا‬, . 23 3B
‫إلى‬
‫أ‬, .54i
‫أن‬, for ‫نا‬. D
‫ أتی‬، .i
‫أ‬, . 265B ‫أن‬, i. 16 A1, 292 B ; with the
Subjunct ., ii . 22c, 25 A ; with
‫ام‬, i. 284 , 292 B ; ii. 306 , 307 B , the Perf., ii. 25 D ; with the
308 B, 309 A. Perf. or Imperf ., ii. 26 A,
27A ; omitted before the
‫أل = ام‬, .i 270 .8 53
W.II.
 418 Inderes.

Subjunct., ii. 26 D ; with the | ‫اس‬. i

‫أن‬, .233c
Jussive, ii. 27 B ; = lest, ii.
‫لأطر‬.
27 B ; after prepositions, etc., i
‫ا‬, .65 D
ii. 192B, 220 c; prepositions ‫أنت‬, .i 54 .8
omitted before iſ, ii. 193 B. ‫ووو‬
‫انتم‬.i
, . 55 A
‫أن‬, for ‫أ‬. 81c
, .i ‫نث‬.
‫ار‬
‫أ‬, . 20i
1B
‫إن‬, i. 292 D ; ii. 347 c; with the
‫انزعج‬,l‫ و‬i. .
Perf., ii. 14 B;; in two correlat. cou 41 .p.
clauses, i. 15 A; with the ‫أناسی‬, ‫إنسى أناس‬.i
Jussive, ii. 23 c ; in two
, .228 p
, .
correlat. clauses, ii. 36 D. ‫أنشأ‬.i
, . 108i
D
‫ إن‬, for.
‫إن‬, . 284i D; ii. 81c ‫ وانضجع‬.i 411 D.

‫إن‬,, negat., ii. 284 cC ; ii. 104 B, ‫انطلق‬

105 A, 300D.
‫انف‬, i. 102 A, 103 .
‫إ ون تو‬.i
, . 348c
i .
‫إنها‬. . 285 B; iii
. 254 B, 335 B
‫ ان‬for ‫ا‬- ) ‫(ألف الثوبة‬. 390 pi ‫نم‬.
, .i ‫ا‬, .65ip
‫ ان‬, for ‫يين‬. ic
, . 236 ‫نه‬.i
‫ا‬, . 54 D
.
‫أن‬, . 293 A ; withi
Imperf. Indic =
, , 285 B ; ii 14 .
‫انی‬.in
i with Subjunct ., ii. 25 D ;
‫انی‬- , rel. adj., i.164 B
after jló, etc., ii. 47B ; with
the accus . , ii. 78 D, 259 c, ‫أه‬, ‫آه‬, ‫آه‬, ‫ أها‬,.et., i c294 ‫و‬.
. B
263 ; after preposit ions, ii . ‫ = اه‬,, see ‫ اه زا‬,.i
. 94c
i
192 B ; prepositions onnitted
before , ii. 193 B. ‫ اه‬, in pause for ‫اث‬.
, .370
iB
‫عل = أن‬. i
‫ت‬, .290 B ‫هال‬.i
‫أ‬, . 221 B
, ii .
‫إث‬, i. 284 D ; after ‫ قال‬,.e.tc ‫أهل‬, . 1818i
; ii. 203 A
47 A ; with the accus . , ii. 78 D, ‫ أهل‬.ii 309 ..
259 c, 263 B ; in oaths, ii.
175D.
‫أهتون‬.
, . 195
ic
‫نا‬.
‫ا‬, . i
25 D ‫أو‬, i. 22 2A , 293 B; ii. 14 D, 306 c,
307 D, 309 A ‫ز‬ with the
‫ا‬.
‫أن‬, . 54i
ACD Subjunct ., ii. 33 A.
 419
II . Arabic Words, Terminations, etc.

‫ ايتها‬, . 295 c ;i
. ii . 85 A, 92 c
,‫و أو‬.‫آ‬, e .29c
.,it 4c
, . 2i
‫إيخ‬. 95 B
‫ون‬ ‫ز‬ ‫و‬ .
‫إ‬, . i
19 5c
‫ایس‬, .i 96 ‫و‬.
‫د‬.i
‫أوش‬, . 106 B, 107 A
‫أول‬, .i 240 4A, 260 ‫ ; ه‬ii. 219 B, ‫أيش‬, .i 276 .
227 D.
‫تم‬ ‫تو‬
‫ایم‬
‫اولا‬, ‫اولة‬, ‫ل‬. i
‫او‬, . 260 cD ‫ ایما‬, . 292i
. B , 293 A
‫ار‬
‫ول‬. i
‫أ‬, . 240 A
‫يها‬. i
‫ إ‬, . 293 A
‫ولا‬. i
‫أ‬, . 291 B ‫عد‬
g ‫ و‬, 276 .c
‫ايها‬.i ., ro
, nter i 270
‫أوتو‬, . 195 , 265 p
.i relative , i. 270 C, 274 A ; ii.
14 C ; expressing surprise , ii.
‫أوءروئی‬.i
, .265B 316 D.
‫اوه‬, ‫أواه‬, ‫أواه‬. 29c
.,i.t
, e 4c ‫ه‬
d suprascript, i. 11 c . vo ‫ أي‬interrog .,, ii. ‫و‬
‫من‬ul, 270.
c.
ül, relative, i. 270 C , 274 A ; ii.
sí, interj., ii. 85 a.
*

14 C.
is, that is, i. 285 c.
... , interj., i. 294 B ; ii. 85 A. ‫ايمن‬, . 20 B ,i
. 24 B , 279D
- ‫ه‬
for . i
‫ أی‬wsuffi xest h
, i. 276 c ‫ن‬.‫ای‬, . 285i
D ; ii 14 ‫و‬.

‫ إى‬, .i 285 ‫و‬. ‫اینما‬, ...

‫ای‬,int.e
. r
270c rDo
, 275 ‫ه إيه‬i
; iig. ‫ي‬. i
‫ إ‬, . 295A
220 A , 315 B.
‫يها‬. i
‫إ‬, . 29 5A
,, i.a
‫ای‬,rel
.
, t,i
270 D ;e
273v ii
140, 318 D. ‫أيها‬,, . 294c ; i
. ii.85 8,92c
ree,ii
‫أي‬,, xpsurpris
.e ss ‫وان‬g
. 316cin ‫إي‬, .i 229 . - OE ‫هه‬
‫ایا‬, . 294 Bi
. ; ii. 85 A ‫ایوا‬, ‫إيوه‬, ‫یوه‬. i
‫ آ‬, . 28 5c
103 eB; ii.69 D,326 A, 329 A ;
‫ يا‬, ibefor ‫ایی‬,
i. 276 D ; ii . 317 B.
a subst., ii . 76 B.

‫إياك‬,.i i
.75A . 156 cC ; redundant,
‫إيان‬, ‫ن رأيان ما‬. i
‫أيا‬, . 285 D; i ‫ ب‬, ii . 279 B c; ii.
ii. 161 D ; in oaths, ii. 175 D ;
14 C.
‫شر‬
‫ایتم‬e
‫ا‬. , xpre s
surp s,i
rise 316g
ii. n D with ‫ نفش‬and ‫عين‬,.i i
. 281c
 ‫‪420‬‬ ‫‪Inderes.‬‬

‫‪ .‬بأبی أنت‬ ‫‪ii‬‬

‫‪, .162A‬‬ ‫‪,.‬‬
‫‪ , . 281 i‬بعید‬
‫‪c D ; ii. 186 D‬‬
‫‪.‬بس‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, . 58‬‬ ‫‪D‬‬ ‫‪.i‬من بعد ‪ ,‬بعد‬
‫‪ . 288 B‬و‬
‫‪, ii. 207 4, 267 , 280B,‬بعض ;‪(,i 97AB‬بس ‪,‬بأس رب ) بس‬
‫‪290‬‬
‫‪ii.‬‬ ‫‪A.‬‬ ‫‪295c .‬‬

‫‪.‬ربما ‪,‬بس ما‬ ‫‪i‬‬

‫‪.97B‬‬ ‫‪,.i‬إيغا = بغض‬
‫‪.59ip‬‬

‫‪:‬‬
‫‪ , ii. 15 c, 102 .8‬بات‬ ‫‪.‬بغیر‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, .163‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬
‫‪, .i 34 ..‬أبعد ‪ -‬باعد‬ ‫‪, Add. et Corrigenda‬بقى ‪ for‬با‬
‫‪ .i 34 ..‬أبلغ = بالغ‬
‫‪-‬‬

‫‪( Vol. i. 91 A).‬‬

‫‪.‬الله عليك‬‫‪, . i‬ب‬‫‪172c‬‬ ‫‪.i‬بقى‬
‫‪, . 102A‬‬
‫‪.‬ب‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, .68D‬‬ ‫‪.‬بعة‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, , 111‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪ , . 200i‬تع‬
‫‪B, 240 B‬‬ ‫; ‪, i. 15D, 285 D; ii.308 3, 334c‬بل‬
‫‪with the genit ., ii. 217 A.‬‬
‫‪, .,i.tc‬‬
‫‪.e‬بخ‬ ‫‪295 A‬‬
‫أبو آل = ; ‪ , .i 381 8‬و آل = بل‬
‫ا ‪,228‬ب‪i.‬ائی‬
‫‪D.‬‬
‫بخت باتری ب‬ ‫‪ii. 381 D.‬‬

‫‪.‬‬
‫‪, .279 B; iii‬بلا‬
‫‪. 163 A, 303D‬‬
‫‪.‬بدون‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, .163‬‬ ‫‪8, i‬‬
‫‪185B‬‬ ‫‪.i‬تنحرث‬
‫‪, . 24 D‬‬
‫‪.i‬بدوی‬
‫‪, . 159 B‬‬ ‫‪.‬ند‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, .178‬ب‬ ‫‪D‬‬
‫‪.i‬بری‬
‫‪, . 58 p‬‬ ‫‪ .‬لعنبر‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, .24‬‬ ‫‪D‬‬
‫‪.ii‬رح‬
‫‪, .102 8, 103c‬ب‬ ‫‪ ,..i78i‬بلة‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪, .i 208 .‬براة‬ ‫‪.i‬ئی‬
‫‪ , .285 D‬ب‬
‫رہ‬
‫‪.‬زل‬
‫‪, . 20i‬ب‬‫‪0D‬‬ ‫بها‬ ‫‪ii. 160 D, 193 A.‬‬
‫‪,i. 23 A; ii.‬بسمةالله‬ ‫‪163 C ,‬‬
‫‪.i‬بناء على‬
‫‪ . 170i‬و‬ ‫‪p‬‬
‫‪.i‬ع‬
‫‪, . 200 B, 240 B‬بص‬ ‫‪.‬بنات‬
‫‪, . 19‬‬
‫‪i‬‬ ‫‪4c‬‬
‫‪,i. 23 B; ii. 91c‬ابن ‪ for‬بن ‪, i. 255E,‬بضعة بضغ بضغ‬
‫‪256 A D, 258 A ; ii. 237c .‬‬
‫‪, i. 250 A; ii. 203 B, 204 ..‬بنت‬
‫‪, .i 226 .1‬بطن‬
‫‪-‬بنيث ‪ for‬بنت‬
‫‪, A‬‬
‫‪. etdCorr‬‬
‫‪d‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪.i‬بعد ‪,‬بعد‬
‫‪, . 98 B‬‬ ‫‪genda (Vol. i. 91 a).‬‬
 421
II . Arabic Words, Terminations, etc.

‫نو‬. i
, . 290 i
, 296 c ‫بعون‬.i
, .195 p
‫جاه‬. i
‫ت‬, .281 D
‫بنون‬.i
, . 195c
‫نی‬. i
‫ ب‬, , 25 3 A , . 77 A
‫تجر‬.i
‫ به‬for . i
‫ بها‬paus e, iin
. 372c ‫تكامل‬.i
, . 40B
i 7c
‫تحت‬, . ‫ ت۔ حيت‬, . 281 i
D ;ii. 182 AB
‫بهرانی‬.
, . 15
‫تح‬, ‫من تحت‬.i , . 288 B
‫وض‬.i
, . 202B
‫بوهون‬.i
, . 195p ‫حين‬.i
‫ت‬, . 279 D
‫تخذ‬, .i 77 .8
‫یم‬.i
‫ ب‬, . 226 A
‫تساقط‬.i
, . 40 B
‫بيت بيت‬.i
, . 289c
‫بیت المقدس‬.i i
, . 233c ‫تع‬, .i 25 C..
‫ بید‬, . 289 Ai
. ; ii. 342 C
, . 39 D
‫تعاظم‬.i
, .i
‫تعالی‬. 39c
‫ بين‬, . 281 i
. c ; ii.180B , and similar perfects after
‫بین بین‬. i
, . 29 0A the name of God, ii. 3 B.

181iB
‫ ين إلى‬,..i ‫تعه‬,.ii
.49 A
‫بين يدي‬ . 380iB
‫ال فقي =تق‬,.i
‫ بینا‬, . 286 Ai
. ; ii . 181 D ‫لان‬.i
‫ت‬, . 279 D
‫بینها‬
‫لقاء‬. i
‫ت‬, . 281 D
‫لك‬. i
‫ت‬, . 267 BC
‫ة‬.i
, . 7A , , 93 A
‫ته‬.i
.
as a plur , ‫تهی‬, ‫ته‬, ‫ه‬.i
, iter
. m183., i.D,23184
2 D.
A ; As ‫ت‬, . 265 A
i
‫ة‬, rhy
‫ ت‬for. me, ii. n
369 C D ‫هام‬. i
‫ت‬, . 154 A
‫ ت‬, . 279 Bi
. ; ii. 175c ‫تورية‬, .i 12 ..
i , ,i
‫توهم‬. 48D
‫ت‬.
, . 93 A
‫ی‬. i
‫ وت‬. 26 5A
‫ا‬.i
‫ت‬, . 265 A
‫تيد‬,.ii
. 78 B
‫اك‬.i
‫ت‬, . 266 D
‫تبا‬, . 39 i
‫رك‬. ; ii. 3B ‫تيد‬, .i 266 ..
 422 Indexes.

‫ث‬
‫ح‬
i. 25 D.
‫ قال‬for ‫الث‬.i
‫ث‬, .261 A C
‫ثليث‬.i
, . 264 A ‫حاء‬.i
, . 295 B
. i
‫ م‬. 293 B; with Subjunct
, ., i ‫ حادی عشرين‬, .i 262 ..
33 A ; with ‫ ل‬and Jussive,
ii . 36 B. ‫ كاش‬, ‫ اشا‬, ‫ حاشی‬, .i 342 ..
‫ث‬,i.293EB. ‫ حال‬,..272
iiA
‫ثا‬. i i. 69 A.
, . 25 D
i. 98 A.
‫ن‬.i
‫ثنتا‬, . 253 B,2:54c >

‫ج‬
.1:‫ إحباب‬,.ii
. 59 p
‫ جاء‬,.i
. 103i
B ‫ حبة‬,.i
.236i
p
‫جال‬.i
, . 145c ‫الحباحب = الحبا‬,.ii
.382A
‫أجنأ = جانا‬. i
, .34A ‫حبذا‬. iB
, . 98
. 55 B
‫ جد جده‬,.ii ‫تى‬.prep
‫ ح‬, prep., i . 280 B ; ii. 146 B.
‫ جد‬, ii. 207 D , 279 ‫و‬. as
‫حرف عطف‬.i
, . 147B>

‫لجديدان‬.i
‫ا‬, . 190 B conj., i. 293 c ; with the
Subjunct., ii. 22 c, 29 B ; with
‫چرواث‬.i
, . 193 B Perf. or Imperf. Indic. , ii .
‫ور‬.i
‫ جز‬, .185 1, 215c 29 D.

‫جعل‬.i i
, . 48 D,108 D ‫ى إذا‬.i
‫حت‬, , 12 ,13cp
‫ جل وعلا‬,.ii
. 3B ‫ حجا‬,.i
. 48i
D
. i
‫ جمع‬, . 200 B, 240 A; ii 278 .. = ‫حجاج‬,.i i
. 382B
.i
‫ جميع‬, ii.206B,2781, 2824,296a ‫حجازية‬,.ii
.74B
, . 206 B
‫ جميعا‬.ii ‫حجج‬. i
, . 20 1B
‫جوار‬. i
, . 213 D ‫ صدور‬, .i 186 ‫م‬.

‫جوت‬. i
, . 295 B ‫حذاء‬.i
, . 281D
i. 286 B. ‫حذو‬, for ‫حذاء‬.i
, . 12D
 ‫‪II .‬‬ ‫‪Arabic Words, Terminations , etc.‬‬ ‫‪423‬‬

‫‪, . 19i‬‬
‫‪.‬حون‬ ‫‪6B‬‬ ‫‪.‬حین‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, . 289‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬
‫‪i‬‬ ‫‪, . 292 A‬‬
‫‪.i‬حینئذ‬
‫‪.‬حرون‬
‫‪, . 196‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬

‫‪ , , 107i‬حرى‬
‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪D, 108c‬‬ ‫حيل ; ‪ , etc ., i. 294 D‬حيهلا ‪ ,‬حیهل‬
‫‪i. 58 c ; ii. 48 D.‬‬
‫= ‪with accus.‬‬ ‫‪, .ii‬ايت مسرعا‬
‫‪78 B.‬‬
‫‪i . 288 c.‬‬
‫‪ , 12 i‬حی‬
‫‪.‬وة‬ ‫‪A , 121c‬‬
‫‪.‬حسن ‪ ,‬حسن‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, . 98AB‬‬ ‫‪i. 94 D.‬‬
‫حیی‬
‫‪, . 218 D‬ل‬
‫‪.i‬حان‬
‫خ‬
‫‪ .i‬شون‬
‫‪, .196 A‬‬ ‫‪i. 26 A.‬‬
‫‪, .i‬خ‬
‫‪ ,..i‬حشی‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪342p‬‬ ‫‪. 48i‬‬
‫‪ ,.i‬خال‬ ‫‪p‬‬
‫‪.‬حضر‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, . 58‬‬ ‫‪D‬‬ ‫‪ , .i 261 A...‬خامس = خام‬
‫‪, . 16i‬‬
‫‪.‬حضرمی‬ ‫‪2A‬‬ ‫‪ .i‬ذ‬
‫‪, . 76 cD‬‬
‫‪, ii. 207 D, 279c.‬‬ ‫‪ .ii‬ذ عنك‬
‫‪, .143c‬‬
‫‪.i‬كلوب‬
‫‪, . 185 D‬‬ ‫‪.ii103 ..‬وخرج‬
‫‪i. 249 A, 252 A.‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪ .i‬لا‬
‫‪, . 341c‬‬
‫‪ ,‬حها‬ ‫‪ , .i 284 C...‬هی‬ ‫‪ .‬لقاء‪ ,‬لائٹ‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, . 219‬‬ ‫‪BC‬‬
‫‪,.ii 382 .8‬الحمام = الحمى‬ ‫‪ , . 281i‬لف‬
‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪D; ii. 187 D‬‬
‫‪ , .ii.748‬نائية‬ ‫‪.‬خميس‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, . 264‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬
‫و ؟‬
‫‪ . 2i‬ر‬
‫‪.‬حوب‬ ‫‪95 B‬‬
‫‪, . 281Di‬حول‬
‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪; ii.188 B‬‬
‫‪,.i 34 ..‬أدخل = داخل‬
‫‪, . 2i‬‬
‫‪.‬حی‬ ‫‪94c‬‬
‫‪,.ii‬دام‬
‫‪. 101 D‬‬
‫‪, .i 18 ..‬داؤود ‪ , for‬داود إلى حيث من حيث ‪ ,‬حيث‬
‫‪.i‬حيثما‬
‫‪, . 288 B‬‬ ‫‪, ,i‬‬
‫‪.‬دری‬ ‫‪48 D‬‬
‫‪ ,.ii‬حيثما ‪ ,‬حيث‬
‫‪. 14c‬‬
‫‪.ii, 45 .‬م‪ ,‬دع‬
‫ها‬
‫‪ , etc., with the Energetic,,‬حيثما‬ ‫‪:‬‬
‫‪i‬‬
‫‪.‬ادم ‪,‬دم‬
‫‪, . 59‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬
‫‪ , 43c ,‬ن‬

‫‪i. 290 A.‬‬ ‫‪. 74 B‬‬

‫‪ ,.ii‬واليك‬
‫بيض‬
 ‫‪424‬‬
‫‪Inderes.‬‬

‫; ‪ , i. 281 D ; ii. 182D‬وین دون‬ ‫; ‪i . 249 A, 252 A, 265c‬‬ ‫; ‪ii. 203 A‬‬
‫‪ , .ii‬بلا ; ‪, ii. 186 c‬أمام‬
‫‪.‬لذي =‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, . 272‬ا‬ ‫‪B‬‬
‫‪ ,..110‬و يدين ; ‪, ii. 184c‬غير = ; ‪163 A, 1835 B‬‬ ‫‪iiB‬‬
‫; ‪meaning beyond, above, ibid .‬‬
‫‪,.i‬وراء ‪opposed to‬‬
‫‪. 186i‬‬
‫‪c‬‬ ‫‪.i‬‬
‫وو‬ ‫‪. 196c‬‬
‫نذ ‪,‬دونك‬ ‫‪.‬م ‪, i , 265‬نی‬
‫‪, .ii 784, 183 .1‬الزم‬
‫‪0T‬‬

‫‪,..i‬أمامك = ونك‬ ‫‪183ic‬‬ ‫‪.e‬زيت وذيت‬

‫‪., i.t‬‬
‫‪268c‬‬
‫‪D‬‬
‫ر‬
‫‪, .i 229 ..‬ديباج‬ ‫‪.i‬غ ‪used instead of‬‬
‫‪, . 6D‬‬
‫‪.‬يماس ‪,‬ديماس‬
‫‪, . 220‬د‬
‫‪ip‬‬ ‫‪.i‬برای ‪, for‬را‬
‫‪.374i‬‬
‫‪D‬‬
‫‪, i. 175 B, 229 .‬دینار‬ ‫راء‬
‫دیوان‬ ‫‪.i‬رحم ‪, for‬را‬
‫‪. 382B‬‬
‫‪i‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪, . 77 c,93Bi‬رای‬
‫‪; ii. 48 0, 50 B‬‬
‫‪, .i 262 ..‬رابع عشرين ;‪, i., 938‬أيها ‪, ii. 265 A; after‬ذا‬
‫; ‪ , ii. 312 B‬ما ‪ and‬من ‪after‬‬
‫‪.‬و ‪ , .ii 89‬يا ‪after‬‬ ‫‪..i‬وراح‬
‫‪102iA‬‬
‫‪.‬ائك‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪ , . 266‬ذ‬ ‫‪D‬‬ ‫‪, . 153‬ر‬
‫‪.‬ازی‬ ‫‪i‬‬ ‫‪D‬‬
‫‪, .ii.2724‬داث‬ ‫‪.i‬لرافدان‬
‫‪, .190 p‬ا‬
‫‪ii. 214 B.‬‬
‫‪.‬لتی = ;‪,i.265 D‬ذات‬ ‫‪iD‬‬
‫‪, .272‬ا‬
‫‪, i. 289 B ; ii. 216 A.‬رب‬
‫‪.i‬ذا يدين‬
‫‪, . 110iB‬‬
‫‪ii. 215 A.‬‬
‫‪.i‬ذات الشمالي أو اليمين‬
‫‪, 111c‬‬
‫‪i‬‬
‫‪.‬ذات مرة‬
‫‪, .i110iB‬‬ ‫بث بث‬ ‫‪ii. 215 A.‬‬

‫; ‪, i. 289 A ; ii. 215BC, 216 c‬ربما‬

‫يوم‬ ‫‪with the Energetic, ii. 42 c.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪ , . 266i‬اك‬
‫‪, 267 c‬‬ ‫رهر‬

‫‪ ,‬وربه‬
‫‪.ii‬بها‬
‫‪ . 214 , 215 A‬ر‬
‫‪.‬لك‬
‫‪ , . 26i‬ذ‬
‫‪7 AC‬‬
‫‪, .i 12 .8‬التربوا وربوا‬
‫‪.‬ذن‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, . 284‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬
‫‪.‬ربیع‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪.263‬‬ ‫‪p‬‬
‫‪.i‬ه ‪,‬زه‪ , .‬جي‬
‫‪ . 265 A‬رد‬
‫ق‪:‬‬

‫‪i. 57 D ; ii. 102 A.‬‬

 II. Arabic Words, Terminations, etc. 425

‫رجل‬, for ‫رجل‬.ii

, . 384 p ‫زق‬.i
‫ ر‬. 69cD
9

‫رجل خنثی‬,.ii
. 273 D ‫وة‬.i
‫زك‬, . 128, 121 c
‫رجل سو‬,.ii
. 274D ‫ف‬. i
‫ز‬, . 69 D

‫رح برخه‬..25ip ‫زهاء‬,.ii

. 211 A
‫س عنی‬. i
‫ر‬,‫ و‬. 16 2B ‫ز‬, . 83i
‫ال = زیل‬. D
‫سول‬.i
‫ر‬, . 136p
lás, for sós,Add. et Corrigenda , i. 282 D; ii.19 A, 346 D.
. i l91 ‫( م‬.
).Vo
‫ساء‬.i
, . 98 B
‫رضه‬.i
, .25 D
, . 206 D
‫شائر‬.ii
‫رعل‬, .i 290 ‫و‬.
‫رن‬ ‫ اث‬, .i 261 A...
...

‫شاد‬ ...

‫ركن‬.i
, . 58c
‫ائر = تار‬.i
‫س‬, . 145 p
‫ ورم‬i. 68 D.
‫رشو‬
280i
‫س‬, .145 B
‫اس‬.i
‫رمة‬,..i A
‫و‬.‫رم‬, . etA a (Vol.i d
Corrigendd ‫أشقط = ساقط‬, .i 34 A‫م‬.
30 c) . ‫سأل‬,. ‫ سال‬, . 24 i
,77 B, 84c
i . 93 B.
‫ره‬, for ‫ا‬, .382 A.A
‫ الشبا‬, tor ‫لشبائب‬.i
ii. 272 A.
‫روح‬ , . 248 A
‫ سبعن‬.ii
‫روحانی‬,, .i 157 . , for ‫استر‬. ,.i 67 B
. . 94i
‫روی‬. D i. 153 D.

, .i
‫رويد‬. 78 B ii. 111 A.

374i
‫ړی‬, for ‫ زئی‬..i D ‫سحرة‬
‫ريت ريثما‬.i
, . 289B ‫سعديك‬,.ii
. 74 B
‫ز‬
‫سف‬,.ii
.19 B
‫ زال‬, .102i
. 8, 103c ‫ قاء‬, ‫ية‬.i
‫ ا‬, . 183 ,184 A
‫زعم‬, . 57 Di
. ; ii. 48 D ‫ ل‬.i
, .77B
54
W. II .
‫‪426‬‬ ‫‪Indeares.‬‬

‫‪.i‬سماوة‬
‫‪, .183 D‬‬ ‫‪.‬شر‪,‬شوت‬
‫‪, . i‬أ‬
‫‪519B‬‬
‫‪.‬سمعة‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, . 147‬‬ ‫‪D‬‬ ‫‪. 108iD‬‬
‫‪ .i‬شرع‬
‫‪.i‬ښون‬
‫‪, . 196 B‬‬ ‫‪ , .i 30 ..‬شرق‬
‫سنين‬ ‫‪, i , .57‬شعر‬
‫رسو‬ ‫‪ii. 19 B.‬‬ ‫‪.‬فاة‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, . 233‬ش‬ ‫‪B‬‬
‫روو‬
‫‪.‬سودد وسودد‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, . 120‬‬ ‫‪c‬‬
‫‪, . 154 D‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫شق‬
‫‪, i. 282 2, 289 B; ii. 19 A,‬سوف‬
‫‪.346 D.‬‬ ‫شوي‬
‫‪ , i. 172A‬شوية ‪ ,‬شوی‬
‫‪.‬و ‪, .i 200‬شوك ‪,‬شوك‬
‫‪.i‬يیابه ‪ .ii‬سوی ; ‪ ii. 209 c‬سوا سوی‬
‫‪ , . 233 B‬ش‬
‫‪.‬ش‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, . 295‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬
‫‪341c .‬‬

‫‪,.ii‬سی‬
‫‪.19B‬‬ ‫‪.‬یراز‬
‫‪ , . 229‬ش‬
‫‪ip‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫‪ , . 289 B ; ii. 344 A‬سيما‬ ‫‪.‬یعی ‪ ,‬شیعی‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, . 151BD‬ش‬
‫ش‬ ‫‪.‬شیوی‬ ‫‪ic‬‬
‫‪, . 151‬‬
‫‪,‬ش‬
‫‪.fo‬‬ ‫‪r‬‬
‫‪, i. 101‬‬ ‫‪D‬‬
‫‪.i‬شا‬
‫‪, . 233 B‬‬
‫‪,..i89Ai‬صاح‬
‫‪.i‬شاط‬
‫‪, . 145c‬‬
‫‪.i‬صاحب‬
‫‪, .203i‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪.i‬اك ‪,‬شاك‬
‫‪, . 145 BC‬ش‬
‫‪.ii‬صار‬
‫‪, .15 c, 102 A‬‬
‫‪.‬شام‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, . 154‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫‪.‬باع‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, . 205‬ص‬ ‫‪A‬‬
‫‪.‬اه ‪,‬شاه‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, . 145‬ش‬ ‫‪BC‬‬ ‫‪.‬لشباة‬
‫‪, . 208c‬ا‬
‫‪i‬‬
‫‪.‬شاهد‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, . 225‬‬ ‫‪D‬‬ ‫‪.i‬باح مساء‬
‫‪, .289D‬ص‬
‫‪.i‬یراز‬
‫‪ , . 229 D‬ش‬ ‫‪, .i 26 A...‬صح‬
‫‪ .211iA‬و‬
‫‪.i‬شبه شبیه‬ ‫‪.‬صع‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, . 186‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬

‫‪ .i‬تات شتات‬
‫‪, . 289 D‬‬ ‫‪.‬صتلحح‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, , 57‬‬ ‫‪D‬‬
‫‪.‬ش‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, . 68‬‬ ‫‪D‬‬ ‫‪.i‬صلعم‬
‫‪, . 25 D‬‬
‫‪.‬فى‬
‫‪, . 202‬ش‬
‫‪i‬‬ ‫‪D‬‬ ‫‪.‬وة‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪ , . 128‬ل‬‫‪,121 c‬‬
 ‫‪II.‬‬ ‫‪Arabic Words, Terminations, etc.‬‬ ‫‪427‬‬

‫ظ‬
‫‪.i‬صنعانی‬
‫‪, . 157c‬‬
‫‪.i‬مه‬
‫‪, . 295 A‬‬ ‫‪, ii. 156, 102 A.‬‬
‫‪.i‬صوت‬
‫‪, . 181 D‬‬ ‫‪ ,..48D‬ظن‬
‫‪ii‬‬
‫‪ ,..i51i‬ث‬
‫‪D‬‬
‫‪.i‬ضيدنانی ‪,‬صيدلانی‬
‫‪, . 164D‬ص‬
‫ع‬
‫‪.i‬بوث‬
‫‪, . 185 D‬ض‬ ‫‪ .ii‬عار‬
‫‪, . 102 A‬‬
‫‪,.ii‬ضحوة‬
‫‪. 111 A‬‬ ‫‪.i‬لعائمون‬
‫‪, . 195c‬ا‬
‫‪,.ii‬ضربه شدیدا‬ ‫‪.54 AD‬‬ ‫‪, .i 34 ..‬أغلى = عالی‬
‫‪.i‬غوث‬‫‪, . 185 D‬ض‬ ‫‪.ii‬مة‬
‫‪, . 206 c, 278 B,282 A‬عا‬
‫‪.ii‬وضل ضلاله‬ ‫‪.55 B‬‬ ‫‪.i‬بادلة‬
‫‪, . 231c‬ع‬
‫ط‬ ‫به ‪ ,, .i 162‬عبدری‬
‫‪.i‬طائی‬
‫‪, . 155B‬‬ ‫‪.‬بشمي‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, . 162B‬ع‬
‫‪, .14i‬‬
‫‪.‬طاع‬ ‫‪5B‬‬ ‫سی‬
‫‪,.i‬‬
‫‪.‬طاق‬ ‫‪295c‬‬ ‫‪.‬عتی‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, . 28‬‬ ‫‪0B‬‬
‫‪.i‬طان‬
‫‪, . 145c‬‬ ‫‪, . 204D‬ع‬
‫‪.i‬جاف‬
‫‪.‬طبق‬ ‫‪iD‬‬
‫‪, . 108‬‬ ‫‪. 48i‬‬
‫‪,.i‬عد‬ ‫‪D‬‬

‫‪.i‬طعن‬
‫‪, . 57 D‬‬ ‫‪, .i 380 .‬عدة ‪, for‬عد‬
‫‪.i‬طعتان‬
‫‪, .118 A‬‬ ‫‪.‬و ‪ , .ii 341‬عدا‬
‫‪. 108 D‬‬
‫‪ ,.ii‬طفى‬ ‫‪.i‬عدس‬
‫‪, .295 B‬‬
‫‪.i‬ططق‬
‫‪, . 295c‬‬ ‫‪.‬عدوى‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, . 15‬‬ ‫‪1c‬‬
‫‪,.i‬‬
‫‪.‬عرعار‬ ‫‪62c‬‬
‫‪, i., 57 .D..‬طلع‬ ‫‪, .i 243 .1‬غرقا‬
‫له و‬ ‫ر‬
‫‪i . 117 D.‬‬
‫طمأنينة‬ ‫‪, . 1i‬‬
‫‪.‬عريس‬ ‫‪71B‬‬
‫‪.‬وارق‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪ , . 213‬ط‬ ‫‪D‬‬ ‫و تو‬
‫‪.‬عزل‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, . 207‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬
‫‪.‬و ‪ ,.i 295‬طبخ طبخ‬ ‫‪C.‬‬
‫‪.‬ع‪f‬س‪su‬ی‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, .151‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, 107‬‬ ‫‪D‬‬
‫‪428‬‬ ‫‪Indexes.‬‬

‫‪139 B ; in comparisons, ii.‬‬

‫‪ , . 204 D‬ع‬
‫‪.i‬شار‬
‫زه‪, .ii 143 A‬بعد = ز ‪142 A‬‬
‫‪.i‬شار‬
‫‪, .263 B‬‬ ‫‪originally a substantive, ii.‬‬
‫‪.‬عشر‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, . 255‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫‪143 D.‬‬

‫‪.i‬عشرن‬
‫‪, .248i‬‬
‫‪A‬‬ ‫‪.i‬ن = عن‬
‫‪, . 292c‬أ‬

‫‪.9‬‬
‫‪93‬‬
‫‪.i‬عشرینی‬
‫‪, . 153E‬‬ ‫‪.‬عن‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, . 290‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬
‫‪, . 62 D‬‬
‫‪.i‬عققت عقاق‬ ‫‪.i‬العنان = العنا‬
‫‪, . 382i‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪.i‬آل = عل‬
‫د‬
‫‪ ,i. 281 D; ii. 166 A, 178 ..‬عند ‪, . 281c; ii. 381 A‬على‬
‫‪, .68 D‬‬
‫‪.i‬يل ‪,‬عل‬ ‫‪.ii‬لزم ‪ or‬ذ = عندك‬ ‫‪, .78 A, 179 p‬ا‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫‪, .290 B; ii. 82 c‬عل‬ ‫‪ , .i 293 .‬عندما‬
‫‪,‬ه‬
‫‪.ii‬علق‬
‫‪, . 45 D, 108 D‬‬ ‫‪.‬عوض‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, . 28‬‬ ‫‪8B‬‬
‫‪. 48 p‬‬
‫‪,.ii‬علم‬ ‫‪.‬وض‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, . 281D‬ع‬
‫‪,.i‬علها‬
‫‪.82i‬‬
‫‪D‬‬ ‫‪.i‬غوطط‬
‫‪, . 120 c‬‬
‫و اما‬
‫‪i‬‬
‫‪ , . 280 c, 281‬علی‬
‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪AC ; i. 166c‬‬ ‫‪.‬یل‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪ , . 146‬ع‬ ‫‪B‬‬
‫‪.‬على به‬ ‫‪iB‬‬
‫‪, . 172‬‬ ‫‪ , i. 226 B ; ii . 272 A , 280 A D ,‬عین‬
‫‪.i‬الز‪r‬م‪ o‬ذ = عليك‬
‫‪, . 78A‬‬ ‫‪282 B.‬‬

‫‪ .i‬ذ = عليك ب‬‫‪, .172 D‬‬ ‫‪.‬عیی‬ ‫‪i‬‬

‫‪, , 95‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬
‫‪, .172iD‬‬
‫‪.i‬على لساني فلاني‬ ‫غ‬
‫‪.i‬يون‬
‫‪, ,195D‬ع‬ ‫‪.i‬ر ‪, replaced by‬غ‬
‫‪, . 6D‬‬
‫‪i. 25 D.‬‬ ‫‪.i‬غاق‬
‫‪, . 295B‬‬
‫‪, .i.78‬علم‬ ‫‪. 187i‬‬
‫‪,.i‬غب‬ ‫‪A‬‬
‫و‬

‫‪ , .i 284 .‬ها ‪,‬عم‬ ‫‪.‬غب‬ ‫‪i‬‬

‫‪, . 264‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬
‫‪ = .i‬ܣܵܛܵ‬
‫‪, ,143 A, 193 A‬عن‬ ‫‪,.i‬غد‬
‫‪. 206i‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪.i‬ن ‪ ,‬ا‬
‫‪ , .16 , 281 B‬م‬ ‫‪ ,.i‬غدا‬
‫‪. 102i‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪ .i‬مر‬
‫‪, . 12 c‬‬ ‫‪,.ii‬غدوة‬‫‪.11A‬‬
‫عمرو‬ ‫‪,i.222 D; connected‬غدایا‪ , .pl‬دوة‬
‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪ , . 16 8, 280‬عن‬ ‫‪, 281 B ; ii‬‬ ‫‪,.ii‬تدن ‪with‬‬
‫‪. 165D‬‬
 II . Arabic Words, Terminations, etc. 429

‫قط‬.i
‫ف‬, . 286 B
‫غ‬, . 15i
‫ضبي‬. 4D
‫فل‬, with the Jussive, i. 291 B ;
‫غن‬.i
, .290 B ‫ہر‬
ii. 35 .
‫غير‬, i. 288 c ; ‫الغير‬, instead of ‫غير‬,
‫ فل‬, ‫قلة‬, ii . 89 B, 381 ..
ii . 208 C ; ‫ غير‬, ii . 208 A, 296 A ;
‫ غير‬, ii. 303 D, 34 0 ‫ق‬, . 20i
c‫غیر ;زن‬, ‫لال‬.
7D
ii. 208 . ‫فلان‬, .i 278 .8
‫لين‬, . 293i
‫= غير أن‬. ‫فلان‬, . 241i
D ; i. 340c ‫ة‬. D ,278 A
‫فم‬, i. 239 , 249 B, 252 ..
, .i
, with ‫هي هو‬. 54c ‫ما = فمه‬.i
‫ف‬, . 274 D
‫حر‬, . 290Di
‫في‬, as ‫ف ترتیب‬. ; i ‫ فقت فقم‬,i.293E
288 A D, 325 A, 330 A.
‫ه‬.t
‫ف‬, ,or
i. 93 B
‫ف‬, after ‫ما‬. i
‫أ‬, . 291 A ‫فو‬, . 249i
. B, 252 A
, after ‫ها‬. i
‫ئ‬, . 291 D 120cc
.,i.t
‫فوضوي فوضى‬,.e
,‫في‬ markin
ii. 3 B , 15 C, 40 B , 345 A sqq .; ,
.
g the apodosis of ‫ ويق و إن‬,,201. ;iD
.182B
omitted , ii. 346 A. ‫فوق‬, ‫من فوق‬. i
. 288 B
‫في‬, with the Subjunctive, ii. 30 c,. i
‫في‬, . 280 c, 281 B;ii 614,, 111 ‫ه‬,
32 B. 153 D, 199D ; ‫ مع‬or ‫دبیر‬,
, with the Genitive, ii. 217 A. ii. 154C.

‫إن‬. iA
‫ف‬, . 291 ‫ وفيما بين‬.ii 180 .
162iB
‫قيها‬,..i . 111 A
‫ فينة‬,.ii
‫قبها ونعمت‬. i2B
, .16 i ‫ق‬
‫ق‬, . 93 B, 94i
. c ; ii . 48 c
‫فتي‬,.ii 102 8A, 103 .
.i 288 ‫و‬. ‫ابل‬. iA
‫ ق‬. 206
46i ‫قال‬, , 47 8i
. , 48 D, 50 D
‫فرغ‬,..i A
‫ف‬, . 200 D
‫ره‬.i , . 108i
‫قام‬.i D
‫فضل‬. i
, . 58 D ‫قب‬.i
, . 295c
‫قبيل‬, . 281 i
‫ قبل‬. D; ii. 186 D
. 141iD
‫فضلا عن‬.i
430 Indexes.

‫من قبل قبل‬.i

, .288B ‫ كان‬, with the Imperf., ii. 8B,
16 c, 21 B.
‫قبل‬, .281 D; ii. 180 A
.i > with the Perf., ii. 5c, 15 C,
‫قد‬,with the Perf ., i. 286 B; ii, 3G, 16 A ; after ‫تو‬.ii
, . 6 ,7 D
5A , 79 B , 346 D ; in correla
omitted , ii. 100 d.
tive clauses, ii . 7 c ; with the
Imperf., i. 286 c ; ii. 21 D.
> redundant, ii. 101 A.
after verbal nouns = he ( it)
‫د كان‬.wi
‫ق‬, the Perfth., ii .5 was, was formerly , ii. 101 D.
.
‫قام‬, .282 i
A ; ii. 187 B , imperative of, with name of
person in accus. , ii. 44c.
‫قدر‬.ii
, .211 A
‫دم‬.
‫ق‬, . 178
i D ‫ان قد‬.wi
‫ك‬, th
the Perf., ii. 5c
‫قرار‬. i
, . 62c
‫ كان وأخواتها‬, ii. 101 D, 266 8,
298 C.

‫سی‬.i. 205 D .
‫ أن‬, . 2920;i
ii. 81 , 02 B
‫ط قط‬. iD
‫ق‬, . 286 .i
‫ أ‬, . 293 B ; i. 78 D
.i
‫قعد‬, . 57 D ; ii . 103 B
‫ كانی پ‬,.ii
.158 A
‫ ون‬, ‫لين‬.i
‫ق‬, . 196B
‫ أي‬, .276Di
. ;ii.127B
‫ليص‬.i
‫ ق‬. 171B ‫ځای‬
‫وی‬. i
‫ ق‬. 295 B ‫أين‬
‫قيراط‬, .i 229 .. . 384 D
‫البر‬, for ‫العبر‬,.ii
‫اك‬
‫ كبير‬, with esgenitive in negative
.i
‫ ك‬, . 280 A ; ii 176 ‫و‬. sentenc , ii . 219 D.

.i
‫ كا‬, . 276 D ; ii. 127 B ‫ ت‬, . 200i
‫ع‬. B, 240 B
‫كاء‬ ‫ كتان = تن‬.ii
, . 383 D
‫كائن‬ ‫ كثير‬, with genitive in negative
ences
sent , ii . 219 D.
‫ كار‬.ii
, . 106 B
‫ كاك‬, for ‫كذلك‬.i
, . 268D ‫ كدی كذا‬, i. 266 8, 269 1, 287A ;
‫ دذاا ك‬or ‫ا‬
ii. 127 D ; ‫دذاا‬
‫ كان‬, ii. 99 8 , 196 A, 197 D, 258 B,
266 A. ‫كذا‬.ii
‫و‬, . 127 D, 128 A
 II . Arabic Words, Terminations, etc. 431

‫لك‬.i
‫ ذ‬, . 268 A, 287 A ‫كنية وية‬.i, . 268 D
‫كراس‬. i
, . 228 D ‫ قاد = كيد‬.
, .83i D
‫ كر‬, . 106i
‫ب‬. B, 107 B ‫گیسی‬.i
, . 220 p
.‫ كيف‬, . 289 c i
; ii . 14 , 24 B
‫لكريمتان‬. i
‫ا‬, .190c ‫كيفما‬.ii
, , 140; 24 B
‫كشری‬. i
. 230 D
‫ يلا‬, . 293 D ;i
. ii. 22 , 28 A
‫ځي‬. i
, . 178 D ‫ يما‬, .ii 29 ‫ كيها أن زد‬,.ii
. 29B
csés , used impersonally, ii.271 d.
‫كيها = يمه‬.i , . 274D
‫ كل‬.i
, . 76c ‫ل‬
, ii. 204 , 262 A; 278 , 282 A,
297 C. ‫ل‬, for ‫ل‬.i
‫أ‬, . 23D
‫كر‬. i
, . 287 A ‫ل‬, .291Bi
‫ل‬, for. ; ii 35 .
‫ كلا‬, ‫ كلتا‬, ii. 212 D, 280 B, 282 .. ‫ ل‬, i. 24 A , 282 D ; ii. 19 B, 51c,
79 A B, 81 D, 175 , 260 A,
‫ كلت‬,.ii
. 214B 261 c, 265 C, 348 D ; with the
‫ تها‬,.ii
.14c Energetic , ii . 41 D , 42 CD ;
. 214iB
‫ كلی‬, ‫ كنتي‬,.i ,.i
with ‫ هو‬, ‫هي‬. 54c
‫ كم‬, . 274 BCi
. ; ii.125BC ‫ت‬, for. 279 ce
., i.r
‫ل‬, p p
; ii. 152 B
‫ كم‬, for .i
‫ ځه‬, . 22 B, 101D ‫ل‬, prep .,i, 23 , 279Bc; ii. 147 D ,
199 D ; expressing the com
‫ما‬ = 8 soon as, ii. 178 A.
plement in the genitive, ii.
‫ك = كمان‬.ii
, . 177c, 193 A 61 A ; after nomina actionis,
ii. 61 D ; after nomina agentis,
‫ كما أنت‬,.ii
. 177 D ii . 68 C, 96 D ; instead of the
‫مثل‬ accus., with the finite verb,
ii . 69 C ; after verbal ad
‫ كؤود‬, .i 186 .8 jectives , ii. 70 A , 71 ABD ;
‫ كي‬, . 293D ;i
. ii.22c, 28 A inserted to strengthen the
annexation , ii. 95 c ; = ‫علی‬,
‫ ځي ؛‬127‫كيئ‬, ‫ كيين‬,i.276 D;ii ii. 148 D.
B.
J, with the Subjunct., i. 291 c ;
‫كفي وي‬.i
, .268p ii . 22 c, 28 A.
432 Indexes.

.
J‫ل‬, w
the Jussii
ve, i. 291t ‫ غير‬.
B; ii . h i
‫لا‬, . 208 D, i
340 B
35 B ; omitted, ii. 35 D.
>
‫لالاميحكاولنة‬, , .i 289 ‫و‬.
, i. 287 A ; ii. 300 A, 333 A, 347 A ;
with the Perf.. retaining its bec ý, as an exceptive, ii. 343c.
original meaning, ii.. 2D, . ‫ئد‬, . 292c i ; ii. 28 A
with the Perf., as optative,
ii . 3 A, 304c ; in oaths, asse ‫ئن‬.i
‫ل‬, . 292 D
verations, etc., ii. 2 A, 304 B ;
with the Imperf., ii. 20 D ;
.i
‫لأن‬, .292c; i.28 A
with the Jussive, ii. 36 B, ‫تعل = لأن‬, .i 290 ‫و‬.
43 D ; with the Ener .
getic, ‫ لأن‬, .293i
B ; ii. 78 p
ii. 42 A, 44 A ; prohibitive,
ii. 306 A ; governing the ‫ات‬.i
‫ ل‬, . 96 D ; ii 105 ‫م‬.
accus., ii . 94 c ; inserted be
tween prep.and genitive, ii . ‫اع‬.
‫ل‬, .1i
45c
224 D ; prefixed to ‫إن‬, .ii ‫لاك‬, for ‫لين‬, .i 379 ..
302 A.
‫لاكن‬, ‫لاك‬.ii , . 333 D
.af
‫ لا‬, ter
a previous negative, ii
2 B, 303 A, 327 B. .ii
‫ لان‬, for ‫ان‬, . 323 D, 380 B
‫لا‬,, after ‫غير‬, ii. 209 A; after ‫ لاو غير‬, for ‫له‬.i
‫ي‬, . 380 B
‫بلا‬, and ‫ ون‬,.ii.303 D ‫ ه‬, for ‫اللهم‬,.ii
. 380 B
‫وه‬
‫ لا‬, for ‫غيير‬.ii
, . 209 B ‫ يمن الله‬. iB
, . 20
Ý,, redundant with ‫أن‬,,after verbs | ‫تبت‬, ‫لب‬.i, .59 B
of forbidding, fearing, etc.,
.ii 304 ‫و‬. ‫نبية‬, i, 74 .8
‫لا بد‬. ic
, . 289 ‫تحق‬.i
, , 45 D
‫ لا بل‬.ii
, . 335 A ‫تحمر‬, for ‫الأحمر‬.ii
, . 380 D
‫ا جرم‬.i
‫ ل‬, . 289 D ‫كي لحيات‬.i ‫ ل‬. 193B
‫ا ذا جر ولا ذا جرم‬.i
‫ ل‬, . 289D . ‫لد‬,..i 280 ‫و‬.
‫ لا زال‬,.ii
.2D .i
‫تدا‬, . 280 , 281 A ; ii. 165 B
‫ا سيما لا سيما‬.i
‫ ل‬, .289 B .
‫تدن‬, .280 , 281Bi; ii. 1653,179 p
‫ا عليك‬.i i
‫ ل‬, . 98c, 172c .
‫تدی‬, . 280c, 2818
i ; ii. 165n,179D
 433
II. Arabic Words, Terminations, etc.
two correlative clauses, ii. 6 B ;
‫تعل‬, i. 290 B ; ii. 108 c; with optative , ii. 347 c.
accus ., ii. 82c ; with genitive,
ii. 83 A. ‫تو‬, .6B,348 A
‫أن‬.i
‫ تعتها‬.i
, .82i
D ‫تولا‬, i. 287 , 294 A ; ii . 6B D,
262c ; interrog ., ii. 310 c.
‫لعله‬.i
, , 26 B

‫عث‬.i
‫ ت‬, . 290B ‫توئم‬, . 294i
. A; i.6B
. , 294 A ;i
‫توما‬, . 287. interrog
‫لعند‬.i
, , 190c ii . 310c,
‫غن‬.i
‫ت‬, . 290c ‫لون‬, i , 290 ‫و‬,
‫تغوطات‬, for ‫الأغوطات‬. i
, . 380 p
‫قد‬.i
‫لي‬,, . 22i
‫الي‬. 1B
‫ ل‬, . 176 iA 7 i 81 82 .
‫لين‬, ‫لكن‬, .28 n; , , ‫ تيت‬. 290 B ;i with the accus,
B ii. 8 ii. 82 83 D.
333 D ; with accus., ii. 78 D.
‫تيتها‬,.ii
.82 D
‫ت‬, ‫ کی‬, . 293 Di
‫كيلا‬. ; ii. 22 c, 28 A ‫لیس‬, verb , i. 96 B ; ii. 15 D, 102 B,
103 C , 302 A ; negative par
ats, expressing admiration, ii. ticle , ii . 302 B, 346 D ; ex
150 A.
ceptive, ii. 343c ; with pro
‫در‬.
‫دره‬
at, expressing admiration , ii. nominal suffixes, ii. 343 D.

‫لم‬, i 150287A. B; with the Jussive ‫س إلا‬.

‫لي‬, . 34i
0B
i. ; ,
ii . 15 D, 3D, 41 B , 347 A. ‫يس غير‬. i
‫ ول‬. 208 D, i
340 B
‫تها‬, not get, i. 287 BC; with the ‫تيم الله‬.i
, . 20 B
Jussive, ii. 22 D, 41 B.
‫اليمن الله‬
‫تها‬, after , with the Perf., i. 294 A ;
synonymous with ‫إلا‬, i. 294 A ;
‫مم‬. i
, . 25 D
ii. 340 A.

‫ ولمنذ‬.ii 190 .. ‫ م‬for ‫ م‬, in pause, ii. 371 C.

‫ ما = م‬, . 274i
‫تن‬, i. 287c ; ii. 22 c, 25 , 300 ‫و‬, ‫ م‬or . Bc; ii. 371c
346 D. ‫ د‬. 176B
‫ه‬ló,‫الل‬.inte
.i
ii

‫ل‬, fo
‫يث‬. r
,i.285B rrog ., i. 270 c, 275c ;
i.
ii..
‫تو‬, i.22 4 , 294 A ; ii. 347 B ; with 298 D, 311D .
55
W. II ,
434 Indexes.

.re
‫ما‬ , i.lat ii ‫ مائی‬, ‫اهی‬.i
270 , 273 B;ive ‫م‬, . 164A
267 D, 319 A ; relative, with
conditional sense, ii. 14 , ‫مائة مئة‬, i. 258 ABD ; ii. 235A,
23 cD . 238 D, 239 A, 244 B.
.ind
‫ما‬, , i. 277 A ; iiite
efin 137 D ; ‫ئینی‬.i
‫م‬, . 153 B
with intensifying force, ii. Có, i. 295 B.
276 B.

‫ ما‬negative, ii. 287 Cc ; ii. 266 B,B,

Ló, ‫ماء أنثى‬. i
, . 273p
346 D ; with the Imperf. , ii. ‫مات‬. i
, . 86 A
20p, 300p; with the Perf , ‫مانی‬.
D .
ii. 300 D ; with the accus. ,
i
, .154A
ii. 104 A ; neg . interrog ., ii ‫ماه‬, ‫اه‬. i
‫م‬, .145 BC
311 A.
‫متی‬, i. 287 c ; ‫می‬, ‫متاما‬. .
ló, as long as, with the Perf., 294 B ; ii. 14 .
i. 294 A ; ii. 17c.
‫من = متى‬,.ii
ló, inserted before a clause, after
.131 A
preposition, a
. etc., ii 192 B, ‫ مثل‬,.ii 210 A.8
220 C.
‫مجزر‬. i
, . 125c
‫ ما‬, redundant ,after ‫رب‬, ii. 215 B ;
‫ ك‬, ii. 193 A ; ‫مجمغ‬. i
, . 126B
after ‫عن من‬
between the wilós and the
‫دوون‬.i
‫م‬, .146 A
‫مضاف إليه‬, .ii .2240 ‫مروان‬. ic
, . 188
.i
‫مذ‬, . 22 B, 280p ; ii. 173c
‫ن‬.
‫ ما إ‬, . 284 i
D ; i. 301 B
‫ا بين‬.i i
‫ م‬, . 180 , 243 A ‫مذ تدن‬.i
, . 190i
c
‫ما حاشا‬.e
, .,iitc
. 343 B ‫ممررححبا = م‬,..i
382iB
‫ مر‬, .i 76 ‫و‬.
‫لا‬ ‫ما‬, ii. 341c, ‫ہ‬

‫ما عدا‬ ...

‫المو‬, ‫المرأة‬, .i 20 .
‫ما تم‬, with the Jussive,as neg . of ‫رفق‬.i
‫م‬, . 125c
. 17 D
‫ما الديمومة‬,.ii ‫مروزی‬. i
, . 15 3D
) ‫ا هو ( هي‬.ii
‫ م‬, . 144 D, 276 c ‫مسجد‬, .i 125 ..
‫ ما هو إلا أن‬,.ii
. 340 c ‫مسطار‬, for ‫مستطار‬.i
, . 68 A
 435
II. Arabic Words, Terminations, etc.

‫ممسعقنط‬, .i 125 . ‫م‬, .16i

‫مها‬, ‫ن‬. 4, 281 B
...
‫ من = ما‬ii.
= 131 ,
C‫ و‬133 , 193 A.
interrog ., i. 270 c, 275 A ; ii .
‫مشترك‬,.ii
.251 D 298 D, 311 D.
, .129 B
‫مشراق‬.i ... )
relative, i . 270 C, 273 B ; ii.
267 D, 319 A ; implying a con
‫ م‬, 125D
‫شرق‬.i dition , with the Perf., ii. 14c,
and with the Jussive, ii.
‫مشكوة‬, .i 12 ..
23 c D, 262 B.
, . 178 D
‫مصر‬.i indefinite, i. 277 A.
‫مصوون‬, .i 146 ..
‫من پی بكذا‬,.ii 163 .
‫مار‬, for ‫ماغ‬,.i
.6D .139iA
‫من بی من فلان‬.i
i1i
‫المضمر‬,..25 D
‫من‬, i. 15 D, 16 A, 22 B, 280 D,
‫طلع‬.i
‫م‬, .125D 281 BC ; ii. 61 A, 123 B C,
‫ظبة‬.i 125 B, 126 B, 129 BC, 199 D,
‫م‬, , 128 D
237 A, 242 A ; after compara
‫مع‬, ‫مع‬, . 280 D i
- ; i 164 B ; pro tive adjj., i. 132 D, 133 ;
perly the accus. of a noun, after a negat. or interrog .,
ii. 165 A. ii. 135 D, 289 B ; preceded by
an indefinite noun, ii. 136 B ;
‫معا‬. i
, . 26 B
expressing the agent of the
, . 251i
‫المعتمد‬.i D Passive, ii. 139 A , 270 D ; used

‫عندنا = معنا‬,.ii
. 164c ‫ للتمييز‬ii.138BB; originally a
ip subst .,, ii. 135 D ;; = ‫منذ‬, .i
‫غرب‬.
‫م‬, 125
‫مغزل‬.i
, . 131A
175 A ; ‫ بدل‬or ‫عند‬, .i
130 BD ; with an indefinite
‫الم‬, .251 D, 268c
‫غش‬.i genitive , forming the subject

‫فرق‬. iD
‫م‬, . 125 of a sentence, ii. 135 c ; siis
‫مقدار‬, .ii 211 A. , . 139iA
‫وإليك‬.i
‫فوود‬. iA
‫م‬, . 146 ‫من أجلي‬. i
, .131D
ii. 136 A B.
‫من‬, . 281ci
‫آل = مل‬. ; ii. 380 D ‫أحبر‬
 ‫‪:33:33‬‬
‫‪436‬‬
‫‪Indexes.‬‬

‫‪.‬من أين‬‫‪. 28i‬‬

‫‪5D‬‬ ‫‪ .ii3810,‬والمنايا ‪ and‬المنازل = المنا‬
‫بعد‬ ‫‪ii . 189 B.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬‫‪3‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪3::‬‬
‫‪382 A.‬‬

‫‪ii . 188 C.‬‬ ‫‪, .i 233 .‬ماجد‬

‫‪ii. 189 A.‬‬ ‫‪.‬نانی‬
‫‪ , . 154‬م‬
‫‪i‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬
‫‪ii. 190 A.‬‬ ‫‪.‬منبث‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, . 125‬‬ ‫‪D‬‬
‫‪.‬نت‬
‫‪, . 2i‬م‬
‫‪75 B‬‬
‫‪...‬‬ ‫)‬ ‫‪ii. 182 D.‬‬ ‫‪.i‬نتن‬
‫‪, . 138 D‬م‬

‫‪ i. 288 B.‬و ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.i‬مننورنر‬

‫‪ , . 126 A‬م‬
‫‪ii . 173 A.‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬
‫‪, . 280 Di‬مند‬‫‪; ii .173 B‬‬
‫‪ii . 143 D.‬‬ ‫‪.‬مسك‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, . 12‬‬ ‫‪6A‬‬
‫‪ii. 189 .‬‬
‫‪.‬المنطوق‬
‫‪, .i‬‬
‫‪251i‬‬
‫‪D‬‬
‫‪.‬و ‪.ii 136‬‬
‫‪...‬‬ ‫>‬
‫‪.‬منه‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, . 275‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬
‫غير‬ ‫‪.. , ii. 163 A.‬‬ ‫منو‬
‫‪ii. 136 D.‬‬
‫‪, . 154 A‬‬
‫‪.i‬منوی‬
‫‪. ii. 189 A.‬‬ ‫‪.‬المني‬
‫‪, . 275Di‬من ‪,‬‬
‫‪; i. 314 B‬‬
‫‪ii . 189 B.‬‬ ‫‪ for é, in pause, ii. 371 c.‬مه‬
‫‪ás,‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬

‫‪...‬‬ ‫)‬ ‫‪ii . 189 p.‬‬ ‫‪.‬ا = مة‬ ‫‪i‬‬

‫‪ , . 27‬م‬ ‫‪4D‬‬
‫‪.‬و ‪.ii 165 , 189‬‬ ‫‪.‬ه ‪,‬مه‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, . 29‬م‬ ‫‪5A‬‬
‫‪ .... .i 136‬الليمبعيه‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪.‬هاری مهار مهاری‬ ‫‪ip‬‬
‫‪ . 228‬م‬
‫‪... ii. 165 B.‬‬ ‫‪.‬هما‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, .146‬م‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪,137‬‬ ‫‪D‬‬
‫وراء‬ ‫‪ii. 190 A.‬‬ ‫‪.‬و ‪, .ii 14‬مهمن‬
‫‪, .i 63 ..‬مؤثفاة‬
‫يومه‬ ‫‪ii . 136 D.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪..176‬من الله‬
‫‪ii‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫‪.‬ياه‬ ‫‪iB‬‬
‫‪ . 233‬م‬
‫‪,..230‬ميك‬
‫‪ii‬‬ ‫‪D‬‬
‫‪.‬من ربی من الرب‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪. 176‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫‪. 342 .‬‬
 II. Arabic Words, Terminations, etc. 437

i. 283 D.

‫ن‬.i
‫ ر‬, 26 A
‫عام نعم نعم‬.i‫ن‬, . 287 p
‫ن‬,
, of the 2nd Energetic of verbs, ‫عها‬.
‫ن‬, . i
97 B
rejected , i. 22 D.
‫ن‬, for ‫ہنی‬.i
. 371D
i ‫قاش‬.i
‫ن‬, . 204 p
Ö-, for 6, in rhyme, ii. 369 c. .
‫نفس‬, , 272 4i
, 280 2, 282B
‫ن‬, for ‫نتا‬, in lst p.pl. Perf.,i.55 D; ‫فسانی ا‬.i
‫ ن‬.164c
ii. 384 A. ‫وش‬
, . 69 A
‫نم‬.i
Ø , for ‫نی‬ i. 101 D.
‫وق‬.
‫ت‬, . 200
i D
‫ا‬. i
‫ ن‬, . 25 D
‫ناس‬.
,.i
233c ‫نی‬, for.i
‫نی‬, . 21 cp, 101 D
‫حم‬.
‫ت‬, . 287
i D ‫ نیا‬for ‫ نی‬,‫نی‬.i
rhymen
, ii
371CD.
ii. 178 C. ‫له ر‬

‫ نخ‬i. 295 B. ‫ن‬, . 258 A

‫يف‬.i
‫نية‬, for ‫ نی نی‬in rhyme,i.101 D;
‫نزع‬, .i 57 .. D. ii. 371 C.

.i
‫نساء‬, .203B, 233 B o

‫نسوان‬.
‫ نسوة‬.209c,217i
,233B | ‫ه‬- , in the Imperative, .i. 90 D,
93 A.
‫ نشدتك الله إلا‬.ii 339 ..
‫صاری‬.i
‫ت‬, . 223 c 9 in
pause, ii. 369 CD.

‫ص‬. i
‫ت‬, . 264 A =
final 0, i. 10 B.

‫نص‬,,i. 264 A; ii. 280B,282 B. ‫أ = ه‬, i. 282 B; in the form ‫أفعل‬,

i. 36 B.
‫صيف‬.i
‫ت‬, . 264 A )

5, for , i. 101 6, 253 B, 279 c,

‫عم‬.
‫ن‬, . 58i
cD 281 A.

‫ نعم نعم نعم‬.i

‫ نعم‬. 97 A -D ; ii ‫= ما‬- ‫ ذ‬, .i 296 c.
290 A.
‫اندا‬.
‫ه‬, . 54
iD
‫نعم ما‬.i
, : . 97 B .
‫ها‬, . 268i
2, 294 c
‫‪438‬‬ ‫‪Indeares.‬‬

‫‪.‬ځذ = ها‬ ‫‪i‬‬

‫‪, . 296‬‬ ‫‪c‬‬ ‫‪.i‬رااقد‬
‫‪, . 36 B‬رف‬
‫‪ , .i 296 c.‬ذ = های ها‬
‫‪,‬ء‬ ‫‪67 D.‬‬

‫‪.‬خذ = ماء‬
‫‪, . 296‬‬
‫‪i‬‬ ‫‪c‬‬ ‫‪i. 295 B.‬‬

‫‪.‬هاندا‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, . 54‬‬ ‫‪D‬‬ ‫‪.‬و ‪, .i 296‬هع هع‬
‫‪, . 36 c, 296 B‬ها‬
‫‪.i‬ت‬ ‫‪.‬ا‬
‫‪, . 268i‬هذ‬
‫‪2 , 287 D‬‬
‫‪.i‬هاتيك هااك‬
‫‪, . 268c‬‬ ‫‪.i‬ل = مل‬
‫‪, . 270A‬ا‬
‫‪.i‬هاذاك‬
‫‪, . 268c‬‬ ‫‪jó, interrog., i. 15 D, 288 A ; ii.‬‬
‫‪.‬ر هار‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, . 145‬ها‬ ‫‪BC‬‬ ‫‪ ,‬لك في أو إلى ; ‪308 c‬‬
‫هل‬
‫‪ii . 309 D.‬‬
‫‪.‬اع لاغ‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, .145B‬ق‬
‫‪ =.‬های‬ ‫‪ , . 296i‬ذ‬
‫‪c ; ii. 77D‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬
‫‪, . 294i‬ه‬
‫‪G, 295 B‬‬
‫‪.‬اه‬
‫‪, . 294‬ه‬
‫‪i‬‬ ‫‪c‬‬ ‫‪ .ii 310 .‬زه ‪, .i 288‬هر‬
‫رش‬
‫‪.‬هاها هاهنا‬ ‫‪iA‬‬
‫‪, . 288‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪, . 294D‬ه‬ ‫‪, 296 B‬‬
‫‪,.i‬هب‬
‫‪.49i‬‬
‫‪A‬‬ ‫‪,.i‬هلهل‬
‫‪. 107c‬‬
‫‪i‬‬
‫‪,.i‬هب‬‫‪.108i‬‬‫‪D‬‬ ‫‪, . 107i‬‬
‫‪.i‬هم‬ ‫‪D‬‬
‫‪.i‬بوط‬
‫‪, .186 A‬ه‬ ‫‪, .i‬هم‬
‫‪, . 282 , 284c‬هما‬
‫‪ .i295 2‬مجا ج‬ ‫‪B.‬‬
‫‪ , for .i‬هم‬
‫‪, . 22 D, 101 C‬هم‬
‫‪,.ii‬هجاجية‬
‫‪. 74B‬‬ ‫‪.‬و ‪, i. 22D, 101 D, 279‬هم ‪for‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫‪, . 268 B; ii. 89 D‬هذا‬ ‫‪i. 22 B, 55) A, 10lD.‬‬
‫‪ )-(,.ii‬هذا ‪(, for‬ب) هذا‬
‫‪. 383 c‬‬ ‫‪ , for .‬هما‬
‫‪ , . 101i‬هما‬
‫‪c, 279 c‬‬
‫‪, .i 282 .‬أذا = هذا‬
‫‪,.i 292 ..‬إن ‪, for‬هن‬
‫‪,.ii‬هداية‬ ‫‪. 74B‬‬
‫‪, .i‬هون ; ‪, i. 249 8, 2:52 A‬هن‬
‫‪.i‬هذا‬
‫‪, . 268c‬‬ ‫‪.A‬‬
‫‪196‬‬ ‫; ‪ , i. 278B‬هنة ‪; fem‬‬
‫‪.i‬هي هذه‬
‫‪, . 268B‬‬ ‫‪, in the‬هنت ‪,‬هنة‪, .fem‬هن‬
‫‪vocative, ii . 89 BC.‬‬
‫‪.‬م ‪ , .i 69‬هر‬

‫‪.‬فراح‬ ‫‪iB‬‬
‫‪, . 36‬‬ ‫‪.i‬ن ‪, for‬هن‬
‫‪, . 285B‬إ‬
 II. Arabic Words, Terminations, etc. 439

, or
‫هن‬.f ,i 279 .. ‫و‬

‫ا وهنا‬,‫ن‬.i
‫ ه‬.288 A - for , in vulgar pronunciation ,
-

i. 213 D.
‫ هنار‬, .i 36 . ‫دو‬, for ‫ داء‬aud ‫ ي‬. i
.12D
‫هناك‬, ‫هاك‬, .i 288 .. ‫ؤ‬. i
, . 17c
‫نالك‬.i
‫ه‬, . 288 A , for ‫ و‬medial, i. 119 c, 145 c,
205 D, 206 B, 210 AC.
‫هنيئا مريئا‬,.i i
. 74D ‫ و‬, for ‫و‬. i
, . 18c
‫هنا‬,‫ها‬, .i 288 .8 A. i , 290 D ; ii . 97 B, 325 A - 333 A ;

‫ هها‬, .i 288 .8 with ‫هي هو‬.i

, . 54c
‫ هو‬, for ‫هو‬.i i
, . 385c, 390B 9, with the accus., ii . 83 C, 325 D.
,, with the genit., ii . 216 D.
‫هو‬, . 54 A ; i
. ii. 258 D seq
9, with the genit. , in swearing, i.
. 276i
‫هو ما‬,.i c 279 c ; ii . 175 B.

‫ هی‬for ‫إیي‬. i
‫ا‬, . 285c ‫رو‬ with the subjunct ., ii. 32 B,
84B D.
‫هی‬ for ‫ هي‬,.ii 385 .
i
‫وا‬, . 294 G, 295
. D ; ii 85 8, 93 ‫و‬.
‫هی‬, .i 54 .8
‫هيا‬, . 294 i
. B ; ii. 85 A ‫ وا‬,.for ,i 12 ..
‫هيا‬, . 294i
. 236iA
‫واحد‬,.i
‫هي‬, . D , 296 B
‫وإن‬, . 292D ; iii
- . 40 A ; =never
‫هيا‬,for ‫يا‬. iA
, . 104 theless, ii. 17 B.

i. 294 D. ‫و‬, . 294 D

‫واة‬, ‫اها رواها‬.i
i. 295 B. ‫وث‬.i
, . 166A
ög , for öl-, i. 12 A.
‫ه‬, .2i
‫هید‬, ‫يد‬. 95B
‫هي‬, . 36i
‫من‬. c, 67 D ‫وثق‬.i
, . 78B
104i
‫وجد‬, ii.48D, 50 B ; ‫وجد‬,..i A
‫ه‬, . 294 D
‫يهات‬.i
‫ روم‬ii. 272 A.
‫ؤ‬.‫مي‬ A d
. et Corrig enda d
(Vol. i
30 c). ‫وجو‬.i
, .115D
 440 Indeces.

‫وحد‬, .i 289 ‫و‬. ‫ولين‬,.i

‫ولين‬, . 287 B;ii. 333D
,.i
‫ور‬. 78c ‫تم‬.i
‫و‬, .331 D
‫وودذعر‬, .i 79 ‫و‬. ‫وله‬.i
, . 78c
‫ ولو‬, . 294 A ; ii. 9 B
.i
.i
‫وراء‬, . 282 A ; ii . 187c ..i
‫ولی‬. 78B
‫وتة‬

‫ورث‬.i
, . 78 B ‫ما‬.i
‫و‬, .331 D, i
332 D
‫ومق‬.i
, . 78B
‫و‬ ...

‫ ون‬, instead of ‫ يون‬Add. et

‫وړی‬ Corrigenda (Vol. i. 195 p).
‫وزع‬, i , 79 ‫و‬. ‫وهب‬.i
, . 79 p
.
‫وسط‬, . 282 i A; ii. 188 B ‫وهل‬.i
, . 78c
.i
‫وسع‬,. 79c .i
‫وی‬, . 294 , 296 A
:

‫وشوی روشوی‬, etc.,i. 151c ‫ویا‬, ‫رویا‬.ii

. 84c
i i . 296 A.
‫وضع‬.
, . 79 D
: : : : : :
...

‫رطی‬
‫وعر‬. i
, . 78c ...
...

‫وغر‬
‫وفق‬.i
, . 78B
‫قد‬.wi
‫و‬, the Perfth
.,ii 58A, 332 A‫ویلټه زه‬, .i 296 A..
with the Imperf. , ii. 331 c.
‫ رویا رویه‬.i 294 ‫و‬. |

‫وقع‬. i
, . 79 p ‫يه‬.p
‫و‬- , namepe
ro r
s, i . 244 D
Us, with the Jussive, i. 291 B ; ii.
35 C. ‫ی‬
ýg, after another negative, ii. 2 B, - for S-, in the vocative, i.
303 A, 327 B ; einphatic, ii.
253 A ; ii. 87 B.
304 A ; in comparisons, ii.
333 B. for ‫ی‬- at the end of some
 II. Arabic Words, Terminations, etc. 441

words, i. 10 AB; by poetic | ‫يال‬.i, . 152i A

license, ii. 383 c-384 A.
.dropped in pause, ii 370 ‫و‬. ‫ يا ته‬, ‫ تك‬.
‫ يا‬, .e
, witht c
the accu s
=
, i . 17c.
or
‫من‬,.ii
.153 A
‫ی‬,.for
, i 18 . ‫يا ليت‬. i
, , 92 B
‫ی‬, for = or ‫ ی‬.i
. 252c ‫يئ‬.i
, . 92 B
‫ای‬
.fin
, i. 11 B,al
295 D ‫ یه‬.i 80 ‫و‬.

‫ ی‬, for S-, in pause, ii. 370 c. ‫ية‬- , for ‫ داة‬, 12.i .8
is-,
.p
s‫ دی‬rono nearly asun,i.11Dce for ‫يق‬.i
‫يتق‬,d , . 3845iB
‫ ی‬, fem . term ., i. 184 BB, 240 c ; ‫يجد‬,for ‫يجد‬. i
, . 385A
rejected , i. 151 D. ‫ رد‬,
‫= ي‬.a i
,i.11c ‫ ويعرر‬for ‫ ويعر‬ii. 378 D.

‫ دی‬, for pause , iin

.i 370 ‫و‬. ‫ يفعل‬and ‫يفعل‬, from ‫قع‬.i
, . 59 D
‫وسی‬ for 's-, in pause, ii . 370 D. ots, etc., for ić, etc., i. 82 D; ii.
379 D.
S-, dropped in pause, ii. 371 B D.
‫ ی‬, for ‫ ی‬, pron . suffix ,i.21c, ‫ يون‬or ‫يون قد‬.wit
, h,
the Perf
101 ‫د‬. ii. 22 A.

‫ ی‬, for ‫ي‬.i | ‫يل‬, for ‫ييد‬, .ii 385 .8

=, the vocative,iin
87 cD.
‫ ی‬, relat,ad
. j.,i.149osess ‫ ي‬.15i
c seqq:.; ii. ‫مان‬. 4B >

225 A.
‫ ين‬,for ‫يين‬.i
, .235 D
ú, for 's-, in rhyme, ii. 370 D. ‫يني‬- ,for ‫ ين‬, in thegenit .plural,
‫ يا‬, for ‫سی‬ ii. 371C.
9 i. 236 D ; ii. 388 D.

‫ يا‬,i. 294 B, 295 CD; ii. 85 8, 94 A; ‫يومئذ‬.i

, . 292 A
before a verb or a clause, ii.
92 A, 310 B. ‫يوم السابع‬. i3iB
, .23
‫ يا الله يا الله‬,.i. 89ic ,
‫ية‬- for – and ‫ = ی‬,.ii
. 371c
.
‫يا أيها‬, . 294ci ; i. 85 8, 92c ‫ يون‬, shortened to ‫ ون‬, Add . et
‫ يا رب‬.ii
, . 216 A Corrigenda (Vol. i. 195 p).
W. II , 56
442 Indexes.

III. ENGLISH AND LATIN TECHNICAL TERMS ( IN .

CLUDING SOME ARABIC, EXPRESSED IN ROMAN
LETTERS), GRAMMATICAL FORMS, CONSTRUCTIONS,
ETC.

Abbreviation, mark of, i. 25 c.

Abģèd, Abugèd, i. 28 B.
after ‫ ينفي الجنس‬ý‫لا‬, .
i 94c;
Accent, i. 27 A. after ‫ لا الحجازية‬and
Accusative, ii. 45 A ; single, after
a transitive verb, ii. 45 c ; ‫ما الحجازية‬, .ii 104 a; after
double, after causatives, the éý, ii. 105 A ; after ,i.
‫أفعال القلوب‬, etc., i. 47 c; 82 c ; after numerals, ii, 237 B.
Active voice, i. 49 C.
triple, ii. 51 A, 53 B ; cognate,
Adjectives, i. 105 A ; ii. 273 A,
after transitive and intransitive
283 A ; in connexion with a
verbs, ii. 53 c ; depending on a
vocative, ii. 91 D ; comparative
verb understood, ii. 72 D ; with and superlative, i. 140c - 143A ;
the passive voice, ii. 52 B ;
ii. 132 D, 218 A, 226 c ; inten
instead of a preposition and
sive, i. 133 D- 140 B ; numeral,
the genitive, ii. 191 B ; as vo i. 105 A, 253 c, seqq.; distribu
cative, ii. 85 c ; adverbial, i.
288 c, ii. 109 c ; of comparison,
tive, i. 262 D ; multiplicative,
ii. 128 B ; of liinitation or de
i. 263 B ; partitive, i. 263 c ;
relative, i. 109 D ; verbal, i.
termination, ii. 122 A ; of the
131 B seqq. ; with the accusa
motive, object, cause or reason,
ii. 121 A ; of place, ii. 111 B ; of tive, or with J of the object,
ii. 70 A- 71 D ; of the form
the state or condition ( ḥāl),
ii. 112 c ; of time, ii. 109 c ; of ‫أفعل‬, with ‫ إلى‬of the subject ,
wish, salutation, etc., ii. 74 B ; ii. 71 D, 72 A ; with the geni
tive, ii. 218 A, 221 B ; relative ,
after á‫إن النافية‬. ii. 105 A; after with a genitive in apposition ,
‫ كأن أن إث‬, and ‫تنعيلئ‬, ii. 225 A.
ii. 78 D ; after it and j , Adverbs,, i. 282 A ; numeral,, i.
262 BCD ; inseparable, i. 282 B ;
ii. 82 c ; after áls and its
“ sisters,” ii. 99 A- 109 A ; after separable, i. 283 c.
Adverbial accusative, i. 288 C ; ii.
‫ أي كم‬, and ‫ كذا‬, ii.125B ; 98 D - 128 c.
 III. English and Latin Technical Terms, etc. 443

Adversative sentences, ii. 333 A. Collectives, concord of, ii. 273 B,

Agent, ii. 250 D. 291 A, 296 D.
Alphabet, i. 1 . Common gender, words of the,
Annexation, definite and inde- i. 180 D, 185 B.
finite, ii. 225 c .
Comparative Adjectives, with ixo,
Apodosis of conditional and hypo ii. 132 D- 134 D.
thetical clauses , ii. 6 B - 17c; Compound sentences, ii. 255 A
ii. 23 c, 36 D, 345 A seqq. ; of 256 D.
ů,} omitted, ii. 17 A ; of gó, Concord in gender and number,
omitted, ii. 8 c. ii. 288 D seqq.
Apposition , ii. 271 c ; instead of Conditional and hypothetical sen
the construction with the geni- tences, ii. 6 B- 17 C, 23 C, 36 D,
tive, ii. 229 B ; of verbs, ii. 345 A seqq.
287 D.
Conjunctions, i. 290c ; inseparable,
Appositives, ii. 272 D seqq. i. 290 D ; separable, i. 291 d.
Article, i. 15 c, 19 c, 23 D, 269 A. Conjunctive pronouns, i. 270 B.
Assimilation of letters, i. 15 B ; of Consonants, final, how affected by
final hèmza to preceding , and the waşl, i. 22 A.
s, i. 18 c, 144 D ; in the verb, Construct state of a noun, i.
i. 16 B, 64 D, 65 D-67 c ; in 248 252 A ; ii. 198 A.
VIII. of verbs having i as Co -ordination, ii. 271 c.
first radical, i. 76 D ; in VIII. | Copulative sentences, ii. 325 A
of verbs having , and US S as seqq.
first radical, i. 80 D ; of vowels, Correlative conditional clauses, ii.
i . 60 B, 84c, 136 D, 167 A, 36 D, 38 B.
205 C D, 206 A C. Damm, damma, i. 7 D.
Cardinal numbers, i. 253 c seqq. ; Dates, ii . 248 A.
ii . 234 c seqq . Day of the month, ii. 248 c,
Cases, i. 234 c. Declension of undefined nouns, i.
Circumstantial clause, ii. 196 B- 234 c ; of defined nouns, i.
198 A, 330 B. 247 B ; diptote, i. 234 c, 238 A,
Clause, circumstantial, ii. 196 B- 239 D ; triptote, i. 234 c,
198 A, 330 B ; conditional and 236 A.
hypothetical, ii. 6 B-17 c, 23 c, Defective verb , i. 88 A.
36 D, 345 A seqq.; descriptive Definite annexation , ii . 225 C.
or qualificative, ii. 283 a, 317c ; Degrees of comparison , i. 140c
relative, i. 105 B ; ii . 317 B. 143 a.
444 Indexes.

Demonstrative pronouns, i. 105 A, Energetic, i. 61 A, 62 c ; energetic

264 D seqq.; ii. 277 A. imperfect, ii. 24 c, 41 D ; after
Descriptive clause, ii. 283 2, 317 C.
Diacritical points, i. 4 A. 11, ii. 43 A ;after j, ii. 41 D,
Diminutive, i. 110 A, 166 B seqq .; 42 c ; after his, ii. 42 c ; after
ii. 261 c ; formed from the herMO en and similar compounds,
pronouns and prepositions, i. ii. 43 c ; energetic imperative,
167 c ; from verbs of surprise, ii. 44 A.
i. 100c, 167c ; from diptotes, i. Enunciative , ii. 251 c.
242 B ; from distributive nume- Exceptive sentences, ii. 335 D seqq.
rals of the form jles, i. 242 B. Feminine nouns, by form , i. 179 A ;
Diphthongs, i. 7 B ; pronunciation by signification, i. 177 D ; by
of them , i. 10 D ; how affected usage merely, i. 179 D — 180 c ;
by the waşl, i. 21 D. of adjectives and substantives,
Diptote nouns, i.i 234 c—246 B. how formed, i. 183 c—185 B.
Doubling of a consonant, how Fèth, fètha, i. 7c ; passes into
marked, i. 13 D. damma, before 9, in vulgar
Doubly weak verbs, i. 91 D. pronunciation , i. 213 D.
Dual, i. 52 B, 187 D; from óle Figures, arithmetical, i. 28 B.
Forms of the triliteral verb , i.
‫ الجمع‬and broken plurals, 29 B —— 47 B ; of the quadriliteral
i. 190 D ; dual of an adjective
verb, i. 48 C—49 c.
used as a substantive , i. 190 C ;
Fourth form of the verb, used as
of place-names, in poetry, i.
190 D ; with an adjective in the glas of the first, i.35 D.
the fem , sing., ii. 275 D ; dual Fractions, i. 263 D.
subject with a preceding sin- Future, in the sense of a polite
gular verb, ii. 293 B. order or request, ii. 19 B.
* Elif omitted in writing, i. 20 B, Future-perfect, how expressed, ii.
23 A ; elif conjunctionis, i. 16 D , 22 A.
20 D, 21 a ; elif productionis Gender , in the verb , i. 52 B ; in
omitted in writing , i. 10 A ; the noun , i. 177 c ; common ,
elif separationis, i. 21 A ; Olif i. 180 D, 185 B ; feminine, i.
makşūra and mèmdūda, i. 11 B, 177 D ; formation of the femi
25 B ; alif otiosum , i . 11 A ; how nine, i. 183 C-185 B.
affected in poetry, ii. 374 B. Genitive, ii. 198 1—202 B ; supply
Elision of i, i. 19 c, 23 A ; by ing the place of an adjective,
poetic license, ii. 374 B. ii. 202 B , 229 A ; of limitation ,
 III. English and Latin Technical Terms, etc. 445

with adjectives or participles, 60 B- 61 A ; jussive, i. 60 B

ii. 221 B ; in apposition to re- 61a ; energetic, i. 61A ; passive,
lative adjectives, ii. 225 A ; i. 63 A ; subjunctive or poten
after Wei, etc., ii, 226 c ; after tial, how expressed, ii. 6 B ;
imperfect indicative, significa
, ii.214 B; after is , uies, tions of, ii. 18 B ; as a hal, may
ons, etc., ii. 204 c—212 D ; be translated by our infinitive
after gís , lis, ii. 212 D ; or participle, ii. 19 D — 20 c ;
after's , ii. 126 a ; after s‫رو‬ preceded by ús = Latin or
Greek imperfect, ii. 21 B; pre
i, j , ii. 216 D—218 A ; after
9 suppressed, ii. 217 B ; geni ceded by ‫ يثون‬or ‫= يكون قد‬
tive plural after numerals, ii. future-perfect, ii. 22 A.
234 c; genitive singular after Impersonal active, ii. 271 A ; pas
sive, ü , 268 A.
‫ مائة‬and ‫ألف‬,.i
. 238iD Inchoative, ii. 251 c ; when it may
Gèzm , gèzma, i. 13 A. be indefinite, ii. 260 D.
Hèmz, hèmza, i. 16 D- 18D; hèmza Indefinite annexation , ii. 225 C.
conjunctionis, i. 11 B, 21 A. Infinitive, i. 52 B, 109 A, 110 A
Hollow verbs, i. 81 c. seqq.; as objective complement,
Hypothetical sentences, ii. 345 A ii. 53 c.
seqq. Intensive adjectives, i. 136 c, 137 A.
'Imāla, i. 10 c. Interjections, i. 294 B; having a
Imperative, i. 61 D-—62 D ; of verbal force, i. 296 B.
verbs having i as first radical, Interposition of a word between
i. 74 A, 76 CD ; of doubly weak the status constructus and the
verbs, i. 93 A ; in two cor- genitive, ii. 222 D.
relative clauses, ii. 24 A , 37 c ; Interrogative sentences, ii. 306 B
negative, expressed by ny with seqq.

the jussive, ii. 43 D ; with Inversion of subject and predicate,

ii. 253 D-255 A.
avejizītų ,ii. 44 B; imperative Jussive,, i.60
au . B–61 a;A ; in two cor
of ‫ كان‬with naine of a person relative clauses, after !, ús,
in the accusative, ii. 44 c.
etc., ii. 23 c, 36 d ; after J,
Imperfect, i. 51 B ; its charac
teristic vowels in the first ii. 35 B; after , , etc., .ii.
form , i. 57 B-59 B ; indicative, 22 D, 41 B ; as negative im
i. 60 B461 A ; subjunctive, i. perative, after v, ii. 36 B , 43 D.
 446 Indexes.

Kèsr, kèsra, i. 7c ; for fèth , in the i. 109 c, 130 B ; nomen loci et

preformatives of the imperfect, temporis, i. 109 B, 124 D seqq.;
i. 60 A. formed from the derived con
Kunya, i. 244 D. jugations, i. 129 B ; nomen pa
Lãm- elif, i. 3 A. tientis, i. 109 A, 131 B ; used as
Letters of the alphabet, i. 1A ; nomen actionis, i. 132 c ; con
their order in N. Africa, i. 3 A ; strued with one or two accu
unpointed , how distinguished , satives , ii. 69 D, 194 c seqq.;
i. 4 A ; classes of, i. 4 c ; pro nomen qualitatis, i. 110A, 165B;
nunciation of, i. 5 B ; of pro nomen relativum, i. 109 D ;
longation, i. 9c ; solar and nomen speciei, i. 109 B , 123 D ;
lunar, i . 15 c; numerical values as objective complement, ii.
of, i. 28 B ; weak , i. 53 A, 71 D. 53 c ; nomen unitatis, i. 109 c,
Licenses, poetic, ii. 373 c seqq. 147 B ; nomen vasis (loci et
Ligatures of letters, i. 3 B. temporis), i. 109 B, 124 D seqq.;
Local sentences, ii. 252 D. nomen vasis, i. 109 D, 149 A ;
Masculine or feminine nouns, list nomen verbi or actionis, i.
of, i. 181 D. 109 A, 110 A ; list of nomina
Matta, i. 24 c. actionis, i. 110 C-112 c ; most
Mèdd, mèdda, i. 24 c. usual forms, i. 112 D ; nomina
Metres , ii. 358 c seqq . actionis of forms II.-XV., i.
Moods, i. 51 D, 52 A. 115 B ; of quadriliteral verbs,
Nebra, i. 16 D. i. 117 c ; of solid verbs, i. 118 A ;
Negative sentences, ii. 299 c seqq. of verba hèmzata , i. 118 B; of
Neuter of the personal and de weak verbs, i. 118 c-122 D ;
monstrative pronouns, how ex nomen verbi, ii. 193 D ; as ob
pressed in Arabic, ii. 299 A. jective complement, ii. 53 cc ; its
construction with subject and
Neuter verb, i. 50 D.
object, ii . 57 B ; construed with
Nomen abundantiae, i. 109 D,
148 B ; nomen actionis, see y, ii. 61 D ; with a preposition,
nomen verbi ; nomen agentis, ii. 61 B ; as ļāl, ii. 114 c ;
i. 109 a, 131 B-133 B, 143 B nomen vicis, i. 109 B, 122 v ;
147 A ; used for nomen actionis, as objective complement, ii.
53c. See Noun .
i. 132 B ; construction of, ii.
63 0–69 D, 194 c seqq.; nomen Nominal sentence, ii. 250 D.
deminutivum, i. 110 A (see Di Nominative as vocative, ii. 85 B.
minutive) ; nomen instrumenti, Noun, i. 104 D ; primitive and
 III. English and Latin Technical Terms, etc. 447

Jerivative, i. 106 A ; substan- with two or more objective

tire and adjective, i. 106 A ; complements in the genitive
w defined , i. 247 B ; diptote, and accusative, ii. 67 D ; with
i . 239 D ; triptote, i. 234 c ; the genitive, ii. 221 B.
inable and indeclinable, i. Particles, i. 278 c ; negative, ii.
221 D ; wholly indeclinable, i. 299 c seqq.
13 D — 244 D. See Nomen. Passive voice, i. 49 c—50 D, 51 A,
Niachers, i. 28 B, 52 B, 187 D. 63 A B, 64 A—C ; with an accu
Norals, i. 105 A ; cardinal num- sative, ii. 52 A ; with two
ver's, 1–10, i. 253 c seqq.; accusatives, ii. 53 B.
11 -19, i. 256 A ; 20—90 (tens), Past tense of verbs of surprise,
i . 257 B ; 21—99 (compounded), i. 100 B.

i . 257 D ; 100—900 , i. 258 A ; Pause, forms of words in, ii. 368 c

1000 and upwards, i. 259 A ; seqq.; pausal forms out of
co pounded, i. 259 D ; ordinals, pause , in verse, ii. 390 A.
i . 260 A-262 A ; numeral ad- Perfect, i. 51 B ; its characteristic
Leibs, i. 262 B - D ; construction vowels in the first form , i.
of the numerals, ii. 234 c seqq.; 30 B-31 A ; passive, i. 63 a,
i'rrangement in composition, ii. 64 A B ; contracted forms, i .
239 A ; agreement of, i . 254 D ; 97 c ; ii. 384 c ; its significations,
ii . 240 A ; ordinals with the ii . 1 a ; as optative, ii. 2 D ; with
enitive, ii. 245 D—247 D.
is! or tó is, ii. 9c; with 3i,
Nuntion, i. 12 A, 235 B.
Object. See Accusative. ii.25 D ; with !, ii. 14 B; with
Oideal numbers with the genitive, is, ii. 3 c, 5 A; with us , ii.
ii . 245 D—247 D. 5 c ; with ‫ كان قد‬or• ‫قد كان‬,
Purtiiples, i. 52 B, 109 a , 131 B ii. 5c; with ‫تو تو أن لو‬
133 B ; of the derived conjuga
tions, i. 143 B ; of solid verbs,
‫لوله‬, ii. 6 B ; with ‫ما الديمومة‬
i. · 144 B ; of verba hèmzata, ii. 17 c ; expressed by the jus
i. 144 c ; of weak verbs, i. 144 D sive after and is, ii.22 D.
>

517 ; of quadriliteral verbs, Periodical times, i. 264 B.

1
i. 43 D ; passive participle as Permutation of verbs, ii. 287 A.
I ? “ , nen loci et temporis, and as Permutative, ii. 283 A, 284 D.
nazdar or infinitive, i. 129 B- Personal pronouns, i. 105 B ; the
130 A ; participles with the pronouns, i. 53 D seqq ., 100 D,
accusative or genitive, ii. 63 c ; 252 B.
448 Indexes.

Persons, i. 52 B. gative, i. 274 A seqq. ; indefinite,

Pluperfect Indicative, ii. 4c ; sub- i. 277 A ; personal, i. 105 B ;
junctive or potential, ii. 6 B. reflexive, î. 271 D ; relative,
Plural, i. 191 D ; sound or entire, i. 105 B, 270 B.
i. 191 D ; masculine, i. 192 A, Proper names, i. 107c ; diptote, i.
194 D ; feminine, i. 192 A, 242 c.
197 B ; broken , i. 192 A ; forms Proposition. See Clause and Sen
of the broken plural, i. 199 A-- tence .

233c ; secondary broken plurals, Prose, rhymed , ii. 351 B, 368 c.

i. 231 c ; anomalous broken Prosthetic I, in the imperative, i.
plurals, i. 233 B ; plurals of 19 c, 61 D ; omitted , i. 24 c ; in
abundance and paucity, i. 234 B. the derived conjugations of the
Points, diacritical, i. 4 A. verb, i. 19 D, 40 c, 41 D, 43 A,
Predicate, ii. 250 B seqq.; of is 44 A, 46 B.
and its “ sisters,” in the accu Quadriliteral verb, i. 47 B —49 C,
sative, ii. 99 A- 109 B. 67 D.

Prepositions, i. 278 D ; ii. 129 A ; Qualificative clause, ii. 283 A seqq.,

317 c.
separable, i. 280 B-282 A ; in
separable, i. 279 B ; simple, ii. Quasi-plurals, i. 224 D.
129 B- 188 c ; compound, ii. Reflexive pronouns, ii. 271 D.
129 B, 188 c ; with a propo Relative adjectives, i. 109 D, 149 C
sition as a genitive, ii. 192 B ; seqq . ; ii. 225 A.
separated from the genitive , ii. Relative clauses , i. 105 B ; ii. 317 B
191 A, 193 A ; ellipsis of, ii. seqq .
190 D ; y after a nomen ac- Relative pronouns, i. 105 B, 270 B.
tionis and a nomen agentis, ii. Restrictive sentences, ii. 335 B.
61 D, 68 c. Rhyme, ii. 350 A seqq. ; forms of
Pronominal suffixes in the accusa
words in, ii. 368 c seqq.
tive, i. 100 D ; double, i. 103 A ; Roots, secondary, from verbs of
in the genitive, i. 101 B , 252 B ; which the first radical is weak,
attached to a noun, i. 251 B ; i. 77 A, 81 A.
to a verb, i. 102 A-103 B. Scriptio defectiva of long ) and i,
i. 9 D- 10 B.
Pronouns, separate personal, i.
Secondary roots from verbs having
54 a ; suffixed, in the accusa
tive, i. 100 D ; in the genitive, ģ as first radical, i. 77 A ; from
i. 101 B , 252 B ; demonstrative, verbs having ,‫ و‬and is as first
i. 105 A, 264 D seqq. ; interro- radical, i. 81 A.
 III. English and Latin Technical Terms, etc. 449

sedda, i . 13 D. in poetry, ii. 387 A ; suppressed

Sentence, ii . 250 A ; adversative, in poetry, ii. 388 B ; used at
ii. 333 A ; compound, ii, 255 A- the end of a word instead of
256 D ; conditional, ii. 345 A ; the letter of prolongation, ii.
copulative, ii. 325 A seqq . ; ex 390 c .
ceptive , ii. 335 D ; hypothetical, Tèśdid, i. 13 D ; necessary , i.
ii . 347 B seqq. ; interrogative, 15 A ; euphonic , i. 15 B ; after
ii. 306 B seqq. ; local, ii. 252 D ; long vowels and diphthongs, i.
negative and prohibitive, ii. 15 B ; irregularly suppressed in
299 c seqq. ; nominal, ii. 251 A ; poetry, ii. 377 c ; irregularly
relative, ii. 317 B seqq. ; restric- used in poetry, ii. 377 D.
tive, ii. 335 B ; verbal, ii. 251 B. Third form of the verb, used in
Sila, i. 19 a. the sense of the fourth , i.
Solid verb , i. 68 B seqq . 34 A.
States (or Tenses) of the verb, .i. Trebly weak verbs, .i. 95 B.
51 B. Tribes, names of the Arab, how
Status constructus, i. 248 C construed, ii. 292 A, 296 c.
252 A ; ii. 198 A seqq. Triliteral verb, i. 29 A seqq.
Strong verbs, i. 52 D seqq. Triptote noun , i. 234 c.
Subject, ii. 250 B seqq. ; not speci- Triptotes for diptotes in poetry,
fied, ii. 266 D. ii . 387 A.
Subjunctive, i. 60 B ; ii. 22 c, 24 D. Verb, triliteral , i. 29 A ; forms of,
Substantive, used adjectivally, ii. i. 29 B seqq. ; quadriliteral, i.
274 A ; in apposition to a pro- 29 A ; formation of, i. 47 B ;
nominal suffix, ii. 285 A ; as forms of, i. 48 c seqq . ; the
hal, ii. 115 A. strong verb , i. 52 1–53 A ; the
Substantive verb, ii. 99 A, 258 B ; solid verb , i. 68 B ; un con

negative, i . 96 B ; ii. 302 A. tracted , i . 69 A ; ii . 378 B ; the

Suffixes , pronominal, accusative, weak verl), i . 52 1 ), 710—72 A ;
i. 100 D ; double, i. 103 A ; verba hèmzata , i. 72 B seqq. ;
genitive, i. 101 B, 252 B ; at verbs having ‫ و‬and US as first
tached to a noun , i. 251 B ; to radical, i. 78 A seqq. ; verbs
a verb, i . 102 A - 103 B. having ‫ و‬and US as middle
Sukūn , i. 13 A ; ii. 355 D. radical, i. 81 c seqq. ; inflected
Superlative, with the genitive, ii. as strong verbs, i. 86 D —87 D ;
218 A, 226 c. verbs having ‫و‬9 and us as third
Syllable, i. 26 CD. radical, i . 88 A ; their IX . and
Tenwin , i. 12 A, 235 B ; irregular, XI . forms, i. 43 c, 91 B ; doubly
W. II .
57
450 Indexes.

weak verbs, i. 91 d seqq.;trebly with the accusative or

weak , i. 95 A -- 96 B ; with suf 70 A.
fixes in the accusative, i. Verbal sentence, ii. 251 B.
102 A - 103 B ; substantive verb , Vocative, ii. 85 A.
ii. 99 A, 258 B ; negative, i. 96 B ; Voices, i. 49 C -51 A.
ii. 302 A ; aplastic verbs, ii. Vowels, short, i. 7c ; proniki
15 D ; verbs of the heart, ii. tion of, i. 8 B ; long, i. into
48 D ; verbs of praise and pronunciation of, i. 9 C ; vis
blame, i. 97 A ; ii. 290 A ; of defectively, i. 9D ; final , !..
surprise or wonder, i. 98 B ; affected by the waşl, i. 21
impersonal form of expression, Waşl, waşla, i. 19 A.
ii. 266 D - 271 c. Weak verbs, i. 52 D , 71c- 72
Verbal adjectives, i. 131 B seqq. ;

CAMBRIDGE : PRINTED BY J. & C. F. CLAY , AT THE UNIVERSITY PRESS .

 Date Loaned

Demco 292-5
 THE BURKE LIBRARY

5 0330 838

BK55
Wright , W. С34e
1896
AUTHOR
A grammar of the v.2
TArabic language
83569
DATE BOP
LOANED

83569
The Library
Union Theological Seminary
Broadway at 120th Street
New York 27, N. Y.